Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
C2022-272 - 12/20/2022 - Approved
DocuSign Envelope ID:56876BCC-1 FC3-4322-8498-07221 CBA076B so 0� "4 nF �a�° 1852 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and Fulton Coastcon General Contractors (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: Police Training Academy Proiect Number#21086 ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: Philip J. Ramirez 3751 South Alameda St. Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 philip@trarch.com 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Brett Van Hazel Assistant Director of Engineering 4917 Holly Rd. Bldg. 5, Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 brettvh@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within Four Hundred Ninety-Four (494) days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph Agreement 005223-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 7/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:56876BCC-1 FC3-4322-8498-07221 CBA076B 17.16 of the General Conditions within Five Hundred Twenty-Four(524) days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. C. Milestones, and the dates for completion of each, are as defined in Section 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof,Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay(but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner$400.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner $400.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid and Additive Alternat 1 Price $ 21,154,706.00 Agreement 005223-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 7/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:56876BCC-1 FC3-4322-8498-07221 CBA076B ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option,retainage may be increased to a higher percentage rate, not to exceed ten percent, if progress on the Project is considered to be unsatisfactory. If retainage in excess of the amount described above is held prior to Substantial Completion,the Owner will place the additional amount in an interest bearing account. Interest will be paid in accordance with Paragraph 6.01. E. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. Agreement 005223-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 7/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:56876BCC-1 FC3-4322-8498-07221 CBA076B ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Agreement 005223-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 7/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:56876BCC-1 FC3-4322-8498-07221 CBA076B Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractorthat without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice,the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records,books, correspondence, instructions,drawings, receipts,vouchers,memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. b. N A 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Solicitation documents and Contractor's response,which are incorporated by reference. 5. Addenda, which are incorporated by reference. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award,which is incorporated by reference. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement 005223-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 7/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:56876BCC-1 FC3-4322-8498-07221 CBA076B ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI DocuSigned by: DocuSigned by: 2/15/2023 2/14/2023 Rebecca Huerta Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E. City Secretary Director of Engineering Services Ord. 032953 AUTHORIZED 12-20-2022 APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL DocuSigned by: DS J�c-1 INU " 2/14/2023 r;/sb 909F96FOAR99443 Assistant City Attorney ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR DocuSigned by: E2/7/2023 EAA814A79EAF4AA... (Seal Below) By: Mike Lippincott Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: Vice President person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief 1102 2nd Street Financial Officer Address Corpus Christi, Texas 78404 City State Zip 361-993-5200 Phone Fax MLIP@fultonconst.com Email END OF SECTION Agreement 005223-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 7/2020 ou:uSignEnvelope ID:noaroeCC'1 21Cea076o BID FORM 100% RE-BID Documents Name: City of Corpus Christi- Police Training Academy Project Number: 21086 Owner: City of Corpus Christi OAR: Brett Van Flazel,Assistant Director of Engineering Turner I Ramirez Architects By its signature below, Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Bid Acknowledgement, acknowledges receipt of all Addenda to the Bid and agrees, if this Bid is accepted,to enter into a Contract with the Owner and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the Bid price. Bidder: Fultoni*Coastcon General Contractors -(full legal name of Bidder) Signature� N (signature of person with authority to bind the Bidder) Name; Mike Lippincott (printed name of person signing Bid Form) Title: Vice President (title of person signing Bid Form) Attest: (signature) State of Residency: Texas Federal Tx ID No. 1-74-2238716-1 Address for Notices: -1102 2nd Street, Corpus Christi, TX 78404 Phone: (361)993-5200 Email: MLIP@Fultonconst.com; RMellado@Fultonconst.com 1.,).A Gl��;' C.111 N Y .... .. ........... 11 Ims 7M=777im I I Bid Form Page 1ut 7 DocuSign Envelope ID:56876BCC-1 FC3-4322-8498-07221 CBA076B Report Created On: 11/16/22 9:11:33 PM BID TOTALS BASE BID Total Part A-GENERAL $1,614,102.00 Part B- CONCRETE $4,953,107.00 Part C- MASONRY $982,150.00 Part D- METALS $1,327,507.00 Part E-WOOD, PLASTIC,AND COMPOSITES $170,154.00 Part F-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION $1,307,154.00 Part G-OPENINGS $906,595.00 Part H- FINISHES $1,340,099.00 Part I-SPECIALTIES $373,480.00 Parti- FURNISHING $69,090.00 Part K-CONVEYING EQUIPMENT $120,241.00 Part L- FIRE SUPPRESSION $105,156.00 Part M- MEP $3,857,493.00 Part N-COMMUNICATIONS/ELECTRICA SAFETY AND SECURITY $523,097.00 Part O- EARTHWORK $402,708.00 Part P- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS $1,078,515.00 Part Q- UTI LITI ES $789,348.00 Total $19,919,996.00 ALTERNATE 1 Total Part R-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 1 - RUNNING TRACK $1,234,710.00 Total $1,234,710.00 ALTERNATE 2 Total Part S-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.2 -ON-SITE AUXILIARY POWER GENERATOR $358,880.00 Total $358,880.00 ALTERNATE 3 Total DocuSign Envelope ID:56876BCC-1 FC3-4322-8498-07221 CBA076B Report Created On: 11/16/22 9:11:33 PM Part T-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.3 -CERAMIC TILE ON WALL OF A116 MEN'S&A111 WOMEN'S $47,871.00 LOCKER ROOMS,A114 MEN'S&A113 WOMEN'S RESTROOMS,A115 MEN'S&A112 WOMEN'S SHOWERS,Al 18 UNISEX RESTROOM Total $47,871.00 ALTERNATE 4 Total Part U-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.4 - POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR AT CORRIDORS Al 00, B104, 13114 $32,687.00 & PROVIDE CERAMIC TILE FLOOR AT 13100 LOBBY Total $32,687.00 ALTERNATE 5 Total Part V-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 5 2X4 TECTUM CEILINGS AT B211 AUDITORIUM CLASSROOM $66,864.00 Total $66,864.00 ALTERNATE 6 Total Part W-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.6 -GLASS WALL DISPLAY AT 13100 MAIN LOBBY $3,697.00 Total $3,697.00 ALTERNATE 7 Total Part X-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.7 -ACCESS FLOORING AT B211 AUDITORIUM CLASSROOM & $78,849.00 SPANDREL GLASS AT LOWER WINDOW GLAZING Total $78,849.00 ALTERNATE 8 Total Part Y-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO. 8 ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILING AT 101 WEIGHT/EXERCISE ROOM $135,589.00 Total $135,589.00 ALLOWANCES Total Part Z-ALLOWANCES $865,000.00 Total $865,000.00 Part A- GENERAL No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price Al MOBILIZAION LS 1 $780,000.00 $780,000.00 DocuSign Envelope ID:56876BCC-1 FC3-4322-8498-07221 CBA076B Report Created On: 11/16/22 9:11:33 PM A2 BOND AND INSURANCE AL 1 $754,102.00 $754,102.00 A3 STORM WATER POLLUTION LS 1 $80,000.00 $80,000.00 PREVENTION Subtotal: $1,614,102.00 Part B-CONCRETE No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price B1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE LS 1 $2,907,736.00 $2,907,736.00 B2 CONCRETE FORMS AND LS 1 $1,988,913.00 $1,988,913.00 REINFORCEMENT B3 CONCRETE FINISHING AND CURING LS 1 $56,458.00 $56,458.00 Subtotal: $4,953,107.00 Part C- MASONRY No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price C1 UNIT MASONRY MORTAR AND LS 1 $982,150.00 $982,150.00 REINFORCING Subtotal:$982,150.00 Part D- METALS No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price D1 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND METAL LS 1 $1,014,042.00 $1,014,042.00 FRAMING D2 METAL FABRICATIONS LS 1 $12,173.00 $12,173.00 D3 METAL PAN STAIRS AND PIPE RAILINGS LS 1 $279,966.00 $279,966.00 D4 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS LS 1 $21,326.00 $21,326.00 Subtotal: $1,327,507.00 Part E-WOOD, PLASTIC,AND COMPOSITES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price E1 ROUGH CARPENTRY LS 1 $109,258.00 $109,258.00 E2 ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS LS 1 $50,293.00 $50,293.00 E3 PLASTIC PANELING LS 1 $10,603.00 $10,603.00 Subtotal:$170,154.00 DocuSign Envelope ID:56876BCC-1 FC3-4322-8498-07221 CBA076B Report Created On: 11/16/22 9:11:33 PM Part F-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price F1 WATERPROOFING AND COATINGS LS 1 $262,797.00 $262,797.00 F2 INSULATION LS 1 $117,731.00 $117,731.00 F3 METAL ROOF PANELS AND WALL LS 1 $356,419.00 $356,419.00 PANELS F4 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE(SBS) LS 1 $441,278.00 $441,278.00 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING F5 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND ROOF LS 1 $56,765.00 $56,765.00 ACCESSORIES F6 FIRESTOPPING LS 1 $16,396.00 $16,396.00 F7 EXPANSION JOINTS AND SEALANTS LS 1 $55,768.00 $55,768.00 Subtotal: $1,307,154.00 Part G-OPENINGS No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price G1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES LS 1 $68,996.00 $68,996.00 G2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS LS 1 $28,705.00 $28,705.00 G3 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES LS 1 $4,023.00 $4,023.00 G4 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS LS 1 $29,297.00 $29,297.00 G5 VAULT DOORS AND DAY GATES LS 1 $15,372.00 $15,372.00 G6 ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS ENTRANCES LS 1 $379,625.00 $379,625.00 AND CURTAIN WALLS G7 DOOR HARDWARE LS 1 $127,479.00 $127,479.00 G8 GLAZING LS 1 $253,098.00 $253,098.00 Subtotal:$906,595.00 Part H- FINISHES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price H1 GYPSUM AND NON-STRUCTURAL METAL LS 1 $524,890.00 $524,890.00 FRAMING H2 CERAMIC TILING LS 1 $83,655.00 $83,655.00 DocuSign Envelope ID:56876BCC-1 FC3-4322-8498-07221 CBA076B Report Created On: 11/16/22 9:11:33 PM H3 RESILIENT BASE AND TILE FLOORING LS 1 $75,096.00 $75,096.00 H4 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING LS 1 $70,390.00 $70,390.00 H5 EPDXY RESINOUS FLOORING LS 1 $48,616.00 $48,616.00 H6 TILE CARPENTING LS 1 $56,513.00 $56,513.00 H7 ACCESS FLOORING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 H8 SOUND-ABSORBING CEILING WOOD- LS 1 $75,551.00 $75,551.00 FIBER UNITS H9 PAINTING AND HIGH-PERFORMANCE LS 1 $405,388.00 $405,388.00 COATING Subtotal: $1,340,099.00 Part I-SPECIALTIES No, Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price 11 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS LS 1 $10,879.00 $10,879.00 12 PLAQUES, DIMENSIONAL LETTERS AND LS 1 $24,016.00 $24,016.00 ROOM-IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE 13 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS LS 1 $29,661.00 $29,661.00 14 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS LS 1 $7,597.00 $7,597.00 15 VERTICALLY RETRACTABLE ACOUSTIC LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 PARTITIONS 16 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION LS 1 $6,812.00 $6,812.00 17 TOILET, BATH,AND LAUNDRY LS 1 $31,721.00 $31,721.00 ACCESSORIES 18 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS AND LS 1 $4,083.00 $4,083.00 EXTINGUISHERS 19 PLASTIC LOCKERS LS 1 $38,997.00 $38,997.00 110 EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES AND LS 1 $212,159.00 $212,159.00 ALUMINUM PROTECTIVE COVERS 111 GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES LS 1 $7,555.00 $7,555.00 Subtotal:$373,480.00 Part J- FURNISHING No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price J1 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES LS 1 $41,467.00 $41,467.00 DocuSign Envelope ID:56876BCC-1 FC3-4322-8498-07221 CBA076B Report Created On: 11/16/22 9:11:33 PM J2 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS LS 1 $21,611.00 $21,611.00 J3 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES LS 1 $6,012.00 $6,012.00 Subtotal: $69,090.00 Part K-CONVEYING EQUIPMENT No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price K1 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS LS 1 $120,241.00 $120,241.00 Subtotal:$120,241.00 Part L- FIRE SUPPRESSION No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price L1 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS LS 1 $105,156.00 $105,156.00 Subtotal:$105,156.00 Part M- MEP No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price M1 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT LS 1 $610,979.00 $610,979.00 M2 CHILLED WATER PIPING LS 1 $401,568.00 $401,568.00 M3 DUCTWORK LS 1 $387,276.00 $387,276.00 M4 CONTROLS LS 1 $261,259.00 $261,259.00 M5 ELECTRICAL SWITCHGEAR/PANELS LS 1 $100,403.00 $100,403.00 M6 LIGHT FIXTURES LS 1 $490,152.00 $490,152.00 M7 GENERAL GROUNDING/BONDING LS 1 $26,234.00 $26,234.00 M8 LIGHTING PROTECTION SYSTEM LS 1 $38,258.00 $38,258.00 M9 SITE/UTILITY DUCT AND RACEWAYS LS 1 $309,912.00 $309,912.00 M10 BUILDING RACEWAYS/CIRCUITRY LS 1 $509,948.00 $509,948.00 M11 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT/FIXTURES LS 1 $240,842.00 $240,842.00 M12 DWWWATER PIPING LS 1 $442,702.00 $442,702.00 M13 NATURAL GAS PIPING LS 1 $37,960.00 $37,960.00 Subtotal: $3,857,493.00 Part N-COMMUNICATIONS/ELECTRICA SAFETY AND SECURITY DocuSign Envelope ID:56876BCC-1 FC3-4322-8498-07221 CBA076B Report Created On: 11/16/22 9:11:33 PM No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price N1 GROUNDING AND BONDING LS 1 $52,469.00 $52,469.00 N2 UNDERGROUND DUCT AND RACEWAYS LS 1 $78,703.00 $78,703.00 N3 BACKBONE AND HORIZONTAL CABLING LS 1 $100,426.00 $100,426.00 N4 AUDIO VISUAL INFRASTRUCTURE LS 1 $17,722.00 $17,722.00 N5 ELECTRONIC SECURITY,ACCESS LS 1 $52,227.00 $52,227.00 CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION N6 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE LS 1 $110,664.00 $110,664.00 N7 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM LS 1 $110,886.00 $110,886.00 Subtotal:$523,097.00 Part O- EARTHWORK No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price 01 SOILS FOR EARTHWORK LS 1 $43,287.00 $43,287.00 02 SITE EXCAVATION AND FILL LS 1 $108,217.00 $108,217.00 03 ROUGH AND SITE GRADING LS 1 $22,365.00 $22,365.00 04 TERMITE CONTROL LS 1 $10,602.00 $10,602.00 05 CLEARING, GRUBBING AND STRIPPING LS 1 $108,217.00 $108,217.00 06 LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE LS 1 $110,020.00 $110,020.00 Subtotal:$402,708.00 Part P- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price P1 CONCRETE PAVEMENT,CURB, GUTTER, LS 1 $682,186.00 $682,186.00 VALLEY GUTTER, SIDEWALK, DRIVEWAYS AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS P2 DECORATIVE METAL FENCE AND GATES LS 1 $117,915.00 $117,915.00 P3 UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS, COMMON LS 1 $278,414.00 $278,414.00 PLANTING REQUIREMENTS, SOIL PREPARATION, SODDING AND PLANTS Subtotal: $1,078,515.00 Part Q- UTILITIES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price DocuSign Envelope ID:56876BCC-1 FC3-4322-8498-07221 CBA076B Report Created On: 11/16/22 9:11:33 PM Q1 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE LS 1 $363,702.00 $363,702.00 Q2 WATERLINES, PVC PIPES, DUCTILE IRON LS 1 $54,245.00 $54,245.00 PIPE AND FITTINGS Q3 WATERLINE RISER ASSEMBLIES AND LS 1 $34,916.00 $34,916.00 GATE VALVES Q4 FIRE HYDRANTS LS 1 $10,332.00 $10,332.00 Q5 GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER AND CATCH LS 1 $326,153.00 $326,153.00 BASINS Subtotal:$789,348.00 Part R-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.1 -RUNNING TRACK No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price R1 SITE WORK LS 1 $36,920.00 $36,920.00 R2 SUBGRADE LS 1 $244,150.00 $244,150.00 R3 CONCRETE LS 1 $57,700.00 $57,700.00 R4 CONCRETE MISCELLANEOUS LS 1 $462,000.00 $462,000.00 R5 FIELD DRAINAGE SYSTEM LS 1 $25,327.00 $25,327.00 R6 TRACK ASPHALT&BASE LS 1 $167,000.00 $167,000.00 R7 SYNTHETIC RUNNING TRACK SURFACE LS 1 $241,613.00 $241,613.00 Subtotal: $1,234,710.00 Part S-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.2 -ON-SITE AUXILIARY POWER GENERATOR No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price S1 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH LS 1 $40,680.00 $40,680.00 S2 NATURAL GAS FUELED STAND-BY LS 1 $318,200.00 $318,200.00 GENERATOR Subtotal:$358,880.00 Part T-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.3 -CERAMIC TILE ON WALL OF A116 MEN'S&A111 WOMEN'S LOCKER ROOMS,A114 MEN'S&A113 WOMEN'S RESTROOMS,A115 MEN'S&A112 WOMEN'S SHOWERS,A118 UNISEX RESTROOM No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price T1 CERAMIC TILES LS 1 $47,871.00 $47,871.00 DocuSign Envelope ID:56876BCC-1 FC3-4322-8498-07221 CBA076B Report Created On: 11/16/22 9:11:33 PM Subtotal: $47,871.00 Part U-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.4 -POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR AT CORRIDORS A100, B104, B114&PROVIDE CERAMIC TILE FLOOR AT B100 LOBBY No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price U1 POLISHED CONCRETE LS 1 $12,117.00 $12,117.00 U2 CERAMIC TILES LS 1 $20,570.00 $20,570.00 Subtotal: $32,687.00 Part V-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.S -2X4 TECTUM CEILINGS AT B211 AUDITORIUM CLASSROOM No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price V1 TECTUM CEILINGS LS 1 $66,864.00 $66,864.00 Subtotal: $66,864.00 Part W-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.6 -GLASS WALL DISPLAY AT B100 MAIN LOBBY No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price W1 GLASS WALL DISPLAY LS 1 $3,697.00 $3,697.00 Subtotal:$3,697.00 Part X-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.7 -ACCESS FLOORING AT B211 AUDITORIUM CLASSROOM &SPANDREL GLASS AT LOWER WINDOW GLAZING No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price X1 ACCESS FLOORING LS 1 $70,026.00 $70,026.00 X2 SPANDREL GLASS LS 1 $8,823.00 $8,823.00 Subtotal: $78,849.00 Part Y-ADDITIVE ALTERNATE NO.8 ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILING AT 101 WEIGHT/EXERCISE ROOM No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price Y1 ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILING LS 1 $135,589.00 $135,589.00 Subtotal:$135,589.00 DocuSign Envelope ID_56876BCC-1 FC3-4322-8498-07221 CBA076B Report Created On: 11/16/22 9:11:33 PM Part Z-ALLOWANCES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price Z1 ALLOWANCE FOR UNFORESEEN AL 1 $825,000.00 $825,000.00 BUILDING CONDITIONS DURING CONTRUCTION Z2 HVAC T&B ALLOWANCE AL 1 $30,000.00 $30,000.00 Z3 INTERIOR GRAPHICS ALLOWANCE AL 1 $10,000.00 $10,000.00 Subtotal:$865,000.00 cr i 2, saainlag 8uu90ui6u310 juawuedea a3AOO N kri t�, d 5iJ311H3a'V SHX3L � `� 00� . aisiaeosndaoa3oud 3awva a3NnazIlslaH�sndao��o u� AN30VOV ONINIV1 Ji 30Md w o (n � CL NOIld18053t1 19 31V0 /11111131 N011ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON N1115143tl w F Z a r W �h e z a 9 p p d x _ +� Hwy W z a v g s -1 0 o NSW W z NR o �. �- ° o Z z z W N o z J w w W 5 U i 4^ O w V w LU v wz w o # _ 'p z z _�� o a z a a H � V t=m 3 3 �0 � L) z RQ-, o ���. LL o LU W a g O J -j w o U ~Q LU nil W Ln w w a U CO 2 Q Q g i ��....JJ 0 U) LJJ f O —LLZ Q p cr- EL LL co ado U o a b!ry u Q s a zf 0 } cd3 a '� f— W U w 0 _ - _71 a 06 Ja C„ o^rbNO G by w m ---._.._.._ m/ V 4e 0 O Q O ¢ w � a cr 5 2, SKIARS 8uuaaui6u310 juawpedea w s`a o X34NI JNIMF21aA� — C SVX31n11 �Inn 00 OsIaHJ sndaoJ Y�/LLIJaislaeo sndaoa 3o AtYJ)z38MV8 I a3Nanl - - AN30VOV JNINIVf Ji 30Md R COs3aCL A9 31V0 OPYNOI1113a NOI1ma�,S9(1 4. lwOw�� 1'�Yg� u�Wgkg ' � 'gig 1l ass`aaa psi w �� �7� u•: egg gY ggk'4 Y4 t 51TZ gkg r in JrF'} F SFW K S. S G4 �` - .a r'rr'r rte ee' s ;3i 33rd E4 G4 Er.ge - 9 9 d�3SS: - g� Pffff G R44 £ : £ d .... tf.� .. 7.2z .u:is ✓.,,U�.,..... wwww 62¢52¢52¢52¢522¢5 ����,SY•.��F�_"__ Y,-==�r��,6K.:Y�� e".`E�`G ,._`�__ _'`___'`_`'` `� S�,%JJW�'M Yu'Se KI k3JG_` ____� ��. J 1 J G is K 3 4:6;444: 4F� b 1 1 kggg4 KY'3: 2 YA,YYY hY'Y, fir• }b} 6 t I g ;fir`dI,w .,'R s„'S; ¢1Ju W5u 50-Gzx":;s T,:, ...LwaI:J:2�$a`�,w SO.h✓'.f mb:"..;: 8,%r, cr 5 2, sa�in�ag 8uuaaui6u3�o ivawUedap w s`a o S1da30X3 Z60Z SVl N o MEMO `� 0w 000, . a n 11S18H3 Snda0010 W0 oisiatiosndao aoui i ve a _ z3aiwva l a3Nani� 1� .. AN30VOV JNINIVA 10n0d s s o Co a NOIld180530 19 31V0 OP4No6— -Iditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON N6115143tl n iIy �r F t gxtl n" 1g,-o a ter w 1 1v`t K e 'tta z rat tr as NJ y a ^y,tya t a ,a tst 4t z. _ +t rz+ Fa @ attaat r4,t a > a M! H. ea - Iw H " T e Pa tt�' t' § Pr a�vzztna r�u r a y}wt 9 v a t ar air o o- t +a a tr vlullr - r�. ttt a, t a11; �T t. h a 1 - A e t ryppry�pp Ipggpp�(pppp(� �' IIII7IIII, ,IIII(IIII N m * J H G Y P I...... ^ � 4 3 _ NiSp' k 4 d$ F s } Y x l W E y'l F r �� M s�.� _� �ani ,i �., NIlao.r _ e �pt u w " t t y n ,�.,+ R t mF ,�; ww an �`� '� t, ,a '� a � � a � Hism &I 6 w a a re># P rr re r t / bf t NO—! = r ta' t t d a t ¢a m r to a t 8 1 t a a t w P a 2 o- wa�at ul t o as a s a a za a. PI as 4 e 5 a a ffi k w w r zr w as 8I G u P:a u* rF 7t I a* v a a t ar 'trvax -e as t' z, t at�,� av3 xt�t�z s,�ay¢ .�t t . aaa CSC. s ;HP urt a s u u d� 1 t 'f a$ tzs s .a vwar 0 t o i Yy w 5 rt /� z a Awt( §ayr,.a kz"i."r as zI as cz ra 5 n dsa a rat r)t a �15d" ta, tzar HIM- a r z � AA rr�a6 a-tt `ate' a a d.. t c;IN,t .,,., a[a w. ,r - `� �.4au -10 N ry �ry zw rt a � t a a e ' tt. a at� r r'a .. " 1 6 >A 9 - sr a I h t v ar€ z rlx z t t if G a via! "' a P NOW. � §a a � t I¢t a r e a t' to r Run z�,rt a Y �a a' H"I A -.. .¢ a a ra:aw za t � r as IN ,° �I t- t $ 4^u 1 x 5 HIM HUH pI as �i g1 kgs r� a � � u 6a as §€ t u a u +d 't m +t l ayuv3 asa xz F" t€ � r a yu e d s ut as z p „ r �' � � A F. n K, r 0 t I 't 1 ° ,�aa;rz f „� y N,€xsu y €:rz tzu a i:a t a,y Iti IBM in"" e; r HIM v+ a si tyb 6iNo a+ v tt T to :t v a u rR ha a g IN— Hill w t .. z Nr a onnu as z ry2a«z Vt-u $ a taa^�xv 8 G a J"a �' 4 a s aat €. } 5 Y kiw v z y t awz-.. ,a 't a as pa€ azaaa rzaau rtttaz ap r �`�..nat''ea,I° as:,a 4a' u '. r , as a a- m ast. a aw i=Hc as L<� I. w :" erg t ..a ..K ,.tt �',� a sib ,., .o. w L w v' ...; y , z art° a � to mn a z 3 °taFza a''5a1, wP aa.... tt 1 n� Ia,aY o•� w its 1 n � 1a� 1 5s 1aa ht ta tcW'IiP 1 Id tp r h d r a tit - a sz.aa films r� nnE a�s z,A uVa5taqa��� a m,:Aua a za tr�mtptb,�atrkutat at wzuaa tga,a^ata ��k,r"ar�'�dxP^rs•-br��aputtt4tsxuta 5t'a¢,"o�znat�;a;�thar�atta��4pi'u@aa a m�eaat,'yKst'tt a ty�aag'zz �+€ehz€zaht.o"t,tatN 5!a��hkaIHthfr'auq 1ht r.X W )WILs ; a a rr aau Hust ib" PH"t kaa 1 1 "1 t wut�zaatf��ha`w;�11 werazeat' Fazrwa � a t tan t St ions a !Mimi— a tp ,U 5 1 lullq t a 1 iat {" a r aua § r t at, z r t a;fittK$zi';. ¢i. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. cr 5 2, sa�in�ag 8uuaaui6u3�o}uawUedap S1da3OX3 Z60Z Syl N o O C,4 SHX31 `� 00 . a n IlslaHO sndHOO 10 ALIO oisiaFiosndao oui ea o a a o � z3aiwva 83Nanl C�w 1� .. AN30VOV ONINIVA 3OnOd s s o Co a aoiidiaosaa ne siva ora Noisyn3a aoum—a ne siva oe` e a c ail , P Hr;m't " d r "' �'�rt uiN uu z€s' ti• `<s gyp` �a �. i; K S Y k, 3 ,�,. $'S 1 i k'd %. t 4J K 6 k h# � y '� H I H N u� a sMI 11 I k 6[, 5 m .f o [ rskB it t E .� tt ry yffi 9 �. MIAMI �: fr ?� s ^a wa �Au S 3„' vA, Rev. at v. �x € nA h to E reu x trere� Pr ' rt Fre K s �. �� _ xre a w Ais- h rt n rre uMd u 1 wa kIm xrxkre: 1ju 1G tff res' Ire.AUS : ari; 1A11�, "- A ' N 1 baa � m x . I a I I I I ;, w,x u ,� z u i x� were. a �a�� G v 7w, € h E � 4 ��v3. a 5�� 1 a " I I G r # to xvuuuu �r m k fi;a' € ' F a ,�, ' r A � i Mtn ,r � � � J � �g rs m,� � ''r� ks� gc' a m��o-y �� � r¢ s� r' w rr v :F � Ill it �: \ pw All n k �kuu fiy� -e F K� 1+A �� 6 HUH A Sx� re UP'reN �� w Ifs ]J 4 i fip r3 t. rd W ;Y '*IIIIIIF I } s p ti .ass�aeo F a s g w g .... � m.nr uHurl p fPH 1 his a� � � MI w�r� ��� r� �e� �r �� � a ri nun a �, a Gff� u t Hn u re ma < a vkuG� ar x p '1 i '...'... d a m WA I J ra At "d }( wsau C•a. a � w;re� wr US Iv to H- His 1H � � a ✓ Pt re b o- too,wwttoo, n� � r A�,� t MEMO p +� w� w0 TRAM, � a y ��j�.� t� N� }� � L }�z �u�u+���i�r� �"����€ _,�..� �W� wrx 6f 6f�� k Are~ iu `r. I�L.� �w -I;�; A; ; �. a f I uI."u,'",' ry if r�„ � r ,' Vim u u J a 2 3 Ho w aR a ; Fad "Az ' � w .... r� v u A 4 nue c P � A q Will re a, qq k p m w �Hn -__- u\\ Hai � + ..... n r„ a"!ia p shy 5 A ➢I , k v 3 S IARS 6uu90ui6u310 juawpedea SNOliVIA3dggV ONV MOMSA� — z NCT S bye o SVX31 a° 0 3 i H a v IlSIaHJ Sfld�lOJ 1 UlJ Q Ol$IlIFq Slldl10030 AtYJ) : ° Z32 MVM 1213N21f11 N30VOV ONINIV1 Ji d0MdNolldl—M A9 31V0 11111111131 N011ditl^.,5K = 4 E v gm a gw Vz ZZ � .,�� w o �J �} } m uj bN c3'W - m uj V GSr o Qc T 200 5Cvl yp w�a 4 ri W`tj� u.arw U G .. g v 3 z ��ac H`urrrmm�-a� d� cmd v 4 aw g8s o 3 �o c12 aa 0.00� 00 �������afaf, a ���������� m�mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm rrrrrrz » z 0 a w - m r z Ns � 4. .�T��� �i�i`� 1p tdw�w ov. J �- a94=9a9� M3 9�I�ac`�ccg: 9199s 2,921�9w 36o N IT a Www LL LL 55« f 22"C:� Js3a < < r2, s EH § 6 ul w mr. wyr `��' ��sx ;uw X33 d6z vo` w�ru woso . rG000a 1�oc32.: .ria' d ¢¢cwi IwwKKVK¢RI- �m mmmmmmmmmmmmmm VVVV �V VV VVV�Vdb�V�V�V�V�VVVV6V�V�V VV c'i000wooc�ry c�rva ul ulw w wwww'w�w'w`wtwww mmmmmmmmm.mmmm VVVVVVVci ciVVVVVVci cg cg cg��VVV�i Citi tic�ri ri�i r��3��ti�G5bdd6 r6 Qcr wulwwwww�w�w'w wwww S IARS 8uu90ui6u310 juawpedea S310N 0f115 IVi3N-S3d.11 IIVA� — ? SVX313 i HavIlSIaHJ Sf1da001 A110 Q Ol$IlIFq Slldl10030 AtYJ)z38MV8 I a3Nanl N30VOV JNINIV1 Ji 30MdNolldl—M A9 31V0 OPYNOI11131 N011ditl^.,5K x g 5 E F ujz " i FY O IL 5Y"rA � }: �r� � i r R �i ayy Wrac d �gr y .e n 4 ": v1F sa rxv �" v aca 9 r 7a 28rrgyLU m m � � sg;°�� w d t iwi d+ciN i nodl a 'N i.�aa irro id!.m WO F / 2 O O z U _..... ... w uj uJ. = uj 3 W. a U- MOP wd 5E� z w � w w a FF r fir. W;. — o 0 saoinlag 8uu90ui6u3 10 juawUedap .IaNOSMW R San1S w13W-53dAi A� — uj J3 11H�`a'V ` SVX31 m IISIHH3 sndHOO 10 aO o siHHDsndaOD3OAl � z38 HV8 I a3Nani AW30VOV ONINIV2i13OI�OdCL Nolldl—M A9 31V0 11111111131 N011dla^.,5K Nlw Q r, y 9 I f W S JAu}:� n � Q r/ 1 � w LL i� u V ............ 1 d i -6 1 1 a 1i 1 ff I w.v4 lif I 1i >� , --------------- 1 ...... .. ..`...` j j f Y' si � r� 1 J v a � ii LL L1 Li f3C 1 q a W" P 's. n u H. I d 3 g r a x I r t t i S! a s W T K w d _.. f .. AL Y J � s - J1 � s I �aad r J ..T..... z U '/"��/AYINVWYVV� v na, Y s z ........ ................ r 1.; ..,....,E J i.... x d t � F Y S901ARS 8uu90ui6u310 wawpedea A21NOSt1W-S3d.11 llF/M cli NCT S bye o SVX31 00 a `3 i o 3 i I H a a v IlSIHH3 sndHOO 1 aO Qo Q Ol$IlIFq Slldl10030 AtYJ) zaiwva I a3Nanl� 1W30VOV ONINIV1 Ji 30Md w o CO � CL Nolldla M A8 31V0 11111111131 N06ditl^.,530 A8 3lVRl ON N61Is43a pfd TS 9 Tl � x 4 Y b7 z mi • � w ..... k s # U g b H. f t m$ a 5 d m 3 d &I e " 41 I ..... ,y 3 .. ®4 f d v a-! -& A � � vtl •, c, 5 • � 'ci J © .. .,o.��`EW v 6 Uv'w a U r It s � n ........... ------------- �W F fl bl 4 M G 1 e e $� Y J v Cl"",L6D L T. S c*Gx,2, saainlag 6uuaaui6u��o�uawUadapN w r sa, o S310NWb3N39 No V a n � SVX31 0(0�,5iJ3iiHoav � I1SIHHD Snd80010 aO oaonaoM.) cnm< o 1� .. kN30VOV JNINIV2Ji 30Md Nolldla K A8 31V0 1-131 N011ditl^.,530 A8 3lVRl ON N61Is43a to IMH i rs Y,at� �, w3�6� d R rt mgr a c"€ t F a gn , :INN using IHHH ass € gg fs € is g € a gvia,u ®✓ � n a � '�g,d g - 4g '3- �tg I N € t9 rgg t Wil z s� a " a 1 z a z n s� a " l g1 a w t MIT stat i #a Wall O e 6 r u. c;€a� e al Ing �Y�adi � , s "'t::€ � e fr y,`' A � v� t va €rr, ZZ n g s U€ - gr H a €n �5 � N s IW- '� `^'s m Y rH £ .:� ' € J ' ?1 a1 �'9 O a & �r n SIR t p€ e .e r 9 $ ra i'. n H a WE z a ��z; r � "p�' G 2 f€ € `� n t� g'-TE y,�F "� "a H w Z `% € Hs � € � � y F, sam fa��$ � �s�€ wa v J � a 2 5, w r "Nomt H t ¢ ; 1HA ago gg a .a r ww ' ga s z a aye 1 UI INS Hu" � � �r 1H F� s �a� a r �Y &�'ac AR EAU rt�t 1 .sr t�� $gs € �.2� � �xz`t € 1 `t� €'gip€ f €a g 3,,, 513`a fry C7 r s a 3 a q x J sn s ` Ya ff as fi dig s € n g } u sa gLL a af,aw a €�w awLL€ as mks a 161not V 4 o...... o' Y 2 Y1d € g- `� k' J € 2" k' fts s P WE Dit.d d � € gup w" � aag€3� ���a �� i � � � � you €t�N� �¢g H ��H 1 1G zp a¢ 4p _s � G HN z o t 1102ON � �g .� x � 1 if ru€ "'� 1a��h z 4 4 $ a f s € € g5' W21 w C9 %T"if d p k's �fI Ha �� .G dtto �.a $ a G �� P z 3. a® 6 9 Wj rsa Sfi HwgEll �1f3 Ann6 a:`. €� - S-50 Q o h s € $ lH.pIT c of xs $3 I is F _ € d a gs� $ a� p. a at a®� �g H €€ t e ly s gnu € a .� of gy, r m is y l Se' n gn � A Hs �' O Ys W =a in ,y Y g e'Y1 .ys If N S a H b' :� gs � � �� n rd� ���d� Mill A. Vit.,. f m = a 41 '� 1- t t 3 Y'� 7" 3 - a.y Y ��1I S Qf e' r t � ��� uf O w gg 5 N s a z jy nj mu g s IS Q fr t main y.&fie' 5, y3 t z z 5H 6 s ", 2 aza ma HEM of ao s o € a � out U �r p d qu a s p 4$ z rg€g "�i rs a Y.� � cgs 5`15J .t .ass a �: lug,, �€ Y k '� Ja d w� Y1 W g wG,� w S f 3 !s .E t n .J F z H $ P c9 a sa LL� � fr g a s �€ W �a a �, 4 4 k'• o 2 �.W a�3 �n g mga w U' 4 $ $ my= t f r g z �x � a t? ao ,.7e 4 $ as df aF €: �k as a rg �fr1t Is s�af €a ��mrf#� $t, 11 A, u N. sun! o�d,. fix A ¢ wd A��� its w< HIM 1 < 1 A, N. Ulto UP j" Hnh 16 son 9 19 b As ws o 2 �� ¢� a = d �, 5 - 5 u YsNRz a5 In Wz a Qz 4ew k � s � `S 0`S Hsu �Imn $ G a' ,� €Q. w ' og .. w 5 4EJ gun H1 W ps to! OnI cc Poulin an "IR to in Hm H Me 61 qj! gly 10 to 5HUT V: Hown SH gin MIT IS RM to all "S R RDso 'now w , SwF d MIN g } fu to ..4 4 ¢ dd �u $ w Q LU N! �� 5 a g 5�. �b t5 8 H S a d U 4 "Us 1 Way H H �w .�� p� R4 w p €€w � ? 4 'wys sww2 g= `$ € a, g =d HHRH! a may G z B f' VE a I V °� ov �'nut 3 dt'3 3. j & �$ .µ 11 r C, �g 3 imp �b = J l Win S3�k' MA no to Mo 4O� g d '.$HO Kof 4 .d `$ z lostIP HSI wQ 4 sa a a WOR ON �� fTway; �E s�� 4 a a 4 �$ d€ �4�0 � . 6 Ho mH E s s� �aa� e_< ��a.. �ao, ���a��o a1 ! R! M Pao, H mI1H -a< dues ;U NY M, <ur �s oLLo�LLr��� ��°< �w�m! a<� s48� o1m, R o 0 S $ 5 £p = Q o ps to 19 DJ p 0 LLw wg n . s $ a o z w ' e Ew 1 p o 2 On mW 5 d 4 z o w =w as n `€o ao_ cr 5 2, sa�in�ag 8uuaaui6u3�o�uawUedap w sb+ o NOIlVWbOdNI 3400 N o P wo �H yp 5 i�3 i IH oav SVX31 00, . .` 11S18HO Snda0010 u10 a emHosndao M.) a z38MV8 I 83Nani _ CD w = =a AN30VOV JNINIVN1 INNCo �vYs3a sf" Co K _ aoiidiaosaa ne siva ora nlolstn3a aoum—a ne siva oe` f u; w m YY z w ax xx a w w R - z R p r ❑ o 4 x y U EV F x m a cW7 y 5 wto Mil z o w N K ❑ w z i` O .. aa y Z �I r '� W E9 ❑ s� O ��2 !! � Fe: d t.' K J p W `� J ❑❑ ❑ �9 w V lW t Zh rt W J = JS al d. €ppg "a'^, O A `V' .1' P I F I�' W F 4 p IZL S I I k w x Ras O w � wa � W r7 cl �p ass L y C7 ❑ C7 C7 � � ;� 5� r �, ❑❑ " ,� s fe w� �� Q Mf 1 O ❑ O ❑❑ O ❑ ❑ ❑❑ q d �'.r C7 f7 s � S x � � C7 2 Cl CI I7 u Cl '�❑C7 Ll � u � S �'� "° � 3 �'"I f r �,�, � � � ,, a❑❑ r F 1 ❑Ll �� him z N ❑❑❑o ❑ w 8 ❑❑❑❑ ❑ w 1 tHUN -3 � s41 � `" �s� � s »� ❑ WIN u o ❑o o f r ❑ ❑❑ ❑ v n o n 3 N' UN WI SK o� Y is Cl€uC7L1❑C�1 .3 CI L7 CI L1 f..ICI LI CI L7 CI X15 L1 CI L1O Cl $ 3f3 j 5 ❑❑ � '4s� f j U C1 aFv nv u ss � & � �a � as s � ��m�g�� z = ����gz� a�� s �❑❑❑❑cluc�r❑❑uc7❑ ❑ ❑❑❑❑� d �❑ s� w W goal: r ° w F E iS Sf 3 l k v tl � S P d r: &" ff �' jWIN Id 111111c z ass z > sHIRs �� lista y [5 w� ,d x! m� s 3 m 3 3 3� Ear d p " � 9 1 g,2U � � � �:�a s I, � f3aaar 0 E � i ii I I 1 wou I ill M HER! WN !NH9 x. H S / in 010111 x10 - NN it e, r Nicol ll Pd e } N lip s 2 a� m ll ° a� �a � � a �:_ � a� d x �� x a eve � ,;e �r e t �, �x z a y } v far °'k. O w a , �J 4 v r 1 a v F OG 3 0 a tv� ri&' `-'�u `a1 5 w eV % 1r - h Iry w a o a r' axe e� j® dm r� � x gel a' ~O X m gK `�' &d 0' M. F ?v ? tlrL 51 rm Ld 5 11 �, C, GV' z u �� ave 3 I a 3 `� s r `� a ix x , � s � �' nM 5m'. ¢ � f r a to 1 � u 8} �dY ��, d`� � �� �o U Lt w k L �P z e�v�' -..1 a key a e.o �,,bg,� If �..�vs Y 1 a cr i 2, STARS 8uu90ui6u310 juawpedap NV]d 3000 N ��n� SVX31 CV o W r "s i J 3 i i H`o a v I1SIHH`J SndHOO 1 aO "N m I O 0l$IlIH0 Slldl10030 AtYJ) z38MV8 I a3Nanl __ C>w = a ` ' AN30VOH ONINIVf Ji 30Md R CO �vYs3a N0I1d180530 19 31V0 011111131 N06ditl^.,530 A8 3lVRl ON N611s43a <S s M .�© �v dae �' ar �, e� •: a e o 3 �U app �p �, K W 16 v m r. a 8s U> _� w aCNr� �ff o x U C7 CL co j a o � . . d- ll _� gr uj wwk � o 0, N i Z18. su 17 07, �o o w o F 0 0 s 1 N ✓ x h:. ww � * saa1NaS 6aaul6ua 10 luawpedea s3naw3sse�n � NN o � 5iJiiiH3aV SVX31n11 �Inn 00� . 11S1tiHJ snda0a Yo/LL1J OusiHHD snd6OD 3o Ald CV 5 z3alwva a3Nani 1w30VOV ONINIVf Ji 301iOd o m a ¢ h m vYsSsa 6rv" CL v = Nolldla M A8 31V0 111,1111131 N06dla^.,530 A8 3lVRl ON N61Is43a 14 w 2 W y ? � s ag&�i _3s -g�g rn d Or O8 g°.sk & g kk� -& €g S& G O' z 8g £ffi k� �g4g �4C Gw s za; — 3Y8: zs sp s k Egg gso z , o � � gg k m< 9t a € w% fw 1 t° h -g suj gggsa k€ "gtt t x € $ g 1 r� 'w cr en« Wa gi g k € a :QT* W € gg O 1AasOcr 9astt k '€' 'sg egg s a h gra s. « c gigi 4"El Ykg m � r€'x<m" I,eS V 6 :�$� ala? �a r._ 'ga.<gmk"< .aga mg ��as x a�ffi $g $» gtt y g� e`sg � 22 ag g@ x $A g 1H F- t &g gkg UJ J-1 ce €E a $^ Ai Q _ k goo ; 8k sg. e ,�xw ^ .21 r« grp V E�W5 % e gel 'gS�Lg -}y y' , ' d x kE a k o « z k'O � - € exs € $m '€ - z O - gg. �� I»g�gaa ae & �'F= - �g �g_ k�E� «s �a�@ �g � s� - c� F= � $ggg ga f� ( r I sgygs g Begg $3 gE s .N xkg.sa ge u z H sgsk� E s C°j w a s g} $8sss9 « �sg H xe a « sgs3ggg.. 3a a ;�_ . 6 � 4 « s 3 O 1.gig = x ig x « ;. s a V69�gw.s � E `s _ �s k4 gg yap ke8 w b0 1o101_".01.1. 11 k g.sc s�: aaaz a� x C kgS 8 .. k. ffi`S'F $ 8q 6 gE�s O ase 5z � :» a ease tet .£.£ �k� a� sss ^a - . o - w m �: s g.g kg tt� .€ .. k $k s sj, Fr!! tt LLa& �g ia§;h# $ ���s9s9� sig g q tt g ttxry sN .fig= Opel ----------- g cage€ =g g^k«"s� k xg" sza K a� i13 zstt � s zK4agg Att g $ g. g yep =$ag " Q $ kRx €g gdg g� H sAtlxa-_-rv�rvmm». s .�s. 4 '« m gexakk 'azttd % € g2'a 15a All .�.R I �a�a�a s€:� 118M `I®���4�.�s r� eRs e:.g�e�wm rt I^»� s z 'k �r cod g&»stt ett s gv ~ Ie � �x Yg sa4r .Y �' 4k a €'€g I $ � , kE N a w Z J 4$ E $ F `£ $�p�8«gs P # 64 .. ass S « "f 8 J 6 g 8 "I c Q 8 ;? c y = 4 % n e 5 ffi 5 � z w c¢ as° €2ga fo s; z a s k gttH e'a ao " 3 $ "au�' 9 �0 � k ars z ° a g tts - s t €g=gg <s �'Y� asm « e tts= a sdo $ssg " �« 3 « 4g g xg � � ..gg >� wg� aS� a §F ag "tt r£3 gg ja«z" �« ki $. segs& a5 $ °s=k"fa ��5 mea m"w g& s€ 26s €sg" Ese kag s gs as s=wa $k$«g ,N��" saain�ag 6uiaaaui6u3'o"awpedap SVX31 S310N 1Ha3N3J LINO = 0�0IlSIiHO Sfda00�ou0 o ¢U ' Mt � O1s�aHO WdUDD dO UDI 1,W30H3H JNINMJi 30I10d S rvoudiaas3a ne 3iva ory rvpsn3a rvoudaas3a ne 3iva ory rvoisvda o g m .m �� � US of < m € ona ma H=5 $ m 3 s �_ =mo _€ g Emp =E � �gm $ Bo eg !OO _ p t o a � E ' a = e= g `dap -e �- �E e8 hoc x a 's Es 1aB HBe s w� no " a Kit EP g ��� W $ g F Ell, B.N N' €�� m=� aw �� ° pgm m ° m a �� ens € oa &w uj swwA �WS =s wgJ 5 a w e Map €IR wW�a� Vi 'Egg! N�e � � �gp— �ww� 0m < :w �g d = a ago €9 m= ° . � o$nW �$ ez z.m� a om oG ��< o <€ g 8w= <9� € w� €b kTOM a9i g8 w_ m E B S^ 1_ ° k 6t; HSR �» =e >`9'__ � a �e s75 s� S I'.s s t58 N n ♦ n m n a5 w � � � � � � � � `� a ore ggBo Asa a� p" 9E a r�€no8�; a goo s e � 5a m eaao �� = a �'� o € w P 9e a w "§a € at a Wim € z � gp� _ _ w=c a �Qoe m & r sps$ msk 0 5a$ wage a w m � �o€ =wpms. � � o ff �w p a o o � Yosod "m o z a� ws s - ifs €� - s.p '�� B € o€ $ e w film _ _ F n ?wEIp _ ' sa €mez8 j5� wa s € as g g. J = 6 w = °a BpB�Ena� 8 12 no w `jam ayao m €o Q _ w bm�k 8=gym Y 8 LU m" 8 �' a= a oma € s= e ��� s m F al" S' ow ! a m aw$�e " a s "p w <" ° o ; m ° ° �==7m a a m �� m e a m yes' m `s = d €s .e "Ba°�Ba3 3 gm H m E =nms g'>'� Bp No ; �n G �13 n� m =6 s $ B5 N. z s � a rjo os � 5gas Nx ' `2 = LL k _ - m m � ..=b 8 wE ° _ Cp a 8 SS B k= "m b €$= m ac ��o i �oBmg"5 tS� �_ 2.9€s < � wmo "€ A a82 e m � <a Awa` l_ a -� > a w - a �g $ g � a �. � e a z �a $ o� o n z' z. �3 is ss a -1m a a $B 8 Bsg W B = 7 H-9 a 13Q !ma w. 2p �Q film m LL F B mam�$aa �� s ; aaa = gym g � " ps=a � g webz. ry` a r aB g F " as s �msm�<m = mm € =e es = m e mw lz= w E N �� ��$ o a„z _ ale a sw g a a "ear s= € a pad US 4sB'�zw �� a ��aa � ° s � o �y a ” s m - € ,se eg$w�€ w€ _� B"=m aj P owU € �@ _" = 93 :> €.w 4=1 s '<_ E �?€ `� � 1a d 89�� H B €11 d �o t" 'mow � �oz 8x = ° 8 _� 3""w"z `� e€ $ sba� $ tae=e § $s � SQ a sE ��� �w �€ 59 _ 2 "�r H as $ s aa�¢ m° - �s � „ �Ej try =€g $ a° sm �p eo h #= gm= w EW Ego 2 gid 4's §> gom w9a $ e eag _ s ��oa $foo 'gls=5eo wa t "�' - "Q� _ � oN A U) IU $5 Z. _�x ea € . 6=" aa= �a;a w d� $�$ =$i✓ �N o" w _.8 e ' - 121 s =� � , e =-€ 8= x as z,� _9 B = a a o 5 �Bp ° aam b - ob "a °m a - w w '-E ae _ sma xg 2 §e =? tw a °a� a am�m elo§ B <F m �Bw$ � »Qo ae w§ 0 z _ a a= "aa m e ��44 PH �=��aaY �$ �z6 � a� @��so "�� a� a LL�. � o P8 _< "ga "s ire " r �� sad a ° a €tee = MIS B� ago s-al a- € IL.- � " � Vim= mm g w a s� v n n C3- €m a z�9=m=. mss s �w <m a H Sao a€o� n $ $a M. 9 e= s € a e a� sb = e� g.o= oa a a §a= a w a �°_ E��=a a a �� gem �o=" � � >u � g:��=: $= a=e�@g va gym$ 2. � as" %� � gx - z4 _ �_ € €_ s s=� gm a '� o s aw3. °B" am m oeo ;F 15 sp5a mffi g o a w = g; = as �� 26� Qg a N 8 $� r € a a "' om & ;= a as 0 seB a -E € � o.? soz ma a 6= a off _° am $ €"" m€ a° € �a iw a 1, s $gp. = e� mtB awwg n$ �m aoa $ ems m a as „s = .m <. cr ow= a �° bF k & $ �� s= � o ep m w 4ea $ s a �9np n a= e=€o€=�N a "� ��g g d>d �_ �� how�' �a s �"�` age me°p _ w �$' ®�� Jw �g aw 3m `�$ ego � �p ge W G g= bhp= ° P H. $ $= o €s $ = a" ;m 6' � �a w " B = n=„ a= =°a 30o s aim R- $ E b 3= N=em a a `m €ao 0 0 oa € "e t €m nets e, w H H-'- F°�o op.— �b ��" � s� ops �joB " ao a= a- $" oe �; pa"e s so _$° @.w� @=aa wad �" " a€ m _m $ os €. _= a a� o°s s€ w� $� �_ m � a Vim= � a "_ a92e m �m wt a N 3e >nae a s�- a €a s- -z " a �m�, =1 A w � - e Na a �€ �._ � �_ $ ° s� �a 10 �= s a3 0 � F"w� o = =w€ a oep =mp eGg 5 spm ° o reg m @ a $ a a� sm�. e� ° a aps= s&=�oe� a€ _ _ a�a � � ��= a _ e`'s m $ g 'awn " fib= a W y3 Q6t � w = � �_ ppm _ _ $ _ _ �e= _ � 'w° �� �$ a as E €C9 amo __ io = e �a am �g w ' a y = 6; w�€ ��$° �°= 'eg�5g5 z 3o � S&H � a n Bow � Fo �� 8rm 8 �w 8a3 ae 6 g€ enema U >= m�`g a='H S�8 w �W gN a' P5 r=ya WE � $€ ��� a� �_§� ��� 3 $sa �w � € � �Nw _ � �s� � _� �w� aw � a g � s�= a= _ a�� . a esu 0a"aaam LLa �s a 1 � ��M Gass V Y aHa. Rad = a� € € ,N F o: ""y�tYj � .om,3.v.a»�nosaain�ag 6uiaaaui6u3'o"Owpedap SVX31 133HS aN1911 IHOIdAl IINQ = 0�0IlSIiHO Sfda0o ioAlli CV o Mt v. /VOisiaHosrd NIVa l o1m AW34HOH JNINIdbl 30I10d NQUI as3a ne 3iva ory rvpsn3a rvoudaas3a ns Siva orvrvoisvda LU _ o z r w H rc W c 3 LU p V w ww '33'38��� SSS } a 30 � �c �! 1010 M �j sys �gg4 =o.��� of o p01� �ltsts ��"0111 HR.8N� ERE LU zN� z w mmamam aam masa mma8amm mmmmmmmm mm uz w m= zo w HE. 8 U g E sp p m g _ 35$ C F 6E5 ia H _ b= S Z c 1 8 g m €o W =_ € _ o Z i =_ p x 1 1 � mm O Eo ��§=m � o �x � 'sem"= o I — _ �€ -'.m oz, sw „ z m _Us _off ���oa=w � ���„� a»> �m a01 oo� $ tlo S� ” Tzt ��Ed�� ggggnnnnWB �w � q�qnsp �$ �a `� w� € � 33EEEE _ EJ 1Lm B oma v 8s and - N� w � � _ �ai$ yGG0000 .N<i�$os s �� � �H n. m�a� ®Z z. 8V o Tw $ = 5W a R E 8 8 8z za E w w �� a 01 1 _� _ s wag w� a sS= = m o 1w Z5 6 Rp ® �s01� omagg, '$- _ � �� atw xx=o� � n= m� �Hims _ _= 010 aaaaaaxa m� �pa�� ��s's� � g� �s U m z m = p a § s�s3 =__ 00101 w e a w w a e jzo o - e oa f3 _-�� w=c w dz 2o W _ ��1 apz1' 3'1 E we �wz-��«= gwwo>�1 Q�a� =mmm m g zo — s 3 �g a 9 mmm. 01 ���_� H ffi _ �� ��<w� 001 = on m a a e g �x< m 101111s�3�sl s s's� MEHH. www s6� ��gee 56.6 == s== __ J m $ s O � 0o ?Cgzgi p mA 1 2 N 1= � � « mmm 1 � ����a��a$��� 030000a � ds6� e�x�c �o� =. } _ Q Q m U 0 W LL [.7 S _ Z W L i w� zo w �� IIIA d 1 \\ III 8 W a aco �' w d LJ w ¢ a � 8� a 8% o _Z w 8 o J = m z w b S a=$ w oz. _ awzo 4 i 9 . w , x ,N��" saain�ag 6uiaaaui6u3'o"awpedap F M o: "y�tYj �!l12�.om1��C3.]v.aI»Vno� SVX31 NHId 31lSkinin LINO 1sIaH0 sndao�}ouI� �o 00 ¢U ' Mt tSIaHO WdUDD dO UDI 1,W34HOH JNINIdbl 30I10d NQUI� nB 31tl0 'ON Np51n3a NOILd.— AB 31V0 'ON No1svaa II � r Ias s s° a° I I' 3 w LU vv S w 6a58a� „t ,ot.BaN <12 w � � m� LL,a ➢ �q a r� ow e s= ae - s 0 a - a w nap �w ,008 ,0'L4L &i ,0'L ' .0'Ol u 08 aw oo w c� �4G ffi 8 u a 00 @ 'du 1'1 d 1 Lu s t— — g Q C). m 6 o 0fr 55 a o ud "g z u w R w A s a o I LL B w .0'06 N saoi ag 6uiaaaui6u3 o luawpedap t dO �SIIViEG?131VM N (0 "2 a St1X31 I1SIbHO SnddOO JO AM Io �bt DC7 �f IISIHHO Sndaoo io AlIo = 0O0 Mt /VOisiaHa sr�d a I AW34HOH JNINIVIdbl 30110d rvoudiaas3a ne 3iva ory rvpsn3a rvoudaas3a ns Si7ONNOisvda R -61 R 11125 yq e . a ..... li r 5:.. 2 W Qw $ i 11 rre'msi 51 YM.tI>AIfH lIDI'NM tl-f�tl p � � a WW .y4 el}g� a II cr 4 NN g m ILI Sa IX N„ saoin ag 6uuaoui6u3 jo juowpedap t d0 Z SlIHl3a?131HM N (0 "2 a St1X31 I1SIbHO sndb0O d0 AM `� N ;o �bt I�K7 I�f I1SIaHO Sndaoo io uI0 = 000 �\VV�AII J\W34HOH JNINIdbl 30I10d a c - NOLLdI—A 19 III IN Ng51— Wld.s30 AB 31V4 'ON NOISV,3a p@ t iX3 A ai ..1A �? pp e 9 ,M1�. k cost i }y}y /NIOHS SY Sk Sol' g R .f Q 4 I pin 1.. h K Y K w h�4 O -A. Nyj 41 o N saoi ag 6uiaaaui6u3 0luawpedap t dp£SlIHl3a?131HM N (0 "2 a St1X31 I1SIbHO Sndboo d0 Alli 13WHO sndaoo io AlIo = 0O0 Mt v �V NIVl AW34HOH JNINIdbl 30I10d NQUI as3a ne 3iva ory rvpsn3a rvoudaas3a ns 317 oN N0111 a 11 ungg � . RA m k \ h � g � 113 K $ " gk� R0 f oil . g Rt I WR gg �A6 G� -N saoi ag 6uiaaaui6u3 o uawpedap t d0 t SlIHl3a?131HM N (0 "2 a St1X31 I1SIbHO SnddOO d0 AM 13WHO sndaoo io AlIo = 0O0 Mt v �� � OisiaHo srdaoo ae wo! �o m a AW34HOH JNINIdbl 30I10d NQUI� ne ns Siva orvrvoisvda d� F � t� IN 5 = q, a � } �� a'a 4 „B m it saz;n aS 6uuaaui6u3 {o ;uaw}oda4 NVId NOIlMN30 N -0 SVX31 No 's „too o Nd sda. usiaH� sndboi ;o lll� SNOWKINOD ONIlSIXd o F ONId33NION3 Nvuun Ift G AW3ab"JV JNINN2LL 3oIl0d o 00 NOu-3 1. 31tl0 'DN NOI—N 14OI1dIY0530 A9 3LY➢ 'ON NOISVatl 1 ule�,q 9Liam _ I t F � 419y M„t\S[I,': 0I b.8ZS ------------------ - �-- - - I s I I I I I I I,jI LLI I I I I I'L I I I In / w m \ l I I I iI c LO O II I ISI c) w;II IIIIII, -LiJiL-LLILj-L 7 Tta oI - - �I I �I El ~ (I I F 111111 �� H— I. —�+— g _ rx, , s , i .._ ——— _ -0-VI L9 3„tS,O-V.gZN w� a X f�N/uq wiaxispztt.aS 5uuaau(5u3 {o ;uawpoda4I. cu SVX31 Wd ONIOV�10 �,o �o E7NId3�NIk7N30 I1SRIH� S(id210i !o lll� = 00 Ift NVW111 )AXWJV JNINNdi 30n0d m NOLLd-3 AB 3LtlO 'DN NOI—N NOad—iD A9 77N NOIS— Loo#mnaIuaav Bs u/fO/Bo r� S :ux�t a a - `= dim"b aSRA 9� �C " Ir a� — kk kk „ n m Ll _ a m 1 R n I I 1 RR tyRw i f� ddG :o kk '' Ae I I11 0 v _ R8 i R- � ..kC a T RB OT " R R _ I mm ' kk h^ kk RRF kC I I II k& `9 $� kB kk ti"kC o3r<b � I �kE ❑ kB kE SR I I I Rg �8 9 kC -Ya II I kE ,.~ Ra kk kR kC 1 L. \ kB, � � R mm kk kk kk .k k& n a � a a ° 92 mm kB TT kk n kk ,. ° Is I o a X spztt.aS 5uuaau(5u3 {o ;uawpoda4 cu SVX31 Wd NOISN3NG �o E7NId3�NIk7N30 I1SRIH� S(id210D !o lll� = 00 Ift NVw111 )AXWJV ONINrvdi 30n0d R 00 f NOLLd-3 AB 3LtlO 'DN NOI—N -IdIYO53O A9 3LYO 'ON NOISVatl 1 mu 77 a a ® a a 4 49� A 9,0 s ,z o9i, i / \ PTRTI � 1 i 1 I f. • rJ n �I ? �,J o ' I CO J, o 0 Oji � cL'1 'a m§ iI O nw!II .LOC m O cfl co UU I IIII � I � •S VI � q w 4 n a ,._______ ........ ......:.. o -0-VI L9 3. V sN w� a X 6asM/u asi�xi saotn.'aS 5uuaau(5u3 {o ;uawpoda4 cu =tiai�■�� SVX31 S�NiTl W2]OlS GNb ONIGV2JO 1191ROW fUltlA'YER N�z �ry �o E7NId3�NIk7N30 I1SRIH� S(id21Oi !o lll� = aO Z Ift NVw111 )AXWOV ONINrvdi 3On0d m NOLLd—a AB 3Ltl0 'DN N01—N -Id1Y0530 A9 3LY➢ 'ON NI-8 Y b 6E wcza w�ded as-' e� w osg -eY-�iaa E ,c1s 1,U�, 3# I gg » zo2 jww�a .�Q e 1. �$�g�6 psi m m U w 9-6 1 M M 921 �S: F 4 Z 0 `I L•: Y yy Y ' � � z - .� QN y 'l.'.•ON ofT � olll z� 52g F z � •�:�;, i;. i n �a Vis= s��� � _ a ai WC F IF ogas m � e� � $ gym €sg pp > 14 f i B yk 1 cm mkkFw ��' F"JB Z, §soff = 0 0 Iia mo � � � � m€ �� rp Al MI! 0 0 eE F) 8@ � E 8 � o �w mm54 a 69 fgj$l!`� S a X smimaS 6upeauiND jo;uaw�jeda(] (.0 (119 3SVO-NVId 3dVOS(INVI C-j 00 SVX31 A110) .0 (D Z3HIHVH 83NNn-L liSPAHO sncn:joo jo Am cli AN3(]VDV ONINIVdi 30110d 00 1� 3tva ON N0131— IL < Z� z LH 3NII Albl:�-Md ... . .......... -z' Iz -I j ....... 7V5 �j A r �,,Xqz ........... 0 m n ............ ui acl \�O 0 5 0 g > cn - U- —Z 0 I Z LL LU I il, \�10 WO OZ ................ .......... - ---------- Vi XX ........ x .M< z < �_j MVJI I J%-LC3=0 C30 z ZI. I P . WilV-NVId 3dVOSCINVI sm!moS W aau&D jo;uaw�jeda(] cli 05 It Z, CO svx3i cl� I USPAHO snd�:joo jo Am Z3HIHVH 83NNn-L cli AN3(]VDV ONINIVdi 30110d 00 1� 3tva ON N0131— IL < Z� z —j LH E. Nil AIW�.dOHd — — — — — — — — — — — ....... --- ----------- 5g f < z-, F. r uj , 11 1 Lij U) > C) cr C) < < L,j UJ Lu .................. Lij Z C) Z ...... 0 0 z \c 0 OZ LL�z 0 w 0 Z� z J LI �'w 11 1 co< LLI ou) U, �z U) 2 LLJ I i Z ui> F-0 ----- ----- 0 0 Z . .......... z 0-L) ........ .............. .... ............. Id LU Z I :�:: z— x 0 t ................. Z, �z Iz 0 Z� —---------- �z ....... .... ........ .. ..... ........ . Z I 3 N i �iaj�o" z z (.0, smimoS 6upeouiND jo;uaw�jeda(] AMINS V S31ON 3dVOS(INVI C-j z �- 00 svx3i cli A110) c:, (D Z3HIHVH 83NNn-L liSPAHO sncn:joo jo Am m AN3(]VDV ONINIVdi 30110d 00 1� 3tva ON Noisi- 29 29 2 16 E F. z 2 �-g 2 2 z 12 1.2 6 T?B IE 1 A 1 .1 M-1 L, d d z co 8 < ........................ �,u < 0< Q ca)(0 7e LLI 15 z g C�1, < 2 wo LU -i 5z 'z 4 8 55 5 g�-4 0 1 -91 z s�o S Z' E, Z26, oz z 10 I �-I I ZU, 0', z z z t l<l< z .110 '6 g 2�6 2 @ & BE"o �2' �&2 o 2 ol= g & 5 R 9 R E' �.o Q 2 E2 E E"t6 76 7 E & Ft� E a E-E �E E E E Et 2 E �E T o —7- '6 ED �o 6r, & IS T- —- R� ," b�5 ,- ..--, F�!��-E- z I & 10 o 2_2 aal z z I, - I Iz 4 smimoS 6upeouiND jo;uaw�jeda(] (.0 SlIViDG 3dVOSONVI C-j 00 svx3i Z3HIHVH 83NNn-L USPAHO sncn:joo jo Am AN3(]VDV ONINIVdi 30110d 00, 1� 3tva ON Nols— r ul- UJ IL U) U) till 0- w I-- il 0 F- Cl) ui z 0 26 Z: @ s OU) LU E t LLJ LIJ LL ID U) Y U) N 0 uj M `<7 0, 0� 0 pl> iz �78 z < CL z 10 b 10 18 0 o 10 .0 2 �o 0� ZI; .0 oz 0 0 z T 0 T 0. m 'K E, U) 0- -0 LIJ LLI z .......... cr LU '7 co uj < CD z p 0 W ui 0 z LU U) z 0-11z 12 (.0, smimoS 6upeouiND jo;uaw�jeda(] (119 3SVO-NV]d NOUVON�Jl C-j z �- 00 svx3i C-i (D Z38INVIA 83NNn-L USPAHO sncn:joo jo Am m AN3(]VDV ONINIVdi 30110d 00 1� 3tva ON Noisi— A z CL H z �7r 0 0� Z� 1, z 0' I 0 91 6 �>z Z K-�� z 01 E ffi z 1w �w Z< w 0 w z L (i)'(D Z 3NII A183dOM -T A 16 ............... W1 z > ui 0 0 ......... CL ELI JF 0 ....................... J LLid, lild 6 z R T, -N- -U— TO 3N11 A 83d I j . �#'i]V-NV]d NOUVE)PRdl I sm!moS 6ui aau&D jo;uaw�jeda(] cli (D 05 It r�- Z, CO svx3i c6 A110) m I liSPAHO sncn:joo jo Am Z3HlHVH 83NNn-L AN3(]VDV ONINIVdi 30110d 00 1� 3tva ON Noisi— z CL z 'o up z 8 0 Lu �w 0 Wo z < > 9 I �-Y lz lz S 02 j'w� L Z 3NII A.LU3dOEld A .. ........ ---------- "J '6 t T--1 (19 V ..................... EEI k 7 IV k 1 TT'F I I I 771-F1-1Tl,- lz X 'd ......... I I H I ILI > K LLJ z ............... K x A LU CL "r 0 .......... r e 9 -1 AlHgdOHd NI (.0, smimoS 6upeouiND jo;uaw�jedao mivimns'R S31ON NOUVOI881 C-j z 00 svx3i Z3HIHVH 83NNn-L liSPAHO sncn:joo jo Am AN3(]VDV ONINIVdi 30110d 00 1� 3tva ON Noisi- 10 o �E' f 15 2 0 's y s� -0, t5 7> 3 1�2 31W;, —1,E '-o E' 'S6 t! -.0 M S. 6v O.E. 2 E� E ajl 16 t S K -6 Hito 27 2 00 Z5 a a E -TE - N2 E 0 E ON N- 0 0 z ES o.'6 0 E.0 03 E. E E z Q uj z > > lz e T zll smil Wi jo;uaw�jeda(] SlIVAG NOUVOI881 C-j 00 svx3i 06 LO (D Z3HIHVH 83NNn-L USIZAHO sncjztjoo jo Am AN3(]VDV ONINIVdi 30110d On 1� 3tva ON Noisi— N-11, I 0 T 0 le, F- Z z 0 Z, M o zo z 0 0 Cf 0 5: F- w z 0 5 m515151 .,ff w z TF TFF- cc: > CL ZW z CL 0 z. U) 0. z L",� I �2 z z w MR IT j > IL > :D -Z X 0 < z (L z z < < z Z. 0 0 z z zw z 0 0 Z, n o 'o z . :j -z OZ I 2 0 Z< 1. O� < �2 '0 > z >MW 0 w n,Z� tJ ;�0 U) ZO 0. 0 0 P < - 111 w z 0 1 < 0 Z z - - - - m p 0 m >Z Z .6 10 1 z I ff LD Z L. 0>� 0 z Z 0 z ox -z <a- z z L 2 1. CD R 0 < 0 16 z D'o 0 z z�o z > z 0 A 0 < > < Z� < . 11 W A z < < 10, 0 .1 0 0. 'o z 0 < 0 <F- 0 0�� I A< z z < S oc W o ozo Z' 0 :D z 0 1 6 - . .. - 0 0. w U) nt -, 0 z A Lu z "o F z 0 z �n uj P P .8 En Kill", < <<Z. �z z o z < .0 zm.- F- w S C-) b z o o z 82. -,-A.-ERE 0 2 :3 w 0 01 C5 0 11 > �z 1 0 z z 0 ,I . 1 Z L_M, z Z. w > 0 < z< F- 0 0 z w < Z,z Z z 0 IL 0 w F- 0 C) F_ < 0 uj 0 w w 0 D T I 0 1 11 Ul I I I N z Of w 0 Of z I z uj 'z > I IN uj 0 W z z z 2 0 . q N wo SOOIAIDS bulJO8ul6u3 jo juawliedea C.D S31ON IV�13NID CIJ911-- SVX31 00 Z3dlV4VH I 83NNni liSIHH9 sndHOO 10 UO C-3 (D M30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO CL E I ONNOISIA381 N011dl-30 E �2 Z,D s n gi u z E n K 5� r E t r 'S E�; 's nnnn K 7, 5� �n i S CO w t, I L,- d E 7, u -v, �O�n. v E F. i c uz 2 o, 6 r�22 H E, 'v 2 s r3 �R z F, j 2 �OF�� u=u v r 2 H P u u, I- u 0, "3 Hr r'-' -gt"- A �g p I IV 1, u R,R, S 3,p E L u 15 11 p E5 u I u ul S001AIDS bulJ08ul6u3 jo juawliedea C.D S31ON IV�13NID CIJ911-- SVX31 00 Z3dlV4VH 83NNni liSIHH9 sndHOO 10 UO c-, (D M30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO CL E ONNOISIA381 N011dl-30 u 7�, I 7�, 7�, I n 7�, 3 ------------ E� 2, t- 0 J.21 12, co "o 2n Z,4 M ORO Z'� '0. UZ mo121 �q z 2. n -P s -Ei E 2, -25 f E� 2, -q, h� j I 7�, E on M 52 n 's �5 R n 1� �2 �2 nn 5 n 's �n, SOOIAIDS bulJO8ul6u3 jo juawliedea C.D S31ON IV�13NID CIJ911-- SVX31 00 co Z3dlV4VH I 83NNni liSIHH9 sndHOO 10 UO C-3 (D M30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO C L E ONNOISIA381 N011dl-30 I 1� —Ulll- ------------------------------------------------------------ ------------I ---------------------------------------------- z . ........... ............................. z'D 1. ,i�Ao ZO Z, ...........------------------------------------- z z ZO Z� Sl 4� n 02 �W -Z 014 2 2 < s -4 < .V < 7�, cn Li E-4 .............................................................................................. z ........... ........................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................... - ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- --- < �n R 12, 6 < < 14 V -----------------7, ------------------------ lo .0 n z �w z R, S001ARS bulJO8ul6u3 jo juawliedea C.D NVId NOIiVAVOX] clJ91I SVX31 00 CO Z3dlV4VH 83NNni IiSIHH9 sndHOO 10 UO C-3 (D M30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO C L E ONNOISIA381 NOIldl-30 1� —US111— s P Z,D E U. u 0 ot- R,P- c 9L _,E 0 08 0 0 Lul" 0 0 cli 0 121 0 MR Z n > 'T7' g g E CO w X X SoolAIDS bulJ08ul6u3 jo juaLuliedea NVId C.D 9 --? IJIldn�00WONIGOVIO ONV SININNNOO r SVX31 00 C, USIHHO sndHOO 10 UO (IiSl8H0SfldKD�0AiID) Z3dlV4VH H3 (D AN30V0V ONINIVdi 30110d 0 CL E ONNOISIA38 N011dl-30 AO 31VO ON NUN— zu R u E 00, 7�7'," (L 0. L W T"1 11 11 1 z 0 o 0 IL o .... ......... r IL .................................... I U 21 U. 04 U0. j > > ---,X'� X RM INN ,��7777—,-� 7 SOOIAIDS bulJO8ul6u3 jo juawliedea C.D NVId ONIGNOd�OMJ CIJ911-- SVX31 00 Z3dlV4VH 83NNni liSIHH9 sndHOO 10 UO (D M30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO C L E ONNOISIA381 N011dl-30 I 1� —U,111— Z,D u LL 0 0 - ------------------------ ------------ 'E" F, ---- ----------------------------------------- E" SOOIAIDS buIROUIN3 jo juawliedea C.D NVId OVOI]All WOI�MJIJ CIJ911-- SVX31 00 C, Z3dlV4VH 83NNni USIHHD sndHOO 10 UO M30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO C L E ONNOISIA381 NOIldl-30 I 1� —U,111— Lo�g u z (L LIJ ot 47 0 --Ti q U. at -62 LIJ 14 JL 0 ,pi TI rIIv ----------- SOOIAIDS bulJO8ul6u3 jo juawliedea C.D NVId OVOI 3AII dOOIJ ON003S CIJ911-- SVX31 00 C, Z3dlV4VH 83NNni liSIHH9 sndHOO 10 UO M30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO C L E ONNOISIA381 N011dl-30 I 1� —U,111— u 2 2 uj U. uj 4 3001ARS buIROUIN3 jo juawliedea C.D X.V]�JV-NVId InOAVI 311d 9 CIJ911-- SVX31 00 Z3dlV4VH 83NNni US18HO sndHOO 10 UO (D AN30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CL E I ONNOISIA381 4011dl-30 —IDISI- 7-4-- U I) --------------------------------------- Z,D LIJ ot rIJ LIJ (L 0 w ...................... L!J ---------------------------- 1�----------- ----------------------------------------------------------- A l IT 66 Z 11 ------------ .............. lit _0 L Az' . .......... IL k -I 1;rJ 7 71 Jr, T-11 ............ ... ............... ...... ----------------------- -------------------------------------------- ........... J) S001I 5uII jo juawliedea C.D A.V]�JV-NVId 1nOkV1 311d 9 CIJ91I SVX31 00 Z3dlV4VH 83NNni IiSIHH9 sndHOO 10 UO AN30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d C L E ONNOISIA381 NOIldl-30 I 1� —U,111— T Z,D 12, L u z 0, >1 EL t M qf R, A -T,4 ",!-) (-4 x 4 PI I 4 [�j ),J _J V, 71 zu P ....... ......... 91-11HO—i1n 9NIIHOJVN -C- 6 ,71 S001i bull jo juawliedea C.D M.V3dV-INVId NOliV(]NnOJ 9 CIJ911-- SVX31 00 Z3dlV4VH 83148m IiSlHH9 sndHOO 10 UO M30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d C L E 1� ONNOISIA38 Wlldl-30 �0 31VO ON NUN- 7 �pq t Z(D (m -4 IF )IL u z fm LLJ................................. -------- t 6 7.7. 9N IHDIVA k 7777 I------ ------- ------ ---iL----1, Z� LL L--:r------r-1 r- I Ic 1, T-- 1011L- cm al 0, 1, ——1, q:------ .............. R, —cm �F'q) zl =j ===4 —D L4)4 IL C11, D IF q, 15-11 L —C-) DI F -01i (--)L .. .. ........ .. .......... F4 ........................... ............................... ............... 8 SOOIAIDS buIROUIN3 jo juawliedea C.D A.V3dV-NVId NOliV(]NnOJ 9 CIJ911-- SVX31 00 Z3dlV4VH 83NNni IiSIHH9 sndHOO 10 UO (D M30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CL E ONNOISIA381 NOIldl-30 I 1� Z,D A go w (L z 2 I vw T- Aj LF�11 jt, �V (�J" 4 4� r �P, 1,- 4 F ................. 9N 10�lJVA� —it ................. .............. .................. .... --i r ;6� (b S001I 5uII jo juawliedea M.V3�]V -NVId InOAVI 11VM dOOIJ IS�JH 9 CIJ91-- SVX31 00 co C/) Z3dlV4VH 83NNni US18HO sndHOO 10 UO (D AVII130VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO C L E ONNOISIA381 NOIldl-30 I 1� —U,111— LLJ uz 9,77, -IN65 --- --------- -------- ... ....... ............. 0', LL .................... ZP LL .....................................................I YO 'Mk6 icy . ... �n M 7P I -Yin, t ij 11 rf I G) ............ _—V Lt 41 .. .................... -- --------- -- --------- -- --- -- -- --------- - -----4 - ------- IT DI I�T ('5 (7) I P Il—1-1 d 1 11 rA) S001ARS bu1JO8ul6u3 jo juawliedea A,.V]�]V-NVId InOAVI 11VM WOI�MJIJ 9 CIJ911-- SVX31 00 Z3dlV4VH 83NNni 0_1 US18HO sndHOO 10�UIO (D AN30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO CL E 1� ONNOISIA381 N011,31-30 lO I 31VO ONNO1,111— T U5 81 65, LLJ 6 o" LL 21 01�9 cc G�) M Ht H.- 0 --k "a. j�z T P IN (D—-—-—-—-—- I I d M, 2 S001ARS 3uIJ08uI6u3 jo juawliedea C.D M.V3�]V-NVId DNIM�J00d M01 clJ911- SVX31 00 C, C/) Z3dlV4VH 83NNni 0_1 IiSlHH9 sndHOO 10 UO (D AN30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO CL E 1� ON NOISIA38 NOIldl-30 �0 31VO ON NUN— z T Z,D w z (L 0 L 01 1 I A ID,� TO U. Id. ---------- L-------------- ------------- G_ TL-------------- -------------- -- - — tala IH - -------------- 0 Aj, -1, ------------- ---- --- --------------L ---------------------- PEM 1-1------- -------------- - --------------I ----------- --------------F_ @ ------------- ------------ ........ z M L L--------- -------- ---- --------------- ........... L L L. It -------------------------------------- S L----------------------- --- --- L_ __I L -------------- -------------------------X-Al ----- -- -- _Y ----- - - ---------- ------- ------- ------- Q11) ---- -- ----- ------------------------------ QI I I - -------------- ----------- ------------ - --------- ---------------------------- --- - ------ -- ------------ ............. bl J-1 41 z�i 21O.d ....... ............ .............. A D G) S001ARS bulMulbU3 jo juawliedea A.V]�JV-NVId DNIAV�JJ dOOIJ ON003S CIJ911-- SVX31 00 Z3dlV4VH 83NNni 0_1 liSlHH9 sndHOO 10 UO (D AA30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO CL E 1� ON NOISIA38 N011dl-30 �0 31VO ON NUN— T Z,D z w g U. o—o- 0 0 U. Z, TI, W Al A T a 7) A J Of Z 01 61, ,UIft 77/ 'IF -A,I 8 vl, 61 1 1-7 Om N 5, Of 9NIIHOJVN —9N IHOJI. 711 111 111 7� ------- ------- F----TT- & FT------------- --- 4 (i) SOOIAIDS bulJ08ul6u3 jo juaLuliede(] All VI�JV -NVId InOAVI IIVM WOI�(IN003S SVX31 00 SfldKD�O AiID) C� liSIHH9 sndHOO 10 UO Z3dlV4VH H3 I AN30V0V ONINIVdi 30110d 0 0 CL E 1� ONNOISIA38 N011dl-30 �0 31VO ON NUN— 'T t Vg Z'D 'U �,p�' � L u U. oj� CID 2-1 T— Uo 'A (D Zz q,----------- a ob) L4 -1p 9NIIH0jIV% S001I bulI jo juawliedea C.D A.V3�]V-NVId DNIM�J00d HDIH clJ911- SVX31 00 Z3dlV4VH 83NNni 0_1 US18HO sndHOO 10 UO (D AN30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO CL E lf� ONNOISIA381 NOIldl-30 I �0 I 31VO ONNO1,111— z T _ H� ... ....... . q� LLJ LL G) LL 0, 0 cl 8 Of If Q "51 4 ��Z_z z P z A cjl�l ell 1-51 X, ------------- �Mmj Fm"r r- II,110im _61 ....... 4, Ql� H I ............. SOOIAIDS bulJO8ul6u3 jo juawliedea C.D SlIV130 IVOIdAi CIJ911-- SVX31 00 Z3dlV4VH 83NNni USIHHO sndHOO 10 UO L. (D AN30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO CL E �0 I 31VO ONNO1,111- 7 u Fq z ------------------------ tf W M'yo U u n .......... 10 r- 00 > S (4 (4 ------------ NM 11---7-71 F— u UE- �)u E-�y Al– C) u :11 m O"a (0j, 1w d .................. E,� L 6,2 ..... 3 on 2 E- dill al R C --------------- 717 --------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------ SOOIAIDS bulJO8ul6u3 jo juawliedea C.D SlIV130 IVOIdAi CIJ911-- SVX31 00 Z3dlV4VH 83NNni USIHHO sndHOO 10 UO Lo (D AN30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO CL E �0 I 31VO ONNO1,111— z u Z(D pp 8, R u z Z u 0 0 u r- 00 --------------- A: 4 1 Cj2- fl, u U co C) g� u u U L P u u 4u u P4 UE- u 00 u 0- < u u 00 0- 2, _2 SOOIAIDS bulJO8ul6u3 jo juawliedea C.D SlIV130 IVOIdAi CIJ911-- SVX31 00 Z3dlV4VH 83NNni USIHHO sndHOO 10 UO L. (D AN30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO CL E �0 31VO ONNO1,111— z u sl I IVI a ................. .......................... .................. 04 S P4 --------------- Q4 ........... UQ4 -2 -------------------------------- C) Q4 00 yr ft w ----------- -----------—-------- ------------- ......................................... ----------- /---------- --- 2 12 ................... -------------- (4 (4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------- ------------------- ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................... S001ARS buIROU16U3 jo juawliedea C.D SlIV130 1VOIdAi CIJ911-- SVX31 00 Z3dlV4VH I 83NNni US18HO sndHOO 10 UO L. (D AN30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO CL E 1� 3— il—Sl— Zu ,fql, olir-, --l7f I 31�1 HE z u -----------—-- ------------------------------- ---------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------------ 00 21 is L �11 Li" L n z (4 �i N 'o .............. ........................... ij z j c ........................................................... 4i n 4i 6L ................... Ni R -------- 10 Lji 11---------------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------- n-3 2 2 2 �R 2 (4 E mv, I I I I I I'l I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I lz I I I I I (4 01�� 5�pi (4 I I 'r I V m 14 (4 P4 P (4 �t------------------------I--------------------------------- I V Z' V, V L,L C) Q4 �p n �p n pR cx ------------------------------ "ID S001ARS bulMulbU3 jo juawliedea C.D SlIV130 IVOldki C1,1911- SVX31 00 co Z3dlV4VH 83NNni 0_1 US18HO sndHOO 10 UO L. (D AN30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO CL E 1� ONNOISIA38 N011dl30 31VO ON NOINA3 �S -All T ls, Z,D :N 4� z co co 4 Lr) 10 00 ............ rrrrr, 71�71� z Wo ............ OW E-4 .. . .. .. < E-4 5 E.,E. E. z 2 0 W, -6 a o u 0 (4 (4 W (4 w (4 E_ C) 1151- .......... ----------- W "Ad SOOIAIDS buIROUIN3 jo juawliedea C.D STVAG NOliV(]NnOJ 9 CIJ91-- SVX31 00 Z3dlV4VH 83NNni IiS18HO sndHOO 10 UO (D M30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO CL E �0 31VO ONNO1,111— co u P" 4 z(D E E, M6 0 (4 El -6 E.�E" C �E I" cw� (4 % M, __j ---- tt r— U a IHM NI g W4 10 10 10 -HI LL IL -j Ti- .......................... T 1 -11 L S001ARS 5uII jo juawliedea C.D SWAG NOliV(]NnOJ 9 CIJ91- SVX31 00 C, C/) Z3dlV4VH 83NNni IiSIHH9 sndHOO 10 UO (D M30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO CL E 1� 31VO ONNO1,111— Zu IS 11 ,fq� �,n 1 12 ............. Z(D ---------- .......... 0, Tfl-- I Hy IS�SS ---------- 0� A -------- --- T IR ',J VII/ r ................ iq "q;,r rx ------------------------------------ 7 P4 rx ----------------- ---------- Tc __L�L N hil o a�, a�, 00 [IF IIIFIII . . .......... "REFUC7 ,...,, SaoinraS 6uua8ui6u3;o juawuedea 4SlIHl0 NOIlHNnOd � I- StX31 00 F r� z IlsIHHO SdOO)o 1�. O ueiaHaeneaoo3ouior z3aiwva nH I a3Nani� __ ° M30VOV ONINIVdi 30I10d CO CL E = Noualaoc3o Ad 31V4 l]N N01£In3a NoualaU£3u 1H 31Va ONNOIE11— i- CV *\ s Z�s� w� y� -�5 R IL TAi --------------- ° F o J , a m, ---W_ � Q W F Q � 2 P, U \ F `'t �xU W W U I VIII III .. - IIIIII II —I— o N Z i 26 o II IfIIIII� Y � �."... ....."e...a.... d a a Z E~ i U rx ril z x w o d � il _ o a — '��...; � z Ilfflllllllll T�L�l nS > x c V. Ifl-� III � \ 111 -�' ------------ \- --oif } W o o u�u T S001ARS buIROU16U3 jo juawliedea C.D SlIVAG NOliV(]NnOJ 9 CIJ91- SVX31 00 C, Z3dlV4VH I 83NNni IiSIHH9 sndHOO 10 UO (D M30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO CL E 1� 31VO ONNOISIA3 Zu ,fq� -�t2 " _1 I Li z(D t V, ---------- z �,S ---------- R, p�j 00 12 ............ .......... t -- -------------------------------— ou OU �A �n n, 42 W4 mT �j, �L� y ---------------------- Nil m Q4 1v C) 2 1 LE ----------------------——— ........ .....T_ ...................... 3001ARS bulJO8ul6u3 jo juawliedea C.D SlIVAG NOliV(]NnOJ 9 clJ91- SVX31 00 C, Z3dlV4VH 83NNni IiSIHH9 sndHOO 10 UO M30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO CL E N011dl-30 1� I 31VO ONNOISIA3 co zu ,fq� ............................... ... ............. i[Ij------- ---------------------- -------------- d�l R' "H2 os % n ........................................ ---- ---- ------ ----------------- M -------- ----- --- g" IR I_ L Q4 Q4 0 Q4 ..................................................................... F--7 -------------------------- 0 �H. ---------- TH ------- ----- �frf—rl P, s COD - ---------------------- ------------------------------- ------------------ ................... SO011 bull jo juawliedea C.D SlIV130 DNIM� CIJ911-- SVX31 00 Z3dlV4VH I 83NNni 0_1 IiSlHH9 sndHOO 10 UO (D AN30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO CL E 1� ONNOISIA38 NOIldl-30 �0 31VO ONNO1111— co T ............. (D E, (D �R z ---------- 00 P 51 SO I 'A 1 ----------- -------------- 0 ---------- E 14 .................... E'A ------- K A --- -------------- ---- ----------- 1E _1 0 co 01 C) 10 ........................ flu .............. SOOIAIDS bulJO8ul6u3 jo juawliedea C.D SlIV130 ONIM� CIJ911-- SVX31 00 Z3dlV4VH 83NNni liSIHH9 sndHOO 10 UO (D AN30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO CL E Noll— 1� 3— —DIIIAl u �2 z(D ——————————— - ------ T T I u ri K u ----------- LT --"I" u r sn'll� t; IS u W 51= I I - - --- -------- - -——————— ———————— ——— (4 IS ----------- -------- u u (4 (4 IV u U I Ll -------- ------- -n,*�IT ----------------- ---------- co �X (4 0- u co lin 1.10 1,2 0 e: ------------------------- --------------- ESEu ------ ------- ....... ................................. u n8 72 ------------------------------------- ................. I S001I 5UII jo juawliedea C.D SlIV130 DNIM� ' o CIJ911-- SVX31 00 Z3dlV4VH 83NNni IiSlHH9 sndHOO 10 UO (D AN30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO CL E �0 31VO ONNO1,111- co z u OiD------ --J I 0 4 4- f I I rZ - ------------- u ----------------------- ------ --------------- ------------ 4 1 o I 21 ----------1 F ------------------------ PU4 Ell ----------------------------------------- ............ S001ARS bulJO8ul6u3 jo juawliedea C.D SlIV130 ONIM� CIJ911-- SVX31 00 Z3dlV4VH 83NNni liSlHH9 sndHOO 10 UO (D AN30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO CL E Noll— 1� 31VO ONNO1,111- 17, E C, ............... 4� ............................................... z -------------- u 0 u u R ..........——----- ...... ......... Wj --------------------- --------------- 00 '.1, ------------- ----------------------- 47- 101 u u .................... ................................... ------- S,I- u u ---------- X (4 u C)� N, C) r '7, 1 (4 (4 C) K ---------- u E L--------- u (4 1 ------------ SOOIAIDS bulJO8ul6u3 jo juawliedea C.D SlIV130 ONIM� CIJ911-- SVX31 00 co Z3dlV4VH 83NNni liSIHH9 sndHOO 10 UO (D AN30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO CL E N011dl-30 �0 I 31VO ONNO1,111— z u Z(D u z u u -7) ------------------------------- u u ---------- t- 00 7711 3, v u U4 40 u ou u - ---------------------------------- u ---------- ............................... u ............................................. ----------------------------------------- .................. ... 4 14 u no P4 6- ----------- -------- 0 U ------------- ............... u ............... I "All - ------------------------ ------------------ N-1 R ............................ -------------------------- -------------- u u u ........... SOOIAIDS bulJO8ul6u3 jo juawliedea C.D SlIV130 ONIM� CIJ911-- SVX31 00 3NNni liSIHHDsndHOO 10 UO Z3dlV4VH 8 AN30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO CL E �0 31VO ONNO1,111— co z u �2 E"p, ---------- --- --- --------------- �41 z 9 LO 10 00 '45 --------------------- T E E' �Z' wo (4 (4 E., t.In 16 i-X ............... 7�, P u -- 1w 55" UP o 0- M, < IQ S001AIDS bulJ08ul6u3 jo juawliedea SlIV130 ONIM� C.D cli 9 1,-- SVX31 00 �'�'3-3 �'3 �'v �0 Z. 3NNni liSIHH9sndH00 10 UO C, C/) Z3dlV4VH 8 AN30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO CL E �0 31VO ON N01,111— co z u z(D u z wu u u U 10 00 R n 3 E u P4 u u KI --T--------------- u Q4 W (4 u (4 u (4 u U) Cq U Fv u El g, u u u ........... L P3 V, .................................... ------------------ Q4 u u --- ------------ ---- Z Q4 Q4 C) u u (4 w u u saaiARS 6uu90ui6u310 juawpedea Wd 31lS-PVa3A0 N o i�3 i iH"o^a^v SVX31 00 . woIlSIHH3 Snda0010 O aisiauosndaoa3o ual Z38 V4V8 I a3Nanl AN30VOV ONINIV2i130Md w o CO s � CL NOIld180530 19 31V0 11111111131 NO6ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON N61ls43a Oil(3131d OOON d0iS:sne V &IDI) z 8 J §§ W �f8 (A �: J 4 LU Q ui w:. W w Co o r 0 CL LJL� w ujl 0 W LU z m MHOM d0 3d03H p II_ _ ,13NnAlN3aona to . w<(02r� nO CL CEPA J Y g� � � > Iz 0 w a -------------- Im q =3NII Altl3d0tld L + Mtl0Mjd 3d005 � C .: 6 0 x x 0 CS) °0 � 0 a�z 44 Oy¢ az 109 UFQ %i SRDII DUII 10juawpedea NVId 3115 430dV1N3 N o (Dz N SVX31 00 alslaeosndaoa3olua11SIHHD SndHOO to aO Uz3aiwva 83Nanl o `b!soay, s .1W34VOV JNINIV2i130Md w o m � CL� _ N011dl-0 18 31V0 OPY NOISY131 N011ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl a _ J " F 2 £� h v, C7 LU W NI v � v � ;.� .1 ✓ t 5 �S 3 -i J rn J i W n s �i` "I o � 3 �} g us s r , --------------- INII-LI w- w 3NIl Altl3d tld z l ...e ..v.-: LL 21 ° I I I I I J¢ � p b w4 vii l � w I � � zz 111 Ell o l l l llll 'Ili gp j O s w al $z r f[1 l � I F i w ! �4 i - l I, ,- I >�r 1 l � � - LIZ . ............. —xd a I.I — I' 3NIl Altl3_dOtldWIMP f xe F i'\ �T11 IJ -_ --- --- ------------------------------------------- ;Immo r SROIA ag 6uuaau16u310 juawpedap c'j w Slt1O 3115 r, (� V wM SHX31 z00 aislaeosndaoa3o Ald0 IlSIHHO sndHOO to aOZ38 HV8 a3Nanl AN30VOV ONINIVJi 30Md o CO _ � CL NOLLdla- A8 31V0 11111111131 NO6ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON N61ls43a t� oho a fE' i z ;� �.t •y USF;. W YIPA ,� 8 � � s w Lij di .w a, 4 l IIIrUtP �= w ¢ a W W I J a' a' s o xlll�l _ ` a Z Z �� Jnr 0n ter, Y Y w Wl & 6., UJ < O O ¢ J rn w W 1 F Uw `i W W w W Z Z Q w w yr N ri N I� Q Q W f' Q I�ICN{III. rr I LU w w a fil II {fm o. OZ m ww 117.... a x3 u5 J r e \\C\\ .) f _ Qz RUJI, Jif I (LIN C9 CJ m v O 71x711 C Y ................. ( - J O O J w 1I 3 IF _ [fl (I H['f W ;;;;; 1 Ill Cn r' m c� ti� w �dg rY q N.iii i' d l U_ .v-p sa dvn r IIM �g 00 t0 ammu' N W a�. w ....... o a .............} a 1 o � � a w w wN w w l '..ffl W-UT W m [m rt w ,k3 1 y f j I W Zr co va aw o 0 T a 5 Y T zr �4 Lij o S N fII rlIllllrIfflI f W �a '. z N a of \\ 1 - J s ��•�` —�v ... aw zw T x- h SROIARS6uuaau16u31ojuawpedea b31SdW(la N SHX31 /(RItf l IVOINVH03W I JNI)4dVd(139HVf N3 � �� _ a z3aiwva I a3Nani IISIHHD sndHOO 10 Alli aLsiaeosndaoa3oaua� ��a�soae s AN30VOV ONINIV1 Ji 30Md w o CO � CL� _ NOLLd1-0 A8 31V0 11111111131 NO6ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl LL } OJ LL o ............... o J s wave ��9 ° NP, Al N W 'u ,2a0sn .. r r; w LL LL � � xs Io osf U '14 �g I� IN'III I _ . . s s`LFJF LO \ $111 D31 .o 0C) 00 00 C)O --_ ------ 0Q 0O z F Uw y , i gN r wg i i �1 r. L ".I..J e m W L u c7'G,2k, SROIAag6uuaaui6u310juawpedap NV]d HOMd 1S6 31ISOdWOO N d N o ei 3iiH5 av SVX31 00 _ 0 IISIHHD sndHOO 10 aO aisiaeosnaaoa3OAld L Z38 V4V8 I a3Nanl `b!soay, s AN30VOV ONINIVf Ji 30Md w o CO � CL NOLLdla- A8 31V0 11111111131 NOUN- ti O6ditl^.,590a u -.-. o k; o. U. Al o o 5,j w d p N � . k J G I § a 0 y � m- 4 r � e w g a,<<oI Nso I. �S i o saainlag 8uu90ui6u310 juawpedea NNId W MJ ONZ 31ISOdWOO cj N a�� Yv ` . SHX31 00 ALIO k o � � a IlSIHH3 sndHOO 10 O aisiHHasnd6OB30lld cc w o Z38 V4V 1 183NHni sti3a s XW30VOV ONINIVf Ji 30IIOd w o CO CL Nolldl—O A8 31V0 11111111131 NO6ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl V e�, era ° ------------- � o -- S IL a r w 2 J Y _____ ' W S — N x 1� U ti O:. 71 O a r f r—— — ————————————- -I Iff17IIIf f7llfff fI77iIIflIIIIIf7IIIIl7IIIIIl7iilflliLCCLIIL. C ---------------------- VYYVV 3 c7'G,2k, s901nRg6uu90ui6u310ruawpedap Vd3�]d NV]dWOld1S6 eN °' v SVX31 i 3iiH d 00 0 IISIHHD sndHOO 10 aO aisiaeosnaaoa3OAld r— N _ Z38 V4V8 a3Nanl `b!soay, s XW30VOV ONINIV?Ji 30IIOd w o CO � CL NOLLdla- A8 31V0 11111111131 NO6ditl^.,530 A8 3lVRl ON N611s43a N -- --- -- ---- -- -- b �s �. off° _ a ,a y w ezuu p a } ---------------- ; - --------- --------------- ----- F — r ; 4 ; ; f w _.-------- ; ; 3 z: 4 ; I I w I ; U saainlag 6uu90ui6u310 juawpedap 8 V32]V-NVId WOId 1S 6 `� zG� �byV d N N `r " si 3iiH' av SVX31 00 _ 0 IISIHH3 sndHOO 10 aO alsiaeosndaoa3olld 0 Z38 V4V8 a3Nanl `b!soay, s XW30VOV ONINIV?Ji 30IIOd w o CO � CL Nolldl-O A8 31V0 11111111131 N011ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl �g IL 0 7i 1 41 or §§ w -- (J ❑ <<sr e� J I - _ Y u (J 0 r, o- o , l6 �� 0 a e i n WV --------------- v � �- W ..., � fk W (� IL a F 0 c7'G,2k, S901nRs6uu90ui6u310juawpedea 9V3dV Wd HOOl�ONZ eN u' v SVX31 i 3iiH d 00 0 IISIHHD sndHOO 10 aO aisiaeosnaaoa3oAld Z38 V4V8 a3Nanl N _ `b!soay, s XW30VOV ONINIVf Ji 3OMd w o CO � CL NOIld180530 19 31V0 11111111131 N06ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl a� v ua J I J / a k ------------ J. i a. � TW.s rr11 :v j I Y 11. 8m , do r ; et/ u ' r e,a , 6 — I 1 _`_ H I TH7�11 El I El u,. h saainRg6uII 10juawpedap SNHld N a3MOHS'R HDOM`WOOH Mb 030NV�N3 N ti _ 5i�3iiHoav SVX31 00 w "M • o a IlsIHHD sndHOO 10 aO aisiaeosndaoa3o>ld o `b`s,o3a s Z38 HV8 I 83Nanl ' 00 (,D AN30VOH ONINIVJi 30Md o CO o CL 19 NOIld180530 19 31V0 11111111131 N06ditl^.,590 IL A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl 1IV, >a a" o a 17z f� I a wuj ; V o UJ uj ti u, g e ....... ..... x ...... ... _ S U uIo e u � O , _ y� 0 FF_ U zm o m .. CL uj UJ -�a � i , ------- 4 y �........ i 1.�. �� �•� � � " DS 1 a o1�...' '. UJ <<-e, T iz - ti --.az,., --:c. F�-� a w� / Fg of n 1 wA----------- CL A 0 y ..... W v u W - _ 1� J V e -------- w w u x - m v a — s 0 t r R 4 1 ,:.... w ......... n i Saoinlas 8uu90ui6u310 juawpedea NVId 3NINHZZ3W N 'R SN011035`SlIHl3a`SN Vld&ViS M SHX31 Nw 4Go 0CmI�>0 alsiaeosnaaoa3oauao 11SIHH3 SndHOO 10 AOZ38 V4V8 I a3Nanl � AN30VOH ONINIVJi 30Md o CL 19 NOIld180530 19 31V0 11111111131 N011ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl O O J c V~i a ....., } i a m 0 k _ 'O h....._______' m t � a r W J J p ~J W 2� 52 r �., -L....it R, ........... O O IL o O it h cr 63Y � vY dlL.t' OVi� W C) C4 1 0 Jw oa�a�mo-ve� -c �r 1 w :a w y LL � w s a a M . r r o w � --- r�t�rrrrrtrK �r v a } p 2 0 o G�— nwuvYv � w ew�a'w mmu F� m„ �S i o saoinlag 8uu90ui6u310 juawpedea SlIVi3O'R SNVld aJlViS 43JaHlN3cj ��n� .,o ��� ry \ , SHX31 00 �M w0 IISIHH3 sndHOO 10�U.IO aisiHHa snd6OB3o lld ca v wa Z3211W21 2I tl3N21f11 ao (�o sti3a s AN30VOH JNINIVf Ji 30Md w o CO CL Nolldl-O A8 31V0 11111111131 N011ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl ___________.____._ .,,:,w„ .x,.,.;... O (1 . .. ® o 0 Z 11 y IL Ir ww �u mLL .............. f r. O W Ill l ' .... I xm T er u e i '� seaslawr� "�"-e3vle�mivam } uam O N ULij y N d / " M £W vt r ".... z 5 s x 45 IL 2 O tia x ZZZZW w W 2 Wd :, S C�5�sb,�i o saoinRg8uuaaui6u31oCuawUedaO SNO1103S'RSNVldWiVA313030aH1N3 SHX31 00 M k ° I1SIHHD sndHOO 10 aO OusiHHD snd6OB 30 Ald m Z38 v ww a V`IV 1 183NHni ao (,D o .. AN30VOV JNINIVf Ji 30Md w o CO CL NOLLdlaos3a 19 31V0 11111111131 N011ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON N61ls43a a Z CL J g o Z F o w w f o „ ( PTtd 71 rF z '" n WN Z UD N � w G � LL) If: ® .. .. .. ll 2 INfp o -. of [lf U ' NIDI y ul] XM a U, J - wwM �¢ II IIc) (I�n Y _ F'n J �IfII R tlM,f of �Q 21 2 w H 7 w ----------------- T -_--- -- - .,' ''I"•" Nig o w " INk rn If �� Mi J 5 wN � � ' — — — — — — NCI–IL-1.i,N71" g s SaainlaS 6uu90ui6u310 juawpedap S�IVl34 NVId N o a° m s �3oav SVX31 lliH _ 00 d z38 V4V8 I a3Nani IlSIaH�SndaO�to Alli °iSiaH9S°d"0�30A�' 00 C�w �Us53a s� AN34VOV JNINIV21130Md o m a �Y CL Nolldl-O A8 31V0 11111111131 N011ditl^.,530 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl I f f , w, ., o w� . _ z- o.. z- � z w {�; ¢1 ...... Q T •__ 0 Q { J o J _ J 0 nt O "' a - CL o 000 n 0, '5 few e Y1 5 (� f J KF J wa wa w , w i. of 0 c - t zz :.. IL a a a AA. CL 5 N CL 16 l 4V wa w1 war z z z' `� Jg CL Jg aN aN aN ... M �p g x ' r w jw r 4 z z t �: ...f z:.. gw IL CL CL 5I 5w a n `w Nco 4-- qr2 f as SaainlaS 6uu90ui6u310 juawpedap S�IVl4 NVId N N v SVX31 l�3llH00 0 IlSIHH3 sndHOO 10 aO alslaeosndaoa3olld LO V4V8 a3Nanl oo AN34VOV ONINIV2il 30Md oo m(� o _ � CL Nolldl-O A8 31V0 11111111131 N011ditl^.,530 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl r � � IL IL I I 1 loe.� A J rg N - f . o Z.. r.. 5� gg v_ o. OL, a„ aN tG r . N F d,sy e_ f t o..LL ip W., W W aw a aw aN ag _ 'dr L m � uj ~ W q O LL. r IL N a j. J .. a FFF H SaainlaS 6uu90ui6u3{o{uawpedap ' S�IVl4 NVId N wM v SVX31 l 3 l i H00 0 IlSIHH3 sndHOO 10 aO alsiaeosndaoa3olld cc V4V8 a3Nanl oo AN34VOV ONINIV2il 30Md oo m(� o _ � CL Nolldl-O A8 31V0 11111111131 N011ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON N1115143tl d� i 5 _ J 1 G i G W 5 a JFK Z, W t g o� 0IL � a 5 z -- 1 w - - - N t .tla[ d �1 w h r �� ap 50 r< t ayr 90 499 4 4 1 "-"- w � 4 �erc ,� l aS a� N %� f 's sl W r� C._ zg zg 0 z IL� IL 0. a gaS � s w a 615, a 5 23 CL 2r w y e S� gIL co g 4 gg $ , f saainlag 6uu90ui6u310 juawpedea SNVld JOMJcj N 0�0 IgYS o s i 3 i i H o a v IISIHH`d sndd0'd 10 Alla aisiHHasnaaoa�oAld r— �s'� w a Z38 V4V 1 183NHni ao (�o AN30VOV`JNINIVf Ji 30Md w o CO s � CL Nolldl-O A8 31V0 11111111131 N011ditl^.,590--------------- A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl w fLL a x„_ I � e / r w , lillfC.'' l a / s N iCV ��J,R7TP gay l a alq ` ag1 ---------------- ((lly w I w �w u � . IL IL j IL ' 1`) Ir $y I e a 7 � r a a cw ---------------------- a � V � l a�F a� �S i o saainlag 8uu90ui6u310juawpedea SlIVi34 HOiVH 300b'830VHS Nf1S ��n�� i N ��� ry \ , SHX31 00 w 0 IISIHH3 snda00 10 aO aisiHHasnd6OB3olld oo Z38 V4V 1 183NHni ao (�o AN30VOV ONINIVf Ji 30Md w o CO s � CL Nolldl—O A8 31V0 11111111131 N06ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON N61ls43a was wK �� �LJLJ .... ., 0 0� 2 J oQn y w 2w (A TIL uj y a� gW �a "T HUM 7 y i.. J2 2 O O W U U U uj W W c Q p "k06� a D N w N ---- ------ UD 4 Y �S Cr,sb�i o saDinlag 8uu90ui6u3 10 juawUedapsiivi3a a cicjnoS'S NlVdO d00H `� ��n� SHX31 00 aHDsnd6OB0Ald0 IlSIaH�Sfda0�10 Ai 0)Z38IV4V 83NHni ao AN30VOV JNINIVJi 30Md CO � o � CL Nolldl-O 19 31V0 11111111131 N011ditl^.,5K A8 3lVRl ON N6115143tl s 5 I I r t H i f a J W W W 2 W D. rK ui coa �d k W d w W IL n. IL IL �H „ C, _ a w LL w p t _ r a "Y p �LL { F.s, s c7'G,2k, saainRS buli 10 juawpedap SNOUVA313 aJMOIX3 CO Q S �bV d N d N o ei 3iiH5 av SVX31 00 _ 0IlsIHHD sndHOO 10 aO aisiaeosnaaoa3OAld a Z38 HV8 I 83Nanl rn (�o `b!soay, s XW30VOV ONINIVf Ji 30Md w o CO � CL� _ NOLLdla- A8 31V0 11111111131 NO6ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON N61ls43a G l L _ 2 rt w Q W uj J. H %" - JJ W I AI IUJ AJ r�M QU �w W .. , .. z IIM s LL w a , Mfr w \ LL �. z0 Et ul w F r m fG W 1 WW " N a LLLL a pp J I `k x } z n, �� r.r SIRDIARS bull 101uawpedap SN0003S ONImIns N N o i i i H5 a v SVX31 0p . o IISIHHD SndHOO 10 ALIO alslaeosndaoa3olual Z38 V`IV8 I 83Nanl `b!soay, s .1W30VOV ONINIV2Ji 30Md w o m � CL� _ NOIldl-0 A8 31V0 11111111131 NOI1maP,S9(1 A8 3lVRl ON N611s43a v I"-1tWi r rll ' g„ -- - �m rr Io n zau 0 m z mm z Ell fl I0� w �� II'lll w f m w �.. SRIN rn ED mm rn cD n o uil om o =w " W =w o Im rrr 00 � r11� m s W- o A INI11 IRE ® I"rl'm uIm p p rll W111111"T � E m J I i° ing (r ul m V/ n� VI WLU I E 1""iii' LU 'm n I"M FFFFIEF _ W ,,III I Ho JEW I� UII �i;� alUilll °rir_ii — J, III T - rlFoi MID ' I� V�llllll 1J1,till UJ m ilk � II1°Irl J m Fl Ul "�I � III I j f �. fll J Ill" rl.III I El W J rlEl tD y , rll f� I-- ----LL _ r rlSl� _i_I �Il i 1 r ; Nk �I» r Z ,r - ' - Im-r ° ICI IrH� _m W ttl 'Q)' _ J ff f III Wt➢ I I (n IC" c z m S J In.6 -IUIiC 1-____ W I[II II�ICII - - - r I - v.J nINI n��m. z �( w tuWiII IS I�L �.I E Li 1W5.( , fllllA I �11 Ow f 1111111, rill INIIIII n 111 - i�- - 11 1W m ro- II ILII I� - uiu OF --------------- --_- ----- f J t W ________ ,,,YJ lolro J i W fl-W j DCII �_ y L"-------- III �" Ip SIU - VrII SIRDIARS DUII 101uawpedap SNOUO3S ONImIns N o SVX31 00 _ o IlSIHH3 sndHOO 10 aO alslaeosndaoa3olld Z38 HV8 I 83Nanl w (�o `b!soay, s AW30VOV ONINIVf Ji 3OMd w o CO � CL� _ Nolldl-0 A8 31V0 11111;11131 No;1maP,S9(1 A8 3lVRl ON N61ls43a I�»Ili NII u { p llil {qq -WIl % III Ifl a rll- .l l all _ ill`} �, l olr lnirl�l l Iu- , I mm u Im mI I (D 1 U Ng o o �. . w i w all w u---- II iii l{ I m � z - z i p 3 1 u»lii m u Crlg R ^' i �lrlm IIID I rrl V�...................... I i �. III71» IIrrIIn III rIl �1. e..;. FEITFIJ J ------ m »w S i1°i 1 FI--------------------- r LLl iiu m10n_I 7 .r`lu mIl-'Fu r o ----------------------- -- o `V z uj z Ell Ll 13;>• IIllllll t ,,..., lllfl� J w fII�i m F- m m ml r J11111 r � [I1°[p Mal (, (ID r ll'ri"''� r� l�mm �riIu I a �" I� � c Itll MHI r r �., i Sol u _ it ;� -- - ------- lI� � '� _ 'u irks RM b --- rowJ ,I�r�l II( - l.11 s °fin ` «rw ( .mmm. —.. �IIlul r.I F Fl Of 2 - -.-.-.-.-.--- IJ- I[Il !", F , � 1 il- II�IICfI SII IID IIS WON �I r rJ saain,ag 6uII 10 Iuawpedap SN011035THM N o _ SVX'31 rn� � 00 0 IlsIHHD sndHOO 10 aO aislaeosndaoa3OAld Z38 V4V8 I a3Nanl AN30VOV JNINIVJi 30Md o CO � o � CL NOLLdla- A8 31V0 11111111131 NOI1maP,S9(1 A8 3lVRl ON N611s43a SR J� I II ca� e r _ 1 U= $33y¢3 m W Fv w w- " t 1 r 5 - w �ll f: ........., _... ..,... _ ., _._ .._.._....... ...... ._. I J. r I F N " 5 UR 9 R£< w lHu L) r `I n iIf I€ Fv FV w g c a a. al 1 9 IF [I] sfI f3� IR If1 SROIARS 6uu90ui6u310 juawpedea w G� ,*Y� o SN0110351�HM N N i o �s °3LIHoav SVX31 00 _ a � '� d z38 V4V8 I a3Nani IlSIaHD SndaOO to Alli ois'a"oSndaoa3° a' C�w �Us53a s AN30VOV JNINIVf Ji 30Md o m a �Y CL NOLLdla- A8 31V0 11111111131 NO6ditl^.,530 A8 3lVRl ON N611s43a fl geo%cr J d ped- yymzyz IF W=Y J )� IF 06 ,ao i IF 4 111 ) NI ll z 7-^- _---_ I OF uj I I J w I Q d� Te ME,rNu l i 'S 6_.. �.; II 7,= t� y 11 w a Ir I TlM �0 p el � MI r w d Yrl o z - r y - IIII IIITVII W Q r 0 saainlag 6uu90uf6u310 fuawpedap SN0110351HM N wM SVX31 o� 00 0 IISIHH3 sndHOO 10 aO alslaeosndaoa3olld LO V4V8 I a3Nanl AN30VOV JNINIVJi 30Md o CO � o _ � CL Nolldl-O A8 31V0 11111111131 N011ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON N6115143tl $ W { Uq6 NIS a ) � f I, d y'fi � W;$ 1 ' ( U �� lH l _ 1 r4m—r` -�--- -------- � r,r N EE Wd, �r MW F �� 4 EE �4 H Lou) �L r M J?F w S d � I I f W`. Irl I J .r. ,➢� .0. _ __ .r _ )rl r;ll i= l;rl 1. l llI= Q;1 J I I Ixjjr�rll rl r 1 - II a c saainlag 6uu90ui6u310 juawpedap SN011035THM N o w� s SVX'31 rn 000 IISIHH3 sndHOO 10 aO alsiaeosndaoa3olld cc V4V8 I a3Nanl AN30VOV JNINIVJi 30Md o CO � o _ � CL Nolldl—O A8 31V0 11111111131 N011ditl^.,530 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl �S'�� I •Y t f llrll ulp, � C1 '0!PS EY$C s 6 �tie a W rc f YI YII` r a. ........ II t; F lf� � fj g„Y r ' , r � „ !I uuj L, - a I ` J i � w N T LL tt( fl �w 41 I it ,r � ^- •fl� F Irr II I i n f � o Qd LL 3 I u l----------------- . � r w N w l r-- F p 4 r y12 w saainlag 6uII 10 luawpedap SN0110351HM N w SVX31 rn o 000 IlsIHHD sndHOO 10 aO als!aeosndaoa3olld r— (�o _ `b`s,3a s Z38 V`IV8 I a3Nanl oAN30VOV JNINIVJi 30Md o CO � CL Nolldl-0 A8 31V0 11111!11131 No!1maP,S9(1 A8 3lVRl ON N61ls43a rx —moo w px�wa� � S oeo��� II t fi o ; g X852 zs <yz� u a J f' •1 I� f f r � rjwlLL 8,I ul 'I lI y � a 2 ll 2 ....1 _rl N 5 , ^ a J12 -r u 1 r sl }..w o I I r II \� fl l �l� r '. v., r a It u Ai saainrag 6uu90ui6u3 ro ruawpedea SN011035THM N o w 5 SVX'31 rn 000 IISIHH3 sndHOO 10 aO alslaeosndaoa3OAld 0Z38 V4V8 I a3Nanl AN30VOV JNINIVJi 30Md o CO � o � CL Nolldl—O 19 31V0 11111111131 N011ditl^. K 777F-- ON N611s43a a'n W{ �I{ 3oosf M919u ` I I I Iwo Xfloyy w r H � �g I II w ............................... _.... ......... j o�s�� L � �o ���,oi� zee, f s II : w r L ~♦ o E' " H 1I ti r-".eee.. N f r ( f r� LL w t1 3 1 11 5-- f, a :� .ts ar 5 I IIT_f,(I ry w ---- -- El 0 dlµ E - � w wIIIl 21 z z a w S r� w ] 0 ui x N I________________ ry:i 1 €p S. _w d �' y xy 3 I1 \���"'.M1•�1131MxtI I; F .'� -11-x- Il�llrrr If u J " 4 5 yl saainlag 6uII to luawpedap SN0110351HM N r— SVX31 o 000 IlsIHHD sndHOO 10 aO alsiaeosndaoa3olld Z38 V4V8 I a3Nanl AN30VOV JNINIVJi 30Md o CO � o � CL Nolldl-0 A8 31V0 11111111131 N06ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON N611s43a ..... ... LL n al 3, w.. i i J 1 � IIS ill r ,.tl CIl m w w HIM M IN 1,11 I 12 E LL I II z _ h' < rrt o L'-dl �� fly, ,:fl` J,Ifl ,'� W� „• y r N 5 t� w w 1E a ' IIT—II III Ili I.— � P-1 ffr 1 .�� .. F��Q�. rwLL it I , —rl I} Q v t �I 1 I � J tUEU ) I 1 mn mn ' .......... J � IJ SKIT bull 1okuawpedap w wSNOI10351HM � SVX316 cj o 00 alsiaeosndaoa3oAid g0 IISIHHO sndHOO to AOZ38IV4V8 I a3Nanl AN30VOV ONINIVJi 30Md o m(� o _ � CL Nolldl-0 A8 31V0 11111111131 N06ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl 7-7] R II TV y w J 1 i � IIID m q �w l i kk � w� f — J fill f ff d —' N N s as t �w �n r roes 11� u� Tv 82 ; t a II �q 2 w liF UJ r IT M AlMITl R D I.G. saoinRg 6uu22ul6u3 10 juawUedapSIIVAG TIHM 439HVH N3 `� 0�0 aisiHHasnd6OD�OAldo s (lSIaH3 SfdH0O 10 ASZ38IV4V 183NHni AN30VOV ONINIVJi 30Md aw o � CL NOIldl-0 A8 31V0 11111111131 NOI1maP,S9(1 A8 3lVRl ON N611s43a s g rc r 5 w v I p W 77 0 W O pW. C7 ac's K� W: •••ice._. O 5 (L !� U Ln 12 6 f p G 5 uj �•t � .L � 2 � � ow, 1 W a .f,g + \L a p w ar co tu og (L` ... T pr � N w 12R d G 5 [ uj i' L a rp a12gEI w �w W O C) a / m w lk r' n.O � d� ti M q � a PEEM, i H -IT 6-1 11 i12 6 5 E a Zx z Ov V N OJ p U. AV ., 0. \ u \ OJT f f�r l 1� O12 iE �,y w N g w� 00 GLL s? f f k' t ,, saoinlag 6uu90ui6u3 10 juawUedapSlIVAG 11VM 439HVlN3 `� SQ �bkV CV N o 3iiH\a'v SVX31 00IlslaH�sndao��o ui� ole�HNosndaoa3olld a Z38V4V8 83Nanl _ (�o `4soaa s .. .1W30VOV JNINIVf Ji 30Md w o m � CL� _ Nolldl-O A8 31V0 11111111131 N011ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl l a � a =1 c o IL Z �g EE Lt a. o }e W w rt 21 o a + 5 , 12..... ..... I o J d > J u. W F— z 71k : - p ages � r -A t. 0 r r / c U O \ Q V w u, N w; L IL LO uj I L w o a „ > ILU w w v J F5 ' - sp,t4: s: G� uj : EE a 1N1 1e l a `$ y� W a iNp �u.N •I I 10 J,^ sa0inlag 8uuaaui6u310 juawpedea S3dAi 3WHbd'8 W00'3mi3HOS x000 SHX31 d 0p a o a i H 0 a v IlSIliH�Sf1da0O i ALIO o`' m I 0 Oismeasnaa0adoual � fn w a ,yF : z3aiwva a3Nanl a= AN30VOH ONINIVf Ji 3OMd o CO C m s Nolldl—M 19 31V0 01111111131 N0llditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl o _ 6 od a 0o w `A O a LL ° w S Ail w .s f i� a H a 5 s at a n. W W8 �. O v O .. J r•S O6 ON -2 5 9 ¢ x C4S i'a✓J �. �� � Y I 0, ,T z a���a�„ossa i 411 U U w' .o a � mui Ix K �„�°ery�m�m�mmmm�m m�mm�m�m�mm� pO iplaaaaaaa p O LL 5 yjca F LL ___ rr �,�, 2 �,�, h� �,J�, h¢ �, '',LL $ ahs �,h�,vi Y, huh�h Y, Hog aha a� y $ ¢ huh�,vih�, �, �`3,`.�, LL. �¢''.. ____ __ _ _ _ __ __ W W W 'a.r.<-,-,aa aaaawwa aa�aaawwa aaaaaa �; z�aa�a- wwaa aw aaa as as aaaaa wa aaz� _ w aaa wwwaa as as ww asa,,, W W j _ O .__ W 11 11 11 11 0� a g ... .. .. .... M.",.,M Ips s ,., "r .. a zasaa 5 333 iA- '� ;8537' °a omo� Ms3ss. 0, Y,B?;'.� 3�" ',. ,FmF„��� mmm���m G �S Cr,sb�i o saainlag 8uu90ui6u310juawpedea SNOUVA3�3-IIVMNiviH 10 ��n� i N SHX31 00 c60 L 3 L I H a d I IlSIaH`J Sf1da00 to ALIO OisiHHD snd6OD 3O Ald Z38IV4V 1 183NHni (�o .. XW30VOV ONINIVf Ji 30Md w o CO CL Nolldl-O A8 31V0 11111111131 N011ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON N1115143tl �I �m�malH-olInsc ......... ........oamu ......... ... .......:o of .................. I � y r J y 2 w ap So q W ............. *.: ,l n ff fS ^ w ------------- a � ^ � W w t > w �� w snnrnnn � 3 :s C HI `� s vv,s nn W n d Q' .0 avnO y � r sn rziv a , } ry rven , I nEE _ o 1z w' } o m 9 r,8tl z, -— Q w° O �S w I 19 ,w.z l� ilnm roa�ui-... ............ I W , � Fw wg „, snnm�3n N O LLl t. `'r l O e =n Ann' n vR d 0 S A � r.. -- _ evn,nie Jr nvn,�=n � ..... ------------ -- A z3 z3 A. z3 ,..r r s r n ------ --- ------- ----- ---- ---------- -------------------- ---------- ------------------ --------- ---------- e G `✓ w ........... i Lj '-'Aa"�l"0-11 I'll-A-1111a.u„se c7'G,2ka, saOIARS6uuaaui6u310juawpedea SNOUVA3�31NOad3bOlS N R o? SVX31 00 c6 aislaeosnaaoa3o uaaZ38IHV8 N I 83Nanl (�o `b!soay, s XW30VOV ONINIVf Ji 30Md w o CO � CL NOLLdla— A8 31V0 11111111131 NO6ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl N �j �1 O � c t oa.o n r w a LL' — Davi!3a � rveio�an w I� 2 ads <6� Tffa i y av�f �r.. O z G sfa fa 3n z u � � w J O 0 r ------------ o iad vv IGeaan at oa.ca a a I N � J t- aifloaxx K� i Z� ............................ ... ,w= v,f �Ifd o > N Uw� W 2 CL � ��lw5w :W ¢ -----------------{ O'l w fv �f� ftin,w= 9Vtl163N 411tlIl3J 1/.faa/1 fat O�l,Z'a _ W g N " w W' x. S'I VI .o'iB (- nag Nl0az1 �f o tl/t itl o3ltllul3tl .V IE3N r , } ' IOI3N 0 vlf iN3E' — (� w 11 I� K� o n2 3d �3d w 1�ItiA� olln, 0 2- I� „ ,9wn�fd IN" n2 3d P � w 2pfd �Ilo ,o3a I v ° 2 M11 eY _ F a . to saainlag 6uu90ui6u310 juawpedap SlIVi3O MOONIM N o i�3 i i H o a v SVX31 00 oO � 0 IISIHH3 sndHOO 10 Allo alsiaeosndaoa3olua� a w o Z38IV4V8 I a3Nanl (�o .kN30VOV ONINIVf Ji 30Md w o m s � CL N011dl-O A8 31V0 11111111131 N011ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl z a a oo a 3 \\\ - O 0 ° Q Y W uj n Otu m Oar L—J: uj Jr N21 ,Sa w t Z mss ` m Oal• 2 71 s W., W uj e ',. g V ,A w 00 y 5 a O �+ -------------------------- Q Q J uj O O O O - ^L t '> 21 q 21 ; p f � � �J a� w r t � m•. � � �; .: ' s =N z ,. z51 ' w w w u w °uj � N 0 0 0 z' YI saainlag 6uu90ui6u310 juawpedap SlIVi3O MOONIM N o l�3 l i H o a v SVX31 00 _ �°6 � IISIHH3 sndHOO 10 Allo alsiaeosndaoa3olua� r- 0 o Z38IV4V8 I a3Nanl (�o .kN30VOV ONINIVf Ji 30Md w o m s � CL NOIldl-O A8 31V0 11111111131 N011ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl d 5 2 �s F SG z r ? g0 Lq O00 UJ — ^L f C7 uj r LU / CD 1_ ory I f � wsi � w o -�a raP CV z 0 Q o o Y x w z w z y y. ma Ir co o: U U O, Oo,r. J J Q r z wo w f .d a , "5 Q y 5s: O, q 2 q" V Q It m q- m U 0 0 K /7- 0 q J Qw f 1' ^� 2N f�� 5 CMMfl- N f 5 n : 3 S w d` 1w 00* 0 uai q ai 0 q ¢ N a u CN u .a � ? saainlag 6uu90ui6u310 juawpedap SlIVi3O MOONIM N o � SVX'31 . w o 0(m0 °� aiaeosndaoaolaa0 AZ38IV4V8 I a3Nanl kN30VOV ONINIVJi 30Md � o � CL N011dl-O A8 31V0 11111111131 N011ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl G` 2 O a 3 3 4Vn 3 w K w / w Ir w°--- ---- uj 7 f � d w w ¢ g m� f] o �i fg r 1 J = 00 W _: �... W /r _� Ory ' s �p w _ r � w� 3� w4 3" LO w � u r U ug r m 4 N Q J f 0 _ >q 0Q >rr >$ 'P z .p VI d� d ��........ ..... W 4 — J J y W � w W J 2 f ? a fag 3 aIL z ¢ A u ui � Ci co uj as oe g r V L�J, J w w 1 W N 1 J W u� �¢ W W N T a O saainlag 6uu90ui6u310 juawpedap SlIVi3O MOONIM N o � SVX'31 �o 0(m0 °� aiaeosndaoaola0 ACD V4V8 I a3Nanl kN30VOV ONINIVJi 30Md � o _ � CL Nolldl-O A8 31V0 11111111131 N011ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl a < O UJ a, = _ J 04 s �. a;w o � m � � Q J Q f 5 W 4 W � d ^L � Ill ~♦ :1 a t 3 w , z. pQ J ry wk J L 2 U N z K e' �g �p Q� �N saain�ag 6uuaaui6u310 wawpedea w b*Y� o s�Iel3a WOO N o w� �s sVX'31 00c6 aisiaeosndaoa3oauaa Z38 V4Va I a3Nanl AN30VOV JNINIVJi 30Md o mC� o _ � CL aOiidl—O ne siva 11111111131 aOddla a ne siva Oe ru�isn3a O d t O W •: O o o 1 Eg g a 4 N LU 7 t F Jg2 ow H _ O O fY o :O Ln wr w § d ' t `d2 5 J p Y u ujN TV W I .... D , Ill 2 ' m �y IL Lij o r. 00 r3= o 12�f o T Q Q 0 0 __ K4 Kir saalnag 6uu90ul6u'310 luawpedap slIel3a ooa N o r-- .m sVX31 00 c6 alslaeosndaoa3olua0 Z38IV4V8 I a3Nanl AN30VOV JNINIVJi 30Md CO � o � CL Nolldl-O A8 31V0 11111111131 N011ditl^.,530 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl 00 0 i N `. aW I � � 1 I ry �w E5 ie7 Y/ IL IL n _ IL JI �v o ° d I �L p it U a. o L —i R, O O w O i 6 X? I'rX? ss www WS -- -----� LL W V a5w i tj Q � O pv, O `3 K -w a, K 'S n�l 0 V N a ww ;� Wk v, d r r h SaainRs 6uu90ui6u310 juawpedap Ndld N SHX31 ONI113O 031OTJ3a HOOl31S 6 311SOdWOO 5l'J31I H011tl � ` 00 aisiaeosndaoa3o Aldw11SIHHD sndHOO 10 aOz38IwVa I a3Nanl ci (�o �s AN30VOV ONINIVf Ji 3OMd w o CO '- Z ti3a CL u NOIld180530 19 31V0 11111111131 N06ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON N61ls43a CL u Uw If g �u p` Ali w Lu p Q aW Qr s 2, II Illi `� I, w W w �'�_ , � '� I � w � Lv �e v a {( � � -- e _ � m•- ---- ------ - - - ol ------------------- ------------------ CL 018 yw „ AR zw I i w w w Y w .. ZsN F1 - V yw x w z I .i. U w ai r �S y `tip ,e w w • r I r v w tP w' x hl r J�l I H E h SaainRS 6uII 10{uawpedap d diad N (� Wd JNI1130 4 d3 31031a WOld 1Sa13 N ti 5 i SHX31 � a � > '' w Z3211WV8 83Nanl I151aH3 sndaoO 10 uiO aisiaHosndao 3o au _M o s A tl AIA30VOV JNINIVf Ji 30Md w o CO ,ti3a CL v = NOIld180530 19 31V0 11111111131 N06ditl^.,530 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl ( ' ------------ ---- '' ----------- --- -- �' ---------- ...,. 0 00000 x . _ - - ---- - - , p w { T s ............................................................................ a o g' a L �e CL I s _ v m _ - w �LL _ x a o e 0 a J as rz � n tae J w --------------------- s w -! + 1 L r s yy a a 4�K ...... < <e,� CL a J f v ~ WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWI � �. o a � r 6 II e I a � > d. 7 -------------------- ------------ 0 0 5 @ 2" h SKIARS 6uu90ui6u310 juawpedap 8 diad N SHX31 Wd JNI1130 4310TIAd WOIJ 1Sb13 N I� wy,.y �, si;�3i Haad 00 _ w z3aiwva a3Nanl IISIHH3 sndHOO to aO aisiaHosndao 3o u tl ' AN30VOV JNINIVf Ji 30Md w o m / ° �Ysq 5 � NOIld180530 19 31V0 11111111131 N06ditl^.,530 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl 9 u x r. - IL o n. y N +{ s x 1 LJ r c r , � m 1 n s , — w � ° � 4 ° 17---- ------ --- S IARS 6uu90ui6u310 juawpedap 8 diad N Wd JN11130 431031Ad a001�aN003S N ti 5i�3iIHoav SVX31 00 w Z38IV4V8 I a3Nanl 11s1aH�sndao��o ui� afslaHosndao 3o au _� o _ s A tl AN30VOV JNINIVf Ji 30Md w o CO ,ti3a CL v = NOIld180530 19 31V0 11111111131 NOIlditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl -I ,. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ l m rx, t � o ^ ! I i I w � ! ' 1 a ok 2 I ' o ' ' O as + r_xvu ll w _ 19 i r ,. ------------------ ----------------------------------- i _________ tel.'... 'c w r r yy G �u s iw 0 w; k wG d w \\ c z d IL .I J _ W la d U �w N J —,_. Iuj S I � C, �4 cr.<sb� SaoinlaS 6uu90ui6u310 juawpedea NV]d HSINH b001d 1S6 31ISOdW00 N a 4�� o SHX31 = OO I1SIHH`J sndHOO 1 Allo cc Z3211HV8 183NHni __ olsmeasnaaoa3olual kN30VOV ONINIVf Ji 30Md '- "- CL " Nolldla M A8 31V0 11111111131 NOUN- r H3 a fi ? J5 ffi ;3 I JF,F ° Z97 �� o uj Ez E 1-. [ p [ l kv N a s; �� & :; a a�� ........ .... 1 l✓ �� 5 dy Sogt 'N xX,N �qq O a, m �7 177 ,n y t y g C' W' x °z p s w � w w "d C Jr s x eu ,E P P` Y � KGF x,r �r \ o / ,,. , w 9 1 ei 1✓ P (31VNd3i]V) o � sa�in�ag 8uuaaui6u3�o�uawUedaO N (D c s`* SHX31 NV]d HSINH b001d 1S6 31ISOdW00 N a ti ti sl�3ll Hoav z Opp 7E c 0 Z3211Wtl212I3N21f11I1SIHH`J sndHOO 10 ALIO 01SIlllosnd6OD3OAld r- ci a r4 � AN30VOH ONINIVf Ji 30Md w a m '- p CL " Nolldla M A8 31V0 11111111131 NOI1maP,S9(1 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl F-e f a G ti r uj Y _qZ' w a uj I 6[fCL Zuj uj uj 0 r i ] i [h CL � � r 1"� w cv^f, 5 W i L x W s z . n v L� O " p G1 Os z O pMEB rn ft 8' � Y w GZE:.a y d'. ..... 8 e'y a,�. cr.<sb� SRDIARS 6uu90ui6u310 juawpedea NVId HSINI3 b0M3 ONZ 311SOdHOO N a SHX31 = OO "s i�3 i IH oav IlSIaHJ Sf1da001 Allo00 Z3211V4V8 1 83NHni __ olsmeasnaaoa3olual XN30VOVONINIVf Ji30Md w a m '- "_ CL " Nolldl—M 19 31V0 11111111131 NOI1maP,S9(1 A8 3lVRl ON NA115143tl 2 IL f8 f 5 �A I r n _ MM f u b� yy `vl AFP X _ } �I it� I 861 X�✓ d d�, M'�1pfd 5 �� Sod � W... � ,, �':h 5 2,d, 5 1 M. A". D2 L....... C 'AE m�b�' i Pry J P,I �zl gx7 A w I m 8W 3 - If uj A yry F Z Yuj W F ZT H ~ Ir 7 IL Ir Zuj 0 7i W N w: x �x V 2 xK ( x x„ o H w w. rz SaoinlaS 6uu90ui6u310 juawpedea (31Mi3i*NVId HSINId HOOId 439HVf N3N a (0 2 4�� o SVX31 = OO H sn `3 dOO 1 ALIO Z3211I1SIHH V4V8 183NHni __ olsmeasnaaoa3o>,ual rn XW30VOVONINIVf Ji30Md w a m '- "- CL " NOIld180530 19 31V0 11111111131 N011ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON N^715143tl O � r J ~< N Z W p 0 m _ V 2 Vfu W w w slaw z w z w w J Q i a ; I r t� W rr i w� ----------------------------- r r r j 3 tr y F , cr.<sb� sa�in�ag 8uuaaui6u3�o�uawUedaa 3inO3HOS HSINU W00b N a 4�� oSHX31 = 00 "s i i"3 A A o Y, I1SIHH`J Snda001 Allo CD Z32 HVH Mai __ oismeasnaaoa3oaual IN o o AN30VOVONINItf2i KnOd w a m "- n " - aoiidiaos3a ne siva ora Nois3137ao¢maa ne siva oe ru�isn3a o r x a �1`1g��6w HEW 1 oil 1 L Sal t Q �C 7 t J ' ts Rims s - 1 8 pit O 11 9 HIS Ill i_ O E a5 PUT e � sil, � 1s s,t'w"ati oa Huns � c c c 3 �� � � w it�vccvcc wsxas aw { a y � f ;00 u 'a Hc ILL u:. aurcr R�t,�v4 EEE cu..�uEa�.c��.vur:cu�.vuLL� u���.�.cuE;tO ��r: Emu LL LLvu 25 €t>i a4 ku LL>iuLLvuLLv �v4..vu T - ,LL � � �:�, `a„E` r cu..�u�a�.c��.vur:cu.vu a LL LL uLL u N,q J E aLLEEEEMEM q MA _ccE LL Emu 4 LL RE 2 E kY, 2: LL f EM REMau.. ..aur:cu..vuLLcu�vu..vu c ..�uEa EEvuLLcuLLE E EELL..cc r >iE N' LE LL Z; h1h AN 6 6 mln-, "�""R� �� ? "� s r. r ar 46'rm6'r�m6'r tn'�s`r by to by- cr.<sb� SRDIARS 6uu90ui6u310 juawpedea SNOIIHA3�3 HORHINI N a 4�� o SVX31 = 00 c= Z321I1SIHH3 sn_d_HOO 1aO alsmeasnaaoa3ola HV8 _ kN30VOV ONINIVf Ji 30Md CO C w CL Nolldl—M 19 31V0 11111111131 NOI1maP,S9(1 A8 3lVRl ON Nb15143tl -� 3fi 3fi a 3fi 3fi f4�s - O r d d N �+ N `�N r� N Nd "� � ass s , y - x fq W I w e pW' 2 Z W ; i- �. 0 2 I w Q Ia 3ivua3iniO-.Nw�mr- \ / LL , h I ' I 31tlNa31lelrwNtml3➢1 p w 7 w — w I I , a d u � N EZIrU I w' -- - LO —ee — r�,NeN m l ad W ` I I 11 c+) I 1 y J r fuJ lf���I I a s r I w � I s m V7 I ff-.z ai - f — cvi �oere r ., 3. o v lu I f fvNdil v =NVM nf f r 3i i cr.<sb� SRDI ag 8uuaaui6u310 luawpedea SNOIIHA3�3 H01H3AI N a CSO 4�� o SVX31 = 00 Z321I1SIHH0 sn_d_a001 aO olsmeasnaaoa3oaual 2ca c� o AN30VOHONINIVf Ji30Md w a CO '- "_ CL " INUIN- 18 31V0 11111111131 NOUN^.,590 A8 111. ON ISI43N a � 5 I 1 s I g�A � r r IIII „l n IIII ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ..... 1 ...-III}'` -�" .. IIII g< s�, IIII IIII ;t w lI Yn I�r� Uw LII� u IIII O L 1 wo r IIII II r r> , a r n II u _ „ _ e h; m a � r � a • LL � 9J y m 1 - ,;� w �LL m w, w A w �n 6 w eLL 1 ... .17 � LL ; � s fi. LL � d u � o - w rc =`w a N EZ'rciNrs�N L El . sssnnsiarz- aza^- a I c r: � I } s x, In. _ � I O r A - r� "- OPSN tlM ills I u ••, ,�, O� I Naf1 tl ill cr.<sb� SROIARS 6uu90ui6u310 juawpedea SNOIIHA3�3 HORHININ a CSO 4�� o SVX31 = OO Z321I1SIHHJ sn_d_HOO 1 aO olsmeasnaaoa3ola ca M o AN30VOVONINIVf Ji30Md w a m I '- IS "- CL I " - Nolldl—K 19 31V0 11111111131 N011ditl^.,530 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl w W wu C7 G`d 6i Gd G.y /+ /w /GIS 61 d u ;fat I..:a °`.1 " '� ~♦ w 3 E I w LO w N I p y ¢ o[ I - a'z vnnin, I IVMi,� li o,� 3 , C w .! �... w� w t......... oe s� �4 � O O uj X �_ . uj TEJ LL w 4 w N .s w w F � O a z ti w " w t `. ..' w R _ S W r 4 ......._. .... ... ILL. x - , :. 5 / X �I N —. I _ W�.. „.. a z I w �' � EZILJ ' O0 w o ---- _ ,�.... �I a I ........G 1 ........ x F i. w F 00 _ w I uJ Q w ¢ ¢ � o w� w J a cr.<sb� SRDIARS 6uu90ui6u3101uawpedea SNOIIHA3�3 HOIH3INI N a 4�� o SVX31 = 00 TN0 z381 I I1SIHH3 Snd_a001 aO O1SIlFq Sldl0030 AND) N C>w J ' AN30V0V ONINIVf Ji 30Md COa CLSn^rn INUIN- A8 31V0 11111111131 NOUN- A8 111. ON IISI43tl Li uj 8 a , R uj uj » Fl �w � w N r m n w n mx _ 1 x.`..$ r y r �a u , y w Z ,r »= w. w w e b" Er w U, w fm w w n I I W � w � n� } r, s u y w U k / F s —�- � / y Qz 1- } o o W b ...... "" ....V.... O rs N p Uj 01" y r LLLJJJ A r m w M W W R I�• --------------- ��... a, IJ r, o \ 1 �.. ....... EVM .... W• ... u M o Gj o .__ w s - y a - o T ; w JF Op y e w m w Sm [TI » i N � �p v - m n E7 II Jpj; i w ----------------- r n, w 1 m & » r s ,. NVM i m NVM iii cr.<sb� SIRDIARS Buuaaui6u310 juawpedea SNOIIHA3�3 HOIH3INI N a 4�� o SVX31 = 00 Z321I1SIHH0 sn_d_a001 aO olsmeasnaaoa3olualLo HV8 ca AN30V0V ONINIVf Ji 30Mdw a CO '- "_ 8 " - Nolldla M A8 31V0 11111111131 NOUN- A8 111. ON ISI43tl O WLI O �. 'iIII ~ J ` .. N ��; 4� d fyl M1r a-, T l..J r ,T, l pw '•.LL .... F Im Guj d Q 0 } I y a .. 1 r W LL' J s �„ a .0 u� � o � � s� 0 O O W I � .., I .. F LL N O 77o O Q -IT � U - � O m � "� F✓ ow I f - --- &.......... .... CV p C_ ry u w ... Wg _ '_ w L- nn q O ....,,. I v V... d ..... EA LF, u,o i 8 �H —— miv r r O O LL � u LL © , 0 W, w _ NO;ew ZZ 3 W P ELL a b U Z 0 e O Q . .{ ND1; El d w N a:a cr.<sb� SRDIARS 6uu90ui6u310 juawpedea SNOIIHA3�3 HOIH3INI N a 4�� o SVX31 = 00 Z321I1SIHH3 sn_d_a001 aO olsmeasnaaoa3oaual ca AN30V0VONINIVf Ji30Md w a CO '- "- CL " INUIN- A8 31V0 11111111131 N06ditl^.,590 A8 111. ON IIS143tl W 3� ___ X w a d d d 8 p W 111 / rimy a O W E' ..6ru .SOU$ r� Q� s �a ( r.Y POP P, 2 � W a � N -__ n O � � ------------- . --- -- o _ C>— _ W O X W ----------------- c> E�" o o ------------------------ _ 3�s (D 0 s tn... A . ta- cr sb.r SRDIARSBuuaaui6u310juawpedap SNOIIHA3�3 HOIH3INI N a SVX31 = 00 "s �3 I H o a v I1SIHH3 Snda001 aO c.f w 0 I Q Ol$IlIHO SIIdl10030 AtYJ) N z3aiwva a3Nanl _ �A (�w AN30V0V ONINIVf Ji 30Md COa - �ayLYe!aae s¢h � CL INUIN- A8 3JV0 11111111131 NOUN- A8 111. ON IISIAJb a k e � 6w 56tr S r /. Sd, W O J o� Vre 1 -F 1F 'S Y w - 3 3J 3J 3JN f/ E y w LLs.: w f2 c x N � m IIIIIf ...-/I/ Ir Y s,e1 .� W/ �'° LI ... rtr— m �/� U ti V/ O - W W z2 k G ' ma N r K E3 07 w - U. w m .a m� Q Ok O _ L Il 11 3 ar U a 1 w my d M� LL n �w hr Moma MEN LL 3 w rrI4 z � w �o ti T o 0 � �j J g t G � i cr.<sb� SRDIARS 6uu90ui6u310 juawpedea SNOIIHA3�3 HOIH3INI N a 4�� o SVX31 = 00 ° I1SIHH3 Snda001 aO 01SIlHO SIdl0030 AND) WN a I ca 3A /vw w = AN30V0V ONINIVf Ji 30Md a CO � CL INUIN- A8 31V0 11111111131 N06ditl^.,590 A8 111. ON IISIAJb t W UJ uj Qg LJ r G i cr �CJ� 0 W z 3w. o YLL� rt - ® _ ---- , s :a w s _ w { uj v cr - - a= ' r N ... . P w w _ �= dJ fx cr sb.r SRDIARSBuuaaui6u310juawpedap SNOIIHA3�3 HOIH3INI N a 4�� o SVX31 = 00 I1SIHH3 Snda001 aO ca CT,w 0 I Q Ol$IlIHO SIIdl10030 AtYJ) N z3aiwva a3Nanl _ a'A (�w AN30V0V ONINIVf Ji 30MdCL a �ayLYe!aae s¢h 8 Nolldla M A8 31V0 11111111131 N011dtl^.,5IN A8 111. ON IISIAJb a t� g p L Ld Z C7 pis cy c 6 c c. p o d N J F� ow - --------- ---------- -TIT - 1 �I Fl i rr ;Y:yl �6 w' w. F o:a i HE a U f O �� J f LL� 1 K rn 00 g ¢ Lo U F M l o -, r o �T w �r �a n Il � a <} SIDIARu310juawpedea Slivi3aMOMIIW a (C) c o cli SVX31 = OO N CTw I _ CD 0 IlSIaHa Snda001 A0 OisiHHO snd10030 Ald rD C>w .kN30VOV ONINIVf Ji 30Md a - �ayLYe!aae s¢h � CL Nolldl—M 19 31V0 11111111131 N06ditl^.,530 A8 3lVRl ON Nti115143tl 03 z z N - W W II II II V7 y V7 r. II SII II A ;� glli it rii SII O' a O`-' n :s w ,t s ...... c w ,9 g � 5 2 2 2 O .u` ,Nolieni,i O O u � r W W �'� N 3 W II�N�IIW -------------- 4 !V ........ ,.1 81 8 d aS 1 eH a 3 e \ W I. F Inl W IAI w, I S ...... -Bvnddv lain J� isN As ain J at W �; a � w r i � � •� ,r 3w f ds .+.1r, lw 1'v & y Z 'a a O w 2 U O uj oa o A, y V v--. W Y Irl II II n N O ,a�-o;� '`, II II II II �� a, n w �........... f i a _ w r�X �✓ t a u, r:L �E •r,� 2Y3 ` e �S W£i' LY H,W Z E z I\ u u Im w O? O r I w rvoivnr3iit ni iiia.... crvaii nin iss ....... r LO IRBaauIN31ojuawpedea Slivi3aMOMTIW a (C) c o cli SVX31 o z 0p "s i °3 i i H`o a°v I1SIHH3 SndaOO 1 Allo M " w I Q O1SIlIH�SlIdlla�3O AlYJ) N z38MVa a3Nanl� _ C>w .kN30VOV ONINIVf Ji 30Md a - �ayLYe!aae s¢h � CL 1OI1d18 M 19 31V0 11111111131 NOUN- 6, 06ditl^.,590 A8 3lVRl ON N61ls43a a � \� "' �.fi . cabs d-' FWX Ff FJ n, Z ° N 1 s. uj O` 4 > ii _�I J K ---- 2k, co 3 Jv (/ A O W ,,, der 8 fS A, v .. `. m O J N q O` w O e uj cl N z Y W - y ; \ F1, � \ 4, N r ;o m zz � J g t J J U LU N w a g ti M 01 P � t t 1 tr uw YL 1 ,s \ Y ......,. Y t T _ JJJ Y to c . N : m f t€ aw 0 N �8 _ V a 8 u s - T cr sb.r S901ARS6uu90ui6u310Cuawpedea SlIH13a Sf103NV-P30SIWN a CSO 4�� o SVX31 = 00 "s i�3 i IH oav 0 IlSIaHJ Snd_a001 A0 OisiHHO sndl0030 AldN w I r� C>w AN30VOH ONINIVf Ji 30Md R CO CLa �ayLYe!aae s¢h 8 Nolldla M A8 31V0 11111111131 N06ditl^.,530 A8 111. ON.1SIllb 3 a �.. 4 «,� .�w a wo k, .�� o 0 , U w '.0 wE-co wyp y5y J �' any iu W @« dg Q w a w s m8< 6 w, �Uo .ea p w o � „y lL J n 00 w < � w CL F ----------------------------------- uj Ell 3 r 3 p is a', - 0[r 0 g Ln �wanm�rou aas II ift ffl ` �fl IIFI ll X111 J II}CI ii ti J �rirrm�u�� rIi iAI.rll. a w J J U J w j i 9 f �' h IiHI'I If4'" w .<< iII�IJI�iI JJ > K s r Sid saainiag 6uuaaui6u3 Jo;uawuedad NV1d HIS IVOINVH03N Z-'! CD� SVX31 = 0~0 �� sio� iiHoae M usaHusnaaouiou)IlSIlHJS(d��Jl0hllJZ321Wtl223N211 M (D' )`W34VOV JNINIV�li IOMd NOI1dIH�53a N Ng51A3a NOI1dItlp53a 'ON NOISIA3a � St z�m z r d pp W LLpg� '` ry I � V o my I I I I o W 40 0 ® � ® m - - _e. z p o� ry muwa o s�xz w�oa tiz�° szainiag suuzauisu3 jo;uawueda4 NVld 2i 00Id ONINOZ IVOINVH03A `v CD SVX31 = 0~0 IlSIl1H�Sf1d�l0O to hll� M Z381HVH 183N21 f11 _ _ :usiaua snaaoo do wo) M AA]GVOV JNINIV�li 3OIIOd w o m a NOI1dIH�53a N N W11 NOI1dItlp53a 'ON NOISIA3i1 a� � V �LL -amu yyupg n 41w wn O ai�wo N m m (Irk I rc i m " N h e �a a u� „moi U N.„ a L U d i N 2 � J n S =11 o 11 JJ r'l St I N N Uq L 1 ami a szainiag suuzauisu3,o,uawuedaa V ONIMMS NVId 210013 IVOINVH03N `v CD SVX31 = 0~0 IISIHH`O sndHOO 10 hllJ q Z38IV4V 1 I 83NHnl M uslaHusnaaouiowu) CD AA]GVOV ONINIV2li IOMd NOI1dIH�53a N Ng51A3a NOI1dItlp53a 'ON NOISIA3a N V �LL yyupg n 41w wn O �ai�wo N ao M1zo my ,oma A O r " i ❑x s 3 e N �I 0 0 ey ❑�m� -- ow ❑W i z ae, �z o z. ow o } 10 ✓� �w of ❑ , ❑ �Ati3'� 3 g'° ��.qu,*� o�T _0 oz�o wry — o zQ0w z o w 0¢ >� z ❑ 0,,,, �� v w o z oo�i��oo i ❑ ❑ i �� . o u o o a S jl o ow _, o ® 1 j,� a zi a y w LL a F O m'oz O w O w O L w mc,W�oNo w z `• "'000awa <zd�d�au000..EO ;T 1/ "E szalniag suuzauisu3 jo luawueda4 1lVVJNiciiin8 NVIdd00IJ IVOINVH031N Z-'! CD �s,.�.���:�.,.�.,,�.a.� CO Il$IHHJ sndHO0 to AlI� ;uslauasnaaoodoo) ' (DZ321Wtl223M _ AW34VOV JNINIV�li 3OIIOd E CO N0I1dIH�530 N Ng5YA3t1 N0I1dItlp53a 'ON N0ISIA3i1 /MIVVice T �LL 1 a e „w 0 m„ �Z - - - � ��_ � a� m m o 'PE] 4i r' so r� n.I ©� m H-1 oe 0 e �l .4 . . c C ALL, LL . " � m I a .su > I 0 � z Q o _� r° w � z C < m �_ , u J Imw°azo� LLoowo��mo w — 1 w Q¢�mdcwi°m m��o�w w a �z� w =m�a NJ mr x w moo�ow o�z � 75 ®pz �`z ,..,,...o,,..,. �� eoin,agsuueauisu3lo)uamueaad 1Sl 0 SNiming Wd WO-H V01NVH03W Z-'!o CD slodll H36v SVX31 0 23211WV2! 213Naf11 IISIHHO SndHOO 10 h110 �I1SNH SndN0 dC)J) 1�W34VOV JNINIV�li 3011Od CO C NOI1dIH�53a N N W111 NQUI-10 'ON WfI0N304tl LL W�NLLpm VN y w I I . a I I I I 1 � I i LL _ Irk I � I — L o= a q 0 v o _ l .n r I ' ° 11 �I /L� m Q� r 1 ^ f m 1 � � 9 _ w o o s ®p N F z w ¢ wvmim z m� �m N �LLag�o oaa za mN O o ao�wzu — °moo�x ¢* TQ mpdxaw J zzviLLw�o cpm mz dm om�wE o�irLLzm �w �°�wa a o�w� v wo a owoaJ�a� w o- �t� &��� wi .o Fd� �w»>a N.zo¢>�dY�w3">w�zoo oo w w oe os000w�z o a:�z z—J ozm aox�z= o a fox__zo maw oww oow�ioo o9" as d aa3�+z a�u��m�u a x�wx u�o V sa pag buuaau!bu3 Jo;uawuedad Hoolj cv (9 ONZ 8 Miming NVId NOOId IVOINVHOIN I` SVX31 0 - 00F IISIHH`O sndHO`O 10A110 M Z38IV4V 1 I 83NHnl M usiaHusnaaouiowu) 0' _ AA]GVOV JNINIV�li 3OIIOd NOI1dIH�53a N WWII NQUI-30 'ON NOISIA3a a� � V �LL _amu yyupg n 41w wn O �ai�wo N ao M1zo Ii r�lJ�ae� " � o o�o _ 9 I _m - -j- w m - � zLL Joico � a oaF w o w Og�"z�o = wu z��o mU yea N° C m�dFax _ �zaww oa z o LL oortz o0 0 Ja O�KLLzm >p� a¢�wo O��Q¢ -�wo Y��a Q�zac000m ui=wo3��LLw z . wLL�aw°zwww x z° n ((dao U wo od g`wzo—�acoi o=�o�oz�2a°waw wa �a�- Uzoa >zxYd Nom�zQ C'ox��ao�a°z�Jo?zo a�oFz zwa ttw a a :�z u, U N sa paS buuaau!bu3 Jo;uawuedad lW Hoo-i� SVX31 ONZ 8 Miming NVId KMJ IVOINVHO3W Z3a�wVa a3Nanl IlSIliHO Sf1d�lO�to hll� s�s�aHDsndtioO dowa M (D o M AA]GVOV JNINIV�li IOMd w o m a NOI1dIH�530 N NC151111 NQUI-10 'ON NOISIA3i1 i.'•"Wa�p�o CL 000 ywLLpm W N a N I Ig p �_. � J ,yyy o _ J) a� o m 11,111 C. r� >I LL 1 I 1 �m f w o 0 0 �a aowro =�wam a tt a Ox F ?o a za�a� w t �w az_ LL N w z o 0zz o zz Y¢ Ww� aLLow� a� U H zo���m `>�Do �a o0 ox 'E w 3 ��az°w�=�?zm (6 w a om¢ww.c�i o wz J w.a= aO I wO FO wp Q O OQd OLL2 ins aOrvr Oz� G saowag suuaauisu3 jo;uawUedaaV JNIcninO NVId`JNldld IVOINVHOM a.V, SVX31 0 Z38IV4V 1 1213N21f11 II $flda����ul� usiaea snaaoo do wo) v M AATIVOV JNINIVJl IOMd w o m a so��d�a�s3a oN Nas�,3a �o��d�a�s3a oN No�s��3a s� n= tin. aM� -- — --— — All --- ry b b. —— — — —— _ 6 we I LL 1 x J m m3� v � nu 17, —-—------------- J LL 1 w J v .I - - - - i ® ®. 12 a o� � � w o� 3 w F r..—_—.-—_ _—_..—_..— o _ � Y z o I _ w z a U `o w s J U sa paS buuaau!bu3 Jo;uawuedad Hoolj 1S6 8 JIOm NVId JNldld IVOWHON4SVX31 ti o 00 z3aiwva a3r�anl IISIHHO sndHOO to hM 9iSNHUSnde00dC)uul o U = AA]GVOV JNINIV�li IOMd NOI1dIH�53a N N W11 NOI1dItlp53a 'ON NOISIA3i1 N V �LL _amu yyupg n 41w wn O �ai�wo N ao M1zo I ,l I I I � I I I , m I IIa\. J x ......... I �q I- 3. —4- � I cn CD I I' .'iii(H lli nH ml I fl P ` —o LL om ®W: � z w= 0 ow a) � � Y 3Q� �C M U ir��ir N saowag buuaauibu3 jo;uawUedad booed cu C SVX31 ONZ 8 JNiminB NVId JNlldld WOMHOIN �r—y) z3a�wVa 1 a3Nanl IlSIliHO Sf1da0�to ul� uisIaHOsNdtioD dowN, M AATIVOV JNINIVJl IOMd w o m a o da s3a oNNaa,3a o daNs3a oNNos 3a _LL WyyLLpm n �iaw�o \yhry N I i---_ :, i „ t _ � a w a a �I ozN_ aLL J C o oU 00 mz �Q 4W wwZ = > N Kj KO on mF Y 3Q 3"0�" w�¢m > Mo Ma i � m Udm ww w oow m w > o °,°o°00 ov°zr L U N f saainiag 6uuaaui6u3 Jo;uawuedad V NVId d002I IV0INVH03N Z-'! CD SVX31 = 0~0 IlSIaH�S(ld�l��1 hll J " Z381HVH 183N21f11 _ :usiauasnaaoodowo) M AAI(IVOV JNINIV�li 30IIOd w o m a NOI1dIH�53a N N W11 NOI1dItlp53a 'ON NOISIA3i1 O �Z eE Y 10Q °� o 0 _ Z� wZwwZ Da (6 0� (NOmF . .E 0.1 WQ w Q? pc F /� JNm wKW L >Szoo m @q� O — — — — — — —-7L — @— C--— -b �a= saainiaS 6uuaaui6u3 Jo)uawuedad S3in(13HOS IVOINVH03A `" CD St/X31 = 000 S 0 ,i. 3.i ,H..,,a,p I IlSIlHHO snda0010510 sisiaHasndeooiuwo) 1 o o Z38INV 83N21f11 M MOM ONIN VA 3OIlOd w o m a NOI1dIH�53a N Ng51A3a N011dltl p53a 'ON NOISIA3i1 bm m a 5 IIrYs 111; m w o p a r m w rc - r m a rc AS n Mal y w a a .r u z w asp1 L 2 9- co Mlios F, UU Ui U CD je � z LU Nil =_ w mz gin! k,.aaaw�yR J - - - - - - LU�. 7 - r4 rY re 8 a e 'a r ¢ C ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ El ❑ El El El El El ----- - m , o - = au - s $ zo 3aw o - - in w MIR s! MIT My H io 2w Z3 11 H ° in WINI out MM "h=G _ aq - -woo ;9§1Nw Q _Js oaapp °_ M <Q psow o23k9mHN N��UNT, M S a MIT HOME _g- _ -__off=aka o � no� y m = al I -CD - _ Elm Q W _Z0_ 1 4 sa paS6uuaaui6u3Jo;uawuedad S3in(13HOS IVOINVH03W Z-'! CD St/X31 = 000 s0 Frei i o e i i"°,�.a.0 % IlSIHH`d sndHOO 1 51J = Z38INVI 83N21f11 _ :usiauasnaaoodowo) M WOM ONIN VA 3OIlOd w o m a NOI1dIH�53a N Ng51A3a NOI1dItlp53a 'ON NOISIA3i1 sw V �LL _amu yyupg n 41w wn O �ai�wo N ao M1zo az -- =1G= too- k 119 Ell M9 R E 19�42 Us _as - m M MI M91119 Ro° LLso - LLa" rc 3 u p AR 4 4 4 4 M n 4 4 alypul Eli .... ➢ ; 01995 HOp�Sy � - ___ S N o Vaw s :LLp � e I a a a a 122 5w OU it'a u W p o p og w a< oil ° s°W_ €E E MOM 1 1 1 € V AM 11 _ Lim. S to MUM UMLH-5 to z at U _ to pow WHO w fl3 films �Fo s vo 110! so a? saainiag 6uuaaui6u3 Jo;uawuedad S3in(13HOS IVOINVH03A Z-'! CD SVX31 = 0~0 IlSIl1HJ SfId�10J l hllJ v (�o = Z3211Wtl21 2i3N21f11 _ :usiauasnaaoodowo) M AAI(IVOV JNINIV�li IOMd w o m a NOI1dIH�53a N Ng51A3a N011dltl p53a 'ON NOISIA3i1 LU 32 F 'v „„ s _ w J U LU O = LU 4 w n ? Zazo O LU w T Mh rc _ M, o< - c a'ate a »;uaw , g93Hm#a&H03A � Q! | qg1 \\ \\w/ \ n � sl +os Bm m d9 m= =wm }i (D AlmAemeAlna:q mkt» ' 4�'+� / C©r §\:;;°• /\: /y • / \}\ )/R6\)}j /\5 5 . . )%qy\/\ - \ \ -0 ; saa!I buuaaui6u3 Jo)uawuedad SIIVl3a IVOI NVH03W Z-'! CD SVX31 F 0 = 0000 v ,"���.�u��.���,....,�.a.� IlSIHHd s_Mnd,HOO tohll0 aisiaHasndeooiowO)Z38INVI 83N _ AW34VOV JNINIVA 3DIIOd w o m a dA = NOI1dIH�53a N M... Widl—0 'ON NQ1311 srt A... W ,� 4� " �LL— �i �opo ���_-- wx- jW lid KIM z _ a m o O m LU o z aWw ITIts m inn Is 0� LL o (/ on n: F l Q 0 _ - w uwia o Jp Cc) _ aJ YMR- W a Zo 0 if;jj1 a az = w a S °° n n3 rc° rc ¢odon rc wrc aa�° saa!I buuaaui6u3 Jo)uawuedad SIIV13a IVOI NVH03W Z-'! CD SVX31 F 0 = 0000 v ,����.�u��.���,...�,�.a.� IlSIHHd s_Mnd,HOO tohll0 'liS�aH�sndH00 dC)JO)83N _ W4VOV JNINIVA 30II0d w o m a on— NOI1dIH�53a N N ... Widl—0 'ON NQ131-1 �l � Z ul? a� o Q Hogj 111t`. � r w o - W m _ 'E; � ax�a I .o � .a q n H, a8 oN rczw oil � z p .�.� z f/ a z a z� .,• Nryz w W � °w W w � �6z O � a - ow 1 `y'�p _ d' zp ZQZQy - - Z� z wy' - a pw ° CLe w = Waw �o pew U' � p — ^ N N N Pv o \ �Z _ 3'O� r 0 1 w pkds / w o� ZLL a� 3a= p W HEopH N N =w J - rt _w �¢ = 9H L its j to F o6F jF a oa a \ - _ = ug _ so ul Ljj — 3 II a ° y W�� MCI H �I a°Fis°° o _ � J I� oa m - u a� O Lu EMUw Q If mzS�d lL4a �b Ub zW - rcLLma 1 JW 1 y� � �.J w � - wa --- s W w ` o �w s - � ��o- NLO AW w 3_/ CD U N Z warc saa!I buuaaui6u3 Jo;uawuedad S11V13a 1V01 NVH031N Z-'! CD SVX31 0 = 0000 Z38INVa a3Nanl IlSIliH�Sf1d�10010 hll� sisiaH sndeouiowu, o o U WOM JNINIVA 30110d on- M... N ... Widl—0 'ON NQ1311 ,am 3at� L� L W o `O — a 'HMO LZI sit oil a � =N 21 oK� - � w co 7g a �'' jopN w� J how �-❑.. rc - 3 wa f i Jb: u ma k a -- pUlf - gzo bid I x� Z yaw O I_" � O a-� z M saowag buuaauibu3 jo juawueda4 Nyld 31151F/01b10313 N CQ S_HX31 v o 0(�0 -so e i � avp 11SIUHO sndHOO P AM (lislap�� zw Z3aIWtla 1 a3 (�o AW30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d N011dM�53Q 18 31VQ (N NO77NOUdId—O AD 31V[1 ON N0151�3k1 2 w� a K Xp ° L4 I.—.—.—.—. .—.— Elr 1FjE=Er —.— „ ,". eco r n ry=g ................. =g= I I 1�. a I � I I - — — — — � � I11 I IS I I � zi I r � A - I I 11 I I I N w L a °� o p a o� ° 2 a , - i o a rc g z � � $ 4 a w a&^s dap a 4 w ° r LL q o w Fn 0G 00 O G F OG 3353 w f } saowag buuaauibu3 jo juawueda4 ,V,V3dV-NVId JNUH911 a001d 1S 6 `v Cts, G: GV o SHX31 5 l 0 3 1 I Hr b b d \ I � z Tw z3aiwva a3Nanl IlSIaH�Sfldli0�1oAll� ���sla���s�dao��o"o) LO AW30VOV JNINIVdi 30110d fV011dM�53Q A8 31VQ (1N NUI51�3i1 NOUdId—Oce AD 31V[1 ON fV0151�3k1 2 -w� v o O y � xLL II � N w _ x w .� �;> --- wma .... � 1 wy 1 I i zo W wa _ xzy � T '� M �< I is y... I r L r lX Fj «� m m M m : 1 r I .... � j, -- _ -- wtI I � o c� z Fa I saowaS buuaauibu3 jo juawueda4 418 3iMl3iW CN ¢ SHX31 -.V.H32id-NVId ONEHOII b001d 1S 6 f` S 1 7 3 1 1 H b d \ I A IlSIaHO S0 z3aiwva I 83Nanl fldliOO 10AM 6islaFl swaoouo^1 w "' AW30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d fV011dM�53Q A8 31VQ (1N NUI51�3i1 NOUdId—Oce— AD 31V[1 ON fV0151�3k1 2 -w� rc Y 1 I a W i � w d ry --------------------------- w i ry a L x' I w 14 21 DKD] x W � C y a YY Y"C ,.tt W• Xx p I v ---- h m I I � I I I I � I xr] I I� s 0=4 a saowag 6uuaaui6u3�o�uawueda4 ,g,V3dV-NV]d JNUHJII a001d 1S6 `v QD G GV o SHX31 T w z3aiwva a3Nanl IlSIUHO sndHOO 10 Alli (sm"W wn"N AN30VOV JNINIM Bonod ca CL fV011dM�53Q I 1 K-11 NOUdId—O 1� 31V[1 aNW-1— Rry i € 1 1 1 a In € € snag $ ...w ce , 'o P"Al $ u u ��.. W xp.w n ' li w9 5. O n sq �w: .f o ¢_c0isINJ: u ea w pp ?z �; aa wH IN n f l nIJ w a o w LL s 1 GI) n C} 1 1 1 I I 1 1 I 1 11 � , , �� r I L oil' il' "Nal I a a a� � ' �P � 1 sum _. i I 3 1 ti� m a aw o� �p ��o saowag buuaauibu3 jo juawueda4 Wd JNUH91140013 GNZ N MN o SHX31 3 1 H b d \ I Ti z Tw z3alwVa 83Nanl I1SIaHOSfldli0O10 Alli (lislaFi swaoouo"o) � AW30VOV JNINIVdi 30110d fV011dM�53Q A8 31VQ (1N NUI51�3i1 PVG111dNDSJ0 AD 31V[1 ON fV0151�3k1 ---------------------- ce ye h a� oma' 5 a 1w' o 3 ' 999.g �Hn ---- cot,., uH a w� ow f'I 11 f I I�:1 f a I I �i Ma e I a I� 1 t v a I V (,r7 F l r I I ,tl m 4 0 I I �I IIT I y� � I �� IJ h r rli 2Y LL � °04 z io �p8 I saowaS buuaau!bu3 jo juawueda4 418 31t1N2OiW �.,, CQ ¢ SHX31 A.V3dV-Wd 0NUH011 W0-1d(M I�`y� F M S 1 7 3 1 1 H Y b d \ I 00 zmmn PM3Nanl IlS1aH0 snd800 P AM (lislapnsndaoo�o�io) LO w AN30VDV JNIMAi 30110d N011dM�53Q A8 31VQ ONNUI51A38 IF l.—11 AD 31V[1 ONN-1— �n w s � � > v -w Hchi z c Not of .1 _ c Zs,rc W `moot ast N RHO a p v SPIT Y' H 11 k ` � s �� '�• x ° i �.t z �� 1p _-_ ---------------------- o p sa tw aQ s= LL � Q� a3 mcYi m� m w w❑ ❑ ❑ n ❑ w = m o w LL S { I w. I kin � a � 1 Jt I. II jo oil j, ,I, � ATI , v, I � � r i r f r � a saowag buuaauibu3 jo Puawueda4 ,d,V3dV-NVId a3MOd HOOId 1S L `" Gi GV o s. o e SHX31 z 00'. N I1SIUHO SndHOO 10 ALIO slaFi snaaoo uo uiol Tw Z3dlP4V' 1 83Nanl _ (�o AW30VOV ONINIVdi 30I10d fV011dM�53Q A8 31VQ (1N NUI51�3i1 NOUdId—O AD 31V[1 ON fV0151�3k1 r. cew LL r m I , I �ImQ fAC s � C f ' s w 3 w s Y w z k Y � � � 1 oa a / a _ u ) -------- - r ) 3 A � a J 47, w b A <> U w � ao sM,6waaQ3 jo juawueda4 ,8,V3dV-NV]d a3MOd HOOId 1S L M N o o SHX31 � z co N USIHHO sndHOO 10 ALIO (��sla��os��aoon"N co AN30VOV ONINIM 3OIlOd �ti► C, _ fV011dM�53Q A8 31VQ (1N NUI51�3i1 PVG111dNDSJO AD 3.'mONPV0151 k Y N s Inn a, Aly w ce ,,to to it; Q W °z _ o,e g ��w. _g sitMy ��... N d3 £ q a g.. Ein gg HIS w c>8 C) cb) c> C) c) (T) Ci) <,, ) (.9 I C;) ) ) I C) C) ,Ii f I I I , n 1 'tons x I n T 90P �J 7 � � i 4{ m� Mc "i an 0. �k r LL o W i 0 o` � C: w Swag NQd 213MOd WO-Id GNZ M wM s. o e i �,,.,,acv � � SHX31 � z co N iisiaN�sndao�►o A�i� z3aiwva a3Nanl _ (�a AN30VDV JNIMAi 30ROd VY�p�� fV011dM�53Q I 31VQ K- 11 PVG111dNOSJ0 AD 31V[1 ON fV0151�3k1 alog go a U Zaw o g� gip, sg s r 8 U4 v g 8 g ce m 10 is all H s J z s y e' aa �w .t ..W an 10 I,Ypr a g� g g �? t I�"��. �-, > a a� H R98 two - z n w C)8 C^) J C) C) CJ U O ;) U U r"" C J O U U R) U C)CJ U p a p----- I) � F I 4 I i p 1 I . �® m !� ` � - r r I u a� -� 1 1 C71 � 0 All I {J d 00 �m lit ��g saowag buuaauibu3jojuawueda4 SNVld a3MOd J=1 N CQ cv o (�. e SHX31 z 00'. N I1SIUHO SndHOO P ALIO oisiaFio snaaoo uo uiol g Tw Z3dlP4V' 1 83Nanl AW30VOV ONINIVdi 30I10d fV011dM�53Q A8 31VQ (1N NUI51�3i1 fVG111JIk10�30 AD 31V[1 ON fV0151�3k1 ce— Co a� w e , e, WW _ P y 1 � J _ I � a � z & ) {) o -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- o� w - ------ 3 _(9 ) ) CJ (,fid - - - - - - C: �g cli saoimaS buijeouibu3 jo juampedo(] V,V3dV-NV�d SVI]iSAS IV103dS HOO-I�is SVX31 �! 0 00 IISIUHO sndHOO P AM LU Z3dlP4V'd 83NHni AN30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d NOUdId—O NIOSIII�_ ce- --- ---------- --------- To U4 N6, INJ 0................ .............. Ad —-—-—-—-—-—- - -— -------------- 'Aj Z9 NLI] 0� .......... zg rg YJ ---------- �W n ffg -- --------- ............ C- ........... ....... Nd ........... ........... .. ......... .. ......... ------ too�n saoimag buuaauibu3 jo juampeda4 ,S,V3dV-NV/ d SW3ISAS IV103dS a001d 1S 6CN G N o e SHX31 z 00" M 11SWHO sndHOO PAW 6isiaFi snaaoo uo uiol o Tw Z3dlV4V1 I 83Nanl AW30VOV JNINIVdi 30110d fV011dM�53Q A8 31VQ (1N NUI51�3i1 PVG111dNDSJ0 AD 31V[1 ON fV0151�3k1 €U u5 E a z ■E Z� z w wz rc g i6 3a u�z z arca W� ��N � 3g �a 3w p '" rcy '$ o `cs 1 rc� I) I i I I FFF / off P An 42 i fF ewx d II,]� - ry .. JAI IF Fj 41) L. � I i I I I (HCl (1,� 'f t C.) f.i 1, li I- A � z e r o_ om4 <� w 8 �'Y saowag buuaauibu3jojuawueda4 NVId SW31SAS W1036 2i001d aNZcli Cu No �o , wM s, o e i���,�,,.,,acv SVX31 z 00 M I1SIUHO sndHOO PAW (IislafIDs�dao��ou��� cn LU Z32I VH 83Nanl _ �R (D o �p�� kA34VDV JNINIVdi 30110d CO �ti► off _ fV011dM�53Q A8 31VQ (1N NUI51�3i1 NOUdId—O AD 31V[1 ON fV0151�3k1 €U aN di � w 2w LLOOMm g f �p 99 p� - CJ ' � I I d I Y'�I ' I ➢I lY i� '.. � I I j I L of I f _ 1 I L I , I f -< o c) � w w - - - ) - - - oq . o- c:> N as saowag buuaauibu3 jo juawueda4 S31n(13HOS IVOIb1O313 N co cv o (�. s. o e acv SHX31 .�� a7 O_ n I1SIUHO sdHOO P AM (l�slaf��s�dao��ou��� Tw z3aiwva 83Nanl _ (�o kN34VDV ONINIVdi 30110d co fV011dM�53Q A8 31V() (1N NUI51�3i1 NOUdId—Oce AD 31V[1 ON fV0151�3k1 m jm v ...... .... U......... r k=v e o a.Y.v R.v d v1X F3 A"W vS'k`3 fA 6Y xLY<F p f M&, p i9£fZR�H&'f.%Wm S`e"&'kR t 3S 5 x u R a 6kkk k a -- MM w 3 u� xx v =gig g ...SBP.Aaa�t���faRRRy�:�i5 <«««««««aaaaAA:A.aaaaa a s.««««««« a -s ,e,�a a fu Fv Fv Fv Fv Fv Fv Fie' a a a a g v .. .. 4 q S ft uFv uFv F4 F4 Fa F4 Aa a .................................................................................. a a as 0 'uuu uuuuu uuuuuuuaaaaaanuuu �uu a u uu { 8 .............. . .". ".-m...... w l � Y �x 9 J o � ZW ..... .... ...... ...... ....... ... i ZWZ > W F e , _ A .,.Y, lE 3t __ A"a 6 tlI IL � n i s k' � fl; rtxa s o , Z G G ZZwl G n __ n N N 4�., d C` "" A.mv d, n semis 6waaQ3)o juawueda4 S31n(13HOS 1UH10313 CD N z w N s. O e i H,,,,,a,V SVX31 z 00, US�UH0 snda00►o AAD o slap s dao 0 0 �= T�, z3aiwva a3Nanl _ 10� (D o IVYAN30VDV KINI &30ROd SO fVO11dM�53O A8 31VO (1N NU151�3i1 POldldDSJO AO 3."m ,.quc,,'l *6 C K i V I A QI GS� L L4 o K w w o V't. ¢cam lRGzW xN �a z� ww LL Y �p ei 11 5b g= � it gill! WIN .. .... w ... K r 1 HERBo will 1 z p U 5 � G � lSg $ a 4d, - w �r ° En IN w CW9 � w o o .........I J J J J.........J J m , _ _ w�5wts� w w s :?�r}sn 110001wmuhxa 1 y , d d � e&, d�'x�ry � u r u � F www €vvv, 7 ? 3;2rw ;x x yl�� 11 z Add 1 1 11,1811, Y ,_ o , 3 3 38 3 3w .6 , 005 � 0 r.ta Ea tK$i<a.'° �,c�,�,�`�$r38d$o"'i� '� iii,m ���`J'�Ho is y7iAv13 O ehv u saowag buuaauibu3 jo juawueda4 OVOl GNV 3NIl-3NO IVOIb1O313 `v CD, Gi GV o w M s. o e a,� SVX31 z 00_ LU Z32l VH 83Nanl I1SIUHO SndHOO 10AlIO ��siaFiosnaaoo�ouio7 AW3(]VDV ONINIVdi 30I10d CO osQ_ = fV011dM�53Q A8 31VQ (1N NUI51�3i1 fVG111JIk10�30 AD 31V[1 ON fV0151�3k1 ce F r L4 o E•,. N N wz z � m _ w�1 U U W W J \� w w spm zF ¢ ,y�F� gg �c 2 l d oz Op w a Wm e O Aryv LL Z � �ry w ma pJ a�a ;.9 Q ¢ a s Ia v, > m y 4oa ° n aao �5 M � sx� a p m o y O ° a Y 'vfi n z w �k ja 8 W x r �Z 0 l ° f 0 0- w� u � FQ� pp ym �U sMn 6waaQ3 Jo juawueda4 SIIvi3G lvolb10313 OD S . o e iH:,.,,a.V SVX31 z OD nUSIHH0 SndHOO 10 AlIO 6islauo snaaoodo uio) w ZWINVa a3Hanl �p,� AW30VOV ONINIVdi 30110d CO 5Y a.U = fV011dM�53Q A8 31VQ (1N NUI51�3i1 NOUdId—O AD 31V[1 ONPV0151— n O ��6rc W n3 r. ce 3 3 Z w, IM sit 1 jHH, d o w ............................................ .... .... 12 w Eli , 'S 5 1 M c� ./ �r coF wo a uj o w 0 � = k y wo w w w a � ... '1 F ,�, ......... Y F I J Hsi W ° 2 jF s rc 1 `�=m ° ~ 4 r R Z ° p ry W KIM f w ry i i- Q l�. _ W -- IA�1 CJ :f U U �� m z � a p . db bb �4�d) a C) . 6� 0 0 0 nnF—)P i] saowag buuaauibu3)o luawueda4 Slivi3(llvolb10313 `" CQ cv o r. e SHX31 z 00'. I1SIUHO SndHOO P Alli 6isiaFi snaaoo uo uiol o LU Z3dlP4V1 83Nanl _ (�o AW3(]VDV JNINIVdi 30I10d fV011dM�53Q A8 31VQ (1N NUI51�3i1 fVG111JIk10�30 AD 31V[1 ON fV0151�3k1 iy WWF O $s Q rti co i� oo, r a m p�, �\ 8N z l �z wo z ....N 5 z - Of 0 / o AM 1 C � � � q o Of aG ° n wOf z �✓ z � z O Of n: w w U w 0 0), a F ri p M �,......... t ......... ......... v w o 0 a �o D k u o z U z z �. O W _ Ua o z s- aW ll� z z of LJ, U'V JJ N saainiaS 6uuaaui6u3 jo;uawueda4 SaN3931 ON18Wflld `V c9 SVX31 pp . as MIM Wdnl UT HHO Sf ROO to KdO 6151 H S d i�All) cc SI MOVY JNINIM MY U' o NOI1dIH�53a -M NOI1dItlp53a 'ON WfI0N304tl LL W�NLLpm I�'yy Gz N v ya„w W s 2q ' - ado W 1a- lot 1 NOW W nil H a 0n 4Wif _ �8 l11HEII 5 b 5 s § a all a ` 5 ` a p Moax.�d; d Q (� M Ull a. Lou A a_� — z Q = LL w- m ,Qq WWI � 1 0 z R 0 �Q r0'O O Oo 00 OW OOu00 3 0 f 1 1 1 1 1 P E 3 Q 6 k 4 4 Q s J� 6 i - - - - ill sa paS buuaau!bu3lo;uawueda4 NVId 311S 9N18Wflld `V c9 SVX31 ~ as z3aiwv8 I aolfu AA]GVOV JNINIV�li IOMd NOI1dIH�53a N Ng51A3a NOI1dItlp53a 'ON WfI0N304tl LL W�NLLpm Imo,yy Gz N v tipay doa y m I Ilm 1 o I I I Wm II I Ip I T a I _ I=1 ------ ---------------- __--------- m__ _ — m F�� ts.blE doa a z� N4 —pas su!jeau!su3 jo)uawueaaa VI V3dV-NVId Wa WOId 1S l ONlowd o 0 sloali Hoav SVX31 0 00 as 23211WV8 2 ' o AW3aVOV JNINIV�li 3OIIOd NOI1dIH�53a N Ng51A3a NOI1dItlp53a 'ON WfI0N304tl �. #jo �vz ^mv Y _ C r�+p ------------------------------ �U yNLLWm n r ------------------------------------------------ _ V N=N mid 01 J I! X J I!I N S—- - - - - - - - - - 3� N � NI f u f � ... J J N 1 iJ w LL w a� s �w R - - - ;i J;i RIL ,µs - - - - - - - - - a �= ate - - - I_ I a y C=dOtl -- - - _ w a w 0 0 ma� = w b f —passu!jeau!su3jo)uawueaaa ,81V3dV-NVIdWaWOId1SlONlowd o 0 �ry s l 0 31I H O a v SVX31 0 M� as 23211WV2! 213Naf11 IISIHHn SndaOO to uln 'liSNH3 Snd10 dC All W) V w# _ AW3aVOV JNINIV�li 3OIIOd NOI1dIH�53a N Ng51A3a NOI1dItlp53a 'ON WfI0N304tl #jo 71 2-1 iw LL W�NLLpm Imo,yy Gz N v tipay Y I �doa � II a I II � I f C I 7 I 7I e —_ o— �;J o m 0 co ,..,,...o,,..,. ��.� eoin,agsuueauisu3jo;uamueaa4 0.V3bV-NVId AMC b00ld OW ONIBWnId �o �? s 1 3 1 1 I H a v I SVX31 _ 00 a s ZRIIINV8 213Naf11 IlslaHn sndaoO 10 un 'liSNH3 snaao ioJO) AA]GVOV JNINIV�li 3OMd N0I1dIH�53a N Ng51A3a N0UI-10 'ON WfI0N304tl #joiw i If LL W�NLLpm Imo,yy Gz N v tipay 0 I I 0 I r I 7, ab . I IL I I .. _ aI — d � 0 0 49 tea= —passu!jeau!su31o;uawueaaa V3dV-WdbHVMWOIJiSIONlowd �o sloali HOav SVX31 0 'uslaH�sndao�io w�l z 00as z3aiwva I a3Nanl IISIlHHO snda0OloulO ,,o w = AAI(IVOV JNINIV�li 3OMd NOI1dIH�53a N Ng51A3a NOI1dItlp53a 'ON WfI0N304tl CI uzw h IA I ZW�"LLpm W wn o w Z��ax ® � ■w���w ,Iq 5 i 3 w f � 3 i l� fi �j �— ----------- �1 I�111 m 7 -� - ! w� � I a - d. I - FFFF II I � r I I r u — �N 3 �3 3 x w r w LL J ' r � III I s J w � a po z e w � m w o eoin,ag suueauisu3,o)uamueaad .0.V3bV NVId bHVM 2f00131S ON18Wflld o NN sl3 3 L 1 H a v I SVX31 0 00 (V 'IiSNH�Snda00 dC Alli) as z3aiwva I a3Nanl IlSIliH�Sf1da0Oloul� n o (D w AAI(IVOV JNINIV�Ii 3OMcl N0I1dIH�53a N Ng51A3a N0I1dItlp53a 'ON WfI0N304tl #joiw LL W�NLLpm Imo,yw Gz N v tipay Y w II i e o i I I a L , a I ji � I Ij I wJ I ;j m r � 3 — , n w _ rr w w LL K tt O O � 4 w AQ a2�^ \l/ �i eoin,ag suueauisu3 jo)uamueaad V3bV NVId d31VM WOId ONZ ONIomd o �? s 1 0 3 1 H 0 a v SVX31 0 c� as 00 z3iwva aIlSIlH�Sfda0�to ul� 'liSNH3sndao3iowO) ca z (D w = AAI(IVOV JNINIV�li 3OIIOd NOLLdI� N WWII NQUI-10 'ON WfI0N304tl #joiw LL W�NLLpm Imo,yy Gz N v tipay p I I o I I I: a I I m I� - I I T-J _ m 0 0 Qw sa paSbuuaau!bu3lo)uawuedad NVId d00b 9NI8Wflld `V c9 SVX31 ~ (V as IlSIlH�Sfda0Oloul� s1SNHq SdN00 dC AllW)z3iwva I a n o (D w AW30VOV JNINIV�li 3OMd NOI1dIH�53a N Ng51A3a NOI1dItlp53a 'ON WfI0N304tl LL W�NLLpm -- Imo,yy Gz N v tipay r ZF - ry - rzz�/zfz-/j _ - I—S � — — — — — — -1 0 _ s _ =_ _ _ _ =I b � �4 fig= sa paS6uuaaui6u3Jo;uawuedad S3in(13HOS 9Nlonnld C9 SOR 0 OD as z3aiwva a3Nanl IlSIliHO Sf1d�l0OlohllO 6151 H S d° ioAli, n o �' WOM ONIN VA 3OIlOd NOI1dIH�53a —M...... NOLL 1—0 'ON NOISIA3i1 V �LL -amu yyupg n 41m wn O ai�wo N u� � 3 � w�a " 01.11 � �d.�LLy 3 aio� � z'� 3!qig �ANN; z '3 nys 3m w $ a - NNW '3 3 g 'a - � oz o 33 NHM 3U arnug �m°`d m.\'sg 3 3 �� 33° a 3 $ V�$ �'3sg War V 33 s kp 19H 'Wall � F 3 ¢ a FoaW° z as gm�a�� �o°<' wa � � ot RIEW rc k'ay NONE �`a° �30�=�� G10VAN rc H� 3 VRIRSQH HIM - oq 3 HNINg F J m Mobw _ LL ° Y - - k k a "I 140N 22�gnajnqj A---- Q _ - - a - -m_ m F ate z d now �zl.. UJB zoz xq� 3m W - - mai i _ _ al I I I I LL J - 3 3 3 " laglag 11W3 '" H K. p3"ww a km1�m _ _ - - - _ Ads ._ ¢ogin a� z °z A.. gg 6 3 lips 3'w O �' ins - U ;� � rc � _lg d H own �_ �� Amo w ,3 5 09 Z -'HN HTo g - o HIM v o 1 .g Gnu QW g m slut! 0 m DQ un LOS Inn HUI RU ' m k IIoasLLp IN 01 kT gy� paLL : Ill HH, k _ o G° ° 3- ° 1 oil _ _ _Z _ _ °_m ill _ F d16 C7 m - lu � � - m a ° w a�aw o ga m - p NCO Ww Rry - � 33 a 3S 0 ® r0 0 ® r0 own® o O O 0 OO my RQ S O ° a a ]lo;uaw , %'!\® :f§ Qg93Hmeke§ma3 6 qg1 / \ U�v`�ls+omAmmd9 m= =wm\ w� aU AlmAemeAiIOMd a_§ / < ; LU : : : j: ■& 2= § ` ± } ) } § ) ( - — a■/\) : \ LU Lu ) ) { ) } ) 4 ) ( ( ( } ) } ) (!)) \\)\j([!! (} \ \ } () ± :[! () \ _- : « :; :\ ! G: \`)l ;; :{))\)) })) \ >« ! ------------ m R § \ \ ) } ) } \ } { } ) } } \ } } § - - ± / - � 0 § jjL \ ` ( ± l ; ; ; g ° \ ) \\ {( Of ) i { ) (; I !! r :l;; :}: saainiag 6uuaaui6u3 Jo;uawuedad Sllb'134�N18Wflld `V MR I vYislaHusndaouiowul o as MIM a3Nanl IlSIliHOSf1da0OtoulO cy o w = MOVY JNIN VA MY NOI1dIH�53a N Ng51A3a NOI1dItlp530 'ON WfI0N304tl mnz� v Nrcay �$ Zona ~ w w p / O D m 0 Q � O Z W a�„ ❑ J F - ❑ Q � J jipa L n-Z zwya� x��9 i 9y put p J Q (n ° _05 - 'am maw Z a�a- NJ - R ❑ w o do — a � aw< aah�Qapo Imac HH"I HIM 7 9 H i ML _ w HS _ _ lot _ a$u� - H._- 1 U lop i HE W - owT 0 z _ _ - p� d _" _ � � - g ova a-wm= awal LU i J _ ❑ w d a Z WagU O tip s o o a v v v v g lit ,� 3 ❑ Gs a z �' p>"w� _ d Q U' aw�w pi z- sa paSbuuaau!bu3Jo)uawuedadSllb'134 eNI8Wflld `V co SVX31 ~ z V as IlSIlH�Sfda0�toul� 'liSNH�SndH00 i0 All0)Z3iwva I a w = AAI(IVOV JNINIV�li IOMd NOI1dIH�53a N Ng51A3a NOI1dItlp53a 'ON WfI0N304tl 0 ce �N p . y o yy w LL• SA � �� TA. K ®W w a� wN 9LU z of p _ Kms= Ui W= w e it z J p a O w w\ w 0- w ZLU Z T! F p O LU O $ dw w, w a ! I a W MM J ~ a = O LSf _O 3N4 L z N L � a ❑ O g; w a z a z \ O ❑ cl - Cal: - 1 DK u M N LU LLF IN LIJ S � ttx �;�pw w3QLLw �LLi Z = a o Ww ¢ F _ 3 = 3� - = w = O c-€ € _ a 5. N 0 3 5 6a w 04- LU _ p = x o Lu K Qe _ �` x �o �,..,,...o,,..,.���.� eoin,agsuueauisu3jo)uamueaad � N.V3dV-INVbE)VIab3SNAMO sNimm., �o CO� sloali H36v SVX31 0 � as ZRIIINV8 1213Naf11 IISIHHO sndHOO 10 AIIa 'liSNH3 Snde00 i0w) V' _ AA3aVaV JNINIV�li IOMd NOI1dIH�53a N 7 -7 NQUI-10 'ON WfI0N304tl F It tia i,l In N Mj tj NIVI'll.......... ) �== A �w �, ryryW ) �/i I�Ib'HIpU ui 17h 3 � brc I 11� �'-SIN Ht t I I 7 ``ar ;�� 1PI 6 w ���.� eoin,agsuueauisu3jo)uamueaad .8.V3dV-INVbE)VIab3SNAMO sNimm., o CO NN sl3 3 L 1 H a v I SVX31 0 �# as ZRIIINV8 1213Naf11 IlsIHHO sndHOO 10 AIIa siSNH3 snda00 dl nu) c� AA3aVaV JNINIV�li IOMd NOI1dIH�53a N 7 -7 NQUI-10 'ON WfI0N304tl #jo Ol 81 t� w �yh Gz N of of � N w N 1111 e � x umv.un ...... \\..;:!�V.. d \� w I - �� a 14 eoin,agsuueauisu3jo)uamueaadV.V3bV-AnEN'IO?3SNb JHVMJNIOAnld �o ti� ? sloeii H oav SVX31 0 as 23211WV21 2l3N21n1 IISIHHO SndHOO to Allo UiSINHO snde00 wo)JO) z _ AW34VOV JNINIV�li IOMd �o�w�a�s3a N Nay„3a �o�w�a�s3a oN w�aN3aae ce �w ' l 3 1 a �F ^ 3 &®d WNpa,n q q tiq q - �� �� q e N � 3I1 � e n S � v H w q. , ��s a »;ijaw , QJ em-AnENO mgaS«d SNeAnS a/1w311\1a qg1 ® U �lso9\ V : /-o (D AlmAemeAiIOMd /+q#jo �wx5 31"11 �C®® � \ \ \ \ \ \ — � . 4 ! - ! w o N h p 3p s saowag6uiaaaui6u3�o�uawedavDNu"4' 11I?n03S-S310N ONV ON3031 C-00e SHX31 Ci 0 . �.v D 11SIHHO SndHOS to uIS uJslaHosoeeooiowm w z3a1wda a3Nanl E .lW3OVOV JNINIVal 30I10d w o 00 -' N011dltl]530 'ON Nlgn NOI1d181 0 'ON NOISI�3N E 3 0 0 z 33o �NJ NNN a 0 o ao �N awF Zwo x z rc IW/1 p o 3O� how 3ozw vv c < roa ee U O c9c Wo oNz �35a w aaa a Vim U w twit r w U¢ caraWmw caiowW U mm a6 w z o z z w mo o �.-.p m as o Z. i oa5 Qa�p z. f - of o� mNww pOJ m a vv US - ww z o 000 o w > oz �ao j�op ¢o�p a UU� w << J [� - w F Z j O� ..ip z W W 3 E 0 EE o ow a oo _�z aw wNZ OU '" w in w�N o UU z � w OZ 0c m m mmm m mm op Qa =� rc o o IN, i I m �� �z pLL zw z m a 2� Q w ~2 O Owp <w Op rc�rcrc 3 Oa qW ��m }p 20 Sp� ¢3 O a�Z a ow �n tam Wz- Qz � W � O Ua x 3 ___________ - Y w. = aN= w ow - = spm = m - 0 m a a� < o om 8 z4� zo w NZ o� F <� wm6 -_ 3wu aw ��- p i 6z w- �w3 QO O a\rc a Jw -1 o m om QoQ OO mwm 3Jp0O O�a �3 �w - pU 0II h iz mi ou�z �� Q WOwO �p� rca U _ _x _-V Nm< Nm o�w ow3m a3 ap = _� ;m= xo 6xo gow �y a_w 10 `� p m�< � o oho o <e p 8�: - _ �� wz �pzQ'tapn� �N wuUwitt Qw w IZ o0 pw.O �� a mem < p m o orcaw M'- �wm =gmp 84- z , � �Swc� mw � wm w 8 w `2w z ao�d ���� � aa ap Z < z' 6w � i 0 a m �zt wzw Co 4y`wm 0 9mdo ¢win g Z a i a w F 3 O x 6 c - W g r - o ww Jw �� - Wp J .EWE �_______ _ 1 z rc rc J �ZF ms �wp wp Z ma Z Z wwpm I > ~�-mIo =zg �cpip o3 �N � 20 4 aw o o-I� wo w� _ �mz�ti �d5 ba S% ozz a .� �mz rcw 'o=z PZWm Z. ioc� =pJ gg ' i �;. G < a �6 p3 m� m _p z M- o0Z wwzo ma o_ p wz� 3 ow �pmpp i X69 � 6 ww OaZa O`G azp rpU 388 m O pz�j<m I ���������I�������������������I wQ o 0 om -Nz wzF� � � �o�o �a� z � dao z�.5= a pp mp pNap atip rc p �'� - orc WZL< I .....� 0........................L......L.................. �ozwzp om ~N zapa .I..I. o czpi<ia zo�ww az 9w wwN �o u - w um m z� o i vt m 44 a rc i FF o i w s z 3 T>w o z F w p `------ fLxNO'z kUp~O ZGw- OQO ¢mYa O=~ aOj -� ww w o w p om x�a -_ -w3Gip Gza wU �; x p � m mGxo rcoR¢ a�w-_ m' zz '- ~ x2PH Focoi3vwi a I o23 Do. m maa32 > -14 a r o N m pw O m z z F w ao o u o m a a a y a p z a ZO om W � W V E i y bb w z � w y - W p a o w w a to w ) a U J o z O¢¢O ¢m 0 . o z 3 nn arc m w�z a W ¢ w U b O omO u d wo w Z Z�o O F -rc m Z m l U W U N U w ¢w�n Z E u3 O O W W w o z z cai cai m w �3o waw rc 40 Gl 5�GiI _ a z z �a o o U a a=5 I a a a W m z Q E a w a _ aa<a< rc 5 O z a o m o Q a w o Wx Y w w O O N W W pw W¢ m a 5 w W w 7 m 7 Z O Q O w w w w 2 Q U z U o z O >� aa.6v [� - coo wUo ? 55Yz 9s I zz' ooaww z 5 W Q m m U U Q>O O N N 0 4(N m 5 Y J J m z o o ms H a j d E Q U p o 0 0 o z O O w O > -___ N w Q (n 0�t owocv�NF� saowaS buiaaauibu3 jo juawueda4 N (Q SVX31 1112inO3S NVId ITIS N )011 I1SIHHO SndHOO to ul� uislaHosoeeooiowm Z38IWtla a3Naf11 o '�w�o3d35 C .1W34VOV ONINIVal 30I10d w o 00 a NOI1dIt1]530 ON 09— NOI1dIN-0 'ON NOISI�3N 6 O W w K Jt K N� Jw =w d c�yza3a p rU�pQ wooawz3zz w3F xoga�"a�sarczwa�w LL �pwa�ow�o.az =2ZNm az��a mw�wci a w vc��uxpw www ¢waoKz =oma—�i iz_� u=owo C,�o j3w�do�oxo�zw oo >p_o =�i.i�zffix a >w oy-wwa Nzwz¢ Uz osaw�rc000 j�o oou 000�= �"tt' w— 2 9E9H8'o5"iww5" E aiw?3?i0¢o>i i aow wom- wlno� Da �0 1 A ' U W U) Z'v a� ww Ny I t I � O n. 0 oa towocv� saowaS buiaaauibu3 jo juawueda4 N (Q y0 Nf�oSVX31 .11lbnois V V3bV-NVId b001d is[ N i 0 „i,H'o e,v 00 . I1SIHHO SndaOO to ul9 uislaHosoeeooiowm � z3aiwda a3Nanl E .1W34VOV JNINIVal 30110d w o m a NOI1dIt1]530 'ON 09— NOI1dIN-0 'ON NOISI�3N v, j O wwZ 3 tt � � Fo w iw N z wSww��No � a4a � o� tt rira HozQS It o ¢U r z b8.2- 3 Ez� w. &� ow a� az R <J J z oma tti t i wS91oow3 [� Oct Oi IR az av3av av3aa vv3av Ara ®e 0._0 vv3av k- 4 D U LUN a z a IL w O§ O` J m LL� O a 0 ® I ®4,�3, S Oi � towocv� saowag buiaaauibu3 jo juawued94 N (Q 40 Nfp.pSVXll /kii?inois-8 VlbV-NVId b001d is[ N s1031HOav I pQ# I1SIHHO SndaOO to ul9 uislaaosoeeooiowm � z3aiwda a3Nanl E .1W34VOV JNINIVal 30110d w o m a NOI1dIt1]530 'ON 09— NOI1dIN-0 'ON NOISI�3N Z�\ ww O WS O¢ F� o a pU Z F tt�W¢ w� z � QU ��w a(n o 3 0 zZ�� H ttW d1 aJo2a�J ttit i Y wo -ood3 LUF U to Y800 W R Q y Z a � J ® a Ir Oq O' J w LL V/u na V O + t � 0 O ®O #® B V3atl 3 V VI-v ®® saowaS buiaaauibu3 jo juawueda4 owv" IN0, N (0Q 11 F1d aNZSVXII AINAOIS 8 Vl2]VNVId a00N i 0 .o v IISIHHO sndHOO�O AIIS (1SI8NOSnd8DDAOda a3Nanlz3a1w0 . E AW34VOV ONINIVal 30II0d w o 00 a NOI1dIt1]530 'ON 09— NOI1dIN-0 'ON NOISI�3N Z�\ nW� 3 � ' ww w twoo o < o s F w�a�o 0 az wok i3 wio¢lood - Y U UW WU U �y N W a z J a Ow p w N w O O' O 3 V3atl 3 v3av saowag6uaaui6u3�ofuawedavDNu"4' .l1b03S-SuilslaHHo1soe0eooNiOowUmVA3134000 `Vo C� 0 N SWX31 Ci 0 . �.v I1sIHHO SndaOO to uI�da a3Nanlz3aiw1_7 wmo E .1W30V0H JNINIVal 30110d w o m a NOI1dIt1]530 'ON 09— NOI1dIN-0 'ON NOISI�3N �O X X ___ i {- ___ I I O I II � p o i I 0 I p y w D i w w JD ttoy Amo D3 i� =My w oz - K ANN > -Z W' ao woQ ozo NDa w az zs o L) z mz �Fa 3 mg ww Dw za Noz U X D > ei�� mSv doa �^ oa oN o�D m° o� p �z �mm a o of D D o O DD x�aNo�zao yz DmDZ = a o �¢Q Z oma wQ mo wo ¢ 3� w FUaU¢ o FNou~-iD 3w o0o p rD iom�o uwi rQ c� w J: u, rwD a� a oFam �mm ¢ DIO yDj - wrl`z �.m. �3 DwF USO U¢ ZW mb Z �miOUN N DNj�m 3 Q WOv� i;a� oa "' a -3 0: i;w ao�� _� oDx�oD vmoi aopo�� oDo� >s oc�i> o> w > o moo z ¢ ttD o z o mo 0o a ENO o 3 oam oz o o¢ eD - x> as>mz ozszoo oo o�aN oD a a� aa� o�� �No o m �' o�orm o� oow ocwnm o 0 Dwy ¢�� 3yi cD O O O O O D O O O >< O O O -- m n a i Q i� 3 I i Ii I r N� I II I 0 _ Df � No Q � a� o Jw rcoN c=i� � �3 �> xD mD oz K wo" a2 ;eN ws 3 < i�mo > wok ao 3DB wE 3 p wo DmN v3ia4a 1= '^p mo ¢ woF� orcP �n a� Sw v'¢ mo Q m Z DzN w w mz mna D zl U m Z o�w ¢ agz x mDw Di. oN U N�D x �Fa 3 wgog wv r o� ,p U yz� azm �aa 3 wo 3 z� oD 26 U 03 ¢�� Sr o.. �a Sam o w �3m x`¢D�'`N air o.. �a Fmm o ¢ mUw D3 mo Dw pw waD -U p ¢Dz `m Uw o3 mo D lino 1- wo o _ QQ .z xOm DOd 4Q_ ODd - Dmw K` �D X Da OF xD¢N ooi Iwi> awdo UOp SOU Kim �D W o w w -. p m 3 N w ~Q OJ :m U z ¢p D N U p D w J w ~6 0 m m ¢p m0 p D w m w �= D w= ¢o 8QD �, Zw U''-Z o p3J w U o�D w= � � �< Zw Js Via& DZN _ � ' >a� S �< �¢; z.gF > m ' a8 �ws �< 8;a c>l� 3m ODS Dj� mc9 D¢ (� s Z� D� 3m c>]Drc w� H. D¢ Os ®oo oDw>_ om9 of �N o 0 0� oa y oo o�m� o�� of H HE 'DN oa p° .T' D D UD oaw a¢� 9 sa ox N d' o D'¢in Daw aa� inD Ea '(S') x O O O O O O O 0 0 O O O O O 0 0 O O N c fl f ----------------------- W I � ell.. � X o 0 w < 3 me --z @� w U- w UOo O of A < . zw IoW D3 rW 1 �N Dow o�z a of UvwiN > ¢O gY D� D� <3< U ^ H. zOpo >¢ S3c W.9 Otrj - _- ¢.. (nrc - mQ Y N D D N¢¢ ow om O "> Dzw ¢z 3 x mw DN �o> � a Y� N Oo mzm wF �J oo a� a oa N yz} azo arc oz o oa om No orc wFa N QF U w¢m xwN oFa 3Wo 00 ¢w -z -� ozo x9m Oa ws U.m.. �U ttio O =U U Fzo mo¢N OD= iDD xU OZ rcai 'n arp oD D 3a I .. ¢F ooa - r O oa of omi� ao 0o wN w. w Cao mm�o '' c- w'a" I ¢ 'a' �¢mo � �w � D zw � z o3� wzw w�.D DY w: o¢o 8o D.-. oar moo w� -¢ C7 �a¢ oD ¢ D z¢ U' �da .'.zz� > o �- zz za DQ za o F iz> i� ami 5o z� 00 o�cwio aDm wom _o oi� '� o m l� a o"' oa a o om .T'wD a� J'.., i �a ri °�aoo ox¢a-i r;a� Y O 0 8 G 0 8 8 88 0 0 0 0�toW"4F� saowag 6uiaaaui6u3�o�uawueda4 .11121n33S-SllV13O lHa3N3J `V � w e yip SHX31 `� C N h p 3 s i o a . .�.v )0 11 IlSlHHO SndaOO to A119da a3Nanz3aiwuislaHosoeeooiowm w E .1W34VOH JNINIVal 30I10d w o m a NOI1dIt1]530 'ON 09— NOI1dIN-0 'ON NOISI�3N 6` o a m m m q Illh"- GIII- o wm — m � ~z'o� o Mx D � Q J N D o 6 a WD 22 UK z D w D} D 3 w D N.. H rriw �F ¢o x tt¢ zN D V Z N OFN S'�i+'' � oDwz a www w3 ON D tt� aIts oD y D – o Nv3i s yi ��o i w �u �ao�� ¢ lw� oar oat WOFDW – w x� w? zI N OWO 3d a3 om a.� oa �a 3 o w wo... < }¢w as � � a���"�v von o= Aos w: o o w Sv w� z �� S YF �i a� Awa xo� xw xwN }3 zaw o�z D zo U D � M. wizQ 3 Fn m¢ vy� ��y a� ao W¢UONR �Do O OD O O O Oz OY O O Y Q Q e� y Fl z .5i w D D w =z_ p Df N� X03 Dz w > c =� z a o x� w oo o o o =_� xm �� o D o z _aw =o J w ami _ _ za D<N rcw¢ +!n in U 3Ncj m�zN rn wao� U z w o z v D`JC O 3p 4 i o I w a z a O U z J 3� W Dim �� ~m �_ fz 3F a Ov o¢oD - zw 3� m� D w ui zz" zm oo of ow z Kms, of Xi�z c�= z LLN z �zz �o oc9 w �oF zv - ¢ �z >w<'' DgzD x�¢N Dr w to rcD –s ii �'o o o >oE Dmw �w A s� J� Nz D .1' 6 E c� D o - r -----All 6` O 6} p N D w m H w 4) W 7 D w >1 m J m w _m zo �Y w D ¢ U v w� Dw o z ¢ w d Q x Ow 5a } D3 w W N U �a m a a Q aD - ? z^ > ¢ OF ate ¢ _� ¢E z ¢ x 40 ¢ Z 3U �c wFi oFQ Y} isffi x itt�tto D� v pm WO D Y �m O Oi °� Do= mD = O m O �c�ymrc i" �� a z � w� zap .1> oFQ a a s has W> Qzw� z �� _� z �m zo aN4 Do F x a F oo� im z600a oF� zz 3z "_ w zoa iv azQ ��` --x 3.. ov woa W e z Dl>w v 6�K�Z Ww ~p Q Z 9w wZ� a > 7N 9w @may ?m D ¢ a� �" ?pm HOx IZ xD vID a Om rT'N wQQE D> y z D d:w xz, @a Y O O O O O= O r 0 O O O O O O O Ow O Nu en��,. •aa nu.N. mom »_ : © ~` m m» �1 *lama-gI££#mgo C-4 9 \a n/ /}� IU+gsamom Uo m=om=zm \\ U\ ( « kVllAAegNv� +10110a ti \} ,9 dg Iz \( z j - /E lw 2 ! § _( q k § QO�toW"4F� saowag 6uiaaaui6u3�o juawueda4 SNOUVO1Nf1WW0O-S310N ONV ON3J31 N o (-0 SV)01 = liSl HHO SHdHOO to h11O usla asndaooiewo; o (D o y�(j #Aar Z381H 213N21f11 AMOVOV ONINIVal 3O110d w o 00 a NOI1dIt1]530 'ON 09— NOI1dIN-0 'ON NOISI�3N r m Jw �m0 Z�Z x UW Uz mO m o w ¢ _ r.3 ww v'i o-Qo zoo or< awW ¢¢U¢¢¢¢ o p z Z z m - U 6 w mO a K d z Z Z U U U m m of a m ¢oo rJlpz wma 3z i Zzz FFF oL�3 w 'z 'o o f oma Z � z� wG Egg zR o �mmmm z ¢ m a c� w>a>z amw a� o o a �0000 -8- oT,\w oUw '.i ¢w w z m IIIII o00 0o z 'o i 8wvwi �2z¢o 00 uwm �o zo w z w Q w o m en o 1 o amen 222 z > rJl a m ¢ � rJl m o o 0 o a s i m ow ow ozo o� a pz "¢23 �m G, o a m o o m < u o 6 "5"5� o <z am -J¢ aw< zjmw.l QzO mzZ aao a0 G,, F Z W a o ¢¢ o m Q j s z z ooQQa aaa p < E� FU Em� Fwm, �< wy< -U Ow� O m z 6 m 0 U 2 m m Ow m w pO I ODO ao o z_4 mw z_az oz .W QaLL rcg o� < . - o ? ? o m z o m o w� �o E� o a rc aWo =o mo ion ;oo �y ON o -'o E z a v o m m m z - v w z �ilz a o00 io iv Z o x$a oz� mc<im zwm �¢z � 'oa ¢ w m di > w i z m m m i U < w"000 rctt� v w w<wo -m< rJl�� 'oa << `^ z z m z z z a o0o rc ov ao zo mo ao om z. ozoU a � 5 a om o - - a - a o < w u~ www w ¢m o a Iw w Ia w a � �wz =ow5 oz 2z - - l~5. 4`l "ol a lol mcolco.� N c� zw ~ 0O 00 o-wU o-zU 3 ¢zo �3 j3 m m r x w r r z o� a� a 9w �w �wrca �'ow.a a'zo 002 a� 4a til .. .. .. .. .. .. .. UZ ;o ; wen WO a w dm ; UM ;2 M. ro ro O O N N N W m m 6 Q 3 0 o F �2 2 wz w m Wo r y o gw R z z w w m o o 1 W�W Na s m 2o�z w. zj oz oa 3 < �m o Fo w Gl < mw wx m �D =a m zmmo z� m3 ouN i ma ¢2Z<g rcW -z. i r� zoj 2w o ~ ¢mw c�� wz way o �U LL Jo �W H V¢� �w ; - m�w ya m Fa o iY U <0 < 0 2jxa rc< w Wz o5� W.m nw � m lio< U¢ 4o w oO \ 3 d wzm $jz oo OU 0 wo o� �pz mZ wzz is =wz mrcm z m 2 o ap�m w �W o �o m �m w o� �l a''Z�iZ�imll mi zo ua 2w g o 2 !`nn a oum a i o o - ao < oz 20 w azo Na so o zp m �coi 2m� � �2 �a_ z v=ia N z g Yw o o as i=2 yy a Z�r m zF aw =o <g x z z m ow o = o 3� w Z. z �7a am m �i z aJ my 3 =ZfL wrc o � Q w� o Ow 5re OFx a md3= �� _ o �p2 o z w w w< xm w~ <a 3Q o o mrY� ooz a�� o �3 = rc 2 Z- wmo> 6U Fw -Z 3-m Ow u mfn aha m wok 2 i 'o o o wOaF 4m >S r cpm ops I _z rn<.Ig 2z _ o aaa s o z laoow No - wo w w __ foo =z< ow w �l a I o m� � =s �� oo � 5 a iiz ow` 2'� 5 0 m s G oo awUa3 x� 3� g - m i s ma j°wav 2k8t 3N x a m zFoF� W < mm w ao o G-G �w5°a ; 'a�G� -w oo xGzWwo �Ha Ea uU R �w f ; O m U �U ��++ll �p �a x9p mE �Qw a O¢ lg, K � 2t O w a2 W. m z- d 2� 3 vp~i �1 `P—AF -W%j ao� � U�O YO UO 00 �3p~ -oom2 a11 m Q W Oa SS'zw� �O 'zo m �2 J �� 1na;m 1..1 �OQ �U w< DQE O zN _ ¢� wog =¢mwp w<_ pFm zZV ,88 z - MOz a 92W� w 2> =lz w z0� z lwn �-z �= c� rc�� m w 3 2zd O <ao zo = g2 Wi12 <z a!? iw3 ttF oo �z o �mIn w W-1 Foy n�� zo� _ 20 �m wfrc <a G1 oda�� azo =m w Z G w ¢¢ = 2J� a z2 22 z Z i=� WOj U U m'�Z _ O m Wa -¢mio �I-o m O U a �mm aw a2 O ap Z0�3 mm O"cF<i �z zo o ooF aW <os w ~R mvig o� - gmo w� Go_ � F� wo mV ao 0 �� a wN �� - z z ow 2x Gp a u z- a z S azw y�� xW coif? mz 'm-' o ms -w� _ s mo s Ficmi a �m _ < c2i m LL oo &9¢om s_ �zo a m U 0 m>_ aao �F�a y<� m a < m o o3 m 2 o xz m € Orw< J J m< .n2 < w ;w O 3 0 z o z Fp WE W oNF mp3wsw z C� <m 3m Q fm ~Vd 9O �0 �U Cm] 2GzG >OU -z oiUwrc4 _� lx/10 SU aw [/+ OtiJ Q�< mo�wm F zm W d Ow �� o€= Geo 05� z w oo z -ozao om a a~ m Z 6 ao e ow,mw a�� gwwB - o sa y�Wl m B'ZOiCzx Uo 2 mU mw om ''B'o �oa �OOvmi - p ~ o i¢ N F zs5 ow zz.o z �@ w `3E0 3rw t=, z a ¢ o m p 05� 6__zm _ w p @ v2ix W �m 5 io oa zw o m�p ww om oUz H. w�a z: �z�z aw mo.a �x �F d� < a ow g mz �zzoz<a o2 wen z am i a� - � m w m o�Jc2i _ t ai m z� o�w m� ¢d oza 5 _� z maz '� p w'^ �rc o -o � m 3x wrw%Wowo� i� o$ a � - 7 z�2m �w2�o am a� azo azw m aao - 2a�3w �3 >LL oa - rc au 'S ooz6 ooNy w zm 2F os Naw wyma a2 - z = cn rc < m5m5m s� o w �uwz � i =2o ip i saw o � z� a i om 3Nm�si u �� m �Q on X03 gpw =owx �w o z xo� p 2 <� w 3< s zO <z rc rno iz w. u<az i�%a Oz 2 a� aw Fo TIN wg¢ p'oo�Q i uo o � po oap E. ouw mp=w ,T+p rnmN ¢ <W ,�.�.11, w� m za i< z iowo z F w �o mom w zp xr,w ;2 00 ���< w m a o; <2 wo o� �m am�w <1I xE. 2 o1a �w5 - < 1. o <°o�cz 3� zwz u cga w3m mo=ya 'Gl�o ;ix m sa W G� W2 m PIE 35 �pw�� a� 52. 2� 03 poo op oG �`� ;g �wm amwoo F 3w w`2w wz m �o c2i o wtol 3�az5w mum 2z wJu _ �i <o� pm�� oS w z r3 m� o o �¢ mw6 Fo m =omwgrc3w wo �� <�� ow om wo� wa apm ac�vim y o z m z - p ��owu U,Z¢6 ���N- �ilz Um m� m0 �^ 3� $<z UI �= wO �< z=' K < �w j�d <p omo 00 Y�� z w�wm�F �� oupx w- W. 3 Imw �c<.�w va = o wC0 mm =_ p¢ -5 H. xm 33 m - pz� �� jai < ivi oz o mo .. I� <H7 Eos om- ic3m m o� o mmz. owe o � o Fm x lz - a% o Frc �w o <4 z op�z v oz l5= �o wisz <W� �� a wN� m wr c o3�3& _y3 z ,m w= zw lop oz 3 -ia <i �i oma 3ulE o¢m �n c<i < �g wo m am= - m_ ��«o acoioN��< o rcpi d m u 2 w w oao ooa�� o zm coram a d m u p w dm wz o a22 m 0 � saowaS buiaaauibu3 jo�uawueda4 �t owocv�NFN (Q SVX31 SNOIlV01NnWW0O NVId 31IS N52 x.,p CO rI1SIHHO SndHOO to ul9 uislaHo soeeoo io wo, w MIWtla a3Naf11 E AW34VOV JNINIVal 30II0d o m - NOI1dIt1]530 'ON 09— NOI1dIN-0 'ON NOISI�3N Q U Q Q U O_rcN ¢i lu Fm>�wW - Oz� U� 5m2w41 UZ OKU�w 02 p U QWQ �� fGm Kx �zA Oj FaO KQ U p Qmw. �I Z O wQ O/rjNQ� z-w w 'UW�OUaO �o �fo oFn 4aaw ��3�'s�ig3a�i w rca� z � 3o �~� ow �m o0i. z � rosoa f� U»wx Qow U .�i~'I f RM ww �o?¢ <�<m ai� a� �� a 00 J? Q U m.. z U Q O N Q a 3 M>f Q �U? Q H K= N n a 00 t� O s� h s z x wo �0 3 o So N Z ell O � a U Z 7 Nz 3 J n aI ww Ny o r z ov 0�t ow ocv�NF� saowaS buiaaauibu3 jo juawueda4 SNOIIVOINnWW00 c.i (0 y SVX31 NVId bIWJ 16l 311SOdW00 N r IlSlHHO SndHOO to ul9 uislaHo soeeoo io wo, = Z38IWtl21213N21f11 .1W34VOV ONINIVal 10I10d w o 00 a NOI1dIt1]530 'ON 09— NOI1dIN-0 'ON NOISI�3N w J mw w z zN jzw a w — a o 3N� U¢x 3LLow o U? z U =:p dwN� P�� gw = poz��& =Nwo pJ2z m w 0 saOp pai �¢3�wo3C9 pFarco w>o�i <,<wm ¢ � z 0%w._ �am ZaZ �O �zNz w.p p Oz z Zo F �oja o w J K m Q J z F o d p w o w z p z a K U D z�� cSS_� zwai J� _ z w azzp J I a o¢[J J 2 x oU d O Z J> O O z 3 o p R d w J o woo oo a��maao ao �zai�0.-z oaoirc zrcaF oz d'a [V M N O O O a= H V W Z 9 D V J N 0 4� O z0 v� o zo Q CLJ LL 0 o m 111 7,� z .a III W M 06 ill as 9II 0 w III OJ ^III () III ::III III s . III - III oz III VIII w W Nrx 1� m oa 0�t owocv�NF� saawag 6uiaaaui6u3 jo luawueda4 SNOIlV01Nf1WW00 P3 w NGy�rhj' Aa 0 yi3p sioai"iHoav NVId KuiTslaHUosueeNoauo3w1al,SOd00 N=�o¢ I/L�SHX31 0�.0C I1SIHHO sndHOO lO ALOda a3Nanlaiw1W34VOV ONINVil 30I10d 00 NOI1dIM 'ON pg— OI1dlN—G 1. ON N O �wvIA W O Q ¢w z ¢ a � F O I/�7m K.-.� z27 (7 n 7 }OJ \O QKOd �NUIN�E w �Z ¢Oi I O 2f~/1 fx/I 'o. 21i NFw W Z o � FK vK R w N 3 – O d w x K j 6 U Z K N w 0 O i Z m w K sgaom pxi z 4a 3�w'3.� yomarco w>o�z rnmi o o�aga�po� oz U�a�o �oaoow o oz�� -o �ojzz wa wm�caio � oiwa i� o�zrc "w w 5 i Jo�p z_ 3 ww mm ¢z F ia o tt[J m i i U a O o z o j o O o O p ¢ i o zoo Uao o aow� ozgaww D�a om o ¢�3orl a��mi— —3ax�U? aaxrc a_ o? �o g to O H U z g� Nw p _ V o z o o g o a U ry w O O LL z va W 000 06 as (. 08 r ------------------------------ —111 1� ,..c,., .,...„s ,�”" 0�t ow IF"4,� saowaS buuaauibu3 jo luowUeda4 SNOUVOINf1WW00 P3 � w r, yip SVX31 V V3dV-NVId HOOI1 1S l N N h 3 sioai"iHoav � � 00� - G z3aiwda a3Nanl IlSIHHO sndHOO 1O hll0 uislaHosueeooaowo, o CD w y�rj' Aa �1W34VOV ONINMJi 30I10d o 00 z WOd03tl3i`'N � ~ - NOI1dIM�530 'ON Np9— NlidlN—G 'ON NOISIA3N K N v m Z a^-. Z x Z K W Srio arc oa Z�NNm�pN �Gz r ¢ oU�o � o z0 c�0 aaNin3 Fo¢ w oxw w o a� Apr xp O�Uz ut w� pO� wo w..� oaW rc5 xNW� o a�oa s 4aoo rc�Z f�3�wo3�¢ Noo FZ QaQ w>Oi N? o Wo N �UWF J¢ oz-Qo� oz pm Q�z Uo �oaoGa J ao� w oz �o z�a5 `2 cwia5z woo -w--o ?zyyz wdw y �¢ z ~ WW w w omo x� ooz¢I wf�a 3 _Jo ��3 o�wa it S¢z" J i az -¢� f JiQo�3 E Ji�iUao pz oJ�z�o oo3Uo 00 ¢moo¢ N¢ ¢ o Fx �'=o a�3i;�i,zo�oo a��maar;a� �zai�cwi- �aoia zo V, x R ooz o2oi� wo oacM _ .z svaav °u� svaaa zi .�.� v vaav oa o-�� O•� vv3av _ - Z O h ^� 8 O O a ®= a s a z 0 00 a a a w O O' J m IF LL� r qq �, g6 0 0�t owocv�NF� sauwaS Buuaaui8u3 jo luawueda4 SNOUVOINnWWOO c.3 (0 SVX31 8 VIHV NVId a001d IS C'4 ti N �h. x'•p „s l 0 3 ,„„�,. .�.�.. a r I1SIUHO SndHOO to ul� uislaH sneeo iowu, Z3a1wda a3Nanl E AMOVOV ONINIVal 30I10d w o m a _ LL� _ NOI1dItl�53a 'ON N99— NOI1d121�S 'ON NW1,3a aw rc z w J p a r w�N z zNo ~ v U m - J dw..\ F_�p aw�O�OFw E�DZ 0 <WpjK2Q �� saoo Uai frc3 U1. WwU pFa Q w>o�i ��� - UwW� Ja z 0zda��oz ozN ag0000wo J aout-i oz � <o zIz� woo a o�zaa _mM, o�wazzP zia aowz E� owmo y�a z �FaoI) Jia- -pz oJ� Jo x---0 oQaw mz avow w�+o 3i;�i,wi;s a��(naao.a� �za$�u- .aoia csRft x U� ��U� z y Z O U Z O U � 00 W o. Q a a Oq LL w r a 800 opo„ o ®p III o ®„ l a� a� ill od III III. a� o 0 ill ... III 0 r r Al Q. ®� �III 4 2 III. Na III Ill o ..._. Ili tll P nl III =-3=V dpi ia.Fdu., o n.N- 0�t owocv�NF� saowag buiaaauibu3 jo juawueda4 SNOUVOINnWWOO c.3 (0 y SVX31 8 V]2IV NVId b001d ONZ N ti N h 0 3 sioai"iHoev00 : (� I1SIaNO snda0O�O uI� 6I8NOs d80OjOND, o w z3aiwda a3Nanl _ E .1W34VOV ONINIVal 10I10d `w o CO _ LL� _ NOI1dItl�53a 'ON N99— NOI1d121�S 'ON NWl,— w Z a o >Nm aw w z ZNzm m — rc a ur 3oa ¢¢ NQ�± �F N Duwoa�aZ a� o �cwi�z i�rc dw..\ F_oO dw�O�OFW o ¢Z V�K 2jy�jO oJ�2 N jK2Q Sw saoo Uai frc3 woww pFa Q w>O�i ��z o z oa�z� pz may c�wa Fpoa�'N�� z�c�Zi Oz w zw o(ri¢c�i w —o=z� w wmo ��� o$wazzoZ' �5Fo w �U m? a Z �F¢O�ZZZ �=�IURO pZ o�j -d o E- ¢\o¢ ¢ —9o. wi;s a��(naar;a� �za$�u- aa§ia oaa�n x oz �`�o� d'o N O H U Z o O o®� U o� 00 z IL r Oa O� � J g � a " o 0 no Do 0 3 V3atl 3 v3av 0�t ow ocv�NF� saowag buiaaauibu3 jo juawueda4 SNOUVOINnWWOO c.i (0 �h. x'•p „s i o „�,. .�.�.. SVX31 sWil0 NMI WO011ll N ti M r _ I1SIHHO SndaOO to uI� uislaHosneeooiowm o = Z3aIWVd I a3Nanl N o o .1W14VOV ONINIVal 10I10d w o CO a NOI1d18B53a 'ON N09— Nnlidl-0 'ON NWl,— .i w a p > > W lJ n o � W � w z o> F - W U p z Q � z z � ” o ro o \ v p z m m 1 Y z z z w ¢ V z ¢ 3 N U W O c v p p D tt v ^ S o d z U w d, ~ Z ¢ Y p o w vi z Y U r p U w 3 U am W w p U fA U U U W 2 m W p o o w ¢ cYi �n o d i w o o > I a v a -'w o g i z r Ir i i a o w z z = p i m rc o p � W o w w d a w w g N - z x p N s e - O o i v 3 px v v v v W 11 Illell III 0� o U n 6 Q ¢� U5 r j Wf aU� n Y K` Q W I 1111 Z �IIIr - F 1 W V) I Q 2 W D 7 v7 3211f1b321 S _ z o F � M z � o � U N .m oN I o W m�° o el 0�t ow ocv�NF� saowaS buuaauibu3 jo luowUeda4 SNOUVOINnnnoo P3 C-0 w zo� Ny��h�'h�)0'3tl3i`'wN�a, yiip i"NOiI1HdIM�530 SWAuisClaI HoVIsMueeooJuoWw0o,03131 NwwJ = I/I.�SHX31 0'.�0N� G IlSIHHO sndHOO lO AIIOda a3Nanl CDz3aiw1W34VOV ONINMJi 30I10d ¢ 00 'ONp9— NlidlN—G LNO IS�oIa— - QF ^ III z 4w Z z � �9 w m Z f U O U O O w % .- z m 3 � O JUJ w +�i JJ OOQ W JOjJ O z N F N F U d N F O Q N w z J K Y J zN j O c� o w a a a w w w 3 o J W J J J J z z > i v rc 3 > �x v v w o n 00000003MO38Sv 36nMd sv a w o � z O F U w a a U z Z O Q W. e e J3 W ¢W Y r Q°s U N 3HInO3S W 38InO38>J SV z w 0 U v W j N mC t I v � Z M I w O ry n m � _ w Z =6 DDD oQ z $ v 0 I Dree - I U I w DSD _ of m o .I O 0 w , I 0�t owocv�NF� saowag buuaauibu3 jo luowUeda4 SNOUVOINnnnoo P3 � w r, yip SVX31 SWACI VIMJ W003131 N N h 3 sioaoav � � 00� - � G i z3aiwda a3Nanl IlSIHHO sndHOO 1O AIIO uislaHosueeoouowo, o o C�o �1W34VOV ONINMJi 30I10dCN - z w ¢ 00 a o w � NOI1dIM�530 'ON Np9— NlidlN—G 'ON NOISI— O z m o9 w m z 4 w Z w V ® z U O U o m O ow Z < w m p Z U w g i U J v w w m 3 o z o zo o o w z o w v a o w u 3 0' z J — a � w a w w J J - z z J o rc 3 > o a a N O w 0 � 6> 8 6 0 6 0 (D 1 0 I 3aln 038 Sd w z 0 N kL � m 5 n � � �5 n ' L Z Q 7 W. W U� e U _ n ° F Z . o �U - w N �2 e ELI m'o w." D V o z 3alno3a s I � e ` U - m M O `�to I M I M I FI I m 7318int)3a sv 0 SV vDN,,Fv4NF� saowag 6uiaaaui6u3�o juawueda4 SNOLV01Nf1WW00-SlIVl3a 1Vb3NK) `V C-0X31 `� ti V c o# '� 5 1 0 3 1 H o a v I aH sndaouiewu, IlSIlH�Sfda0�1 l�da 83Nanl Z381w C14 ONINIVal 30I10d CO NOI1dItl 'ONN99— NOI1dl— ON�L NW �I,— UWO Q oV I K > p " 3oao o m z Q � Y a OOm Q K U mftxiiN m f � Q 2' C zU m U J w Oz ¢ n 3 aa- O U> oQ W = w a p " � 3 "OU p w ?z xnw O z WZK 3ww j O ow W N z. w 53 W UG> O Z o 30U� S S S OO (/1 o rz U z wm Z mw _------I1 tt _ O m Ow O O II O Z R O O �zZ . Q N WE - W OJ O O ¢ ~pOmZ "00 O K 0 3 > W - A U� 53 5w o m < o \a .mss 'm xQ .. x E'o mo wU - ow i I ___________� J a ozx ?s __ o s m w w zU m w - ------------- vi waw w 4wQ Ww wp o w W W,W w 0 in m zz�F� c>a�_.. ox of o J ymc� w m E2w33 az3 mw ao x ¢� �_ a Q. x N pJooF owo Qx aa3 owzw 3 \ om 3 O GUo�o �2Uo x3 F Z in z o ohm w x n9O Qr r3 a rUp .a..QON Qocxi 4e wn zymj oT"0 WQOQ 3F 3F O z o U ow to m K ZOQ N O 3m w_o Q O QU Z-/UZ p o 3 LJi• Q W—z O p mCL�Q FOUx Y NS rcx U H Uw o Uz oU wo �o O Z >�Uoo Roo x J �F T w Wxa j a pJo3 > pp coma- &jU a \m o- zo ti nNRdwl. jzma ao <o a i� < rc mwo w z�Fo z U g o 0o x� x� w w <a O _3z J'"�3rc wri L. as a zawOU� oao - xoo - s Rzo U w �" U-moo >;z : z J �" w - z C7 J"�z U>:omo to oN �� w LL ac�i��d�y aaz m� m� 5 w U� woa o Z oZU>U apaop ow Ua f� w\ ¢ �" mNlWvzgc� oo m oz oz Umi o z �� o z w. z� zQzorc ow _z wpm of a� o oz"mc�i� zm'�'o �o �o na orn zy v mz> �: ww W -z zwz� oo w� 5o x ocxi �z H. ~a3 mxma sz iz z U.. w m o. °Q' oo �O� a ar�im mdcoi coir om mw3 ma r rn'm UR HH'i wm "'m s '-<o rco 0 o�nLL f'c� z VjR w"p 9=;f G 6 n 3z m UW - 0 i m 3Fz zoU z RD 1:1 O J w ❑ E] Sma w Q a J o 2s Yo Q - x 3 a H �d�nw - o 0 o xmffi,zo � ; I _ �� w I w w Fzr z J _ O ¢O€U Z zo tiww w z 003? o O aJmawI zo. v U z Uo m mfsz a as Qaa c� w a w �a N3o0 z Q O >: j �. m-zw o= U W O: ¢� oo`aw"aw'oo Uw ~z U wF UY¢z J i Q J U N x�nA 3 v v 0�t ow ocv�NF� sauwaS buiaaauibu3 ja juawueda4 3dn10ndiSVd N1 N � y 1VnSIA010nV-S310N ONV ON3J31 N o SVX31 0 A�h o „s i 031," Hoa v = 00 - �> r I1SIaHOSnda001oul0 uislaHosoeeooiowm o a y�r� M#a. z3aiwda a3Nanl E .1W30VOV ONINIVal 30110d `w o 00 a N011dltl]530 'ON 09— NOI1d121OS30 1. 'ON NOISI�3N o a i� g" gra oo W 69 .N. _ z flu b� o " -a �o, ;a -� Q E o z �+ m m. m -F N JY �a of Q o 8G'a w �� S JB L; 5w�^ � N ao CZ mo eng 2 8N� ti J - » �� z o mzo �m�� Uf -� �i =xw o <� "`G �_ " LL `m� a tau <� �U10 d"€wz z� m i �< oo"go a���� �wgo 03 OF w��3 w�-J wRoo= a Fz z �nz �oa cJi�n� ¢ sa�� a€gip z a8.- � �LLs U �sd =� Q LL w_=a s w ¢ p¢ a� aasw seg Y a ¢3 0 0 m p d y a z So a = z a a a �g o oz U �. o. o _ m = w o �_ �6�'" z jEz A �aQw zo a¢ Z " = w » ,A U o o U�b gw� < w,0< LL I �t s awo LL o < w J V a �a b-5z w3 a�i¢aa �z z _ x LU - p i7w > � > B ¢ �o o€ -ip¢g � wo .- og p E2 W 6 5 �8 7� tt47 zgg m z o. Zo= o1 = N 3 �d - NMn 8mm w 3 - Z �w o 4 g��o zd €e �Eomz of .� 9 s m m" o R o z - u3 z oazj� �_ lbm zx3a"9 m mb a = f £ = o �m Q \ \ \� \� a _ a o w w� �o� 0 3a = J §za $ p oho S 2 3 `o @ 'i �Paos wa ���> o_Qa w �WWWWWW�zz awe as F o 3 m '3 w ob w 1 0 w � � z w Z ¢ o=Wz ao ?cz �iOcwi�� Zq w� C 4ti = 3Z. .-. -. No Y o w w"mF ug¢d J p �wE G ��S w�� moi O O o� ¢dJ wo��FF i d' rcw �a�� x H _ Ea a� 'F 'F o �050 =&o w ¢ $ mmm z z a ��mmm ¢w�o¢w�o¢woo oo wo o�m�o�m�ozn �m� rc w Iz �' z'zzl..> > I lw ¢ moa mo z-.. w �o poa a »�� a ¢ z ¢ z ¢ z o pa Sa nv 5; z a 3rxtn 3Fxvl;rx� pp �¢ moa z poo�z- 0=3,00='300= 0 pp 03~¢03~ oar �O 3a�io E j <�j� - p O ¢ w w �? ¢¢I»o x w x .€ o �o <m 'o 0 3 3 3 8 0 3 N�33 a N� J¢ KK�3K 'a¢ o m m m m m m v�p0= 0 0 d U' 1 a¢¢I ¢ U d ¢ m ¢ €vQ>xV U O m Zwm I I¢mm (n m m m> m m m m ¢ m m 3<wN w� �' �Z lag lag U w OWK Y Y U 6 w m�22 O d N w O O 4 d R d Q Q Q 6 oa v o ¢p 0 O� m J¢ oop p _ . _ . _ 2 2 0 O Q oQw O Q U U �U_ Qz OOwOtt¢ 2i 2! U O O w d- U 7 \p \p N N N _rl1 \ ¢ \ Q ¢p QOO Qoz N pH �W p p Z r�3 ✓f3 rf� U Uj U pa h x0 ✓> I w Ow z Qp �_ ��N��N (7 C70 C'JU UC] d d¢ d Fz O NO O O .mwV��Q Ww Ww U W go o O h4N✓l4N II II II O< o 10 Vg mg ¢ ¢¢¢¢¢¢ ¢ _ nN nN N� v¢ v a3 a �m N _� Eaa����� �m ina t=na of LL Fzw^ �rx �F o 0 0 0 �� �� w ��x w o v v ¢ Z i�oo o� owx ¢ a a ¢ i3 or ¢ or ¢ ¢� ¢m a a w w M3 �� w� S� m �3 m 3 z J w-0 < ¢ rn N O Q - ¢ a Z x z Z w m in n twig twit F w w OQ " oo 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 U U U 0 w¢ ¢¢ oU=p¢ppo rc ¢ OQo o zmp z¢3p z¢3p a J Y z N z z ~ w¢ o¢ Ozoz�j w w - 2 2 Z �� Q oo¢v ¢F ¢r oam oam oam z� ¢r ¢F �_=oj oN o .. oa - •• $� zo o to z" p =¢x¢ ¢o a^ ¢^ rvr o o J=� J i aZ¢' ¢ �U¢WZ wm wm wm �^V m (> 3 d O o N N o o o o _ W F 0 p w U = Z m Z m Z m =N a O - d YkF m¢v xx� w p f K f ¢ ¢ ^ ~¢ z. p W W o Y U w m ¢ W w Z Q two o _a �g o m oo 3S 3g aN as data >Q 3Q oz oma as J o0 a i J rc 3p- >a >d o - r po 03 = o o amo o - w p ¢ U Hoa u wp3zFw6a NonNa ¢ ¢ wp gp go3 ga vi `Ja �¢ o v 'o o a goo a�^ =o d w Qwo >oo-�wos an' 4 4 — 4 4 4 4 4 0 0 {} o �o>"> Qammx�z � � mo�N »> 4p.. Q000 «mm=- 0�t owocv�NF saowaS buuaauibu3 jo luowUedo4 3wimJlSVa�N11vnS1nolanv N � w°' y VV3dV-NVIdHOTH1Sl N icy V roe s i 3.1I.H. .�, � I SVX31 0 'As HosndaooHowo; o CO w Q - z3aiwda a3Nanl IlSIlfH�SndaO�l ul� `J Jy'�w o3d35Aa C� AW34VOV ONINMJi 30110d `14 m a NOI1dIM�530 'ON No5Y.— NlidlN—G 'ON NOISI— 8tl3atl .. � 8V3atl ...............................i ............................................ ..... ........ ........ vv3av ..vw3av T� rco LL z s, w z K 7 U D d. U) LLK Z J LU 0 0 a a a g a 0 O' J LL= r � dib S, S, 0�t owocv�NF saowaS buuoauibu3 jo luowUedo4 3wimJlSVa�N11vnS1nolanv N QO w y 8 V3dV-NV1d HOTH 1Sl N icy V roe s i 3.1,,,�I.H. .�,v CO � I SVX31 0 'As HosndaooHowo; o w Q - z3aiwda a3Nanl IlSIlfH�SndaO�l ul� `J Jy'�w o3d35Aa C� AW34VOV ONINMJi 30110d `14 m a NOI1dIM�530 'ON No5Y.— NlidlN—G 'ON NOISI— A� �z LU LU f U coH LLQ LL z_ J Q y 0 O ao a Z 5 0 0 J LL= F w r tt� 1� e tl3atl e V3atl V V3}Jtl- � � -�tlb'3`JV T w� Ny h;; x'•p �s, o „�„�,. .�.� sauwaS buuaauibu3 jo�uawueda4 3alonalSVa�N1vnS1n01anv N C-0 r �oovN8 V]2IV Vd b00d GNZ0N c� SVX31 C I1SIHHO SndHOO lO AII9 uslaHosnaaooiowm o w z3aiwda a3Nanl E .1W34VOV ONINIVal 30110d `w o 00 NOI1dIt1]530 'ON 09— NOI1dIN-0 'ON NOISI�3N �! �z 5g K 7 a ± D to K z 2 IVY J 3n 7 O O Q m Q W O �w K Q z Q a o0 z Z V r ry a diad a eye dd3ad_________________ ._________________�_�_�_�_�_�_�_�_�_�_�_�_�_�_�_� �.�_�_�_�_�.�_�V��v 0�t owocv�NF sauwaS buuaauibu3 jo juawueda4 3dn1OndiSVdAl N C-0 w"' y1VnSIAOI4nV-VV3bV-dOHIS[ N� � �c-> N h;; x'•p �s, o „�„�,. .�.� SVX31 I1SIHHO SndHOO lO h1I0da I a3Nanl lm `owz3a�w1W34VOV ONINIVa130I10d w 00 NOI1dIt1]530 'ON 09— NOI1dIN-0 'ON NOISI�3N 8 tl3atl aV3atl Or'LU W 2 .... ..... ..... ..... Q. F U CO) K z J a D cn 0 0 a a a a a§ V K m r a 0�t owocv�NF sauwaS buuaauibu3 jo juawueda4 3dn1OndiSVdAl N C-0 w� y1VnSIAOI4nV-9V3bV-dOa1S[ N� � �c-> N h;; x'•p �s, o „�„�,. .�.� SVX31 I1SIHHO SndHOO lO h1I0da I a3Nanl lm `z3a�w1W34VOV ONINIVa130I10d o 00 W�d03tl3i`'� z w a o w NOI1dIt1]530 'ON 09— NOI1dIN-0 'ON NOISI�3N VI✓ g� H U y 2 J Q to J O 7 a.Q a s a �9 Qw r V a v3av a vaav Opt owocv�NF saowag buuaauibu3 jo juawueda4 3dn10nalsVdAl N � w r y wnslAOlonv-8 V3aV-d0 i ONZ N ti sex31 hsi0ai:':� Hoav 00 I1slaHO sndHOO�O ul� 618NOs d8OOjOND, w Z38IWtla a3Naf11 E .1W34VOV ONINIVal 30I10d `�o 00 LL� - NOI1dItl�53a 'ON N99— NOI1d121�S 'ON NO19,3N VI✓ g: LU F ...: .. U ED LL _ a LL Y .. Z 0 V � a a a° y r h N a diad a vaav vv3av_________________ ._________________._._._._._._._._._._._._._._._. ..._._._._..._.V��v 0�t ow ocv�NF� saawag 6uiaaaui6u3 jo luawueda4 3anlonalsva3N1 N y lvnslnolanv-s11v13a 1va3N3J N 2 � �v h �s. o a i„i H o ev � SVX31 0CO > � IlSIliH�SndaO�to ul� 'As Ha sndaoa uo wa; N Z381H 213N21f11 0 (�w Jy'�w�do3d35Aa C� �M�� AVITIVOV ONINMJi 30110d `�o 00 w a . w � NOI1dIM�530 'ON Npg— NOI1dlN—G 'ON NOISIA3N O • Q ^ •I E� � U E � N � Z � _ Y 3 z z � of z � z a o o w 42A tt p -¢zp O Q z \�w ttmw O\mow T W F a N Z U a U H ti W N Z U W W Z y W r 0 fn w 6 m N 6 D O N H UU 6 d 0 Y O O O O O O m O JOU o� a W 0 W �w ego a owo F N� U w J 0 a O _ w a a u� o z oz o dz z 0 0.. oa o o a m N w a J aoz ¢ ¢ www z Q w'o� a - z� iso v UQ� i".ari moQ mo o2izvw a� woln ziu o d w ¢ iz o3rc �p - i ozo z mC z Foo�� zFu zF zplowam � aouo;m g wa y <wo iw m m o a >W ui - _ -z. -� - - N ” a amu > G > aG oN mz cs� a D O oa�po Owl p�3 O�tt3oW<3< a5a �` azag 0 oo �= oa� g Z Y Qvoa 05 ON >o Zoo Zoo ZowOZ a' > wUOKO� ¢ LL o w imrn uvioau �uu qua �u�aazo a- iso u5 3 a� 'a ao �u',� oc�i� 5 3 �� w o ~ ori azwN ¢.—z U o w U ~ W \ U U N W N N G o� L Q O wpm wFm N U Q NQD .az w� o m zow xa.-. J v o o ~ mea 3 Y w o 0 oQ a y — v } Uw z N p W 0 Y a KK � F W > K U U O Z 0 m W = j Y U O m 1 Q g w ril FIRE U N w ~ — oaZZ o�y OO OO o\03 z d v c� UP OOdU G N F U U d (/J O O O O O O uo,e du...��.G eror,u.as rep w CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF POLICE TRAINING ACADEMY Project Number #21086 a COIRIPOR 185,04 TURNER I RAMIREZ A R C H I T E C T S 3751 South Alameda St. Corpus Christi, Texas 78411 361.994.8900 TRA Project Number — 2020-15 00' . ' Documents [10/10/2022] Record Drawing Number: PBG — 876 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 00 0107 SEALS PAGE ARCHITECT: PHILIP RAMIREZ . 'eD A,� , TURNER,RAMIREZ,&ASSOCIATES Rp ... .. _ 3751 S.ALAMEDA ST. Cr CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78411 V 361.994.8900 (P 9 AN + F 361.994.8955 OF 10/10/2022 E philip@trarch.com STRUCTURAL: ` « . •..... MIGUEL CHANIN,P.E. . .«....«.«««««.....«.. "«/ CHANIN ENGINEERING L.L.C. «, EL C IN if 400 NOLANA AVE,SUITE H2 ««1«". «....«.`«...««,««««.w«« MCALLEN,TX 78504 931127 10/10/2022 V 956.687.9421 " ►0 � E miguel@chaninengineering.com MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL/PLUMBING: SEAN RODRIGUES P.E. aa°°aNRG ENGINEERING 5656 S STAPLES ST 360 - CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78411 ,EAN 14'x.. R10(3 �( maaaca111— aw maaa.na a .... maaoa 4 �r V 361.852.2727 E srod@nrgcc.com CIVIL: 1�tiA�'d111.11 .,«``°'�.ZE•OF. RHODES URBAN *11 URBAN ENGINEERING . • 2725 SWANTNER JERRY WECKERT • CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78404 -0% 96066 �0 %•�4/� V 361.854.3101 .,ENS . E ChipU@urbaneng.com Seals Page 000107-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 CIVIL: ERIC VILLARREAL P.E. iCP( 'OF„'rF'I�slll ARDURRA ENGINEERING 801 Navigation Blvd.,Suite 300 i*........................ Corpus Christi,Tx 78408 i ERIC VILLARREAL i ............................... i �r 103807 % V 361.883.1984 E evillarreal@ardurra.com Is��� �S%�IAL 4 11 10/10/2022 TECHNOLOGY: ALFONSO DELGADO �ptt0NS01Sy of **� � DATACOM DESIGN GROUP,LLC Bics/ 7551 CALLAGHAN RD.,STE 105 Uj AlfonsoM Delgado m SAN ANTONIO,TX 78229 1311SI 10 A 363780 E;MPISQ M 24 r}yZ * * , V 210.698.6455 E adelgado@datacomdesign.com 10/10/2022 LANDSCAPE: p ROBERT GIGNAC GIGNAC LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE 3833 S.STAPLES STE. N119 ROSERT 4 Ot AC CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78411 4.B V 361.853.0795 is E gignaclandscape@aol.com END OF SECTION 00 0107 Seals Page 000107-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11'. 1 1• 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS Division/ Title Section Division 00 Preface Documents 00 01 01 Cover Sheet 00 01 07 Seals Page 00 01 10 Table of Contents 00 01 15 List of Drawings Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 52 23 Agreement (Rev 12-2021) 00 72 00 General Conditions(Rev6-2021) 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions (Rev2-2020) Division 01 General Requirements 01 11 00 Summary of Work(Rev 10-2018) 01 23 10 Alternates and Allowances (Rev5-2020) 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment(Rev5-2020) 01 33 01 Submittal Register(Rev 10-2018) 01 35 00 Special Procedures(Rev 10-2018) 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls(Rev8-2019) 01 57 00 Temporary Controls(Rev8-2019) Part S Standard Specifications NOT USED Table of Contents 000110-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 1/2022 11'. 1 1• Division/ Title Section Part T Technical Specifications Division 01 General Requirements 014534 Windstorm Construction Requirements Division 02 Existing Conditions Not Used Division 03 Concrete 03 10 00 Concrete Forms and Accessories (Chanin) 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement(Chanin) 03 20 01 Concrete Reinforcement(Urban) 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete (Chanin) 03 30 02 Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete (Urban) 03 35 00 Concrete Finishing (Chanin) 03 35 43 Polished Concrete Finishing 03 39 00 Concrete Curing (Chanin) 03 60 00 Grout (Chanin) Division 04 Masonry 04 05 14 Masonry Mortar and Grout (Chanin) 04 20 00 Unit Masonry 04 20 16 Reinforced Unit Masonry Assemblies (Chanin) Division 05 Metals 05 12 00 Structural Steel (Chanin) 05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing (Chanin) 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 51 13 Metal Pan Stairs 05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings 05 73 13 Glazed Decorative Metal Railings Table of Contents 000110-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 1/2022 11'. 1 1• Division/ Title Section Division 06 Wood, Plastics, and Composites 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 41 16 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets 06 64 00 Plastic Paneling Division 07 Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 11 13 Bituminous Dampproofing 07 13 26 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing 07 19 17 Anti-Graffiti Coatings 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 2S 00 Gypsum Board Weather and Air Barrier Fluid—Applied 07 27 20 Fluid Applied Air Barrier 07 41 13.16 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels 07 42 13.13 Formed Metal Wall Panels 07 52 16 Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping 07 84 43 Joint Firestopping 07 91 00 Preformed Expansion Joints 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 07 92 19 Acoustical Joint Sealants Division 08 Openings 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 08 31 13 Access Doors and Frames 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 34 59 Vault Doors and Day Gates 08 41 13 Aluminum—Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing Table of Contents 000110-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 1/2022 11'. 1 1• Division/ Title Section Division 09 Finishes 09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 24 00 Cement Plastering (Stucco) 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling 09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories 09 65 19 Resilient Athletic Flooring 09 65 66 Resilient Tile Flooring 09 67 23 Epoxy Resinous Flooring 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting 09 69 00 Access Flooring 09 84 36.16 Sound-Absorbing Ceiling Wood-Fiber Units 09 91 13 Painting 09 96 00 High-Performance Coatings Division 10 Specialties 10 11 00 Visual Display Units 101416 Plaques 10 14 19 Dimensional Letter Signage 10 14 23.16 Room-Identification Panel Signage 10 21 13.19 Plastic Toilet Compartments 10 22 13 Wire Mesh Partitions 10 22 37 Vertically Retractable Acoustic Partitions 10 26 00 Wall and Door Protection 10 28 00 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 10 44 13 Fire Protection Cabinets 1044 16 Fire Extinguishers 1051 26 Plastic Lockers 1071 13 Exterior Sun Control Devices 10 73 10 Aluminum Protective Covers 1075 16 Ground-Set Flagpoles Table of Contents 000110-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 1/2022 11'. 1 1• Division/ Title Section Division 11 Equipment Not Used Division 12 Furnishing 12 21 13 Roller Window Shades 12 36 61.16 Solid Surfacing Countertops 12 48 13 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames Division 13 Specialty Construction Not Used Division 14 Conveying Equipment 14 24 00 Hydraulic Elevators Division 21 Fire Suppression 210201 Coordination Drawings (NRG) 21 13 00 Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems (NRG) Division 22 Plumbing 22 02 01 Coordination Drawings (NRG) 22 03 00 Commissioning of Plumbing Systems (NRG) 22 05 00 Basic Materials and Methods (NRG) 22 07 00 Inside Utility Trench Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction (NRG) 22 08 00 Outside Utility Trench excavation, Backfill, and Compaction (NRG) 22 14 00 Supports and Anchors (NRG) 22 19 00 System Identification and Pipe Marking (NRG) 22 26 00 Piping Insulation (NRG) 22 41 00 Plumbing Piping&Valves (NRG) 22 43 00 Plumbing Specialties (NRG) 22 44 00 Plumbing Fixtures (NRG) 22 45 00 Plumbing Equipment (NRG) Table of Contents 000110-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 1/2022 11'. 1 1• Division/ Title Section Division 23 Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning(HVAC) 23 02 01 Coordination Drawings (NRG) 23 03 00 Commissioning of HVAC Systems (NRG) 23 05 00 Basic Material and Methods (NRG) 23 05 10 Starting of Systems (NRG) 23 14 00 Supports and Anchors (NRG) 23 17 00 Motors and Motor Controllers (NRG) 23 1720 Variable Frequency Drives (NRG) 23 19 00 System Identification and Pipe Marking (NRG) 23 24 00 Sound and Vibration Control (NRG) 23 26 00 Piping Insulation (NRG) 23 28 00 Equipment Insulation (NRG) 23 29 00 Duct Insulation (NRG) 23 51 21 Expansion Compensation (NRG) 23 53 00 Refrigerant Piping(NRG) 23 55 10 Hydronic Piping Above Grade (NRG) 23 55 11 Hydronic Piping Below Grade (NRG) 23 55 15 Hydronic Specialties (NRG) 23 55 40 HVAC Pumps (NRG) 23 55 46 Chilled and Hot Water Treatment Systems (NRG) 23 58 54 DX Fan Coil Unit (NRG) 23 58 55 Applied Air Handling Unit (NRG) 23 58 57 Single Duct VAV Terminal Box (NRG) 23 58 58 Series Fan Powered Terminal Box(NRG) 23 67 10 Air Cooled Condensing Units (NRG) 23 68 31 Air Cooled Screw Chillers (NRG) 23 86 00 Power Ventilators (NRG) 23 88 10 Air Distribution Devices (NRG) 23 88 85 Air Filters (NRG) 23 89 00 Metal Ductwork(NRG) 23 91 00 Ductwork Accessories (NRG) 23 95 00 Building Automation System (NRG) 23 95 01 Sequence of Operations (NRG) Table of Contents 000110-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 1/2022 11'. 1 1• Division/ Title Section 23 99 00 Testing,Adjusting, & Balancing(NRG) Division 26 Electrical 26 01 00 Electrical General Provisions (NRG) 26 02 01 Coordination Drawings (NRG) 26 03 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems (NRG) 26 06 00 Grounding (NRG) 26 07 50 Electrical Identification (NRG) 26 12 30 Wire and Cable (NRG) 26 13 60 Raceways (NRG) 26 14 00 Wire Devices (NRG) 26 24 16 Panelboards (NRG) 26 32 00 Natural Gas Engine (NRG) 26 33 00 Automatic Transfer Switch (NRG) 26 41 19 Lighting Protection (NRG) 26 43 13 Surge Protection Devices (NRG) 26 44 10 Disconnect Switches (NRG) 26 44 61 Dry Type Distribution Transformers (NRG) 26 51 00 Luminaires (NRG) 26 74 00 Telephone/Data System (Rough-in) (NRG) 26 75 00 Cable Television System (Rough-in) (NRG) Division 27 Communications 27 00 00 Communications 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding(DataCom) 27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems (DataCom) 27 05 43 Underground Duct & Raceways (DataCom) 27 11 00 Communications Room Fittings (DataCom) 27 13 00 Backbone Cabling(DataCom) 27 15 00 Horizontal Cabling (DataCom) 27 41 13 Audio Visual Infrastructure (DataCom) Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security Table of Contents 000110-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 1/2022 11'. 1 1• Division/ Title Section 28 00 00 Electronic Security (DataCom) 28 10 00 Access Control (DataCom) 28 23 00 Video Surveillance (DataCom) 28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm System (NRG) Division 31 Earthwork 310513 Soils for Earthwork(Chanin) 31 10 00 Clearing, Grubbing and Stripping (Urban) 31 10 00 Site Clearing (Chanin) 31 20 00 Site Excavation and Fill (Urban) 31 22 13 Rough Grading (Chanin) 31 22 13 Site Grading (Urban) 312300 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities (Ardurra) 31 31 16 Termite Control (Chanin) 31 32 15 Lime Stabilized Subgrade (Urban) 31 63 16 Auger Cast Grout Piles (Chanin) Division 32 Exterior Improvements 32 11 33.13 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Urban) 32 1613.13 Concrete Curb, Gutter, and Valley Gutter(Urban) 32 16 23 Concrete Sidewalk& Concrete Driveways (Urban) 32 17 23 Pavement Markings (Urban) 32 23 18 Synthetic Running Track 32 31 13 Chain Link Fences and Gates 32 31 19 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates 32 84 23 Underground Sprinklers (Gignac) 32 90 01 Common Planting Requirements (Gignac) 32 91 13 Soil Preparation (Gignac) 32 92 23 Sodding (Gignac) 32 93 00 Plants (Gignac) Table of Contents 000110-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 1/2022 11'. 1 1• Division/ Title Section Division 33 Utilities 33 42 16.13 Installation of Reinforced Concrete Pipe (Urban) 33 11 00 Waterlines (Ardurra) 33 1113 PVC Pipe (Ardurra) 33 11 14 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings (Ardurra) 33 11 16 Waterline Riser Assemblies (Ardurra) 33 12 13 Water Service Lines (Ardurra) 33 12 16 Gate Valves for Waterlines (Ardurra) 33 12 16.11 Tapping Sleeves and Tapping Valves (Ardurra) 33 12 19 Fire Hydrants (Ardurra) 3331 13 Gravity Sanitary Sewers (Ardurra) 33 44 13.13 Catch Basins (Urban) Appendix All Testing Reports as Applicable 1 Police Training Academy(21086) - RETL Report#G121421 END OF SECTION 00 0110 Table of Contents 000110-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 1/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C � �• 00 01 15 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 1.1 LIST OF DRAWINGS A. Drawings: Drawings consist of the Contract Drawings and other drawings listed on the Table of Contents page of the separately bound drawing set titled 100% RE-BID Construction Design Submission, dated 10/10/2022, as modified by subsequent Addenda and Contract modifications. 00—FRONT END Sheet No. Sheet Name AO.0 COVER AO.0.1 DRAWINGS INDEX AO.1 TAS 2012 EXCERPTS AO.2 TAS 2012 EXCERPTS AO.4 SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS AO.5 WALL TYPES—METAL STUD NOTES AO.5A WALL TYPES—4" METAL STUDS AO.6 WALL TYPES—MASONRY AO.7 GENERAL NOTES A0.10 CODE INFORMATION AO.11 CODE PLAN AO.12 UL ASSEMBLIES 02—CIVIL Sheet No. Sheet Name C1 CIVIL GENERAL NOTES C2 CIVIL TYPICAL LEGEND SHEET C3 CIVIL UTILITY SITE PLAN C4 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI WATER DETAILS 1 OF 4 C5 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI WATER DETAILS 2 OF 4 C6 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI WATER DETAILS 3 OF 4 C7 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI WATER DETAILS 4 OF 4 C8 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI WASTEWATER DETAILS 1 OF 4 C9 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI WASTEWATER DETAILS 2 OF 4 C10 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI WASTEWATER DETAILS 3 OF 4 C11 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI WASTEWATER DETAILS 4 OF 4 02.1—CIVIL Sheet No. Sheet Name C1.0 EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DEMOLITION PLAN C2.0 GRADING PLAN C3.0 DIMENSION PLAN C4.0 GRADING AND STORM DETAILS List of Drawings 000115-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C � �• 03-LANDSCAPE Sheet No. Sheet Name L1.0 LANDSCAPE PLAN-BASE BID L2.0 LANDSCAPE PLAN-ALT.#1 L3.0 LANDSCAPE NOTES&SUMMARY L4.0 LANDSCAPE DETAILS L5.0 IRRIGATION PLAN-BASE BID L6.0 IRRIGATION PLAN-ALT.#1 L7.0 IRRIGATION NOTES&SUMMARY L8.0 IRRIGATION DETAILS 04-STRUCTURAL Sheet No. Sheet Name 51.0 GENERAL NOTES S1.1 GENERAL NOTES 51.2 GENERAL NOTES 51.3 EXCAVATION PLAN 51.4 COMPONENTS AND CLADDING/ROOF UPLIFT PLAN 51.5 ROOF PONDING PLAN 51.6 FIRST FLOOR LIVE LOAD PLAN 51.7 SECOND FLOOR LIVE LOAD PLAN S2.0 PILE LAYOUT PLAN-SEGMENT"A" 52.1 PILE LAYOUT PLAN-SEGMENT"B" 52.2 FOUNDATION PLAN-SEGMENT"A" 52.3 FOUNDATION PLAN-SEGMENT"B" 53.0 FIRST FLOOR WALL LAYOUT PLAN-SEGMENT"A" 53.1 FIRST FLOOR WALL LAYOUT PLAN-SEGMENT"B" 53.2 LOW ROOF FRAMING PLAN-SEGMENT"B" S3.3 SECOND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN-SEGMENT"B" 53.4 SECOND FLOOR WALL LAYOUT PLAN-SEGMENT"B" 54.0 HIGH ROOF FRAMING PLAN-AREA"B" 55.0 TYPICAL DETAILS 55.1 TYPICAL DETAILS 55.2 TYPICAL DETAILS 55.3 TYPICAL DETAILS S5.4 TYPICAL DETAILS S6.0 FOUNDATION DETAILS 56.1 FOUNDATION DETAILS 56.2 FOUNDATION DETAILS 56.3 FOUNDATION DETAILS 56.4 FOUNDATION DETAILS 56.5 FRAMING DETAILS S6.6 FRAMING DETAILS S6.7 FRAMING DETAILS 56.8 FRAMING DETAILS 56.9 FRAMING DETAILS 56.10 FRAMING DETAILS 56.11 FRAMING DETAILS List of Drawings 000115-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C � �• 05-ARCH ITECTU RAIL Sheet No. Sheet Name A1.1 OVERALL SITE PLAN A1.2 ENLARGED SITE PLAN A1.3 SITE DETAILS A1.5 ENLARGED PARKING/MECHANICAL YARD/DUMPSTER A2.1 COMPOSITE 1ST FLOOR PLAN A2.2 COMPOSITE 2"D FLOOR PLAN A2.3 1ST FLOOR PLAN-AREA A A2.4 1ST FLOOR PLAN-AREA B A2.5 2"D FLOOR PLAN-AREA B A3.1 ENLARGED RESTROOM, LOCKER&SHOWER PLANS A3.2 STAIR PLANS, DETAIL,SECTIONS&MEZZANINE PLAN A3.3 ENLARGED STAIR PLANS&DETAILS A3.4 ENLARGED ELEVATOR PLANS&SECTIONS A4.1 PLAN DETAILS A4.2 PLAN DETAILS A4.3 PLAN DETAILS A5.1 ROOF PLAN A5.2 SUB SHADE&ROOF HATCH DETAILS A5.3 ROOF DRAIN &SCUPPER DETAILS A6.1 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A6.2 BUILDING SECTIONS A6.3 BUILDING SECTIONS A7.1 WALL SECTIONS A7.2 WALL SECTIONS A7.3 WALL SECTIONS A7.4 WALL SECTIONS A7.5 WALL SECTIONS A7.6 WALL SECTIONS A7.7 WALL SECTIONS A7.8 WALL SECTIONS A7.9 ENLARGED WALL DETAILS A7.10 ENLARGED WALL DETAILS A8.1 DOOR SCHEDULE, DOOR& FRAME TYPES A8.2 CURTAINWALL ELEVATIONS A8.3 STOREFRONT ELEVATIONS A8.4 WINDOW DETAILS A8.5 WINDOW DETAILS A8.6 WINDOW DETAILS A8.7 WINDOW DETAILS A8.8 DOOR DETAILS A8.9 DOOR DETAILS A10.1 COMPOSITE 1ST FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A10.2 FIRST FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN-AREA A A10.3 FIRST FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN-AREA B A10.4 SECOND FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN-AREA B List of Drawings 000115-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C � �• 06-INTERIORS Sheet No. Sheet Name 12.0 COMPOSITE IST FLOOR FINISH PLAN 12.0-A COMPOSITE IST FLOOR FINISH PLAN (ALTERNATE) 12.1 COMPOSITE 2ND FLOOR FINISH PLAN 12.2 ENLARGED FLOOR FINISH PLAN (ALTERNATE) 12.3 ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE 12.4 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 12.5 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 12.6 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 12.7 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 12.8 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 12.9 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 12.10 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 12.11 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 12.12 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 12.13 MILLWORK DETAILS 12.14 MILLWORK DETAILS 12.15 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS 07-MECHANICAL Sheet No. Sheet Name M1.0 MECHANICAL SITE PLAN MIA MECHANICAL ZONING FLOOR PLAN M1.2 MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN BUILDING A M1.2A MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN BUILDING A-ALT M1.3 MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN BUILDING B 1ST FLOOR M1.4 MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN BUILDING B 2ND FLOOR M1.4A MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN BUILDING B 2ND FLOOR-ALT M1.5 MECHANICAL PIPING PLAN BUILDING A M1.6 MECHANICAL PIPING PLAN BUILDING B IST FLOOR M1.7 MECHANICAL PIPING PLAN BUILDING B 2ND FLOOR M2.1 MECHANICAL ROOF PLAN A M3.1 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES M3.2 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES M3.3 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES M3.4 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES M4.1 MECHANICAL DETAILS M4.2 MECHANICAL DETAILS M4.3 MECHANICAL DETAILS 08-ELECTRICAL Sheet No. Sheet Name E0.1 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E1.1 1ST FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN-AREA'A' E1.1-A 1ST FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN-AREA'A'-ALTERNATE BID List of Drawings 000115-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C � �• E1.2 1ST FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN-AREA'B' E1.3 2ND FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN E1.3-A 2ND FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN-AREA'B'-ALTERNATE BID E2.1 1ST FLOOR POWER PLAN-AREA'A' E2.2 1ST FLOOR POWER PLAN-AREA'B' E2.3 2ND FLOOR POWER PLAN E2.4 ROOF POWER PLANS E3.1 1ST FLOOR SPECIAL SYSTEM PLAN-AREA'A' E3.2 1ST FLOOR SPECIAL SYSTEM PLAN-AREA'B' E3.3 2ND FLOOR SPECIAL SYSTEM PLAN E4.1 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES E4.2 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES E4.3 ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE AND LOAD E5.1 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E5.2 ELECTRICAL DETAILS 09-PLUMBING Sheet No. Sheet Name P0.1 PLUMBING LEGENDS P1.0 PLUMBING SITE PLAN P1.1 PLUMBING 1ST FLOOR DWV PLAN-AREA'A' P1.2 PLUMBING 1ST FLOOR DWV PLAN-AREA'B' P1.3 PLUMBING 21T FLOOR DWV PLAN-AREA'B' P2.1 PLUMBING IST FLOOR WATER PLAN-AREA'A' P2.2 PLUMBING IST FLOOR WATER PLAN-AREA'B' P2.3 PLUMBING 2ST FLOOR WATER PLAN-AREA'B' P2.4 PLUMBING ROOF PLAN P3.1 PLUMBING SCHEDULES P3.2 PLUMBING SCHEDULES P4.1 PLUMBING DETAILS P4.2 PLUMBING DETAILS P5.1 PLUMBING DWV RISER DIAGRAM-AREA'A' P5.2 PLUMBING DWV RISER DIAGRAM-AREA'B' P5.3 PLUMBING WATER RISER DIAGRAM-AREA'A' P5.4 PLUMBING WATER RISER DIAGRAM-AREA'B' 10-SECURITY Sheet No. Sheet Name SCO.1 LEGEND AND NOTES-SECURITY SC1.1 SITE PLAN-SECURITY SC2.3 1ST FLOOR PLAN-AREA A-SECURITY SC2.4 1ST FLOOR PLAN-AREA B-SECURITY SC2.5 2ND FLOOR PLAN-AREA B-SECURITY SC3.1 DOOR ELEVATION DETAILS-SECURITY SC4.1 GENERAL DETAILS-SECURITY SC4.2 GENERAL DETAILS-SECURITY List of Drawings 000115-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C � �• 11—COMMUNICATIONS Sheet No. Sheet Name T0.1 LEGEND AND NOTES-COMMUNICATIONS T1.1 SITE PLAN—COMMUNICATIONS T2.1 COMPOSITE 1ST FLOOR PLAN -COMMUNICATIONS T2.2 COMPOSITE 2ND FLOOR PLAN-COMMUNICATIONS T2.3 1ST FLOOR PLAN—AREA A—COMMUNICATIONS T2.4 1ST FLOOR PLAN—AREA B—COMMUNICATIONS T2.5 2ND FLOOR PLAN—AREA B—COMMUNICATIONS T3.1 TELECOM ROOM DETAILS-COMMUNICATIONS T3.2 TELECOM ROOM DETAILS-COMMUNICATIONS T3.3 TELECOM ROOM DETAILS-COMMUNICATIONS T4.1 GENERAL DETAILS-COMMUNICATIONS 12—AUDIO VISUAL Sheet No. Sheet Name AVI0.1 LEGEND AND NOTES—AUDIOVISUAL INFRASTRUCTURE AVI2.3 1ST FLOOR PLAN—AREA A—AUDIOVISUAL INFRASTRUCTURE AVI2.4 1ST FLOOR PLAN—AREA B—AUDIOVISUAL INFRASTRUCTURE AVI2.5 2ND FLOOR PLAN—AREA B—AUDIOVISUAL INFRASTRUCTURE AVI3.3 1ST RCP—AREAA—AUDIOVISUAL INFRASTRUCTURE AVI3.4 1ST RCP—AREA B—AUDIOVISUAL INFRASTRUCTURE AVI3.5 2ND RCP—AREA B—AUDIOVISUAL INFRASTRUCTURE AVI4.1 GENERAL DETAILS—AUDIOVISUAL INFRASTRUCTURE END OF DOCUMENT 00 0115 List of Drawings 000115-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 G yCORPOPa��° 1852 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: Police Training Academy Proiect Number#21086 ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: Philip J. Ramirez 3751 South Alameda St. Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 philip@trarch.com 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Brett Van Hazel Assistant Director of Engineering 4917 Holly Rd. Bldg. 5, Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 brettvh@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within Four Hundred Ninety-Four (494) days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within Five Hundred Twenty-Four(524) days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. Agreement 005223-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 7/2020 11' C 1 �• B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. C. Milestones,and the dates for completion of each, are as defined in Section 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay(but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner$400.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner$400.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ Agreement 005223-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 7/2020 11' C 1 �• ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, retainage may be increased to a higher percentage rate, not to exceed ten percent, if progress on the Project is considered to be unsatisfactory. If retainage in excess of the amount described above is held prior to Substantial Completion,the Owner will place the additional amount in an interest bearing account. Interest will be paid in accordance with Paragraph 6.01. E. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. Agreement 005223-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 7/2020 11' C 1 �• ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Agreement 005223-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 7/2020 11' C 1 �• Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice,the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records, books, correspondence,instructions,drawings, receipts,vouchers, memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. b. N/A 2. Specifications,forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Solicitation documents and Contractor's response,which are incorporated by reference. 5. Addenda, which are incorporated by reference. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award, which is incorporated by reference. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement 005223-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 7/2020 11' C 1 1• ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Rebecca Huerta Michael Rodriguez City Secretary Chief of Staff AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL Assistant City Attorney ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR (Seal Below) By: Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President Vice President Chief Executive Officer, or Chief Financial Officer Address City State Zip Phone Fax EMail END OF SECTION Agreement 005223-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 7/2020 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents Page Article 1—Definitions and Terminology .....................................................................................................10 1.01 Defined Terms.............................................................................................................................10 1.02 Terminology................................................................................................................................15 Article2—Preliminary Matters...................................................................................................................16 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance.............................................................................16 2.02 Copies of Documents..................................................................................................................16 2.03 Project Management System......................................................................................................16 2.04 Before Starting Construction ......................................................................................................17 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives................................17 Article 3—Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse.................................................................17 3.01 Intent...........................................................................................................................................17 3.02 Reference Standards...................................................................................................................18 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies......................................................................................19 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents.................................................................................20 3.05 Reuse of Documents...................................................................................................................20 Article 4—Commencement and Progress of the Work..............................................................................20 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed.............................................................20 4.02 Starting the Work........................................................................................................................20 4.03 Progress Schedule.......................................................................................................................21 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress..................................................................................................21 Article 5—Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions...................................................................................................................................................22 5.01 Availability of Lands....................................................................................................................22 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas........................................................................................................22 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions............................................................................................23 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions...............................................................................24 5.05 Underground Facilities................................................................................................................25 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site .............................................................................26 Article 6—Bonds and Insurance .................................................................................................................28 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds..................................................................................28 General Conditions 007200-1 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 6.02 Licensed Sureties ........................................................................................................................29 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage....................................................................................29 6.04 General Insurance Provisions......................................................................................................29 6.05 Contractor's Insurance................................................................................................................30 6.06 Property Insurance......................................................................................................................33 6.07 Waiver of Rights..........................................................................................................................34 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project....................................................................................................34 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance..............................................................................................35 6.10 Certificate of Insurance...............................................................................................................35 6.11 Insurance Policies........................................................................................................................35 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage...............................................................................................35 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance ......................................................................................................35 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice .......................................................36 Article 7-Contractor's Responsibilities.....................................................................................................38 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence..............................................................................................38 7.02 Labor; Working Hours.................................................................................................................38 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ...........................................................................................39 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others....................................................................39 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties...........................................................................................................40 7.06 Permits........................................................................................................................................41 7.07 Taxes...........................................................................................................................................41 7.08 Laws and Regulations..................................................................................................................41 7.09 Safety and Protection .................................................................................................................42 7.10 Safety Representative.................................................................................................................43 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs..............................................................................................43 7.12 Emergencies................................................................................................................................43 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee .........................................................................43 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION......................................................................................................................44 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services................................................................................45 Article 8-Other Work at the Site...............................................................................................................46 8.01 Other Work.................................................................................................................................46 8.02 Coordination ...............................................................................................................................47 8.03 Legal Relationships......................................................................................................................47 General Conditions 007200-2 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 Article 9—Owner's and OPT's Responsibilities...........................................................................................48 9.01 Communications to Contractor ..................................................................................................48 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members......................................................................48 9.03 Furnish Data................................................................................................................................48 9.04 Pay When Due.............................................................................................................................48 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests...................................................................................48 9.06 Insurance.....................................................................................................................................48 9.07 Modifications..............................................................................................................................48 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals...............................................................................................48 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities .........................................................................................48 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition......................................................................49 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program................................................................................................49 Article 10—OAR's and Designer's Status During Construction ..................................................................49 10.01 Owner's Representative..........................................................................................................49 10.02 Visits to Site.............................................................................................................................49 10.03 Resident Project Representatives...........................................................................................49 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work........................................................................................................49 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments.........................................................................50 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work...................50 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities.....................................50 Article 11—Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work ....................................................50 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents.......................................................50 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work................................................................................51 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work........................................................................................51 11.04 Change of Contract Price ........................................................................................................52 11.05 Change of Contract Times.......................................................................................................52 11.06 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................52 11.07 Execution of Change Orders ...................................................................................................53 11.08 Notice to Surety......................................................................................................................54 Article 12—Change Management ..............................................................................................................54 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal................................................................................................54 12.02 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................54 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification...................................................................55 General Conditions 007200-3 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 12.04 Substitutions...........................................................................................................................55 Article13—Claims.......................................................................................................................................56 13.01 Claims......................................................................................................................................56 13.02 Claims Process.........................................................................................................................57 Article 14—Prevailing Wage Rate Requirements.......................................................................................58 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates.........................................................................................58 14.02 Records....................................................................................................................................58 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense.........................................................................................59 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates.............................................................................................................59 Article 15—Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work......................................................................59 15.01 Cost of the Work.....................................................................................................................59 15.02 Allowances..............................................................................................................................63 15.03 Unit Price Work.......................................................................................................................63 15.04 Contingencies..........................................................................................................................64 Article 16—Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work....................65 16.01 Access to Work........................................................................................................................65 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals............................................................................................65 16.03 Defective Work .......................................................................................................................65 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................66 16.05 Uncovering Work....................................................................................................................66 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work.....................................................................................................67 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work.......................................................................................67 Article 17—Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period ........................................67 17.01 Progress Payments..................................................................................................................67 17.02 Application for Payment.........................................................................................................69 17.03 Schedule of Values..................................................................................................................71 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value............................................................72 17.05 Basis for Payments..................................................................................................................73 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment.......................................................................73 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs ...........................................................................................................74 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment.........................................................74 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative...........................................................75 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title................................................................................................76 General Conditions 007200-4 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 17.11 Substantial Completion...........................................................................................................76 17.12 Partial Utilization.....................................................................................................................77 17.13 Final Inspection.......................................................................................................................77 17.14 Final Application for Payment.................................................................................................77 17.15 Final Payment..........................................................................................................................78 17.16 Waiver of Claims.....................................................................................................................78 17.17 Correction Period....................................................................................................................78 Article 18-Suspension of Work and Termination.....................................................................................79 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work.....................................................................................................79 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause............................................................................................79 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience................................................................................80 Article 19-Project Management...............................................................................................................81 19.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................81 19.02 Quality Assurance ...................................................................................................................81 19.03 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................81 19.04 Required Permits ....................................................................................................................81 19.05 Safety Requirements...............................................................................................................82 19.06 Access to the Site....................................................................................................................82 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site..........................................................................................................82 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities........................................................................83 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations..............................................................................83 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations........................................................................84 19.11 Field Measurements ...............................................................................................................84 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points.........................................................................................84 19.13 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................85 19.14 Cleaning During Construction.................................................................................................86 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access......................................................................86 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control..............................................................................................87 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires.......................................................................................................87 19.18 Blasting....................................................................................................................................87 19.19 Archeological Requirements...................................................................................................87 19.20 Endangered Species Resources...............................................................................................88 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies..........................................................................................88 General Conditions 007200-5 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 Article 20—Project Coordination................................................................................................................88 20.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................88 20.02 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................88 20.03 Communication During Project...............................................................................................89 20.04 Project Meetings.....................................................................................................................89 20.05 Requests for Information........................................................................................................91 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log..................................................................................................91 20.07 Notification By Contractor......................................................................................................92 20.08 Record Documents..................................................................................................................92 Article 21—Quality Management...............................................................................................................94 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities ..................................................................................................94 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT..................................................................................95 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports..................................................................................96 21.04 Documentation .......................................................................................................................96 21.05 Standards................................................................................................................................97 21.06 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................97 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects..............................................................................97 21.08 Test Reports............................................................................................................................97 21.09 Defective Work .......................................................................................................................98 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory........................................................................98 21.11 Quality Control Plan................................................................................................................98 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan ......................................................................100 Article 22—Final Resolution of Disputes..................................................................................................101 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations .....................................................................................................101 22.02 Mediation..............................................................................................................................101 Article 23—Minority/MBE/DBE Participation Policy................................................................................102 23.01 Policy.....................................................................................................................................102 23.02 Definitions.............................................................................................................................102 23.03 Goals......................................................................................................................................103 23.04 Compliance............................................................................................................................104 Article 24—Document Management........................................................................................................104 24.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................104 24.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................104 General Conditions 007200-6 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................104 24.04 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................105 24.05 Document Numbering ..........................................................................................................105 24.06 Document Requirements......................................................................................................106 Article25—Shop Drawings.......................................................................................................................107 25.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................107 25.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................107 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................107 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements ................................................................................................109 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................109 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................110 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures....................................................................................110 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures..........................................................................112 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products...............................................................................................113 25.10 Requests for Deviation..........................................................................................................113 25.11 Designer Responsibilities......................................................................................................114 25.12 Resubmission Requirements.................................................................................................116 Article26—Record Data...........................................................................................................................117 26.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................117 26.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................117 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................117 26.04 Record Data Requirements...................................................................................................118 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................118 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................119 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures.......................................................................................119 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities....................................................................................................120 Article 27—Construction Progress Schedule............................................................................................121 27.01 Requirements........................................................................................................................121 27.02 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................121 27.03 Schedule Requirements........................................................................................................121 27.04 Schedule Revisions................................................................................................................123 27.05 Float Time..............................................................................................................................123 Article 28—Video and Photographic documentation ..............................................................................124 General Conditions 007200-7 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 28.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................124 28.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................124 28.03 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................124 28.04 Photographs..........................................................................................................................125 28.05 Video Recording....................................................................................................................125 Article 29-Execution and Closeout.........................................................................................................125 29.01 Substantial Completion.........................................................................................................125 29.02 Final Inspections....................................................................................................................126 29.03 Reinspection Fees .................................................................................................................126 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal ............................................................................................127 29.05 Transfer of Utilities ...............................................................................................................127 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements.........................................................................127 Article30-Miscellaneous........................................................................................................................128 30.01 Computation of Times...........................................................................................................128 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records.......................................................................128 30.03 Independent Contractor.......................................................................................................129 30.04 Cumulative Remedies ...........................................................................................................129 30.05 Limitation of Damages..........................................................................................................129 30.06 No Waiver.............................................................................................................................129 30.07 Severability............................................................................................................................129 30.08 Survival of Obligations ..........................................................................................................129 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries .................................................................................................130 30.10 Assignment of Contract.........................................................................................................130 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity........................................................................................130 30.12 Controlling Law.....................................................................................................................130 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue...................................................................................130 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury...........................................................................................................130 30.15 Attorney Fees........................................................................................................................130 30.16 Compliance with Laws...........................................................................................................130 30.17 Enforcement..........................................................................................................................131 30.18 Subject to Appropriation.......................................................................................................131 30.19 Contract Sum.........................................................................................................................131 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy....................................................................131 General Conditions 007200-8 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 30.21 Notices. .................................................................................................................................131 General Conditions 007200-9 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Terms with initial capital letters, including the term's singular and plural forms, have the meanings indicated in this paragraph wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents. In addition to the terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents may include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda - Documents issued prior to the receipt of Bids which clarify or modify the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement - The document executed between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Alternative Dispute Resolution -The process by which a disputed Claim may be settled as an alternative to litigation, if Owner and Contractor cannot reach an agreement between themselves. 4. Application for Payment - The forms used by Contractor to request payments from Owner and the supporting documentation required by the Contract Documents. 5. Award Date—The date the City Council of the City of Corpus Christi (City)authorizes the City Manager or designee to execute the Contract on behalf of the City. 6. Bid —The documents submitted by a Bidder to establish the proposed Contract Price and Contract Times and provide other information and certifications as required by the Bidding Documents. 7. Bidding Documents — The solicitation documents, the proposed Contract Documents and Addenda. 8. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. 9. Bonds - Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Maintenance Bond, and other Surety instruments executed by Surety. When in singular form, refers to individual instrument. 10. Change Order-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract,which modifies the Work, Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract. 11. Change Proposal - A document submitted by Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents: a. Requesting an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times; b. Contesting an initial decision concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; c. Challenging a set-off against payment due; or d. Seeking a Modification with respect to the terms of the Contract. 12. City Engineer - The Corpus Christi City Engineer and/or designee as identified at the preconstruction conference or in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 007200-10 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 13. Claim - A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. A demand for money or services by an entity other than the Owner or Contractor is not a Claim. Claims must be initiated by written notice, signed and sworn to be an authorized corporate officer, verifying the truth and accuracy of the Claim. 14. Constituent of Concern - Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous wastes, and substances, products, wastes, or other materials that are or become listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to: a. The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. ("CERCLA"); b. The Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5101 et seq.; c. The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act,42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. ("RCRA"); d. The Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; e. The Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; f. The Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or g. Any other Laws or Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning hazardous,toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 15. Contract -The entire integrated set of documents concerning the Work and describing the relationship between the Owner and Contractor. 16. Contract Amendment-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and signed by Owner and Contractor which: a. Authorizes new phases of the Work and establishes the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work; or b. Modifies the terms and conditions of the Contract but does not make changes in the Work. 17. Contract Documents - Those items designated as Contract Documents in the Agreement. 18. Contract Price - The monetary amount stated in the Agreement and as adjusted by Modifications,and increases or decreases in unit price quantities, if any,that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 19. Contract Times-The number of days or the dates by which Contractor must: a. Achieve specified Milestones; b. Achieve Substantial Completion; and c. Complete the Work. 20. Contractor-The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. General Conditions 007200-11 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 21. Contractor's Team - Contractor and Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to perform part of the Work or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. 22. Cost of the Work -The sum of costs incurred for the proper performance of the Work as allowed by Article 15. 23. Defective - When applied to Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. Does not conform to the Contract Documents; b. Does not meet the requirements of applicable inspections, reference standards, tests, or approvals referred to in the Contract Documents; or c. Has been damaged or stolen prior to OAR's recommendation of final payment unless responsibility for the protection of the Work has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion 24. Designer - The individuals or entity named as Designer in the Agreement and the subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by Designer to provide design or other technical services to the Owner. Designer has responsibility for engineering or architectural design and technical issues related to the Contract Documents. Designers are Licensed Professional Engineers, Registered Architects or Registered Landscape Architects qualified to practice their profession in the State of Texas. 25. Drawings - The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work. Shop Drawings and other Contractor documents are not Drawings. 26. Effective Date of the Contract -The date indicated in the Agreement on which the City Manager or designee has signed the Contract. 27. Field Order-A document issued by OAR or Designer requiring changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 28. Hazardous Environmental Condition - The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site in quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed to Constituents of Concern. The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site necessary for the execution of the Work or to be incorporated in the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition provided these Constituents of Concern are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract. 29. Indemnified Costs-All costs, losses,damages,and legal or other dispute resolution costs resulting from claims or demands against Owner. These costs include fees for engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals. 30. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations-Applicable laws,statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances,codes,and orders of governmental bodies,agencies,authorities,and courts having jurisdiction over the Project. 31. Liens - Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract related funds, real property, or personal property. General Conditions 007200-12 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 32. Milestone-A principal event in the performance of the Work that Contractor is required by Contract to complete by a specified date or within a specified period of time. 33. Modification - Change made to the Contract Documents by one of the following methods: a. Contract Amendment; b. Change Order; c. Field Order; or d. Work Change Directive. 34. Notice of Award-The notice of Owner's intent to enter into a contract with the Selected Bidder. 35. Notice to Proceed - A notice to Contractor of the Contract Times and the date Work is to begin. 36. Owner-The City of Corpus Christi (City), a Texas home-rule municipal corporation and political subdivision organized under the laws of the State of Texas, acting by and through its duly authorized City Manager and designee, the City Engineer (the Director of Engineering Services), and the City's officers, employees, agents, or representatives, authorized to administer design and construction of the Project. 37. Owner's Authorized Representative or OAR -The individual or entity named as OAR in the Agreement and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide construction management services to the Owner. The OAR may be an employee of the Owner. 38. Owner's Project Team or OPT - The Owner, Owner's Authorized Representative, Resident Project Representative, Designer, and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide services to the Owner. 39. Partial Occupancy or Use - Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 40. Progress Schedule -A schedule prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor's plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. The Progress Schedule must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule. 41. Project - The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner under the Contract Documents. 42. Project Manual — That portion of the Contract Documents that may include the following: introductory information,solicitation requirements and responses, proposal, Contract forms and General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, Specification, Drawings, Project Safety Manual and Addenda. 43. Resident Project Representative or RPR-The authorized representative of OPT assigned to assist OAR at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative includes assistants and field staff of the OAR. General Conditions 007200-13 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 44. Samples - Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship representing some portion of the Work that are used to establish the standards for that portion of the Work. 45. Schedule of Documents-A schedule of required documents, prepared and maintained by Contractor. 46. Schedule of Values - A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for Contractor's Applications for Payment. 47. Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings, whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 48. Site - Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed. The Site includes rights-of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for use by the Contractor. 49. Specifications -The part of the Contract that describes the requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 50. Subcontractor-An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with other Subcontractors or Suppliers for the performance of a part of the Work. 51. Substantial Completion - The point where the Work or a specified part of the Work is sufficiently complete to be used for its intended purpose in accordance with the Contract Documents. 52. Supplementary Conditions -The part of the Contract that amends or supplements the General Conditions. 53. Supplier - A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with Subcontractors or other Suppliers to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work. 54. Technical Data-Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to either: a. Subsurface conditions at the Site; b. Physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; or C. Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. 55. Underground Facilities - All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, other similar facilities or appurtenances, and encasements containing these facilities which are used to convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 56. Unit Price Work-Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. General Conditions 007200-14 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 57. Work - The construction of the Project or its component parts as required by the Contract Documents. 58. Work Change Directive -A directive issued to Contractor on or after the Effective Date of the Contract ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. The Work Change Directive serves as a memorandum of understanding regarding the directive until a Change Order can be issued. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in this Paragraph 1.02 are not defined, but when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. It is understood that the cost for performing Work is included in the Contract Price and no additional compensation is to be paid by Owner unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Expressions including or similar to "at no additional cost to Owner," "at Contractor's expense,"or similar words mean that the Contractor is to perform or provide specified operation of Work without an increase in the Contract Price. C. The terms"day"or"calendar day' mean a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. The meaning and intent of certain terms or adjectives are described as follows: 1. The terms "as allowed," "as approved," "as ordered," "as directed," or similar terms in the Contract Documents indicate an exercise of professional judgment by the OPT. 2. Adjectives including or similar to "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or similar adjectives are used to describe a determination of OPT regarding the Work. 3. Any exercise of professional judgment by the OPT will be made solely to evaluate the Work for general compliance with the Contract Documents unless there is a specific statement in the Contract Documents indicating otherwise. 4. The use of these or similar terms or adjectives does not assign a duty or give OPT authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or assign a duty or give authority to the OPT to undertake responsibilities contrary to the provisions of Articles 9 or 10 or other provisions of the Contract Documents. E. The use of the words "furnish," "install," "perform," and "provide" have the following meanings when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment: 1. Furnish means to supply and deliver the specified services, materials, or equipment to the Site or other specified location ready for use or installation. 2. Install means to complete construction or assembly of the specified services, materials, or equipment so they are ready for their intended use. 3. Perform or provide means to furnish and install specified services, materials, or equipment, complete and ready for their intended use. 4. Perform or provide the specified services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use if the Contract Documents require specific services, materials, or General Conditions 007200-15 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 equipment, but do not expressly use the words "furnish," "install," "perform," or "provide." F. Contract Documents are written in modified brief style: 1. Requirements apply to all Work of the same kind, class, and type even though the word "all" is not stated. 2. Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in the sentence. It is understood that the words "furnish," "install," "perform," "provide," or similar words include the meaning of the phrase "The Contractor shall..." before these words. 3. Unless specifically stated that action is to be taken by the OPT or others, it is understood that the action described is a requirement of the Contractor. G. Words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with this recognized meaning unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. H. Written documents are required where reference is made to notices, reports, approvals, consents, documents, statements, instructions, opinions or other types of communications required by the Contract Documents. Approval and consent documents must be received by Contractor prior to the action or decision for which approval or consent is given. These may be made in printed or electronic format through the OPT's project management information system or other electronic media as required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. I. Giving notice as required by the Contract Documents may be by printed or electronic media using a method that requires acknowledgment of the receipt of that notice. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. Provide required Bonds with the executed Agreement. B. Provide evidence of insurance required by the Contract Documents with the executed Agreement. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. OPT is to furnish one fully executed Agreement (either electronic or printed) and one copy of the executed Contract Documents in electronic portable document format (PDF). This document is the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents. 2.03 Project Management System A. Owner shall administer its design and construction management through an internet-based project management system known as e-Builder. B. Contractor shall conduct all communication through and perform all project-related functions utilizing this project management system. This includes all correspondence, General Conditions 007200-16 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 submittals, requests for information, payment requests and processing, contract amendments, change orders, delivery orders and other administrative activities. C. Owner shall administer the software and provide training to Contractor's Team. 2.04 Before Starting Construction A. Provide the following preliminary documents in accordance with the Contract Documents within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract: 1. Progress Schedule, which must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule; 2. Schedule of Documents; and 3. Schedule of Values and projected cash flow information. 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Attend the preconstruction conference as required by the Contract Documents. B. Designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Contractor. These individuals must have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of the Contractor. C. Owner is to designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Owner and the limits of their authority with regard to acting on behalf of the Owner. ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. Requirements of components of the Contract Documents are as binding as if required by all Contract Documents. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OPT. 1. The Contract requirements described in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to Work regardless of where it is described in the Contract Documents, unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. In offering a Bid for this Project and in entering into this Contract,Contractor represents: a. Contractor has studied the Contract Documents, the Work, the Site, local conditions, Laws and Regulations, and other conditions that may affect the Work; b. Contractor has studied the Technical Data and other information referred to in the Contract Documents and has or will make additional surveys and investigations as deemed necessary for the performance of the Work; c. Contractor has correlated these studies and observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents; and d. Contractor has taken all of this information into consideration in developing the Contract Price offered and that the Contract Price offered provides full compensation for providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200-17 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 3. Organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control or lessen the responsibility of the Contractor when dividing Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or to establish the extent of Work to be performed by trades, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. Specifications or details do not need to be indicated or specified in each Specification or Drawing. Items shown in the Contract Documents are applicable regardless of their location in the Contract Documents. 4. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the Specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of the Specifications. Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict Specification text. 5. Provide the labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result, whether specifically called for in the Contract Documents or not. Include these related costs in the offered Contract Price. B. Provide equipment that is functionally complete as described in the Contract Documents. The Drawings and Specifications do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the installation of products purchased by the Owner or Contractor. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Designer through the OAR. C. Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two or more standards is specified and they establish different or conflicting requirements for the Work, unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise. D. Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and equipment incorporated in the Project or as required to meet the minimum requirements of the application if the materials and equipment are shown in the Drawings but are not included in the Specifications. E. The Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents governs if there is a discrepancy between the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents and subsequent electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents, including printed copies derived from these electronic or digital versions. F. The Contract supersedes all prior written or oral negotiations, representations, and agreements. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The Contract Documents may be modified only by a Modification. G. Request clarification from OAR for a decision before proceeding if Contractor is not clear on the meaning of the Contract Documents. OAR is to issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standard Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations: 1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of technical societies, organizations, or associations, or to Laws or Regulations,whether specific or implied, are those in effect at the time Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200-18 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 2. No provision of referenced standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier changes the duties or responsibilities of OPT or Contractor from those described in the Contract Documents or assigns a duty to or gives authority to the OPT to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or undertake responsibilities inconsistent with the Contract Documents. 3. The provisions of the Contract Documents take precedence over standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. B. Comply with applicable construction industry standards, whether referenced or not. 1. Standards referenced in the Contract Documents govern over standards not referenced but recognized as applicable in the construction industry. 2. Comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents if they produce a higher quality of Work than the applicable construction industry standards. 3. Designer determines whether a code or standard is applicable, which of several are applicable, or if the Contract Documents produce a higher quality of Work. C. Make copies of reference standards available if requested by OAR. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies: 1. Carefully study the Drawings and verify pertinent figures and dimensions with respect to actual field measurements before undertaking the Work. Immediately report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor discovers or has actual knowledge of to the OAR. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2. The exactness of existing grades, elevations, dimensions or locations given on any Drawings issued by Designer, or the work installed by other contractors, is not guaranteed by Owner. Contractor shall,therefore, satisfy itself as to the accuracy of all grades, elevations, dimensions and locations. Any errors due to Contractor's failure to verify at the site all such grades, elevations, dimensions or locations relating to such existing or other work shall be rectified by Contractor without any additional cost to Owner. 3. Immediately notify the OAR of conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents or discrepancies between the Contract Documents and: a. Applicable Laws or Regulations; b. Actual field conditions; c. Standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes; or d. Instructions of Suppliers. 4. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the General Conditions 007200-19 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. 5. Contractor is liable to the OPT for failure to report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor has actual knowledge. 6. Contractor is deemed to have included the most expensive item, system, procedure, etc. in the Contract Price if a conflict, error,ambiguity, or discrepancy in components of the Contract Documents was known, but not reported prior to submitting the Bid or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents A. Submit questions concerning the non-technical or contractual/administrative requirements of the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to provide an interpretation of the Contract Documents regarding these questions and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Submit questions regarding the design of the Project described in the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to request an interpretation of the Contract Documents from the Designer. Designer is to respond to these questions by providing an interpretation of the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. OPT may initiate a Modification to the Contract Documents through the OAR if a response to the question indicates that a change in the Contract Documents is required. Contractor may appeal Designer's or OAR's interpretation by submitting a Change Proposal. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor's Team has no rights to the Contract Documents and may not use the Contract Documents, or copies or electronic media editions of the Contract Documents, other than for the construction of this Project. This provision survives final payment or termination of the Contract. B. Contractor is allowed to retain a copy of the Contract Documents for record purposes, unless specifically prohibited by the Owner for security reasons. Surrender paper and digital copies of the Contract Documents and other related documents and remove these documents from computer equipment or storage devices as a condition of final payment if the Owner so directs. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times commence to run on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. 4.02 Starting the Work A. Begin performing the Work on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Do not begin Work prior to having the insurance required in Article 6 in force or before the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 007200-20 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 4.03 Progress Schedule A. Construct the Work in accordance with the Progress Schedule established in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Adjust the Progress Schedule as required to accurately reflect actual progress on the Work. 2. Submit proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that change the Contract Times in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B. Continue performing Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during disputes or disagreements with Owner. Do not delay or postpone Work pending resolution of disputes or disagreements, or during an appeal process. 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress A. No Damages for Delay: Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the Work,except in the case of direct interference with means and methods by the Owner. In no event shall the Contractor be entitled to any compensation or recovery of any special damages in connection with any delays, including without limitation: consequential damages, lost opportunity costs, impact damages, or other similar damages. Owner's exercise of any of its rights or remedies under the Contract Documents (including without limitation ordering changes in the Work, or directing suspension, rescheduling, or correction of the Work), regardless of the extent or frequency of Owner's exercise of such rights or remedies, shall not be construed as active interference in the Contractor's performance of the Work. An extension of Contract Time, to the extent permitted, shall be the sole remedy of the Contractor for any acknowledged delays.Contractor agrees that the extension of time provides an equitable adjustment. B. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays, disruptions, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor's Team. C. No time extensions are allowed for weather conditions, other than those listed in Paragraph 4.04.D, for Projects using calendar days or a fixed date to establish the Contract Time. Contractor is to include the cost associated with weather related delays in the Contract Price and assumes the risks associated with delays related to weather conditions. D. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times if Contractor's performance or progress is delayed,disrupted or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of OPT or Contractor. These adjustments in Contract Times are the Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. These unanticipated causes may include: 1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes e.g. fires, floods, hurricanes, epidemics, and earthquakes; 2. Acts or failures to act of utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site; 3. Acts of war or terrorism; and 4. Rain days in excess of the number specified in a calendar year. General Conditions 007200-21 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 E. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the following are governed by Article 5: 1. The existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition; 2. An Underground Facility not shown or not indicated with reasonable accuracy by the Contract Documents; and 3. Hazardous Environmental Conditions. F. Article 8 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. G. Notify the OAR immediately of a potential delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Claims for adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Times that do not comply with Article 13 are waived. H. Contractor is only entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Times for specific delays, disruptions, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work that can be demonstrated to directly impact the ability of the Contractor to complete the Work within the Contract Times. No adjustments in Contract Times are allowed for delays on components of the Work which were or could have been completed without impacting the Contract Times. I. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of the Owner if this delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference attributable to or within the control of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 5—AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner is to furnish the Site and inform the Contractor of encumbrances or restrictions known to Owner related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. B. Provide for additional lands and access Contractor requires for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment, other than those identified in the Contract Documents. Provide documentation of authority to use these additional lands to OAR before using them. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1. Confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment,and the operations of workers to the Site,adjacent areas that Owner or Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or agreements, and other adjacent areas as permitted by Laws and Regulations. Assume General Conditions 007200-22 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 full responsibility for damage or injuries which result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team, including: a. Damage to the Site; b. Damage to adjacent areas used for Contractor's Team's operations; C. Damage to other adjacent land or areas; and d. Injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of these lands or areas. 2. Take the following action if a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of adjacent land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team: a. Take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.09; and b. Attempt to settle the claim through negotiations with the owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by mediation or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports known to OPT of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Those drawings known to OPT of physical conditions related to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; and 3. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, and the results of tests performed on materials described in geotechnical data reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data, unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for this reliance on Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner with respect to: 1. The completeness of reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, or Contractor's safety precautions and programs; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Contractor's interpretation of or conclusions drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. General Conditions 007200-23 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notify OAR immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, after becoming aware of a subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site,and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any related Work that: 1. Establishes that the Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; 2. Requires a change in the Drawings or Specifications; 3. Differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. Is of an unusual nature and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb or perform Work related to this subsurface or physical condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12, until permission to do so is issued by OAR. B. OAR is to notify the OPT after receiving notice of a differing subsurface or physical condition from the Contractor. Designer is to: 1. Promptly review the subsurface or physical condition; 2. Determine the necessity of OPT's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the subsurface or physical condition; 3. Determine if the subsurface or physical condition falls within one or more of the differing Site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; 4. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question; 5. Determine the need for changes in the Drawings or Specifications; and 6. Advise OPT of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. C. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. D. Possible Contract Price and Contract Times Adjustments: 1. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times to the extent that a differing subsurface or physical condition causes a change in Contractor's cost or time to perform the Work provided the condition falls within one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. General Conditions 007200-24 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 2. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of the subsurface or physical condition at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; b. The existence of the subsurface or physical condition could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or c. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of the OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. 4. A Change Order is to be issued by the OAR if Owner and Contractor agree that Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times and agree to the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times. 5.05 Underground Facilities A. The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to OPT by the owners of these Underground Facilities or by others. OPT is not responsible for the accuracy or completeness of information or data provided by others that OPT makes available to Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for: 1. Investigating and field-verifying the location of underground facilities before beginning Work; 2. Reviewing and checking available information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; 3. Complying with Laws and Regulations related to locating Underground Facilities before beginning Work; 4. Locating Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; 5. Coordinating the Work with the owners, including Owner, of Underground Facilities during construction; and 6. The safety and protection of existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site and repairing damage resulting from the Work. B. Notify the OAR and the owner of the Underground Facility immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, if an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at the Site that was not shown in the Contract Documents or was not shown with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb conditions or perform Work affected by this discovery, except in the event of an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. General Conditions 007200-25 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 C. The Designer is to take the following action after receiving notice from the OAR: 1. Promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether the Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; 2. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with this Underground Facility; 3. Determine the extent to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and 4. Advise OAR of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations and provide revised Drawings and Specifications if required. D. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. E. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times as provided in Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 to the extent that the existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. F. Contractor is not entitled an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to an existing Underground Facility at the Site if: 1. Contractor knew of the existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; 2. The existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or 3. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.05.B. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports and drawings known to OPT relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and 2. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions identified in the Supplementary General Conditions 007200-26 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 Conditions, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for the reliance on expressly identified Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner's Indemnitees with respect to: 1. The completeness of these reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor or Contractor's safety precautions and programs related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. The results of tests performed on materials described in environmental reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Contractor is not responsible for removing or remediating Hazardous Environmental Conditions encountered, uncovered or revealed at the Site unless this removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. E. Contractor is responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing and remediating Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team and paying associated costs. 1. Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition and impose a set-off against payments to Contractor for associated costs if Contractor's Team creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition,and Contractor does not take acceptable action to remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition. 2. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. F. Immediately notify the OAR and take the following action if Contractor uncovers or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site or adjacent areas used by the Contractor's Team that was not created by the Contractor's Team: 1. Secure or otherwise isolate this condition; 2. Stop Work in affected areas or connected with the condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12; and 3. Do not resume Work in connection with the Hazardous Environmental Condition or in affected areas until after OPT has obtained required permits and OAR sends notice to the Contractor: a. Specifying that this condition and affected areas are or have been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or b. Specifying special conditions under which Work may be resumed safely. General Conditions 007200-27 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 4. Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by the Hazardous Environmental Condition to be deleted from the Work following the procedures in Article 11 if Contractor does not agree to: a. Resume the Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe; or b. Resume the Work under the special conditions provided by the OAR. 5. Owner may have this deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may impose a set-off if an agreement is not reached within 10 days of OAR's notice regarding the resumption of Work as to whether Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or on the amount or extent of adjustments resulting from this Work stoppage or special conditions under which Contractor agrees to resume Work. H. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds are to remain in effect until 1 year after the date of final payment. Furnish other Bonds as required by the Contract Documents. B. Bonds furnished by the Contractor must meet the requirements of Texas Insurance Code Chapter 3503, Texas Government Code Chapter 2253, and all other applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Notify OAR immediately if the surety on Bonds furnished by Contractor: 1. Is declared bankrupt, or becomes insolvent; 2. Has its right to do business in Texas terminated; or 3. Ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 6.02. Provide a Bond and surety which comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.02 within 20 days after the event giving rise to this notification. D. Contractor is to use amounts paid by Owner to Contractor under the Contract for the performance of the Contract and to satisfy claims against the Payment Bond. E. Notify the OAR of claims filed against the Payment Bond. Notify the claimant and OAR of undisputed amounts and the basis for challenging disputed amounts when a claimant has satisfied the conditions prescribed by Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. Promptly pay undisputed amount. F. Owner is not liable for payment of costs or expenses of claimants under the Payment Bond. Owner has no obligations to pay, give notice or take other action to claimants under the Payment Bond. General Conditions 007200-28 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 G. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain required Bonds. H. OPT will provide a copy of the Payment Bond to Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons or entities claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work that request this information in accordance with Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. 6.02 Licensed Sureties A. Provide Bonds in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents from sureties named in the list of"Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. B. Provide Bonds required by the Contract Documents from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized to provide bonds in the State of Texas. 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage A. Obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions. B. Deliver evidence of insurance in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions to the Owner to demonstrate that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Provide copies of these certificates to each named insured and additional insured as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise. 6.04 General Insurance Provisions A. Provide insurance coverages and limits meeting the requirements for insurance in accordance with this Article 6 and the Supplementary Conditions. B. Provide endorsements to the policies as outlined in this Article. C. Obtain insurance from companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the State of Texas to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Provide insurance from companies that have an A.M. Best rating of A-VIII or better. D. Furnish copies of endorsements and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles upon request by OPT or any named insured or additional insured. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any endorsement furnished under this Contract. E. The name and number of the Project must be referenced on the certificate of insurance. F. OPT's failure to demand such certificates or other evidence of the Contractor's full compliance with the insurance requirements or failure to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided is not a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to obtain and maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. G. Notify the Owner if the Contractor fails to purchase or maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not be allowed to perform any Work on the General Conditions 007200-29 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 Project until the required insurance policies are in effect. A Certificate of Liability Insurance shall be submitted to the OPT. H. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain the required insurance. I. Owner does not represent that the insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract are adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor's interests. J. The required insurance and insurance limits do not limit the Contractor's liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents. K. Provide for an endorsement that the "other insurance" clause shall not apply to the OPT where the OPT is an additional insured shown on the policy. Contractor's insurance is primary and non-contributory with respect to any insurance or self-insurance carried by the OPT for liability arising out of operations under this Contract. L. Include the Owner and list the other members of the OPT and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on all policies with the exception of the workers' compensation policy and Contractor's professional liability policy. 6.05 Contractor's Insurance A. Purchase and maintain workers' compensation and employer's liability insurance for: 1. Claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts. Obtain workers' compensation coverage through a licensed insurance company in accordance with Texas law and written on a policy and endorsements approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. Provide insurance in amounts to meet all workers' compensation obligations. Provide an "All Other States" endorsement if Contractor is not domiciled in Texas and policy is not written in accordance with Texas Department of Insurance rules. 2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees. 3. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable). 4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable). B. Purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor. The expected coverage is that which would be included in a commercially available ISO Commercial General Liability policy and should provide coverage on an occurrence basis, against: 1. Claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; 2. Claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained; 3. By any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor; and General Conditions 007200-30 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 4. Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including any resulting loss of use. C. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability policy that is written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1. Products and completed operations coverage as required in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. Insurance is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. Furnish evidence of the continuation of this insurance at final payment and again each year for 3 years after final payment to Owner and each named insured or additional insured. a. If required by the Supplementary Conditions, provide and maintain Installation Floater insurance for property under the care, custody, or control of Contractor. Provide Installation Floater insurance that is a broad form or "All Peril" policy providing coverage for all materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work. 1) Provide coverage under the Contractor's Installation Floater that includes: a) Faulty or Defective workmanship, materials, maintenance, or construction; b) Cost to remove Defective or damaged Work from the Site or to protect it from loss or damage; c) Cost to cleanup and remove pollutants; d) Coverage for testing and startup; e) Any loss to property while in transit; f) Any loss at the Site; g) Any loss while in storage, both on and off the Site; and h) Any loss to temporary Project Works if their value is included in the Contract Price. 2) Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. Provide limits of insurance adequate to cover the value of the installation. Pay any deductible carried under this coverage and assume responsibility for claims on materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in storage. 2. Blanket contractual liability coverage for Contractor's contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.14, and all other contractual indemnity obligations of Contractor in the Contract Documents. Industry standard ISO Contractual Liability coverage will meet this obligation. 3. Broad form property damage coverage. 4. Severability of interest. 5. Underground explosion and collapse coverage. General Conditions 007200-31 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 6. Personal injury coverage. 7. Endorsement CG 2032, "Additional Insured - Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured" or its equivalent. D. Purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. E. For Projects with a Contract Value that exceeds$5,000,000, purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer's liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Provide coverage that is at least as broad as all underlying policies. Provide a policy that provides first-dollar liability coverage as needed. F. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability and automobile liability policies that: 1. Are written on an occurrence basis; 2. Include the individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds; 3. Include coverage for Owner as defined in Article 1; and 4. Provide primary coverage for all claims covered by the policies, including those arising from both ongoing and completed operations. G. Purchase and maintain insurance coverage for third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs that result from Hazardous Environmental Conditions which result from Contractor's operations and completed operations. Provide Contractor's pollution liability insurance that includes long-term environmental impacts for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants and is not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. The completed operations coverage is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. The policy must name OPT and any other individuals and entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds. H. Purchase and maintain applicable professional liability insurance, or have Subcontractors and Suppliers do so, if Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract. I. The policies of insurance required by this Article must: 1. Include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article or the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations,whichever is greater. 2. Contain a provision that coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor, Owner, and all named insureds and additional insureds. 3. Remain in effect at all times when Contractor is performing Work or is at the Site to conduct tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 4. Be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims resulting from the Contractor's performance of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether performed by Contractor, General Conditions 007200-32 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 Subcontractor, Supplier, anyone directly or indirectly employed or retained by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable. J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met directly by those policies and may not rely on excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies to meet the coverage requirement. 6.06 Property Insurance A. Purchase and maintain builder's risk insurance in the amount of the full replacement cost of the Project. This policy is subject to the deductible amounts requirements in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions or those required by Laws and Regulations and must comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.09. This insurance shall: 1. Include the OPT,Contractor,and all Subcontractors,and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, as named insureds. 2. Be written on a builder's risk "all risk" policy form that includes insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and insures against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by this Section. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder's risk, by endorsement or otherwise, this insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property. 4. Cover materials and equipment in transit or stored prior to being incorporated in the Work. 5. Cover Owner-furnished or assigned property. 6. Allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner. 7. Allow for the waiver of the insurer's subrogation rights as set forth below. 8. Provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered. 9. Not include a co-insurance clause. 10. Include a broad exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any Defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions. 11. Include testing and startup. 12. Be maintained in effect until the Work as a whole is complete, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner and Contractor. General Conditions 007200-33 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 B. Evidence of insurance provided must contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each named insured. C. Pay for costs not covered by the policy deductible. D. Notify builder's risk insurance provider if Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. Maintain the builder's risk insurance in effect during this Partial Occupancy or Use. E. Contractor may purchase other special insurance to be included in or to supplement the builder's risk or property insurance policies provided under this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. F. Contractor, Subcontractors, or employees of the Contractor or a Subcontractor owning property items, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property not expressly covered in the insurance required by the Contract Documents are responsible for providing their own insurance. 6.07 Waiver of Rights A. Insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the additional insureds identified in the Supplementary Conditions. B. All policies purchased in accordance with this Article are to contain provisions to the effect that the insurers have no rights of recovery against OPT, named insureds or additional insureds in the event of a payment for loss or damage. Contractor and insurers waive all rights against the Owner's Indemnities for losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by these policies and any other applicable property insurance. None of these waivers extend to the rights Contractor has to the proceeds of insurance as trustee. C. Contractor is responsible for assuring that agreements with Subcontractors contain provisions that the Subcontractor waive all rights against Owner,Contractor, named insureds and additional insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them,for all losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder's risk insurance and other property insurance. 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project A. Owner is not responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the interest of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance required are minimum only. Determine the limits that are adequate. These limits may be basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, Contractor is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from, or connected with operations under this Contract whether or not these losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of evidence of insurance bythe OPT, named insureds,or additional insureds does not release the Contractor from compliance with the insurance requirements of the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200-34 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance A. Provide evidence of insurance acceptable to the Owner with the executed Contract Documents. Provide the following as evidence of insurance: 1. Certificates of Insurance on an acceptable form; 2. Riders or endorsements to policies; and 3. Policy limits and deductibles. B. Provide a list of"Additional Insureds" for each policy. C. Provide evidence that waivers of subrogation are provided on all applicable policies. D. Provide evidence of requirements for 30 days' notice before cancellation or any material change in the policy's terms and conditions, limits of coverage, or change in deductible amount. 6.10 Certificate of Insurance A. Submit Certificates of Insurance meeting the following requirements: 1. Form has been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101; or 2. Form is a standard form deemed approved by the Department under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101. 3. No requirements of this Contract may be interpreted as requiring the issuance of a certificate of insurance on a certificate of insurance form that has not first been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. B. Include the name of the Project in the description of operations box on the certificate of insurance. 6.11 Insurance Policies A. If requested by the Owner, make available for viewing a copy of insurance policies, declaration pages and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. B. Contractor may block out (redact) any proprietary information or confidential premium pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this Contract. 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage A. Provide updated, revised, or new evidence of insurance in accordance this Article and the Supplementary Conditions prior to the expiration of existing policies. B. Provide evidence of continuation of insurance coverage at final payment and for the following 3 years. 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance A. Notices regarding insurance are to be sent to the Owner at the following address: General Conditions 007200-35 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 City of Corpus Christi— Engineering Attn: Construction Contract Admin. P.O. Box 9277 Corpus Christi,TX 78469-9277 B. Submit questions regarding insurance requirements to the Construction Contract Administrator by calling 361-826-3530. 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice A. Definitions: 1. Certificate of coverage ("certificate") -A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC- 81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the Project. 2. Duration of the Project-includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the Contractor's/person's Work on the Project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. 3. Persons providing services on the Project ("Subcontractor" in §406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the Project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the Project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the Project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project. C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project,the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period,file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: 1. A certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and General Conditions 007200-36 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 2. No later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known,of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The Contractor shall post on each Project Site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. I. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,to: 1. Provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements,which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 2. Provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 3. Provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 4. Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a. A certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning Work on the Project; and b. A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 5. Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; 6. Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and 7. Contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by this section, with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of General Conditions 007200-37 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the Contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Supervise, inspect, and direct the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor is solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. Provide a competent resident superintendent acceptable to the OPT. The resident superintendent or acceptable qualified assistant is to be present at all times when Work is being done. Do not replace this resident superintendent except under extraordinary circumstances. Provide a replacement resident superintendent equally competent to the previous resident superintendent if replacement is required. Notify the Owner prior to replacing the resident superintendent and obtain Owner's consent to the change in superintendent. 7.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Provide competent,suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform Work to complete the Project. Maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between sunrise and sundown Monday through Saturday unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. C. Do not perform Work on a Sunday or legal holiday without OAR's consent. The following legal holidays are observed by the Owner: Holiday Date Observed New Year's Day January 1 Martin Luther King Jr Day Third Monday in January Memorial Day Last Monday in May Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November General Conditions 007200-38 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 Holiday Date Observed Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Day December 25 D. If a legal holiday falls on a Saturday, it will be observed the preceding Friday. If a legal holiday falls on a Sunday, it will be observed the following Monday. E. Pay additional cost incurred by Owner for services of the OAR or RPR to observe Work constructed outside of regular working hours. OAR will issue a Set-off in the Application for Payment for this cost per Paragraph 17.01.13 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Provide services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work, whether or not these items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. Provide new materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Provide special warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents. Provide satisfactory evidence, including reports of required tests, as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment as required by the Contract Documents or as requested by the OAR. C. Store, apply, install, connect, erect, protect, use, clean, and condition materials and equipment in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. All Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. B. Contractor must retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required to do so by the Contract Documents. C. Submit a list of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers to OAR prior to entering into binding subcontracts or purchase orders. These proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers are deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 30 days after receiving this list. Under no circumstances shall any Subcontractor debarred under Chapter 41 of The Code of Ordinances, City of Corpus Christi, be deemed acceptable to Owner. D. Contractor is not required to retain Subcontractors,Suppliers,or other individuals or entities to furnish or perform part of the Work after the Effective Date of the Contract if Contractor has reasonable objection. E. Owner may require the replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities retained by the Contractor. Provide an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements, subject to Contractor's reasonable objections. General Conditions 007200-39 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 F. Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entities required by Owner. The Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time with respect to replacement of any individual deemed unsuitable by the OPT. Notify OAR immediately if a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entity increases the Contract Price or Contract Times. Initiate a Change Proposal for the adjustment within 10 days of Owner's notice to replace a Subcontractor,Supplier,or other entity retained by Contractor to perform part of the Work. Do not make the replacement until the change in Contract Price or Contract Times has been accepted by the Owner if Change Proposal is to be submitted. G. Owner's initial acceptance of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities, or their replacements, does not constitute a waiver of the obligation of the Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. H. Maintain a current and complete list of Subcontractors and Suppliers that are to perform or furnish part of the Work. I. Contractor is fully responsible for the acts and omissions of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. J. Contractor is solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. K. Require Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work to communicate with OPT through Contractor. L. Contracts between the Contractor and their Subcontractors or Suppliers may specifically bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents if they choose to not bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to applicable terms or conditions of the Contract Documents. 1. All Subcontractors employed on this Project must be required to obtain Workers' Compensation Insurance. 2. Proof of this insurance will be required prior to the start of any Work. M. OPT may furnish information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work provided by Subcontractors or Suppliers to the entity providing the Work. N. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. Creates a contractual relationship between members of the OPT and members of the Contractor's Team. 2. Creates an obligation on the part of the Owner to pay or to see to the payment of money due members of the Contractor's Team, except as may be required by Laws and Regulations. 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Pay license fees, royalties, and costs incident to the use of inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the performance of the Work, or to incorporate these inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the Work. The Contract Documents identify inventions, General Conditions 007200-40 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 designs, processes, products, or devices OPT knows are patented or copyrighted by others or that its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of a license fee or royalty to others. Contractor is to include the cost associated with the use of patented or copyrighted products or processes, whether specified or selected by the Contractor, in the Contract Price. B. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to infringement of patent rights and copyrights are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. 7.06 Permits A. Obtain and pay for construction permits and licenses. OPT is to assist Contractor in obtaining permits and licenses when required to do so by applicable Laws and Regulations. Pay governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time the Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. This Project is not exempt from City permits and fees unless expressly stated otherwise. 7.07 Taxes A. Contractor is responsible for all taxes and duties arising out of the Work. The Owner generally qualifies as a tax exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas and is usually not subject to any city or state sales or use taxes, however certain items such as rented equipment may be taxable even though Owner is a tax-exempt agency. Contractor is responsible for including in the Contract Price any applicable sales and use taxes and is responsible for complying with all applicable statutes and rulings of the State Comptroller. Pay sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations. B. The Owner is exempt from the Federal Transportation and Excise Tax. Contractor must comply with all federal regulations governing the exemptions. C. Products incorporated into the Work are exempt from state sales tax according to the provisions of Subchapter H, Chapter 151, of the Texas Tax Code. D. Contractor may not include any amounts for sales, use, or similar taxes for which the Owner is exempt in the Contract Price or any proposed Change Order or Application for Payment. E. Obtain tax exemption certificates or other documentation necessary to establish Owner's exemption from such taxes. 7.08 Laws and Regulations A. Give required notices and comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with Laws or Regulations except where expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Pay costs resulting from actions taken by Contractor that are contrary to Laws or Regulations. Contractor is not responsible for determining that the design aspects of the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations. This does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03. General Conditions 007200-41 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of changes in Laws or Regulations that may affect the cost or time of performance of the Work, including: 1. Changes in Laws or Regulations affecting procurement of permits; and 2. Sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes which come into effect after Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may initiate a Claim within 30 days of this notice if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent of adjustments in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from these changes. 7.09 Safety and Protection A. Contractor is solely responsible for initiating,maintaining,and supervising safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. This responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. B. Take necessary precautions for the safety of persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work, and provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work, whether stored on or off Site; and 2. Other property at or adjacent to the Site, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. C. Comply with applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety and protection of persons or property. Erect and maintain necessary safeguards for safety and protection. Notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site when prosecution of the Work may affect them. Cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. 1. Comply with requirements of Underground Facility Damage Prevention and Safety Act, Texas Utilities Code Chapter 251. 2. Comply with all applicable safety rules and regulations of the Federal Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1970 and subsequent amendments (OSHA). D. Remedy damage, injury, or loss to property referred to in Paragraph 7.09.B caused by Contractor's Team. Pay remediation costs unless the damage or loss is: 1. Attributable to the fault of the Contract Documents; 2. Attributable to acts or omissions of OPT; or 3. Not attributable to the actions or failure to act of the Contractor's Team. E. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site continues until Work is completed and resumes whenever Contractor's Team returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations or to conduct other tasks. General Conditions 007200-42 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 F. Comply with the applicable requirements of the Owner's safety program if required to do so in the Supplementary Conditions. A copy of the Owner's safety program will be provided in the Bidding Documents. 7.10 Safety Representative A. Provide a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities are the prevention of accidents and maintaining and supervising safety programs. 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs A. Coordinate the exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.12 Emergencies A. Act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss in emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site. Notify OAR immediately if Contractor believes that significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused or are required as a result of this need to act. A Modification is to be issued by OAR if OPT determines that the incident giving rise to the emergency action was not the responsibility of the Contractor and that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to this emergency. 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not Defective. Owner is entitled to rely on Contractor's warranty and guarantee. Assume and bear responsibility for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. This Contractor's warranty and guarantee excludes defects or damage caused by improper maintenance or operation, abuse, or modification by OPT; or normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following constitute an acceptance of Defective Work or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. Observations by OPT; 2. Recommendation by OAR to pay or payment by Owner of progress or final payments; 3. The issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion; 4. Use or occupancy of part of the Work by Owner; 5. Review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; 6. Inspections,tests, or approvals by others; or General Conditions 007200-43 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 7. Correction of Defective Work by Owner. D. The Contract Documents may require the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract between the Owner and a contractor or supplier. The specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in an assigned contract govern with respect to Contractor's performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in an assigned contract. 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION A. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorney's fees or dispute resolution costs, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work and/or failure to comply with the terms and conditions of the contract, violations of Laws or Regulations, or bodily injury, death or destruction of tangible property caused by the acts, omissions or negligence of the Contractor's Team, regardless of whether such claim, damage, loss or expense is alleged to be caused in part by an Owner hereunder, subject to the Owner's defenses and liability limits under the Texas Tort Claims Act. However, nothing herein shall be construed to require Contractor to indemnify an Owner against a claim, loss, damage or expense caused by the sole negligence of an Owner. B. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs, arising out of or relating to: (i) the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team or a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor's Team, (ii) Contractor's Team's action or inaction related to damages, delays, disruptions or interference with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, or (iii) the correction of Defective Work. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to indemnify the Owner from the consequences of the Owner's sole negligence. c. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs resulting from infringement on patent rights or copyrights by Contractor's Team. General Conditions 007200-44 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 D. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 are not limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for members of the Contractor's Team or other individuals or entities under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts in claims against Owner by an employee or the survivor or personal representative of employee of Contractor's Team. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 shall not be deemed to be released,waived or modified in any respect by reason of any surety or insurance provided by Contractor. E. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 do not extend to the liability of Designer arising out of the preparation of the Contract Documents or giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, to the extent they are obligated to do so if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. F. Notify the other party within 10 days if Owner or Contractor receives notice of any claim or circumstances that could give rise to an indemnified loss. The notice must include the following: 1. A description of the indemnification event in reasonable detail; 2. The basis on which indemnification may be due; and 3. The anticipated amount of the indemnified loss. This notice does not stop or prevent Owner from later asserting a different basis for indemnification or a different amount of indemnified loss than that indicated in the initial notice. Owner does not waive any rights to indemnification except to the extent that Contractor is prejudiced, suffers loss, or incurs expense because of the delay if Owner does not provide this notice within the 10-day period. G. Defense of Indemnification Claims: 1. Assume the defense of the claim with counsel chosen by the Contractor and pay related costs, unless Owner decides otherwise. Contractor's counsel must be acceptable to Owner. Control the defense and any negotiations to settle the claim. Advise Owner as to its defense of the claim within 10 days after being notified of the indemnification request. Owner may assume and control the defense if Contractor does not assume the defense. Pay all defense expenses of the Owner as an indemnified loss. 2. Owner may retain separate counsel to participate in, but not control, the defense and any settlement negotiations if Contractor defends the claim. Contractor may not settle the claim without the consent or agreement of Owner. Contractor may settle the claim with Owner's consent and agreement unless it: a. Would result in injunctive relief or other equitable remedies or otherwise require Owner to comply with restrictions or limitations that adversely affect Owner; b. Would require Owner to pay amounts that Contractor does not fund in full; or c. Would not result in Owner's full and complete release from all liability to the plaintiffs or claimants who are parties to or otherwise bound by the settlement. 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor is not required to provide professional design services unless these services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless these General Conditions 007200-45 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 services are required to carry out Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. B. The Contract Documents specify performance and design criteria related to systems, materials or equipment if professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor. These services or certifications must be provided by the licensed Texas Professional Engineer or Registered Architect who prepares, signs, and seals drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other documents. C. OPT is entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by Contractor's design professionals, provided OPT has specified to Contractor the performance and design criteria that these services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.15, Designer's review and approval of design calculations and design drawings is only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the performance and design criteria given and the design concepts expressed in the Contract Documents. Designer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and other documents is only for the purpose stated in the Contract Documents. E. Contractor is not responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria specified by OPT. Advise OPT if the performance or design criteria are known or considered likely to be inadequate or otherwise deficient. ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. Owner may arrange for other work at or adjacent to the Site which is not part of the Contractor's Work. This other work may be performed by Owner's employees or through other contractors. Utility owners may perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. Include costs associated with coordinating with entities performing other work or associated with connecting to this other work in the Contract Price if this other work is shown in the Contract Documents. B. OPT is to notify Contractor of other work prior to starting the work and provide any knowledge they have regarding the start of utility work at or adjacent to the Site to Contractor. C. Provide other contractors: 1. Proper and safe access to the Site; 2. Reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment; and 3. Reasonable opportunity to execute their work. D. Provide cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work required to properly connect or integrate with other work. Do not endanger the work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the work of others without the consent of OAR and the others whose work will be affected. General Conditions 007200-46 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 E. Inspect the work of others and immediately notify OAR if the proper execution of part of Contractor's Work depends upon work performed by others and this work has not been performed or is unsuitable for the proper execution of Contractor's Work. Contractor's failure to notify the OAR constitutes an acceptance of this other work as acceptable for integration with Contractor's Work. This acceptance does not apply to latent defects or deficiencies in the work of others. F. Take adequate measures to prevent damages, delays, disruptions, or interference with the work of Owner, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.02 Coordination A. Owner has sole authority and responsibility for coordination of this other work unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner is to identify the entity with authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities of the various contractors, the limitations of their authority, and the work to be coordinated prior to the start of other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. Contractor may be entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times if, while performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the OPT or other contractor retained by the City: 1. Damages the Work or property of Contractor's Team; 2. Delays, disrupts, or interferes with the execution of the Work; or 3. Increases the scope or cost of performing the Work through their actions or inaction. B. Notify the OAR immediately of the event leading to a potential Change Proposal so corrective action can be taken. Submit the Change Proposal within 30 days of the event if corrective action has not adequately mitigated the impact of the actions or inactions of others. Information regarding this other work in the Contract Documents is used to determine if the Contractor is entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Changes in Contract Price require that Contractor assign rights against the other contractor to Owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Changes in Contract Times require that the time extension is essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C. Take prompt corrective action if Contractor's Team damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site or agree to compensate other contractors or utility owners for correcting the damage. Promptly attempt to settle claims with other contractors or utility owners if Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of other contractors or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. D. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor and assign the Owner's contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations described in this Paragraph 8.03 to other contractors if damages, delays, disruptions, or interference occur. General Conditions 007200-47 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 E. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to damages, delays,disruptions,and interference with other work at the Site are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. ARTICLE 9—OWNER'S AND OPT'S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. OPT issues communications to Contractor through OAR except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members A. Owner may replace members of the OPT at its discretion. 9.03 Furnish Data A. OPT is to furnish the data required of OPT under the Contract Documents. 9.04 Pay When Due A. Owner is to make payments to Contractor when due as described in Article 17. 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner's duties with respect to providing lands and easements are described in Paragraph 5.01. OPT will make copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site available to Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 5.03. 9.06 Insurance A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to purchasing and maintaining insurance are described in Article 6. 9.07 Modifications A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to Modifications are described in Article 11. 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals A. OPT's responsibility with respect to certain inspections,tests, and approvals are described in Paragraph 16.02. 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities A. The OPT does not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, and is not responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or related safety precautions and programs, or for failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200-48 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. OPT's responsibility for undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Conditions is described in Paragraph 5.06. 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program A. Contractor is to inform the OPT of its safety programs and OPT is to comply with the specific applicable requirements of this program. 9.12 Plans and Specifications A. Owner does not warrant the plans and specification. ARTICLE 10—OAR'S AND DESIGNER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner's Representative A. OAR is Owner's representative. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of OAR as Owner's representative are described in the Contract Documents. 10.02 Visits to Site A. Designer is to make periodic visits to the Site to observe the progress and quality of the Work. Designer is to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents based on observations made during these visits. Designer is not required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Designer is to inform the OPT of issues or concerns and OAR is to work with Contractor to address these issues or concerns. Designer's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on Designer's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. B. OAR is to observe the Work to check the quality and quantity of Work, implement Owner's quality assurance program, and administer the Contract as Owner's representative as described in the Contract Documents. OAR's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on OAR's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.03 Resident Project Representatives A. Resident Project Representatives assist OAR in observing the progress and quality of the Work at the Site. The limitations on Resident Project Representatives' authority and responsibility are described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work A. OPT has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 16. OAR is to issue a Defective Work Notice to Contractor and document when Defective Work has been corrected or accepted in accordance with Article 16. General Conditions 007200-49 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments A. Designer's authority related to Shop Drawings and Samples are described in the Contract Documents. B. Designer's authority related to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services are described in Paragraph 7.15. C. OAR and Designer's authority related to Modifications is described in Article 11. D. OAR's authority related to Applications for Payment is described in Articles 15 and 17. 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. OAR is to render decisions regarding non-technical or contractual / administrative requirements of the Contract Documents and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Designer is to render decisions regarding the conformance of the Work to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Designer will render a decision to either correct the Defective Work or accept the Work under the provisions of Paragraph 16.04 if Work does not conform to the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. Contractor may appeal Designer's decision by submitting a Change Proposal if Contractor does not agree with the Designer's decision. 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities A. OPT is not responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor's Team. No actions or failure to act, or decisions made in good faith to exercise or not exercise the authority or responsibility available under the Contract Documents creates a duty in contract, tort, or otherwise of the OPT to the Contractor or members of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 11—AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be modified by a Contract Amendment, Change Order, Work Change Directive, or Field Order. 1. Contract Amendment: Owner and Contractor may modify the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents without the recommendation of the Designer using a Contract Amendment. A Contract Amendment may be used for: a. Changes that do not involve: 1) The performance or acceptability of the Work; 2) The design as described in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise; or 3) Other engineering, architectural or technical matters. b. Authorizing new phases of the Work and establishing the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work when using phased construction or purchasing Goods and Special Services to be incorporated into the Project. General Conditions 007200-50 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 2. Change Order: All changes to the Contract Documents that include a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times for previously authorized Work, or changes to the Work requiring Designer's approval must be made by a Change Order. A Change Order may also be used to establish modifications of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times. 3. Work Change Directive: A Work Change Directive does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the modifications ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations on the Contract Price and Contract Times. If negotiations under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 are unsuccessful, Contractor must submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. 4. Field Order: Designer may require minor changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times using a Field Order. OAR may issue a Field Order for non-technical, administrative issues. Submit a Change Proposal if Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times before proceeding with the Work described in the Field Order. B. Perform added or revised Work under the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents for the same or similar Work unless different Drawings, Specifications or directions are provided in the Modification. 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A. Owner may order additions, deletions,or revisions in the Work at any time as recommended by the Designer to the extent the change: 1. Involves the design as described in the Contract Documents; 2. Involves acceptance of the Work; or 3. Involves other engineering, architectural or technical matters. B. These changes may be authorized by a Modification. Proceed with the Work involved or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, immediately cease construction activities with respect to the deleted Work upon receipt of the Modification. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to undertake Work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor's safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor is not entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.12, or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 16.05. General Conditions 007200-51 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 B. Contractor is responsible for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless the variations are specifically approved by Change Order. 11.04 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price for authorized Work can only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment in the Contract Price is to be determined as follows: 1. By applying unit prices to the quantities of the items involved, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03, where the Work involved is covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; 2. By a mutually agreed lump sum where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; or 3. Payment on the basis of the Cost of the Work determined as provided in Paragraph 15.01 plus a Contractor's fee for overhead and profit determined as provided in Paragraph 15.05 when the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach a mutual agreement to a lump sum. C. The original Contract Price may not be increased by more than 25 percent or the limit set out in Texas Local Government Code 252.048 or its successor statute, whichever is greater. Owner may decrease the Work by up to 25 percent of the Contract Price. 11.05 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times for authorized Work can only be changed by Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the limitations described in Paragraph 4.04. 11.06 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal in accordance with Article 12 to the OAR to: 1. Request an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Appeal an initial decision by OPT concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Contest a set-off against payment due; or 4. Seek other relief under the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200-52 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 B. Notify the OAR within 3 days if a Change Proposal is to be submitted. Submit each Change Proposal to OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 11.07 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor are to execute Change Orders covering: 1. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, which are agreed to by Owner and Contractor, including undisputed sums or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from Owner set-offs unless the set-off has been successfully challenged by Contractor; 3. Changes in the Work which are: a. Ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02.A, b. Required because Defective Work was accepted under Paragraph 16.04 or Owner's correction of Defective Work under Paragraph 16.07, or c. Agreed to by the Owner and Contractor; and 4. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes under Paragraph 11.06 or Article 13. B. Acceptance of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes a full accord and satisfaction for any and all claims and costs of any kind, whether direct or indirect, including but not limited to impact, delay or acceleration damages arising from the subject matter of the Change Order. Each Change Order must be specific and final as to prices and extensions of time, with no reservations or other provisions allowing for future additional money or time as a result of the particular changes identified and fully compensated in the Change Order. The execution of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes conclusive evidence of Contractor's agreement to the ordered changes in the Work. This Contract, as amended, forever releases any claim against Owner for additional time or compensation for matters relating to or arising out of or resulting from the Work included within or affected by the executed Change Order. This release applies to claims related to the cumulative impact of all Change Orders and to any claim related to the effect of a change on unchanged Work. C. All Change Orders require approval by either the City Council or Owner by administrative action. The approval process requires a minimum of 45 days after submission in final form with all supporting data. Receipt of Contractor's submission by Owner constitutes neither acceptance nor approval of a Change Order, nor a warranty that the Change Order will be authorized by City Council or administrative action. The time required for the approval process may not be considered a delay and no extensions to the Contract Times or increase in the Contract Price will be considered or granted as a result of the process. Contractor may proceed with Work if a Work Change Directive is issued. D. If the Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, the Change Order is deemed to be in full force as if executed by Contractor. Contractor may file a Claim for payment and/or time, pursuant to Article 13. General Conditions 007200-53 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 11.08 Notice to Surety A. Notify the surety of Modifications affecting the general scope of the Work, changes in the provisions of the Contract Documents,or changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Adjust the amount of each Bond when Modifications change the Contract Price. ARTICLE 12—CHANGE MANAGEMENT 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal A. Designer will initiate Modifications by issuing a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP). 1. Designer will prepare a description of proposed Modifications. 2. Designer will issue the Request for a Change Proposal form to Contractor. A number will be assigned to the Request for a Change Proposal when issued. 3. Return a Change Proposal in accordance with Paragraph 12.02 to the Designer for evaluation by the OPT. 12.02 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal (CP) to the Designer for Contractor initiated changes in the Contract Documents or in response to a Request for Change Proposal. A Change Proposal must be submitted to the OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 1. Use the Change Proposal form provided. 2. Assign a number to the Change Proposal when issued. 3. Include with the Change Proposal: a. A complete description of the proposed Modification if Contractor initiated or proposed changes to the OPT's description of the proposed Modification. b. The reason the Modification is requested, if not in response to a Request for a Change Proposal. c. A detailed breakdown of the cost of the change if the Modification requires a change in Contract Price. The itemized breakdown is to include: 1) List of materials and equipment to be installed; 2) Man hours for classification; 3) Equipment used in construction; 4) Consumable supplies,fuels, and materials; 5) Royalties and patent fees; 6) Bonds and insurance; 7) Overhead and profit; 8) Field office costs; and 9) Other items of cost. General Conditions 007200-54 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 d. Provide the level of detail outlined in the paragraph above for each Subcontractor or Supplier actually performing the Work if Work is to be provided by a Subcontractor or Supplier. Indicate appropriate Contractor mark-ups for Work provided through Subcontractors and Suppliers. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for self-performed Work. e. Submit Change Proposals that comply with Article 15 for Cost of Work. f. Provide a revised schedule. Show the effect of the change on the Project Schedule and the Contract Times. B. Submit a Change Proposal to the OAR to request a Field Order. C. A Change Proposal is required for all substitutions or deviations from the Contract Documents. D. Request changes to products in accordance with Article 25. 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification A. OAR is to advise OPT regarding the Change Proposal. OPT is to review each Change Proposal and Contractor's supporting data, and within 30 days after receipt of the documents, direct the OAR to either approve or deny the Change Proposal in whole or in part. OAR is to issue a Change Order for an approved Change Proposal. The Contractor may deem the Change Proposal to be denied if OAR does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days and start the time for appeal of the denial under Article 13. 1. Change Orders and Contract Amendments will be sent to the Contractor for execution with a copy to the Owner recommending approval. A Work Change Directive may be issued if Work needs to progress before the Change Order or Contract Amendment can be authorized by the Owner. 2. Work Change Directives, Change Orders, and Contract Amendments can only be approved by the Owner. a. Work performed on the Change Proposal prior to receiving a Work Change Directive or approval of the Change Order or Contract Amendment is performed at the Contractor's risk. b. No payment will be made for Work on Change Orders or Contract Amendments until approved by the Owner. B. The Contractor may be informed that the Request for a Change Proposal is not approved and construction is to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 12.04 Substitutions A. The products of the listed Suppliers are to be furnished where Specifications list several manufacturers but do not specifically list "or equal" or "or approved equal" products. Use of any products other than those specifically listed is a substitution. Follow these procedures for a substitution. B. Substitutions are defined as any product that the Contractor proposes to provide for the Project in lieu of the specified product. Submit a Change Proposal per Paragraph 12.02 along with a Shop Drawing as required by Article 25 to request approval of a substitution. General Conditions 007200-55 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 C. Prove that the product is acceptable as a substitute. It is not the Designer's responsibility to prove the product is not acceptable as a substitute. 1. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is acceptable to meet the intent of the Contract Documents requirements. 2. Make a direct comparison with the specified Suppliers published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the documents submitted. 3. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed substitute product is final. D. Provide a written certification that, in making the substitution request,the Contractor: 1. Has determined that the substituted product will perform in substantially the same manner and result in the same ability to meet the specified performance as the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds for the substituted product as specified or as would be provided by the manufacturer of the specified product. 3. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. 4. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. E. Pay for review of substitutions in accordance with Article 25. ARTICLE 13—CLAIMS 13.01 Claims A. Follow the Claims process described in this Article for the following disputes between Owner and Contractor: 1. Seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Contesting an initial decision by OAR concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Appealing OAR's decision regarding a Change Proposal; 4. Seeking resolution of a contractual issue that OAR has declined to address; or 5. Seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. B. Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Contractor shall bear the entire economic risk of all weather delays and disruptions. Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Price by reason of such delays or disruptions. Upon Contractor reaching Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor shall look back at the entire duration of the calendar day Project and review the totality of what Contractor claims were unusually severe weather disruptions. If the Project was delayed or disrupted due to unusually severe weather in General Conditions 007200-56 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 excess of weather normally experienced over the entire duration of the Project, Contractor may make a Claim for an extension of the Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Any time extension granted shall be non-compensatory. 13.02 Claims Process A. Claims must be initiated by written notice. Notice must conspicuously state that it is a notice of a Claim in the subject line or first sentence. Notice must also list the date of first occurrence of the claimed event. B. Except for Claims resulting from unusually severe weather, notice of a Claim by Contractor must be in writing and delivered to the Owner, Designer and the OAR within 14 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim. Failure by Contractor to submit written notice of a Claim within 14 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. C. Submit the complete Claim with supporting documentation to Owner no later than 60 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim (unless Designer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). The Claim must be signed and sworn to by Contractor, certifying that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data is accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor's knowledge and belief,the relief requested accurately reflects the full compensation to which Contractor is entitled. Failure by Contractor to submit the Claim within 60 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. D. Any Claims by Contractor that are not brought within 90 days following the termination of the Contract are waived and shall be automatically deemed denied. E. Claims by Owner must be submitted by written notice to Contractor. F. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the entity making the Claim. Claims must contain sufficient detail to allow the other party to fully review the Claim. 1. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Price must include the Contractor's job cost report. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. 2. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Time must include a Time Impact Analysis and native schedule files in Primavera or MS Project digital format. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. G. Claims by Contractor against Owner and Claims by Owner against Contractor, including those alleging an error or omission by Designer but excluding those arising under Section 7.12,shall be referred initially to Designer for consideration and recommendation. H. Designer will review a Claim by Contractor within 30 days of receipt of the Claim and take one or more of the following actions: 1. Request additional supporting data from the party who made the Claim; 2. Issue a recommendation; 3. Suggest a compromise; or General Conditions 007200-57 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 4. Advise the parties that Designer is not able to make a recommendation due to insufficient information or a conflict of interest. I. If the Designer does not take any action, the Claim shall be deemed denied 30 days after receipt of the Claim. J. Following receipt of Designer's initial recommendation regarding a Claim,the Contractor and the Owner shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. If no agreement is reached within 90 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. The Owner and Contractor may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. Notify OAR of any actions taken on a Claim. K. If the entity receiving a Claim approves the Claim in whole or in part or denies it in whole or in part, this action is final and binding unless the other entity invokes the procedure described in Article 22 for final resolution of disputes by filing a notice of appeal within 30 days after this action. L. If the Owner and Contractor reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim,the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will be incorporated in a Change Order by the OAR to the extent they affect the Contract Documents, the Contract Price, or the Contract Times. M. Both parties shall continue to perform all obligations under the Agreement during the pendency of any dispute or disagreement relating to this Agreement, unless performance would be impracticable or impossible under the circumstances. N. Any failure of Contractor to comply with any of the foregoing conditions precedent with regard to any such Claim shall constitute a waiver of any entitlement to submit or pursue such Claim. O. Receipt and review of a Claim by City shall not be construed as a waiver of any defenses to the Claim available to the City under the Contract Documents or at law. ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates A. Contractor and any Subcontractors employed on this Project shall pay not less than the rates established by the Owner as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2258. B. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay Davis-Bacon Wage Rates. C. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay laborers and mechanics an overtime rate of not less than one and one-half times the basic rate for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in a given workweek. 14.02 Records A. In accordance with Tex. Gov't Code§2258.024,the Contractor and its Subcontractors, if any, shall keep a record showing: 1. The name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in the construction of the Work; and 2. The actual per diem wages paid to each worker. General Conditions 007200-58 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 B. The record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the Owner. 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense A. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.003 — Liability: An officer, agent, or employee of the Owner is not liable in a civil action for any act or omission implementing or enforcing Chapter 2258 unless the action was made in bad faith. B. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.023(b)— Penalty: Any Contractor or Subcontractor who violates the requirements of Chapter 2258,shall pay to the Owner,on whose behalf the Contract is made, $60 for each worker employed on each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the Contract. C. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.058—Criminal Offense: 1. An officer, agent, or representative of the Owner commits an offense if the person willfully violates or does not comply with a provision of Chapter 2258. 2. Any Contractor or Subcontractor, or an agent or representative of the Contractor or Subcontractor, commits an offense if the person violates Tex. Gov't Code §2258.024. 3. An offense is punishable by: a. A fine not to exceed $500; b. Confinement in jail for a term not to exceed 6 months; or c. Both a fine and confinement. 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates A. Use the Prevailing Wage Rates specified in the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 15—COST OF THE WORK;ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 15.01 Cost of the Work A. The Cost of the Work is the sum of costs described in this Paragraph 15.01, except those excluded in Paragraph 15.01.D, necessary for the proper performance of the Work. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price under cost-plus, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or 2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. B. Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment when the value of the adjustment is determined on the basis of the Cost of the Work. General Conditions 007200-59 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 C. Costs included in the Cost of the Work may not exceed the prevailing costs in the proximate area of the Site for similar work unless agreed to by the Owner. Cost of the Work includes only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for Contractor's employees performing the Work, including one foreman per crew, and other required and agreed upon personnel for the time they are employed on the Work. Employees are to be paid according to wage rates for job classifications as agreed to by Owner. Where the Cost of the Work is being used under provisions of Paragraph 15.01.A.2, rates paid for this Work are to be the same as paid for Contract Work as established by certified payroll. Payroll costs may include: a. Actual costs paid for salaries and wages; b. Actual cost paid for fringe benefits, which may include: 1) Social security contributions, 2) Unemployment, 3) Excise and payroll taxes, 4) Workers' compensation, 5) Health and retirement benefits, 6) Bonuses, and 7) Paid time off for sick leave,vacations, and holidays; and c. Actual cost of additional compensation paid for performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Sunday or legal holidays, to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including transportation and storage costs and required Suppliers'field services. Contractor may retain cash discounts unless Owner provided funds to the Contractor for early payment of these materials and equipment. Cash discounts are to be credited to Owner if the Owner provides funds for early payment. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment and reduce the Cost of the Work by these amounts. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. Obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to Owner unless Owner agrees to use Subcontractors proposed by the Contractor. Bids are to be opened in the presence of the OAR and other designated members for the OPT. Provide copies of bids to the OAR to use in determining,with the OPT,which bids are acceptable. The Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee are determined in the same manner as Contractor's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 15.01 if the subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee. 4. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work; b. Costs of materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site including transportation and maintenance costs; General Conditions 007200-60 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 c. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers consumed in the performance of the Work. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers which are used but not consumed in the performance of the Work and which remain the property of Contractor, less their market value when Work is completed; d. For Contractor-and Subcontractor-owned machinery,trucks, power tools or other equipment, use the FHWA rental rates found in the Rental Rate Blue Book ("Blue Book") multiplied by the regional adjustment factor and the rate adjustment factor to establish hourly rates. Use the rates in effect for each section of the Blue Book at the time of use. Payment will be made for the actual hours used in the Work. 1) Standby costs will be paid at 50% of the FHWA rental rates found in the Blue Book if Contractor is directed by Owner in writing to standby. Standby costs will not be allowed during periods when the equipment would otherwise have been idle. For a six-day work week, no more than eight hours per a 24-hour day, no more than 48 hours per week and no more than 208 hours per month shall be paid of standby time. Operating costs shall not be charged by Contractor. e. Rental of construction equipment, including the costs of transporting, loading, unloading, assembling, dismantling, and removing construction equipment, whether rented from Contractor or others, in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner. Costs for rental of equipment will not be paid when the equipment is no longer necessary for the Work. Justify idle time for equipment by demonstrating that it was necessary to keep equipment on Site for related future Work; 1) The hourly rate shall be determined by dividing the actual invoice cost by the actual number of hours the equipment is involved in the Work. Owner reserves the right to limit the hourly rate to comparable Blue Book rates. 2) If Contractor is directed to standby in writing by Owner, standby costs will be paid at the invoice daily rate excluding operating costs, which includes fuel, lubricants, repairs and servicing. f. Applicable sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work for which the Owner is not exempt, and which Contractor pays consistent with Laws and Regulations; g. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor's Team; h. Royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses; i. Cost of additional utilities,fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site; j. Minor expense items directly required by the Work; and k. Premiums for Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents. D. The Cost of the Work does not include the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor's officers, executives, principals of partnerships and sole proprietorships, general managers, safety managers, superintendents, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, clerks, and other personnel employed General Conditions 007200-61 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor's principal or branch office, for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 15.01.C.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 15.01.C.4. These administrative costs are covered by the Contractor's fee. 2. Office expenses other than Contractor's office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the actions of Contractor's Team for the correction of Defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment that do not comply with Specifications, and correcting damage to property. 5. Losses, damages, and related expenses caused by damage to the Work or sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work. Contractor is entitled to recover costs if covered by insurance provided in accordance with Article 6. Such losses may include settlements made with the approval of Owner. Do not include these losses, damages, and expenses in the Cost of the Work when determining Contractor's fee. 6. Any Indemnified Cost paid with regard to Contractor's indemnification of Owner. 7. Other overhead or general expense costs and the costs of items not described in Paragraphs 15.01.C. E. The Contractor's fee for profit and overhead is determined as follows: 1. In accordance with the Agreement when the Work is performed on a cost-plus basis; 2. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 3. A fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. The Contractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1, 15.01.C.2 and 15.01.C.4; b. The Contractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.3; C. Fees are to be determined as follows where one or more tiers of subcontracts are used: 1) The Subcontractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1 and 15.01.C.2 forthe Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; 2) The Subcontractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.4 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; and 3) The Contractor and Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work are to be allowed a fee of 5 percent of the fee plus underlying costs incurred by the next lower tier Subcontractor. d. No fee is payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraph 15.01.D; General Conditions 007200-62 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 e. Five percent of the net decrease in the cost is to be deducted for changes which result in a net decrease in Contract Price; and 4. The adjustment in Contractor's fee is based on the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 15.05.13.1 through 15.05.13.5, inclusive when both additions and credits are involved in any one change. F. Establish and maintain records in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit these records, including an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data, in a form and at intervals acceptable to OAR whenever the Cost of the Work is to be determined pursuant to this Paragraph 15.01. 15.02 Allowances A. Include allowances specified in the Contract Documents in the Contract Price and provide Work covered by the allowance as authorized by the Owner through the OAR. B. Contractor agrees that: 1. The cash allowance is used to compensate the Contractor for the cost of furnishing materials and equipment for the Work covered by the allowance item in the Contract Documents. Cost may include applicable taxes. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and reduce the allowance costs by these amounts. 2. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances; and 3. Costs for cash allowances and installation costs as described in Paragraphs 15.02.13.1 and 15.02.13.2 above are included in the Contract Price. C. OAR will issue a Change Order to adjust the Contract Price by the difference between the allowance amount and the actual amount paid by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance. The Change Order will be issued at the time costs are incurred by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance and this Work is included on the Application for Payment. 15.03 Unit Price Work A. The initial Contract Price for Unit Price Work is equal to the sum of the unit price line items in the Agreement. Each unit price line item amount is equal to the product of the unit price for each line item times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Contract. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparing Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work are to be based on actual quantities measured for Work in place. C. Each unit price is deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. OAR is to determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor to be incorporated into each Application for Payment. OAR's decision on actual quantities is final and binding, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03.E. General Conditions 007200-63 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 E. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal,or Owner may file a Claim,seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price within 30 days of OAR's decision under Paragraph 15.03.D, if: 1. The total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 20 percent or more of the total Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work performed by the Contractor differs by more than 20 percent from the estimated quantity of an item indicated in the Contract; 2. There is no corresponding adjustment with respect to other items of Work; and 3. Contractor believes it has incurred additional expense as a result of this condition or Owner believes that the quantity variation entitles Owner to an adjustment in the Contract Price. 15.04 Contingencies A. Contingency funds may be included in the Contract Price to pay for Work not defined specifically by the Contract Documents that is essential to the completion of the Project. Contingency funds will be as described in the Contract. B. The contingency funds may be used for costs incurred by the Contractor provided these costs are approved by the Owner. Costs are to be determined and documented in accordance with Paragraph 15.01. The contingency funds are not to be used for the following items: 1. Cost overruns due to changes in material costs after the Contract Price is established, unless specific price escalation provisions are made in the Contract. 2. Rework required to correct Defective Work. 3. Inefficiencies in completing the Work due to the Contractor's selected means, methods, sequences, or procedures of construction. 4. Work Contractor failed to include in the Contract Price. 5. Changes required by changes in Laws and Regulations enacted after the Contract Price is established. 6. Any Work that does not constitute a change in Scope in the Work included in the Contract Price. C. OAR is to issue a Change Order for approved expenditures from contingency funds. When the Change Order is issued, the costs are to be added to the Application for Payment. Contractor is to maintain a tabulation showing the contingency amount, adjustments to the contingency amount, and amounts remaining as the Project progresses. D. Any contingency amounts that are not included in a Change Order are retained bythe Owner. A Change Order will be issued to deduct unused contingency amounts from the Contract Price prior to Final Payment. General Conditions 007200-64 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 ARTICLE 16—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;CORRECTION, REMOVAL,OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 16.01 Access to Work A. Provide safe access to the Site and the Work for the observation, inspection, and testing of the Work in progress. Contractor can require compliance with Contractor's safety procedures and programs as part of providing safe access. 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals A. OPT may retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform inspections. Notify OAR when the Work is ready for required inspections and tests. Provide adequate notice to allow for coordination with entities providing inspection or testing as determined by the OAR. Cooperate with inspection and testing personnel and assist with providing access for required inspections, tests, and handling test specimens or Samples. B. Arrange for and facilitate inspections, tests, and approvals required by Laws or Regulations of governmental entities having jurisdiction that require Work to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of that entity. Pay associated costs and furnish OAR with the required certificates of inspection or approval. C. Arrange, obtain, and pay for inspections and tests required: 1. By the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to OPT; 2. To attain OPT's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3. By manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4. For testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; 5. For acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work; 6. For re-inspecting or retesting Defective Work, including any associated costs incurred by the testing laboratory for cancelled tests or standby time; and 7. For retesting due to failed tests. D. Provide independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to OPT to provide these inspections and tests. 16.03 Defective Work A. It is Contractor's obligation to ensure that the Work is not Defective. B. OPT has the authority to determine whether Work is Defective and to reject Defective Work. C. OAR is to notify Contractor of Defective Work of which OPT has actual knowledge. D. Promptly correct Defective Work. E. Take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner's special warranties or guarantees when correcting Defective Work. General Conditions 007200-65 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 F. Pay claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to Defective Work, including: 1. Costs for correction, removal, and replacement of Defective Work; 2. Cost of the inspection and testing related to correction of Defective Work; 3. Fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because of Defective Work;and 4. Costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from Defective Work. 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A. Owner may elect to accept Defective Work instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of Defective Work provided: 1. This acceptance occurs prior to final payment; 2. Designer confirms that the Defective Work is in general accordance with the design intent and applicable engineering or architectural principles; and 3. Designer confirms that acceptance of the Defective Work does not endanger public health or safety. B. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 for costs associated with OPT's evaluation of Defective Work to determine if it can be accepted and to determine the diminished value of the Work. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 if the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price to compensate Owner for the diminished value of Defective Work accepted. OAR is to issue a Modification for acceptance of the Defective Work prior to final payment. Pay an appropriate amount to Owner if the acceptance of Defective Work occurs after final payment. 16.05 Uncovering Work A. OPT has the authority to require inspection or testing of the Work,whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. B. Work that is covered prior to approval of the OAR must be uncovered for OPT's observation if requested by OAR. Pay for uncovering Work and its subsequent restoration unless Contractor has given OAR timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the Work and OAR fails to act with reasonable promptness in response to this notice. C. Provide necessary labor, material, and equipment and uncover, expose, or otherwise make available the portion of the Work suspected of being Defective for observation, inspection, or testing if OPT considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Designer or inspected or tested by others as directed by the OAR. 1. Pay for claims, costs, losses, and damages associated with uncovering, exposing, observing, inspecting, and testing if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. Pay costs for correction of Defective Work. Pay for reconstruction, repair, or replacement of work of others resulting from the Defective Work if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. General Conditions 007200-66 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work A. Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work if: 1. The Work is Defective; 2. Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; or 3. Contractor performs Work that may fail to conform to the Contract Documents when completed. This stop work order is to remain in effect until the reason for the stop work order has been eliminated. Owner's right to stop the Work does not create a duty to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor's Team or surety. 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. Owner may remedy deficiencies in the Work after 7 days' notice to Contractor if: 1. Contractor fails to correct Defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by OPT; 2. Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or 3. Contractor fails to comply with other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Owner may: 1. Exclude Contractor from the Site; 2. Take possession of the Work and suspend Contractor's services related to the Work; and 3. Incorporate stored materials and equipment in the Work. C. Allow OPT access to the Site and off-Site storage areas to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. D. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07 are to be charged against Contractor as a set-off against payments due under Article 17. These claims, costs, losses, and damages include costs of repair and the cost of replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor's Defective Work. E. Contractor is not allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of delays in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of the Owner's rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. ARTICLE 17—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS;COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 17.01 Progress Payments A. Progress payment requests are to be submitted to the OAR on the Application for Payment form provided by the OAR following procedures in this Article 17. General Conditions 007200-67 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 1. Progress payments for lump sum Work are to be paid on the basis of the earned value to date at the amounts shown in the Schedule of Values submitted as required by Paragraph 17.03. Final payment will be for the total lump sum amount. 2. Progress payments for Unit Price Work are based on the number of units completed as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. 3. Progress payments for Work to be paid on the basis of the Cost of the Work per Paragraphs 15.01, 15.02 and 15.04 are to be paid for Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B. Reduction in Payment by Owner: 1. Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on the following: a. Claims made against Owner or costs, losses,or damages incurred by Owner related to: 1) Contractor's conduct in the performance of the Work, including, but not limited to, workplace injuries, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, or patent infringement; or 2) Contractor's failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site, including but not limited to, workplace injuries, property damage, and non-compliance with Laws and Regulations. b. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; c. Work is Defective, or completed Work has been damaged by Contractor's Team, requiring correction or replacement; d. Owner has been required to correct Defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 16.07; e. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; f. Events have occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor justifying a termination for cause; g. Liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor's failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work; h. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of these Liens; i. Failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required by the Contract Documents; j. Failure to submit monthly Progress Schedule updates or revised schedules as requested by the OAR; k. Failure to provide Project photographs required by the Contract Documents; I. Failure to provide Certified Payroll required by the Contract Documents; General Conditions 007200-68 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 m. Compensation for OPT for overtime charges of OAR or RPR, third review of documents, review of substitutions, re-inspection fees, inspections or designs related to correction of Defective Work, or other services identified as requiring payment by the Contractor; n. Costs for tests performed by the Owner to verify that Work previously tested and found to be Defective has been corrected; o. OPT has actual knowledge of the occurrence of events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents with associated cost impacts; p. Other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or q. Payment would result in an over-payment of the Contract Price. 2. Compensation for services of OPT staff is to be at the rates established by negotiations between OPT and Contractor. 3. OAR is to notify Contractor stating the amount and the reasons for an imposed set-off. The Owner is to pay the Contractor amounts remaining after deduction of the set-off. Owner is to pay the set-off amount agreed to by Owner and Contractor if Contractor remedies the reasons for the set-off. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal contesting the set-off. C. Delayed Payments: 1. No money shall be paid by Owner upon any claim, debt, demand, or account whatsoever, to any person, firm, or corporation who is in arrears to Owner for taxes; and Owner shall be entitled to counterclaim and automatically offset against any such debt, claim,demand, or account in the amount of taxes so in arrears and no assignment or transfer of such debt, claim, demand, or account after said taxes are due, shall affect the right of Owner to offset said taxes, and associated penalties and interest if applicable, against the same. 2. No payment will be made for Work authorized by a Work Change Directive until the Work Change Directive is incorporated into a Change Order. Payment can be included in an Application for payment when the Change Order is approved. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.02 Application for Payment A. Submit Applications for Payment for completed Work and for materials and equipment in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Article 17. The Contract Price is to include costs for: 1. Providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. Installing Owner furnished equipment and materials; 3. Providing Work for Alternates and Allowances; 4. Commissioning, start-up,training and initial maintenance and operation; 5. Acceptance testing in manufacturer's facilities or on Site; General Conditions 007200-69 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 6. All home office overhead costs and expenses, including profit made directly or indirectly for the Project; 7. Project management, Contract administration, field office, and field operations staff, including supervision, clerical support, and technology system support; 8. Professional services including design fees, legal fees, and other professional services; 9. Bonds and insurance; 10. Permits, licenses, patent fees, and royalties; 11. Taxes; 12. Providing all documents and Samples required by the Contract Documents; 13. Facilities and equipment at the Site including: a. Field offices, office furnishings, and all related office supplies, software, and equipment, b. Storage facilities for Contractor's use, storage facilities for stored materials and equipment, including spare parts storage, c. Shops, physical plant, construction equipment, small tools, vehicles, technology and telecommunications equipment, d. Safety equipment and facilities to provide safe access and working conditions for workers and for others working at the Site, e. Temporary facilities for power and communications, f. Potable water and sanitation facilities, and g. Mobilization and demobilization for all of these facilities and equipment; 14. Products, materials, and equipment stored at the Site or other suitable location; 15. Products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project; 16. Temporary facilities for managing water, including facilities for pumping, storage, and treatment as required for construction and protection of the environment; 17. Temporary facilities for managing environment conditions and Constituents of Concern; 18. Temporary facilities such as sheeting, shoring, bracing, formwork, embankments, storage facilities, working areas, and other facilities required for construction of the Project; 19. Temporary and permanent facilities for protection of all overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 20. Temporary and permanent facilities for removal, relocation, or replacement of any overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 21. Products, materials, and equipment consumed during the construction of the Project; 22. Contractor labor and supervision to complete the Project, including that provided through Subcontractors or Suppliers; General Conditions 007200-70 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 23. Correcting Defective Work during the Contract Times, during the Correction Period, or as required to meet any warranty provision of the Contract Documents; 24. Risk associated with weather and environmental conditions, start-up, and initial operation of facilities including equipment, processes, and systems; 25. Contractor's safety programs, including management, administration, and training; 26. Maintenance of facilities, including equipment, processes, and systems until operation is transferred to Owner; 27. Providing warranties, extended or special warranties, or extended service agreements; 28. Cleanup and disposal of any and all surplus materials; and 29. Demobilization of all physical, temporary facilities not incorporated into the Project. B. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price. C. Provide written approval of the surety company providing Bonds for the Schedule of Values, Application for Payment form, and method of payment prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. Payment will not be made without this approval. D. OAR may withhold processing Applications for Payment if any of the following processes or documentation are not up to date: 1. Record Documents per Article 20. 2. Progress Schedule per Article 27. 3. Project photographs per Article 28. 4. Documentation required to comply with Owner's Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy. 5. Documentation required to substantiate any approved Project deviation, including overruns of Designer's estimated quantity. 6. Documentation required by funding agency, if applicable. 17.03 Schedule of Values A. Submit a detailed Schedule of Values for the Work at least 10 days prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. B. Submit the Schedule of Values in the form attached to the Application for Payment - Tabulation of Earned Value of Original Contract Performed. C. Do not submit an Application for Payment until the Schedule of Values has been approved by the OAR. D. If unit prices are included in the Contract, use each unit price line item in the Contract as a unit price line item in the Schedule of Values. E. Divide lump sum line items, including Subcontractor and Supplier amounts in the Schedule of Values into smaller components to allow more accurate determination of the earned value for each item. General Conditions 007200-71 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 1. Provide adequate detail to allow a more accurate determination of the earned value expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each item. 2. Line items may not exceed $50,000.00, unless they are for products, materials or equipment permanently incorporated into the Project that cannot be subdivided into units or subassemblies. 3. Lump sum items may be divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value. a. The estimated number of units times the cost per unit must equal the lump sum amount for that line item. b. Contractor will receive payment for the lump sum for the line item, regardless of the number of units installed, unless an adjustment is made by Change Order. 4. Include Contractor's overhead and profit in each line item in proportion to the value of the line item to the Contract Price. 5. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price for each item. 6. These line items may be used to establish the value of Work to be added or deleted from the Project. 7. The sum of all values listed in the schedule must equal the total Contract Price. F. Subdivide each line item in the Schedule of Values into two payment components. The first component is the direct cost for products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project. The second component is all other costs associated with the item in the Contract. The sum of the two components must equal the value of the line item in the Schedule of Values. G. Where a percentage of the line value is allowed for a specified stage of completion,show the value for each stage of completion as a component of that line item cost. 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value A. Submit a schedule of the anticipated Application for Payments showing the application numbers, submission dates, and the anticipated amount to be requested. Incorporate retainage into the development of this schedule of anticipated payments. B. Submit a tabulation of the anticipated Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to create a graphic (curve) representation of the anticipated progress on the Project each month. Adjust this table and curve to incorporate Modifications. Use this curve to compare actual progress on the Project each month by comparing the anticipated cumulative Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to the actual Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials each month. Use the comparison of values to determine performance on budget and schedule. C. Update the Schedule of Payments as necessary to provide a reasonably accurate indication of the funds required to make payments each month to the Contractor for Work performed. General Conditions 007200-72 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 17.05 Basis for Payments A. Lump Sum Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the earned value of Work completed during the payment period expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each line item during the payment period per the Contract Documents. 2. Payment amount is the value of Work completed per the Contract Documents multiplied by the percentage of Work completed. 3. Payment for lump sum items divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value per Paragraph 17.03 will be made for the measured number of units. 4. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. B. Unit Price Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the actual quantity of Work completed during the payment period and for materials and equipment stored during the payment period per the Contract Documents. a. Payment amount is the Work quantity measured per the Contract Documents multiplied by the unit prices for that line item in the Contract. b. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. 2. Measure the Work described in the Contract for payment. Payment will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment A. Store materials and equipment properly at the Site. 1. Payment will be made for the invoice amount less the specified retainage. 2. Payment for materials and equipment shown in the Application for Payment and attachments will be made for the invoice amount,up to the value shown in the Schedule of Values for that line item. Costs for material and equipment in excess of the value shown in the Schedule of Values may not be added to other line items. 3. Payment will be made in full for the value shown in the line item for products and materials if invoices for materials and equipment are less than the amount shown in the line item and it can be demonstrated that no additional materials or equipment are required to complete Work described in that item. 4. Provide invoices at the time materials are included on the Application for Payment and attachments. Include invoice numbers so that a comparison can be made between invoices and amounts included on the Application for Payment and attachments. B. Provide a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of Liens. Provide documentation of payment for General Conditions 007200-73 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 materials and equipment with the next Application for Payment. Adjust payment to the amount actually paid if this differs from the invoice amount. Remove items from the tabulation of materials and equipment if this documentation is not provided. Payment will not be made for material and equipment without documentation of payment. C. Contractors can be paid for non-perishable materials on hand stored at the site, provided that invoices are furnished to the City for verification of the material value, and that Contractor provides documents, satisfactory to the City,that show that the material supplier has been paid for the materials delivered to the work site. D. Provide evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner's interest. E. The Work covered by progress payments becomes the property of the Owner at the time of payment. The Contractor's obligations with regard to proper care and maintenance, insurance, and other requirements are not changed by this transfer of ownership until accepted in accordance with the General Conditions. F. Payment for materials and equipment does not constitute acceptance of the product. 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs A. Retainage will be withheld from each Application for Payment per the Agreement. Retainage will be released per the General Conditions. B. Reduce payments for set-offs per the General Conditions. Include the appropriate attachment to the Application for Payment. 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment A. Submit a draft Application for Payment to the OAR each month at least 20 days before the date established in the Contract for Owner to make progress payments. Do not submit Applications for Payment more often than monthly. Review the draft Application for Payment with the OAR to determine concurrence with: 1. The earned value for each lump sum item including the value of properly stored and documented materials and equipment for each item in the original Contract. 2. The quantity of Work completed for each unit price item. 3. Set-offs included in the Application for Payment. 4. Values requested for materials and equipment consistent with invoices for materials and equipment. B. Submit Applications for Payment monthly through the OAR after agreement has been reached on the draft Application for Payment. 1. Number each application sequentially and include the dates for the application period. 2. Show the total amounts for earned value of original Contract performed, earned value for Work on approved Contract Amendments and Change Orders, retainage, and set- offs. Show total amounts that correspond to totals indicated on the attached tabulation for each. General Conditions 007200-74 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 3. Include Attachment A to show the earned value on each line item in the Schedule of Values for Work shown in the original Contract. 4. Include Attachment B to show the earned value on line items for approved Change Orders. Add items to Attachment B as Change Orders are approved. Change Orders must be approved before payment can be made on Change Order items. 5. Include Attachment C to document set-offs required per the Contract Documents. Show each set-off as it is applied. Show a corresponding line item to reduce the set-off amount if a payment held by a set-off is released for payment. 6. Include Attachment D to allow tracking of invoices used to support amounts requested as materials in Attachments A and B. Enter materials to show the amount of the invoice assigned to each item in Attachment A or B if an invoice includes materials used on several line items. 7. Complete the certification stating that all Work, including materials and equipment, covered by this Application for Payment have been completed or delivered and stored in accordance with the Contract Documents,that all amounts have been paid for Work, materials, and equipment for which previous payments have been made by the Owner, and that the current payment amount shown in this Application for Payment is now due. C. Submit attachments in Portable Document Format(PDF): 1. Generate attachments to the Application for Payment using the Excel spreadsheet provided. 2. Submit PDF documents with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative A. OAR will review draft Application for Payment with Contractor to reach an agreement on the values that will be recommended for payment by the OAR. B. OAR will review Application for Payment submitted by Contractor to determine that the Application for Payment has been properly submitted and is in accordance with the agreed to draft Application for Payment. C. OAR is to either recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending payment. Contractor may make necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment if it is not recommended within 10 days after receipt of the notice. OAR will review resubmitted Application for Payment and reject or recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner as appropriate. D. OAR's recommendation of the Application for Payment constitutes a representation by OPT that based on their experience and the information available: 1. The Work has progressed to the point indicated; 2. The quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents; and 3. Requirements prerequisite to payment have been met. General Conditions 007200-75 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 E. This representation is subject to: 1. Further evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole; 2. The results of subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents; or 3. Any other qualifications stated in the recommendation. F. OPT does not represent by recommending payment: 1. Inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work; or 2. Other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to additional compensation or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor may or may not exist. G. Neither OPT's review of Contractor's Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor OAR's recommendation of payment imposes responsibility on OPT: 1. To supervise, direct, or control the Work; 2. For the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or safety precautions and programs; 3. For Contractor's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor's performance of the Work; 4. To make examinations to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the Contract Price; or 5. To determine that title to the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of Liens. 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to the Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract is to pass to Owner free and clear of Liens, title defects, and patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations no later than 7 days after the time of payment by Owner of the Application for Payment which includes these items. 17.11 Substantial Completion A. Notify OAR when Contractor considers the entire Work substantially complete and request a Certificate of Substantial Completion. B. OPT is to inspect the Work within 30 days after Contractor's notification to determine if the Work is substantially complete. OAR, within 120 days after receipt of Contractor's notification, is to either issue the Certificate of Substantial Completion which sets the date of Substantial Completion or notify Contractor of the reasons the Project is not considered to be substantially complete. General Conditions 007200-76 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 C. The OPT and Contractor are to meet to discuss Owner's use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion. Items to be discussed at this meeting include: 1. Review of insurance policies with respect to the end of the Contractor's coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner; 2. Owner's assumption of responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, maintenance, and utilities upon Owner's use or occupancy of the Work; 3. Contractor's obligations for operations and maintenance during performance and acceptance testing; 4. Contractor's access to the Site to complete punch list items; and 5. Procedures for correction of Defective Work during the 1-year correction period. 17.12 Partial Utilization A. Owner may use or occupy substantially completed parts of the Work which are specifically identified in the Contract Documents, or which OPT and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of the Work. Owner must be able to use that part of the Work for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work. Contractor and OPT are to follow the procedures of Paragraph 17.11 for this part of the Work. B. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Article 6. 17.13 Final Inspection A. OPT is to make a final inspection upon notice from Contractor that the entire Work or portion to be accepted is complete. OAR is to notify Contractor of Work determined to be incomplete or Defective. Immediately take corrective measures to complete the Work and correct Defective Work. 17.14 Final Application for Payment A. Include adjustments to the Contract Price in the final Application for Payment for: 1. Approved Change Orders and Contract Amendments, 2. Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order, 3. Deductions for Defective Work that has been accepted by the Owner, 4. Penalties and bonuses, 5. Deductions for liquidated damages, 6. Deduction for all final set-offs, and 7. Other adjustments if needed. B. OAR will prepare a final Change Order reflecting the approved adjustments to the Contract Price which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders and if necessary reconcile estimate unit price quantities with actual quantities. General Conditions 007200-77 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 17.15 Final Payment A. Make final Application for Payment after completing required corrections identified during the final inspection and delivering items and documents required by the Contract Documents. Provide the following with the final Application for Payment: 1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment acknowledging unsettled disputes; and 2. Certification of Payment of Debts and Claims or Certification of Release of Liens or furnish receipts or releases in full from Subcontractors and Suppliers. B. OAR is to either recommend payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner if OPT is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending final payment. C. The Work is complete, subject to surviving obligations, when it is ready for final payment as established by the OAR's recommendation of payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner and the issuance of a Certificate of Final Completion. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of final payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.16 Waiver of Claims A. The making of final payment does not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from: 1. Unsettled Liens or claims for non-payment; 2. Defective Work appearing after final inspection; 3. Contractor's failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of specified special guarantees; or 4. Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents. B. Contractor waives claims and rights against Owner by accepting final payment with the exception of those Claims made in accordance with the provisions of Article 22 and specifically noted in the Certificate of Final Completion. 17.17 Correction Period A. Promptly correct Defective Work without cost to Owner for 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion or, in the event of a latent defect, within 1 year after discovery thereof by City. B. Promptly correct damages to the Site or adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or other agreements. Promptly correct damages to Work or the work of others. Make corrections without cost to Owner. C. Owner may have the Defective Work and damages described in Paragraphs 17.17.A and 17.17.13 corrected if Contractor does not comply with the terms of OAR's instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage. General Conditions 007200-78 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 D. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to the correction of Defective Work are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. E. The correction period starts to run from the date when a specific item of equipment or system is placed in continuous beneficial use by Owner before Substantial Completion of Work if so provided in the Specifications or if accepted for beneficial use by the Owner. F. Contractor's obligations under this Paragraph 17.17 are in addition to other obligations or warranties. The provisions of this Paragraph 17.17 are not a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of applicable statutes of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 18—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. Owner may suspend the Work or a portion of the Work for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days, at any time and without cause, by notice to Contractor. This notice fixes the date on which Contractor is to resume Work. Contractor is entitled to adjustments in the Contract Price and Contract Times directly attributable to this suspension only if efforts are made to mitigate the cost impacts of the suspension. Meet with the Owner within 10 days of the notice of suspension to discuss specific strategies to reduce or eliminate the cost of delays. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of one or more of the following events constitutes a default by Contractor and justifies termination for cause: 1. Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; 2. Failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule; 3. Failure of the Contractor to provide a satisfactory replacement Bond or insurance in the event either is lost or canceled; 4. Failure of Contractor to maintain financial solvency to adequately complete the Project as indicated by one or more of the following: a. A petition of bankruptcy is filed by or against Contractor, b. Contractor is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent, c. Contractor or surety makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, d. A receiver is appointed for the benefit of Contractor's creditors, or e. A receiver is appointed on account of Contractor's insolvency; 5. Contractor's disregard of Laws or Regulations of public bodies having jurisdiction; 6. Contractor's repeated disregard of the authority of OPT; 7. Contractor's failure to prosecute the work with diligence; or General Conditions 007200-79 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 8. Contractor's other material breach of the contract. B. Contractor and surety must provide adequate assurance of future performance in accordance with the Contract Documents that is satisfactory to Owner if Contractor is believed to be in financial distress due to the existence of one or more of the indicators listed in Paragraph 18.02.A.4. Owner may terminate Contractor's performance under this Contract if Contractor and surety fail to provide adequate documentation satisfactory to Owner within 10 days of OAR's request for this information. C. Owner may declare Contractor to be in default, give notice to Contractor and surety that Contractor's performance under the Contract is terminated, and enforce the rights available to Owner under the Performance Bond after giving Contractor and surety 10 days' notice that one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 18.02.A has occurred. D. Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate the materials and equipment stored and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient if Owner has terminated Contractor's performance under the Contract for cause. E. Owner may elect not to proceed with termination of Contractor's performance under the Contract under this Paragraph 18.02 if Contractor begins to cure the cause for termination within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate. F. Contractor is not entitled to receive further payments until the Work is completed if Owner proceeds as provided in this Paragraph 18.02. The amount of the Contract Price remaining is to be paid to the Contractor if the unpaid balance exceeds the cost to complete the Work. The cost to complete the Work may include related claims, costs, losses, damages, and the fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals retained by Owner. Pay the difference to Owner if the cost to complete the Work including related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract Price. Owner is not required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed when exercising its rights or remedies under this paragraph. G. Termination of Contractor's performance does not affect the rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or against surety under the Payment Bond or Performance Bond. Owner does not release Contractor from liability by paying or retaining money due Contractor. H. In the event the Owner terminates the contract for cause, and it is later determined that cause for termination was lacking, the termination will be deemed a termination without cause under Paragraph 18.03. 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Owner may terminate the Contract without cause after giving 7 days' notice to Contractor of the effective date of termination. Contractor is to be paid for the following if Owner terminates for convenience: 1. Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination; 2. Actual costs sustained prior to the effective date of termination for Work in progress, plus a fee calculated in accordance with Paragraph 15.05; and 3. Reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. General Conditions 007200-80 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 B. No payment is payable to Contractor for loss of anticipated overhead, profits or revenue, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from this termination. ARTICLE 19— PROJECT MANAGEMENT 19.01 Work Included A. Furnish resources required to complete the Project with an acceptable standard of quality within the Contract Times. B. Construct Project in accordance with current safety practices. C. Manage Site to allow access to Site and control construction operations. D. Construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. E. Provide temporary controls for pollutions, management of water and management of excess earth. 19.02 Quality Assurance A. Employ competent workmen,skilled in the occupation for which they are employed. Provide Work meeting quality requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Remove Defective Work from the Site immediately unless provisions have been made and approved by the OPT to allow repair of the product at the Site. Clearly mark Work as Defective until it is removed or allowable repairs have been completed. 19.03 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. 1. Provide copies of Supplier's printed storage instructions prior to furnishing materials or products and installation instructions prior to beginning the installation. 2. Incorporate field notes,sketches,recordings,and computations made by the Contractor in Record Data. 19.04 Required Permits A. Obtain building permits for the Project from the local authorities having jurisdiction. Pay building permit fees and include this cost in the Contract Price. B. Obtain environmental permits required for construction at the Site. C. Provide required permits for transporting heavy or oversized loads. D. Provide other permits required to conduct any part of the Work. E. Arrange for inspections and certification by agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. F. Make arrangements with private utility companies and pay for fees associated with obtaining services, or for inspection fees. G. Retain copies of permits and licenses at the Site and observe and comply with all regulations and conditions of the permit or license. General Conditions 007200-81 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 19.05 Safety Requirements A. Manage safety to protect the safety and welfare of persons at the Site. B. Provide safe access to move through the Site. Provide protective devices to warn and protect from hazards at the Site. C. Provide safe access for those performing tests and inspections. D. Comply with latest provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Administration and other Laws and Regulation. E. Cooperate with accident investigations. Provide two copies of all reports,including insurance company reports, prepared concerning accidents, injury, or death related to the Project to the OAR as Record Data per Article 26. 19.06 Access to the Site A. Maintain access to the facilities at all times. Do not obstruct roads, pedestrian walks, or access to the various buildings, structures, stairways, or entrances. Provide safe access for normal operations during construction. B. Provide adequate and safe access for inspections. Leave ladders, bridges, scaffolding, and protective equipment in place until inspections have been completed. Construct additional safe access if required for inspections. C. Use roadways for construction traffic only with written approval of the appropriate representatives of each entity. Obtain written approval to use roads to deliver heavy or oversized loads to the Site. Furnish copies of the written approvals to the Owner as Record Data per Article 26. 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site A. Limit the use of Site for Work and storage to those areas designated on the Drawings or approved by the OAR. Coordinate the use of the premises with the OAR. B. Provide security at the Site as necessary to protect against vandalism and loss by theft. C. Do not permit alcoholic beverages or illegal substances on the Site. Do not allow persons under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances to enter or remain on the Site at any time. Persons on Site under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances will be permanently prohibited from returning to the Site. Criminal or civil penalties may also apply. D. Park construction equipment in designated areas only and provide spill control measures. E. Park employees'vehicles in designated areas only. F. Obtain written permission of the Owner before entering privately-owned land outside of the Owner's property, rights-of-way, or easements. G. Do not allow the use of audio devices, obnoxious, vulgar or abusive language, or sexual harassment in any form. These actions will cause immediate and permanent removal of the offender from the premises. Criminal or civil penalties may apply. General Conditions 007200-82 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 H. Require Workers to wear clothing that is inoffensive and meets safety requirements. Do not allow sleeveless shirts, shorts, exceedingly torn, ripped, or soiled clothing to be worn on the Project. I. Do not allow firearms or weapons of any sort to be brought on to the Site under any conditions. No exception is to be made for persons with concealed handgun permits. Remove any firearms or weapons and the person possessing these firearms or weapons immediately from the Site. 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities A. Examine the Site and review the available information concerning the Site. Locate utilities, streets, driveways, fences, drainage structures, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. Verify the elevations of the structures adjacent to excavations. Report any discrepancies from information in the Contract Documents to the OAR before beginning construction. B. Determine if existing structures, poles, piping, or other utilities at excavations will require relocation or replacement. Prepare a Plan of Action and coordinate Work with local utility companies and others for the relocation or replacement. C. Protect buildings, utilities, street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, wells, drainage structures, piping, valves, manholes, electrical conduits, and other systems or structures unless they are shown to be replaced or relocated on the Drawings. Restore damaged items to the satisfaction of the OPT and utility owner. D. Carefully support and protect all structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure or settlement where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and utilities. Do not take existing utilities out of service unless required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. Notify and cooperate with the utility owner if it is necessary to move services, poles, guy wires, pipelines, or other obstructions. E. Protect existing trees and landscaping at the Site. 1. Identify trees that may be removed during construction with OPT. 2. Mark trees to be removed with paint. 3. Protect trees to remain from damage by wrapping trunks with 2 x 4 timbers around the perimeter, securely wired in place, where machinery must operate around existing trees. Protect branches and limbs from damage by equipment. 4. Protect root zone from compaction. 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations A. Excavate and expose existing pipelines that cross within 20 feet of Project pipelines prior to any Work. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point the existing pipeline may potentially conflict with the Work. B. Excavate and expose existing parallel pipelines at 300 feet intervals (maximum) for existing pipelines which are within 10 feet of Project pipelines. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point where the line is excavated and exposed. General Conditions 007200-83 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 C. Prepare a Plan of Action indicating the owner of pipelines excavated and surveyed and all pertinent survey data, including the station where lines cross or conflicts may exist and the distance to the pavement centerline and elevations of the top of existing pipelines. D. Do not perform Work on the Project until all exploratory excavations have been completed and the Plan of Action has been approved by the OAR. E. Unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Bid Form, no separate payment will be made for pre-construction exploratory excavations. Include the cost for pre-construction exploratory excavations in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. When necessary, pavement repairs associated with exploratory excavations that are beyond the limits of the new pavement will be paid for at the unit prices for pavement repair when an item is included in the Bid Form. When an item for pavement repair is not included in the Bid Form, the cost should be included in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations A. Existing facilities are to continue in service as usual during the construction unless noted otherwise. Owner of utilities must be able to operate and maintain the facilities. Keep disruptions to existing utilities, piping, process piping, or electrical services to a minimum. 1. Do not restrict access to critical valves or operators. 2. Limit operations to the minimum amount of space needed to complete the specified Work. 3. Maintain storm sewers and sanitary sewers in service at all times. Provide temporary service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that the flow is not restricted. B. Provide a Plan of Action if facilities must be taken out of operation. 19.11 Field Measurements A. Perform complete field measurements prior to purchasing products or beginning construction for products required to fit existing conditions. B. Verify property lines, control lines, grades, and levels indicated on the Drawings. C. Check Shop Drawings and indicate the actual dimensions available where products are to be installed. D. Include field measurements in Record Data as required in Article 26. 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points A. The OPT will provide the following control points: 1. Base line or grid reference points for horizontal control. 2. Benchmarks for vertical control. B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting the Work and preserve permanent reference points during construction. Designated control points may be on an existing structure or monument. Do not change or relocate points without prior approval of the OAR. General Conditions 007200-84 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 Notify OAR when the reference point is lost, destroyed, or requires relocation. Replace Project control points on the basis of the original survey. C. Provide complete engineering layout of the Work needed for construction. 1. Provide competent personnel. Provide equipment including accurate surveying instruments, stakes, platforms,tools, and materials. 2. Provide surveying with accuracy meeting the requirements established for Category 5 Construction Surveying as established in the Manual of Practice of Land Surveying in Texas published by the Texas Society of Professional Surveyors, latest revision. 3. Record Data and measurements per standards. 19.13 Delivery and Storage A. Deliver products and materials to the Site in time to prevent delays in construction. B. Deliver packaged products to Site in original undamaged containers with identifying labels attached. Open cartons as necessary to check for damage and to verify invoices. Reseal cartons and store properly until used. Leave products in packages or other containers until installed. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the Site. D. Store products at locations acceptable to the OAR and to allow Owner access to maintain and operate existing facilities. E. Store products in accordance with the Supplier's storage instructions immediately upon delivery. Leave seals and labels intact. F. Provide additional storage areas as needed for construction. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weather-tight enclosures or storage sheds. Provide and maintain storage sheds as required for the protection of products. Provide temperature, humidity control, and ventilation within the ranges stated in the Supplier's instructions. Remove storage facilities at the completion of the Project. G. Protect the pipe interior. Keep all foreign materials such as dirt, debris, animals, or other objects out of the pipe during the Work. Cap or plug ends of installed pipe in an approved manner when pipe is not being installed. Clean or wash out pipe sections that become contaminated before continuing with installation. Take precautions to prevent the pipe from floating or moving out of the proper position during or after laying operations. Immediately correct any pipe that moves from its correct position. H. Provide adequate exterior storage for products that may be stored out-of-doors. 1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids to support materials and products above ground which has been sloped to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling or staining. 2. Cover products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, with impervious sheet materials. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation below covering. 3. Store loose, granular materials on clean, solid surfaces, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. General Conditions 007200-85 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids with stored materials. 6. Pipes and conduits stored outdoors are to have open ends sealed to prevent the entrance of dirt, moisture, and other injurious materials. Protect PVC pipe from ultraviolet light exposure. 7. Store light weight products to prevent wind damage. I. Maintain storage facilities. Inspect stored products on a weekly basis and after periods of severe weather to verify that: 1. Storage facilities continue to meet specified requirements; 2. Supplier's required environmental conditions are continually maintained; and 3. Products that can be damaged by exposure to the elements are not adversely affected. J. Replace any stored item damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls. K. Payment may be withheld for any products not properly stored. 19.14 Cleaning During Construction A. Provide positive methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from disbursing into the atmosphere. Control dust and dirt from demolition, cutting, and patching operations. B. Clean the Project as Work progresses and dispose of waste materials, keeping the Site free from accumulations of waste or rubbish. Provide containers on Site for waste collection. Do not allow waste materials or debris to blow around or off of the Site. Control dust from waste materials. Transport waste materials with as few handlings as possible. C. Comply with Laws and Regulations. Do not burn or bury waste materials. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from the Site and legally dispose of these at public or private disposal facilities. D. Provide a final cleaning to thoroughly clean the entire Site and make ready for acceptance. 1. Remove construction debris, boxes, and trash from the Site. 2. Remove construction storage sheds and field offices. 3. Restore grade to match surrounding condition and remove excess dirt. 4. Sweep all drives and parking lots clean of dirt and debris. Use water trucks or hose down paved site to like new appearance. 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access A. Maintain roads and streets in a manner that is suitable for safe operations of public vehicles during all phases of construction unless the Owner approves a street closing. Do not close public roads overnight. B. Submit a Notification by Contractor for Owner's approval of a street closing. The request shall state: General Conditions 007200-86 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 1. The reason for closing the street. 2. How long the street will remain closed. 3. Procedures to be taken to maintain the flow of traffic. C. Construct temporary detours, including by-pass roads around construction,with adequately clear width to maintain the free flow of traffic at all times. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the detour and excavations. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the Work in accordance with all provisions of the latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). D. Assume responsibility for any damage resulting from construction along roads or drives. 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control A. Provide traffic control measures to assure a safe condition and to provide a minimum of inconvenience to motorists and the public. Provide all-weather access to all residents and businesses at all times during construction. Provide temporary driveways and/or roads of approved material during wet weather. Maintain a stockpile of suitable material on the Site to meet the demands of inclement weather. B. Schedule operations to minimize adverse impact on the accessibility of adjoining properties. Sequence construction to build driveways in half widths, construct temporary ramps, or any other measure required to maintain access to adjoining properties. C. Comply with the Owner's Uniform Barricading Standards and Practices. Copies of this document are available through the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. Secure required permits from the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires A. Comply with OSHA safety requirements regarding construction equipment working beneath overhead electrical wires. Prevent and pay for repairs for damage to existing overhead electrical wires or facilities. B. Provide for adequate safety with regard to overhead lines whether overhead lines are or are not shown in the Contract Documents. 19.18 Blasting A. Blasting is not allowed for any purpose. 19.19 Archeological Requirements A. Cease operations immediately and contact the Owner for instructions if historical or archaeological artifacts are found during construction. B. Conduct all construction activities to avoid adverse impact on the Sites where significant historical or archaeological artifacts are found or identified as an area where other artifacts could be found. 1. Obtain details for Working in these areas. 2. Maintain confidentiality regarding the Site. General Conditions 007200-87 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 3. Adhere to the requirements of the Texas Historical Commission. 4. Notify the OAR and the Texas Historical Commission. C. Do not disturb archaeological sites. 1. Obtain the services of a qualified archaeological specialist to instruct construction personnel on how to identify and protect archaeological finds on an emergency basis. 2. Coordinate activities to permit archaeological work to take place within the area. a. Attempt to archaeologically clear areas needed for construction as soon as possible. b. Provide a determination of priority for such areas. D. Assume responsibility for any unauthorized destruction that might result to such Sites by construction personnel, and pay all penalties assessed by the State or Federal agencies for non-compliance with these requirements. E. Contract Times will be modified to compensate for delays caused by such archaeological finds. No additional compensation will be paid for delays. 19.20 Endangered Species Resources A. Do not perform any activity that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened or endangered species as listed or proposed for listing under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA), and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. B. Cease Work immediately in the area of the encounter and notify the OAR if a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction. OPT will implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable State statutes. Resume construction in the area of the encounter when authorized to do so by the OAR. 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies A. Cooperate with all public and private agencies with facilities operating within the limits of the Project. B. Provide a 48-hour notice to any applicable agency when work is anticipated to proceed in the vicinity of any facility by using Texas 811 at 811 and the Lone Star Notification Company at 1-800-669-8344. ARTICLE 20—PROJECT COORDINATION 20.01 Work Included A. Administer Contract requirements to construct the Project. Provide documentation per the requirements of this Section. Provide information as requested by the OPT. 20.02 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 007200-88 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 B. Use the forms provided for Contract administration, applications for payment, document submittals, documentation of test results, equipment installation and documentation, and Project closeout. A digital copy of the required forms will be provided to the Contractor before or at the pre-construction conference. 20.03 Communication During Project A. The OAR is to be the first point of contact for all parties on matters concerning this Project. B. The OAR will coordinate correspondence concerning: 1. Documents, including Applications for Payment. 2. Clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Modifications. 4. Observation of Work and testing. 5. Claims. C. The OAR will normally communicate only with the Contractor. Any required communication with Subcontractors or Suppliers will only be with the direct involvement of the Contractor. D. Direct written communications to the OAR at the address indicated at the pre-construction conference. Include the following with communications as a minimum: 1. Name of the Owner. 2. Project name. 3. Contract title. 4. Project number. 5. Date. 6. A reference statement. 20.04 Project Meetings A. Pre-Construction Conference: 1. Attend a pre-construction conference. 2. The location of the conference will be determined by the OAR. 3. The time of the meeting will be determined by the OAR but will be after the Notice of Award is issued and not later than 15 days after the Notice to Proceed is issued. 4. The OPT, Contractor's project manager and superintendent, representatives of utility companies, and representatives from major Subcontractors and Suppliers may attend the conference. 5. Provide and be prepared to discuss: a. Preliminary construction schedule per Article 27. b. Schedule of Values and anticipated Schedule of Payments per Article 17. C. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers. General Conditions 007200-89 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 d. Contractor's organizational chart as it relates to this Project. e. Letter indicating the agents of authority for the Contractor and the limit of that authority with respect to the execution of legal documents,Contract Modifications, and payment requests. B. Progress Meetings: 1. Attend meetings with the OAR and Owner. a. Meet on a monthly basis or as requested by the OAR to discuss the Project. b. Meet at the Site or other location as designated by the OAR. c. Contractor's superintendent and other key personnel are to attend the meeting. Other individuals may be requested to attend to discuss specific matters. d. Notify the OAR of any specific items to be discussed a minimum of 1 week prior to the meeting. 2. Provide information as requested by the OAR or Owner concerning this Project. Prepare to discuss: a. Status of overall Project schedule. b. Contractor's detailed schedule for the next month. c. Anticipated delivery dates for equipment. d. Coordination with the Owner. e. Status of documents. f. Information or clarification of the Contract Documents. g. Claims and proposed Modifications to the Contract. h. Field observations, problems, or conflicts. i. Maintenance of quality standards. 3. OAR will prepare minutes of meetings. Review the minutes of the meeting and notify the OAR of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in the minutes of the following meeting or as an attachment to the minutes. C. Pre-Submittal and Pre-Installation Meetings: 1. Conduct pre-submittal and pre-installation meetings as required in the individual technical Specifications or as determined necessary by the OAR (for example, instrumentation, roofing, concrete mix design, etc.). 2. Set the time and location of the meetings when ready to proceed with the associated Work. Submit a Notification by Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 20.07 for the meeting 2 weeks before the meeting. OPT must approve of the proposed time and location. 3. Attend the meeting and require the participation of appropriate Subcontractors and Suppliers in the meeting. General Conditions 007200-90 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 4. Prepare minutes of the meeting and submit to the OPT for review. OPT will review the minutes of the meeting and notify the Contractor of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in a revised set of meeting minutes. 20.05 Requests for Information A. Submit Request for Information (RFI) to the OAR to obtain additional information or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1. Submit a separate RFI for each item on the form provided. 2. Attach adequate information to permit a written response without further clarification. OAR will return requests that do not have adequate information to the Contractor for additional information. Contractor is responsible for all delays resulting from multiple document submittals due to inadequate information. 3. A response will be made when adequate information is provided. Response will be made on the RFI form or in attached information. B. Response to an RFI is given to provide additional information, interpretation, or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and does not modify the Contract Documents. C. Designer will initiate a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP) per Article 12 if the RFI indicates that a Contract Modification is required. D. Use the Project Issues Log to document decisions made at meetings and actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. E. Use the Action Item Log to document assignments for actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log A. OAR will maintain a Project Decision Log to document key decisions made at meetings, telephone conversation or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report any discrepancies to the OAR for correction or discussion at the next monthly meeting. B. OAR will maintain an Action Item log in conjunction with the Project Decision Log to track assignments made at meetings, telephone conversation, or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the Action Item Log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report actions taken subsequent to the previous progress meeting on items in the log assigned to the Contractor or through the Contractor to a Subcontractor or Supplier to the OAR. Report on status of progress 1 week prior to each progress meeting established in Paragraph 20.04 to allow OAR to update the log prior to the Progress meetings. 3. Be prepared to discuss the status at each meeting. General Conditions 007200-91 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 C. Decisions or action items in the log that require a change in the Contract Documents will have the preparation of a Modification as an action item if appropriate. The Contract Documents can only be changed by a Modification. 20.07 Notification By Contractor A. Notify the OAR of: 1. Need for testing. 2. Intent to work outside regular working hours. 3. Request to shut down facilities or utilities. 4. Proposed utility connections. 5. Required observation by OAR, Designer, or inspection agencies prior to covering Work. 6. Training. B. Provide notification a minimum of 2 weeks in advance in order to allow OPT time to respond appropriately to the notification. C. Use "Notification by Contractor" form provided. 20.08 Record Documents A. Maintain at the Site one complete set of printed Record Documents including: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Modifications. 5. Record Data and approved Shop Drawings. 6. Construction photographs. 7. Test Reports. 8. Clarifications and other information provided in Request for Information responses. 9. Reference standards. B. Store printed Record Documents and Samples in the Contractor's field office. 1. Record Documents are to remain separate from documents used for construction. 2. Provide files and racks for the storage of Record Documents. 3. Provide a secure storage space for the storage of Samples. 4. Maintain Record Documents in clean, dry, legible conditions, and in good order. 5. Make Record Documents and Samples available at all times for inspection by the OPT. C. Maintain a digital record of Specifications and Addenda to identify products provided in PDF format. General Conditions 007200-92 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number,and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. D. Maintain a digital record of Drawings in PDF format. 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number,and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. 3. Record information as construction is being performed. Do not conceal any Work until the required information is recorded. 4. Mark Drawings to record actual construction, including the following: a. Depths of various elements of the foundation in relation to finished first floor datum or the top of walls. b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances constructed and existing utilities encountered during construction. C. Location of utilities and appurtenances concealed in the Work. Refer measurements to permanent structures on the surface. Include the following equipment: 1) Piping. 2) Ductwork. 3) Equipment and control devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 4) Valves, unions,traps, and tanks. 5) Services entrance. 6) Feeders. 7) Outlets. d. Changes of dimension and detail. e. Changes by Modifications. f. Information in Request for Information or included in the Project Issues Log. g. Details not on the original Drawings. Include field verified dimensions and clarifications, interpretations, and additional information issued in response to RFIs. 5. Mark Drawings with the following colors: a. Highlight references to other documents, including Modifications in blue; b. Highlight mark ups for new or revised Work(lines added) in yellow; C. Highlight items deleted or not installed (lines to be removed) in red; and d. Highlight items constructed per the Contract Documents in green. General Conditions 007200-93 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 6. Submit Record Documents to Designer for review and acceptance 30 days prior to Final Completion of the Project. E. Applications for Payment will not be recommended for payment if Record Documents are found to be incomplete or not in order. Final payment will not be recommended without complete Record Documents. ARTICLE 21—QUALITY MANAGEMENT 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review the OPT's Quality Management Program and prepare and submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. B. Implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan to control the quality of the Work and verify that the Work meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. Inspect products to be incorporated into the Project. Ensure that Suppliers have adequate quality control systems to ensure that products that comply with the Contract Documents are provided. 2. Integrate quality control measures into construction activities to produce Work which meets quality expectations of the Contract Documents. Inspect the Work of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers. Correct Defective Work. 3. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory acceptable to the OPT to provide testing that demonstrates that products proposed in Shop Drawings and Record Data for the Project fully comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Provide facilities, equipment, and Samples required for quality control inspections and tests: a. Give the OAR adequate notice before proceeding with Work that would interfere with inspections or testing; b. Notify the OAR and testing laboratories prior to the time that testing is required, providing adequate lead time to allow arrangements for inspections or testing to be made; C. Do not proceed with any Work that would impact the ability to correct defects or Work that would require subsequent removal to correct defects until testing services have been performed and results of tests indicate that the Work is acceptable; d. Cooperate fully with the performance of sampling, inspection, and testing; e. Provide personnel to assist with sampling or to assist in making inspections and field tests; f. Obtain and handle Samples for testing at the Site or at the production source of the product to be tested; g. Provide adequate quantities of representative products to be tested to the laboratory at the designated locations; General Conditions 007200-94 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 h. Provide facilities required to store and cure test Samples; i. Provide calibrated scales and measuring devices for the OPT's use in performing inspections and testing; j. Provide adequate lighting to allow OPT observations; and k. Make Contract Documents available to testing agencies when requested. 5. Provide safe access for all inspection and testing activities, including those to be conducted as part of the OPT's Quality Management Program. 6. Document Defective Work through Certified Test Reports and Defective Work Notices. Document that corrective actions have been taken to correct any defects and that corrected Work is in compliance with the Contract Documents. 7. Apply quality control measures to documentation provided for the Project. 8. Implement countermeasures to prevent future Defective Work. C. Perform tests as indicated in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Technical Specifications govern if any testing and inspection requirements of this Section conflict with the testing and inspection requirements of the technical Specifications. D. All verification testing is to be observed by the OAR or designated representative. E. Send test reports to the OAR and the Designer. F. Provide an update on quality control activities at monthly progress meetings. G. Owner will withhold payment for Defective Work, or Work that has not been tested or inspected in accordance with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan,the OPT's Quality Control Program, or the Contract Documents. H. Owner will withhold payment for additional testing fees incurred due to Contractor noncompliance with OPT's Quality Control Program, including retesting fees, standby time, cancellation charges, and trip fees for retesting or cancellations. I. Work performed that is connected or adjacent to Defective Work or Work that would have to be removed to correct Defective Work is also considered to be Defective. Contractor is responsible for all cost with replacing any acceptable Work that must be removed or might be damaged by corrective actions. 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT A. OPT will perform its own quality assurance tests independent of the Contractor's Quality Control Program. Assist the OPT and testing organizations in performing quality assurance activities per Paragraph 21.01. B. Quality assurance testing performed by the OPT will be paid for by the Owner, except for verification testing required per Paragraph 21.07. C. Quality assurance activities of the OPT, through their own forces or through contracts with consultants and materials testing laboratories are for the purpose of monitoring the results of the Contractor's Work to see that it is in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Quality assurance activities or non-performance of quality assurance activities by the OPT do not: General Conditions 007200-95 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 1. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to provide Work or furnish products that conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 3. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for damage to or loss of Work or products before OPT's acceptance; 4. Constitute or imply OPT's acceptance; and 5. Affect the continuing rights of the Owner after OPT's acceptance of the completed Work. D. Work is subject to OPT's quality assurance observations or testing at any time. Products which have been tested or inspected and approved by OPT at a supply source or staging area may be inspected or tested again by the OPT before, during or after incorporation into the Work and rejected if products do not comply with the Contract Documents. 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports A. OPT has prepared a Quality Management Plan that describes, in general, the OPT's anticipated quality assurance testing program for this Project. This testing program will be made available to Bidders during the bidding phase. This plan outlines only the testing in general terms and may not reflect actual testing. Actual testing will depend on the Contractors means, methods and procedures of construction which will not be known until the Contractor begins Work and submits their own Quality Control Plan for review. There is no guarantee that all testing will be performed. B. Contractor will receive copies of all test reports documenting OPT's quality assurance activities. Contractor is entitled to rely on the accuracy of these test results and use these as part of their quality control efforts. C. Contractor is to determine additional testing or inspections that may be required to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Include cost for additional testing and inspections required to meet Contractors quality control obligations, including the cost for correcting Defective Work in the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal if OPT's quality assurance testing program deviates significantly from the OPT's Quality Management Plan, and Contractor can demonstrate that additional cost was incurred to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan resulting from these deviations. 21.04 Documentation A. Provide documentation which includes: 1. Contractor's Quality Management Plan that establishes the methods of assuring compliance with the Contract Documents. Submit this plan as a Shop Drawings per Article 25. 2. A Statement of Qualification for any proposed testing laboratories that includes a list of the engineers and technical staff that will provide testing services on the Project, descriptions of the qualifications of these individuals, list of tests that can be performed, General Conditions 007200-96 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 equipment used with date of last certification, and a list of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references for those projects. 3. Provide Certified Test Reports for products to be incorporated into the Project. Provide reports to indicate that proposed products comply with the Contract Documents or indicate that proposed products do not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports as part of a Shop Drawings submitted per Article 25. 4. Provide Certified Test Reports for inspection and testing required in this Section and in other Specification Sections. Provide reports to indicate that Work complies with the Contract Documents or indicate that Work does not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports on forms provided per Article 24. 21.05 Standards A. Provide testing laboratories that comply with the American Council of Independent Laboratories (ACIL) "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications." B. Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various Sections of the Specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), or other testing associations. Perform tests in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. 21.06 Delivery and Storage A. Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the Site in accordance with recognized test procedures. Provide facilities for storing, curing, and processing test specimens as required by test standard to maintain the integrity of Samples. 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects A. Provide verification testing on Work performed to correct Defective Work to demonstrate that the Work is now in compliance with the Contract Documents. Document that Defective Work has been corrected and verify that the OAR closes the item in the Defective Work Register. B. Pay for verification testing. OPT may perform verification testing as part of their Quality Management Program and impose a Set-off to recover the cost for this testing. C. Conduct the same tests or inspections used to determine that the original Work was Defective. Different tests or methods may be used if approved by the OPT. 21.08 Test Reports A. Certified Test Reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms if acceptable to the OPT. These reports must include the following: a. Name of the Owner, Project title and number and Contractor; General Conditions 007200-97 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 b. Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number; C. Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test; d. Description of the product being sampled or tested; e. Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing; f. Date the report was issued; g. Description of the test performed; h. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling; i. Location at the Site or structure where the sample was taken; j. Standard or test procedure used in making the test; k. A description of the results of the test; I. Statement of compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents; and m. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. 2. Submit reports on tests performed by Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers on the forms provided by the OAR. 3. OPT will prepare test reports on test performed by the OPT. B. Send test report to Designer within 24 hours of completing the test. Flag tests reports with results that do not comply with Contract Documents for immediate attention. C. Payment for Work may be withheld until test reports indicate that the Work is not Defective. 21.09 Defective Work A. Immediately correct any Defective Work or notify the OAR why the Work is not to be corrected immediately and when corrective action will be completed. B. No payment will be made for Defective Work. Remove Work from the Application for Payment if Work paid for on a previous Application for Payment is found to be Defective. 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory A. The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing testing services and interpreting the results of the test performed. B. The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Alter the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Accept or reject any portion of the Work; 3. Perform any of the duties of the Contractor; or 4. Direct or stop the Work. 21.11 Quality Control Plan A. Submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for approval as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. Use Contractor's Quality Control Plan Checklist provided to review the document before General Conditions 007200-98 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 submitting and include a copy of the completed checklist with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Do not begin Work until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved. Submit an interim plan covering only the portion of Work to be performed if the Contractor plans to begin Work prior to submitting the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for the Project. Do not begin Work on other parts of the Project until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved or another interim plan covering the additional Work to be started is approved. B. Provide a Contractor's Quality Control Plan that incorporates construction operations at both the Site and production Work at remote locations and includes Work by Subcontractors and Suppliers. The Contractor's Quality Control Plan is to include: 1. A description of the quality control organization, including an organization chart showing lines of authority to control the quality of Work; 2. Documentation describing name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and level of authority of the Quality Control Manager; 3. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of other persons assigned a quality control function; 4. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing documentation, including documentation provided by Subcontractors and Suppliers; 5. Control,verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test. Include: a. Name of tests to be performed, b. Specification paragraph requiring test, C. Parameters of Work to be tested, d. Test frequency, e. Persons responsible for each test, and f. Applicable industry testing standards and laboratory facilities to be used for the test; 6. Integrate the OPT quality assurance testing into the Contractor's Quality Control Plan, specifically identifying the tests or inspections in Paragraph 21.11.13.5 that will be provided by the OPT as part of their Quality Management Program; 7. Procedures for tracking and documenting quality management efforts. 8. Procedures for tracking Defective Work from initial identification through acceptable corrective action. Indicate how documentation of the verification process for deficiencies will be made. 9. Reporting procedures which incorporate the use of forms provided by the OAR. 10. The name of the proposed testing laboratories along with documentation of qualifications per Paragraph 21.04. C. The Quality Control Manager must have authority to reject Defective Work and redirect the efforts of the Contractor's Team to prevent or correct Defective Work. D. Notify the Designer of any changes to the Contractor's Quality Control Plan or quality control personnel. General Conditions 007200-99 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 E. Meet with the OPT 7 days after Contractor's Quality Control Plan is submitted and before start of construction to discuss the Contractor's Quality Control Plan and expedite its approval. 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan A. Perform quality control observations and testing as required in each Section of the Specifications and where indicated on the Drawings. B. Include the following phases for each definable Work task. A definable Work task is one which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, may be provided by different trades or disciplines, or may be Work by the same trade in a different environment. 1. Planning Phase: Perform the following before beginning each definable Work task: a. Review the Contract Drawings. b. Review documents and determine that they are complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. d. Examine the work area to assure that all required preliminary Work has been completed and complies with the Contract Documents. e. Examine required materials, equipment, and Sample Work to assure that they are on hand, conform to Shop Drawings and Record Data, and are properly stored. f. Review requirements for quality control inspection and testing. g. Discuss procedures for controlling quality of the Work. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for the Work task. h. Check that the portion of the plan for the Work to be performed incorporates document review comments. i. Discuss results of planning phase with the OAR. Conduct a meeting attended by the Quality Control Manager, the OAR, superintendent, other quality control personnel as applicable, and the foreman responsible for the Work task. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate meeting minutes prepared by the Quality Control Manager and attached to the quality control report. j. Do not move to the next phase unless results of investigations required for the planning phase indicate that requirements have been met. 2. Work Phase: Complete this phase after the Planning Phase: a. Notify the OAR at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the Work and discuss the review of the planning effort to indicate that requirements have been met. b. Check the Work to ensure that it is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200-100 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 c. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full compliance with Contract Documents. Verify required control inspection and testing is performed. d. Verify that established levels of workmanship meet acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required Sample panels as appropriate. e. Repeat the Work phase for each new crew to work on-site, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3. Follow-up Phase: Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements: a. Make checks daily and record observations in the quality control documentation. b. Conduct follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional Work tasks that may be affected by the Defective Work. Do not build upon nor conceal Defective Work. c. Conduct a review of the Work with the OPT one month prior to the expiration of the correction period. Correct defects as noted during the review. C. Conduct additional planning and Work phases if: 1. The quality of on-going Work is unacceptable; 2. Changes are made in applicable quality control staff, on-site production supervision or crews; 3. Work on a task is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or 4. Other quality problems develop. ARTICLE 22—FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations A. Each party is required to continue to perform its obligations under the Contract pending the final resolution of any dispute arising out of or relating to the Contract, unless it would be impossible or impracticable under the circumstances then present. B. All negotiations pursuant to Article 22 are confidential and shall be treated as compromise and settlement negotiations for purposes of applicable rules of evidence. C. Before invoking mediation, Owner and Contractor agree that they first shall try to resolve any dispute arising out of or related to this Contract through discussions directly between those senior management representatives within their respective organizations who have overall managerial responsibility for similar projects. Both Owner and Contractor agree that this step shall be a condition precedent to use of any other alternative dispute resolution process. If the parties' senior management representatives cannot resolve the dispute within 45 calendar days after a party delivers a written notice of such dispute to the other, then the parties shall proceed with mediation. 22.02 Mediation A. In the event that Owner and/or Contractor contend that the other has committed a material breach of the Contract or the parties cannot reach a resolution of a claim or dispute pursuant General Conditions 007200-101 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 to Article 13, as a condition precedent to filing a lawsuit,either party shall request mediation of the dispute with the following requirements: 1. The request for mediation shall be in writing and shall request that the mediation commence not less than 30 calendar days or more than 90 calendar days following the date of the request, except upon agreement of the parties. 2. In the event Owner and Contractor are unable to agree to a date for the mediation or to the identity of the mediator within 30 calendar days following the date of the request for mediation, all conditions precedent shall be deemed to have occurred. 3. Owner and Contractor are to each pay one-half of the mediator's fees and costs.Venue for any mediation or lawsuit filed under this Contract shall be in Nueces County,Texas. Any agreement reached in mediation shall be enforceable as a settlement in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4. Nothing in this Contract shall be construed as consent to a lawsuit. No provision of the Contract shall waive any immunity or defense. ARTICLE 23—MINORITY/MBE/DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY 23.01 Policy A. It is the policy of the City of Corpus Christi that maximum opportunity is afforded minorities, women, low income persons and Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (M/DBE) to participate in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Corpus Christi in support of Equal Employment Opportunity goals and objectives. In accordance with such policy,the City has established goals, as stated herein, both for minority and female participation by trade and for Minority Business Enterprise. 23.02 Definitions A. Prime Contractor: Any person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture as herein provided which has been awarded a City contract. B. Subcontractor: Any named person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture herein identified as providing work, labor, services, supplies, equipment, materials, or any combination of the foregoing under contract with a prime contractor on a City contract. C. Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprise: A business enterprise that is owned and controlled by one or more minority person(s) or socially and economically disadvantaged individual(s). Minority/Disadvantaged person(s) must collectively own, operate and/or actively manage, and share in payments from such an enterprise in the manner hereinafter set forth: 1. Owned: a. For a sole proprietorship to be deemed a minority business enterprise, it must be owned by a minority person. b. For an enterprise doing business as a partnership, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the partnership property must be owned by one or more minority person(s). General Conditions 007200-102 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 C. For an enterprise doing business as a corporation, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the corporate shares must be owned by one or more minority person(s). 2. Controlled: a. The primary power, direct or indirect,to manage a business enterprise rests with a minority person(s). 3. Share in Payments: a. Minority partners, proprietors, or stockholders of the business enterprise must be entitled to receive 51 percent or more of the total profits, bonuses, dividends, interest payments, commissions, consulting fees, rents, procurement, and subcontract payments, and any other monetary distribution paid by the business enterprise. D. Minority: Minority persons include Blacks, Mexican-Americans and other persons of Hispanic origin, American Indians, Alaskan Natives, and Asians or Pacific Islanders. For the purposes of this policy, women are also considered as minorities. E. Socially and economically disadvantaged individual:Any individual who is a citizen (or lawfully admitted permanent resident) of the United States and who has been subjected to racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bias within American society because of his or her identity as a member of a group and without regard to his or her individual qualities. The social disadvantage must stem from circumstances beyond the individual's control. F. Female Owned Business Enterprise: A sole proprietorship that is owned and controlled by a woman,a partnership at least 51 percent of whose assets or partnership interests are owned by one or more women, or a corporation at least 51 percent of whose assets or interests in the corporate shares are owned by one or more women. G. Joint Venture: A joint venture means an association of two or more persons, partnerships, corporations, or any combination thereof, founded to carry on a single business activity which is limited in scope and direction. The degree to which a joint venture may satisfy the stated MBE goal cannot exceed the proportionate interest of the MBE as a member of the joint venture in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. For example,a joint venture which is to perform 50 percent of the Work itself and in which a minority joint venture partner has a 50 percent interest, shall be deemed equivalent to having minority participation in 25 percent of the Work. Minority members of the joint venture must have financial, managerial, or technical skills in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. 23.03 Goals A. The goals for participation by minorities and Minority Business Enterprises expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate workforce on all construction Work for the Contract award shall be 1. Minority participation goal is 45%. 2. Minority Business Enterprise participation goal is 15%. B. These goals are applicable to all the construction work (regardless of federal participation) performed in the Contract, including approved Change Orders. The hours of minority General Conditions 007200-103 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 employment must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the Contract and in each trade. The transfer of minority employees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's percentage is prohibited. 23.04 Compliance A. Upon completion of the Project, a final breakdown of MBE participation, substantiated by copies of paid invoices, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the City Engineer. B. Make bi-weekly payroll submittals to the City Engineer. The Contractor is to indicate the percent of minority and female participation, by trade, which has been utilized on the Project. Along with the request for final payment on the Project,the Contractor will indicate, in writing, the overall participation in these areas which have been achieved. The City Engineer may withhold monthly or final payments to the Contractor for failure to submit bi- weekly payrolls in a timely fashion or to submit overall participation information as required. ARTICLE 24—DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 24.01 Work Included A. Submit documentation as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. 24.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Documents not meeting these criteria will be returned without review. 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review documents prior to submitting. Make certifications as required by the Contract Documents and as indicated on forms provided. B. Provide a Schedule of Documents to list the documents that are to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that documents must be returned to comply with the Project schedule. Use the form provided for this list. C. Incorporate the dates for processing documents into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Provide documents in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of documents when preparing the Progress Schedule. Assume a 14 day review cycle for each document unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents or agreed to by Designer and Contractor. 3. Schedule submittal of documents to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for processing documents so construction of the Project is not delayed. General Conditions 007200-104 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 24.04 Document Submittal A. Submit documents through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested with a completed Document Transmittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. 2. The Document Transmittal form is to be the first page in the document submitted. 3. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the document. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 24.05 Document Numbering A. Assign a number to the documents originated to allow tracking of the documents during the review process. 1. Assign the number consisting of a prefix, a sequence number, and a letter suffix. Prefixes shall be as follows: Prefix Description Originator AP Application for Payment Contractor CO Change Order OAR CP Change Proposal Contractor CTR Certified Test Report Contractor FO Field Order OAR NBC Notification by Contractor Contractor PD Photographic Documentation Contractor General Conditions 007200-105 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 Prefix Description Originator RCP Request for a Change Proposal OAR RD Record Data Contractor RFI Request for Information Contractor SD Shop Drawing Contractor SCH Schedule of Progress Contractor 2. Issue sequence numbers in chronological order for each type of document. 3. Issue numbers for resubmittals that have the same number as the original document followed by an alphabetical suffix indicating the number of times the same document has been sent to the Designer for processing. For example: SD 025 A represents Shop Drawing number 25 and the letter "A" designates that this is the second time this document has been sent for review. 4. Clearly note the document number on each page or sheet of the document. 5. Correct assignment of numbers is essential since different document types are processed in different ways. B. Include reference to the Drawing number and/or Specification Section, detail designation, schedule, or location that corresponds with the data on the document transmittal forms. Other identification may also be required, such as layout drawings or schedules to allow the reviewer to determine where a particular product is to be used. 24.06 Document Requirements A. Furnish documents as indicated below or in individual Specification Sections. Submit documents per the procedures described in the Contract Documents. B. Submit documents per the Specification Section shown in the following table: Document Type Section Application for Payment Article 17 Change Proposal Article 12 Certified Test Report Article 25 for approval of product Article 21 to demonstrate compliance Notification by Contractor Article 20 Photographic Documentation Article 28 Progress Schedules Article 27 Record Data Article 26 Request for Information Article 20 Shop Drawing Article 25 Schedule of Values Article 17 Substitutions Article 12 General Conditions 007200-106 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 Document Type Section Suppliers and Subcontractors Articles 20 and 26 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS 25.01 Work Included A. Shop Drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection, or installation of the product without additional detailed information from the Supplier. B. Submit Shop Drawings as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Provide detailed information for the products proposed for the Project regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Allow the Designer to advise the Owner if products proposed for the Project by the Contractor conform, in general,to the design concepts of the Contract Documents. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Shop Drawings, Samples, or mockups. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. 25.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Shop Drawings not meeting these criteria will be rejected. B. Demonstrate that the proposed products are in full and complete compliance with the design criteria and requirements of the Contract Documents or will be if deviations requested per Paragraph 25.10 are approved. C. Furnish and install products that fully comply with the information included in the document submittal. 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Provide Shop Drawings as required by Paragraph 25.03 of the Supplementary Conditions. B. Include Shop Drawings in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Shop Drawings to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Incorporate the dates for processing Shop Drawings into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of Shop Drawings when preparing the Progress Schedule. Include time for making revisions to the Shop Drawings and resubmitting the Shop Drawing for a least a second review. Assume a 14-day review cycle for each time General Conditions 007200-107 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 a Shop Drawing is submitted for review unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Schedule document submittals to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for ordering, fabricating, delivering, and installing product so construction of the Project is not delayed. D. Complete the following before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample: 1. Prepare Shop Drawing Review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials,catalog numbers, and similar information with respect to Shop Drawings and Samples; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. E. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Shop Drawings; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Shop Drawing have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Shop Drawings are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Shop Drawings related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. F. Review Shop Drawings prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Shop Drawings have been reviewed by the Contractor and are in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Shop Drawings except for deviations specifically brought to the Designer's attention on an attached Shop Drawing Deviation Request form in accordance with Paragraph 25.09. G. Fabrication or installation of any products prior to the approval of Shop Drawings is done at the Contractor's risk. Defective products may be rejected at the Owner's option. H. Payment will not be made for products for which Shop Drawings or Samples are required until these are approved by the Designer. General Conditions 007200-108 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements A. Provide adequate information in Shop Drawings and Samples so Designer can: 1. Assist the Owner in selecting colors,textures, or other aesthetic features. 2. Compare the proposed features of the product with the specified features and advise Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the Contract Documents. 3. Compare the performance features of the proposed product with those specified and advise the Owner that the product does, in general,conform to the performance criteria specified in the Contract Documents. 4. Review required certifications, guarantees, warranties, and service agreements for compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Include a complete description of the product to be furnished, including: 1. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, and operational characteristics of the product; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. C. Submit Shop Drawings that require coordination with other Shop Drawings at the same time. Shop Drawings requiring coordination with other Shop Drawings will be rejected until a complete package is submitted. 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Shop Drawings as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Shop Drawing. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Shop Drawing. 2. Certification of Local Field Service (CLS): A certified letter stating that field service is available from a factory or supplier approved service organization located within a 300 mile radius of the Site. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of approved service organizations on or attach it to the certificate. 3. Certification of Adequacy of Design (CAD): A certified letter from the manufacturer of the equipment stating that they have designed the equipment to be structurally stable General Conditions 007200-109 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 and to withstand all imposed loads without deformation, failure, or adverse effects to the performance and operational requirements of the unit. The letter shall state that mechanical and electrical equipment is adequately sized to be fully operational for the conditions specified or normally encountered by the product's intended use. 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Shop Drawing. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1-year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required by Specification Sections. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures A. Submit Shop Drawings through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Shop Drawing submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Shop Drawing submittal form is to be the first document in the file submitted. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format(PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Shop Drawing. Submit Samples and color charts per Paragraph 25.08.A. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. General Conditions 007200-110 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 3. Submit each specific product or class of material separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Shop Drawings for more than one product in the same Shop Drawing. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Shop Drawings. a. Use terms and symbols in Shop Drawings consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Shop Drawings. c. Provide a legend for symbols used on Shop Drawings. 6. Mark Shop Drawings to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, C. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Use the following conventions to markup Shop Drawings for review: 1. Make comments and corrections in the color blue. Add explanatory comments to the markup. 2. Highlight items in black that are not being furnished when the Supplier's standard drawings or information sheets are provided so that only the products to be provided are in their original color. 3. Make comments in the color yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Make comments in the color orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. 5. Mark dimensions with the prefix FD to indicate field verified dimensions on the Shop Drawings. C. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. D. Designate a Shop Drawing as requiring priority treatment in the comment section of the Shop Drawing submittal form to place the review of the Shop Drawing ahead of other Shop Drawings previously delivered. Shop Drawings are typically reviewed in the order received, unless Contractor requests that a different priority be assigned. Priority Shop Drawings will General Conditions 007200-111 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 be reviewed before other Shop Drawings for this Project already received but not yet reviewed. Use of this priority designation for Shop Drawings may delay the review of Shop Drawings previously submitted, pushing the processing of Shop Drawings beyond the 14-day target. Contractor is responsible for delays resulting from the use of the priority designation status on Shop Drawings. E. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 25.03. 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures A. Submit color charts and Samples for every product requiring color, texture, or finish selection. 1. Submit color charts and Samples only after Shop Drawings for the products have been approved. 2. Deliver all color charts and Samples at one time. 3. Provide Samples of adequate size to clearly illustrate the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 4. Indicate the full range of color, texture, and patterns. 5. Deliver color charts and Samples to the field office and store for the duration of the Project 6. Notify the Designer that color charts and Samples have been delivered for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. 7. Submit color charts and Samples not less than 30 days prior to when these products are to be ordered or released for fabrication to comply with the Project schedule. 8. Remove Samples that have been rejected. Submit new Samples following the same process as for the initial Sample until Samples are approved. 9. Dispose of Samples when related Work has been completed and approved and disposal is approved by the Designer. At Owner's option, Samples will become the property of the Owner. B. Construct mockups for comparison with the Work being performed. 1. Construct mockups from the actual products to be used in construction per detailed Specification Sections. 2. Construct mockups of the size and in the area indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Construct mockups complete with texture and finish to represent the finished product. 4. Notify the Designer that mockups have been constructed and are ready for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. Allow 2 weeks for OPT to approve of the mockup before beginning the Work represented by the mockup. 5. Remove mockups that have been rejected. Construct new mockups following the same process as for the initial mockup until mockup is approved. 6. Protect mockups until Work has been completed and accepted by the OPT. General Conditions 007200-112 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 7. Dispose of mockups when related Work has been completed and disposal is approved by the Designer. 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products A. Contractor may submit other manufacturers' products that are in full compliance with the Specification where Specifications list one or more manufacturers followed by the phase "or equal" or"or approved equal." 1. Submit a Shop Drawing as required by this article to document that the proposed product is equal or superior to the specified product. 2. Prove that the product is equal. It is not the OPT's responsibility to prove the product is not equal. a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is equal to the Contract Document requirements. b. Make a direct comparison with the specified manufacturer's published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the Shop Drawing. c. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed product is final. 3. Provide a typewritten certification that, in furnishing the proposed product as an equal, the Contractor: a. Has thoroughly examined the proposed product and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to the product specified. b. Has determined that the product will perform in the same manner and result in the same process as the specified product. c. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds as for the product specified. d. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the product into the construction and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. e. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 25.10 Requests for Deviation A. Submit requests for deviation from the Contract Documents for any product that does not fully comply with the Contract Documents. B. Submit requests for deviation using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form provided. Identify each deviation request as a separate item. Include all requested deviations that must be approved as a group together and identify them as a single item. C. Include a description of why the deviation is required and the impact on Contract Price or Contract Times. Include the amount of any cost savings to the Owner for deviations that result in a reduction in cost. D. Submit as a Change Proposal prior to submitting the Shop Drawing if the deviation will result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. General Conditions 007200-113 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 E. A Modification must be issued by the Designer for approval of a deviation. Approval of a requested Shop Drawing deviation by the Designer on the Shop Drawings Deviation Request form indicates approval of the requested deviation only on its technical merits as generally conforming to the Contract Documents. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. 25.11 Designer Responsibilities A. Shop Drawings will be received by the Designer. Designer will log the documents and review per this Article for general conformance with the Contract Documents. 1. Designer's review and approval will be only to determine if the products described in the Shop Drawing or Sample will, after installation or incorporation into the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Designer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences,or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3. Designer's review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. B. Comments will be made on items called to the attention of the Designer for review and comment. Any marks made by the Designer do not constitute a blanket review of the document submittal or relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or deviations from the Contract requirements. 1. Designer will respond to Contractor's markups by either making markups directly in the Shop Drawings file using the color green or by attaching a Document Review Comments form with review comments. 2. Shop Drawings that are reviewed will be returned with one or more of the following status designations: a. Approved: Shop Drawing is found to be acceptable as submitted. b. Approved as Noted: Shop Drawing is Approved so long as corrections or notations made by Designer are incorporated into the Show Drawing. C. Not Approved: Shop Drawing or products described are not acceptable. 3. Shop Drawing will also be designated for one of the following actions: a. Final distribution: Shop Drawing is acceptable without further action and has been filed as a record document. b. Shop Drawing not required: A Shop Drawing was not required by the Contract Documents. Resubmit the document per Article 26. c. Cancelled: This action indicates that for some reason, the Shop Drawing is to be removed from consideration and all efforts regarding the processing of that document are to cease. General Conditions 007200-114 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 d. Revise and resubmit: Shop Drawing has deviations from the Contract Documents, significant errors, or is inadequate and must be revised and resubmitted for subsequent review. e. Resubmit with corrections made: Shop Drawing is "Approved as Noted," but has significant markups. Make correction and notations to provide a revised document with markup incorporated into the original document so that no markups are required. f. Returned without review due to excessive deficiencies: Document does not meet the requirement of the Specifications for presentation or content to the point where continuing to review the document would be counterproductive to the review process or clearly does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Revise the Shop Drawing to comply with the requirements of this Section and resubmit. g. Actions a through c will close out the Shop Drawing review process and no further action is required as a Shop Drawing. Actions d through f require follow up action to close out the review process. 4. Drawings with a significant or substantial number of markings by the Contractor may be marked "Approved as Noted" and "Resubmit with corrections made." These drawings are to be revised to provide a clean record of the Shop Drawing. Proceed with ordering products as the documents are revised. 5. Dimensions or other data that does not appear to conform to the Contract Documents will be marked as "At Variance With" (AVW) the Contract Documents or other information provided. The Contractor is to make revisions as appropriate to comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bring deviations to the Shop Drawings to the attention of the Designer for approval by using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Use a single line for each requested deviation so the Status and Action for each deviation can be determined for that requested deviation. If approval or rejection of a requested deviation will impact other requested deviations, then all related deviations should be included in that requested deviation line so the status and action can be determined on the requested deviation as a whole. D. Requested deviations will be reviewed as possible Modification to the Contract Documents. 1. A Requested deviation will be rejected as "Not Approved" if the requested deviation is unacceptable. Contractor is to revise and resubmit the Shop Drawing with corrections for approval. 2. A Field Order will be issued by the Designer for deviations approved by the Designer if the requested deviation is acceptable and if the requested deviation will not result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Requested deviations from the Contract Documents may only be approved by Field Order. 3. A requested deviation will be rejected if the requested deviation is acceptable but the requested deviation will or should result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Submit any requested deviation that requires a change in Contract Price or Contract Times as a Change Proposal for approval prior to resubmitting the Shop Drawing. General Conditions 007200-115 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 E. Contractor is to resubmit the Shop Drawing until it is acceptable and marked Approved or Approved as Noted and is assigned an action per Paragraph 25.11 that indicates that the Shop Drawing process is closed. F. Information that is submitted as a Shop Drawings that should be submitted as Record Data or other type of document, or is not required may be returned without review, or may be deleted. No further action is required and the Shop Drawing process for this document will be closed. 25.12 Resubmission Requirements A. Make all corrections or changes in the documents required by the Designer and resubmit to the Designer until approved. 1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the original document. 2. Highlight or cloud in green those revisions which have been made in response to the previous reviews by the Designer. This will include changes previously highlighted or clouded in yellow to direct attention to Designer to items requiring selections or decisions by the Designer or highlighted or clouded in orange for a requested deviation from the Contract Documents. 3. Highlight and cloud new items in yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Highlight and cloud new items in orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Numbering for these new items is to start with the next number following the last Shop Drawing deviation requested. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Excessive review of Shop Drawings is defined as any review required after the original review has been made and the first resubmittal has been checked to see that corrections have been made. 2. Review of Shop Drawings or Samples will be an additional service requiring payment by the Contractor if the Contractor submits a substitution for a product for which a Shop Drawing or Sample has previously been approved, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. 3. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed in SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. 4. A Set-off will be included in each Application for Payment to pay costs for the additional review to the Owner on a monthly basis. The Set-off will be based on invoices submitted to Owner for these services. General Conditions 007200-116 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 5. Need for more than one resubmission or any other delay of obtaining Designer's review of Shop Drawings will not entitle the Contractor to an adjustment in Contract Price or an extension of Contract Times. ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA 26.01 Work Included A. Submit Record Data as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. Provide Record Data for all products unless a Shop Drawing is required for the same item. B. Submit Record Data to provide documents that allow the Owner to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Review detailed information about the products regarding their fabrication,installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Provide replacement or repair of the products at some future date. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the receipt or cursory review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. D. Provide various reports or other documents that Contract Documents require for record purposes. 26.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Record Data not meeting these criteria will be rejected. 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Submit Record Data in accordance with SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. B. Include Record Data in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Record Data to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Complete the following before submitting Record Data: 1. Prepare Record Data and coordinate with Shop Drawings or Samples, other Record Data, and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. General Conditions 007200-117 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 D. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Record Data; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Record Data have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Record Data are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Record Data related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. E. Review Record Data prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Record Data has been reviewed by the Contractor and is in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Record Data. 26.04 Record Data Requirements A. Include a complete description of the material or equipment to be furnished, including: 1. Type,dimensions,size,arrangement,model number,and operational parameters of the components; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Record Data as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Record Data. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Record Data. General Conditions 007200-118 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Record Data. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1 year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures A. Submit Record Data through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Record Data submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Record Data submittal form is to be the first document in the file. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Record Data. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 3. Submit each specific product, class of material, or product separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Record Data for more than one system in the same Record Data. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Record Data. General Conditions 007200-119 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 a. Use terms and symbols in Record Data consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Record Data. C. Provide a legend for symbols used on Record Data. 6. Mark Record Data to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, c. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. C. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 26.03. 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities A. Record Data will be received by the Designer, logged, and provided to Owner as the Project record. 1. Record Data may be reviewed to see that the information provided is adequate for the purpose intended. Record Data not meeting the requirements of Paragraph 26.02 may be rejected as unacceptable. 2. Record Data is not reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. Comments may be returned if deviations from the Contract Documents are noted during the cursory review performed to see that the information is adequate. 3. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by a Modification. B. Designer may take the following action in processing Record Data: 1. File Record Data as received if the cursory review indicates that the document meets the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. Document will be given the status of "Filed as Received" and no further action is required on that Record Data. 2. Reject the Record Data for one of the following reasons: a. The document submittal requirements of the Contract Documents indicate that the document submitted as Record Data should have been submitted as a Shop Drawing. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Submit Shop Drawing." No further action is required on this document as Record Data and the Record Data process will be closed. Resubmit the document as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. General Conditions 007200-120 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 b. The cursory review indicates that the document does not meet the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Revise and Resubmit." Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." When Record Data is filed, no further action is required, and the Record Data process will be closed. c. The Record Data is not required by the Contract Documents nor is the Record Data applicable to the Project. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Cancel -Not Required." No further action is required,and the Record Data process will be closed. C. Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." ARTICLE 27—CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 27.01 Requirements A. Prepare and submit a Progress Schedule for the Work and update the schedule on a monthly basis for the duration of the Project. B. Provide schedule in adequate detail to allow Owner to monitor progress and to relate document processing to sequential activities of the Work. C. Incorporate and specifically designate the dates of anticipated submission of documents and the dates when documents must be returned to the Contractor into the schedule. D. Assume complete responsibility for maintaining the progress of the Work per the schedule submitted. E. Schedule Work based upon a six day work week. 27.02 Document Submittal A. Submit Progress Schedules in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit a preliminary schedule within 10 days after the Notice of Award. The schedule is to be available at the pre-construction conference. C. Submit a detailed schedule at least 10 days prior to the first payment request. D. Submit Progress Schedule updates monthly with Applications for Payment to indicate the progress made on the Project to that date. Failure to submit the schedule may cause delay in the review and approval of Applications for Payment. 27.03 Schedule Requirements A. Schedule is to be in adequate detail to: 1. Assure adequate planning, scheduling, and reporting during the execution of the Work; 2. Assure the coordination of the Work of the Contractor and the various Subcontractors and Suppliers; 3. Assist in monitoring the progress of the Work; and General Conditions 007200-121 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 4. Assist in evaluating proposed changes to the Contract Times and Project schedule. B. Provide personnel with 5 years' minimum experience in scheduling construction work comparable to this Project. Prepare the schedule using acceptable scheduling software. C. Provide the schedule in the form of a computer generated critical path schedule which includes Work to be performed on the Project. It is intended that the schedule accomplish the following: 1. Give early warning of delays in time for correction. 2. Provide detailed plans for the execution of the Work in the form of future activities and events in sequential relationships. 3. Establish relationships of significant planned Work activities and provide a logical sequence for planned Work activities. 4. Provide continuous current status information. 5. Allow analysis of the Contractor's program for the completion of the Project. 6. Permit schedules to be revised when the existing schedule is not achievable. 7. Log the progress of the Work as it actually occurs. D. Prepare a time scaled CPM arrow or precedence diagram to indicate each activity and its start and stop dates. 1. Develop Milestone dates and Project completion dates to conform to time constraints, sequencing requirements and Contract completion date. 2. Use calendar day durations while accounting for holidays and weather conditions in the projection of the duration of each activity. 3. Clearly indicate the critical path for Work to complete the Project. E. Provide a time scaled horizontal bar chart which indicates graphically the Work scheduled at any time during the Project. The chart is to indicate: 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity; 2. Identification of the activity by structure, location, and type of Work; 3. Chronological order of the start of each item of Work; 4. The activity start and stop dates; 5. The activity duration; 6. Successor and predecessor relationships for each activity; 7. A clearly indicated single critical path; and 8. Projected percentage of completion, based on dollar value of the Work included in each activity as of the first day of each month. F. Provide a schedule incorporating the Schedule of Documents provided in accordance with Article 24 indicating: 1. Specific date each document is to be delivered to the Designer. 2. Specific date each document must be received in order to meet the proposed schedule. General Conditions 007200-122 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 3. Allow a reasonable time to review documents, taking into consideration the size and complexity of the document, other documents being processed, and other factors that may affect review time. 4. Allow time for re-submission of each document. Contractor is responsible for delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous documents and for time lost when documents are submitted for products that do not meet Specification requirements. 27.04 Schedule Revisions A. Revise the schedule if it appears that the schedule no longer represents the actual progress of the Work. 1. Submit a written report if the schedule indicates that the Project is more than 30 days behind schedule. The report is to include: a. Number of days behind schedule; b. Narrative description of the steps to be taken to bring the Project back on schedule; and c. Anticipated time required to bring the Project back on schedule. 2. Submit a revised schedule indicating the action that the Contractor proposes to take to bring the Project back on schedule. B. Revise the schedule to indicate any adjustments in Contract Times approved by Modification. 1. Include a revised schedule with Change Proposals if a change in Contract Times is requested. 2. OPT will deem any Change Proposal that does not have a revised schedule and request for a change in Contract Times as having no impact on the ability of the Contractor to complete the Project within the Contract Times. C. Updating the Project schedule to reflect actual progress is not considered a revision to the Project schedule. D. Applications for Payment may not be recommended for payment without a revised schedule and if required, the report indicating the Contractor's plan for bringing the Project back on schedule. 27.OS Float Time A. Define float time as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities on the construction schedule. B. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or Owner. C. Where several subsystems each have a critical path, the subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path and float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. D. Contract Times cannot be changed by the submission of a schedule. Contract Times can only be modified by a Change Order or Contract Amendment. General Conditions 007200-123 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 E. Schedule completion date must be the same as the Contract completion date. Time between the end of construction and the Contract completion date is float time. ARTICLE 28—VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 28.01 Work Included A. Provide a video recording of the Site prior to the beginning of construction. 1. Record the condition of all existing facilities in or abutting the construction area (right- of-way)including but not limited to streets,curb and gutter, utilities,driveways,fencing, landscaping, etc. 2. Record after construction staking is complete but prior to any clearing. 3. Provide one copy of the recording, dated and labeled to the OAR before the start of construction. Provide additional recording as directed by the OAR if the recording provided is not considered suitable for the purpose of recording pre-existing conditions. B. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the Site to clearly depict the completed Project. 1. Provide a minimum of ten different views. 2. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire Site. 3. Photograph all significant areas of completed construction. 4. Completion photographs are not to be taken until all construction trailers, excess materials, trash, and debris have been removed. 5. Employ a professional photographer approved by the OAR to photograph the Project. 6. Provide one aerial photograph of the Site from an angle and height to include the entire Site while providing adequate detail. C. All photographs, video recordings, and a digital copy of this media are to become the property of the Owner. Photographs or recordings may not be used for publication,or public or private display without the written consent of the Owner. 28.02 Quality Assurance A. Provide clear photographs and recordings taken with proper exposure. View photographs and recordings in the field and take new photographs or recordings immediately if photos of an adequate print quality cannot be produced or video quality is not adequate. Provide photographs with adequate quality and resolution to permit enlargements. 28.03 Document Submittal A. Submit photographic documentation as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit two DVDs of the video recording as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 007200-124 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 28.04 Photographs A. Provide photographs in digital format with a minimum resolution of 1280 x 960, accomplished without a digital zoom. B. Take photographs at locations acceptable to the OAR. C. Provide two color prints of each photograph and a digital copy on a DVD of each photograph taken. D. Identify each print on back with: 1. Project name. 2. Date,time, location, and orientation of the exposure. 3. Description of the subject of photograph. E. Submit photographs in clear plastic sheets designed for photographs. Place only one photograph in each sheet to allow the description on the back to be read without removing the photograph. F. Final photographs are to include two 8-by-10-inch glossy color prints for each of ten photographs selected by the OAR. These photographs are in addition to normal prints. 28.05 Video Recording A. Provide digital format on DVD that can be played with Windows Media Player in common format in full screen mode. B. Identify Project on video by audio or visual means. C. Video file size should not exceed 400 MB. D. Video resolution shall be 1080p. E. The quality of the video must be sufficient to determine the existing conditions of the construction area. Camera panning must be performed while at rest, do not pan the camera while walking or driving. Camera pans should be performed at intervals sufficient to clearly view the entire construction area. F. DVD shall be labeled with construction stationing and stationing should be called out, voice recorded, in the video. G. The entire construction area recording shall be submitted at once. Sections submitted separately will not be accepted. H. Pipeline projects should be recorded linearly from beginning to end. ARTICLE 29—EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 29.01 Substantial Completion A. Notify the OAR that the Work or a designated portion of the Work is substantially complete per the General Conditions. Include a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected before the Project will be considered to be complete. General Conditions 007200-125 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 B. OPT will visit the Site to observe the Work within 30 days after notification is received to determine the status of the Project. C. OAR will notify the Contractor, within 120 days after notification, that the Work is either substantially complete or that additional Work must be performed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 1. OAR will notify the Contractor of items that must be completed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 2. Correct the noted deficiencies in the Work. 3. Notify the OAR when the items of Work in the OAR's notice have been completed. 4. OPT will revisit the Site and repeat the process. 5. OAR will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Contractor when the OPT considers the Project to be substantially complete. The Certificate will include a tentative list of items to be corrected before Final Payment will be recommended. 6. Review the list and notify the OAR of any objections to items on the list within 10 days after receiving the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 29.02 Final Inspections A. Notify the OAR when: 1. Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents; 2. Equipment and systems have been tested per Contract Documents and are fully operational; 3. Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been provided to the Owner and all operator training has been completed; 4. Specified spare parts and special tools have been provided; and 5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and ready for Final Payment within 30 days after the notice is received. C. Designer will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. D. Take immediate steps to correct Defective Work. Notify the Designer when Defective Work has been corrected. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and the Work is acceptable. OAR will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. E. Submit the Request for Final Payment with the closeout documents described in Paragraph 29.04 if notified that the Project is complete, and the Work is acceptable. 29.03 Reinspection Fees A. Owner may impose a Set-off against the Application for Payment in accordance with the General Conditions to compensate the OPT for additional visits to the Project if additional Work is required. General Conditions 007200-126 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal A. Record Documents per Article 20. B. Warranties and bonds. C. Equipment installation reports on equipment. D. Shop Drawings, Record Data, and other documents as required by the Contract Documents. E. Evidence of continuing insurance and bond coverage as required by the Contract Documents. F. Final Photographs per Article 28. 29.05 Transfer of Utilities A. If applicable to the Project,transfer utilities to the Owner when the Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued and the Work has been occupied by the Owner. B. Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the date the Owner occupied the Work. 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements A. Provide warranties, bonds, and service agreements required by the Contract Documents. B. The date for the start of warranties, bonds, and service agreements is established per the Contract Documents. C. Compile warranties, bonds, and service agreements and review these documents for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Provide a log of all equipment covered under the 1-year correction period specified in the Contract Documents and all products for which special or extended warranties or guarantees are provided. Index the log by Specification Section number on forms provided. Include items 2.e through 2.g below in the tabulation. 2. Provide a copy of specific warranties or guarantees under a tab indexed to the log. Each document is to include: a. A description of the product or Work item; b. The firm name with the name of the principal, address, and telephone number; c. Signature of the respective Supplier or Subcontractor to acknowledge existence of the warranty obligation for extended warranties and service agreements; d. Scope of warranty, bond, or service agreement; e. Indicate the start date for the correction period specified in the Contract Documents for each product and the date on which the specified correction period expires. f. Indicate the start date for extended warranties for each product and the date on which the specified extended warranties period expires. g. Start date, warranty or guarantee period, and expiration date for each warranty, bond, and service agreement; General Conditions 007200-127 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 h. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failure; and i. Specific instances that might invalidate the warranty or bond. D. Submit digital copies of the documents to the Designer for review. E. Submit warranties, bonds, and service agreements within 10 days after equipment or components are placed in service. ARTICLE 30—MISCELLANEOUS 30.01 Computation of Times A. Exclude the first day and include the last day when determining dates for a period of time referred to in the Contract Documents by days. The last day of this period is to be omitted from the determination if it falls on a Sunday or a legal holiday. B. All references and conditions for a Calendar Day Contract in the Contract Documents apply for a Fixed Date Contract. A Fixed Date Contract is one in which the calendar dates for reaching Substantial Completion and/or final completion are specified in lieu of identifying the number of days involved. 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records A. By execution of the Contract, Contractor grants Owner the right to audit, examine, inspect and/or copy, at Owner's election at all reasonable times during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years following the completion or termination of the Work, all of Contractor's written and electronically stored records and billings relating to the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. The audit, examination or inspection may be performed by an Owner designee,which may include its internal auditors or an outside representative engaged by Owner. Contractor agrees to retain its records for a minimum of four(4)years following termination of the Contract, unless there is an ongoing dispute under the Contract,then, such retention period must extend until final resolution of the dispute. As used in these General Conditions, "Contractor written and electronically stored records" include any and all information, materials and data of every kind and character generated as a result of the work under this Contract. Examples of Contractor written and electronically stored records include, but are not limited to:accounting data and reports, billings, books, general ledgers, cost ledgers, invoices, production sheets, documents, correspondence, meeting notes, subscriptions, agreements, purchase orders, leases, contracts, commitments, arrangements, notes, daily diaries, reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, time sheets, payroll records, policies, procedures, Subcontractor agreements, Supplier agreements, rental equipment proposals, federal and state tax filings for any issue in question, along with any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may, in Owner's sole judgment, have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any Contract Documents. B. Owner agrees to exercise the right to audit, examine or inspect Contractor's records only during regular business hours. Contractor agrees to allow Owner and/or Owner's designee access to all of the Contractor's Records, Contractor's facilities, and current or former employees of Contractor, deemed necessary by Owner or its designee(s), to perform such audit, inspection or examination. Contractor also agrees to provide adequate and General Conditions 007200-128 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 appropriate work space necessary for Owner or its designees to conduct such audits, inspections or examinations. C. Contractor must include this Paragraph 30.02 in any Subcontractor, supplier or vendor contract. 30.03 Independent Contractor A. Contractor is to perform its duties under this Contract as an independent contractor. The Contractor's Team and their personnel are not considered to be employees or agents of the Owner. Nothing in this Contract is to be interpreted as granting Contractor's Team the right or authority to make commitments for the Owner. This Contract does not constitute or create a joint venture, partnership or formal business organization of any kind. 30.04 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available to the Owner or Contractor by these General Conditions are in addition to, and are not a limitation of,the rights and remedies which are otherwise imposed or available by: 1. Laws or Regulations; 2. Special warranties or guarantees; or 3. Other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Paragraph 30.04 are as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. 30.05 Limitation of Damages A. Owner is not liable to Contractor for claims, costs, losses or damages sustained by Contractor's Team associated with other projects or anticipated projects. 30.06 No Waiver A. The failure of Owner or Contractor to enforce any provision of this Contract does not constitute a waiver of that provision or affect the enforceability of that provision or the remainder of this Contract. 30.07 Severability A. If a court of competent jurisdiction renders a part of this Contract invalid or unenforceable, that part is to be severed and the remainder of this Contract continues in full force. 30.08 Survival of Obligations A. Representations, indemnifications, warranties, guarantees and continuing obligations required by the Contract Documents survive completion and acceptance of the Work or termination of the Contract. General Conditions 007200-129 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries A. Nothing in this Contract can be construed to create rights in any entity other than the Owner and Contractor. Neither the Owner nor Contractor intends to create third party beneficiaries by entering into this Contract. 30.10 Assignment of Contract A. This Contract may not be assigned in whole or in part by the Contractor without the prior written consent of the Owner. 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity A. The Owner has not waived its sovereign immunity by entering into and performing its obligations under this Contract. B. This Contract is to perform a governmental function solely for the public benefit. 30.12 Controlling Law A. This Contract is governed by the laws of the State of Texas without regard to its conflicts of laws. Venue for legal proceedings lies exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Cases must be filed and tried in Nueces County and cannot be removed from Nueces County,Texas. 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue A. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary,Contractor will have at least 90 days to give notice of a claim for damages as a condition precedent to the right to sue on the Contract, subject to the contractual Claims and Alternative Dispute Resolution processes set forth herein. 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury A. Owner and Contractor agree that they have knowingly waived and do hereby waive the right to trial by jury and have instead agreed, in the event of any litigation arising out of or connected to this Contract, to proceed with a trial before the court, unless both parties subsequently agree otherwise in writing. 30.15 Attorney Fees A. The Parties expressly agree that, in the event of litigation, all parties waive rights to payment of attorneys' fees that otherwise might be recoverable, pursuant to the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code Chapter 38, Texas Local Government Code §271.153, the Prompt Payment Act, common law or any other provision for payment of attorney's fees. 30.16 Compliance with Laws A. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as amended (ADA) and Texas Architectural Barriers Act and all regulations relating to either statute. B. No qualified person shall on the basis of race, color, religion, national origin, gender, age or disability be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be subjected to General Conditions 007200-130 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 discrimination under any program or activity which receives or benefits from federal financial assistance. C. Comply with all applicable federal, state and city laws, rules and regulations. D. Each applicable provision and clause required by law to be inserted into the Contract shall be deemed to be enacted herein,and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though each were physically included herein. 30.17 Enforcement A. The City Manager or designee and the City Attorney or designee are fully authorized and will have the right to enforce all legal rights and obligations under the Contract without further authorization from City Council. 30.18 Subject to Appropriation A. Funds are appropriated by the Owner on a yearly basis. If for any reason, funds are not appropriated in any given year,the Owner may direct immediate suspension or termination of the Contract with no additional liability to the Owner. If the Contractor is terminated or suspended and the Owner requests remobilization at a later date, the Contractor may request payment for reasonable demobilization/remobilization costs. Such costs shall be addressed through a Change Order to the Contract. Under no circumstances may a provision or obligation under this Contract be interpreted as contrary to this paragraph. 30.19 Contract Sum A. The Contract Sum is stated in the Contract and,including authorized adjustments,is the total maximum not-to-exceed amount payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts and agrees that all payments pursuant to this Contract are subject to the availability and appropriation of funds by the Corpus Christi City Council. If funds are not available and/or appropriated,this Contract shall immediately be terminated with no liability to any party to this Contract. 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy A. The Contractor's guarantee is a separate and additional remedy available to benefit the Owner. Neither the guarantee nor the expiration of the guarantee period will operate to reduce, release or relinquish any rights or remedies available to the Owner for any claims or causes of action against the Contractor or any other individual or entity. 30.21 Notices. A. Any notice required to be given to Owner under any provision in this Contract must include a copy to OAR by mail or e-mail. END OF SECTION General Conditions 007200-131 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 12/2020 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions not amended or supplemented in these Supplementary Conditions remain in effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below. ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC-1.01 DEFINED TERMS A. The members of the OPT as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.41 consists of the following organizations: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Turner Ramirez Architects B. Paragraph 1.01.A.54"Substantial Completion" is more specifically defined for this Project as: 1. The following items are fully functional and suitable for operation in accordance with the Contract Documents: a. The Facility is fully functional and is complete for the Owner to fully inhabit and utilize, with the exceptions of minor Punchlist items. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK SC-4.04 DELAYS IN CONTRACTOR'S PROGRESS A. The allocation for delays in the Contractor's progress for rain days as set forth in General Conditions Paragraph 4.04.D are to be determined as follows: 1. Include rain days in developing the schedule for construction. Schedule construction so that the Work will be completed within the Contract Times assuming that these rain days will occur. Incorporate residual impacts following rain days such as limited access to and within the Site, inability to work due to wet or muddy Site conditions, delays in delivery of equipment and materials, and other impacts related to rain days when developing the schedule for construction. Include all costs associated with these rain days and residual impacts in the Contract Price. 2. A rain day is defined as any day in which the amount of rain measured by the National Weather Services at the Power Street Stormwater Pump Station is 0.50 inch or greater. Records indicate the following average number of rain days for each month: Supplementary Conditions 007300-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 2/2020 11' C 1 1• Month Day Month Days January 3 July 3 February 3 August 4 March 2 September 7 April 3 October 4 May 4 November 3 June 4 December 3 3. A total of[35] rain days have been set for this Project. An extension of time due to rain days will be considered only after [43] rain days have been exceeded in a calendar year and the OAR has determined that a detrimental impact to the construction schedule resulted from the excessive rainfall. Rain days are to be incorporated into the schedule and unused rain days will be considered float time which may be consumed by the Owner or Contractor in delay claims. ARTICLE 5 — AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SC-5.03 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.03.A which describe subsurface and physical conditions. 1. Geotechnical Reports include the following: Police Training Academy (21086) - RETL Report#G121421 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) include the following: None ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE SC-6.03 REQUIRED MINIMUM INSURANCE COVERAGE INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE AMOUNTS Provide the insurance coverage for at least the following amounts unless greater amounts are required by Laws and Regulations: Type of Insurance Minimum Insurance Coverage Commercial General Liability including 1. Commercial Form 2. Premises—Completed Operations 3. Explosions and Collapse Hazard $1,000,000 Per Occurrence 4. Underground Hazard $2,000,000 Aggregate 5. Products/Completed Operations Hazard 6. Contractual Liability 7. Broad Form Property Damage Supplementary Conditions 007300-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 2/2020 11' C 1 1• 8. Independent Contractors 9. Personal &Advertising Injury Business Automobile Liability-Owned, Non- $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit Owned, Rented and Leased Workers' Compensation Statutory Employer's Liability $500,000/500,000/500,000 Excess Liability/Umbrella Liability $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Required if Contract Price>$5,000,000 Contractor's Pollution Liability / $1,000,000 Per Claim Environmental Impairment Coverage Not limited to sudden and accidental ❑X Required ❑ Not Required discharge. To include long-term environmental impact for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants. Required if excavation>3 ft Builder's Risk (All Perils including Collapse) Equal to Full Replacement Cost of Structure and Contents Required for vertical structures and bridges ❑X Required ❑ Not Required Installation Floater Equal to Contract Price Required if installing city-owned equipment ❑ Required X Not Required ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC-7.04 CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS,AND OTHERS A. Add the following sentence to the end of Paragraph 7.04.A: "The Contractor must perform at least 50 percent of the Work, measured as a percentage of the Contract Price, using its own employees." ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS SC-14.04 PREVAILING WAGE RATES A. The minimum rates for various labor classifications as established by the Owner are shown below: Wage Determination Construction Type Project Type (WD) No Supplementary Conditions 007300-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 2/2020 11' C 1 1• Month Day Month Days January 3 July 3 February 3 August 4 March 2 September 7 April 3 October 4 May 4 November 3 June 4 December 3 3. A total of[35] rain days have been set for this Project. An extension of time due to rain days will be considered only after [43] rain days have been exceeded in a calendar year and the OAR has determined that a detrimental impact to the construction schedule resulted from the excessive rainfall. Rain days are to be incorporated into the schedule and unused rain days will be considered float time which may be consumed by the Owner or Contractor in delay claims. ARTICLE 5 — AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SC-5.03 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.03.A which describe subsurface and physical conditions. 1. Geotechnical Reports include the following: Police Training Academy (21086) - RETL Report#G121421 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) include the following: None ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE SC-6.03 REQUIRED MINIMUM INSURANCE COVERAGE INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE AMOUNTS Provide the insurance coverage for at least the following amounts unless greater amounts are required by Laws and Regulations: Type of Insurance Minimum Insurance Coverage Commercial General Liability including 1. Commercial Form 2. Premises—Completed Operations 3. Explosions and Collapse Hazard $1,000,000 Per Occurrence 4. Underground Hazard $2,000,000 Aggregate 5. Products/Completed Operations Hazard 6. Contractual Liability 7. Broad Form Property Damage Supplementary Conditions 007300-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 2/2020 11' C 1 1• 8. Independent Contractors 9. Personal &Advertising Injury Business Automobile Liability-Owned, Non- $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit Owned, Rented and Leased Workers' Compensation Statutory Employer's Liability $500,000/500,000/500,000 Excess Liability/Umbrella Liability $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Required if Contract Price>$5,000,000 Contractor's Pollution Liability / $1,000,000 Per Claim Environmental Impairment Coverage Not limited to sudden and accidental ❑X Required ❑ Not Required discharge. To include long-term environmental impact for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants. Required if excavation>3 ft Builder's Risk (All Perils including Collapse) Equal to Full Replacement Cost of Structure and Contents Required for vertical structures and bridges ❑X Required ❑ Not Required Installation Floater Equal to Contract Price Required if installing city-owned equipment ❑ Required X Not Required ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC-7.04 CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS,AND OTHERS A. Add the following sentence to the end of Paragraph 7.04.A: "The Contractor must perform at least 50 percent of the Work, measured as a percentage of the Contract Price, using its own employees." ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS SC-14.04 PREVAILING WAGE RATES A. The minimum rates for various labor classifications as established by the Owner are shown below: Wage Determination Construction Type Project Type (WD) No Supplementary Conditions 007300-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 2/2020 11' C 1 1• TX288 Building Building Construction Projects (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories) "General Decision Number:TX20220288 02/25/2022 Superseded General Decision Number:TX20210288 State:Texas Construction Type: Building Counties:Aransas, Nueces and San Patricio Counties in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS(does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Note: Contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act are generally required to pay at least the applicable minimum wage rate required under Executive Order 14026 or Executive Order 13658. Supplementary Conditions 007300-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 2/2020 11' C 1 �• Please note that these Executive Orders apply to covered contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but do not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(2)-(60). I If the contract is entered 1. Executive Order 14026 l into on or after January 30, I generally applies to the 12022,or the contract is I contract. I renewed or extended (e.g.,an 1.The contractor must pay option is exercised) on or all covered workers at after January 30, 2022: least$15.00 per hour(or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher)for all hours spent performing on the contract in 2022. If the contract was awarded on 1. Executive Order 13658 l or between January 1,2015 and I generally applies to the January 29,2022,and the I contract. contract is not renewed or 1.The contractor must pay all I extended on or after January I covered workers at least 130,2022: 1 $11.25 per hour(or the I I I applicable wage rate listed I I I on this wage determination, I I if it is higher)for all I I hours spent performing on that contract in 2022. Supplementary Conditions 007300-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 2/2020 11' C 1 �• The applicable Executive Order minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. If this contract is covered by one of the Executive Orders and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination,the contractor must still submit a conformance request. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the Executive Orders is available at https://www.dol.gov/agencies/whd/government-contracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/07/2022 1 02/25/2022 BOIL0074-003 01/01/2021 Rates Fringes BOILERMAKER......................$29.47 24.10 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELECO278-002 03/20/2020 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN......................$26.25 8.24 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ENG10178-005 06/01/2020 Rates Fringes POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR Supplementary Conditions 007300-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 2/2020 11' C 1 �• (1)Tower Crane.............$ 32.85 13.10 (2) Cranes with Pile Driving or Caisson Attachment and Hydraulic Crane 60 tons and above.....$28.75 10.60 (3) Hydraulic cranes 59 Tons and under..............$ 32.35 13.10 ---------------------------------------------------------------- I RO N 0084-011 06/01/2021 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL...........$ 26.01 7.56 ---------------------------------------------------------------- * SUTX2014-068 07/21/2014 Rates Fringes BRICKLAYER.......................$20.04 0.00 CARPENTER........................$ 15.21 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 15.33 0.00 INSULATOR- MECHANICAL (Duct, Pipe& Mechanical System Insulation)...............$ 19.77 7.13 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING..........$ 12.27 ** 0.00 IRONWORKER,STRUCTURAL...........$22.16 5.26 LABORER: Common or General......$ 9.68** 0.00 Supplementary Conditions 007300-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 2/2020 11' C 1 �• LABORER: Mason Tender- Brick...$ 11.36 ** 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender- Cement/Concrete..................$ 10.58 ** 0.00 LABORER: Pipelayer..............$ 12.49 ** 2.13 LABORER: Roof Tearoff...........$ 11.28 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe.......$ 14.25 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Bobcat/Skid Steer/Skid Loader................$ 13.93 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Bulldozer.............$ 18.29 1.31 OPERATOR: Drill.................$ 16.22 0.34 OPERATOR: Forklift..............$ 14.83 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Grader/Blade..........$ 13.37 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Loader................$ 13.55 ** 0.94 OPERATOR: Mechanic..............$ 17.52 3.33 OPERATOR: Paver (Asphalt, Aggregate, and Concrete).........$ 16.03 0.00 OPERATOR: Roller................$ 12.70 ** 0.00 Supplementary Conditions 007300-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 2/2020 11' C 1 �• PAINTER(Brush, Roller, and Spray)...........................$ 14.45 ** 0.00 PIPEFITTER.......................$25.80 8.55 PLUMBER..........................$ 25.64 8.16 ROOFER...........................$ 13.75 ** 0.00 SHEET METAL WORKER(HVAC Duct Installation Only)...............$ 22.73 7.52 SHEET METAL WORKER, Excludes HVAC Duct Installation...........$ 21.13 6.53 TILE FINISHER....................$ 11.22 ** 0.00 TILE SETTER......................$ 14.74** 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck........$ 12.39 ** 1.18 TRUCK DRIVER: Flatbed Truck.....$ 19.65 8.57 TRUCK DRIVER: Semi-Trailer Truck............................$ 12.50 ** 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Water Truck.......$ 12.00 ** 4.11 ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS- Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ---------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------- Supplementary Conditions 007300-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 2/2020 11' C 1 �• ** Workers in this classification may be entitled to a higher minimum wage under Executive Order 14026($15.00)or 13658 ($11.25). Please see the Note at the top of the wage determination for more information. Note: Executive Order(EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued)on or after January 1,2017. If this contract is covered by the EO,the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care;to assist a family member(or person who is like family to the employee)who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member(or person who is like family to the employee)who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at https://www.dol.gov/agencies/whd/government-contracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). ---------------------------------------------------------------- Supplementary Conditions 007300-10 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 2/2020 11' C 1 �• The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s)of construction in the area covered by the wage determination.The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of""identifiers"" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or ""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification,which in this example would be Plumbers.0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198.The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate,which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA)governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the""SU"" identifier indicate that Supplementary Conditions 007300-11 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 2/2020 11' C 1 �• no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example:SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based.The next number,007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100%of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state.The next number,0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year,to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. Supplementary Conditions 007300-12 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 2/2020 11' C 1 �• ---------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter?This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys,should be with the Wage and Hour National Office because National Office has responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory,then the process described in 2.)and 3.)should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 Supplementary Conditions 007300-13 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 2/2020 11' C 1 �• 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes,then an interested party(those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7).Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description,area practice material, etc.)that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable,an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.)All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ---------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------- END OF GENERAL DECISIO" ARTICLE 19—PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SC-19.21 COOPERATION WITH PUBLIC AGENCIES C. For the Contractor's convenience,the following telephone numbers are listed: Supplementary Conditions 007300-14 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 2/2020 11' C 1 �• Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number City Engineer 361-826-3500 Turner I Ramirez Architects 361-994-8900 Traffic Engineering 361-826-3547 Police Department 361-882-2600 361-826-1800 (361-826-1818 after Water/Wastewater/Stormwater hours) Gas Department 361-885-6900 (361-885-6942 after hours) Parks & Recreation Department 361-826-3461 Street Department 361-826-1875 City Street Div. for Traffic Signals 361-826-1610 Solid Waste & Brush 361-826-1973 IT Department(City Fiber) 361-826-1956 AEP 1-877-373-4858 AT&T 361-881-2511 (1-800-824-4424 after hours) Grande Communications 1-866-247-2633 Spectrum Communications 1-800-892-4357 Crown Castle Communications 1-888-632-0931 (Network Operations Center) Centu ryLi n k 361-208-0730 Windstream 1-800-600-5050 Regional Transportation Authority 361-289-2712 Port of Corpus Christi Authority Engr. 361-882-5633 TxDOT Area Office 361-808-2500 Corpus Christi ISD 361-695-7200 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS Supplementary Conditions 007300-15 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 2/2020 11' C 1 1• SC-25.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following items: Refer to Section 0133 01 Submittal Register. Specification Section Shop Drawing Description SC-25.12 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed below: ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA SC-26.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Submit Record Data for the following items: Refer to Section 0133 01 Submittal Register. Specification Section Record Data Description END OF SECTION Supplementary Conditions 007300-16 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 2/2020 11' C 1 1• 011100 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Construct Work as described in the Contract Documents. 1. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the Project completely and fully useable. 2. Provide the labor, equipment,tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete Project. 3. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OAR. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as: 1. The Police Training Academy will be located on approximately(8.26)acres off Yorktown Boulevard at Del Mar College's new South Campus. The facility is an estimated 32,000 square feet and may include a two story and high bay sections of the building. The Police Training Academy program is understood to include the following: large training classrooms, administrative offices, resource room, research library, breakroom, armory, physical training spaces,an outdoor track, and secure Patrol Car parking. This new facility will be designed to maintain the current Phase 1A campus aesthetics for a unified and cohesive campus. The program is anticipated to be refined and verified to provide the design and construction of a facility that can be utilized not only for the training of cadets but also as a Regional Police Training Academy. 1.03 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The following items of work are not included in this Contract, but may impact construction scheduling and completion: 1. None. B. In the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents,the Contractor is to base his Proposal on the most expensive listing. C. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction and testing of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. Summary of Work 011100-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 10/2018 11' C 1 �• 1.04 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner plans to perform the following items of work which are not included in this Contract, but may impact the construction scheduling and completion: 1. None. B. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. C. Owner will provide normal operation and maintenance of the existing facilities during construction, unless otherwise stated. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES A. Pay for temporary power, including but not limited to construction cost, meter connection fees, and permits. 1.06 USE PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION A. Owner has the right to use or operate any portion of the Project that is ready for use after notifying the Contractor of its intent to do so. B. The execution of Bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions for use of the Project. C. Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting use of Project during the remaining period of construction. D. Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public. 2.00 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Summary of Work 011100-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 10/2018 11' C 1 �• 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Alternates: 1. This Section describes each alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work when this alternate is made a part of the Work in the Agreement. 2. Drawings and Specifications will outline the extent of Work to be included in the alternate Contract Price. 3. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to properly integrate the Work under each alternate,and provide a complete and functional Project as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bids for alternates may be accepted or rejected at the option of the Owner. 5. Owner may incorporate these alternates in the Contract when executed, or may issue a Change Order to incorporate these alternates within 120 days at the prices offered in the Bid, unless noted otherwise. A Request for a Change Proposal may be issued after 120 days or other designated time period to negotiate a new price for incorporating the Work into the Project. B. The Bid Items described as"Allowances" have been set as noted in Section 00 30 01 Bid Form and shall be included in the Total Base Bid of the Bid Form for each Bidder. These Allowances may be used at the Owner's discretion in the event that unforeseen conditions or conflicts are encountered during construction that warrants the use of the Allowance funds. If the use of Allowance funds becomes necessary, the OAR will provide written authorization at a cost negotiated between Owner and Contractor, using unit prices in the Bid Form when applicable. No work is to be performed under the Allowance items without written authorization from the OAR. There is no guarantee that any of these funds will need to be used during the course of the Work. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Provide documents for materials furnished as part of the alternate in accordance with Article 24 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate#1—Running Track: 1. A 400 meter synthetic running track will be provided B. Alternate#2—On-site Auxiliary Power Generator: 1. An Onsite Auxiliary power generator included in this alternate in order to provide power when facility becomes a EOC. Alternates and Allowances 012310-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 5/2020 11' C 1 �• C. Alternate #3 - Ceramic Tile on Wall Of A116 Men's &A111 Women's Locker Rooms, A114 Men's &A113 Women's Restrooms, A115 Men's &A112 Women's Showers, A118 Unisex Restroom: 1. Alternate includes the installing ceramic tile on walls at room A116 Men's Locker rooms, A111 Women's locker rooms, A114 Men's Restrooms, A113 Women's Restrooms,A115 Men's showers,A112 Women's showers,and A118 Unisex Restroom D. Alternate #4— Polished Concrete Floor at Corridors A100, 8104, B114 & Provide Ceramic Tile Floor At B100 Lobby: 1. Provide polished concrete floor at corridors A100, B104, B114& Provide ceramic Tile floor at 13100 Lobby E. Alternate#5—2x4 Tectum Ceilings at B211 Auditorium Classroom: 1. Provide 2x4 Tectum Ceilings at B211 Auditorium Classroom F. Alternate#6—Glass Wall Display at B100 Main Lobby: 1. Provide Blue Glass wall Display at B100 Main Lobby G. Alternate #7 —Access Flooring at B211 Auditorium Classroom & Spandrel Glass at Lower Window Glazing: 1. Provide access flooring at B211 Auditorium classroom & Spandrel Glass at Lower Window Glazing H. Alternate#8—Acoustical Metal Ceiling at 101 Weight/Exercise Room: 1. Provide Acoustical Metal Ceiling at A101 Weight/Exercise Room 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance A—Bonds and Insurance 1. A maximum of 2% of the bid price to be used for the purchase of bonds and insurance required for the Project. B. Allowance B- :Allowance for Unforeseen Building Conditions During Construction: 1. The sum of$825,000.00 to be used for the purchase of Unforeseen Building Conditions During Construction C. Allowance C- HVAC T&B Allowance 1. The sum of$ 30,000.00 to be used for the purchase of HVAC Testing and Balance. D. Allowance E- Interior Graphics Allowance: 1. The sum of $10,000.00 to be used for the purchase of Graphic Occurs at Auditorium Classroom B211. 2.00 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Alternates and Allowances 012310-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 5/2020 11' C 1 �• 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for lump sum payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that lump sum item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each lump sum item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the lump sum price. B. Measurement for progress payments will be made on the basis of the earned value for each item shown as a percentage of the cost for the lump sum item as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. Payment at Final Completion will be equal to the total lump sum amount for that item. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON UNIT PRICE ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in unit price payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that unit price item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each unit price item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the unit price. B. Measurement for payments will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. Measurement will be as indicated for each unit price item. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR BASE BID ITEMS A. Bid Item A-1—Mobilization (Maximum 5%): 1. Include the following costs in this Bid item: a. Transportation and setup for equipment; b. Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds, and storage facilities; c. Salaries for preparation of documents required before the first Application for Payment; d. Salaries for field personnel assigned to the Project related to the mobilization of the Project; e. Demobilization; and f. Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 5/2020 11' C 1 �• 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: When at least 5% of the adjusted contract amount for construction is earned, 75% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. Upon substantial completion of all work under this Contract and removal of all equipment and materials from the Project site, the remaining 25% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. B. Bid Item A-2—Bonds and Insurance 1. Payment shall include all bonds and insurance required under the Contract Documents. 2. Payment for bonds and insurance will be based on the receipt of documentation of actual costs. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the rate or rates paid for all bonds and insurance. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of unique insurance as required and obtained specifically for this Project, not including the routine and general company insurance policies that are maintained for the course of conducting normal business operations. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of project specific bonds and insurance, not to exceed the bid amount or the verifiable costs of Project specific bonds and insurance incurred by the Contractor. C. Bid Item A-3—Storm Water Pollution Prevention 1. Payment shall include but not be limited to furnishing and submitting the SWPPP to TCEQ and Owner and updating the Plan during the Project as needed. All permits and required fees related to the SWPPP will be included in this item. 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: The initial pay application will include 50%of the lump sum bid amount minus retainage. The balance will be paid according to the percent of construction completion after 50%completion has occurred, minus retainage. D. Bid Item B-1—Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. E. Bid Item B-2—Concrete Forms and Reinforcement. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. F. Bid Item B-3—Concrete Finishing and Curing. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. G. Bid Item C-1—Unit Masonry Mortar and Reinforcing. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 5/2020 11' C 1 �• 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. H. Bid Item D-1—Structural Steel and Metal Framing. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. I. Bid Item D-2—Metal Fabrications. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. J. Bid Item D-3—Metal Pan Stairs and Pipe Railings. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. K. Bid Item D-4—Ornamental Railings. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. L. Bid Item E-1—Rough Carpentry. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. M. Bid Item E-2—Architectural Cabinets. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. N. Bid Item E-3—Plastic Paneling. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 5/2020 11' C 1 �• 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. O. Bid Item F-1—Waterproofing and Coatings. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. P. Bid Item F-2—Insulation. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Q. Bid Item F-3—Metal Roof Panels and Wall Panels. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. R. Bid Item F-4—Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. S. Bid Item F-5—Sheet Metal Flashing and Roof Accessories. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. T. Bid Item F-6—Firestopping. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. U. Bid Item F-7—Expansion Joints and Sealants. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. V. Bid Item G-1—Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 5/2020 11' C 1 �• 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. W. Bid Item G-2—Flush Wood Doors. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. X. Bid Item G-3—Access Doors and Frames. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Y. Bid Item G-4—Overhead Coiling Doors. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Z. Bid Item G-S—Vault Doors and Day Gates. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. AA. Bid Item G-6—Aluminum Storefronts Entrances and Curtain Walls. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. BB. Bid Item G-7—Door Hardware. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. CC. Bid Item G-B—Glazing. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 5/2020 11' C 1 �• 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. DD. Bid Item H-1—Gypsum and Non-Structural Metal Framing. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. EE. Bid Item H-2—Ceramic Tiling. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. FF. Bid Item H-3—Resilient Base and Tile Flooring. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. GG. Bid Item H-4—Resilient Athletic Flooring. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. HH. Bid Item H-5—Epoxy Resinous Flooring. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. ll. Bid Item H-6—Tile Carpeting. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. JJ. Bid Item H-7—Access Flooring. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. KK. Bid Item H-8—Sound-Absorbing Ceiling Wood-Fiber Units. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 5/2020 11' C 1 �• 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. LL. Bid Item H-9—Painting and High-Performance. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. MM.Bid Item 1-1—Visual Display Units. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. NN. Bid Item 1-2—Plaques, Dimensional Letter and Room-Identification Panel Signage. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. 00. Bid Item 1-3—Plastic Toilet Compartments. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. PP. Bid Item 1-4—Wire Mesh Partition. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. QQ. Bid Item 1-5—Vertically Retractable Acoustic Partitions. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. RR. Bid Item 1-6—Wall And Door Protection. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 5/2020 11' C 1 �• 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. SS. Bid Item 1-7—Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. TT. Bid Item 1-8—Fire Protection Cabinets and Extinguishers. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. UU. Bid Item 1-9—Plastic Lockers. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. VV. Bid Item 1-10—Exterior Sun Control Devices and Aluminum Protective Covers. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. WW. Bid Item 1-11—Ground-Set Flagpoles. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. XX. Bid Item J-1—Roller Window Shades. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. YY. Bid Item J-2—Solid Surfacing Countertops. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. ZZ. Bid Item J-3—Entrance Floor Mats and Frames. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 5/2020 11' C 1 �• 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. AAA. Bid Item K-1—Hydraulic Elevators. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. BBB.Bid Item L-1— Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. CCC.Bid Item M-1—Mechanical Equipment. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. DDD. Bid Item M-2—Chilled Water Piping. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. EEE. Bid Item M-3—Ductwork. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. FFF. Bid Item M-4—Controls. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. GGG. Bid Item M-5—Electrical Switchgear/Panels. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 5/2020 11' C 1 �• 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. HHH. Bid Item M-6—Light Fixtures. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. III. Bid Item M-7—General Grounding/Bonding. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. JJJ. Bid Item M-8—Lighting Protection System. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. KKK.Bid Item M-9—Site/Utility Duct and Raceways. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. LLL. Bid Item M-10—Building Raceways/Circuitry. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. MMM. Bid Item M-11—Plumbing Equipment/Fixtures. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. NNN. Bid Item M-12—DWV/Water Piping. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. 000. Bid Item M-13—Natural Gas Piping. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-10 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 5/2020 11' C 1 �• 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. PPP. Bid Item N-1—Grounding and Bonding. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. QQQ. Bid Item N-2—Underground Duct and Raceways. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. RRR.Bid Item N-3—Backbone and Horizontal Cabling. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. SSS. Bid Item N-4—Audio Visual Infrastructure. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. TTT. Bid Item N-5—Electronic Security,Access Control and Intrusion Detection. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. UUU. Bid Item N-6—Video Surveillance. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. VVV.Bid Item N-7—Fire Detection and Alarm System. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-11 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 5/2020 11' C 1 �• 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. WWW. Bid Item 0-1—Soils for Earthwork. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. XXX.Bid Item 0-2—Site Excavation and Fill. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. YYY. Bid Item 0-3— Rough and Site Grading. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. ZZZ. Bid Item 0-4—Termite Control. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. AAAA. Bid Item 0-5—Clearing, Grubbing and Stripping. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. BBBB. Bid Item 0-6— Lime Stabilized Subgrade. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. CCCC. Bid Item P-1—Concrete Pavement, Curb, Gutter, Valley Gutter, Sidewalk, Driveways and Pavement Markings. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-12 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 5/2020 11' C 1 �• DDDD. Bid Item P-2—Decorative Metal Fence and Gates. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. EEEE. Bid Item P-3—Underground Sprinkler, Common Planting Requirements,Soil Preparation, Sodding and Plants. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. FFFF. Bid Item Q-1—Reinforced Concrete Pipe. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. GGGG. Bid Item Q-2—Waterlines, PVC Pipes, Ductile Iron Pipe and Fitting. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. HHHH. Bid Item Q-3—Waterline Riser Assemblies and Gate Valves. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. llll. Bid Item Q-4—Fire Hydrants. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. JJJJ. Bid Item Q-5—Gravity Sanitary Sewer and Catch Basins. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. KKKK. Bid Item R-1—Site Work Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-13 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 5/2020 11' C 1 �• 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. LLLL.Bid Item R-2—Subgrade 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. MMMM. Bid Item R-3—Concrete 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. NNNN. Bid Item R-4—Concrete Miscellaneous 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. 0000. Bid Item R-5—Field Drainage System 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. PPPP. Bid Item R-6—Track Asphalt& Base 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. QQQQ. Bid Item R-7—Synthetic Running Track Surface 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. RRRR. Bid Item 5-1—Automatic Transfer Switch. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-14 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 5/2020 11' C 1 �• 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. SSSS. Bid Item S-2—Natural Gas Fueled Stand-by generator 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. TTTT. Bid Item T-1—Ceramic Tiles 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. UUUU. Bid Item U-1—Polished Concrete 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. VVVV. Bid Item U-2—Ceramic Tiles 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. WWWW. Bid Item V-1—Tectum Ceilings 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. XXXX. Bid Item W-1—Glass Wall Display 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. YYYY. Bid Item X-1—Access Flooring 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. ZZZZ. Bid Item X-2—Spandrel Glass Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-15 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 5/2020 11' C 1 �• 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. AAAAA.Bid Item Y-1—Acoustical Metal Ceiling 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. BBBBB. Bid Item Z-1—Allowance for Unforeseen Building Conditions During Construction. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. CCCCC. Bid Item Z-2—HVAC T&B Allowance. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. DDDDD. Bid Item Z-3—Interior Graphics Allowance. 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the architect. 2.00 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-16 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 5/2020 0133 01 Submittal Register 100%RE-BID Documents 03 1000 Concrete Forms and Accessories 1.3 Record Data O&M Manual 03 20 00 lConcret Reinforcement 1.3 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 03 20 00 Concret Reinforcement 1.3-A Record Data 03 20 01 Concrete Reinforcemet Civil Sitework 3.5 Shop Drawing 03 30 00 Cast in Place Concrete 1.3 Record Data O&M Manual 03 3500 Concrete Finishing 1.3 Record Data 03 35 00 Concrete Finishing 1.4 O&M Manual 03 3900 Concret Curing 1.3 Record Data 03 60 00 Grout Part 1 Record Data Sample 03 35 43 Polished Concrete Finishing 1.4-B Shop Drawing 03 35 43 Polished Concrete Finishing 1.4-C Record Data 03 35 43 Polished Concrete Finishing 1.4-F O&M Manual 03 35 43 Polished Concrete Finishing 2.3-E Mockup 04 05 14 Masonry Mortar and Grout 1.3 Record Data 04 20 00 Unit Masonry 1.4-A Record Data 04 20 00 Unit Masonry 1.4-B Shop Drawing 04 20 00 Unit Masonry 1.4-C;D Sample 04 20 00 Unit Masonry 1.7 Mockup 04 20 16 Reinforced Unit Masonry Assemblies 1.4-A;C Record Data 04 20 16 Reinforced Unit Masonry Assemblies 1.4-B Shop Drawing 05 1200 Structural Steel 1.3-A;C;D; Record Data E 05 1200 IStructural Steel 1.3-B Shop Drawing 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 1.4 Record Data 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 1.4-C Shop Drawing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 1.3-A Record Data 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 1.3-B Shop Drawing 05 5113 Metal Pan Stairs 1.3-A Record Data 05 51 13 Metal Pan Stairs 1.3-B Shop Drawing 0552 13 Pipe and Tube Reilin 1.2-A Record Data 0552 13 Pipe and Tube Reilin 1.2-B•C Shop Drawing 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 1.3 Record Data 06 41 16 Plastic Laminate-Clad Architectural Cebinets 1.3-A Record Data 06 41 16 Plastic Laminate-Clad Architectural Cebinets 1.3-B Shop Drawing 06 41 16 Plastic Laminate-Clad Architectural Cebinets 1.3-C Sample 06 64 00 Plastic Paneling 1.3-A Record Data 06 64 00 Plastic Paneling 1.3-B Sample 07 11 13 Bituminous Damproofing 1.2 Record Data 07 13 26 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing 1.2 Record Data 07 13 26 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing 1.3 Sample 07 19 17 Anti-Graffiti Coatings 1.2 Record Data 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 1.2 Record Data 07 25 00 Gypsum Board Weather and Air Barrier Fluid-Applied 1.5-B Record Data 07 25 00 Gypsum Board Weather and Air Barrier Fluid-Applied 1.5-D Shop Drawing 07 25 00 Gypsum Board Weather and Air Barrier Fluid-Applied 1.5-F Sample 07 27 20 Fluid Applied Air Barrier 1.6-ABC Record Data 07 27 20 Fluid Applied Air Barrier 1.6-D Shop Drawing 07 27 20 Fluid Applied Air Barrier 1.6-E Sample 07 27 20 Fluid Applied Air Barrier 1.8 Mockup 07 27 20 Fluid Applied Air Barrier 3.10 O&M Manual 0741 13.16 Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels 1.4-A Record Data 0741 13.16 Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels 1.4-13 Shop Drawing 07 4113.16 Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels 1.4-C Sample 07 4113.16 Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels 3.6 O&M Manual 0742 13.13 Formed Metal Wall Panels I Shop Drawing 0742 13.13 Formed Metal Wall Panels 1.3-B I Record Data Submittal Register 01 33 01-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/2018 0133 01 Submittal Register 100%RE-BID Documents 07 42 13.13 Formed Metal Wall Panels 1.3-C Sam le 0742 13.13 lFormed Metal Wall Panels 3.6 O&M Manual 0752 16 Styrene Butadiene Stryrene(SBS)Modified Bituminous 1.3-A,B Record Data Membrane Roofing 0752 16 Styrene Butadiene Stryrene(SBS)Modified Bituminous 1.3-C Shop Drawing Membrane Roofin 0752 16 Styrene Butadiene Stryrene(SBS)Modified Bituminous 1.3-D Sample Membrane Roofing 0752 16 Styrene Butadiene Stryrene(SBS)Modified Bituminous 1.4,3.15 O&M Manual Membrane Roofing 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 1.5-A,B Record Data 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 1.5-C Shop Drawing 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 1.5-D,E Sample 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 3.8 O&M Manual 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 1.8-A Shop Drawing 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 1.8-B Sample 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 1.9-B O&M Manual 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 1.9-A Record Data 07 84 13 Penetration Firesto in 1.3-1.4 Record Data 07 84 43 Joint Firestopping 1.2 Record Data 07 84 43 Joint Firesto in 1.4 O&M Manual 07 91 00 Preformed Expansion Joints 1.2-A Shop Drawing 07 91 00 Preformed Expansion Joints 1.2-B Record Data 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 1.2-A Record Data 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 1.2-B Sample 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 1.4 O&M Manual 0792 19 Acoustical Joint Sealants 1.2-A Record Data 0792 19 Acoustical Joint Sealants 1.2-B Sample 0811 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1.2-A Record Data 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1.2-B Shop Drawing 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 1.2-A Record Data 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 1.2-B Shop Drawing 0831 13 Access Doors and Frames 1.2-1.3 Record Data 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 1.2-A Record Data 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 1.2-B Shop Drawing 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 1.2-C Sample 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 1.4 O&M Manual 08 34 59 Vault Doors and Day Gates 1.3-A Record Data 08 34 59 Vault Doors and Day Gates 1.3-B,C Shop Drawing 083459 Vault Doors and Day Gates 1.3-D Sample 083459 Vault Doors and Day Gates 1.5 O&M Manual 0841 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 1.3-A Record Data 0841 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 1.3-B Shop Drawing 0841 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 1.3-C Sample 0841 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 1.5 1 O&M Manual 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 1.3-A Record Data 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 1.3-B Shop Drawing 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 1.3-C Sample 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 1.5 O&M Manual 08 71 00 Door Hardware 1.5 Record Data 08 80 00 Glazing 1.4-A Record Data 08 80 00 Glazing 1.4-B Sample 08 80 00 Glazing 1.7 O&M Manual 09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing 1.2 Record Data 09 24 00 Cement Plastering Stucco 1.2-A Record Data 09 24 00 Cement Plastering Stucco 1.2-B Sample 09 29 00 lGy sum Board 1.3-A Record Data 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 1.3-B Sample 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 1.4-C Mockup Submittal Register 01 33 01-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/2018 0133 01 Submittal Register 100%RE-BID Documents 09 30 13 Ceramic Tile 1.2-A Record Data 09 30 13 lCeramic Tile 1.2-B Sample 09 30 13 Ceramic Tile 1.3-A Mockup 0951 13 Acoustical Panels Celin s 1.2-A,1.3 Record Data 0951 13 Acoustical Panels Celin s 1.2-B Sample 09 51 13 Acoustical Panels Celin s 1.4 O&M Manual 0965 13 Resilient Base and Accessories 1.2-A,B Record Data Sample 0965 13 Resilient Base and Accessories 1.4 O&M Manual 0965 19 Resilient Tile Flooring 1.2-A,B Record Data Sample 09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring 1.3 O&M Manual 09 65 66 Resilient Athletic Flooring 1.3-A Record Data 09 65 66 Resilient Athletic Flooring 1.3-B Shop Drawing 09 65 66 Resilient Athletic Flooring 1.3-C,D Sample 09 65 66 Resilient Athletic Flooring 1.5 O&M Manual 09 67 23 Epoxy Resinous Flooring 1.3-A,B,E Record Data Sample O&M Manual 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting 1.2-A,B Record Data Sample 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting 1.4 O&M Manual 09 69 00 Access Flooring 1.4-A,B Shop Drawing Sample 09 69 00 Access Flooring 1.4-C Record Data 09 84 36.16 Sound-Absorbing Ceiling Wood-Fiber Units 1.3-A Record Data 09 84 36.16 Sound-Absorbing Ceiling Wood-Fiber Units 1.3-B Shop Drawing 09 84 36.16 Sound-Absorbing Ceiling Wood-Fiber Units 1.3-C D Sample 09 91 13 1 Painting 1.4-A Record Data 09 91 13 Painting 1.4-B Sample 09 96 00 High-Performance Coatings 1.3-A Record Data 09 96 00 High-Performance Coatings 1.3-B C Sample 10 11 00 Visual Display Units 1.2-A Record Data 10 11 00 Visual Display Units 1.2-B Shop Drawing 10 11 00 Visual Display Units 1.2-C D Sample 10 11 00 Visual Display Units 1.4 O&M Manual 10 14 16 Plaques 1.2-A Record Data 10 14 16 Plaques 1.2-B Shop Drawing 10 14 16 Plaques 1.2-C Sample 10 14 19 Dimensional Letter Signage 1.2-A Record Data 10 14 19 Dimensional Letter Signage 1.2-B,C Shop Drawing Sample 10 14 19 Dimensional Letter Signage 1.4-A O&M Manual 10 14 23.16 Room-Identification Panel Signage 1.2-A Record Data 10 14 23.16 Room-Identification Panel Signage 1.2-B,C Shop Drawing Sample 10 14 23.16 Room-Identification Panel Signage 1.3 O&M Manual 10 21 13.19 Plastic Toilet Compartments 1.2-A Record Data 10 21 13.19 Plastic Toilet Compartments 1.2-B,C Shop Drawing Sample 10 21 13.19 Plastic Toilet Compartments 1.4 O&M Manual 1022 13 Wire Mesh Parititions 1.3-A Record Data 1022 13 Wire Mesh Parititions 1.3-B C Shop Drawing Sample 10 22 37 Vertically Folding Panel Partitions 1.3-A Record Data 10 22 37 Vertically Folding Panel Partitions 1.3-B Shop Drawing 10 22 37 Vertically Folding Panel Partitions 1.3-C D Sample 10 22 37 Vertically Folding Panel Partitions 1.5 O&M Manual 10 26 00 Wall and Door Protection 1.2-A Record Data 10 26 00 Wall and Door Protection 1.2-B Shop Drawing 10 28 00 Toilet Bath and Laundry Accessories 1.2-A B 1 Record Data Sample 10 28 00 Toilet Bath and Laundry Accessories 1.4 O&M Manual 1044 13 Fire Protection Cabinets 1.2-A Record Data 10 44 13 Fire Protection Cabinets 1.2-B Shop Drawing 1044 16 Fire Extinguishers 1.3-A Record Data 10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers 1.4-A Sample 10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers 1 1.5 1 O&M Manual 1051 26 Plastic Lockers 1.3-A Record Data 1051 26 Plastic Lockers 1.3-B Shop Drawing Submittal Register 01 33 01-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/2018 0133 01 Submittal Register 100%RE-BID Documents 1051 26 Plastic Lockers 1.3-C D Sam le 10 51 26 Plastic Lockers 1.5 O&M Manual 1071 13 Exterior Sun Control Devices 1.4-A,D Sample 1071 13 Exterior Sun Control Devices 1.4-B Record Data 1071 13 Exterior Sun Control Devices 1.4-C Shop Drawing 1073 10 Aluminum Protective Covers 1.4-A Record Data 1073 10 Aluminum Protective Covers 1.4-B Shop Drawing 10 73 10 Aluminum Protective Covers 1.4-C Sample 1075 16 Ground Set Flagpoles 1.2 Record Data 12 24 13 Roller Window Shades 1.2-A Record Data 12 24 13 Roller Window Shades 1.2-B,D Sample O&M Manual 12 36 61.16 Solid Surfacing Countertops 1.2-A Record Data 12 36 61.16 iSolid Surfacing Countertops 1.2-B,C Sho Drawin Sam le 12 36 61.16 Solid Surfacing Countertops 1.3 O&M Manual 12 48 13 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames 1.3 Record Data 12 48 13 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames 1.4 O&M Manual 14 24 00 H drailic Elevators 1.2-A Record Data 14 24 00 H drailic Elevators 1.2-B,E Shop Drawing O&M Manual 210201 Coordination Drawings 1.2 Shop Drawing 21 13 00 Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems 1.4 Record Data 21 13 00 Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems 1.4 Shop Drawing 22 02 01 Coordination Drawings 1.2 Shop Drawing 22 03 00 Commissioning of Plumbing Systems 3.8 Record Data 22 03 00 Commissioning of Plumbing Systems 3.8 O&M Manual 22 05 00 Basic Materials and Methods 1.13 Record Data 22 05 00 Basic Materials and Methods 1.13-E Shop Drawing 22 05 00 Basic Materials and Methods 1.16 1.18 O&M Manual 22 14 00 Support and Anchors 1.05 Shop Drawing 22 14 00 Support and Anchors 1.05 Record Data 22 26 00 Piping Insulation 1.04-A Shop Drawing 22 26 00 Piping Insulation 1.04-B Record Data 22 41 00 Plumbing,Piping,and Valves 1.04 Record Data 22 41 00 Plumbing,Piping,and Valves 1.06 1 O&M Manual 22 43 00 Plumbing Specialties 1.05-1.06 Record Data 22 43 00 Plumbing Specialties 1.07 O&M Manual 22 44 00 Plumbing Fixtures 1.04-A Shop Drawing 22 44 00 Plumbing Fixtures 1.04-B,C Record Data O&M Manual 22 45 00 Plumbing Equipment 1.04-B Shop Drawing 22 45 00 Plumbing Equipment 1.04-C Record Data 22 45 00 Plumbing Equipment 1.05 O&M Manual 23 02 01 Coordination Drawings 1.2 Shop Drawing 23 03 00 Commissioning of HVAC Systems 1.3 Record Data 23 03 00 Commissioning of HVAC Systems 3.8 O&M Manual 23 05 00 Basic Materials and Methods 1.12 Shop Drawing 23 05 00 Basic Materials and Methods 1.13 Record Data 23 05 00 Basic Materials and Methods 1.16-1.18 O&M Manual 23 1400 Support and Anchors 1.05 Shop Drawing 23 1700 Motors and Motor Controllers 1.04-A Shop Drawing 23 1700 Motors and Motor Controllers 1.04-B Record Data 23 1720 Variable Frequency Drives 1.04-A Shop Drawing 23 1720 Variable Frequency Drives 1.04-B Record Data 23 1720 Variable Frequency Drives 1.06-2.01 O&M Manual 23 24 00 Sound and Vibration Control 1.04-A Shop Drawing 23 24 00 lSound and Vibration Control 1.04-B Record Data 23 26 00 Piping Insulation 1.04-A Shop Drawing 23 26 00 Piping Insulation 1.04-B 1 Record Data 23 28 00 Equipment Insulation 1.04-A Shop Drawing 23 28 00 Equipment Insulation 1.04-B Record Data 23 29 00 Duct Insulation 1.04-A Shop Drawing Submittal Register 01 33 01-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/2018 0133 01 Submittal Register 100%RE-BID Documents 23 29 00 Duct Insulation 1.04-B Record Data 23 51 21 Expansion Compensation 1.04-A Shop Drawing 23 51 21 Expansion Compensation 1.04-B Record Data 23 51 21 Expansion Compensation 1.06 O&M Manual 2355 10 H dronic Piping Above Gade 1.06 Record Data 2355 11 H dronic Piping Below Grade 1.06 Record Data 2355 15 H dronic Specialties 1.05 O&M Manual 23 55 40 HVAC Pum 1.05-A Shop Drawing 23 55 40 HVAC Pum 1.05-B Record Data 23 55 40 HVAC Pum 1.06 O&M Manual 23 58 55 Applied Air Handling Unit 1.05 Shop Drawing 23 58 58 Series Fan Powered Terminal Box 1.05 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 23 86 00 Power Ventilators 1.04-1,2 Record Data 23 86 00 Power Ventilators 1.04-3 Shop Drawing 23 88 10 Air Distribution Devices 1.04-A Record Data 23 88 10 Air Distribution Devices 1.04-B Shop Drawing 23 88 10 Air Distribution Devices 1.04-C O&M Manual 23 89 00 Metal Ductwork 1.05 Record Data 23 91 00 Ductwork Accessories 1.04 Shop Drawing 23 95 00 Energy Management and Control System 1.06 Shop Drawing 23 95 00 Energy Management and Control System 1.06 Record Data O&M Manual 23 99 00 Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing 1.06 Record Data 26 01 00 Electrical General Provisions 1.09 Record Data 26 01 00 Electrical General Provisions 1.04 Shop Drawing 26 02 01 Coordination Drawings 1.02 Shop Drawing 26 06 00 Grounding 1.03-1.04 Record Data 26 07 50 Electrical Identification 1.03 Record Data 26 12 30 Wire and Cable 1.03-1.04 Record Data 26 13 60 Raceways 1.03-1.04 Record Data 26 14 00 Wiring Devices 1.03 Record Data 26 24 16 Panelboards 1.03-1.04 Record Data 26 33 00 Automatic Transfer Switch 1.04 Shop Drawing 2641 19 1 Lighting Protection Part 1-C Shop Drawing 2641 19 Lighting Protection Part 1-D Record Data 2643 13 Sure Protection Devices 1.3 Shop Drawing 2643 13 Sure Protection Devices 1.3 Record Data 26 44 10 Disconnect Switches 1.04 Shop Drawing 26 44 10 Disconnect Switches 1.05-1.06- Record Data O&M Manual 1.10 26 44 61 Dry Type Distribution Transformers 1.04-1.05 Record Data 26 51 00 Luminaires 1.04-A,B Record Data 26 51 00 Luminaires 1.04-C Shop Drawing 27 00 00 Communications 1.15-D-5 Shop Drawing 27 00 00 Communications 1.15-D-6 Record Data 27 00 00 Communications 1.15-D-10 Sample 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding 1.4 Record Data 27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems 1.3 Record Data 27 05 43 Underground Duct&Raceways 1.3 Record Data 27 11 00 Communications Room Fittings 1.4 Record Data 27 13 00 Backbone Cabling 1.3 Record Data 27 15 00 Horizontal Cabling 1.3 Record Data 27 41 13 Audio Visual Infrastructure 1.4-A-1 Record Data 27 41 13 Audio Visual Infrastructure 1.4-A-2 Shop Drawing 28 00 00 Electronic Security 1.5-B-3 Record Data 28 00 00 Electronic Security 1.5-B-4 Shop Drawing 28 00 00 Electronic Security 1.5-E O&M Manual 28 02 01 Coordination Drawings 28 10 00 Access Control and Intrusion Detection _41.6 Record Data 28 23 00 Video Surveillance 1.4-B Record Data Submittal Register 01 33 01-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/2018 0133 01 Submittal Register 100%RE-BID Documents 28 23 00 Video Surveillance 1.4-D Shop Drawing 28 31 00 lFire Detection and Alarm System 1.4 Shop Drawing O&M Manual 28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm System 1.4 Record Data 3105 13 Soild for Earthwork Part 1 Record Data 3131 16 Termite Control 1.3 Record Data 3132 15 Lime Stabilized Subgrade Entire Record Data Section 3223 18 Synthetic Running Track 1.6 Record Data 3231 19 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates 1.3-A Record Data 3231 19 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates 1.3-B,C Shop Drawing Sample 32 31 19 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates 1.4 O&M Manual 32 84 23 Underground Sprinklers 1.4 Record Data O&M Manual 32 90 01 Common Planting Requirements 1.3 Record Data O&M Manual 32 91 13 Soil Preparation 1.4 Record Data O&M Manual 32 92 23 Sodding 1.3 Record Data O&M Manual 32 93 00 Plants 1.3 Record Data O&M Manual 33 1100 Waterlines Part 1 Record Data 33 1113 PVC Pie Part 1 Record Data 33 11 14 Ductline Iron Pipe and Fittings Part 1 Record Data 33 11 16 Waterline Riser Assemblies Part 1 Record Data 33 12 13 Water Service Lines Part 1 Record Data 33 12 16 Gate Valves for Waterlines Part 1 Record Data 33 12 16.11 Tapping Sleeves and Tapping Valves Part 1 Record Data 33 12 19 Fire Hydrants Part 1 Record Data 33 31 13 Gravity Sanitary Sewers Part 1 Record Data 33 44 13.13 Catch Basins Part 1 Record Data Submittal Register 01 33 01-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/2018 11' C 1 �• 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE A. Perform the Work as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times and in the sequence stipulated below: 1. Not applicable/Per Contractor means and methods. B. Work shall be completed within the specified time for these items: Description Time Not Applicable C. Consider the sequences, duration limitations, and governing factors outlined in this Section to prepare the schedule for the Work. D. Perform the Work not specifically described in this Section as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times. 1.02 PLAN OF ACTION A. Submit a written plan of action for approval for shutting down essential services. These include: 1. Electrical power, 2. Control power, 3. Pipelines or wastewater systems, 4. Communications equipment, and 5. Other designated functions. B. Describe the following in the plan of action: 1. Scheduled dates for construction; 2. Work to be performed; 3. Utilities, piping, or services affected; 4. Length of time the service or utility will be disturbed; 5. Procedures to be used to carry out the Work; 6. Plan of Action to handle emergencies; 7. List of manpower, equipment, and ancillary supplies; Special Procedures 013500-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 10/2018 11' C 1 1• 8. Backups for key pieces of equipment and key personnel; 9. Contingency plan that will be used if the original schedule cannot be met; and C. Submit plan 2 weeks [1 month] prior to beginning the Work. 1.03 CRITICAL OPERATIONS A. The Owner has identified critical operations that must not be out of service longer than the designated maximum time out of service and/or must be performed only during the designated times. These have been identified in the table below: Liquidated Critical Operation Max.Time Hours Operation Damages Out of Operation can be Shut Down ($ per hour) IT connection to fire TBD TBD Not Applicable station B. Submit a written plan of action per Paragraph 1.02 for approval for critical operations. C. Work affecting critical operations is to be performed on a 24-hour a day basis until Owner's normal operations have been restored. D. Provide additional manpower and equipment as required to complete the Work affecting critical operations within the allotted time. E. Liquidated damages will be assessed if Work on critical operations is not completed within the time indicated.—Not applicable 1. These items are critical to the [for operation of the existing distribution system] [other description of critical nature of operations]. 2. Loss of[operation of the existing distribution system] [other description of critical nature of operations] can subject the Owner to loss of revenue, additional operations cost, and fines from regulatory agencies. 3. Liquidated damages have been established for each critical operation. F. Designated Critical Operations are described in more detail as follows: 1. Critical Operation 1 - [Title from Table Above]: a. [Provide detailed description of Critical Operation 1.] G. Special Procedures 013500-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 10/2018 11' C 1 �• 2.00 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Special Procedures 013500-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 10/2018 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide temporary facilities, including OPT's field office and the Contractor's field offices, storage sheds, and temporary utilities needed to complete the Work. B. Install and maintain temporary Project identification signs. Provide temporary on-site informational signs to identify key elements of the construction facilities. Do not allow other signs to be displayed. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide a total electrical heating and cooling system for the OPT's field office capable of maintaining the following conditions: 1. Heating: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 10 degrees ambient. 2. Cooling: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 105 degrees ambient. 3. Relative humidity: 48 to 54 percent. B. Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for all required inspections and tests by regulatory agencies, and obtain required certifications and permits for use. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Arrange transportation, loading, and handling of temporary buildings and sheds. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Locate buildings and sheds at the Site as indicated or as approved by the OPT. B. Prepare the Site by removing trees, brush, or debris and performing demolition or grubbing needed to clear a space adequate for the structures. C. Pay for the utilities used by temporary facilities during construction. D. Provide each temporary service and facility ready for use at each location when the service or facility is first needed to avoid delay in the performance of the Work. Provide OPT's field office complete and ready for occupancy and use within 7 days of the Notice to Proceed. E. Maintain, expand as required, and modify temporary services and facilities as needed throughout the progress of the Work. F. Remove services and facilities when approved by the OAR. G. Operate temporary facilities in a safe and efficient manner. 1. Restrict loads on temporary services or facilities to within their designed or designated capacities. 2. Provide sanitary conditions. Prevent public nuisance or hazardous conditions from developing or existing at the Site. Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 8/2019 11' C 1 �• 3. Prevent freezing of pipes, flooding, or the contamination of water. 4. Maintain Site security and protection of the facilities. 1.05 OPTIONS A. Construction offices may be prefabricated buildings on skids or mobile trailers. B. Storage sheds may be prefabricated buildings on skids or truck trailers. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES—NOT REQUIRED A. The Contractor must furnish the OPT with a field office at the Site. The field office must contain at least 120 square feet of useable space. The field office must be air-conditioned and heated and must be furnished with an inclined table that measures at least 30 inches by 60 inches and two chairs. The Contractor shall move the field office on the Site as required by the OAR. There is no separate pay item for the field office. B. Furnish a field office of adequate size for Contractor's use. Provide conference room space for a minimum of 10 people. C. Other trades may provide their own offices only when space is available at the Site, and the OPT agrees to its size, condition, and location. D. No monthly partial payments will be processed until OPT's field office facilities are completed and approved. 2.02 TEMPORARY STORAGE BUILDINGS A. Furnish storage buildings of adequate size to store any materials or equipment delivered to the Site that might be affected by weather. 2.03 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide sanitary facilities at the Site from the commencement of the Project until Project conclusion. Maintain these facilities in a clean and sanitary condition at all times,and comply with the requirements of the local health authority. On large sites, provide portable toilets at such locations that no point in the Site shall be more than 600 feet from a toilet. B. Use these sanitary facilities. Do not use restrooms within existing or Owner-occupied buildings. 2.04 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide heating devices needed to protect buildings during construction. Provide fuel needed to operate the heating devices and attend the heating devices at all times they are in operation, including overnight operations. Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 8/2019 11' C 1 �• 2.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide the temporary utilities for administration, construction, testing, disinfection, and start-up of the Work, including electrical power, water, and telephone. Pay all costs associated with furnishing temporary utilities. 1. Provide a source of temporary electrical power of adequate size for construction procedures. a. Use existing power systems where spare capacity is available. Provide temporary power connections that do not adversely affect the existing power supply. Submit connections to the OAR for approval prior to installation. b. Provide electrical pole and service connections that comply with Laws and Regulations and the requirements of the power company. 2. Provide telephone service to the Site and install telephones inside the Contractor's and the OPT's field office. 2.06 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Provide temporary water. Potable water may be purchased from the Owner by obtaining a water meter from the Owner and transporting water from a water hydrant. Non-potable water may be used for hydraulic testing of non-potable basins or pipelines. Include the cost of water in the Contract Price. B. Contractor must comply with the City of Corpus Christi's Water Conservation and Drought Contingency Plan as amended (the "Plan"). This includes implementing water conservation measures established for changing conditions. The City Engineer will provide a copy of the Plan to Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The Contractor will keep a copy of the Plan on the Site throughout construction. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Locate temporary facilities in areas approved by the OAR. Construct and install signs at locations approved by the OAR. Install informational signs so they are clearly visible. 3.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. The Architect will provide design for two signs to be furnished and installed by the Contractor. The signs must be installed before construction begins and will be maintained throughout the Project period by the Contractor. The locations of the signs will be determined in the field by the OAR. 3.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide temporary lighting inside buildings once buildings are weatherproof. B. Provide lighting that is adequate to perform Work within any space. Temporary lights may be removed once the permanent lighting is in service. Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 8/2019 11' C 1 �• C. Provide portable flood lights at any time that Work will be performed outside the structure at night. Provide adequate lighting at any location Work is being performed. 3.04 DRINKING WATER A. Provide all field offices with potable water. Provide a dispenser and cooling apparatus if bottled drinking water is provided. B. Pay for water services and maintain daily. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION FENCE A. Install and maintain a construction fence around the Site and off-site storage yards. Fence must be a minimum 6 feet high chain link construction unless shown otherwise. Provide gates with padlocks. 3.06 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Remove temporary buildings,sheds, and utilities at the conclusion of the Project and restore the Site to original condition or finished in accordance with the Drawings. B. Remove informational signs upon completion of construction. C. Remove Project identification signs,framing, supports, and foundations upon completion of the Project. 3.07 MAINTENANCE AND JANITORIAL SERVICE A. Provide janitorial service (sweeping/mopping) for the OPT's field office on a weekly basis or as requested. Empty trash receptacles daily or as needed. B. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition. Repair damage to structures, framings, or signs. C. Repair any damage to Work caused by placement or removal of temporary signage. D. Service, maintain, and replace, if necessary, the OPT's field office computer equipment throughout the Project as required by the OPT including replacement cartridges for all office equipment. END OF SECTION Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 8/2019 11' C 1 �• 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. B. Construct temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the Site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the Project. C. Provide a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) as required by Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Permit No. TXR150000 for stormwater discharges from construction activities as applicable to the nature and size of the Project. Comply with all requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ)and Laws and Regulations. File required legal notices and obtain required permits prior to beginning any construction activity. D. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to prevent stormwater pollution for the duration of the Project. Provide and maintain erosion and sediment control structures as required to preventive sediment and other pollutants from the Site from entering any stormwater system including open channels. Remove pollution control structures when no longer required to prevent stormwater pollution. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and maintain temporary controls with adequate workmanship using durable materials to provide effective environmental management systems meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. Use materials that require minimal maintenance to prevent disruption of construction activities while providing adequate protection of the environment. B. Periodically inspect systems to determine that they are meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.03 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Provide documents requiring approval by the OPT as Shop Drawings in accordance with Article 25 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. B. Provide copies of notices, records, and reports required by the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Provide a SWPPP that complies with all requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. Temporary Controls 015700-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 8/2019 11' C 1 �• B. Perform Work to comply with the City of Corpus Christi Code of Ordinances, Part III, Chapter 14, Article X - titled "STORM WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLANS" and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. 1.05 PERMITS A. As applicable, submit the following to the TCEQ and the Operator of any Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) receiving stormwater discharges from the Site: 1. Notice of Intent (NOI) at least 48 hours prior to beginning construction activity. Construction activity may commence 24 hours after the submittal of an electronic NOI. 2. Notice of Change (NOC) letter when relevant facts or incorrect information was submitted in the NOI, or if relevant information in the NOI changes during the course of construction activity. 3. Notice of Termination (NOT) when the construction Project has been completed and stabilized. B. Post a copy of the NOI at the Site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public and as required by Laws and Regulations prior to starting construction activities and maintain the posting until completion of the construction activities. C. Maintain copies of a schedule of major construction activities, inspection reports, and revision documentation with the SWPPP. 1.06 STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL A. Comply with the current requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 as set forth by the TCEQ for the duration of the Project as applicable to the nature of the work and the total disturbed area: 1. Develop a SWPPP meeting all requirements of the TPDES General Permit. 2. Submit of a Notice of Intent to the TCEQ. 3. Develop and implement appropriate Best Management Practices as established by local agencies of jurisdiction. 4. Provide all monitoring and/or sampling required for reporting to the TCEQ. S. Submit reports to the TCEQ as required as a condition of the TPDES General Permit. 6. Submit copies of the reports to the Designer as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 7. Retain copies of these documents at the Site at all times for review and inspection by the OPT or regulatory agencies. Post a copy of the permit as required by Laws and Regulations. 8. Assume sole responsibility for implementing, updating, and modifying the TPDES General Permit per Laws and Regulations for the SWPPP and Best Management Practices. B. Use forms required by the TCEQ to file the Notice of Intent. Submit the Notice of Intent at least 2 days prior to the start of construction. Develop the SWPPP prior to submitting the Temporary Controls 015700-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 8/2019 11' C 1 �• Notice of Intent. Provide draft copies of the Notice of Intent,SWPPP,and any other pertinent TCEQ submittal documents to Owner for review prior to submittal to the TCEQ. C. Return any property disturbed by construction activities to either specified conditions or pre- construction conditions as set forth in the Contract Documents. Provide an overall erosion and sedimentation control system that will protect all undisturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. Implement appropriate Best Management Practices and techniques to control erosion and sedimentation and maintain these practices and techniques in effective operating condition during construction. Permanently stabilize exposed soil and fill as soon as practical during the Work. D. Assume sole responsibility for the means, methods,techniques, sequences, and procedures for furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and sedimentation control structures and procedures and overall compliance with the TPDES General Permit. Modify the system as required to effectively control erosion and sediment. E. Retain copies of reports required by the TPDES General Permit for 3 years from date of Final Completion. 1.07 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Prevent the contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. Provide adequate measures to prevent the creation of noxious air-borne pollutants. Prevent dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. Do not dump or otherwise discharge noxious or harmful fluids into drains or sewers, nor allow noxious liquids to contaminate public waterways in any manner. B. Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures necessary to contain any spillage. 1. Contain chemicals in protective areas and do not dump on soil. Dispose of such materials at off-site locations in an acceptable manner. 2. Excavate contaminated soil and dispose at an off-site location if contamination of the soil does occur. Fill resulting excavations with suitable backfill and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. 3. Provide documentation to the Owner which states the nature and strength of the contaminant, method of disposal, and the location of the disposal site. 4. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding the disposal of pollutants. C. Groundwater or run-off water which has come into contact with noxious chemicals, sludge, or sludge-contaminated soil is considered contaminated. Contaminated water must not be allowed to enter streams or water courses, leave the Site in a non-contained form, or enter non-contaminated areas of the Site. 1. Pump contaminated water to holding ponds constructed by the Contractor for this purpose, or discharge to areas on the interior of the Site, as designated by the OAR. 2. Construct temporary earthen dikes or take other precautions and measures as required to contain the contaminated water and pump to a designated storage area. 3. Wash any equipment used for handling contaminated water or soil within contaminated areas three times with uncontaminated water prior to using such equipment in an Temporary Controls 015700-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 8/2019 11' C 1 �• uncontaminated area. Dispose of wash water used to wash such equipment as contaminated water. 1.08 EARTH CONTROL A. Remove excess soil, spoil materials, and other earth not required for backfill at the time of generation. Control stockpiled materials to eliminate interference with Contractor and Owner's operations. B. Dispose of excess earth off the Site. Provide written approval from the property owner for soils deposited on private property. Obtain approval of the Owner if this disposal impacts the use of Site or other easements. 1.09 OZONE ADVISORY DAYS—NOT APPLICABLE A. Do not conduct roofing, priming, or hot-mix paving operations, except for repairs, on days the City Engineer has notified Contractor that an ozone advisory is in effect. An extension of time will be allowed for each day for which priming or hot mix paving was scheduled, crews were prepared to perform this Work and the City Engineer issued ozone alert prevents this Work. Contractor will be compensated at the unit price indicated in the Bid for each day for which an extension of time was granted due to an ozone alert. 1.10 MANAGEMENT OF WATER A. Manage water resulting from rains or ground water at the Site. Maintain trenches and excavations free of water at all times. B. Lower the water table in the construction area by acceptable means if necessary to maintain a dry and workable condition at all times. Provide drains, sumps, casings, well points, and other water control devices as necessary to remove excess water. C. Provide continuous operation of water management actions. Maintain standby equipment to provide proper and continuous operation for water management. D. Ensure that water drainage does not damage adjacent property. Divert water into the same natural watercourse in which its headwaters are located, or other natural stream or waterway as approved by the Owner. Assume responsibility for the discharge of water from the Site. E. Remove the temporary construction and restore the Site in a manner acceptable to the OAR and to match surrounding material at the conclusion of the Work. 1.11 DEWATERING A. This item is considered subsidiary for all dewatering methods other than "well pointing" to the appropriate bid items as described in the Bid Form where dewatering is needed to keep the excavation dry, as approved by the Designer, and shall include all costs to provide a dry foundation for the proposed improvements. B. Storm water that enters an excavation can be pumped out as long as care is taken to minimize solids and mud entering the pump suction and flow is pumped to a location that allows for sheet flow prior to entering a storm water drainage ditch or storm water inlet. Temporary Controls 015700-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 8/2019 11' C 1 �• C. An alternative to sheet flow is to pump storm water to an area where ponding occurs naturally without leaving the designated work area or by a manmade berm(s) prior to entering the storm water system. Sheet flow and ponding is to allow solids screening and/or settling prior to entering a storm water conduit or inlet. D. Storm water or groundwater shall not be discharged to private property without permission. It is the intent that Contractor discharges groundwater primarily into the existing storm water system, provided that the quality of groundwater is equal to or better than the receiving stream,the Oso Creek. E. Testing of groundwater quality is to be performed by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, prior to commencing discharge and shall be retested by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, a minimum of once a week. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on all testing. Tests will also be performed as each new area of construction is started. F. Another option for disposal of groundwater by Contractor would include pumping to the nearest wastewater system. If discharging to temporary holding tanks and trucking to a wastewater or wastewater plant, the costs for these operations shall be negotiated. Other groundwater disposal alternatives or solutions may be approved by the Designer on a case by case basis. G. Prior to pumping groundwater from a trench to the wastewater system the Contractor shall contact Wastewater Pre-treatment Coordinator at 826-1817 to obtain a "no cost" permit from the Owner's Waste Water Department. Contractor will pay for any water quality testing or water analysis cost required. The permit will require an estimate of groundwater flow. Groundwater flow can be estimated by boring a hole or excavating a short trench then record water level shortly after completion, allow to sit overnight, record water level again, pump hole or trench dry to a holding tank or vacuum truck then record how long it takes to fill to original level and overnight level. 1.12 DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED GROUNDWATER—NOT APPLICABLE A. An allowance will be included in the Bid for the unanticipated disposal of contaminated groundwater. This allowance may not be needed but is provided in case contaminated groundwater is encountered during the course of the Project and does not meet the water quality requirements for discharge into the storm water or wastewater systems. This allowance includes all materials, tools, equipment, labor, transportation, hauling, coordination, and proper disposal of the contaminated water at an approved landfill, deep water injection well, or other site as agreed to by the Designer. Suggested disposal facilities would be [US Ecology (USET) in Robstown, Texas or Texas Molecular in Corpus Christi, Texas]. B. The payment for this Work will be based on the Contractor's actual costs and will be negotiated. Payment will not include costs associated with routine dewatering, which is considered subsidiary to the appropriate bid items as described in Paragraph 1.11. 1.13 DISPOSAL OF HIGHLY CHLORINATED WATER A. Dispose of water used for testing, disinfection, and line flushing. Comply with Owner's requirements and Laws and Regulation regarding the disposal of contaminated water, including water with levels of chlorine,which exceed the permissible limits for discharge into wetlands or environmentally sensitive areas. Comply with the requirements of all regulatory Temporary Controls 015700-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 8/2019 11' C 1 �• agencies in the disposal of all water used in the Project. Include a description and details for disposal of this water in a Plan of Action per SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. Do not use the Owner's wastewater system for disposal of contaminated water. 1.14 WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION A. All affected materials and installation shall comply with Texas Department of Insurance Requirements for windstorm resistant construction for design wind speed as required by the current version of the International Building Code (IBC). When applicable, Owner shall be responsible for contracting with a licensed structural engineer in the State of Texas to perform all inspections and provide documentation for windstorm certification to the Texas Board of Insurance. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary design/assembly documentation for all new windows, doors, louvers, etc. to the windstorm engineer/inspectors required to conform with the requirements of the Texas Department of Insurance. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials that comply with Laws and Regulations. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTING, MAINTAINING AND REMOVING TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Construct temporary controls in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B. Maintain controls in accordance with regulatory requirements where applicable, or in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Remove temporary controls when no longer required, but before the Project is complete. Correct any damage or pollution that occurs as the result of removing controls while they are still required. END OF SECTION Temporary Controls 015700-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 Rev 8/2019 11' T.- C-010-TAIN M, 014534 WINDSTORM CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provision of the contract, including general and supplements/conditions and other Division 1 specifications sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. All components and cladding must meet or exceed the wind load requirements as specified in this section. 1. Exterior wall and roof openings shall be protected with impact resistant covers or designed to meet impact resistance requirements. 2. All site lighting poles shall be designed to meet Windstorm Requirements. Design Engineer shall be responsible for windstorm certification. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Components and cladding: Elements assembled to form the exterior wall and roof systems that are either directly loaded by the wind or receive wind loads originating at relatively close locations, and that transfer those loads to the main wind force resisting system. Examples: Curtain walls, exterior glass windows and panels, roof sheathing, studs, soffits, HVAC equipment, etc. B. Exterior wall and roof openings: openings that are likely to be breached during high winds. 1. Examples: windows, doors, roof hatches, louvers, HVAC equipment and penetrations, etc. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Wind loads shall be determined from the pressures developed by a 120 mph wind velocity(ASD) (3 second gust) and an equivalent 155 mph wind velocity (LRFD), Exposure C, Risk Category III, and appropriate shape factor from the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7-16 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures". B. Impact resistance doors and windows are required. Windstorm Construction Requirements 014534-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' T.- C-0101TAIN M, 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. All components and cladding listed in the Texas Windstorm Approved Materials catalog shall have the appropriate product evaluation number indicated on the submittal. B. Components and cladding not listed will require certification that they meet or exceed the design requirements of this section by the manufacturer. C. Installation instructions indicating fasteners, minimum attachment requirements, and other necessary pertinent information for installation shall be submitted. D. Contractor shall coordinate the door and frame assemblies submitted with the hardware submitted to ensure that the combination of components has been tested and certified to be in accordance with wind load requirements. 1.6 EXECUTION A. The contractor shall provide, and have available at the job site, all necessary installation instructions during construction. B. Prior to installing and priorto covering or concealing the fasteners or connectors,the contractor shall notify the architect and engineer. DO NOT COVER UP FASTENERS WITHOUT HAVING THEM REVIEWED BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. C. Contractor shall furnish, upon completion,written confirmation of the installation and materials used of all components and cladding is in conformance with requirements of this section to the Architect and the Structural Engineer. D. Contractor shall include in their bid amount the cost of windstorm-related construction observations and windstorm certification by an approved Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas. PART 2-PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3-EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 0145 34 Windstorm Construction Requirements 014534-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formwork for cast-in place concrete. 2. Shoring, bracing, and anchorage. 3. Architectural form liners. 4. Form accessories. 5. Form stripping. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 032000-Concrete Reinforcement. 2. Section 033000-Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 117 -Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI 301 -Specifications for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 318- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 4. ACI 347 -Guide to Formwork for Concrete. B. American Forest and Paper Association: 1. AF&PA- National Design Specifications for Wood Construction. C. The Engineered Wood Association: 1. APA/EWA PS 1 -Voluntary Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood. D. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D1751 -Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types), 2. ASTM E96-Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. E. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau: 1. WCLIB-Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber. 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing in accordance with ACI 318 to conform to design and applicable code requirements to achieve concrete shape, line and dimension as indicated on Drawings. Concrete Forms and Accessories 031000-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Vapor Retarder Permeance: Maximum .01 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E1745. B. Vapor Retarder Strength: Meets ASTM E1745 Class A. C. All Accessories shall have a maximum .03 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E96. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 347 ACI 301 ACI 318. B. For wood products furnished for work of this Section, comply with AF&PA. C. Perform Work in accordance with State Municipality of Highways Public Work's standard. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Section 013000-Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate this Section with other sections of work, requiring attachment of components to formwork. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD FORM MATERIALS A. Form Materials: At discretion of Contractor. 2.3 PREFABRICATED FORMS G. Void Forms: Moisture resistant treated paper faces, biodegradable, structurally sufficient to support weight of wet concrete mix until initial set. 1. Manufacturers: 1. Surevoid (210) 441-4110 2. Reliable Void Forms, LLC(361) 549-0186 3. EFCO (210) 870-6903 2.2 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Vapor Retarder: Where indicated on Drawings, 15 mil thick polyethylene sheet manufacture by: 1. Stego Wrap Class A: by Stego Industries LLC(887)464-7834 Concrete Forms and Accessories 031000-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Griffolyn by Reef Industries (800) 231-6074 3. VaporBlock 10 by Raven Industries (800) 635-3456 4. Perminator Vapor—May by W.R. Meadows (800) 342-5976 5. Xtreme by Tex-Trude (281)452-5961 6. Or Equivalent B. Bituminous Joint Filler: ASTM D1751. C. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts,Anchorages: Size, strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. D. Water Stops: Rubber Polyvinyl chloride, minimum 1,750 psi tensile strength, minimum 50 degrees F to plus 175 degrees F working temperature range, inch wide, maximum possible lengths, ribbed profile, preformed corner sections, heat welded jointing. ****** OR ****** E. Waterstop: Flexible strip of bentonite waterproofing compound in coil form for joints in concrete construction. 1. Colloid Environmental Technologies Company Model. 2. TC Mira DRi Model. 3. Paramount Technical Products Model. 4. Substitutions: Section 016000- Product Requirements Not Permitted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 013000-Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify lines, levels, and centers before proceeding with formwork. Verify dimensions agree with Drawings. C. When formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement before proceeding, request instructions from Architect/Engineer. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Earth Forms: 1. Earth forms are not permitted. B. Formwork-General: 1. Provide top form for sloped surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical to hold shape of concrete during placement, unless it can be demonstrated that top forms can be omitted. 2. Construct forms to correct shape and dimensions, mortar-tight, braced, and of sufficient strength to maintain shape and position under imposed loads from construction operations. Concrete Forms and Accessories 031000-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3. Camber forms where necessary to produce level finished soffits unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 4. Carefully verify horizontal and vertical positions of forms. Correct misaligned or misplaced forms before placing concrete. 5. Complete wedging and bracing before placing concrete. C. Forms for Smooth Finish Concrete: 1. Use steel, plywood or lined board forms. 2. Use clean and smooth plywood and form liners, uniform in size, and free from surface and edge damage capable of affecting resulting concrete finish. 3. Install form lining with close-fitting square joints between separate sheets without springing into place. 4. Use full size sheets of form lines and plywood wherever possible. 5. Tape joints to prevent protrusions in concrete. 6. Use care in forming and stripping wood forms to protect corners and edges. 7. Level and continue horizontal joints. 8. Keep wood forms wet until stripped. D. Erect formwork, shoring, and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301 ACI 318. E. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores. F. Obtain Architect/Engineer's approval before framing openings in structural members not indicated on Drawings. G. Install fillet and chamfer strips on external corners of beams joists columns and. H. Install void forms in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. SureVoid Products, Inc., Englewood, CO (800)458-5444. I. Do not reuse wood formwork more than times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do not patch formwork. 3.3 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces are indicated to receive special finishes or applied coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete. D. Reuse and Coating of Forms:Thoroughly clean forms and reapply form coating before each reuse. For exposed work, do not reuse forms with damaged faces or edges.Apply form coating to forms in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. Do not coat Concrete Forms and Accessories 031000-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• forms for concrete indicated to receive "scored finish".Apply form coatings before placing reinforcing steel. 3.4 INSTALLATION - INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Install formed openings for items to be embedded in or passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items required to be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate with Work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other Work. D. Install accessories straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. E. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. F. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels,flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. G. Form Ties: 1. Use sufficient strength and sufficient quantity to prevent spreading of forms. 2. Place ties at least 1 inch away from finished surface of concrete. 3. Leave inner rods in concrete when forms are stripped. 4. Space form ties equidistant, symmetrical and aligned vertically and horizontally unless otherwise shown on Drawings. H. Arrangement:Arrange formwork to allow proper erection sequence and to permit form removal without damage to concrete. I. Construction Joints: 1. Install surfaced pouring strip where construction joints intersect exposed surfaces to provide straight line at joints. 2. Just prior to subsequent concrete placement, remove strip and tighten forms to conceal shrinkage. 3. Show no overlapping of construction joints. Construct joints to present same appearance as butted plywood joints. 4. Arrange joints in continuous line straight,true and sharp. J. Openings for Items Passing Through Concrete: 1. Frame openings in concrete where indicated on Drawings. Establish exact locations, sizes, and other conditions required for openings and attachment of work specified under other sections. 2. Coordinate work to avoid cutting and patching of concrete after placement. 3. Perform cutting and repairing of concrete required as result of failure to provide required openings. K. Screeds: Concrete Forms and Accessories 031000-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Set screeds and establish levels for tops of concrete slabs and levels for finish on slabs. 2. Slope slabs to drain where required or as shown on Drawings. 3. Before depositing concrete, remove debris from space to be occupied by concrete and thoroughly wet forms. Remove freestanding water. L. Screed Supports: 1. For concrete over waterproof membranes and vapor retarder membranes, use cradle, pad or base type screed supports which will not puncture membrane. 2. Staking through membrane is not be permitted. M. Cleanouts and Access Panels: 1. Provide removable cleanout sections or access panels at bottoms of forms to permit inspection and effective cleaning of loose dirt, debris and waste material. 2. Clean forms and surfaces against which concrete is to be placed. Remove chips, saw dust and other debris.Thoroughly blow out forms with compressed air just before concrete is placed. 3.5 FORM CLEANING A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms. B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports. 3.6 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads and removal has been approved by Architect/Engineer. B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. C. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged. Discard damaged forms. D. Leave forms in place for minimum number of days as specified in ACI 347. 3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301 ACI 318. ****** OR ****** B. Camber slabs and beams 1/4 inch per 10 feet in accordance with ACI 301 ACI 318. Concrete Forms and Accessories 031000-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 014000-Quality Requirements 017000- Execution Requirements: Field inspecting,testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges,ties, and items are secure. C. Notify Architect/Engineer after placement of reinforcing steel in forms, but prior to placing concrete. D. Schedule concrete placement to permit formwork inspection before placing concrete. END OF SECTION 03 10 00 Concrete Forms and Accessories 031000-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Reinforcing bars. 2. Reinforcement accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 031000-Concrete Forms and Accessories. 2. Section 033000-Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. Section 033500-Concrete: Reinforcement for concrete floor toppings. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 301-Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 318- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 530.1-Specifications for Masonry Structures. 4. ACI SP-66-ACI Detailing Manual. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A82-Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain,for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. ASTM A184/A184M -Standard Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ASTM A496-Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed,for Concrete Reinforcement. 4. ASTM A497-Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. 5. ASTM A615/A615M -Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 6. ASTM A704/A704M -Standard Specification for Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. 7. ASTM A706/A706M -Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 8. ASTM A767/A767M -Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 9. ASTM A775/A775M -Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars. 10. ASTM A884/A884M -Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Fabric for Reinforcement. 11. ASTM A934/A934M -Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars. 12. ASTM A996/A996M -Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. Concrete Reinforcement 032000-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 13. ASTM D3963/D3963M -Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars. C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.4-Structural Welding Code- Reinforcing Steel. D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute: 1. CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice. 2. CRSI - Placing Reinforcing Bars. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300-Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric, bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing devices. C. Certificates: Submit AWS qualification certificate for welders employed on the Work. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1. Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice, ACI 301, and ACI 318. B. Prepare shop drawings in accordance with ACI SP-66. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Welders:AWS qualified within previous 12 months. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Section 013000-Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REINFORCEMENT A. Deformed and Plain Reinforcement:ASTM A615/A615M; 60 ksi yield strength, steel bars, unfinished. Concrete Reinforcement 032000-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed. B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during concrete placement conditions including load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor retarder puncture. C. Special Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers Adjacent to Weather Exposed Concrete Surfaces: Plastic tipped steel; size and shape to meet Project conditions. D. Reinforcing Splicing Devices: Mechanical type; full tension and compression; sized to fit joined reinforcing. E. Epoxy Coating Patching Material:Type as recommended by coating manufacturer. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate concrete reinforcement in accordance with CRSI Manual of Practice, and ACI 318, on and all applicable codes. B. Form standard hooks for 180 degree bends, 90 degree bend, stirrup and tie hooks, and seismic hooks as indicated on Drawings. C. Form reinforcement bends with minimum diameters in accordance with ACI 318 and all applicable codes. D. Fabricate column reinforcement with offset bends at reinforcement splices. E. Form spiral column reinforcement from minimum 3/8 inch diameter continuous deformed bar or wire. F. Form ties and stirrups from the following: 1. For bars No. 10 and Smaller: No. 3 deformed bars. 2. For bars No. 11 and Larger: No. 4 deformed bars. G. Weld reinforcement in accordance with AWS D1.4. H. Galvanized Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Clean surfaces, weld and re-protect welded joint in accordance with CRSI. I. Locate reinforcement splices not indicated on Drawings, at point of minimum stress. Review location of splices with Architect/Engineer. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 014000-Quality Requirements:Testing, inspection and analysis requirements. Concrete Reinforcement 032000-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 1• B. Make completed reinforcement available for inspection at manufacturer's factory prior to packaging for shipment. Notify Architect/Engineer at least seven days before inspection is allowed. C. When fabricator is approved by authority having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at fabricator's facility conforms to Contract Documents. 1. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved fabricator. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PLACEMENT A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position beyond specified tolerance. 1. Do not weld crossing reinforcement bars for assembly. B. Do not displace or damage vapor retarder. C. Accommodate placement of formed openings. D. Space reinforcement bars with minimum clear spacing in accordance with ACI 318 of one bar diameter, but not less than 1 inch. 1. Where bars are indicated in multiple layers, place upper bars directly above lower bars. E. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcement in accordance with ACI 318 applicable code as follows: Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth 3 inches Concrete exposed No. 6 bars and larger 2 inches to earth or weather No. 5 bars and smaller 1-1/2 inches Supported Slabs, No. 14 bars and larger 1-1/2 inches Walls, and Joists No. 11 bars and smaller 3/4 inches Beams and Columns 1-1/2 inches Shell and Folded No. 6 bars and larger 3/4 inches Plate Members No. 5 bars and smaller 1/2 inches 3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 014000-Quality Requirements:Tolerances. Concrete Reinforcement 032000-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 1• B. Install reinforcement within the following tolerances for flexural members, walls, and compression members: Reinforcement Depth Depth Tolerance Concrete Cover Tolerance Greater than 8 inches plus or minus 3/8 inch minus 3/8 inch Less than 8 inches plus or minus 1/2 inch minus 1/2 inch C. Install reinforcement within the tolerances specified in ACI 530.1 for foundation walls. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 014000-Quality Requirements: Field inspecting,testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Field inspection and testing will be performed by Owner's testing laboratory in accordance with ACI 318 and IBC 2006. C. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. D. Reinforcement Inspection: 1. Placement Acceptance: Specified and ACI 318 material requirements and specified placement tolerances. 2. Welding: Inspect welds in accordance with AWS D1.1. 3. Periodic Placement Inspection: Inspect for correct materials,fabrication, sizes, locations, spacing, concrete cover, and splicing. 4. Weldability Inspection: Inspect for reinforcement weldability when formed from steel other than ASTM A706/A706M. 5. Continuous Weld Inspection: Inspect reinforcement as required by ACI 318. 6. Periodic Weld Inspection: Other welded connections. 3.4 SCHEDULES A. Reinforcement For Superstructure Framing Members: Deformed bars, unfinished. B. Reinforcement For Foundation Wall Framing Members and Slab-on-Grade:Deformed bars and wire fabric, galvanized finish. C. Reinforcement For Parking Structure Framing Members: Deformed bars, epoxy-coated finish. END OF SECTION 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement 032000-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 03 20 01 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT(CIVIL SITEWORK) PART 1—GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. This specifications shall govern for all work necessary for furnishing reinforcing steel, bar supports, welding, tools, supplies, equipment and services, and placing of concrete reinforcement of the shape and dimensions shown on the contract drawings, and as called for by these specifications required to complete the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 REINFORCING STEEL A. All reinforcing bars, except column, shall be deformed as defined in ASTM Specifications. All reinforcing bars, unless noted on the structural drawings, shall be Grade 60 as defined by the American Society for Testing and Materials. "Specifications for Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" (A615 A616 or A617). Spiral reinforcing steel shall be fabricated from cold drawn with (ASTM A82) or hot rolled plain or deformed bars conforming to ASTM A625, Grade 60. Welded smooth wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A185 "Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement" (ACI 318-71 limits the wire spacing to 12 inches maximum). Welded deformed wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A497 "Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement" (ACI 318-71 limits the wire spacing to 16 inches max.). 2.2 TIE WIRE A. The tie wire used shall be black annealed wire, 16 gauge or heavier. 2.3 REINFORCING BAR SUPPORTS A. Bar supports shall conform to the "Bar Supports Specifications" contained in "Manual of Standard Practice", as published by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute and the Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. The Contractor shall provide such accessories as plastic spacers, plastic bar supports(chairs), and other approved devices necessary for proper assembly, spacing and supporting the reinforcing steel. 2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. All accessories for reinforcement spacing and support shall be the size and type to accurately conform to the required spacing and concrete clear cover as shown on Construction Drawings. 2.5 MILL CERTIFICATES A. Two certified copies of mill tests on each grade of reinforcing steel delivered showing physical and chemical analysis shall be provided, upon request, at the time of shipment. Concrete Reinforcement 03 20 01-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.6 SURFACE CONDITION A. Metal reinforcement at the time concrete is placed shall be free from mud, oil, or other non- metallic coatings that adversely affect bonding capacity. Metal reinforcement, except pre- stressing steel,with rust, mill scale, or a combination of both shall be considered as satisfactory, provided the minimum dimensions, including height of deformations and weight of a hand wire brushed test specimen, are not less than the applicable ASTM specification requirements. 2.7 REINFORCING STEEL OF FOREIGN MANUFACTURER A. No reinforcing steel of foreign manufacture shall be allowed on the project site.Any foreign steel accidentally delivered to the project site must be removed immediately. PART 3—EXECUTION: 3.1 STORAGE A. The Contractor shall store all reinforcement above the surface of the ground on platforms, skids or other suitable supports. 3.2 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall protect all reinforcement from mechanical injury, from surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust, and from non-metallic coatings that adversely affect bonding capacity. 3.3 STANDARD PRACTICE A. All requirements of concrete reinforcement not covered in these specifications or on the structural drawings shall be in accordance with "Manual of Standard Practice", as published by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute and the Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. All hooks shall conform to bend dimensions defined as "ACI Standard Hooks" in "Manual of Standard Practice", as published by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute and the Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, unless otherwise shown on the structural drawings. All reinforcing bars shall be bent cold. Reinforcing bars shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure the material. Reinforcing bars shall conform accurately to the dimensions shown on the structural drawings and within the fabricating tolerances shown in "Manual of Standard Practice", as published by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute and the Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. 3.4 PLACING REINFORCING STEEL A. The placement of bars should conform to the recommended practices in "Placing Reinforcing Bars", as published by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. Bars should be securely tied to prevent displacement during the concreting operation and all dowels must be wired in place before depositing concrete. All splicing of bars, concrete cover, placing tolerances and bar spacing shall conform to "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" (AC1318), as published bythe American Concrete Institute,and to recommended practices in "Reinforcing Bar Concrete Reinforcement 03 20 01-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• Splices" by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. All reinforcing steel splices shall be Class C, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. 3.5 SHOP DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall furnish, 6 copies of the placing drawings and bar lists in accordance with the latest revision of "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Concrete Structures" (AC1315), as published by the American Concrete Institute. Reinforcing steel shall not be fabricated until shop drawings have been approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 03 20 01 Concrete Reinforcement 03 20 01-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete for the following: 1. Supported slabs. 2. Control, expansion and contraction joint devices. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 031000-Concrete Forms and Accessories: Formwork and accessories. Placement of joint device joint device anchors in formwork. 2. Section 032000-Concrete Reinforcement. 3. Section 033500-Concrete Finishing. 4. Section 033900-Concrete Curing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 301 -Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 305- Hot Weather Concreting. 3. ACI 306.1-Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. 4. ACI 308.1-Standard Specification for Curing Concrete. 5. ACI 318- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM 8221-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 2. ASTM C31/C31M -Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 3. ASTM C33-Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 4. ASTM C39-Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 5. ASTM C42/C42M -Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 6. ASTM C94/C94M -Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 7. ASTM C143/C143M -Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 8. ASTM C150-Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 9. ASTM C172 -Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 10. ASTM C173/C173M -Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 11. ASTM C231 -Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 12. ASTM C260-Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 13. ASTM C330-Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete. Cast-in-Place Concrete 033000-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 14. ASTM C494/C494M -Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 15. ASTM C595 -Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. 16. ASTM C618-Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete. 17. ASTM C685/C685M -Standard Specification for Concrete Made By Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing. 18. ASTM C845 -Standard Specification for Expansive Hydraulic Cement. 19. ASTM C989 -Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars. 20. ASTM C1017/C1017M -Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete. 21. ASTM C1064/C1064M -Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. 22. ASTM C1107-Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink). 23. ASTM C1116-Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete and Shotcrete. 24. ASTM C1157-Standard Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement. 25. ASTM C1218-Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble Chloride in Mortar and Concrete. 26. ASTM C1240-Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures. 27. ASTM D994-Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). 28. ASTM D1751 -Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 29. ASTM D1752 -Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 30. ASTM D6690-Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements. 31. ASTM E96-Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 32. ASTM E119 -Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 33. ASTM E1643 -Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. 34. ASTM E1745 -Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300-Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on joint devices, attachment accessories, admixtures. C. Design Data: Cast-in-Place Concrete 033000-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Submit concrete mix design for each concrete strength. Submit separate mix designs when admixtures are required for the following: a. Hot and cold weather concrete work. b. Air entrained concrete work. 2. Identify mix ingredients and proportions, including admixtures. 3. Identify chloride content of admixtures and whether or not chloride was added during manufacture. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation procedures and interface required with adjacent Work. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 017000- Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents:Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components concealed from view in finished construction. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Conform to ACI 305 when concreting during hot weather. C. Conform to ACI 306.1 when concreting during cold weather. D. Acquire cement and aggregate from one source for Work. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Section 013000-Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 016000- Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Maintain concrete temperature after installation at minimum 50 degrees F for minimum 7 days. Cast-in-Place Concrete 033000-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 1• 1.8 COORDINATION A. Section 013000-Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Coordinate placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150,Type I - Normal B. Normal Weight Aggregates:ASTM C33. 1. Coarse Aggregate Maximum Size: 1.5 C. Water:ACI 318; potable, without deleterious amounts of chloride ions. 2.2 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. B. Fly Ash: ASTM C618 type C or F. C. Silica Fume:ASTM C1240. 2.3 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS A. Joint Filler; Asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt,tongue and groove profile. ****** OR ****** B. Joint Filler: ASTM D1752; Closed cell, resiliency of 95 percent if not compressed more than 50 percent of original thickness. C. Sealant:ASTM C309,Type I approved by Asphalt and Vinyl composition Tile Institute, 30% minimum solids content. 2.4 CONCRETE MIX A. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Method 1 B. Provide concrete for the following criteria: Material and Property Measurement Compressive Strength (7 day) 2800 psi Compressive Strength (28 day) 4000 psi Cast-in-Place Concrete 033000-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 1• Cement Type ASTM C150 Aggregate Size (maximum) Per Plan Air Content Do not use air entrainment for concrete mixes. Slump Per Plan C. Admixtures: Include admixture types and quantities indicated in concrete mix designs only when approved by Architect/Engineer. 1. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. 2. Do not use calcium chloride nor admixtures containing calcium chloride. 3. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather. D. Site Mixed Concrete: No site mixed concrete is allowed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 013000-Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement. C. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with placing concrete. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent. Remove laitance, coatings, and unsound materials. B. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout. C. Remove debris and ice from formwork, reinforcement, and concrete substrates. D. Remove water from areas receiving concrete before concrete is placed. 3.3 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301. B. Notify testing laboratory and Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of operations. Cast-in-Place Concrete 033000-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts,formed expansion and contraction joints, and are not disturbed during concrete placement. D. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade in accordance with ASTM E1643. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight by adhesive applied between overlapping edges and ends as per manufacturer recommendations. E. Repair vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. F. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. G. Install joint device anchors. Maintain correct position to allow joint cover to be flush with floor finish. H. Install joint covers in one piece longest practical length, when adjacent construction activity is complete. I. Deposit concrete at final position. Prevent segregation of mix. J. Place concrete in continuous operation for each panel or section determined by predetermined joints. K. Consolidate concrete. L. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. M. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. N. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. O. Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of Ffof 35. 3.4 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Finish concrete floor surfaces to requirements of Section 03350. B. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains. 3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. 1. Protect concrete footings from freezing for minimum 5 days. Cast-in-Place Concrete 033000-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. C. Cure floor surfaces as specified in Section 03390. D. Ponding: Maintain 100 percent coverage of water over floor slab areas continuously for 7 days. E. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet for 7 days. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 014000-Quality Requirements: Field inspecting,testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Field inspection and testing will be performed by Owner's testing laboratory in accordance with ACI 318 C. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. D. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of Work. E. Concrete Inspections: 1. Continuous Placement Inspection: Inspect for proper installation procedures. 2. Periodic Curing Inspection: Inspect for specified curing temperature and procedures. F. Strength Test Samples: 1. Sampling Procedures:ASTM C172. 2. Cylinder Molding and Curing Procedures: ASTM C31/C31M, cylinder specimens, standard cured field cured. 3. Sample concrete and make one set of three cylinders for every 150 cu yds or less of each class of concrete placed each day and for every 5,000 sf of surface area for slabs. 4. When volume of concrete for any class of concrete would provide less than 3 sets of cylinders,take samples from three randomly selected batches, or from every batch when less than 3 batches are used. 5. Make one additional cylinder during cold weather concreting, and field cure. G. Field Testing: 1. Slump Test Method: ASTM C143/C143M. 2. Air Content Test Method: ASTM C173/C173M. 3. Temperature Test Method: ASTM C1064/C1064M. 4. Measure slump and temperature for each compressive strength concrete sample. 5. Measure air content in air entrained concrete for each compressive strength concrete sample. Cast-in-Place Concrete 033000-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• H. Cylinder Compressive Strength Testing: 1. Test Method: ASTM C39. 2. Test Acceptance: In accordance with ACI 318 . 3. Test one cylinder at 7 days. 4. Test two cylinders at 28 days. 5. Dispose remaining cylinders when testing is not required. I. Core Compressive Strength Testing: 1. Sampling and Testing Procedures: ASTM C42/C42M. 2. Test Acceptance: In accordance with ACI 318. 3. Drill three cores for each failed strength test from concrete represented by failed strength test. J. Water Soluble Chloride Ion Concentration Test Method: ASTM C1218; tested at 28 days. 1. Maximum Concentration: As permitted by applicable code. K. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature and test samples taken. 3.7 PATCHING A. Allow Architect/Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Architect/Engineer upon discovery. C. Patch imperfections as directed by Architect/Engineer 3.8 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by Architect/Engineer. C. Do not patch,fill,touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect/Engineer for each individual area. END OF SECTION 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete 033000-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11', ' C1 �• 03 30 03 NORMAL WEIGHT AGGREGATE CONCRETE (CIVIL SITEWORK) PART 1—GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary for providing all Portland Cement Concrete with normal weight coarse aggregate required to complete the project. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 PORTLAND CEMENT A. Portland Cement shall conform to ASTM 1-150 and shall be Type I. Other types of cement shall be used only when approved by the Engineer. 2.2 WATER A. Water shall be reasonably clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acid, salt, alkali, organic matter or other deleterious substances. Questionable water shall be tested by a testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM C-94. The cost of testing will be borne by the Contractor. Potable water need not be tested. 2.3 FINE AGGREGATE A. Fine Aggregate shall consist of natural sand, or sand prepared from product obtained by crushing stone or gravel. Sampling of fine aggregate shall be in conformance with ASTM D-75. Sieve analysis shall be in accordance with ASTM C-136. B. Fine aggregate shall conform to the following grading requirements: Retained on 3/8" screen..................................................................... 0.0% Retained on 1/4" screen ............................................................ 0 to 5.0% Retained on 20 mesh sieve ................................................................ 15 to 50.0% Retained on 100 mesh sieve .............................................................. 85 to 100.0% Deleterious substances shall not be present in excess of following percentage by weight. Material removed by decantation...................................................... 3.0% ClayLumps ......................................................................................... 0.5% Other substances such as coal, shale and friable particles................ 2.0% C. Fine aggregate shall be of such quality that when made into mortar and tested in accordance with ASTM C-87 the mortar shall develop a compressive strength at 7 days and 28 days of not less than 95 percent of that developed by the mortar specified as the basis for comparison. Sand shall not contain organic impurities in amounts that,when the sand is tested in accordance with ASTM C-40, would cause it to show a color darker than the standard color. Fine aggregate shall have a fineness modulus conforming to the following: All strength concrete ......................................................................... not less than 2.0 Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete 033002-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11', ' C1 �• 2,000 psi concrete and less ............................................................... not more than 3.25 2,500 psi concrete and greater ......................................................... not more than 3.50 D. The fineness modulus shall be determined by adding total percentages retained on the following U.S. Standard sieves and dividing by 100: 3 in., 1-1/2 in., No.4, No. 8, No. 16, No. 30, No. 50 and No. 100. 2.4 NORMAL WEIGHT COARSE AGGREGATE A. Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone or gravel. Sampling of coarse aggregate shall be in conformance with ASTM D-75. Sieve analysis shall be in accordance with ASTM C-136. Coarse aggregate shall conform to the following grading requirements: B. Retained on 2" screen 0.0% Retained on 1-1/2" screen.......................................................................... 0 to 5.0% Retained on 3/4" screen ............................................................................ 25 to 60.0% Retained on 1/4" screen ............................................................................ 95 to 100.0% Deleterious substances shall not be present in excess of following percentages by weight: Material removed by decantation......................................................................... 1.00% Shaleor slate.......................................................................................................... 1.00% Claylumps .............................................................................................................0.25 Softfragments ....................................................................................................... 3.00% C. Sum of all deleterious ingredients, exclusive of material removed by decantation, shall not exceed 4% by weight. D. Coarse aggregate shall not exceed the following: E. Soundness test(Sodium sulfate)weighted average loss at 5 cycles ........... 15.0% Absorptiontest .................................................................................................... 3.0% F. Coarse aggregate shall not have a wear equivalent of more than 40 when tested for abrasion in conformance with ASTM C-131. 2.5 RETARDER—DENSIFIER A. When a retarder-densifier is required it shall be Sika's "Plastiment", Sonneborn's "Sonotar" or an approved equal. Mixing shall be done in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2.6 AIR-ENTRAINMENT AGENT A. The use of air-entrainment admixture is required for all concrete. Air-entrainment shall be at least 3% but shall not exceed 5%. Mixing shall be done in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendation. ASTM C-138, C-173 or C-231 shall govern. Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete 033002-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11', ' C1 �• 2.7 WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURE A. A high range water reducing admixture shall be used on all vertical concrete pours (such as walls) and a mid-range reducing admixture shall be used for all horizontal flatwork. A high range water reducing admixture shall meet the requirements for ASTM C494, Type G. Water reducing dosage rates shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Maximum slump prior to addition of the high range water reducer shall be 2". Slump after addition of the high range water reducer will be 4" minimum to 8" maximum. Approved high range water reducing admixtures include Daracem 100 manufactured by W. R. Grace or Rheobuild 1000 manufactured by Masterbuilders. Mid-range water reducing admixtures shall also be manufactured by W. R. Grace, Masterbuilders or approved equivalent. 2.8 FLY ASH A. Fly ash may be used if the following criteria are met: a. Meets the requirements of ASTM C618, Class F. b. Provide a Certificate of Compliance for the fly ash. c. Mix design shall not contain more than 25% by mass of the cementitious material. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 PROPORTIONING OF CONCRETE A. It is the intent of this specification to obtain concrete of a homogeneous structure that will be of such consistency and composition that it can be worked readily into corners and angles of forms and around the reinforcement without permitting materials to segregate or free water to collect on the surface. The concrete when it hardens will have a resistance to weathering and the required compressive strength.The general requirements for different compressive strength concrete are as follows: Max Allowable Min. Cement Min. 28-day Water-Cement Content Content-Sacks Compressive Gal. per sack per Slump Strength of Cement* Cubic Yard Range 1500 psi (Class E) 10.5 3.0 2"-6" Seal Slab (Class D) 4.0 6"-8" 2000 psi (Class C) 7.5 4.0 2"-5" 2500 psi (Class B) 6.75 4.5 2"-5" 3000 psi (Class A) 6.25 5.25 2"-5" 4000 psi (Class 2-A) 5.0 6.5 2"-5" 5000 psi (Class 3-A) 4.0 7.0 2"-5" * Maximum water/cement ratio for watertight structures shall be less than or equal to 0.35. For non-watertight structures,the maximum water/cement ratio shall be less than or equal to 0.45. Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete 033002-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11', ' C1 �• Maximum allowable net water content will be the amount added to the mixer, plus free water in the aggregate based on the thirty minute absorption period. No allowanced will be made for evaporation of water after batching. 3.2 MIX DESIGN A. General It is the intent of these specifications that the Contractor is responsible for providing a mix design that will produce a concrete meeting the requirements of this specification. B. Mix Design Report The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval six (6) copies of a mix design prepared by a reputable testing laboratory. The cost of the mix design shall be as set out in 02020 - Sitework Laboratory Testing Schedule. The mix design shall include mix proportions, water cement ratio, slump and workability characteristics required to produce the specified compressive strength concrete. The mix design shall be established by making, curing and testing a minimum of 5 standard size test cylinders for each strength concrete. Cylinders shall be made,cured and tested in conformance with ASTM C-192 and C-39. The mix design does not have to be prepared especially for this project,but it must apply to the materials being furnished. The mix design must be delivered to the Engineer four(4) days prior to the first pour. The Contractor shall have written notice from the Engineer approving the mix design before placing any concrete. If,during progress of the work, it is found impossible to secure concrete of required workability and strength with material being furnished by Contractor, the Engineer may order such changes as may be necessary to secure desired properties, subject to limiting requirements shown in Paragraph 3C1.3. Any changes so ordered shall be made at the Contractor's expense, and no extra compensation will be allowed by reason of such change. 3.3 CONSISTENCY A. General: The quantity of water to be used shall be determined by the Engineer and shall be such as to give a mixture containing the minimum of water consistent with the required workability. The quantity of water shall be varied only by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide a concrete that has a consistency that conforms to the following: a. The mortar will cling to the coarse aggregate. b. The concrete is not sufficiently fluid to segregate to the place of deposit. c. The concrete, when dropped directly from the discharge chute of the mixer, will flatten out at the center of the pile, but the edged of the pile will stand up and not flow. d. The mortar will show no free water when removed from the mixer. e. The concrete will settle into place when deposited in the forms; and when transported in metal chutes at an angle of 30 degrees with the horizontal, it will slide and not flow into place. f. The surface of the finished concrete will be free from laitance or a surface film of free water. Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete 033002-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11', ' C 1 1• B. Concrete Failing To Meet Consistency Requirements: Any concrete mix failing to meet the above outlined consistency requirements, although meeting the slump requirements,will be considered unsatisfactory; and the mix shall be changed to correct such unsatisfactory conditions. The slump test will be made by the Engineer in accordance with the methods outlined in ASTM C-143. 3.4 MIXING A. General The Contractor shall procure concrete from a "transit-mixed" concrete plant. Aggregates shall be proportioned by weight unless a satisfactory volumetric method of measurement is approved by the Engineer. The use of fractional sacks of cement will not be permitted unless the cement is proportioned by weight. Water shall be measured by an accurate measuring device which can be adjusted to compensate for variations in the free moisture content of the aggregate. The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use, and any concrete which is not in place within one hour after start to mixing shall not be used unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. In threatening weather, which in the opinion of the Engineer may result in conditions that will adversely affect the quality of the concrete to be placed,the Engineer may order postponement of the work. Where work has been started and changes in weather conditions require protective measures to be used,the Contractor shall furnish adequate shelter to protect the concrete against damage from rainfall or damage due to freezing temperatures. In case it is necessary to continue mixing operations during rainfall, the Contractor shall provide protective covering for the material stockpiles as well as for the concrete being placed. The covering for aggregate stockpiles will be required only to the extent as may be necessary to control the moisture conditions in the aggregate so that adequate control of the consistency of the concrete mix may be maintained. No concrete shall be mixed without the approval of the Engineer when the air temperature is at or below 40°F. (taken in the shade away from artificial heat) and falling. If authorized for concrete placement during cold weather,the concrete will be placed in accordance with the PCA"Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures". The maximum temperature of cast-in-place concrete(Type I, Portland Cement and Type K,Shrinkage Compensating Cement) shall not exceed 98°F. If adjustments of the mixture for temperature control are required, then the procedure for hot-weather mixing, placing and curing shall be in accordance with ACI 305 Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting. B. "Transit-Mixed" Concrete The mixing and the transporting operations shall conform with ASTM C-94. Mixing water shall not be added after a truck has left the plant except by permission of the Engineer or his representative. No concrete shall be used in the work which has been held longer than 1 hour in a mixer truck, unless approved by the Engineer. If dry batched to the job site,the batching plant operations shall conform with ASTM C-94. Transportation of the dry materials shall be performed in such a manner as to prevent loss, segregation or contamination of ingredients. 3.5 LABORATORY TESTING OF CONCRETE A. Moisture content check will be made at sufficient intervals to maintain accurate batching and proportioning.All sampling will be done in accordance with ASTM sampling and testing procedures. See Section 02020 Sitework Laboratory Testing Schedule for test cylinder requirements. A set of test cylinders shall consist of 3 test cylinders. One cylinder shall be tested for strength Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete 033002-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11', ' C1 �• at the age of 7 days, one cylinder at the age of 28 days, and one cylinder shall be held in reserve to be tested for strength when directed by the Engineer. The cylinders shall be made and cured in conformance with ASTM C-192. Curing facilities shall be provided in accordance with ASTM C-31. Cylinders shall be tested in conformance with ASTM C-39. Air content shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C173. Slump tested in accordance with ASTM C143. 3.6 FAILURES TO MEET STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS A. Should the strength shown by the test specimens made and tested fall below the values required, the Engineer shall have the right to require changes in proportions,or to require additional curing on those portions of the structure represented by the test specimens which failed. If additional curing does not give the strength required,the Contractor will be responsible for removal and replacement of those portions which fail to develop required strength. Specimens will be considered to have failed when average strength for any period of placing is less than values indicated in the following table: No. Days Consecutive Percent Placing of Any One Class of Strength Of Concrete Specified 1 ................................................................... 85 2 ................................................................... 95 3 ................................................................... 95 5 or more ................................................................... 100 When additional curing of portions of the structure is ordered by the Engineer, it shall be done at Contractor's expense and no claim for extra compensation for such additional curing shall be allowed. In no case shall the Contractor be required to provide such additional curing beyond a total of 21 days, except where average strengths of specimens, representing concrete placed on any three consecutive days,fall below 80%of the value specified in Part 3 "Proportioning of Concrete". In this case, curing shall be contained until cores drilled from portions of the structure involved show an average strength equal to that specified in Part 3 "Proportioning of Concrete". Cores shall have diameter of approximately three times the maximum size of aggregate and shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C-42. 3.7 STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. Cement shall be stored off the ground in a well-ventilated, weatherproof building. Aggregate shall be stored in a manner that will prevent the mixing of foreign materials and in a manner to prevent segregation of the aggregate. 3.8 MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS A. The measurement of materials, except water, used in the batches of concrete shall be by weight. The different grades of aggregate shall be weighed separately. Cement may be measured by the bag. Water may be measured by volume. Allowance will be made for water content where moist aggregates are used. END OF SECTION 03 30 02 Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete 033002-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 03 35 00 CONCRETE FINISHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Finishing concrete floors [and floor toppings]. 2. Floor surface treatment. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 033000-Cast-in-Place Concrete: [Prepared concrete floors ready to receive finish;] [control and formed expansion and contraction joints and joint devices]. 2. Section 03360-Concrete Finishes: Exposed aggregate finish. 3. Section 033900-Concrete Curing. 4. Section 079513 - Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies. 5. Section 079200-Joint Sealers. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 301 -Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 302.1-Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E1155 -Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and of Levelness Using the F-number System. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300-Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on concrete hardener, sealer, curing compounds curing papers and slip resistant treatment, compatibilities, and limitations. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 017000- Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data on maintenance renewal of applied coatings. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1. Concrete Finishing 033500-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Section 016000- Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging including application instructions. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 016000- Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. 1.8 COMPOUNDS- HARDENERS AND SEALERS A. Chemical Hardener: Magnesium fluorosilicate and zinc fluorosilicate blend PART 2 EXECUTION 2.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 013000-Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the Work of this section. 2.2 FLOOR FINISHING A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1. B. Wood float surfaces receiving quarry tile, ceramic tile, and cementitious terrazzo with full bed setting system. C. Steel trowel surfaces receiving carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin set terrazzo,thin set quarry tile, and thin set ceramic tile. D. Steel trowel surfaces which are scheduled to be exposed. 2.3 TOLERANCES A. Section 014000-Quality Requirements:Tolerances. B. Measure for F(F) and F(L) tolerances for floors in accordance with ASTM E1155, within 48 hours after slab installation. C. Finish concrete to achieve the following tolerances: 1. Under Glazed Tile on Setting Bed: F(F) 35 and F(L) 20. 2. Under Resilient Finishes: F(F) 75 and F(L) 50. 3. Exposed to View and Foot Traffic: F(F) 75 and F(L) 40. 4. Correct slab surface when actual F(F) or F(L) number for floor installation measures less than required. Concrete Finishing 033500-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Correct defects in defined traffic floor by grinding or removal and replacement of defective Work.Areas requiring corrective Work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by same process. END OF SECTION 03 35 00 Concrete Finishing 033500-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 03 35 43 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Polished concrete. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03 30 00—Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Section 07 92 00—Joint Sealants. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):ACI 302AR-Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Standards B-101.1/2009. C. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. D. ASTM C 171 -Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. E. ASTM C 779-Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces. F. National Floor Safety Institute (NFSI): NFSI Test Method 101-A - Standard for Evaluating High- Traction Flooring Materials. G. CPAA-Concrete Polishing Association of America 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 0133 00—Submittal Procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate information on shop drawings as follows: 1. Typical layout including dimensions and floor grinding schedule. 2. Plan view of floor and joint pattern layout. 3. Hardener, sealer, densifier identified in notes. C. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer's product data sheet, for specified products. Polished Concrete Finishing 033543-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). 2. Preparation and concrete grinding procedures. D. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties as cited in Performance Requirements. 2. Certificates: a. Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. b. Letter of certification from the National Floor Safety Institute confirming the system has been tested and passed phase Two Level of certification when tested by Method 101-A. ANSI B-101.1 2009 non-slip properties. C. Current contractor's certificate signed by manufacturer declaring Contractor as an approved installer of polishing system. 3. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions. E. Warranty: Submit warranty documents specified. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data for installed products. 1. Manufacturer's instructions on maintenance renewal of applied treatments. 2. Protocols and product specifications for joint filing, crack repair and/or surface repair. a. Diaper hydraulic power equipment. b. Restrict vehicular parking. C. Restrict use of pipe cutting machinery. d. Restrict placement of reinforcing steel on slab. e. Restrict use of acids or acidic detergents on slab. G. Waste Management and Disposal: 1. Separate waste materials for Reuse and Recycling in accordance with Section 0174 19— Construction Waste Management and Disposal. 2. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. 1.5 PROJECT AMBIENT CONDITIONS A. Installation Location: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations. 1.6 SEQUENCING A. Sequence with Other Work: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sequencing construction operations. Polished Concrete Finishing 033543-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and does not limit, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 0160 00 —Product Requirements. 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Self-Leveling Architectural Topping 1. Basis of Design: 3/8 inch thick Rapid Set Tru PC polished concrete finish, high performance, self-leveling, architectural topping shall be installed at all areas to receive polished concrete. B. Performance Requirements: Provide polished flooring that has been designed, manufactured and installed to achieve the following: 1. Abrasion Resistance: ASTM C779, Method A, high resistance, no more than 0.008 inch (0.20 mm)wear in 30 minutes. 2. Reflectivity: Increase of 35%as determined by standard gloss meter. 3. Waterproof Properties: Rilem Test Method 11.4, 70%or greater reduction in absorption. 4. High Traction Rating: NFSI 101-A, ANSI B-101.1 2009 non-slip properties. C. Design Requirements: 1. Contractor to verify the topping slab meets the properties below prior to start of polishing. 2. Hardened Concrete Properties: a. Minimum Concrete Compressive Strength:5000 psi in 24 hours,7000 psi in 28 days. b. Professional grade, hydraulic cement-based, self-leveling, architectural topping and resurfacer. 3. Placement Properties: a. Flatness Requirements: 1) Overall FF 50. 2) Local FF 40. D. Densifier 1. Install Ameripolish 3D HSL Densifier as directed by manufacturer after main grind. Polished Concrete Finishing 033543-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• E. Stain Protector 1. Install Ameripolish 3D SP Stain protector. Use as directed by manufacturer in conjunction with densifier. 2.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer with a minimum of 5 years' experience in performing work of this section who has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project. 2. Installer trained and holding a current certificate as a polished concrete installer. 3. Current Certification from the CPAA stating that the technicians are trained craftsmen. B. Concrete finishing components and materials shall be from single manufacturer. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer capable of providing field service representation during construction and approving application method. 2. Manufacturer shall have a minimum 5 years of experience in manufacturing components similar to or exceeding requirements of project. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with NFSI Test Method 101-A Phase Two Level High Traction Material. Static coefficient of friction not less than 0.5 for level surfaces. E. Mock-Ups: 1. Mock-Up Size: 100 sf sample panel at jobsite at location as directed under conditions similar to those which will exist during actual placement. 2. Mock-up will be used to judge workmanship, concrete substrate preparation, operation of equipment, material application, color selection and shine. 3. Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up before proceeding with work. 4. When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard of quality required for this work. a. Approved mock-up may remain as part of finished work. 5. Mock-Up will demonstrate required level of cut. F. Pre-installation Meetings: Conduct a pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements. Review the following: 1. Environmental requirements. 2. Scheduling and phasing of work. 3. Coordinating with other work and personnel. Remind all trades that they are working on a surface that is to become a finished surface. Confirm that depression for self-leveling, architectural topping is correct. 4. Protection of adjacent surfaces. Polished Concrete Finishing 033543-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 5. Surface preparation. 6. Repair of defects and defective work prior to installation. 7. Cleaning. 8. Installation of self-leveling architectural topping. 9. Installation of polished floor finishes. 10. Application of liquid hardener, densifier, stain protector. 11. Protection of finished surfaces after installation. 12. placing of materials on the concrete surface that may cause staining,etching or scratching 2.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original packaging with identification labels and seals intact. C. Storage and Protection:Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer. 2.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits. B. Protect Concrete Slab: 1. Protect from petroleum stains during construction. a. Cut Requirements 1) Level 2-Salt/Pepper Finish: Expose the fine aggregate such as sand and small aggregate with the concrete. The depth of grind will depend greatly on the placement and finishing procedures. Generally, this level of cut can be achieved within 1/16" of the surface. 2) Sheen Level B: Sheen (high gloss) as determined by a gloss reading of 60 - 70. 2.6 POLISHED CONCRETE A. Products/Systems: 1. Concrete Topping Slab: 3/8 inch polished concrete finish, high performance, self-leveling, architectural topping. a. Basis of Design: TRU PC as manufactured by CTS Cement Manufacturing Corp.; www.CTScement.com Polished Concrete Finishing 033543-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Densifier: Proprietary,water based,odorless liquid,VOC compliant,environmentally safe chemical hardening solution leaving no surface film. a. Basis of Design:Ameripolish 3D HSL Densifier as manufactured by Ameripolish, Inc.; www.ameripolish.com. 3. Joint Filler: Semi-rigid, 2-component, self-leveling, 100% solids, rapid curing, polyurea control joint and crack filler with Shore A 80 or higher hardness. 4. Cleaning Solution: Proprietary, mild, highly concentrated liquid concrete cleaner and conditioner containing wetting and emulsifying agents; biodegradable, environmentally safe and certified High Traction by National Floor Safety Institute (NFSI). 5. Stain Protector: Ready to use, is a low odor, VOC compliant, topical sealer consisting of low molecular emulsified cross-linking, coupling polymers that effectively protect concrete and other natural stone floor surfaces from the damaging effects of staining, defacing and deterioration due to contaminant penetration. a. Basis of Design:Ameripolish 3D SP Stain Protector as manufactured by Ameripolish, Inc.; www.ameripolish.com. Finish: Medium gloss (MG-2), 800. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1. Verify that concrete substrate conditions are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to installation of concrete finishing materials. B. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. D. Verify Concrete Topping Slab Performance Requirements: 1. Verify concrete is cured to two-day duration and 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) strength. 2. Verify concrete surfaces have received a hard steel-trowel finish as required by topping manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Verify overall floor flatness is a minimum of Ff 40. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ensure surfaces are clean and free of dirt and other foreign matter harmful to performance of concrete finishing materials. B. Examine surface to determine soundness of concrete for polishing. Polished Concrete Finishing 033543-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, product carton installation instructions. B. Install concrete topping slab as directed by topping slab manufacturer. C. Floor Surface Polishing and Treatment: 1. Provide polished concrete floor treatment in entirety of slab indicated by drawings. Provide consistent finish in all contiguous areas. 2. Apply floor finish prior to installation of fixtures and accessories. 3. Perform polishing after partition studs are erected, but before gypsum board is installed. 4. Diamond polish concrete floor surfaces with power disc machine recommended by floor finish manufacturer. Sequence with coarse to fine grit. Installer to determine the optimum starting grit in order to achieve the specified aggregate exposure. a. Comply with manufacturer's recommended polishing grits for each sequence to achieve desired finish level. Following the initial passes of metal bond diamonds, the installer shall drop back a minimum of one grit level when transitioning to resin bond diamonds.The separation in grit designation shall be a minimum of 50 for the transitioning step.The installer shall refine each abrasive grit to its fullest potential before moving on to the next level. Floor shall be thoroughly scrubbed between each grit pass to remove all loose material. Level of sheen shall match that of approved mock-up. b. Expose aggregate in concrete surface only as determined by approved mock-up. C. All concrete surfaces shall be as uniform in appearance as possible. 5. Hardener and Densifier Application: a. First coat of Hardener as directed by manufacturer,following the 200 grit level. b. Second coat of Hardener as directed by manufacturer, following the 400 grit level. C. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for drying time between successive coats. 6. Stain Protector Application: a. Use in conjunction with Densifier as directed by the manufacturer. 7. Remove defects and re-polish defective areas. 8. Finish edges of floor finish adjoining other materials in a clean and sharp manner. 3.4 ADJUSTMENTS A. Re-polish those areas not meeting specified gloss levels per mock-up. B. Fill joints flush to surface prior to the start of polishing operations. 3.5 FINAL CLEANING A. Upon completion, remove surplus and excess materials, rubbish,tools, and equipment. Polished Concrete Finishing 033543-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed product from damage during construction in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 03 35 43 Polished Concrete Finishing 033543-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 03 39 00 CONCRETE CURING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes initial and final curing of horizontal and vertical concrete surfaces. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 033000-Cast-In-Place Concrete. 2. Section 033500-Concrete Finishing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 301-Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 302.1-Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 3. ACI 308.1-Standard Specification for Curing Concrete. 4. ACI 318- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C171 -Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 2. ASTM C309 -Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 3. ASTM C1315 -Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete. 4. ASTM D2103 -Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300-Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on curing compounds, mats, paper,film, compatibilities, and limitations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Membrane Curing Compound Type 1. B. Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C1315 Type I. C. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete. Concrete Curing 033900-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 013000-Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify substrate surfaces are ready to be cured. 3.2 INSTALLATION - HORIZONTAL SURFACES A. Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 308.1. B. Ponding: Maintain 100 percent coverage of water over floor slab areas, continuously for 4 days. ****** [OR] ****** C. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet for 7 days. ****** [OR] ****** D. Absorptive Mat: Spread cotton fabric over floor slab areas. Spray with water until mats are saturated, and maintain in saturated condition for 7 days. ****** [OR] ****** E. Absorptive Mat: Saturate burlap-polyethylene and place burlap-side down over floor slab areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in place for 7 days. 3.3 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Section 017000- Execution Requirements: Protecting finished Work. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface. 3.4 SCHEDULES A. Storage Area Slabs: Absorptive mats, burlap-polyethylene type. B. Retaining Walls: Membrane curing compound, acrylic type, clear color. C. Concrete Pavement: Membrane curing compound, opaque color. D. Other Floor Areas: Membrane curing compound, acrylic type, translucent color. Concrete Curing 033900-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• END OF SECTION 03 39 00 Concrete Curing 033900-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 03 60 00 GROUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Portland cement grout. 2. Rapid curing epoxy grout. 3. Non-shrink cementitious grout. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 033000-Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 301-Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 318- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. B. American Society of Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM C33-Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2. ASTM C40-Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete. 3. ASTM C150-Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 4. ASTM C191 -Test Method for Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Vicat Needle. 5. ASTM C307 -Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortar, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings. 6. ASTM C531 -Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. 7. ASTM C579 -Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes. 8. ASTM C827 -Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures. C. U. S.Army Corps of Engineers Concrete Research Division (CRD): 1. CRD C621- Non-Shrink Grout. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PORTLAND CEMENT GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150,Type I and II. B. Water: Grout 036000-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 1• 1. Potable; containing no impurities, suspended particles, algae or dissolved natural salts in quantities capable of causing: a. Corrosion of steel. b. Volume change increasing shrinkage cracking. C. Efflorescence. d. Excess air entraining. C. Fine Aggregate: 1. Washed natural sand. 2. Gradation in accordance with ASTM C33 and represented by smooth granulometric curve within required limits. 3. Free from injurious amounts of organic impurities as determined by ASTM C40. D. Mix: 1. Portland cement, sand and water. Do not use ferrous aggregate or staining ingredients in grout mixes. 2.2 RAPID CURING EPDXY GROUT A. Rapid Curing Epoxy Grout: High strength,three component epoxy grout formulated with thermosetting resins and inert fillers. Rapid-curing, high adhesion, and resistant to ordinary chemicals, acids and alkalies. Compressive Strength ASTM C579 12,000 psi at 7 days Tensile Strength ASTM C307 2,000 psi minimum Coefficient of Expansion ASTM C531 30x10-6 in per degree F Shrinkage ASTM C827 None 2.3 NON-SHRINK CEMENTITIOUS GROUT A. Properties: Certified to maintain initial placement volume or expand after set and meet the following minimum properties when tested in accordance with CRD-C621,for Type D non-shrink grout: Property Test Time Result Setting Time ASTM C191 Initial 2 hours (Approx) Final 3 hours (Approx) Expansion 0.10%-0.4% Maximum Compressive Strength CRD-C621 1 day 4,000 psi 7 days 7,000 psi 28 days 10,000 psi to 10,800 psi 2.4 FORMWORK A. Refer to Section 031000 for formwork requirements. Grout 036000-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.5 CURING A. Prevent rapid loss of water from grout during first 48 hours by use of approved membrane curing compound or with use of wet burlap method. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove defective concrete, laitance, dirt, oil,grease and other foreign material from concrete surfaces by brushing, hammering, chipping or other similar means until sound, clean concrete surface is achieved. B. Rough concrete lightly, but not enough to interfere with placement of grout. C. Remove foreign materials from metal surfaces in contact with grout. D. Align, level and maintain final positioning of components to be grouted. E. Saturate concrete surfaces with clean water; remove excess water, leave none standing. 3.2 MIXING A. Portland Cement Grout: 1. Use proportions of 2 parts sand and 1 part cement, measured by volume. 2. Prepare grout with water to obtain consistency to permit placing and packing. 3. Mix water and grout in two steps; pre-mix using approximately 2/3 of water;after partial mixing, add remaining water to bring mix to desired placement consistency and continue mixing 2 to 3 minutes. 4. Mix only quantities of grout capable of being placed within 30 minutes after mixing. 5. Do not add additional water after grout has been mixed. 6. Capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2400 psi in 48 hours and 7000 psi in 28 days. ****** [OR] ****** 3.3 PLACING GROUT A. Place grout material quickly and continuously. B. Do not use pneumatic-pressure or dry-packing methods. C. Apply grout from one side only to avoid entrapping air. D. Do not vibrate placed grout mixture, or permit placement when area is being vibrated by nearby equipment. E. Thoroughly compact final installation and eliminate air pockets. Grout 036000-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• F. Do not remove leveling shims for at least 48 hours after grout has been placed. 3.4 CURING A. Immediately after placement, protect grout from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. After grout has attained its initial set, keep damp for minimum of 3 days. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Submit proposed mix design of each class of grout to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of Work. B. Tests of grout components may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 03 60 00 Grout 036000-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 04 05 14 MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes mortar and grout for masonry. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 042016- Reinforced Unit Masonry Assemblies: Installation of mortar and grout. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 530- Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. 2. ACI 530.1-Specifications for Masonry Structures. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C5 -Standard Specification for Quicklime for Structural Purposes. 2. ASTM C91-Standard Specification for Masonry Cement. 3. ASTM C94/C94M -Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 4. ASTM C143/C143M -Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 5. ASTM C144-Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 6. ASTM C150-Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 7. ASTM C199 -Standard Test Method for Pier Test for Refractory Mortars. 8. ASTM C206-Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime. 9. ASTM C270-Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 10. ASTM C387 -Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete. 11. ASTM C404-Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout. 12. ASTM C476-Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry. 13. ASTM C595 -Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. 14. ASTM C780-Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. 15. ASTM C1019 -Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout. 16. ASTM C1142 -Standard Specification for Extended Life Mortar for Unit Masonry. 17. ASTM C1314-Standard Test Method for Constructing and Testing Masonry Prisms Used to Determine Compliance with Specified Compressive Strength of Masonry. 18. ASTM C1329 -Standard Specification for Mortar Cement. 19. ASTM C1357-Standard Test Method for Evaluating Masonry Bond Strength. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330-Submittal Procedures: Submittal requirements. Masonry Mortar and Grout 040514-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Design Data: Submit design mix when Property specification of ASTM C270 is to be used, required environmental conditions, and admixture limitations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 016000- Product Requirements. B. Cold Weather Requirements: In accordance with ACI 530.1 when ambient temperature or temperature of masonry units is less than 40 degrees F. C. Hot Weather Requirements: In accordance with ACI 530.1 when ambient temperature is greater than 100 degrees F or ambient temperature is greater than 90 degrees F with wind velocity greater than 8 mph. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150,Type I B. Calcium chloride is not permitted. 2.2 MIXES A. Mortar Mixes: 1. Extended Life Mortar: ASTM C1142,Type RS B. Mortar Mixing: 1. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities needed for immediate use. 2. Achieve uniformly damp sand immediately before mixing process. 3. Re-temper only within two hours of mixing. C. Grout Mixes: 1. Grout for Non-Structural Masonry: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-11 inches slump; mixed in accordance with ASTM C476 grout. 2. Grout for Structural Masonry: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-11 inches slump; mixed in accordance with ASTM C476 grout. 3. Application: a. Coarse Grout: For grouting spaces with minimum 4 inches dimension in every direction. b. Fine Grout: For grouting other spaces. Masonry Mortar and Grout 040514-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Grout Mixing: 1. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M, modified to use ingredients complying with ASTM C476. 2. Add admixtures; mix uniformly. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 013000-Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install mortar and grout in accordance with ACI 530.1 Specifications for Masonry Structures. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Establishing Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C270. B. Testing Frequency: One set of specified tests for every 5,000 sf of completed wall area. C. Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C780 for aggregate ratio and water content, air content, consistency, and compressive strength. D. Testing of Grout Mix: In accordance with ASTM C1019 for compressive strength, and in accordance with ASTM C143/C143M for slump. E. Test compressive strength of mortar and masonry to ASTM C1314; test in accordance with masonry unit sections specified. END OF SECTION 04 05 14 Masonry Mortar and Grout 040514-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Lintels. 3. Brick. 4. Mortar and grout materials. 5. Reinforcement. 6. Ties and anchors. 7. Embedded flashing. 8. Accessories. 9. Mortar and grout mixes. B. Products Installed but not Furnished under This Section: 1. Steel lintels in unit masonry. 2. Cavity wall insulation adhered to masonry backup. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 10 00 "Concrete Forms and Accessories" for dovetail or channel slots for masonry-veneer anchors. 2. Section 07 19 00 "Water Repellents" for water repellents applied to unit masonry assemblies. 3. Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation" for cavity wall insulation. 4. Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing and for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Unit Masonry 042000-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Indicate sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Indicate bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315R. 3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Clay face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 2. Weep/cavity vents. D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. CMUs. 2. Clay face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 3. Special brick shapes. 4. Weep/cavity vents. 5. Cavity drainage material. 6. Accessories embedded in masonry. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates. 1. Submittal is for information only. Receipt of list does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing. B. Material Certificates: For each type of the following: 1. Masonry units. a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. C. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence in accordance with ASTM C67/C67M. d. For masonry units, include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units. 2. Integral water repellent used in CMUs. 3. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type. Unit Masonry 042000-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 4. Mortar admixtures. 5. Preblended,dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 6. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 7. Reinforcing bars. 8. Joint reinforcement. 9. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. C. Qualification Statements: For testing agency. D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification.Test in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M for compressive strength, ASTM C1506 for water retention, and ASTM C91/C91M for air content. 2. Include test reports, in accordance with ASTM C1019,for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. E. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type,and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined in accordance with TMS 602. F. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installers: All masonry flashing installers must complete the International Masonry Institute Flashing Upgrade training course. 2. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified in accordance with ASTM C1093 for testing indicated. 1.7 MOCKUPS A. Sample Panel Mockups: Build sample panels to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 0140 00 "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 1. Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes approximately 60 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness. 2. Build sample panels facing south. 3. Clean exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated. 4. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. Unit Masonry 042000-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 5. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting,securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained, and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items,to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls, and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe, and hold cover in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. Unit Masonry 042000-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work. C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated. 1. Where fire-resistance-rated construction is indicated, units are listed by UL or a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows,with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated. Unit Masonry 042000-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. CMUs:ASTM C90, medium weight unless otherwise indicated. 1. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 2.3 LINTELS A. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs matching adjacent CMUs in color, texture, and density classification, with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing.Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured. B. Offset Angle Supports: Steel plate brackets anchored to structure, allowing continuous insulation behind shelf angle supporting veneer. Component and anchor size and spacing engineered by manufacturer. 1. Carbon Steel, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A1008/A1008M, with ASTM A153/A153M, Class B coating. 2.4 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units: 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. B. Building (Common) Brick: ASTM C62, Grade SW. 1. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long. 2. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement:ASTM C150/C150M,Type I or 11,except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. 1. Alkali content will not be more than 0.1 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207,Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. Unit Masonry 042000-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91/C91M. E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C1329/C1329M. F. Aggregate for Mortar:ASTM C144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. 3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404. H. Water: Potable. 2.6 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M or ASTM A996/A996M, Grade 60. B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0,148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated. C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A951/A951M. 1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Stainless steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0,167-inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0,187-inch diameter. 5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0,187-inch diameter. 6. Spacing of Cross Rods,Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 ft. D. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. 1. V\A ui:u fa(,,1uuuoi's; Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Blok-Lok Limited. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. C. Wire-Bond. E. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry: Unit Masonry 042000-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Blok-Lok Limited. b. Heckmann Building Products, Inc. C. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. d. Wire-Bond. 2. Ladder type with one side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches wide, plus one side rod at each wythe of masonry 4 inches wide or less. 3. Tab type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with rectangular tabs sized to extend at least halfway through facing wythe, but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. 4. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum horizontal play of 1/16 inch and maximum vertical adjustment of 1- 1/4 inches. Size ties to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8- inch cover on outside face. Ties have hooks or clips to engage a continuous horizontal wire in the facing wythe. 2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS A. General: Ties and anchors extend at least 1-1/2 inches into veneer but with at least a 5/8-inch cover on outside face. B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire:ASTM A1064/A1064M,with ASTM A153/A1531M, Class B-2 coating. 2. Stainless Steel Wire: ASTM A580/A580M,Type 304. 3. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A1008/A10081M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A153/A153M, Class B coating. 4. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars:ASTM A36/A36M. C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to tie section; formed from 0.109-inch-thick, stainless-steel sheet. a. 0,108-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet may be used at interior walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie made from 0.187-inch- 0,25-inch- diameter, stainless steel wire. Mill-galvanized wire may be used at interior walls unless otherwise indicated. D. Partition Top Anchors:0,105-inch-thick metal plate with a 3/8-inch-diameter metal rod 6 inches long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from stainless steel. Unit Masonry 042000-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• E. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors: 1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist a 100 Ibf load in both tension and compression perpendicular to plane of wall without deforming or developing play in excess of 1/16 inch. 2. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0,0781-inch- thick, stainless-steel sheet. 3. Fabricate wire ties from 0.187-inch- diameter, stainless steel wire unless otherwise indicated. 4. Contractor's Option: Unless otherwise indicated, provide any of the adjustable masonry- veneer anchors specified. 5. Masonry-Veneer Anchors; Double-Pintle Plate: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal anchor section with screw holes at top and bottom, projecting horizontal leg with slots for vertical legs of double pintle wire tie. 6. Stainless Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene or EPDM washer, No. 10 diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than three exposed threads; either made from Type 410 stainless steel or made with a carbon-steel drill point and 300 Series stainless steel shank. 2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666,Type 304, 0.016 inch thick. 2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not exceeding 12 ft.. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. 3. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated to receive counterflashing. 4. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. 5. Fabricate metal drip edges from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2 inch out from wall,with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. 6. Solder metal items at corners. B. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing:Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable,adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 40 mil. a. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer. C. Drainage Plane Flashing: Fabricate from rubberized asphalt and drainage membrane to shapes indicated, including weep tabs, termination bar, and drip edge. Provide flashing materials as follows: Unit Masonry 042000-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Rubberized Asphalt: 40 mil (1.0 mm)thick. 2. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer. D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 2.9 ACCESSORIES A. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. B. Weep/Cavity Vents: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8 by 1-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches long. 2. Basis of Design: Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; QV-Quadro-Vent. C. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1. Basis of Design: Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Mortar Trap. D. Proprietary Acidic Masonry Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders,water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar. 4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar. 5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions,to ensure that mortar color is consistent. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions,and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. Unit Masonry 042000-10 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 2. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing, nonload-bearing walls, and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. 3. For interior nonload-bearing partitions,Type O may be used instead of Type N. D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse)that will comply with TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.1.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi. 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured in accordance with ASTM C143/C1431M. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening. C. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. D. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. E. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested in accordance with ASTM C67/C67M. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. 3.2 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch. Unit Masonry 042000-11 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2-inch total. B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 ft., 1/4 inch in 20 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 ft., 3/8 inch in 20 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 ft., 1/4 inch in 20 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum. S. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 ft., 3/8 inch in 20 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum. 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum. 7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. 2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 4. For exposed head joints,do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch. 3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners,jambs,and,where possible,at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. Unit Masonry 042000-12 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work:As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units,place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core. H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay as follows: 1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. 5. Fully bed units and fill cells with mortar at anchors and ties as needed to fully embed anchors and ties in mortar. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. 1. For glazed masonry units, use a nonmetallic jointer 3/4 inch or more in width. D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated. E. Cut joints flush where indicated to receive cavity wall insulation unless otherwise indicated. Unit Masonry 042000-13 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.5 CAVITY WALLS A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together as follows: 1. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending across both wythes. b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-type) reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties. C. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use adjustable-type(two-piece-type) reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties to allow for differential movement regardless of whether bed joints align. 2. Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers. B. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using bonding system indicated on Drawings. C. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity. D. Installing Cavity Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12 inches o.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners designed for this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as indicated. 1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and masonry. 3.6 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 3 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. Unit Masonry 042000-14 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete, where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete,to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c.vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally. 3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control- and expansion-joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in- plane wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods: 1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant. 2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant. 4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete for application of sealant. C. Form expansion joints in brick as follows: 1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in direction of water flow.Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any. 2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry. 3. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 4. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." D. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an airspace or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch. 1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry. Unit Masonry 042000-15 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.9 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry or offset angle support lintels where indicated and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick-size units and 24 inches for block-size units are indicated without structural steel or other supporting lintels. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 3.10 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES,AND CAVITY VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install cavity vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated. B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At multi-wythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches, and 1-1/2 inches into the inner wythe. Form 1/4-inch hook in edge of flashing embedded in inner wythe. 3. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer,across airspace behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge tucked under water-resistive barrier or air barrier, lapping at least 4 inches. Fasten upper edge of flexible flashing to sheathing through termination bar. 4. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing 6 inches minimum, to edge of next full unit at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches minimum, to edge of next full unit and turn ends up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. 5. Interlock end joints of sawtooth sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1- 1/2 inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated. 6. Install metal drip edges with sawtooth sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants"for application indicated. 7. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 8. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. Unit Masonry 042000-16 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell. D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are indicated to be built into masonry. E. Install weep holes in exterior wythes and veneers in head joints of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing. 1. Use specified weep/cavity vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. F. Place cavity drainage material in airspace behind veneers to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Accessories"Article. 3.11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602. B. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches. 3.12 CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. Unit Masonry 042000-17 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 6. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A. 7. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic masonry cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.13 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. END OF SECTION 04 20 00 Unit Masonry 042000-18 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 04 20 16 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes concrete masonry units, reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 040514- Masonry Mortar and Grout: Mortar and grout. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 530- Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. 2. ACI 530.1-Specifications for Masonry Structures. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A153/A153M -Standard Specification for Zinc Coating(Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 2. ASTM A240/A240M -Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium- Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 3. ASTM A307-Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. 4. ASTM A580/A580M -Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire. 5. ASTM A615/A615M -Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 6. ASTM A653/A653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 7. ASTM A951 -Standard Specification for Masonry Joint Reinforcement. 8. ASTM 8370-Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. 9. ASTM 8695 -Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel. 10. ASTM C27-Standard Classification of Fireclay and High-Alumina Refractory Brick. Reinforced Unit Masonry Assemblies 042016-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 11. ASTM C34-Standard Specification for Structural Clay Load-Bearing Wall Tile. 12. ASTM C55-Standard Specification for Concrete Brick. 13. ASTM C56-Standard Specification for Structural Clay Non-Load-Bearing Tile. 14. ASTM C62-Standard Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). 15. ASTM C67-Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. 16. ASTM C73-Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Face Brick (Sand-Lime Brick). 17. ASTM C90-Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units. 18. ASTM C126-Standard Specification for Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing Brick, and Solid Masonry Units. 19. ASTM C129 -Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units. 20. ASTM C140-Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. 21. ASTM C212 -Standard Specification for Structural Clay Facing Tile. 22. ASTM C216-Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale). 23. ASTM C315 -Standard Specification for Clay Flue Linings. 24. ASTM C530-Standard Specification for Structural Clay Non-Loadbearing Screen Tile. 25. ASTM C578-Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 26. ASTM C652-Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). 27. ASTM C744-Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units. 28. ASTM C1261 -Standard Specification for Firebox Brick for Residential Fireplaces. 29. ASTM C1283 -Standard Practice for Installing Clay Flue Lining. 30. ASTM D226-Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. Reinforced Unit Masonry Assemblies 042016-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 31. ASTM E84-Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 32. ASTM E119 -Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 255 -Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 723 -Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Concrete Masonry Compressive Strength 1. Concrete Masonry Units: 1900 psi minimum net area compressive strength. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300-Submittal Procedures: Submittal requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bars sizes, spacings, locations, reinforcement quantities, bending and cutting schedules, supporting and spacing devices for reinforcement. C. Product Data: 1. Submit data for masonry units and fabricated wire reinforcement. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 016000- Product Requirements. B. Cold Weather Requirements: In accordance with ACI 530.1 when ambient temperature or temperature of masonry units is less than 40 degrees F. C. Hot Weather Requirements: In accordance with ACI 530.1 when ambient temperature is greater than 100 degrees F or ambient temperature is greater than 90 degrees F with wind velocity greater than 8 mph. Reinforced Unit Masonry Assemblies 042016-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): ASTM C90; normal weight. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A951; ladder type; 0.148 inch diameter side rods with 0.148 inch diameter cross ties. B. Reinforcing Steel:ASTM A615/A615M, 60 ksi yield grade, deformed billet bars. C. Anchor Rods:ASTM A307; Grade C;J-shaped or L-shaped; complete with washers and heavy hex nuts; sized for minimum 15 inch embedment. 1. Hot-Dipped Galvanizing: ASTM A153/A153M. 2. Mechanical Galvanizing: ASTM B695; Class 55. D. Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04065. E. Joint Filler: Closed cell rubber; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 014000-Quality Requirements:Testing, inspection and analysis requirements. B. Test brick efflorescence in accordance with ASTM C67. Brick rated greater than "slightly effloresced" is not acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 013000-Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. C. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located. D. Verify built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other Sections. B. Furnish temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent support. C. Wet clay and shale brick before laying when initial rate of absorption is greater than 30 grams when tested in accordance with ASTM C67. Reinforced Unit Masonry Assemblies 042016-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form bed and head joints of uniform thickness. C. Coursing of Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. D. Placing And Bonding: 1. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar,with full head joints. 2. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. 3. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. 4. Remove excess mortar as Work progresses. 5. Interlock intersections and external corners. 6. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment is required, remove mortar and replace. 7. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to assure straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. 8. Isolate masonry from vertical structural framing members with movement joint 9. Isolate top of masonry from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks. E. Joint Reinforcement And Anchorage: 1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc. 2. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. 3. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. 4. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. Reinforced Unit Masonry Assemblies 042016-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 5. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position. 6. Embed anchors embedded in concrete attached to structural steel members. Embed anchorages in every sixth brick. F. Lintels: 1. Install precast concrete lintels over openings. 2. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel or precast concrete lintels are not scheduled or indicated. 3. Openings Up To 42 inches Wide: Reinforce openings as indicated on Drawings. 4. Openings From 42 inches Up To 78 inches Wide: Reinforce openings as indicated on Drawings. S. Openings Over 78 inches: Reinforce openings as indicated on Drawings. 6. Do not splice reinforcing bars. 7. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. 8. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 9. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports. 10. Maintain minimum 8 inches bearing on each side of opening. G. Grouted Components: 1. Reinforce bond beam with 1, No. 5 bar. 2. Reinforce pilaster with 1, No. 6 bar in each cell. 3. Lap splices bar diameters required by code. 4. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. 5. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 6. At bearing locations,fill masonry cores with grout for minimum 12 inches either side of opening. H. Reinforced Masonry: 1. Lay masonry units with cells vertically aligned and cavities between wythes clear of mortar and unobstructed. 2. Place reinforcing, reinforcement bars, and grout as indicated on Drawings. 3. Splice reinforcement in accordance with Section 03200. Reinforced Unit Masonry Assemblies 042016-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 4. Support and secure reinforcement from displacement. 5. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 6. Place grout in accordance with ACI 530.1 Specification for Masonry Structures. I. Control And Expansion Joints: 1. Install control and expansion joints at the following maximum spacings, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings: a. Exterior Walls: 20 feet on center and within 10 feet on one side of each interior and exterior corner. b. Interior Walls: 30 feet on center. C. At changes in wall height. 2. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints. 3. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints. 4. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance. 5. Form expansion joint by omitting mortar and cutting unit to form open space. J. Cutting And Fitting: 1. Obtain Architect/Engineer's approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 014000-Quality Requirements:Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation From Alignment of Pilasters: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more. E. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. F. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft. G. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft. H. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch. Reinforced Unit Masonry Assemblies 042016-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• I. Maximum Variation for Steel Reinforcement: 1. Install reinforcement within the tolerances specified in ACI 530.1 for foundation walls. 2. Plus or minus 1/2 inch when distance from centerline of steel to opposite face of masonry is 8 inches or less. 3. Plus or minus 1 inch when distance is between 8 and 24 inches. 4. Plus or minus 1-1/4 inch when distance is greater than 24 inches. 5. Plus or minus 2 inches from location along face of wall. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Concrete Masonry Units:Test each type in accordance with ASTM C140. 3.6 CLEANING A. Section 017000- Execution Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Section 017000- Execution Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work. B. Protect exposed external corners subject to damage. C. Protect base of walls from mud and mortar splatter. D. Protect masonry and other items built into masonry walls from mortar droppings and staining caused by mortar. E. Protect tops of masonry work with waterproof coverings secured in place without damaging masonry. Provide coverings where masonry is exposed to weather when work is not in progress. END OF SECTION 04 20 16 Reinforced Unit Masonry Assemblies 042016-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural shapes. 2. Channels and angles. 3. Hollow structural sections. 4. Structural pipe. 5. Structural plates and bars. 6. Fasteners, connectors, and anchors. 7. Fasteners, connectors, and anchors. 8. Grout. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 036000-Grout: Grout for setting base plates. 2. Section 052100-Steel Joists. 3. Section 053123 -Steel Roof Deck 4. Section 055000— Metal Fabrications: Steel Fabrications affecting structural steel work. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Institute of Steel Construction: 1. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 2. AISC Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. 3. AISC Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Single-Angle Members. 4. AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings. 5. AISC Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members. 6. AISC Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections. 7. AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings Allowable Stress Design, and Plastic Design. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A36/A36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A53/A53M -Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. ASTM A108-Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold- Finished. 4. ASTM A123/A123M -Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 5. ASTM A153/A153M -Standard Specification for Zinc Coating(Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 6. ASTM A193/A193M -Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service. Structural Steel 051200-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 7. ASTM A307-Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. 8. ASTM A325 -Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 9. ASTM A354-Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners. 10. ASTM A449 -Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs. 11. ASTM A490-Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 12. ASTM A500-Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 13. ASTM A501 -Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 14. ASTM A514/A514M -Standard Specification for High-Yield-Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding. 15. ASTM A529/A529M -Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon- Manganese Steel of Structural Quality. 16. ASTM A563 -Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 17. ASTM A572/A572M -Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel. 18. ASTM A588/A588M -Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi (345 MPa) Minimum Yield Point to 4-in. (100-mm) Thick. 19. ASTM A618-Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless High- Strength Low-Alloy Structural Tubing. 20. ASTM A786/A786M -Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates. 21. ASTM A847-Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless High Strength, Low Alloy Structural Tubing with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance. 22. ASTM A852/A852M -Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Low- Alloy Structural Steel Plate with 70 ksi (485 MPa) Minimum Yield Strength to 4 in. (100 mm)Thick. 23. ASTM A913/A913M -Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel Shapes of Structural Quality, Produced by Quenching and Self-Tempering Process (QST). 24. ASTM A992/A992M -Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. 25. ASTM 8695 -Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel. 26. ASTM E94-Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination. 27. ASTM E164-Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments. 28. ASTM E165 -Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination. 29. ASTM E709 -Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination. 30. ASTM F436-Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. 31. ASTM F959-Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners. Structural Steel 051200-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 32. ASTM F1554-Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength. 33. ASTM F1852 -Standard Specification for Twist Off Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A2.4-Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. 2. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code-Steel. D. Research Council on Structural Connections: 1. RCSC-Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. E. SSPC:The Society for Protective Coatings: 1. SSPC-Steel Structures Painting Manual. 2. SSPC Paint 15 -Steel Joist Shop Paint. 3. SSPC Paint 20-Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I - Inorganic and Type II -Organic). 4. SSPC SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning. 5. SSPC SP 6-Commercial Blast Cleaning. 6. SSPC SP 10- Near-White Blast Cleaning. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330-Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners. 2. Connections. 3. Cambers 4. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Mill Test Reports: Submit indicating structural strength and destructive and non- destructive test analysis. D. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualifications within previous 12 months. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the following: 1. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. 2. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. Section 10. Structural Steel 051200-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3. AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings. 4. AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings Allowable Stress Design, and Plastic Design. 5. AISC Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. 6. AISC Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections. 7. AISC Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members. 8. AISC Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Single-Angle Members. 9. RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts. 10. ASCE 19. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Section 1013000-Administrative Requirements}: Requirements for coordination. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Structural W-Shapes:ASTM A992/A992M; Grade 50 B. Structural M-Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M; Grade 50 C. Structural T-Shapes: Cut from structural W-shapes. D. Channels and Angles: ASTM A36/A36M. E. Round Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500, Grade B. F. Square and Rectangular Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500, Grade B. G. Structural Plates and Bars:ASTM A36/A36M. 2.2 FASTENERS, CONNECTORS,AND ANCHORS A. Bolts:ASTM A307; Grade A or B. 1. Finish: Unfinished B. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A325;Type 1 or ASTM A490;Type 1. 1. Finish: Unfinished C. Nuts:ASTM A563 heavy hex type. 1. Finish: Unfinished D. Washers: ASTM F436;Type 1, circular 1. Finish: Unfinished Structural Steel 051200-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• E. Threaded Rods: ASTM A36/A36M; Grade A. 1. Finish: Unfinished F. Forged Structural Steel Hardware: 1. Clevises and Turnbuckles: ASTM A108; Grade 1085. 2. Eye Nuts and Eye Bolts: ASTM A108; Grade 1030. 3. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A108; Grade 1018. 4. Rod Ends, Yoke Ends and Pins, Cotter Pins, and Coupling Nuts: Carbon steel. 2.3 WELDING MATERIALS A. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Grout: Non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing additives, capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days B. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC Paint 15,Type 1, red oxide. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind exposed welds smooth. B. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors. C. Develop required camber for members. 2.6 FINISH A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 3. B. Shop prime structural steel members. C. Galvanizing for Structural Steel Members: ASTM A123/A123M; minimum 1.2 oz/sq ft coating thickness; galvanize after fabrication. D. Galvanizing for Fasteners, Connectors, and Anchors: 1. Hot-Dipped Galvanizing: ASTM A153/A153M. 2. Mechanical Galvanizing: ASTM B695; Class 50 minimum. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS A. Section 014000-Quality Requirements:Testing, inspection and analysis requirements. Structural Steel 051200-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Shop test bolted and welded connections as specified for field quality control tests. C. When fabricator is approved by authority having jurisdiction, submit certificate of compliance indicating Work performed at fabricator's facility conforms to Contract Documents. 1. Specified shop tests are not required for Work performed by approved fabricator. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 013000-Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify bearing surfaces are at correct elevation. C. Verify anchors rods are set in correct locations and arrangements with correct exposure for steel attachment. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Furnish templates for installation of anchor rods and embedments in concrete and masonry work. 3.3 ERECTION A. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. B. Field weld components and shear connectors indicated on Drawings. C. Field connect members with threaded fasteners; tighten to snug tight for bearing type connections. D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect/Engineer. E. After erection, touch up welds and abrasions to match shop finishes. 3.4 GROUT INSTALLATION A. Grout [under base plates in accordance with Section 036000. B. Shim bearing plates and equipment supports to proper elevation, snug tighten anchor bolts. C. Fill void under bearing surface with grout. Install and pack grout to remove air pockets. Structural Steel 051200-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Moist cure grout. E. Remove forms after grout is set.Trim grout edges to from smooth surface, splayed 45 degrees. F. Tighten anchor bolts after grout has cured for a minimum of 3 days. 3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Section 014000-Quality Requirements:Tolerances. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. C. Maximum Offset From Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 014000-Quality Requirements: Field inspecting,testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC specifications. 1. Visually inspect all bolted connections. 2. For Direct Tension Indicators, comply with requirements of ASTM F959. Verify that gaps are less than gaps specified in Table 2. C. Welding: Inspect welds in accordance with AWS D1.1. 1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies. 2. Visually inspect all welds. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164; perform on all full penetration welds. 4. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165. D. Correct defective bolted connections and welds. END OF SECTION 05 12 00 Structural Steel 051200-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Load-bearing formed-steel stud exterior wall and framing and bridging. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Iron and Steel Institute: 1. AISI S213: North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing- Lateral Design. 2. AISI General -Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing-General Provisions. 3. AISI Header-Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing- Header Design. 4. AISI NAS- North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 5. AISI WSD-Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing-Wall Stud Design. B. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code-Steel. 2. AWS D1.1M -Structural Welding Code-Steel. 3. AWS D1.3 -Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel. 4. AWS D1.31M -Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel. C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A1003 -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic-and Nonmetallic- Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members. 2. ASTM A1003M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic-and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members. 3. ASTM C955 -Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination. B. Coordinate Work of this Section with placement of components within stud framing system. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 0133 00-Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Product Data: Submit data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, product criteria and, limitations. C. Shop Drawings: Cold-Formed Metal Framing 054000-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Indicate component details,framed openings, anchorage,type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related Work. 2. Indicate stud layout. 3. Describe method for securing studs and framing connections. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Mill Certifications: Submit mill certifications for steel delivered to Site. Certify steel bare metal thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm),yield strength,tensile strength, total elongation in 2- inch (50-mm) or 8-inch (200-mm) gauge length, chemical analysis, and galvanized coating thickness. G. Welders' Certificates: Certify welders and welding procedures employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months. H. Qualifications Statements: 1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer and installer. 2. Submit manufacturer's approval of installer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Calculate structural properties of framing members according to AISI NAS. B. Furnish framing materials according to SSMA- Product Technical Guide. C. Perform Work according to following: 1. Framing:AISI General and AISI NAS. 2. Headers: AISI Header. 3. Wall Studs:AISI WSD. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years' documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years' documented experience and approved by manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING A. Manufacturers: 1. CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co. Cold-Formed Metal Framing 054000-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. ClarkDietrich 3. MarinoWARE 4. MBA Building Supplies 5. The Steel Network, Inc 6. Substitutions: Section 0160 00- Product Requirements. B. Description: ASTM C955. 2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: 1. ASTM A1003 (A1003M). 2. Structural grade,Type H. 3. Grade: ST50H 2.3 FASTENERS A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws and Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Steel, hot-dip galvanized. B. Anchorage Devices: Power-actuated or screws with sleeves. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Bracing, Furring, and Bridging: Formed sheet steel, .054 inch thick or as specified in construction documents,whichever is greater. B. Plates, Gussets, and Clips: Formed sheet steel, .054 inch thick or as specified in construction documents, whichever is greater. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 0170 00- Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation examination. B. Verify that substrate surfaces and building framing components are ready to receive Work. C. Verify that rough-in utilities are in proper location. 3.2 ERECTION A. Studs: 1. Align floor and ceiling tracks and locate to partition layout. 2. Secure in place with fasteners at maximum 24 inches o.c. 3. Place studs as indicated on drawings not more than 2 inches from abutting walls, and at each side of openings. 4. Connect studs to tracks using clip-and-tie or fastener method. Cold-Formed Metal Framing 054000-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 5. Construct corners using minimum of three studs. 6. Double-stud wall openings, doorjambs, and window jambs. 7. Erect load-bearing studs one piece, full length; splicing of studs not permitted. 8. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing. 9. Install studs with deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load-bearing framing. 10. Attach cross studs or furring channels to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls. 11. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items and to prevent stud rotation. 12. Touch up field welds and damaged metallic-coatings surfaces with primer to match shop coating. END OF SECTION 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 054000-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors. 2. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 4. Shelf angles. 5. Metal ladders. 6. Ladder safety cages. 7. Elevator machine beams. 8. Steel shapes for supporting elevator door sills. 9. Elevator pit sump covers. 10. Metal bollards. 11. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts,steel pipe sleeves,slotted-channel inserts,and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry"for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items built into unit masonry. 2. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing"for steel framing, supports, elevator machine beams, hoist beams, divider beams, door frames, and other steel items attached to the structural steel framing. 3. Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories" for roof mounted access ladders. 4. Section 14 24 00 "Hydraulic Elevators" for elevator pit ladders. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturer's written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. Metal Fabrications 055000-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes. 2. Fasteners. 3. Shop primers. 4. Shrinkage-resisting grout. 5. Manufactured metal ladders. 6. Ladder safety cages, if required by code. 7. Metal bollards. B. Shop Drawings:Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans,elevations,sections,and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors. 2. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions. 3. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 4. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 5. Elevator machine beams. 6. Steel shapes for supporting elevator sills. 7. Shelf angles. 8. Metal ladders. 9. Ladder safety cages. 10. Elevator pit sump covers. 11. Structural steel door frames. 12. Metal bollards. 13. Loose steel lintels. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer's experience with providing delegated-design engineering services of the kind indicated, including documentation that engineer is licensed in the jurisdiction in which Project is located. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, floor slabs, decks, and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. Metal Fabrications 055000-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design ladders . 2.2 M ETALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars:ASTM A36/A36M. C. Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276/A276M,Type 304 . D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate:ASTM A786/A786M,rolled from plate complying with ASTM A36/A36M or ASTM A283/A283M, Grade C or D. E. Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate with abrasive granules rolled into surface or with abrasive material metallically bonded to steel. F. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, cold-formed steel tubing. G. Steel Pipe:ASTM A53/A53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. H. Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Rope: ASTM A741. 1. Wire Rope Fittings: Hot-dip galvanized-steel connectors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking strength of wire rope with which they are used. I. Stainless Steel Wire Rope: Wire rope manufactured from stainless steel wire complying with ASTM A492,Type 316. 1. Wire Rope Fittings: Stainless steel connectors, Type 316, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking strength of wire rope with which they are used. J. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A48/A48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M, unless otherwise indicated. K. Aluminum Extrusions:ASTM 6221,Alloy 6063-T6. L. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate:ASTM 13632/13632M,Alloy 6061-T6. M. Aluminum Castings: ASTM 626/1326M, Alloy 443.0-F. Metal Fabrications 055000-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• N. Bronze Extrusions:ASTM 8455,Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze). O. Bronze Castings: ASTM 8584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or UNS No. C84400 (leaded semired brass). P. Nickel Silver Castings:ASTM B584,Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel bronze). 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening aluminum, stainless steel or nickel silver. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A563; and, where indicated,flat washers. C. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325,Type 3, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH3, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and where indicated,flat washers. D. Stainless Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless steel bolts,ASTM F593; with hex nuts,ASTM F594; and,where indicated,flat washers; Alloy Group 1. E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A563; and, where indicated,flat washers. 1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. F. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A47/A47M malleable iron or ASTM A27/A27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F2329/F2329M. G. Post-Installed Anchors:Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless steel bolts, ASTM F593, and nuts, ASTM F594. H. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts. Metal Fabrications 055000-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 9113 "Painting." B. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. D. Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Factory-packaged, nonmetallic, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. Metal Fabrications 055000-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches,with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes,shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts for unites installed after concrete is placed. C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer specified in Section 09 91 13 "Painting." 2.7 SHELF ANGLES A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners. 2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint. B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete. C. Galvanize and prime shelf angles located in exterior walls. D. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer. E. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in- place concrete. Metal Fabrications 055000-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.8 METAL LADDERS A. General: 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, except for elevator pit ladders. 2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44. Elevator pit ladders shall be furnished and installed by the elevator subcontractor. B. Steel Ladders: 1. Space siderails 16 inches apart unless otherwise indicated. 2. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8 by 2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges. 3. Rungs: 3/4 inch diameter, steel bars. 4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material metallically bonded to rung. 6. Provide OSHA approved ladder cages where required by applicable codes. 7. Source Limitations: Obtain nonslip surfaces from single source from single manufacturer. 8. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. 9. Galvanize and prime exterior ladders, including brackets. 2.9 LADDER SAFETY CAGES A. Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Assemble by welding or with stainless steel fasteners. Furnish at all ladders longer than 20 feet. B. Provide primary hoops at tops and bottoms of cages and spaced not more than 20 feet o.c. Provide secondary intermediate hoops spaced not more than 48 inches o.c. between primary hoops. C. Galvanize ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners. 1. Prime ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer. 2.10 ELEVATOR PIT SUMP COVERS A. Fabricate from 1/8-inch rolled-steel floor plate with four 1-inch- diameter holes for water drainage and for lifting. 2.11 STRUCTURAL-STEEL DOOR FRAMES A. Fabricate structural-steel door frames for overhead doors from steel shapes, plates, and bars of size and to dimensions indicated, fully welded together, unless otherwise indicated. Plug-weld built-up members and continuously weld exposed joints. Reinforce frames and drill and tap as necessary to accept finish hardware. Metal Fabrications 055000-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for securing door frames into adjoining concrete or masonry. B. Galvanize exterior steel frames at overhead doors. C. Prime exterior steel frames with zinc-rich primer. 2.12 METAL BOLLARDS A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe steel shapes, as indicated. B. Furnish and install bollard covers manufactured using a 1/4" thick High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) at each bollard. 1. Basis of Design: Ideal Shield Smooth Bollard Post Sleeve with HDPE Dome Top, Yellow. Diameter as required for bollard. C. Prime steel bollards with zinc-rich primer. 2.13 ABRASIVE METAL NOSINGS A. Extruded Units:Aluminum ,with abrasive filler consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both, in an epoxy-resin binder. Fabricate units in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions. 1. Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1/16 inch above aluminum extrusion. B. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units,as standard with manufacturer. C. Drill for mechanical anchors and countersink. Locate holes not more than 4 inches from ends and not more than 12 inches o.c., evenly spaced between ends, unless otherwise indicated. Provide closer spacing if recommended by manufacturer. D. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units. E. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units. 2.14 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. B. Galvanize bearing and leveling plates. C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer. Metal Fabrications 055000-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.15 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span, but not less than 8 inches unless otherwise indicated. C. Galvanize and prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls. D. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer. 2.16 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.17 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.18 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A153/A153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A123/A123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1. Shop prime with primers specified in Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting" unless zinc-rich primer is indicated. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below: 1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 3. Other Steel Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." Metal Fabrications 055000-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 4. Galvanized-Steel Items: SSPC-SP 16, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steels, and Non-Ferrous Metals." D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting,and Placement: Perform cutting,drilling,and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level,plumb,true,and free of rack;and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry,wood or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum:Two coats of clear lacquer. Metal Fabrications 055000-10 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.2 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Anchor supports for operable partitions and overhead doors securely to,and rigidly brace from, building structure. C. Anchor shelf angles securely to existing construction with anchor bolts . 3.3 INSTALLATION OF METAL BOLLARDS A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing. 1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete. B. Anchor bollards in concrete in formed or core-drilled holes not less than 42 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of bollard. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with shrinkage-resistant grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward bollard. C. Fill bollards solidly with concrete and install plastic bollard covers. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with shrinkage-resistant grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.5 REPAIRS A. Touchup Painting: 1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. a. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M. Metal Fabrications 055000-11 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• END OF SECTION 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 055000-12 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 05 51 13 METAL PAN STAIRS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads. 2. Steel tube railings and guards attached to metal stairs. 3. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs, railings, and guards. 1. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, blocking for attachment of wall-mounted handrails, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 2. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so they do not encroach on required stair width and are within fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure. D. Schedule installation of railings and guards so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. 1. Do not support railings and guards temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal pan stairs and the following: 1. Prefilled metal-pan-stair treads. 2. Shop primer products. 3. Handrail wall brackets. 4. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Metal Pan Stairs 055113-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Indicate sizes of metal sections, thickness of metals, profiles, holes, and field joints. 3. Include plan at each level. 4. Indicate locations of anchors, weld plates, and blocking for attachment of wall-mounted handrails. C. Delegated Design Submittal: For stairs, railings and guards, , including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer's experience with providing delegated design engineering services of the kind indicated, including documentation that engineer is licensed in the State in which Project is located. B. Welding certificates. C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code-Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. 1. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. 2. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 3. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. a. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. Metal Pan Stairs 055113-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design stairs, railings and guards including attachment to building construction. B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Uniform Load: 1.00 Ibf/sq.ft. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 Ibf applied on an area of 4 sq. in. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing and guard loads in addition to loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less. C. Structural Performance of Railings and Guards: Railings and guards, including attachment to building construction,withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 IV applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 IV applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq.ft. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars:ASTM A36/A36M. C. Steel Tubing for Railings and Guards: ASTM A500/A500M (cold formed). 1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. D. Steel Pipe for Railings and Guards: ASTM A53/A53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight(Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. Metal Pan Stairs 055113-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• E. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 25, unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed. F. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 30, unless another grade is required by design loads. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. 1. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings and Guards to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings and guards to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A563; and, where indicated,flat washers. D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A563; and, where indicated,flat washers. 1. Provide mechanically deposited or hot-dip, zinc-coated anchor bolts for stairs indicated to be shop primed with zinc-rich primer. E. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM 8633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Handrail Wall Brackets: cast iron, center of rail 2-1/2 inches from face of wall. B. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. Metal Pan Stairs 055113-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout; recommended by manufacturer for interior use; noncorrosive and nonstaining; mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. E. Prefilled Concrete Treads: 1. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 03 30 00 "Cast- in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi and maximum aggregate size of 1/2 inch unless otherwise indicated. 2. Plain Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064/A10645M, steel, 6 by 6 inches, W1.4 by W1.4, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3. Reinforcement Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening welded-wire reinforcement in place. a. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete. F. For galvanized reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings and guards, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. B. Assemble stairs, railings, and guards in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. 2. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. 1. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. 2. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. F. Weld connections to comply with the following: Metal Pan Stairs 055113-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. 5. At exposed connections,finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Finish #2 - Completely sanded joint with some undercutting and pinholes okay. G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. 1. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. 2. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 3. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. 4. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate internally. 2.6 FABRICATION OF STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for Architectural Class, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Stair Framing: 1. Stringers: Fabricate of steel channels or steel rectangular tubes as indicated on Drawings. a. Stringer Size: As required to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. b. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel and rectangular tube stringers. C. Finish: Shop primed. 2. Platforms: Construct of steel plate steel channel or steel rectangular tube headers and miscellaneous framing members as required to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel and rectangular tube framing. b. Finish: Shop primed. 3. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers and headers. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces. 4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below. a. Locate hanger rods and struts where they do not encroach on required stair width and are within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure. 5. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry. C. Metal Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 0.067 inch. 1. Steel Sheet, Uncoated: Cold -rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated. Metal Pan Stairs 055113-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where they will be concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers. 3. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser. 4. Attach abrasive nosings to risers. 5. At Contractor's option, provide stair assemblies with metal pan subtreads filled with reinforced concrete during fabrication. 6. Provide epoxy-resin-filled treads, reinforced with glass fibers, with non-slip-concrete aggregate finish to tread surface. 7. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform framing. a. Smooth Soffit Construction: Construct subplatforms with flat metal under surfaces to produce smooth soffits. D. Abrasive-Coating-Finished, Formed-Metal Stairs: Form risers, treads, and platforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 0.097 inch. 1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated, hot-rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated. 2. Directly weld risers and treads to stringers; locate welds on underside of stairs. 3. Provide platforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated,the same as treads.Weld platforms to platform framing. 4. Finish tread and platform surfaces with manufacturer's standard epoxy-bonded abrasive finish. 2.7 FABRICATION OF STAIR RAILINGS AND GUARDS A. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 05 52 13 "Pipe and Tube Railings." 2.8 FINISHES A. Finish metal stairs after assembly. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated, ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC- SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Metal Pan Stairs 055113-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify elevations of floors, bearing surfaces and locations of bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. For wall-mounted railings, verify locations of concealed reinforcement within gypsum board and plaster assemblies. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL PAN STAIRS A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. 1. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts,through-bolts, lag bolts,and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting,and Placement: Perform cutting,drilling,and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless otherwise indicated. 1. Grouted Baseplates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. a. Clean bottom surface of plates. b. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts. C. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. d. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. e. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. 1) Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. 2) Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage- resistant grouts. D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. 1. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Metal Pan Stairs 055113-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. 3. Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General"Article. F. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in- Place Concrete." 1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete. 2. Center nosings on tread width. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF RAILINGS AND GUARDS A. Adjust railing and guard systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints with tight, hairline joints. 1. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. 2. Plumb posts in each direction, within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails and guards so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of stairs for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. 4. Secure posts, rail ends, and guard ends to building construction as follows: a. Anchor posts to steel by welding to steel supporting members. b. Anchor handrail and guard ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail and guard ends and anchored with post-installed anchors and bolts. B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. 1. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 2. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: a. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. b. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 3.4 REPAIR A. Touchup Painting: 1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. a. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. 2. Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 09 9113 "Painting." END OF SECTION 05 5113 Metal Pan Stairs 055113-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel railings. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2. Handrail brackets. 3. Shop primer. 4. Bituminous paint. 5. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Delegated Design Submittal: For railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For delegated design professional engineer. B. Welding certificates. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction. B. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: Pipe and Tube Railings 055213-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 IV applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq.ft. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2.2 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage and that provides 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface. 2.3 STEEL RAILINGS A. Tubing:ASTM A500/A500M (cold formed). B. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. C. Cast Iron Fittings: Either gray iron,ASTM A48/A48M,or malleable iron,ASTM A47/A47M, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 FASTENERS A. Fastener Materials: 1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railing Components: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM F1941/ASTM F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating. 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railing Components: Type 304 stainless steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329/F2329M for zinc coating. B. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. Pipe and Tube Railings 055213-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Handrail Brackets: Cast iron center of handrail 2-1/2 inches from wall. B. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select in accordance with AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. C. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint, complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. E. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 9113 "Painting." F. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. G. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated. H. Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with Section 09 91 13 "Painting." I. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion, complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M. J. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout, complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. 1. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. 2. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. Pipe and Tube Railings 0552 13-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 4. At exposed connections,finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Finish#1 welds: ornamental quality with no evidence of a welded joint. D. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. E. Form changes in direction as follows: 1. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. F. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. G. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated cap and end fittings of same metal and finish as railings. H. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. I. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush- resistant fillers or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. J. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. 1. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. 2. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. K. For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure. 2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanized Railings where indicated on drawings: 1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 2. Comply with ASTM A123/A123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. 3. Comply with ASTM A153/A153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. Pipe and Tube Railings 055213-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil,flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner and as follows. 1. Comply with SSPC-SP 16. D. For nongalvanized-steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners,and sleeves; however, hot-dip galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or masonry. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. 1. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. 2. Install railings level, plumb, square,true to line, without distortion, warp, or rack. 3. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels. 4. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 5. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 6. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 3.2 ANCHORING POSTS A. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 ATTACHING RAILINGS A. Attach handrails to walls with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. B. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: Pipe and Tube Railings 055213-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardant-treated wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M. END OF SECTION 05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings 055213-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 05 73 13 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glazed decorative metal railings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open-sided floor and exterior deck areas and for pedestrian guidance and support,visual separation,or wall protection. 1.3 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors,that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver items to Project site in time for installation. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Metal railings assembled from standard components. 2. Glass products. 3. Glazing cement and accessories for structural glass railings. 4. Sealant and accessories for structural glass railings. 5. Fasteners. 6. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color,texture, or design. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. Glazed Decorative Metal Railings 057313-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters. 2. Base channel. 3. Each type of glass and glass edge required. 4. Fittings and brackets. E. Delegated Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For tests performed by a qualified testing agency, in accordance with ASTM E894,ASTM E935, ASTM E2353, and ASTM E2358. B. Evaluation Reports: From ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. For glazed decorative metal railings. 2. For post-installed anchors. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Glazed decorative metal railing manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Glazed Decorative Metal Railings 057313-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design glazed decorative metal railings, including attachment to building construction. B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1. Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65, or minimum ultimate tensile strength divided by 1.95. 2. Copper Alloys: 60 percent of minimum yield strength. 3. Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength. 4. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. 5. Glass: 25 percent of mean modulus of rupture (50 percent probability of breakage), as listed in "Mechanical Properties" in AAMA CW-12, "Structural Properties of Glass." C. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, are to withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 IV applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Structural Glass Railings and Glass-Infill Panels: a. Concentrated load of 50 IV applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq.ft.. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. For structural glass railings, support each section of top rail by a minimum of three glass panels or by other means so railings will remain in place if any one glass panel fails. a. Support top rail ends such that railings remains in place if end glass panel fails. 2.2 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. ATR Technologies, Inc. 2. C.R. Laurence Co., Inc.; CRH Americas, Inc. 3. Greco; CSW Industrials Inc. 4. Hollaender Architectural Railing Systems; Hollaender Mfg. Co. 5. Julius Blum &Co., Inc. 6. Livers Bronze Co. 7. Southwest Metalsmiths, Inc. 8. VIVA Railings, LLC. Glazed Decorative Metal Railings 057313-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 9. Wagner Companies (The); R&B Wagner, Inc. B. Source Limitations for Laminated Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. C. Source Limitations for Decorative Metal Railing Components: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each component and installation method. D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in the Specifications establishes requirements for railing system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines,to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed,submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 2.3 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 STAINLESS STEEL A. Tubing:ASTM A554, Grade MT 304 . B. Castings:ASTM A743/A743M, Grade CF 8 or Grade CF 20 . C. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A666 or ASTM A240/A240M,Type 304 . D. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276, Type 304 . 2.5 GLASS AND GLAZING PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Glazing Publications: Comply with written instructions of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. NGA/GANA Publications: "GANA Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "GANA Glazing Manual." B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Class 1 and low-iron clear, or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3. Glazed Decorative Metal Railings 057313-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3. D. Glazing Cement and Accessories for Structural Glass Railings: Glazing cement, setting blocks, shims, and related accessories as recommended or supplied by railing manufacturer for installing structural glazing in metal base channels. E. Sealant and Accessories for Structural Glass Railings: Sealant,gaskets, setting blocks, shims, and related accessories as recommended or supplied by railing manufacturer for installing structural glazing in metal base channels. F. Glazing Gaskets for Glass-Infill Panels: Glazing gaskets and related accessories as recommended or supplied by railing manufacturer for installing glass-infill panels in post-supported railings. 2.6 GLASS HANDRAILS AND GUARDS A. Laminated Glass Handrails and Guards: ASTM C1172, Type II with two plies of glass bonded together by an interlayer. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer or ionoplast polymer interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Interlayer Thickness: As required by manufacturer for this application. 3. Kind: LHS (laminated heat strengthened) . 4. Glass Color: Inner-ply clear; outer-ply clear . 2.7 FASTENERS A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Stainless Steel Components:Type 304 stainless steel fasteners. 2. Dissimilar Metals:Type 304 stainless steel fasteners. B. Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching railings to other work unless exposed fasteners are the standard fastening method for railings indicated. D. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to design load, in accordance with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/ASTM F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. Glazed Decorative Metal Railings 057313-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.9 FABRICATION OF METAL RAILINGS A. Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details,finish,and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. F. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method. G. Form changes in direction as follows: 1. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. H. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. I. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings. J. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, handrail brackets, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work where indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush- resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and to prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. Glazed Decorative Metal Railings 057313-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• K. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. L. For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure. 2.10 FABRICATION OF GLASS PANELS AND BALUSTERS A. Fabricate glass to sizes and shapes required; provide for proper edge clearance and bite on glazing panels. B. Glass-Infill Panels: Provide laminated, heat-strengthened glass-infill panels. 1. Edge Finish: Clean-cut or flat-grind edges to produce smooth, square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces . 2.11 METAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS, GENERAL A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings. 2.12 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish,free of cross scratches. 1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. 2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. C. Stainless Steel Tubing Finishes: 1. 180-Grit Polished Finish: Uniform, directionally textured finish. D. Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Bar Finishes: Glazed Decorative Metal Railings 057313-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. High Luster Finish: ASTM A480/A480M, No. 7. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions for installing glazed decorative metal railings, accessories, and other components. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal railings. 1. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. 2. Install railings level, plumb, square,true to line; without distortion,warp, or rack. 3. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels. 4. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of metal railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 5. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 6. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.2 METAL RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Nonwelded Connections: 1. Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. 2. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. 3. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings. 3.3 METAL ANCHORING POSTS A. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, attached to post with setscrews. B. Leave anchorage joint exposed with anchoring material flush with adjacent surface. Glazed Decorative Metal Railings 057313-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1. For stainless steel railings, weld flanges to posts and bolt to metal-supporting surfaces. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean aluminum and stainless steel by washing thoroughly with water and soap, rinsing with clean water, and wiping dry. B. Clean and polish glass as recommended in writing by manufacturer.Wash both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. C. Clean wood rails by wiping with a damp cloth and then wiping dry. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION 05 73 13 Glazed Decorative Metal Railings 057313-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Wood blocking and nailers. 3. Wood furring and grounds. 4. Wood sleepers. 5. Plywood backing panels. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal size or greater but less than 5 inches nominal size in least dimension. C. OSB: Oriented strand board. D. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal size or greater in least dimension. E. Lumber grading agencies, and abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. SPIB:The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. Rough Carpentry 061000-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting,securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber:Comply with DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated,comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry wood products. 3. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 1. Boards: 19 percent. 2.2 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Rough Carpentry 061000-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application:Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing,vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT TREATMENT A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article,that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire- test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes,and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at anytime during the test. 1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type:Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire- retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D3201/D3201M at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM DS664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D6841. C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 15 percent. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. E. Application:Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Framing for raised platforms. Rough Carpentry 061000-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Concealed blocking. 3. Roof framing and blocking. 4. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking and similar members in connection with roofing. 5. Plywood backing panels. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Furring. S. Grounds. B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species. 2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exterior,A-C,fire-retardant treated,in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. Provide nails or screws,in sufficient length, to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches into wood substrate. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated,or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel. 2. For pressure-preservative-treated wood, use stainless steel fasteners. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized- asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch. Rough Carpentry 061000-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Set work to required levels and lines,with members plumb,true to line,cut,and fitted. Fit rough carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. H. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code (IBC). 2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One-and Two-Family Dwellings. 3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. Rough Carpentry 061000-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• END OF SECTION 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 061000-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 06 41 16 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets. 2. Cabinet hardware and accessories. 3. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets that are not concealed within other construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims and hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 2. Section 12 36 61.16 "Solid Surfacing Countertops". 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and other items installed in architectural plastic-laminate cabinets. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Plastic Laminates. 2. PVC edge material. 3. Thermoset decorative panels. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer . Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets 064116-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations with Humidity Control: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurement on Shop Drawings. 2. Provide allowance for trimming at site and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the Architectural Woodwork Standards for grades of cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. B. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Custom . C. Type of Construction: Frameless . D. Door and Drawer-Front Style: Flush overlay. 1. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch . E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by quality standard. 1. IlUra:tuuu 01,s� Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Wilsonart LLC. Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets 064116-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS . 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS . 4. Edges: PVC edge banding, 3.0 mm thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. 5. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels . G. Materials for Semi-Exposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade CLS. a. Edges of Plastic Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch thick, matching laminate in color, pattern and finish. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs:Thermoset decorative panels with PVC edge banding. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. H. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. 1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints. I. Countertops 1. Plastic Laminate Countertops: Medium density fiberboard substrate covered with HPDL, conventionally fabricated and self-edge banded. 2. Solid Surfacing Countertops: Where indicated on drawings. Refer to 12 36 61.16 "Solid Surfacing Countertops". J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated on the Room Finish Schedule: a. PLAM-1: WilsonArt "Calcutta Marble" 4925K-07 b. PLAM-2: WilsonArt "Magnolia" 5012K-19 C. PLAM-3: WilsonArt "Dove Grey" D92-60 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent. Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets 064116-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade 130 . 2. Particleboard (Medium Density):ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 . 3. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8 and 3.10. 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware." B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening. C. Back-Mounted Pulls:ANSI/BHMA A156.9, B02011. 1. Amerock BP36571G10 Monument 5-1/16 inch Center to Center Pull 2. Finish: Satin Nickel. D. Catches: Push-in magnetic catches,ANSI/BHMA A156.9, 803131 . E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports:ANSI/BHMA A156.9, 804071;with shelf rests, B04081 F. Shelf Rests:ANSI/BHMA A156.9, 804013; metal . G. Drawer Slides:ANSI/BHMA A156.9. 1. Heavy-Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mount . a. Type: Full extension. b. Material: Zinc-plated ball bearing slides. H. Door Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.11, E07121. I. Drawer Locks: ANSI/BHMA A156.11, E07041. J. Door and Drawer Silencers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, L03011. K. Grommets for Cable Passage: 2-inch OD, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage where indicated on the drawings, 3'-0" o.c. minimum. 1. Color: as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full line of colors . L. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for ANSI/BHMA finish number indicated. Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets 064116-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Satin Stainless Steel: ANSI/BHMA 630. M. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in ANSI/BHMA A156.9. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors:Select material,type,size,and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous- metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement . 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles and details indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware,appliances,electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets 064116-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours. B. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard grade of item to be installed. C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with wafer-head cabinet installation screws. D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches using concealed shims. 1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. 2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips . 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects;where not possible to repair, replace woodwork.Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate and adjust hardware. C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 06 4116 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets 064116-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 06 64 00 PLASTIC PANELING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Factory-laminated wall plastic sheet paneling. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For plastic paneling and trim accessories, in manufacturer's standard sizes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and FM Approvals. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. FM 4880 approved. 1.S PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer. Plastic Paneling 066400-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.2 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING A. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Paneling: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D5319. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Crane Composites, Inc.; Varietex series or comparable product by one of the following: a. Glasteel. b. Marlite. C. Newcourt, Inc. d. Nudo Products, Inc. e. Parkland Plastics, Inc. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows when tested by a qualified testing agency in accordance with ASTM E84. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 3. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch. 4. Wall Panel Size:As indicated on Drawings. 5. Surface Finish: Sandstone. B. Color: Cotton White. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges. 1. Color: Match panels. B. Moldings: PVC pattern-matched to panel. C. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer. D. Sealant: Mildew-resistant, single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Corners: Plumb and straight. Plastic Paneling 066400-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Surfaces: Smooth, sound, and uniform. 3. Nails or Screw Fasteners: Countersunk. 4. Joints and Cracks: Filled flush and smooth with adjoining surfaces. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair adhesive bond, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust. B. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. C. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints so that trimmed panels at corners are not less than 12 inches wide. 1. Mark plumb lines on substrate at panel joint locations for accurate installation. 2. Locate panel joints to allow clearance at panel edges in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic paneling in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Do all cutting with carbide-tipped saw blades or drill bits or cut with snips. 2. Install panels plumb, level, square, flat, and in proper alignment. 3. Install panels to be water resistant and washable. 4. Install panels with manufacturer's recommended gap for panel field and cornerjoints. B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. C. Install trim accessories with adhesive and nails or staples. Do not fasten through panels. D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels, and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant. E. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. F. Maintain uniform space between adjacent panels and between panels and floors, ceilings, and fixtures. Fill space with sealant. G. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains. END OF SECTION 06 64 00 Plastic Paneling 066400-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 07 11 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. iiul .Iluuu 'u::" Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Chem Masters, Inc. 2. Euclid Chemical Company(The); an RPM company. 3. Henry Company. 4. Karnak Corporation. S. W.R. Meadows. B. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227,Type II, Class 1. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Furnish auxiliary materials recommended in writing by dampproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with bituminous dampproofing. Bituminous Dampproofing 071113-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for dampproofing application, cure time between coats, and drying time before backfilling unless otherwise indicated. 1. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection. 2. Apply additional coats if recommended in writing by manufacturer or to achieve a smooth surface and uninterrupted coverage. B. Where dampproofing footings and foundation walls, apply from finished-grade line to top of footing;extend overtop of footing and down a minimum of 6 inches over outside face of footing. 1. Extend dampproofing 12 inches onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed. 2. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners, changes in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where indicated as "reinforced," by embedding an 8-inch- wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing. Dampproofing coat for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required. C. Where dampproofing exterior face of inner wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls, lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto flashing, masonry reinforcement, veneer ties, and other items that penetrate inner wythe. 1. Extend dampproofing over outer face of structural members and concrete slabs that interrupt inner wythe. 2. Lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto shelf angles supporting veneer. D. Where dampproofing interior face of above-grade, exterior concrete and masonry walls, continue dampproofing through intersecting walls by keeping vertical mortar joints at intersection temporarily open or by dampproofing wall before constructing intersecting walls. 3.2 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. Exterior Face of Inner Wythe of Cavity Walls: Apply primer and one brush or spray coat at not less than 1 gal,/100 sq.ft. END OF SECTION 07 1113 Bituminous Dampproofing 071113-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 07 13 26 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Modified bituminous sheet waterproofing. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample warranties. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish replacement waterproofing material for waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING A. Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing: Minimum 60-mil nominal thickness, self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated on one side to a 4-mil- thick, polyethylene-film reinforcement, and with release liner on adhesive side. 1. IIIinuAU t.:,�, Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.; Bituthene 3000. 2. Physical Properties: a. Tensile Strength, Membrane: 325 psi minimum; ASTM D412, Die C, modified. Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing 071326-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D412, Die C, modified. C. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D1970/D1970M. d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch movement; ASTM C836/C836M. e. Puncture Resistance: 50 Ibf minimum;ASTM E154/E154M. f. Water Absorption: 0.1 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at 70 deg F;ASTM D570. g. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perm maximum; ASTM E96/E96M, Water Method. h. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 200 feet minimum; ASTM D5385. 3. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt strips of same material and thickness as sheet waterproofing. 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing. 1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch, predrilled at 9-inch centers where required by manufacturer. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET-WATERPROOFING A. Install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation. Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing 071326-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F, install self- adhering, modified bituminous sheets produced for low-temperature application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F. D. Horizontal Application: Apply sheets from low to high points of decks to ensure that laps shed water. E. Apply continuous sheets over already-installed sheet strips, bridging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints. F. Seal edges of sheet-waterproofing terminations with mastic. G. Install sheet-waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing. H. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions. 3.3 PROTECTION, REPAIR,AND CLEANING A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings. C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07 13 26 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing 071326-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 07 19 17 ANTI-GRAFFITI COATINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Surface applied anti-graffiti coatings. 2. Extended written warranty. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 0125 00—Substitution Procedures. B. Product Data: including the following: 1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Certified test reports indicating compliance with performance requirements specified herein. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Statement of qualifications. 2. Statement of compliance with Regulatory Requirements. 3. Field Quality Control Submittals as specified in Part 3. 4. Manufacturer's field reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualification: Not less than 5 years experience in the actual production of specified products. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm experienced in installation or application of systems similar in complexity to those required for this Project, plus the following: 1. Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer. C. Product Qualifications:The anti-graffiti coating shall meet the following requirements: 1. Active Content: Organofluorosilane. 2. Solvent: None, water-borne. 3. VOC Content: less than 50 grams per liter. Anti-Graffiti Coatings 071917-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 4. Cleaning Cycles: ASTM D 6578 "Standard Practice for Determination of Graffiti Resistance" minimum 25 cycles without loss of repellency. 5. Breathability:ASTM D1653 greater than 95%water vapor transmission. 6. Surface Appearance: No appreciable difference compared to non-coated surface. 7. Excellent Ultraviolet light stability. D. Regulatory and Safety Requirements: Products must have independent laboratory analysis that material does not contain any known carcinogens. Materials shall comply with State and local regulations concerning AIM (Architectural, Industrial and Maintenance) coatings regarding Volatile Organic Content (VOC). If used indoors the material must comply with the following safety requirements: 1. Flammability, Smoke Spread and Toxic Fume Emission During Burning(BS 6853) a. Toxic gases below IDLH level. b. Flame Propagation: Does not propagate flame C. Smoke emission: No change 1.4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification. B. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Maintain ambient temperature above 40 degrees F during and 24 hours after installation. 2. Do not proceed with application on materials if ice or frost is covering the substrate. 3. Do not proceed with application if ambient temperature of surface exceeds 100 degree F. 4. Do not proceed with the application of materials in rainy conditions or if heavy rain is anticipated with 4 hours after application. B. Sealer Coordination: 1. Verify compatibility with curing compounds, patching materials, repair mortar, paints, sealants, to be used on masonry surfaces to ensure compatibility with the anti-graffiti coating. 1.6 SPECIAL WARRANTIES A. The system manufacture shall furnish the Owner a written single source performance warranty that the Anti-Graffiti Coating System will be free of defects related to workmanship or material Anti-Graffiti Coatings 071917-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• deficiency for a five(5)year period from the date of completion of the work provided under this section. 1. All defective areas shall be retreated by the system manufacture as determined by the Engineer. 2. The Anti-Graffiti manufacturer shall be responsible for providing labor and material to reseal area where coating effectiveness does not meet the specified limits. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Products of the following anti-graffiti manufacturer listed below will be acceptable for use on this project, provided that they meet the performance requirements of these specifications. Product substitution of materials or manufacturers must comply with Section 1.02. 1. Basis of Design: Protectosil ANTIGRAFFITI®, Evonik Corporation 1-800-828-0919. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection: Install coverings to protect adjacent surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Surfaces to receive sealer shall be cleaned of dirt, oil, graffiti, grease, laitance, and other contaminants. All other surfaces shall be cleaned by mid-pressure water (1500 psi) and commercial paint strippers. Pressure washing is the minimum cleaning that will be accepted other methods,such as blast racking, mobile power scrubbing and sandblasting may be submitted. 2. Remove dirt, dust and materials that will interfere with the proper and effective application of the anti-graffiti coating. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to prepare the surfaces of the concrete as recommended by the Anti-graffiti Manufacturer and acceptable to the Engineer. 3. Check the compatibility of all caulking and patching material to be used with the anti- graffiticoating. 4. Sealants, patching materials,and expansion joints shall have been installed and approved. Anti-Graffiti Coatings 071917-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Before an anti-graffiti coating will be accepted a field test evaluation will be done. The cost of the field testing will be the responsibility of the contractor. The owner's representative will approve the test area prior to starting the project. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Product shall be applied as per manufacturer's application instructions and recommendations for this specific project. Provide written copy of manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply at temperature and weather conditions recommended by the manufacture or written in this specification. C. Surface residue shall be brushed out thoroughly until they completely penetrate into the surface. D. Protect treated areas from rain and other surface water for a period of not less than four hours after application. E. Provide adequate ventilation and follow all safety regulations for the City, County and State. 3.5 CLEANING A. As Work Progresses: Clean spillage from adjacent surfaces using materials and methods as recommended by anti-graffiti manufacturer. B. Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces when no longer needed. 3.6 COMPLETION A. Work that does not conform to specified requirements shall be corrected and/or replaced as directed by the Owners Representative at contractor's expense without extension of time. END OF SECTION 07 19 17 Anti-Graffiti Coatings 071917-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 072100 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board insulation. (For use at exterior walls with masonry veneer.) 2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. (For use in interior and exterior Metal Stud Wall Cavities.) 3. Mineral-wool blanket insulation. (For use in fire stopping details, where indicated in drawings.) 4. Mineral-wool board insulation. (For use in Standing Seam Metal Wall veneer systems.) 5. Loose fill glass fiber, closed-cell polyurethane spray foam and ignition barrier. (For Miscellaneous Voids.) 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board insulation. 2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 3. Mineral-wool blanket insulation. 4. Mineral-wool board insulation. 5. Loose fill glass fiber, closed-cell polyurethane spray foam and ignition barrier. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Installer's Certification: Listing type, manufacturer, and R-value of insulation installed in each element of the building thermal envelope. 1. Sign, date, and post the certification in a conspicuous location on Project site. B. Product test reports. C. Research reports. Thermal Insulation 072100-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation, Type IV: ASTM C578, Type IV, 25-psi minimum compressive strength; unfaced. Thickness and width as indicated in drawings. 1. V\Az:mi, l:a l[l u q rs" Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. DuPont de Nemours, Inc. b. Owens Corning. C. The Dow Chemical Company. 2. Flame-Spread Index: Not more than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke-Developed Index: Not more than 450 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly. 5. Labeling: Provide identification of mark indicating R-value of each piece of insulation 12 inches and wider in width. 2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation, Unfaced:ASTM C665,Type I; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics.Thickness and width as indicated in drawings. 1. Va ni u a a ureirs" Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed; SAINT-GOBAIN. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. C. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning. 2. Flame-Spread Index: Not more than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke-Developed Index: Not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Labeling: Provide identification of mark indicating R-value of each piece of insulation 12 inches and wider in width. 2.3 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET INSULATION A. Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation, Unfaced: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics. Thickness and width as indicated on drawings. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Owens Corning. C. ROCKWOOL. Thermal Insulation 072100-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Flame-Spread Index: Not more than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke-Developed Index: Not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Labeling: Provide identification of mark indicating R-value of each piece of insulation 12 inches and wider in width. 2.4 MINERAL-WOOL BOARD INSULATION A. Mineral-Wool Board Insulation,Types IA and IB, Unfaced: ASTM C612, Types IA and IB; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics.Thickness and width as indicated on drawings. 1. nuiuiul, ;uauuq urvra Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Owens Corning. C. ROCKWOOL. 2. Nominal Density: 4 Ib/cu.ft. 3. Flame-Spread Index: Not more than 15 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Smoke-Developed Index: Not more than zero when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 5. Labeling: Provide identification of mark indicating R-value of each piece of insulation 12 inches and wider in width. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E84. 2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E84. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) DAP Touch 'n Seal: 1.75 PCF FR Spray Foam Insulation. a) Available in multiple, different sized Disposable Spray Foam Kits. b) DAP Products, Inc.: 1645 Manufacturer Dr., Fenton, MO 63026. Toll Free: (800) 325-6180. Direct: (636) 349-5855. Fax: (636) 349-5335. www.touch-n-seal.com 2) Dow FROTH-PAK Foam Sealant a) Available in multiple, different sized Disposable Spray Foam Kits. b) Dow Chemical Company; Dow Building Solutions, 200 Larkin Center, 1605 Joseph Drive, Midland, MI 48674. (866) 583-2583. www.dowbuildingsolutions.com 3. Ignition Barrier/Thermal Barrier: Intumescent coating applied over Spray Polyurethane Foam (SPF)to achieve a "15 Minute Alternative to Thermal Barrier"and "5 Minute Ignition Barrier" in compliance with ICC IBC. a. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following or equivalent manufacturer: 1) DC315 Thermal Barrier Paint for Spray Foam (SPF). Thermal Insulation 072100-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• a) International Fireproof Technology, Inc. 17528 Von Karman Ave., Irvine, CA 92614. (949) 975-8588. www.painttoprotect.com B. Insulation Anchors, Spindles, and Standoffs: As recommended by manufacturer. C. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry,and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Install insulation with manufacturer's R-value label exposed after insulation is installed. D. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. E. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses,widths, and lengths.Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c. both ways on inside face and as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions, and with faces flush. 2. Press units firmly against inside substrates. 3. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties designed for this purpose and specified in Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry." 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: Thermal Insulation 072100-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.S Ib/cue ft. 2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation:Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 07 2100 Thermal Insulation 072100-S Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 07 25 00 GYPSUM BOARD WEATHER AND AIR BARRIER FLUID-APPLIED PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work of this section includes coated fiberglass-mat gypsum sheathing board system with integral weather-resistant barrier (WRB) and air barrier (AB) features, and all accessory materials required for covering sheathing joints, fasteners, penetrations, rough openings, and material transitions, for use under exterior wall claddings. B. Fluid-applied membrane air barrier 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements; coordination with owners' independent testing and inspection agency B. Section 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing C. Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry D. Section 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim E. Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants; sealant materials and installation techniques F. Section 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Air Barrier(AB):Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively air impermeable but moisture vapor permeable,with sealed joints and penetrations,and with terminations sealed to adjacent surfaces. B. Weather-Resistant Barrier (WRB): Water-shedding barrier made of material that is moisture- resistant, installed to shed water, with sealed joints and penetrations, and with terminations sealed to adjacent surfaces. C. Rough Openings: Openings in the wall to accommodate windows and doors. D. Material Transitions: Areas where the WRB / AB coated fiberglass-mat gypsum sheathing connects to beams, columns, slabs, parapets, foundation walls, roofing systems, and at the interface of dissimilar materials. Gypsum Board Weather and Air Barrier Fluid-Applied 072500-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C473 Standard Test Method for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products. B. ASTM C1177 Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. C. ASTM C1280 Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing. D. ASTM D3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. E. ASTM E72 Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction. F. ASTM E96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. G. ASTM E119 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. H. ASTM E136 Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 C. I. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. J. ASTM E2178 Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials. K. ASTM E2357 Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies. L. ICC ES AC212 Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Coatings Used as Water-Resistive Barriers over Exterior Sheathing. M. AAMA 714 Voluntary Specification for Liquid Applied Flashing Used to Create a Water Resistive Seal Around Exterior Wall Openings in Buildings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals: Submit in accordance with Division 1 requirements. B. Product Data and Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's product data including sheathing and accessory material types, composition, descriptions and properties, installation instructions and substrate preparation recommendations. C. System Compatibility Letter: The manufacturer shall supply a letter identifying compatibility/ incompatibility with other sealants / membranes / adhesives provided in this contract, under different specification sections,that may come into contact with or create seals with or against the products provided under this specification section 1. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to coordinate the use of the appropriate products provided under the various specification sections to insure compatibility and avoid premature deterioration or lack of adhesion, based on the information provided by the manufacturer. Gypsum Board Weather and Air Barrier Fluid-Applied 072500-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating locations and extent of WRB / AB system, including details of typical conditions, special joint conditions, intersections with other building envelope systems and materials; counter flashings and details showing bridging of envelope at substrate changes, details of sealing penetrations, and detailed flashing around windows and doors E. Test Reports: Submit test reports indicating compliance with specified performance characteristics and requirements F. Sample warranty: Submit a sample warranty identifying the terms and conditions of the warranty as herein specified. G. Evaluation reports: Accredited laboratory testing for materials 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty against in-place exposure damage (delamination, deterioration)for 12 (twelve) months of exposure to normal weather conditions beginning with the date of installation of the product. B. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty for sheathing to be free of manufacturing defects that make it unsuitable for its intended use. Warranty period shall be Ten (10) years from the date of purchase of the product. C. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty for use as a drainage plane when the cladding systems are properly designed and installed, with a warranty period of 10 years from the date of purchase of the product or, when used as a substrate in architecturally specified drainage EIFS, 12 years from the date of purchase of the product.. D. Material Warranty: Provide material manufacturer's standard product warranty,for a minimum three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE- MOCK UP A. Install WRB/AB sheathing with sealed joints and penetrations in mock-up . 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store WRB / AB coated fiberglass mat gypsum sheathing under cover and keep dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack sheathing flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. B. Protect fluid applied material, primers and accessory materials from damage, weather, excessive temperatures and construction traffic. C. Store fluid applied material and primers at temperatures of 40 degrees F or above. Gypsum Board Weather and Air Barrier Fluid-Applied 072500-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Apply fluid applied material to clean surfaces free of contaminants. Chemical residues, surface coatings or films may adversely affect adhesion. Pressure-treated wood and other contaminated surfaces should be cleaned with a solvent wipe before application. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Application standards where applicable are in accordance with Gypsum Association Publication GA-253 for gypsum sheathing and ASTM C1280. B. Do not install sheathing that is moisture damaged. Indications that panels are moisture damaged include, but not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. C. Allow installed sheathing to be dry to the touch before sealing joints, penetrations, rough openings, and material transitions. D. Do not attempt to seal joints, corners, penetrations, rough openings, and material transitions when installed sheathing surface is frozen or has frost on the surface. E. Do not apply sealing materials to sheathing when air or surface temperature is below 25F for fluid applied materials. F. Sequencing. Do not install air barrier material before the roof assembly has been sufficiently installed to prevent a buildup of water in the interior of the building. G. Compatibility. Do not allow air barrier materials to come in contact with chemically incompatible materials. H. Ultra-violet exposure. Do not expose air barrier materials to sunlight longer than as recommended by the material manufacturer. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 WEATHER BARRIER ASSEMBLIES A. Acceptable products: DensElement Barrier System as manufactured by Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 1. Sheathing: DensElement Sheathing. 2. Fluid-applied flashing materials: Fluid-applied flashing as approved by Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 3. Primers, backer rods and accessory materials: As approved by Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. B. System Description:Weather-Resistant Barrier and Air Barrier assembly installed at exterior stud walls under exterior cladding, consisting of the following components as herein specified: 1. Sheathing: WRB/AB coated fiberglass mat gypsum sheathing. Gypsum Board Weather and Air Barrier Fluid-Applied 072500-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Fluid-applied flashing to seal sheathing joints, inside and outside corners, penetrations, rough openings, and material transitions. 3. Backer rods and accessory materials. 2.2 WEATHER-RESISTANT BARRIER (WRB)AND AIR BARRIER (AB) GYPSUM SHEATHING A. Description: Coated fiberglass mat gypsum sheathing with integral weather-resistant barrier (WRB) and air barrier (AB) complying with applicable requirements of ICC- ES AC212, ASTM E2178,ASTM E2357. B. Vapor Permeability: When tested as system in accordance with ASTM E96 (water method) the WRB and AB system has a minimum vapor permeance of 20 perms with sealed joints and fasteners. C. The WRB and Air Barrier Gypsum Sheathing has a moisture absorption rate< 6% D. Air Barrier performance requirements: 1. Air permeance of sheathing: Sheathing with an air permeability not greater than 0.001 cfm/ft2 (0.02L/s/m2) when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. 2. Air permeance of assembly: Assembly of sheathing and sealing components with an average air leakage not greater than 0.04 cfm/ft2 (0.2L/s/m2) when tested in accordance with ASTM E2357. 2.3 FLUID-APPLIED FLASHING AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS FOR JOINTS, INSIDE AND OUTSIDE CORNERS, FASTENERS, ROUGH OPENINGS, AND MATERIAL TRANSITIONS A. Substrate requirements: 1. Sheathing panels should be trimmed to obtain neat fitting joints. 2. Gaps that are more than 1/4" and less than 1" shall be filled with a backer rod to support the fluid applied flashing at the transition joint. 3. For gaps larger than 1" use transition membrane flashing as approved by Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. B. Fluid applied flashing for panel joints, inside and outside corners, and penetrations 1. Description: STP-based fluid applied flashing. 2. Properties: a. Acceptable substrate: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC DensElement Sheathing. b. Adhesion to fiberglass mat faced sheathing: No delamination from face of sheathing. C. Applied wet film thickness: 16 mils. d. Air permeance: meets 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot (0.02L/s/sq m), maximum,when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. e. Water vapor permeance: >10 perms (287 ng/(Pa s sq m)), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. Gypsum Board Weather and Air Barrier Fluid-Applied 072500-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• f. Ultraviolet and weathering resistance:Approved for 12 months weather exposure. g. Comply with applicable requirements of AAMA 714 3. Primer: Provide primer in accordance with air barrier manufacturer's written instructions for exposed gypsum core edges. C. Fluid applied flashing for sealing fasteners: 1. Description: STP-based fluid applied flashing. 2. Properties: a. Acceptable substrate: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC DensElement Sheathing. b. Adhesion to fiberglass mat faced sheathing: No delamination from face of sheathing. C. Applied wet film thickness: 16 mils. d. Air permeance: meets 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot(0.02 L/s/sq m), maximum,when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. e. Water vapor permeance: >10 perms (287 ng/(Pa s sq m)), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. f. Ultraviolet and weathering resistance:Approved for 12 months weather exposure. g. Comply with applicable requirements of AAMA 714. D. Fluid applied flashing for sealing rough openings 1. Fluid applied flashing: STP-based fluid applied flashing. 2. Primer: Liquid primer in accordance with air barrier manufacturer's written instructions for exposed gypsum core edges.Apply primer to raw gypsum board edges by brushing on a thin, uniform coat. 3. Properties: a. Acceptable substrate: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC DensElement Sheathing. b. Flashing adhesion to fiberglass mat faced sheathing: No delamination from face of sheathing. C. Applied wet film thickness: 16 mils. d. Flashing air permeance: meets 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot (0.02 L/s/sq m), maximum,when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. e. Flashing water vapor permeance: >10 perms(287 ng/(Pa s sq m)), minimum,when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. f. Ultraviolet and weathering resistance:Approved for 12 months weather exposure. g. Flashing comply with applicable requirements of AAMA 714. E. Material transitions using fluid applied flashing: 1. Refer to substrate requirements for treatment of gaps as specified herein. Gaps that are more than 1/4" and less than 1" shall be filled with a backer rod to support the fluid applied flashing at the transition joint. For gaps larger than 1" use transition membrane flashing as approved by Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC 2. Fluid applied flashing for material transitions: 3. Properties: a. Acceptable substrate: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC DensElement Sheathing. Gypsum Board Weather and Air Barrier Fluid-Applied 072500-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• b. Adhesion to fiberglass mat faced sheathing: No delamination from face of sheathing. C. Applied wet film thickness: 16 mils d. Air permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot (0.02L/s/sq m), maximum,when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178 e. Water vapor permeance: >10 perms (287 ng/(Pa s sq m)), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M f. Ultraviolet and weathering resistance: Approved for 12 months weather exposure g. Comply with applicable requirements of AAMA 714 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners, loose or damaged sheathing material at edges of panel that might interfere with proper installation to seal joints, corners, fasteners, penetrations, openings, or material transitions. B. Wipe down the sheathing surface to receive sealing materials with a clean cloth. C. Ensure field conditions are met as outlined in Part 1—General Requirements. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WEATHER-RESISTANT BARRIER (WRB)AND AIR BARRIER (AB) SHEATHING A. WRB/AB Coated fiberglass mat sheathing: 1. Install and fasten DensElement Sheathing according to manufacturer's detailed installation instructions 2. Fastener and penetration treatment: Treat all sheathing fasteners with specified fluid applied flashing used for sealing joints. 3.3 FLUID APPLIED FLASHING FOR SEALING SHEATHING JOINTS, INSIDE AND OUTSIDE CORNERS, FASTENERS, ROUGH OPENINGS,AND MATERIAL TRANSITIONS A. Sealing DensElement Sheathing Joints using specified Fluid Applied Flashing 1. Apply fluid applied flashing over the joint in a zigzag or ribbon pattern. Cover a minimum of 1" on both sides of the joint. 2. With a straight edge tool, spread evenly over the sheathing joint. 3. Apply at a rate to achieve a minimum wet mil thickness of 16 mils over the entire joint area. B. Sealing DensElement Sheathing Vertical Corners using specified Fluid Applied Flashing 1. Apply fluid applied flashing over the inside and/or outside corner in a zigzag or ribbon pattern. Cover a minimum of 2" on both sides of the corner. Gypsum Board Weather and Air Barrier Fluid-Applied 072500-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. With a straight edge tool, spread evenly over the sheathing corner. 3. Apply at a rate to achieve a minimum wet mil thickness of 16 mils over the corner area. C. Sealing DensElement Sheathing Fasteners using specified Fluid Applied Flashing:Apply the fluid applied flashing material to fasteners and wipe down with a straight edge tool; provide a minimum 16 mil thick coating over the fastener. D. Sealing DensElement Sheathing Rough Openings using specified Fluid Applied Flashing 1. Apply a bead of DensDefy"' Liquid Flashing into all inside corners of the opening. 2. Apply DensDefyT"' Liquid Flashing in the opening sill,jamb and header in a zig-zag or ribbon pattern. 3. Apply DensDefyT"^ Liquid Flashing over the DensElement Sheathing adjacent to the opening sill,jamb and header in a zig-zag or ribbon pattern. 4. Use a straight edge tool to spread the DensDefyT"° Liquid Flashing to a pinhole void free application achieving a minimum 16 wet mils S. Spread the DensDefyT"" Liquid Flashing a minimum of 2" into the rough opening and a minimum 1" past the interior air seal of the window unit. Refer to the project details and specifications to determine window placement and minimum requirement for rough opening treatment. 6. Ensure a minimum 2" of DensDefy'" Liquid Flashing is applied onto the sheathing surface adjacent to the opening. E. Sealing DensElement sheathing material transitions using specified Fluid Applied Flashing or Transition Membrane. 1. Sheathing joint and transition gaps to receive fluid-applied flashing shall be less than 1/4" (6.4 mm). 2. For gaps larger than 1/4" use shall be sealed with fluid-applied flashing as approved by Georgia-Pacific Gypsum, LLC 3. Gaps more than 1/4" and less than 1" shall be sealed with fluid-applied flashing as approved by Georgia-Pacific Gypsum, LLC 4. For gaps equal to or larger than 1", use transition membrane flashing as approved by Georgia-Pacific Gypsum, LLC 5. If necessary, prime the adjacent material with primer per the material manufacturer's recommendations. 6. Apply fluid applied flashing over the sheathing and adjacent material in a zigzag or ribbon pattern. Ensure the flashing is a minimum of 2" on each substrate material surface. 7. With a straight edge tool, spread fluid applied flashing over material transition joint. 8. Apply at a rate to achieve a minimum wet mil thickness of 16 mils. 3.4 SEALING EXTERIOR WALL PENETRATIONS A. Exterior wall penetration shall be sealed to prevent air and water infiltration. Penetrations may be sealed with fluid applied flashing. B. For round or square pipe/duct penetrations use specified fluid applied flashing, refer to DensElement Barrier System Technical Guide for instructions for proper sealing. Gypsum Board Weather and Air Barrier Fluid-Applied 072500-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Do not cover installed WRB/AB assembly until required inspections have been completed and installation has been accepted. B. Where applicable, allow for owner's inspection and air barrier testing and reporting. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect WRB/AB assembly from damage during installation and during the construction period. END OF SECTION 07 25 00 Gypsum Board Weather and Air Barrier Fluid-Applied 072500-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 1• 07 27 20 FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Materials and installation methods supplementing a one-component vapour permeable, liquid applied elastic air and water barrier, vapour retarder materials and assemblies, located in the non-accessible part of the wall. B. Materials and installation to bridge and seal air leakage pathways and gaps at CMU substrate, including, but not limited to the following: 1. Connections of the walls to the roof air barrier. 2. Connections of the walls to the foundations. 3. Expansion joints. 4. Openings and penetrations of window frames, store front, curtain wall. 5. Door frames. 6. Piping, conduit, duct and similar penetrations. 7. Masonry ties, screws, bolts and similar penetrations. 8. All other air leakage pathways in the building envelope. 9. Sealing flashing to wall surface. 1.3 Related Sections A. Section 04 20 19— Masonry Veneer: Flexible through wall flashing membrane. Sealing flashing to wall surface. B. Section 06 10 53—Miscellaneous Carpentry: Covering preservative-treated materials with self- adhering membranes. C. Section 07 25 00-Gypsum Board Weather and Air Barrier:for use at sheathing. D. Section 07 9000—Joint Protection: Sealants. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REFERENCES A. ASTM E 2178-01: Standard Test for Determining the Air Permeability of Building Materials. Fluid Applied Air Barrier 072720-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. ASTM E 2357, Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assembly (Full Scale Wall Testing of the Air Barrier System). Ensure tests were conducted on steel stud frame walls with penetrations (Specimen 2) as some air barrier assembly are not tested in that critical mode. C. ASTM E283-91:Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. D. CODE MANDATED ASTM E331: Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. E. ASTM E96: Water Vapor Transmission of Materials, Procedure B F. AATCC 127 Water Resistance G. ASTM D 1970, Self Sealability H. ICC-ES AC212, Freeze Thaw, Crack Bridging I. CODE MANDATED Fire Testing:Air Barrier,as a component of a wall assembly,shall have passed a NFPA 285 complete wall fire test. J. ASTM E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning K. Listed as an evaluated system by Air Barrier Association of America at www.airbarriers.org 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Air Barrier Membrane Continuity: The application of the Air Barrier products and methods, when complete,shall provide a continuous and unbroken membrane"enclosure"on all exterior walls, soffits and other surfaces enclosing conditioned space. Special attention shall be paid to all door, window and louver penetrations and proper membrane continuity between the exterior cavity wall membrane and the specified roof system. (See attached details in this specification section and the Drawings for indications on Floor Plan & Wall Sections and their associated enlarge details.) B. Provide an air barrier system constructed to perform as a continuous elastic air barrier, and as a liquid water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior any incidental condensation or water penetration. Membrane shall accommodate movements of building materials by providing expansion and control joints as required, with accessory air seal materials at such locations, changes in substrate and perimeter conditions. 1. The air barrier shall have the following characteristics: a. It must be continuous, with all joints made air-tight. b. It shall be capable of withstanding positive and negative combined design wind,fan and stack pressures on the envelope without damage or displacement, and shall transfer the load to the structure. It shall not displace adjacent materials under full load. The air barrier shall be joined in an airtight and flexible manner to the air Fluid Applied Air Barrier 072720-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• barrier material of adjacent assembly, allowing for the relative movement of assembly due to thermal and moisture variations and creep. Connection shall be made between: 1) Foundation and walls. 2) Walls and the windows,curtain walls,storefronts, louvers and doors in those walls. 3) Different wall assemblies. 4) Wall and roof. 5) Wall and soffits below conditioned space 6) Wall and roof over conditioned and unconditioned space. 7) Walls,floor and roof across construction, control and expansion joints. 8) Walls,floors and roof to utility, pipe and duct penetrations. 9) Flashing to wall surface. 2. All penetrations of the air barrier and paths of air infiltration/exfiltration shall be made air-tight. 3. Air Permeability: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq.ft. @ 10.5 psf per ASTM E283. 4. Air Permeability: @ delta P of 0.3 inches water...0.002 CFM/ft2 per ASTM E 2178 5. ASTM E 2357, Full Scale Wall Testing of the Air Barrier System a. System Air Leakage, Requirement-0.0008 CFM/ft2 maximum b. Penetration Check, Requirement—0.00088 CFM/ftz maximum 6. ASTM E96 Water Vapor Permeance:10-20 Perms per Procedure B 7. ASTM E331, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference- 10 psf for 2 hours. 8. Elongation: Minimum 50% per ASTM D412. 9. AATC 127 Water Resistance— Pass 10. ASTM D 1970 Self Sealability—Pass 11. ICC-ES AC212, Freeze Thaw, Crack Bridging—Pass 12. Fire Testing:Air Barrier, as a component of a wall assembly,shall have passed a NFPA 285 complete wall fire test. 13. ASTM E84 Class A Fire Resistant 14. Listed as an evaluated assembly by the Air Barrier Association at www.airbarriers.org 1.6 Submittals A. Submittal Procedures: Submit per Section 0133 00—Submittal Procedures. B. Quality Assurance Program: Submit evidence of current Contractor accreditation and Installer certification under the Air Barrier Association of America's (ABAA) Quality Assurance Program (QAP). Submit accreditation number of the Contractor and certification number(s) of the ABAA Certified Installer(s). C. Product Data: Submit material Manufacturer's Product Data, material manufacturer's instructions for evaluating, preparing,and treating substrate,temperature and other limitations of installation conditions,Technical Data, and tested physical and performance properties. Fluid Applied Air Barrier 072720-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Submit letter from primary air barrier material manufacturer indicating approval of materials that are proposed to be used that are not currently listed in the accessories section of this specification for that manufacturer's material. 2. Include statement from the primary air barrier material manufacturer that the materials used in their air barrier assembly which will be used to adhere to the underlying substrate are chemically compatible to the substrate material. D. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings showing locations and extent of air barrier assemblies and details of all typical conditions, intersections with other envelope assemblies and materials, membrane counter-flashings, and details showing how gaps in the construction will be bridged, how inside and outside corners are negotiated, how materials that cover the materials are secured with air-tight condition maintained, and how miscellaneous penetrations such as conduits, pipes, electric boxes and similar items are sealed. 1. Include VOC content of each material, and applicable legal limit in the jurisdiction of the project. 2. Include statement that materials are compatible with adjacent materials proposed for use. 3. Include required values for field adhesion test on each substrate in accordance with ASTM D4541 (modified), using a type II pull tester. E. Samples: Submit clearly labelled samples, three (3) inch by four (4) inch minimum size of each material specified. F. Prior to commencing the Work, submit manufacturer's independent Laboratory Report for the Air Barrier Assembly testing on ASTM E 2357 tested on a steel stud frame wall, results are to be based on Specimen 2 testing only. G. Prior to commencing the Work, submit documentation certifying that the air barrier system has been tested independently, indicating compliance with the performance requirements of the Air Barrier Association of Association. H. Prior to commencing the Work, submit copies of manufacturers' literature for the system, membrane, primers, sealants, adhesives and associated auxiliary materials shall be included as parts of the system that is listed by the Air Barrier Association of America evaluation. I. Prior to commencing the Work,submit references clearly indicating that the materials proposed have been installed for not less than three years on projects of similar scope and nature. J. Prior to commencing the Work, submit manufacturers' complete set of standard details for air barrier/vapor retarders. The manufacturer's representative shall review the contract drawings and note any modifications required to make the system air and water tight. 1.7 Quality Assurance A. Quality Assurance Program:The Contractor shall implement and comply with the requirements of the Air Barrier Association of America's (ABAA) Quality Assurance Program (QAP) for the project, including audits of the project by an ABAA Certified Auditor. All deficiencies identified Fluid Applied Air Barrier 072720-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• by the auditor shall be corrected prior to proceeding with any work that will necessitate removal and replacement to correct deficiencies in the air barrier system. B. Installers Qualifications:All work shall be performed by ABAA Certified Installers. C. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide primary products, including each component of the air barrier membrane system,which has been commercially available for a minimum of 3 years. D. Submit in writing, a document stating that the applicator of the primary air barrier membrane specified in this section is recognized by the manufacturer as suitable for the execution of the Work E. Perform Work in accordance with the printed requirements of the air barrier manufacturer and this specification. F. Maintain one copy of manufacturer instructions on site. G. At the beginning of the Work and at all times during the execution of the Work, allow access to Work site by the air barrier membrane manufacturer's representative. H. Compatibility: Submit letter from primary material manufacturer stating that materials proposed for use are permanently chemically compatible and adhesively compatible with adjacent materials proposed for use. Submit letter from manufacturer stating that cleaning materials used during installation are chemically compatible with adjacent materials proposed for use. I. Manufacturer: Components used in this section shall be sourced from one manufacturer, including sheet membrane, air barrier sealants, primers, mastics, tapes and adhesives as listed as an evaluated air barrier assembly by the Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA). 1.8 Mock-Up A. Construct mockup in accordance with Section 0140 00—Quality Requirements: Requirements for a mock-up. B. Location: Where indicated in the Drawings. C. Coordination: Coordinate with brick veneer wall mock-up as noted in Section 04 2113 -Veneer Masonry, Part 1-General; Article- 1.4; Paragraph A- "Sample Panels". D. Construct typical exterior wall panel: Items to be incorporated in mock-up include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. For metal stud wall system: Masonry veneer system,through wall flexible flashing,glass- faced gypsum sheathing, wall ties, board insulation, metal studs, aluminum curtain wall frame, aluminum window frame, vinyl window Frame, showing air barrier membrane application details and transition membranes to foundation, roofing system and adjacent masonry Wall system. Fluid Applied Air Barrier 072720-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. For masonry wall system: Masonry veneer system, concrete masonry backup, wall ties, through wall flexible flashing, board insulation, aluminum window frame, showing air barrier membrane application details and transition membranes to foundation, roofing system and adjacent metal stud Wall system. E. Allow 72 hours for inspection of mock-up by Architect before proceeding with air barrier work. 1.9 Pre-Installation Conference A. Pre-installation Meeting: Convene a minimum of four weeks prior to commencing work of this section,Agenda shall include, as a minimum, construction and testing of mock-up, sequence of construction, coordination with substrate preparation, air barrier materials approved for use, compatibility of materials,coordination with installation of adjacent and covering materials,and details of construction and chemical/fire safety plans.Attendance is required by representatives of related trades including covering materials, substrate materials and adjacent materials. B. DO NOT PROCEED WITH THE INSTALLATION OF THE AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE AND THE THROUGH WALL FLASHING MEMBRANE PRIOR TO THE PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in original packaging with seals unbroken, labelled with Material Manufacturer's name, product, date of manufacturer and directions for storage. B. Store materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by material manufacturer. C. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight and other sources of ultra-violet light. D. Handle materials in accordance with material manufacturer's recommendations E. All pail goods shall bear the ABAA Evaluated Air Barrier label. F. Do not double stack pail goods. G. Store roll materials on end in original packaging. H. Keep all products stored at above 40°F.Apply to a substrate with a surface T'F of 407 and rising. DO NOT ALLOW PRODUCT TO FREEZE, 1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temperature: Install fluid-applied air barrier material within range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by material manufacturer. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate. Fluid Applied Air Barrier 072720-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Field Conditions: Do not install air barrier in snow, rain, fog, or mist. Do not install air barrier when the temperature of substrate surfaces and surrounding air temperatures are below those recommended by the manufacturer. C. Compatibility: Do not allow air barrier materials to come in contact with chemically incompatible materials D. Ultra Violet Light Exposure: Do not expose air barrier materials to sunlight longer than as recommended by the material manufacturer. 1.12 COORDINATION A. Ensure continuity of the air seal throughout the scope of this section. 1.13 WARRANTY A. Material Warranty: Provide material manufacturer's standard product warranty,for a minimum three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Installer Warranty: 1. Applicator must be approved by ABAA and Manufacturer 2. Provide a two (2) year installation warranty from date of Substantial Completion, including all accessories and materials of the air barrier assembly, against failures, including loss of air tight seal, loss of watertight seal, loss of attachment, loss of adhesion and failure to cure properly. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR BARRIER MATERIAL A. Liquid air barrier: One component elastomeric membrane, spray, trowel or brush applied, having the following characteristics and have passed all evaluations by the Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA) and be listed on their web site as having passed all the following evaluations: 1. Air permeability: a. Air Leakage Thru Cured Films: <0.04 cfm/ft2 @ 10.5 lbs/ft2 or<0.005 L/sm2 @ 75 Pa to ASTM E283 (Modified) 24 hours, +/- 10%. b. Air Leakage per ASTM E 2178,dry film,delta P of 0.3 inches of water,0.002+/- 10% 2. Air Barrier System Test on Full Scale Wall Assembly, ASTM E 2357 a. System Air Leakage, 0.0008 CFM/ft2+/- 10% b. Penetrations Check, MUST PASS ASTM E 2357 requirements 3. Water Vapor permeance: (704 ng/Pa.m2.s.) 10 to 20 perms, ASTM E96 Method B. Note: The material specified is VAPOR PERMEABLE. Fluid Applied Air Barrier 072720-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 4. Elongation (ASTM D412: >50%) 5. Low temperature flexibility and crack bridging: Pass—ICC-ES AC212 6. ASTM D 1970, Self Sea lability—Pass 7. AATCC 127 Water Resistance—Pass 8. ASTM E84, Class A Fire Resistant 9. Recycle content>20% B. Basis of Design Product: 1. Wall Guardian FW-100A(a non-asphaltic product) 2. Other products/assemblies meeting all requirements of Paragraph 2.1, A(Above) C. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. STS Coatings, Wall Guardian, 830-995-5177, www.wallguardian.com, a Certified Texas HUB 2. Other manufacturers with products/assemblies meeting all requirements of Paragraph 2.01,A(Above) 2.2 AIR BARRIER ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Transition Membrane,Self-Adhering: Polymer-based,sheet membrane complete with polyester facing, and having the following physical properties: 1. Thickness: 35 mils (0.5 mm) min. 2. Vapor permeance: <0.1 3. Low temperature flexibility: -20 F to CGSB 37-GP-56M; 4. Elongation: >90%to ASTM D412-modifed 5. ASTM E331, 10 psf for 2 hours a. Acceptable material: 1) UT-40 by STS Coatings for use with the FW-100 system. 2) Others as recommended by manufacturer B. Primer for self-adhering membranes: Synthetic polymer-based adhesive type, quick setting, having the following characteristics: 1. Acceptable material: As manufactured and/or recommended by the Air Barrier System manufacturer. Note: Primer shall be compatible with specified glass faced gypsum sheathing. 2. Verify compatibility of self-adhering membranes with preservative treated materials specified in Section 06 10 53. Prime preservative treated materials as required using primer recommended by self-adhering membrane manufacturer or use the non-chemical thermally modified wood known as EcoPrem. 3. Other Primers as recommended by manufacturer for surfaces to be sealed. C. Through-Wall flashing at wall base and shelf angles: 1. As specified in Section 07 13 26—Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing. Fluid Applied Air Barrier 072720-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Transition Strip: 1. Basis of Design: UT-40 Universal Tape, By STS Coatings 2. Others as recommended by manufacturer E. Sealants: Shall be compatible with air barrier assembly and shall be approved by the air barrier manufacturer. 1. Basis of Design for Concealed Applications: LT-100 Liquid Tape, By STS Coatings. 2. Basis of Design for Concealed & Exposed Applications: Great Seal PE-150 3. Others as recommended by manufacturer F. Backer Rods: As recommended by sealant manufacturer. G. Other Products as recommended by manufacturer PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 Examination A. The ABAA Certified installer shall examine substrates, areas and conditions under which the Air Barrier assembly will be installed, in the Presence of the General Contractor to confirm suitability of substrate and underlying work to accept Air Barrier B. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the Work of this section. Notify Architect in writing of any discrepancies. Commencement of the work or any parts thereof shall mean acceptance of the prepared substrate. 3.2 Preparation A. All surfaces must be sound, dry, clean and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar or other contaminants. Fill spalled areas in substrates to provide an even plane. B. Mortar joints in concrete block and form tie holes/voids in poured concrete shall be filled flush and smooth and allowed to be cured for a minimum of 24 hours. C. All joints between gypsum sheathing, roof board, masonry and concrete and other substrate joints up to 1/4" wide shall be treated: 1. STS Coatings LT-100 Liquid Tape, www.stscoatings.com. 2. York Manufacturing, US-100, www,yorkmfg.com 3. Others as recommended by manufacturer D. All joints between gypsum sheathing, roof board, masonry and concrete and other substrates wider than 1/4" shall be sealed with: 1. UT-40, overlapping each side of joint a minimum of 3 inches Fluid Applied Air Barrier 072720-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Others as recommended by manufacturer E. Install backer rod and sealant at the following joints: 1. All expansion/control/erection joints between concrete wall panels. 2. All expansion/control joints in concrete block back-up. 3. All joints between concrete wall panels and concrete block back-up. 3.3 Primer for Transition Membrane (Self-Adhering Type only) A. Apply primer for self-adhering membranes at rate recommended by manufacturer. B. Apply primer to all areas to receive transition sheet membrane as indicated in Drawings by roller or spray and allow minimum 30 minute open time. Primed surfaces not covered by transition membrane during the same working day must be re-primed. 3.4 Transition Membrane (Self-Adhering Type) A. Align and position self-adhering transition membrane, remove protective film and press firmly into place. Ensure minimum 2 inch overlap at all end and side laps unless otherwise noted. B. Tie-in to roofing system and at the interface of dissimilar materials as indicated in Drawings. C. Promptly roll all laps and membrane with a counter top roller to affect seal. D. Ensure all preparatory work is complete prior to applying liquid membrane. 3.5 Primary Air Barrier A. Apply by spray or roller,a complete and continuous unbroken film at a temperature of 40'F and rising with less than a 30% chance of rain in the next 18 hours and apply at the same rate as listed in the Air Barrier Association of America evaluation 1. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing, Plywood or OSB a. Wall Guardian FW-100A at a minimum of 2.5 gallons per 100 ft'(40 ft'/gallon) (40 wet mils) b. Others meeting stated requirements C. Spray around all projections, including masonry veneer anchors, ensuring a complete and continuous air seal. 2. Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU), Concrete a. Wall Guardian FW-100A at a minimum of 2.5 gallons per 100 ft' (40 ft'/gallon) (equal to 40 wet mils on a smooth surface) B. Others meeting stated requirements C. Spray around all projections including masonry veneer anchors ensuring a complete and continuous air seal. Fluid Applied Air Barrier 072720-10 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.6 Quality Assurance/Inspection A. Quality Assurance Program: 1. (ABAA) Quality Assurance Program (QAP)Audits: a. Contractor shall verify the total#of audits required for the project and schedule all audits in accordance with the requirements of the QAP to insure eligibility for Certification under the QAP b. As multiple audits will be required, all deficiencies identified by the auditor, for each audit shall be corrected prior to proceeding with any work that will necessitate removal and replacement to correct deficiencies in the air barrier system. B. Notify Architect when sections of work are complete so as to allow for review prior to installing insulation. The manufacturer's representative shall be on site to review the installation along with the Architect. 3.7 Protection of Finished Work A. Liquid membranes are not designed for permanent exposure. Cover the liquid membrane, as recommended by the manufacturer, within the following time frames. Contractor shall verify the number of calendar days with the air barrier manufacturer: 1. Cover the Wall Guardian material within 180 calendar days after installation. The nature of this product is such that some surface weathering may become apparent during exposure. This is a surface effect only and does not impact air barrier system performance. 2. Transition membranes shall be covered within 180 days after installation. B. Prepare, treat and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through the air barrier and at protrusions according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. 3.8 INSTALLATION A. Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barrier: Install air barrier accessories and fluid-applied membrane air barrier material to provide continuity throughout the building envelope in a shingle fashion. Install materials in accordance with material manufacturer's instructions and the following (unless manufacturer recommends other procedures in writing based on project conditions or particular requirements of their recommended materials): 1. Install veneer anchors as per air barrier manufacturer installation sequencing. 2. Apply primer for transition material at the rate instructed by the air barrier material manufacturer for 1 inch beyond terminating edge of transition membrane. Allow primer to set/cure completely before transition strip application. 3. Position subsequent sheets of transition material so that membrane overlaps the membrane sheet below by a minimum of 2 inches, unless greater overlap is Fluid Applied Air Barrier 072720-11 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• recommended by the material manufacturer. Ensure transition membrane is securely sealed onto substrate with roller. 4. Overlap horizontally adjacent pieces of transition material a minimum of 2 inches, unless greater overlap is recommended by the material manufacturer. Roll all areas of transition strip including seams with roller. 5. Seal around all penetrations with termination mastic/sealant, membrane counter- flashing or other procedure in accordance with material manufacturer's instructions, ensuring chemical compatibility amongst adjoining materials. 6. Connect air barrier in exterior wall assembly continuously to the air barrier of the roof,to concrete below-grade structures, to windows, curtain wall, storefront, louvers, exterior doors,other intersection conditions and transitions from wet cavity to dry cavity and seal penetrations using accessory materials in accordance with the material manufacturer's instructions. 7. Provide transition material at changes in substrate plane (with bead of sealant/mastic, membrane counter-flashing or other material recommended by material manufacturer) under membrane to eliminate all sharp 90 degree inside corners and to make a smooth transition from one plane to another. 8. Provide mechanically fastened non-corrosive metal sheet or other manufacturer approved transition material to span gaps greater than 1 inch in substrate plane and to make a smooth transition from one plane to the other. Transition membrane shall be installed continuously from air barrier material onto sheet metal maintaining 2 inch overlap on both edges. 9. For through-wall flashing and head-flashing, lap transition material over top edge of it. 10. Provide backup for the membrane to accommodate anticipated movement or use other manufacturer approved transition material at deflection and control joints. 11. Provide transition to the joint assemblies at expansion and seismic joints. 12. Apply a bead or trowel coat of mastic along membrane seams at reverse lapped seams, rough cuts, and as recommended by the material manufacturer. 13. Seal top edge of the self-adhered membrane to substrate with termination mastic at end of each working day. 14. Inspect installation prior to enclosing assembly and repair punctures, damaged areas and inadequately lapped seams with a patch of membrane lapped as recommended by material manufacturer. 15. Install primer for fluid-applied air barrier if instructed by material manufacturer. 16. Install fluid-applied membrane using equipment and methods recommended by manufacturer,to achieve a dry film thickness as required by the material manufacturer 3.9 SCHEDULE A. Install liquid membrane system over the entire surface of the CMU in the following area. Seal any masonry anchor penetrations air tight. 1. In the masonry cavity wall. B. Install liquid membrane system over the entire surface of the outer surface of the inner wythe of masonry. Seal any masonry anchor penetrations air tight. Fluid Applied Air Barrier 072720-12 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Hollow Metal Door Frames: Seal door frame to wall surface with transition membrane. D. Wall and Roof Junction: Seal wall to roof with transition membrane. E. Openings: Seal around the perimeter of all openings with transition membrane. F. Perimeter wood nailers at wall openings: Cover all exposed surfaces of wood nailers with transition membrane. Extend membrane over sheathing, masonry and metal framing as shown. G. Aluminum window frames with nailing flanges: Seal the nailing flanges to the wall surface with transition membrane. H. Aluminum window frames without nailing flanges: Seal frames to the wall surface with transition membrane. I. Aluminum storefront frames: Seal frames to the wall surface with transition membrane. J. Aluminum curtain wall frames: Seal frames to wall surface with transition membrane. 3.10 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect air barrier materials from damage during installation and the remainder of the construction period, according to material manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Coordinate with installation of materials which cover the air barrier assemblies,to ensure exposure period does not exceed that recommended by the air barrier manufacturer. B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction and acceptable to the primary material manufacturer. END OF SECTION 07 27 20 Fluid Applied Air Barrier 072720-13 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 07 41 13.16 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Preformed metal roof system including clips, perimeter and penetration flashing, closures, and fasteners. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Roof Replacement Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to roofing system tear-off and replacement including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Meet with Owner's Representative; Architect; testing and inspecting agency representative; roofing system manufacturer's representative; deck Installer; roofing Installer including project manager, superintendent, and foreman; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roof replacement including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Methods and procedures related to roof replacement preparation, including membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Temporary protection requirements for any existing roofing system that is to remain, during and after installation. 4. Roof drainage during each stage of roof replacement and roof drain plugging and plug removal requirements. 5. Construction schedule and availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 6. Existing deck and insulation installation procedures. 7. Structural loading limitations of deck during roof installation. 8. Base flashings, special roofing details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roof replacement. 9. Governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 10. Existing conditions that may require notification of Architect before proceeding. 1.3 Related Sections: A. Section 07 62 00-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels 07 4113.16-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product: 1. Manufacturer's data sheet including all accessories. B. Shop Drawings (by Manufacturer, only): Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system,trim,flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. 1. Full Roof Plan with panel layout 2. Elevations, Sections, and Details 3. Location, gauge, and finish of all related components 4. Relationships with adjoining work 5. Include fastener types and spacing 6. Provide written certification that the submitted roofing system and related details comply with local building code and as specified herein. C. Samples: For each type of metal panel indicated. 1. 12" long section of specified panel width and finish 2. Panel Clips (standard & continuous) 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: Must meet or exceed design performance criteria: 1. ASTM E1592-Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 2. ASTM E1646-Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference B. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1. Specified Finish Warranty 2. Specified Weather-tightness Warranty C. Letter from manufacturer stating roofing contractor has been trained to install the specified metal roofing system D. Installer Qualifications 1. 5 years' experience specializing in the installation of structural standing seam metal roof systems 2. Must be trained by the manufacturer to install the specified system Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels 07 4113.16-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect components using best practices to prevent abrasion damage, mechanical abuse, staining discoloration, or corrosion during manufacturing, shipment and storage. B. Secure panels where they are protected from wind and moisture, while allowing proper drainage and air circulation. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS A. Coordinate work with related or adjoining trades to prevent damage to stored or installed components. B. Verify acceptable storage loads on roof slopes. C. Precise location of all roof penetrations shall be verified prior to final roof layout. 1.8 QUALITY CRITERIA A. A792-96-Specification for sheet steel, 55%Aluminum-Zinc Alloy coated by the hot-dip process. B. Static water pressure head water infiltration: The panel system shall be tested in accordance with FM4471 Appendix G and pass with no leakage. The test specimen must successfully withstand being submerged under 6 inches of water for a minimum period of 7 days. C. E1592-95 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 1.9 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERA A. Thermal Movement 1. Metal Roofing System, including flashing, shall accommodate unlimited thermal movement without buckling or excess stress on the structure. 2. All panel and trim attachments will be designed to specifically satisfy the requirements of the roof design (shown in shop drawings). B. Uniform Wind Load Capacity: 1. Installed roof system and applicable trim and accessories shall withstand positive and negative design wind loading pressures complying with: a. The applicable version of ASCE 7. b. Risk Category: As per Code Analysis. C. Safety Factor: 1.67X d. Wind Speed of: AS REQUIRED BY CODE FOR LOCATION. e. Exposure Category: AS REQUIRED BY CODE FOR LOCATION. f. Exposure Classification: E. Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels 07 4113.16-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• g. Design Pressures (as determined by Engineer of Record, plus the required safety factor). 2. Capacity shall be generated using data generated from ASTM E1592 Testing. C. Water Infiltration: Panel system shall be tested in accordance with FM4471 Appendix G and pass with no leakage. A 6 inch standing head of water is placed over the sample and maintained for a period of 7 days. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Weather-tightness Warranty— Manufacturer's 20-year non-prorated Weathertightness warranty in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight. Coverage includes all flashing, penetrations, and edge details. In addition,the manufacturer warrants to repair or replace damages resulting from system failure at pressures less than those specified herein. B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's 20-year warranty in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory- applied finishes, including checking, crazing, peeling, chalking,fading, and adhesion PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOF PANEL, ROOF FIELD, PERIMETER TRIM, DRAINAGE AND SHEET METAL ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Factory Painted Galvalume Plus Steel, Type AZ-55, Grade 50 as per ASTM A792-96. Color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Gauge: 24 GA (0.024 inches). 2.2 METAL ROOFING SYSTEM A. Continuous panels with no end laps: 238T Standing Seam Roof System as provided by McElroy Metal (www.mcelroymetal.com - 1440 Aldine Bender Rd. Houston,Texas, 77032). 1. Profile: 238T- 16" 2. Finished seam height will be a minimum of 2-3/8" 3. Texture: Smooth OR Striations OR Stiffener Ribs (As selected by Architect) 4. Panels greater than 60' must be manufactured at the project location utilizing factory roll- forming equipment and operated by factory personnel. No end-laps will be accepted. 5. Panel design shall be symmetrical 6. Cap shall have 2 rows of continuous factory applied hot melt sealant. 7. Panel must offer individual replaceability, without altering adjacent panels, after final installation is completed. 8. Alternate Manufacturers: Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels 07 4113.16-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• a. Alternate Manufacturers must show full compliance with project specifications and submit all required data in accordance with Sections 01600 and 01610 for consideration. B. Substitutions shall fully comply with specified requirements in appearance, assembly, and performance 1. Substitutions must be submitted within 10 days before bid due date with complete product performance data. 2. No post-bid substitution requests will be considered C. Finishes 1. Fluorocarbon Coating: Consists of primer, applied at a nominal dry film thickness of.25- mil and a color coat, applied at a nominal dry film thickness of .75 mil, giving a 1.0 mil nominal dry film on topcoat. Paint finish should be Kynar 500 as selected from manufacturer's full color selection.The back side of the material should be.25 mil. Primer and a 0.25 polyester wash-coat. 2.3 ROOF SYSTEM ACCESSORIES A. Clips shall be a one-piece, 16 GA (min.) galvanized steel and cannot make direct contact with the panel cap; or clips shall be continuous of the same gauge as per manufacturer's tested assembly to match required wind uplift pressures. B. All fasteners for clip, trim, and structural member attachment will be supplied by metal roof system manufacturer C. Trim, flashing, gutters and downspouts will be of the same gauge and finish unless approved otherwise by the metal roof system manufacturer. 1. All sheet metal valleys, Gutters and Trim will be supplied in continuous lengths up to 32'. Gutters shall be detailed and fabricated with Expansion Joints every 50' as per SMACNA guidelines. 2. Ridge closures, consisting of metal channel surrounding factory precut closed cell foam, will not be secured through the field of the panel. 3. Trim will be installed specifically as displayed in the manufacturer provided shop drawings. Any suggested changes must be approved in writing by the metal roof system manufacturer. D. Sealants and Sealant Tapes will be specified and supplied by the metal roof system manufacturer and submitted to Architect for Review as part of the submittal process. E. Underlayment: Self-adhering High-Temperature-rated with surfacing suitable for Metal Roof Applications, as manufactured by Grace, Carlisle, or approved Equal. Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels 07 4113.16-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.4 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by the roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated. B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class II, Grade 2 (25 psi),felt or glass- fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. 1. Maximum Board Size: 96 x 48 inches. 2. Minimum Board Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Combined thickness to achieve R-25 Continuous Insulation Value. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION A. Coordinate installing roofing system components, so that insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Installation over metal decks: 1. Mechanically fasten insulation to substrate according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions below. a. Fasten base layer of insulation with fasteners and plates in fastening patterns to resist uplift pressures at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 2. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches or more, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. 3. Apply no more insulation than can be sealed with membrane in same day. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENT A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply over entire roof surface, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels 07 4113.16-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• inches,staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 6 inches. Extend underlayment over rakes and eaves. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 1. Apply over the entire roof surface. B. Flashings: Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3.4 INSTALLATION OF STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panel Installation: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners as per Manufacturer's Shop Drawings. 1. Protective film should be removed prior to extended exposure to sunlight,heat,and other weather elements. 2. Panels should be handled at seams to prevent buckling. 3. Limit traffic on installed panel to prevent unnecessary damage to the finish. 4. Install continuous length panels plumb, level, and straight with seams and ribs parallel. 5. Install panels without excessive waves, warps, or buckles. 6. Minimum required underlayment shall be fully installed prior to roof panel loading or installation on roof surface. 7. All clips being secured directly on insulation shall require a bearing plate as provided by the manufacturer. 8. Refer to manufacturer shop drawings for: a. Clip spacing. b. Location(s)for fixing the roof panels. 9. All panels shall be panned at ridge, hip, and headwall conditions. 10. All panels shall have field applied butyl tape sealant between seams at the eave condition. B. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 3.5 FLASHING AND TRIM INSTALLATION A. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. All trim shall be installed using the fastener type and spacing as displayed on the manufacturer shop drawings. 2. Trim attachments shall not restrict the thermal movement requirements of the panel. 3. Fabricate and install sheet metal flashing in accordance with SMACNA manual. 4. In the process of sheet metal installation, allow no sealant to migrate onto exposed surfaces Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels 07 4113.16-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 5. Any damaged product should be removed and replaced immediately upon recognition. 6. Touch up paint should be used minimally for minor scratches. Major scratches or paint failures shall be recognized at damaged and require replacement. 7. Clean exposed surfaces upon completion of installation to prevent finish damage. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 07 4113.16 Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels 07 4113.16-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 07 42 13.13 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 Description A. Section Includes preformed metal wall panels including clips, perimeter and penetration flashing, closures, and fasteners 1.2 Related Sections A. Division 7 Section 07 2100—Thermal Insulation B. Division 7 Section 07 27 20— Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barrier. C. Division 7 Section 07 62 00—Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 1.3 Submittals A. Shop Drawings by manufacturer only, including the following: 1. Full Facade Elevations with panel layout 2. Elevations, Sections, and Details, including penetration details. 3. Location, gauge, and finish of all related components 4. Relationships with adjoining work 5. Include fastener types and spacing 6. Provide written certification that the submitted system and related details comply with local building code and as specified herein. B. Product Data 1. Manufacturer's data sheet including all accessories C. Samples 1. 12" long section of specified panel width and finish 2. Panel Clip D. Design Test Reports—must meet or exceed design and performance criteria 1. ASTM E1592 2. Static Water Testing E. Sample Warranties Formed Metal Wall Panels 07 42 13.13-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Specified Finish Warranty F. Letter from manufacturer stating installation contractor has been trained to install the specified metal wall panel system 1.4 Installer Qualifications A. 5 years'experience specializing in the installation of structural standing seam metal roof systems & preformed metal wall panel systems. B. Must be trained by the manufacturer to install the specified system 1.5 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Protect components using best practices to prevent abrasion damage, mechanical abuse, staining discoloration, or corrosion during manufacturing, shipment and storage. B. Secure panels where they are protected from wind and moisture, while allowing proper drainage and air circulation C. Any unsatisfactory components will be rejected and/or reproduced to meet quality criteria 1.6 Job Conditions A. Coordinate work with related or adjoining trades to prevent damage to stored or installed components B. Verify acceptable storage loads on adjacent roof decks. C. Precise location of all penetrations shall be verified prior to final wall panel layout 1.7 Quality Criteria A. A792-96—Specification for steel sheet, 55%Aluminum-Zinc Alloy coated by the hot-dip process B. E1592-95 — Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 1.8 Design and Performance Criteria A. Thermal Movement 1. Metal Wall panel system, including flashing, shall accommodate unlimited thermal movement without buckling or excess stress on the structure. Formed Metal Wall Panels 07 42 13.13-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. All panel and trim attachments will be designed to specifically satisfy the requirements of the wall panel design (shown in shop drawings). B. Uniform Wind Load Capacity: 1. Installed wall panel system and applicable trim and accessories shall withstand positive and negative design wind loading pressures complying with: a. The applicable version of ASCE 7 b. Risk Category: As per Code Analysis C. Safety factor: 1.67X d. Wind Speed of: AS PER LOCTION e. Exposure Category: As per location f. Enclosure Classification: E g. Design Pressures (as determined by Engineer of record—plus the safety factor) 2. Capacity shall be generated using data generated from ASTM E1592 Testing 1.9 Warranties A. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's 20-year warranty in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory- applied finishes, including checking, crazing, peeling, chalking,fading, and adhesion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 Roof Panel, Roof field, Perimeter Trim, Drainage, and sheet metal Accessory Materials A. Factory Painted Galvalume Plus Steel, type AZ-55, grade 50 as per ASTM A792-96 (Color to be selected by Architect) B. Gauge: 24 GA (0.024") 2.2 Metal Roofing System A. Continuous panels with no end laps. "238T" as provided by McElroy Metal (www.mcelroymetal.com - 1440 Aldine Bender Rd. Houston,Texas, 77032). 1. Profile: 238T- 16" 2. Finished seam height will be a minimum of 2-3/8" 3. Texture: Smooth OR Striations OR Stiffener Ribs (as selected by Architect 4. Panels greater than 60' will be manufactured at the project location utilizing authorized factory roll-forming equipment and operated by factory authorized personnel. No laps will be accepted. 5. Panel design shall be symmetrical 6. Cap shall have 2 rows of continuous factory applied hot melt sealant. Formed Metal Wall Panels 07 42 13.13-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 7. Panel must offer individual replaceability, without altering adjacent panels, after final installation is completed. 8. Alternate Manufacturers: a. Alternate Manufacturers must show full compliance with project specifications and submit all required data in accordance with Sections 016000 and 016100 for consideration. B. Substitutions shall fully comply with specified requirements in appearance, assembly, and performance 1. Substitutions must be submitted within 10 days of bid date with complete product data 2. No post-bid substitution requests will be considered 2.3 Finishes A. Fluorocarbon Coating: Consists of primer, applied at a nominal dry film thickness of.25 mil and a color coat, applied at a nominal dry film thickness of.75 mil, giving a 1.0 mil nominal dry film on topcoat. Paint finish should be Kynar 500 as selected from manufacturers standard color selection.The back side of the material should be.25 mil. Primer and a 0.25 polyester wash coat. 2.4 Wall panel System Accessories A. Clips shall be 16 GA Galvanized Steel, one-piece, and cannot make direct contact with the panel cap; or clips shall be continuous of the gauge used in the manufacturer's tested assembly to provide the required Uplift pressures. B. All fasteners for clip, trim, and structural member attachment will be supplied by metal wall panel system manufacturer C. Trim,flashing,will be of the same gauge and finish unless approved otherwise by the metal wall panel system manufacturer. 1. All sheet metal Trim will be supplied in continuous lengths up to 32'. 2. Ridge closures, consisting of metal channel surrounding factory precut closed cell foam, will not be secured through the field of the panel. 3. Trim will be installed specifically as displayed in the manufacturer provided shop drawings. Any suggested changes must be approved in writing by the metal wall panel system manufacturer D. Sealants and Sealant Tapes will be specified and supplied by the metal wall panel system manufacturer and submitted to Architect for Review as part of the submittal process. E. Z-Furring: KNIGHT THERMAZEE cladding attachment system: 1. Depth: 2" 2. Finish: Mill 3. Gauge: 18 ga. Formed Metal Wall Panels 07 42 13.13-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 4. Length: Standard 5. Thermal Performance: Provides no more than a 2% degradation of Cl Thermal performance. 6. Manufacturer: a. Knight Wall systems b. 2401 East 6th Street C. Deer Park, WA 99006 d. TF: (855) 597-9255 e. T: (509) 262-0104 f. F: (509) 262-0106 g. info@kightwaIIsystems.com h. sales@knightwallsystems.com i. www.knightwallsystems.com 7. Alternate Manufacturers: Alternate Manufacturers must show full compliance with project specifications and submit all required data in accordance with Sections 016000 and 016100 for consideration. 2.5 Insulation A. General: 2" semi-rigid rockwool panels as specified in section 07 2100 Thermal Insulation. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Install air barrier prior to installation of Z-furring. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF Z-FURRING A. Coordinate installing wall system components,so Z-Furring is properly secured to the underlying metal stud framing. Install Z-furring over the air barrier using butyl tape between the air barrier and Z-furring at all fastener locations to seal the fastener penetrations. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION A. Coordinate installing wall panel system components, so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with wall system and insulation system manufacturer's written instruction for installing the wall insulation. 1. Install insulation to achieve required thickness. 2. Apply no more insulation than can be sealed with membrane in same day. Formed Metal Wall Panels 07 42 13.13-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.4 PANEL INSTALLATION A. Standing-Seam Metal Wall Panel Installation: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners as per Manufacturer's Shop Drawings. 1. Protective film should be removed prior to extended exposure to sunlight,heat,and other weather elements. 2. Panels should be handled at seams to prevent buckling. 3. Install continuous length panels plumb, level, and straight with seams and ribs parallel. 4. Install panels without excessive waves, warps, or buckles. 5. Refer to manufacturer shop drawings for: 6. Clip spacing. 7. Location(s)for fixing the wall panels. 8. All panels shall have field applied butyl tape sealant between seams at the eave condition. B. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 3.5 FLASHING AND TRIM INSTALLATION A. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. All trim shall be installed using the fastener type and spacing as displayed on the manufacturer shop drawings. 2. Trim attachments shall not restrict the panel's thermal movement requirements. 3. Fabricate and install sheet metal flashing in accordance with SMACNA manual. 4. In the process of sheet metal installation, allow no sealant to migrate onto exposed surfaces 5. Any damaged product should be removed and replaced immediately upon recognition. 6. Touch up paint should be used minimally for minor scratches. Major scratches or paint failures shall be recognized at damaged and require replacement. 7. Clean exposed surfaces upon completion of installation to prevent finish damage. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 07 42 13.13 Formed Metal Wall Panels 07 42 13.13-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 07 52 16 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Styrene-butadiene-styrene (SBS)-modified bituminous membrane roofing. 2. Qualifications, Standards and Materials for new roof assembly. 3. Reinforced PMMA Flashing System. 4. Roof insulation 5. Traffic pads/Walkways 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Roof Replacement Conference:Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to roofing system tear-off and replacement including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Meet with Owner's Representative; Architect; testing and inspecting agency representative; roof system manufacturer's representative; deck Installer; roofing Installer including project manager, superintendent, and foreman; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roof replacement including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Methods and procedures related to roof replacement preparation, including membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Temporary protection requirements for existing roofing system that is to remain, during and after installation. 4. Roof drainage during each stage of roof replacement and roof drain plugging and plug removal requirements. 5. Construction schedule and availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 6. Existing deck removal procedures and Owner notifications. 7. Condition and acceptance of existing roof deck and base flashing substrate for reuse. 8. Structural loading limitations of deck during roof replacement. 9. Base flashings, special roofing details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roof replacement. 10. HVAC shutdown and sealing of air intakes. 11. Shutdown of fire-suppression, -protection, and -alarm and -detection systems. 12. Asbestos removal and discovery of asbestos-containing materials. 13. Governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 14. Existing conditions that may require notification of Architect before proceeding. Styrene Butadiene Styrene(SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 075216-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Submit list of proposed Products and manufacturers, including all items specified in Part 2—Products or otherwise required by the Work. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans,elevations,sections,details,and attachments to other Work, including the following: 1. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of roof membrane, fastening spacings, and patterns for mechanically fastened roofing system. 2. Layout and thickness of insulation. 3. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 4. Flashing details at penetrations. 5. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 6. Crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes. 7. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations. 8. Tie-in with adjoining air barrier. D. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. Sheet roofing materials, including roofing membrane sheet, flashing backer sheet, membrane cap sheet, and flashing sheet, of color specified. 2. Roof insulation. 3. Walkway pads or rolls. 4. Six insulation fasteners of each type, length, and finish. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer to certify and document items in Article on Quality Assurance. B. Manufacturer's Certification: Provide current letter(s)on membrane manufacturer's letterhead, signed by an authorized employee or corporate officer attesting to following: 1. Products: Certify that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements, including that: a. Fastener patterns prescribed by manufacturer in Submittal will resist specified uplift pressures, including Safety Factor (times two), calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7. b. Roofing system components are physically and chemically compatible for installation as designed, and; C. All proposed materials, including those by other manufacturer, are acceptable to membrane manufacturer for use in system, and; d. Proposed system meets all criteria for issuance of required manufacturer's warranty. Styrene Butadiene Styrene(SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 075216-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• e. Specifically identify and define any deviations. 2. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system. 3. The use of products from various manufacturers must be approved by the Primary Manufacturer of the roof system. Contractor must provide a Systems Letter where Primary Manufacturer declares that all products are compatible, and the roof system is eligible to receive a 20-year NDL Warranty. For example, in the case of the reinforced PMMA flashings, if a Manufacturer does not have a PMMA material among their product offerings, they must provide a system letter stating that the use of PMMA from another Manufacturer is compatible with their roof system and approving its use with their products with no effect on the 20-year NDL system warranty that is being provided by roof system manufacturer. Or,else,a substitution can be submitted,for review(following the substitution approval process outlined in the project manual. 4. Special Warranty Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer, certifying that all materials supplied under this Section are acceptable for special warranty. C. Product Test Reports: For roof membrane and insulation,tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with specified requirements. D. Research reports. E. Field Test Reports: 1. Concrete internal relative humidity test reports. 2. Fastener-pullout test results and manufacturer's revised requirements for fastener patterns. F. Field quality-control reports. G. Sample warranties. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. B. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing installation. C. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. D. Project Record Documents:Accurately record exact location of all roof membrane penetrations. E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. F. Certified statement from existing roof membrane manufacturer stating that existing roof warranty has not been affected by Work performed under this Section. Styrene Butadiene Styrene(SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 075216-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form,without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. 1. Special warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, PMMA flashings, membrane roofing accessories, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, walkway products, roofing accessories, and other components of membrane roofing system. 2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Installer's Warranty: Roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form in Division 01 "Applicator Warranty', signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of membrane roofing system such as membrane roofing, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period: 1. Warranty Period:Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty. 1. Minimum three projects of comparable size, using specified system, installed in the State of Texas within that five-year period. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that has been continuously approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturerto install manufacturer's product for minimum of three years prior to Bid Date, and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty; with minimum five years documented experience, including: 1. Minimum three projects of comparable size and specified systems during that time. 2. Personnel trained and certified by local authority having jurisdiction for all torch applications. C. Workers: All roofers and laborers to be direct employees of Primary Contractor. 1. Project Manager and Superintendent: Minimum five years roofing experience and employed by Contractor for a minimum one year prior to Bid Date. 2. Non-working Supervisor: Able to communicate effectively with School staff and Applicator's workers and employed by Contractor for a minimum one year prior to Bid Date. 3. Tradesmen: Minimum 50-percent of installation crew to have been employed by Contractor for a minimum six months prior to Bid Date. Styrene Butadiene Styrene(SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 075216-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. E. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from or approved by roofing system manufacturer. F. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Manual of Roof Maintenance and Roof Repair, NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, and manufacturer's instructions. G. Maintain one copy of each document accessible to site. H. Install all roofing materials using personnel directly employed by Applicator(Roofing Contractor) with NDL certification from roofing material manufacturer- no Sub-Contracting permitted. I. Assign a qualified, full time, non-working supervisor to be on Project site at all times during installation of Work. J. Designate a responsible Project Manager or Superintendent to inspect all installed Work, particularly tie-ins and temporary flashings, at end of each working day and as otherwise required to ensure watertightness. 1. Verify Inspection by signature on approved Daily Inspection Form signifying installation is in accordance with specified requirements. K. Maintain and operate all equipment in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable local codes for roof assembly fire hazard requirements and application procedures. B. Provide certification of inspection confirming approval of design and installation by authority having jurisdiction. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure:Class A;ASTM E 108,for application and roof slopes indicated. Styrene Butadiene Styrene(SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 075216-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Accelerated Weathering: Roof membrane shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G152,ASTM G154, or ASTM G155. B. Impact Resistance: Roof membrane shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D3746/D3746M, ASTM D4272/D4272M, or the "Resistance to Foot Traffic Test" in FM Approvals 4470. C. Wind Uplift Resistance: Provide installed membrane roofing and base flashings that withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight. D. Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated according to ASCE 7-05 and ASCE 7-16 with a safety factor of 2.0.: 1. Refer to the design uplift pressures indicated on Structural Notes as calculated in accordance with ASCE 7. E. Approvals Listing: Provide membrane roofing, base flashings, and component materials that comply with requirements as part of a tested membrane roofing system, for Type I or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with Approvals markings. 1. Fire Classification: Class A. F. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system that meet or exceed any of the following options for Reflectance and Emittance (in accordance with Table C402.3 of the 2015 ICC IEC): 1. Three-year aged solar reflectance of 0.55 and three-year aged thermal emittance of 0.75. 2. Three-year aged solar reflectance index of 64. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Siplast, Inc. 2. Polyglass 3. Johns Manville 4. Soprema Styrene Butadiene Styrene(SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 075216-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.3 ROOF SYSTEM A. Roofing Membrane Sheet (Base Ply): ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type I or 11, SBS-modified asphalt sheet (reinforced with glass fibers) or ASTM D 6164, Grade S,Type I or 11, SBS-modified asphalt sheet (reinforced with polyester fabric); smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified. 1. Basis of Design for application by torch to cover board: Paradiene 20 TS F, by Siplast, Inc. 2. Basis of Design for application by self-adhesion: Paradiene 20 SA, by Siplast, Inc. 3. Basis of Design for application by torch to mechanically fastened Base sheet: Paradiene 20 TS, by Siplast, Inc. (not used in this project). B. Granule-Surface Roofing Membrane Sheet(Cap Sheet):ASTM D 6163, Grade G,Type I or 11, SBS- modified asphalt sheet (reinforced with glass fibers) or ASTM D 6164, Grade G,Type I or 11, SBS- modified asphalt sheet (reinforced with polyester fabric); granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: 1. Basis of Design for application by torch: Paradiene 30 FR TG BW, by Siplast, Inc. 2. Granule Color:To Meet the Specified Emittance and Reflectance Requirements in section 2.1, F (above). 2.4 BASE SHEET A. SBS-Modified Bitumen Fiberglass Mat Base Sheet (Only at Gymnasium - Base Sheet directly applied to structural concrete deck): ASTM D6163/D6163M, Type 11, Grade S, SBS-modified asphalt sheet, reinforced with fiberglass fabric, smooth surfaced, suitable for torch application method. 2.5 BASE FLASHING SHEET A. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type I or 11, SBS-modified asphalt sheet (reinforced with glass fibers) or ASTM D 6164, Grade S,Type I or II, SBS-modified asphalt sheet (reinforced with polyester fabric); smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified. 1. Basis of Design for application by torch: Paradiene 20 TG, by Siplast, Inc. B. Granular Surfaced Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6162, Grade G, Type 11, SBS-modified asphalt sheet (reinforced with polyester fabric); or ASTM D 6163, Grade G, Type I or 11, SBS-modified asphalt sheet(reinforced with glass fibers)granular Surfaced;suitable for application method specified; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: 1. Basis of design for application by torch: Parafor 30 TG BW or Paradiene 40 FR TG BW, by Siplast, Inc. 2. Granule Color:To Meet the Specified Emittance and Reflectance Requirements in section 2.1, F (above). Styrene Butadiene Styrene(SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 075216-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.6 REINFORCED PMMA FLASHING MATERIALS A. PMMA Vertical Grade Primer: Fast-curing PMMA-based primer for use in vertical applications over concrete, concrete repair materials, masonry, wood and plywood substrates. PMMA Primer: B. PMMA horizontal Grade Primer: Fast-curing PMMA-based primer for use over horizontal substrates. C. Primer for Asphaltic Substrates: PMMA-based primer for use over asphaltic materials to serve as a bleed-blocker. D. Reinforced PMMA Membrane/Flashing System Components: 1. Catalyst: A peroxide-based reactive agent used to induce curing of acrylic resins. 2. Resin for Flashing Applications: A flexible, polymethyl methacrylate (PMMA) based resin combined with a thixotropic agent for use in combination with fleece fabric to form a monolithic, reinforced flashing membrane. 3. Resin for Field Membrane Construction: A flexible, polymethyl methacrylate (PMMA) based resin for use in combination with fleece fabric to form a monolithic, reinforced roofing membrane. 4. Fleece for Membrane and Flashing Reinforcement: A non-woven, 110 g/mz, needle- punched polyester fabric reinforcement as supplied by the membrane system manufacturer. 5. Color Finish Resin:A pigmented, polymethyl methacrylate (PMMA) based resin for use as a wearing coat over the field of the finished roof membrane and to provide a desired color finish. 6. Clear Finish Resin: A clear, flexible, polymethylmethacrylate (PMMA) based resin for use as a wearing coat over colored quartz. 7. Thixotropic Agent: A liquid additive used to increase the viscosity of the PMMA-based resin products, allowing the resins to be applied over vertical or sloped substrates. 8. Ceramic Granules: No. 11 grade specification ceramic granules suitable for broadcast into the PMMA based wearing layer, to meet the Specified Emittance and Reflectance Requirements in section 2.1, F (above). 2.7 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with other roofing components. 1. Adhesives and Sealants: Comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Asphalt Roofing Cement:ASTM D 4586,asbestos free,of consistency required by roofing system manufacturer for application. C. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene, plain or modified bitumen;non-hardening,non-migrating,non- skinning, and nondrying. Styrene Butadiene Styrene(SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 075216-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion- resistance provisions in FMG Approvals 4470; designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate;tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength,and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. 1. Mechanical Fasteners for Base Sheet: a. Lightweight Concrete Deck: CR Base Sheet Fastener, manufactured by Olympic. b. Secondary Disks for All Fasteners:Sized to meet requirements to resist wind up-lift pressures specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" of this Section. 2. Mechanical Fasteners for Flexible Flashing: a. Masonry: Specially heat treated, stress relieved, 1-1/4-inch length; Masonry Nail, manufactured by Simplex Nails, Inc. b. Wood Blocking: Stainless steel (for fastening into ACQ treated lumber) or high carbon, zinc coated steel (for fastening into non- ACQ treated lumber); annular threaded 1-inch shank nails; with minimum 1-inch x 30 gage metal disk; Roofing Nail, manufactured by Simplex Nails, Inc. C. Concrete: Power actuated fasteners, suitable for application. 3. Mechanical Fasteners for Metal Fabrications (Support Framing): Appropriate for purpose intended, size as required to suit application and achieve positive anchorage to substrate material. 4. Roofing Nails: Stainless steel (for fastening into ACQ treated lumber), hot-dipped galvanized or non-ferrous type(for fastening into non-ACQtreated lumber);with annular rings, size as required to suit application; minimum 11-gage with 3/8-inch diameter head. E. Metal Flashing Sheet: Metal flashing sheet is specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." F. Roofing Granules: Ceramic-coated roofing granules, No. 11 screen size with 100 percent passing No. 8 sieve and 98 percent of mass retained on No.40 sieve, color to match roofing membrane. G. Metallic Coating (for Metal Clad Flexible Flashing): Elastomeric, coating with metallic pigments, fibers, mineral fillers, and solvents as supplied or recommended by membrane manufacturer, color to match flexible flashing. H. Termination Bar: Hot-dipped galvanized steel; 1/8-inch x 1-inch bar stock, pre-drilled holes. I. Vents (if required):Johns Manville FP-10 one-way breather vents or approved equal. J. Expansion Joint Filler: 1. Flexible Vapor Retarder: Minimum 60 mil thick vinyl sheet or approved equal. 2. Compressible Insulation: Fiberglass batt insulation or approved equal. K. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide those recommended by roofing system manufacturer. L. Sheathing Paper: Red-rosin type, minimum 3 Ib/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m). M. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel bars,approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors. Styrene Butadiene Styrene(SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 075216-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• N. Cold-Applied Asphalt Adhesive:ASTM D3019,Type III, roof membrane manufacturer's standard asphalt-based, one-or two-part, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive, as tested/recommended by roof system manufacturer. O. Cold-Applied Polymer-Modified Asphalt Adhesive: Roof membrane manufacturer's standard solvent-and asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive, as tested/recommended by roof system manufacturer. P. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene, plain or modified bitumen; nonhardening, nonmigrating, nonskinning, and nondrying. 2.8 COVER BOARD A. Cover Board Manufactured according to ASTM C1325, Class A, UL790 (fire resistance for unlimited slope); ASTM E84; ASTM D3273 (mold resistant) 1. Basis of design: USG Corporation, Securock® Cement Roof Board, 2. Thickness: 1/2-inch 3. Board Size: 4'x8'. 2.9 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated. B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class I, Grade 2 (20 psi), felt or glass- fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. 1. Maximum Board Size: 48 x 48-inch 2. Minimum Board Thickness: 1-inch. C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered rigid polyisocyanurate insulation boards with the same characteristics as above; fabricated to slope of 1/8-inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated. 1. Cricket and Saddle Taper:1/8, 1/4 or 1/2-inch per foot as required by the edge condition. D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated or required for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 2.10 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing. B. Insulation Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation Styrene Butadiene Styrene(SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 075216-10 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• to substrate,and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer; Roofgrip with ClimasealT" coating, manufactured by Buildex. 1. Length: As required for thickness of material to penetrate substrate 1/2-inch minimum. 2. Top Plate: Plastic or metal washer/disc type, sized to meet requirements to resist wind up-lift pressures specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" of this Section. C. Bead-Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturers recommended bead-applied, low- rise, one-component or multicomponent urethane adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer. D. Full-Spread Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended spray- applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer. E. Insulation Cant Strips:ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board. F. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board. G. Wood Nailer Strips: Comply with requirements in "Rough Carpentry" Section. 2.11 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41/D41M. 2.12 WALKWAYS A. Walkway Pads: Reinforced asphaltic composition pads with slip-resisting mineral-granule surface, manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer, 1. Pad Size: 12 x 24-inches. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. 1. Inspect for damage. Remove from site and replace any damaged materials. 2. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. 3. Stand and store roll materials on end. Styrene Butadiene Styrene(SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 075216-11 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1. Do not store more materials on roof than can be installed within two days, unless specifically approved otherwise. 2. Maximum Allowable Loading on Roof: 20 pounds per square foot. 3.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1. Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather. 2. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface. 3. Observe wind chill and other cold weather conditions for proper bituminous application. 3.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Division 01 Section "Administration Requirements." B. Coordinate installation of associated metal flashings, and roof-related items as work of this Section proceeds.Strip-in all flanged metal components to roof membrane with hot bitumen on same day they are installed. C. Schedule work to avoid storage on and traffic over finished work. D. Schedule installation of membrane cap sheet to minimize buck-water laps and within membrane manufacturer's recommended exposure time limit. 3.4 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Styrene Butadiene Styrene(SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 075216-12 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system manufacturer has passed. B. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work and that deck is supported and secured. C. Verify the deck is clean and smooth,free of depressions,waves, or projections, properly sloped to drains or eaves. D. Verify that deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. Verify flutes of metal deck are clean and dry. Confirm deck dryness by moisture meter; maximum allowable: 12-percent. E. Verify that roof openings, curbs, pipes,sleeves, ducts, and vents through the roof are solidly set and wood nailing strips are in place. F. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF ROOFING, GENERAL A. Protect all building surfaces against damage from roofing work. B. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and maintain free from all deleterious material during roofing operations. Remove sharp projections. C. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. D. Repair or replace damaged or deteriorated deck in accordance with Division 07 Section "Roof Replacement Preparation". E. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. 1. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. F. Install roof membrane and auxiliary materials to tie into existing roofing to maintain weathertightness of transition and to not void warranty for existing roofing system. G. Coordinate installation and transition of roofing system component serving as an air barrier with air barrier specified in corresponding "Air-Barrier" Section(s). H. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt and adhesives from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. Styrene Butadiene Styrene(SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 075216-13 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.6 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION A. Coordinate installing roofing system components, so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. D. Installation over metal decks: 1. Mechanically fasten base layer of insulation to substrate according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. a. Fasten base layer of insulation with fasteners and plates in fastening patterns to resist uplift pressures at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 2. Insulation Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45-degree insulation cant strips at junctures of roofing membrane system with vertical surfaces or angle changes more than 45 degrees. 3. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. 4. Lay tapered boards for a distance of 24-inches back from roof drains for positive drainage. 5. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4-inch with insulation. a. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4-inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. 6. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7-inches or more, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6-inches in each direction. 7. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. 8. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces. 9. Apply no more insulation than can be sealed with membrane in same day. 10. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows: a. Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing, and maintaining insulation in place. 11. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install first layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board- type roof insulation to deck type if required by manufacturer or set each layer of insulation in a bead-applied insulation adhesive: a. Fasten first layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" of this Section. b. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing, and maintaining insulation in place. 12. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offsetjoints a minimum of 6-inchesin each direction from Styrene Butadiene Styrene(SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 075216-14 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• joints of insulation below. Loosely butt cover boards together. Tape joints if required by roofing system manufacturer. a. Set cover boards in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive,firmly pressing and maintaining cover boards in place. b. Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing, and maintaining insulation in place. E. Installation Over Concrete Decks: 1. Install base sheet as per manufacturer's installation instructions. Clean/prime concrete surface as necessary. 2. Install base layer of insulation with joints staggered not less than 24 inches (600 mm) in adjacent rows. a. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks. b. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) in width. C. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump, with each side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches (600 mm). 1) Trim insulation, so that water flow is unrestricted. d. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm)with insulation. e. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations. f. Adhere base layer of insulation to temporary roof as per roofing manufacturer's tested system. Generally: 1) Set insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive,firmly pressing, and maintaining insulation in place. 2) Set insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive,firmly pressing, and maintaining insulation in place. 3. Install upper layers of flat insulation and/or tapered insulation, with joints of each layer offset not less than 12 inches (300 mm)from previous layer of insulation. a. Staggered end joints within each layer not less than 24 inches(600 mm) in adjacent rows. b. Install with long joints continuous and with end joints staggered not less than 12 inches (300 mm) in adjacent rows. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks. d. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) in width. e. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump, with each side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches (600 mm). 1) Trim insulation, so that water flow is unrestricted. f. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm)with insulation. g. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations. h. Adhere each layer of insulation to substrate using adhesive according to roof system manufacturer's tested system assembly. Styrene Butadiene Styrene(SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 075216-15 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1) Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing, and maintaining insulation in place. 2) Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing, and maintaining insulation in place. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF COVER BOARDS A. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines, with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. 1. Trim cover board neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to intersecting sloping roof decks. 2. At internal roof drains, conform to slope of drain sump. a. Trim cover board, so that water flow is unrestricted. 3. Cut and fit cover board tight to nailers, projections, and penetrations. 4. Adhere cover board to substrate using adhesive according to manufacturer's tested system (Re.: Roof Systems Letter), as follows: a. Set cover board in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive,firmly pressing,and maintaining insulation in place. b. Set cover board in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing, and maintaining insulation in place. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF ROOFING MEMBRANE, GENERAL A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations in ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing." 1. Substrate Type: cementitious cover board (Securock) 2. Adhering Method:T(torched). 3. Number of SBS-Modified Asphalt Sheets:Two. 4. Surfacing Type: M (mineral-granule-surfaced cap sheet). B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. C. Do not torch roof membrane directly to polyisocyanurate insulation (if present). D. Cooperate with testing and inspecting agencies engaged or required to perform services for installing roofing system. E. Coordinate installation of roofing system so insulation and other components of the roofing membrane system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Styrene Butadiene Styrene(SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 075216-16 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. At end of each day's work, provide tie-offs to cover exposed roofing membrane sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing asphalt, with joints and edges sealed. 2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system. 3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 3.9 SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install modified bituminous roofing membrane sheet and cap sheet according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extend roofing membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants, installing as follows: 1. Torch applied to substrate. a. Unroll roofing membrane sheets and allow them to relax for minimum time period required by manufacturer. B. Laps: Accurately align roofing membrane sheets,without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps. Stagger end laps. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids. 1. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed. 2. Apply roofing granules to cover exuded bead at laps while bead is hot. C. Install roofing membrane sheets so side and end laps shed water. D. Apply plys smooth, free from air pockets, wrinkles, fishmouths, lap joints, or tears. Do not lay any plys that buck water. E. Extend membrane sheet up cant strips and a minimum of 2 inches onto vertical surfaces.Torch additional ply of sheet products as recommended to act as base flashing over roofing membrane. Secure to nailing strips at 4 inches o.c. F. Install two glass fiber ply sheets and bitumen glaze coat for cut-off at end of day's operation. Remove cut-off before resuming roofing. G. Torch and seal two additional layers of glass fiber ply sheet around roof penetrations. H. Prohibit foot and cart traffic from newly applied felts. Do not "walk-in" plies. 3.10 INSTALLATION OF FLASHING AND STRIPPING A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloped and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system manufacturer. Styrene Butadiene Styrene(SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 075216-17 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Backer Sheet Application: Adhere backer sheet to substrate in cold-applied adhesive at rate required by roofing system manufacturer 3. Backer Sheet Application:Torch apply flashing sheet to substrate. 4. Maximum flashing base and top ply width: Width of roll (39-inches) B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8-inchesabove roofing membrane and 4-inches onto field of roofing membrane. C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing at 4 inches on center. 1. Maximum Fastener Spacing: a. Wood: 4-inches on center. b. Masonry or Concrete: Provide termination bars and fasten 8-inches on center. 2. Seal top termination of base flashing with a strip of glass-fiber fabric set in asphalt roofing cement. D. Inspect flashing seams and repair unsealed locations, voids, and fishmouths with three course seal or as recommended by membrane manufacturer. E. Install roofing membrane cap-sheet stripping where metal flanges and edgings are set on membrane roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. F. Coordinate installation of roof scuppers, sumps, and related flashings. G. Apply metallic coating over all bitumen overruns on flashing surface. H. Seal flashings and flanges of items penetrating membrane with calk. I. Roof Drains: Set 30-by-30-inch- (760-by-760-mm-) Insert dimensions 4-pound (1.8 kg) lead flashing in bed of asphaltic adhesive on completed roofing membrane. 1. Cover lead flashing with roofing cap-sheet stripping and extend a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) 6 inches (150 mm) beyond edge of metal flashing onto field of roofing membrane. 2. Clamp roofing membrane, metal flashing, and stripping into roof-drain clamping ring. 3. Install stripping according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Install 72"02" square PMMA flashing "target" over each roof drain. 3.11 PMMA FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install PMMA Flashing system according to manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Extend liquid flashing not less than 3 inches (76 mm) in all directions from edges of item being flashed. Styrene Butadiene Styrene(SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 075216-18 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.12 INSTALLATION OF WALKWAYS A. Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads using units of size indicated or, if not indicated, of manufacturer's standard size, according to walkway pad manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install walkways at the following locations: a. Perimeter of each rooftop unit. b. Between each rooftop unit location,creating a continuous path connecting rooftop unit locations. C. Between each roof hatch and each rooftop unit location or path connecting rooftop unit locations. d. Top and bottom of each roof access ladder. e. Between each roof access ladder and each rooftop unit location or path connecting rooftop unit locations. f. Locations indicated on Drawings. g. As required by roof membrane manufacturer's warranty requirements. 2. Provide 3-inch (76-mm) clearance between adjoining pads. 3. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Walkway Cap Sheet Strips: Install walkway cap sheet strips over roofing membrane, using same application method as used for roofing cap sheet. 1. Install walkways strips at the following locations: a. Perimeter of each rooftop unit. b. Between each rooftop unit location,creating a continuous path connecting rooftop unit locations. C. Between each roof hatch and each rooftop unit location or path connecting rooftop unit locations. d. Top and bottom of each roof access ladder. e. Between each roof access ladder and each rooftop unit location or path connecting rooftop unit locations. f. Locations indicated on Drawings. g. As required by roof membrane manufacturer's warranty requirements. 2. Provide 3-inch (76 mm) clearance between adjoining strips. 3.13 TORCH APPLICATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain a fire watch during all torching applications and for a minimum of 2-hours after torch work is completed for day. B. Maintain a minimum two (2) fire extinguishers of class and capacity required by local authority having jurisdiction, but not less than 20-pound capacity. Keep fire extinguishers within 25-feet of all torch activity. Provide multiple extinguishers if torching in more than one area. C. Provide training on proper use of fire extinguishers to all personnel used on project. Styrene Butadiene Styrene(SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 075216-19 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Turn torches off when not actively in use. Do not place active or hot torches on any combustible materials or surfaces. E. Remove torches and fuel sources from site at end of each day and when superintendent is not on premises. F. Secure fuel sources on roof surface to prevent tipping or falling. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Do not perform demolition during roofing operations. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage qualified testing and/or inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. C. Test Cuts: Test specimens may be removed to evaluate problems observed during quality- assurance inspections of roofing membrane as follows: 1. Approximate quantities of components within roofing membrane will be determined according to ASTM D 3617. 2. Test specimens will be examined for interply voids according to ASTM D 3617 and to comply with criteria established in Appendix 3 in ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing." 3. Repair areas where test cuts were made according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. D. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements". E. Upon substantial completion, Owner may have Work inspected using infrared scanning and other appropriate means to establish conditions of completed Project. F. Correct identified defects or irregularities. Cut out and repair membrane defects before end of each day. G. Do not perform demolition during roofing operations. H. Final Roof Inspection:Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect. 1. Notify Architect and Owner 72 hours in advance of date and time of inspection. I. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. J. Roofing system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 1. Perform additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, to determine if replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements. Styrene Butadiene Styrene(SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 075216-20 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.15 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Provide manufacturer's field services under provisions of Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Request site attendance of roofing materials manufacturers during installation of the work on bimonthly schedule. C. Post Construction Inspection: Contractor and manufacturer's representative to inspect roofing installation 23 months after Substantial Completion and prior to expiration of Contractor's Warranty. 3.16 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. 1. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing,inspect roofing system for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates,and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07 52 16 Styrene Butadiene Styrene(SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 075216-21 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formed Products: a. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. b. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. C. Formed equipment support flashing. d. Formed expansion-joint cover flashings. e. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories. f. Precast concrete splash blocks. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Division 07 Section Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Roofing" for installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with membrane roofing. 3. Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches,vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A 153 -Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 2. A 240 - Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 3. A 653-Steel Sheet,Zinc Coated, (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip process. 4. A 666 - Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 5. A 755 - Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil- Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. 6. A 792 -Steel Sheet, 55%Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 7. B 32B-Solder Metal. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 8. B 749- Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. 9. C 920-Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 10. C 13118-Solvent Release Sealants. 11. D 226-Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 12. D 1187-Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal. 13. D 4397-Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications. 14. D 4586-Asphalt Roof Cement,Asbestos-Free. 15. D 4601-Asphalt-Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet Used in Roofing. B. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA): Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. D. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Edge Design: Fabricate and install parapet Copings that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist roof edge design pressure (P) as identified in ANSI/SPRI-ES-1, as calculated according to ASCE 7. 1. Design Pressures: As per Engineer of Record calculations provided in the Construction Drawings. C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to building interior. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Submit list of proposed Products and manufacturers, including all items specified in Part 2—Products or otherwise required by the Work. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop-and field-assembled work. Include the following: 1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. S. Details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction. 6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings as applicable. 7. Details of special conditions. 8. Details of connections to adjoining work. 9. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal flashing,trim,and accessory indicated with factory-applied color finishes involving color selection. E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments. 2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 3. Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator. B. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance manuals. C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Work of this Section to physically protect membrane roofing, base flashings, and expansion joints from damage that would permit water leakage to building interior. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance,with three years minimum experience. C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of roofing materials, roof accessories, unit skylights, and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim. 3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members. 4. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal flashing. 5. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent bending,warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. D. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Coordinate with demolition work and with work of other trades to ensure sufficient materials and manpower are available to completely replace and make watertight all roofing removed each day. C. Limit removal of existing sheet metal components,to ensure new membrane installation can be made watertight by end of day. D. Coordinate installation of flanged metal components, including gravel guards, pitch pans, and accessories to ensure strip-in with hot bitumen (where applicable) on same day they are installed. E. Schedule work to avoid storage on, and traffic over finished work. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to,the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. C. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,temporary protective film before shipping. B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755. 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation; structural quality. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated (Galvalume) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; structural quality. 3. Surface: Smooth,flat. C. Prepainted Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755. 1. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated (Galvalume) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; structural quality. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Surface: Smooth,flat. 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer:AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not lessthan 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions. b. Minimum Exposure Tests: 1) Humidity Resistance: 2000 hours. 2) Salt-Spray Resistance: 2000 hours. 4. Color: a. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 5. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. D. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749,Type L51121, copper-bearing lead sheet. 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil-thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397. B. Felts:ASTM D 226,Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated. C. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-Ib/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, Basketed, with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. 2. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: Hot- dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153 or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel. 4. Rust-resistant and compatible with materials to be joined. 5. Length: As required for thickness of material to penetrate substrate 1/2-inch minimum. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Mechanical Fasteners for Sheet Metal to Substrate Anchorage: 1. Masonry: One-step, screw-type drive anchor (nailing); heat-treated, stress relieved, stainless-steel pin; zinc jacketed; sized for intended application; minimum 1-1/4-inch length x 1/4-inch diameter; Hammer-Screw' manufactured by Powers Fasteners, Inc. 2. Wood Blocking: Hexagonal head screws, stainless steel, with neoprene rubber washers; jacket color to match pre-painted sheet metal. 3. Concrete: Same as masonry or other power actuated fasteners, suitable for application. D. Roofing Nails: Stainless steel (for fastening into ACQ treated lumber), hot-dipped galvanized or non-ferrous type for fastening into non-treated lumber); with annular rings, size as required to suit application; minimum 11-gage with 3/8-inch diameter head. E. Mechanical Fasteners for Sheet Metal to Metal Fabrications (Support Framing) Anchorage: Appropriate for purpose intended, size as required to suit application and achieve positive anchorage to substrate material. F. Solder: 1. For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with an acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer. 2. For Lead:ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead. 3. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)Steel:ASTM B 32,Grade Sn50,50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead. G. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2-inch-wide and 1/8 inch thick. H. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; low modulus, as specified in Division 07 Section "Sealants (for Roofing)"; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. J. Asphalt Roofing Cement:ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. K. Splash Blocks: Precast concrete of size and profile indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment; suitable for downspouts discharging at grade level or onto roof surface. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. C. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view. D. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. E. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant. F. Expansion Provisions:Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used,form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than linch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. 1. Fabricate all components with allowance for expansion at joints. Provide enlarged or oval holes at all piercing fasteners. G. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated. H. Form all sheet metal components (except corners) in longest practical length up to 10-feet maximum, true to shape, square, accurate in size, and free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. I. Fabricate corners on all sheet metal components (gravel guards, copings, cap flashings, etc.) to form one piece with minimum 18-inch and maximum 36-inch long legs. J. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. 1. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. K. Soldered Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams.Tin edges to be seamed,form seams, and solder. L. Unsoldered Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• M. Hem exposed edges of metal 1/2-inch; miter and seam corners. N. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 3/4-inch at 30 degrees and hemmed to form drip. 1. Where vertical height exceeds 8-inches,fabricate with stiffing grooves in accordance with SMACNA, unless specifically approved otherwise. O. Form all sheet metal material to provide watertight joints: 1. Unprotected Horizontal Surfaces (expansion joint covers, etc.): Standing seam or drive cleat joints. 2. Vertical Surfaces(copings,cap flashings,gravel guards,etc.): Flat lock or cover and backer plate seams. P. Miter all sheet metal corners and solder, weld, or fasten and seal all joints watertight: 1. Prepainted metallic-coated steel sheet:Apply minimum 1/4-inch bead of sealant between connecting metal flanges and drill and fasten with rivets at 2-inches o.c. 2. Stainless Steel: Solder joints watertight. 3. Unfinished Galvanized Steel: Solder joints watertight. 4. After soldering, remove flux. Wipe and wash solder joints clean. 5. Install sealant so it will not be visible on outside of joints. Q. Fabricate elements complete with required connection pieces. R. Fabricate all components with horizontal (flat) surfaces with built-in slope for drainage toward roof unless indicated otherwise. S. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. 2.5 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in 32-feet long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion- joint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. 1. Gutter Style: SMACNA designation A. a. Size: Designed to meet roof drainage area, rainfall intensity criteria, and downspout size and spacing. b. Supports: Minimum 1/8-inch x 1-inch Brackets and 0.1046-inch (12 gage) spacers at maximum 36-inches o.c., staggered. C. Join sections with riveted and sealed or soldered joints. 2. Expansion Joints: Lap type. a. Spacing: Minimum twenty (20) feet, maximum fifty (50) feet between expansion joints. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3. Accessories: Wire ball downspout strainer. 4. Gutters with Girth up to 6-Inches: Fabricate from the following materials: a. Prepainted Metallic-Coated Steel: 0.022 inch (24-gage) thick. 5. Gutters with Girth 6-15 Inches: Fabricate from the following materials: a. Prepainted Metallic-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch (22-gage) thick. B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. Fabricated Hanger Style: SMACNA figure designation 1-35A. 2. Size: Designed to accept roof drainage area, rainfall intensity criteria, and downspout spacing. 3. Length: Minimum twenty (20) feet or required height, maximum fifty feet between expansion joints. 4. Joints: Sections with riveted and sealed or soldered joints. S. Supports: 12 Gage straps at maximum 8-feet oc.All strap edges rolled or smooth. 6. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Prepainted Metallic-Coated Steel: 0.0217 inch (24-gage)thick. C. Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories seal watertight. D. Roof-Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop): Fabricate in 32-feet long sections. Furnish with 6-inch- wide, joint cover plates. 1. Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch- wide concealed backup plate and 6-inch- wide exposed cover plates. 2. Fabricate with scuppers spaced at existing locations or where indicated on the roof plan, of dimensions required with 4-inch-wide flanges and base extending 4inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper. 3. Fabricate roof edge flashing from the following material: a. Prepainted Metallic-Coated Steel: 0.022 inch (24-gage) thick. 4. Fabricate roof edge cleats from the following material: a. Metallic Coated (Galvanized or Galvalume) Steel: 0.028 inch (22-gage)thick. E. Roof and Roof to Wall Transition; Roof to Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) Transition; and Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Prepainted Metallic-Coated Galvalume Steel: 0.022 inch (24-gage)thick. F. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Prepainted Metallic-Coated Galvalume Steel: 0.022 inch (24-gage)thick. G. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch (26-gage)thick. H. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200-10 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch (26-gage)thick. I. Soil Pipe Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Lead: 4.0 Ib/sq.ft., hard tempered. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Prepainted Metallic Coated Galvalume Steel: 0.022 inch (24-gage)thick. 2.7 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Exposed to View(Unfinished)Galvanized Steel Components: Paint to match prepainted metallic- coated steel prior to installation: 1. Clean: Comply with SSPC-1 -Solvent Wipe. 2. Primer: Apply specified or finish paint manufacturer's recommended primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Finish Coat: Apply powder coating or approved urethane enamel in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200-11 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place, and nailing strips located. 4. Verify membrane termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Install underlayment as recommended by SMACNA and as indicated on Drawings. B. Underlayment: Install underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. B. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place,with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners,solder,welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Provide continuous cleats fastened not more than 12-inches on center.Anchor cleats with a minimum two fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. 5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Coat back side of stainless-steel and lead sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. a. Minimum Dry Film Thickness: 15-mils. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200-12 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet. 3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. D. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10-feet. Provide joints within 18-to 36inches of all corners or intersections.Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than linch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. E. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws; and metal decking not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance: 1. Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Stainless Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. F. Seal joints as shown and as required with elastomeric sealant for watertight construction. 1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than linch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants (for Roofing)." G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. Do not solder pre-painted metallic-coated steel sheet. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 3. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization. H. Rivets: Rivet joints where indicated and where necessary for strength. I. Protect all membrane penetrations as indicated and as recommended in SMACNA and NRCA manuals. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200-13 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.4 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Hanging Gutters:Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with elastomeric sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets and straps spaced not more than 36 inches apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts. 1. Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter. 2. Loosely lock straps to front gutter bead and anchor to roof deck. 3. Anchor back of gutter that extends onto roof deck with cleats spaced not more than 24- inches apart. 4. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet apart. Install expansion-joint caps. C. Downspouts:Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. 1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between. 2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system where available. 3. Provide opening at base of downspout(As detailed in the Drawings)to direct water away from building. 4. Set splash blocks under downspouts not connected to underground drainage system. D. Splash Blocks: Install where downspouts discharge on low-slope roofs or onto grade. 1. Roof Discharge: Set on traffic pads compatible with roofing membrane. 2. Grade Discharge: Set on a bed of compacted fill. E. Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration indicated in drawings. If not indicated in Drawings, located expansion joints no greater than 50' apart in any Gutter Section. Locate 2 downspouts for each 50' section of gutter (min.). Lap joints a minimum of 4inches in direction of water flow. 3.5 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible,set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. 2. Strip in all sheet metal flanges the same day they are installed. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200-14 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces specified in Part 1 and as indicated. 1. Backer Plates: Secure with fasteners suitable for substrate, 6-inches o.c. each face. 2. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at 12-inch centers. 3. Apply 1/4-inch bead of sealant between each layer of metal at each edge. 4. Cover Plates: Hook front or exposed face of cover plate over drip edge. 5. Do not use mastic between sheet metal components. C. Pipe or Post Counterflash ing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten. D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4inches and bed with elastomeric sealant. 1. Sawcut new reglets where required. a. Provide bayonet style lap joints, minimum 4-inch overlap. b. Fill voids between wedges with backer rod. C. Seal receiver to vertical face of wall. 2. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or plastic wedges and sealant. 3. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. a. Seal top of reglets with sealant. b. Secure in place with neoprene head screws at maximum 12-inches on center. E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows: 1. Install lead flashings at all soil pipe penetrations. Turn lead flashing down inside piping, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing. 2. Provide Penetration Seal System at all small penetrations not otherwise detailed. a. Clean roof surfaces to receive Penetration Seal Systems. b. Clean pipes and penetrating elements to remove plastic cement, bitumen, and other contaminants by wire brushing and scraping. C. Caulk around penetrating elements with curb adhesive. d. Apply beads of curb adhesive to flat side of first precast curb component. Place caulked curb onto roof surface to form half circle around penetrating element. e. Apply beads of curb adhesive to flat side and to scarf joints of second precast curb component. Place second section of curb onto roof surface to form circle with first section. Press scarf joints together firmly and press both sections down. f. Apply continuous bead of curb adhesive around outside edge of curb at roof. g. Fill around penetrating element with pourable sealant to top of curb. 3. Pitch pans are not desired. Install only where specifically indicated or approved by Architect. Provide flanged umbrellas at all pitch pans. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200-15 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• a. Fill with non-shrink grout to 1-inch from top of flange. b. Top with Pitch Pan Filler-Sealant Type ES-2. 4. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for lead flashing on vent piping. F. Protect all membrane penetrations as indicated and as recommended in SMACNA and NRCA manuals. 3.6 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member. 3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 3.9 SCHEDULE - MATERIALS A. Exposed to View Components: 1. One-Piece Flashing and Expansion Joint Terminations: Metallic coated steel sheet, powder coated to match adjacent prepainted metallic-coated steel sheet components. 2. All Other Components: Metallic coated steel sheet, powder coated to match adjacent prepainted metallic-coated steel sheet components. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200-16 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Concealed from View Components, (Counterflashings, Expansion Joint Covers, Etc.): Stainless steel sheet. C. Roof Penetration Flashings: Stainless steel sheet. D. Rain Hoods and Umbrellas: Stainless steel sheet. END OF SECTION 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076200-17 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Roof Saddles (for Metal Roofs) 2. Roof curbs. 3. Equipment supports. 4. Roof hatches. 5. Pipe Supports/Hangers. 6. Access Ladders 7. Gravity ventilators. 8. Coping mounted Safety Railing System. 9. Fall Through Protection (for Roof Hatches) 10. Mounting Clamps (for Metal Roofs) 11. Leaf Guards B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 0145 34"Windstorm Construction Requirements". 2. Section 06 10 53 "Rough Carpentry" for roof sheathing, wood cants, and wood nailers. 3. Section 07 4113.16 "Standing Metal Roof Panels". 4. Division 07 Low-slope roofing Sections for roofing accessories. 5. Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated metal flashing and counterflashing, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories. 1.3 UNIT PRICES A. Installation of Pipe Supports/Hangers (for Additional Areas Not-in-Contract): 1. Basis of Measurement: By each unit, by each size listed on Bid Form -Alternates & Unit Prices each size. 2. Basis of Payment: Includes pipe support unit, assembled, and installed, membrane protection materials, and accessories. Roof Accessories 077200-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.4 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Association (AA): Specifications for Aluminum Structures. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A 36: Carbon Structural Steel. 2. A 53: Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. A 123: Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 4. A 153: Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) Steel and Iron Hardware. 5. A 167: Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. 6. A 240:Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate,Sheet,and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 7. A 500: Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 8. A 653: Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip process, Structural (Physical) Quality Property. 9. A 666: Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 10. A 755: Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil- Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. 11. A 780: Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. 12. A 792: Steel Sheet, 55%Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 13. A 924: Steel Sheet,Zinc Coated, (galvanized) by the Hot-Dip process. 14. A 1011: Steel, Sheet, and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. 15. B 209:Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 16. B 221:Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. 17. C 208: Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board. 18. C 726: Mineral Fiber Roof Insulation Board. 19. C 920: Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 20. C 1289: Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanu rate Thermal Insulation Board. 21. C 1311: Solvent Release Sealants. 22. D 638:Tensile Properties of Rigid Plastic. 23. D 226: Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 24. D 256: Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics. 25. D 695: Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastic. 26. D 785: Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 27. D 1003: Haze and Luminous Transmittance of Transparent Plastics. 28. D 2240: Rubber Property- Durometer Hardness. 29. D 2244: Color Tolerance and Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. 30. D 4214: Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. 31. D 4397: Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial and Agricultural Applications. 32. D 4586: Asphalt Roof Cement,Asbestos-Free. 33. D 4802: Poly(Methyl Methacrylate)Acrylic Plastic Sheet. Roof Accessories 077200-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS): 1. SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports, Materials, Design and Manufacture. 2. SP-59 Pipe Hangers and Supports, Selection and Application. D. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA): Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. F. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): 1. Fire Hazard Classifications. 2. UL 793 -Standard for Safety Automatically Operated Roof Vents for Smoke and Heat. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Manufactured Curbs: Engineered, prefabricated structural box curb assembly designed for installation onto roof deck or structural framing, capable of supporting weight of roof-mounted equipment without deformation. Include integral base plate,treated wood nailer and insulation. B. Pipe Supports:Support all roof mounted piping with engineered, prefabricated, portable system designed for installation on roof without roof penetrations, flashings, or damage to roofing materials. Include bases,structural steel frames,and adjustable height pipe hangers or supports suitable for existing and proposed piping and conduits. 1.6 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Fabricate and install Roof Accessories to comply with NRCA recommendation that top of curb to top of roofing membrane be a minimum of 8-inches. 1.7 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Submit list of proposed Products and manufacturers, including all items specified in Part 2—Products or otherwise required by the Work. B. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roof accessories. Show layouts of roof accessories including plans and elevations. Indicate dimensions,weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, and components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Roof Accessories 077200-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.8 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof- mounted items. Show the following: 1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section. 2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure. 3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit. B. Samples: For each type of exposed factory-applied finish required and for each type of roof accessory indicated, prepared on Samples of size to adequately show color. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation sequence, special instructions and precautions, and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). D. Certification: Provide current letter(s) on Company's letterhead, signed by an authorized employee or corporate officer attesting to all following items: 1. Qualifications: Certify and document items in Article on Quality Assurance 2. Products: Certify that selected products meet or exceed specified requirements: a. Quality Assurance/Control Data: Provide Design Data, Test Reports, Certificates, Manufacturer's Installation Instructions, and Manufacturer's Field Reports. b. Test Reports: Certified test reports or labeling agency file numbers indicating compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. C. Manufacturer's Certification: Each product meets or exceeds specified requirements. 1.9 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents:Accurately record exact location of roof penetrations and any items installed but not visible after installation of roofing system or other Products. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Include complete instructions for normal maintenance and local contacts for service and spare parts. 2. Include cleaning and stain removal methods and recommended cleaning materials, polishes, and waxes. C. Warranty: Executed special warranty. 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacturer of products specified in this Section with minimum five years documented experience. Roof Accessories 077200-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Applicator: Company specializing in installing the work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by the manufacturer. C. Supervisor/Foreman: Individual that is a direct employee of Applicator Company experienced in using selected manufacturer's Products. D. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. E. Perform work in accordance with MSS SP-59. F. Maintain one copy of each document accessible to site. G. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Convene two weeks prior to commencing work of this Section, under provisions of Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." 2. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this Section. 3. Review conditions of installation, installation procedures, and coordination with related work. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Pack, handle, and ship roof accessories properly labeled in heavy-duty packaging to prevent damage. B. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. 1. Protect from damage from sunlight, weather, excessive temperatures, and construction operations. 1.12 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify required openings for each type of roof accessory by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to International Building Code as amended by the City of Corpus Christi code for fire and wind loading requirements. 2. Comply with Specification Section 0145 34"Windstorm Construction Requirements." 3. Provide certification of inspection confirming approval of by authority having jurisdiction. C. Environmental Requirements: Roof Accessories 077200-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Do not install Roof Accessories when chances for inclement weather exist, or might occur before installation can be completed and accessories made weatherproof. 2. Maintain waterproof integrity of building during and after installation of Roof Accessories. D. Existing Conditions: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. 1. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays. 2. Allow for field tolerances if taking field measurements before fabrication is not possible. 1.13 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1. With Architect's approval, adjust location of roof accessories that would interrupt roof drainage routes, roof expansion joints or other construction elements. B. Sequence work to allow installation of Roof Accessories that are mounted directly on roof deck during installation of new roofing system. Do not cut into new roofing system to retrofit Roofing Accessories unless specifically permitted by Architect. C. Coordinate with installation of mechanical and electrical equipment, hardware, and assemblies to ensure Roof Accessories are properly located and in place to receive equipment installed by others. 1.14 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Cover damage to Roof Accessories and substrates resulting from failure of Roof Accessories to perform as intended, including resist penetration of water. Include replacement of defective materials and labor. 1. Manufactured Curbs and Equipment Supports: Provide warranty on curbs against structural failure. 2. Pipe Support System: Provide warranty covering pipe bases against deterioration for same time period as roofing warranty. 3. Skylights: Provide warranty against discoloration of lenses. 4. Warranty Period: a. Pipe Support System: Same duration as Roofing System Warranty. b. Other Items: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of factory- applied finishes within specified warranty period. Roof Accessories 077200-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to,the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. C. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide roof accessories that have been manufactured, fabricated and installed to withstand design loads from and to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage or failure. 2.3 METAL MATERIALS A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755. 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653,G90 coated and mill phosphatized for field painting. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792,AZ50 coated. B. Prepainted Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by hot-dip process and prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet:ASTM A 653, G90 coated. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coated. 3. Exposed Finishes: High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's written instructions. a. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with physical properties and coating performance requirements in AAMA 2605, except as modified below: 1) Humidity Resistance: 1000 hours. Roof Accessories 077200-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2) Salt-Spray Resistance: 1000 hours. C. Aluminum Sheet:ASTM B 209,alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and mill finish. 1. Factory-Prime Coating: Where painting after installation is indicated, provide pretreatment and white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat; with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil. 2. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: Nonspecular as fabricated;Chemical Finish: Etched, medium matte;Anodic Coating:Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. 3. Class II, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A32/A34 (Mechanical Finish: Nonspecular as fabricated;Chemical Finish: Etched, medium matte;Anodic Coating:Architectural Class II, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. a. Color:To be selected by Architect from Manufacturer's Standard Colors. 4. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: Cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: Acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: As specified below). Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. a. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, medium gloss. b. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 5. High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish: Cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: Conversion coating; Organic Coating: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturer's written instructions. a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 6. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply manufacturer's standard baked-polymer thermosetting powder finish. Comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. D. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: A STM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use, mill finished. E. Stainless-Steel Shapes or Sheet: ASTM A 240 or ASTM A 666, Type 304 or Type 316, No. 2D finish. F. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36, hot dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M, unless otherwise indicated. G. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, baked enamel finished. Roof Accessories 077200-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• H. Galvanized Steel Tube:ASTM A 500, round tube, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123. I. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Acrylic Glazing: ASTM D 4802, thermoformable, monolithic sheet, category as standard with manufacturer,Type UVA (formulated with UV absorber), Finish 1 (smooth or polished). B. Polycarbonate Glazing: Thermoformable, monolithic polycarbonate sheets manufactured by extrusion process, burglar-resistance rated per UL 972 with an average impact strength of 12 to 16 ft-Ibf/in. of width when tested according to ASTM D 256, Method A(Izod). C. Cellulosic-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 208,Type II, Grade 1, not less than 1 inch thick. D. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation:ASTM C 726, not less than 1 inch thick. E. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, not less than 1 inch thick. F. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick. G. Bituminous Coating:Cold-applied asphalt mastic,SSPC-Paint 12,compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. H. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil thick, polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397. I. Felt:ASTM D 226,Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated. 1. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 Ib/100 sq.ft. J. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. K. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM,or PVC; or flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork. L. Sealant: of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. M. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized and heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. N. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, non-asbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system. Roof Accessories 077200-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Equipment Supports: Provide metal equipment supports, internally reinforced and capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads,including equipment loads and other construction to be supported. Fabricate with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints,with integral formed mounting flange at perimeter bottom. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Custom Curb, Inc. b. LM Curbs. C. Pate Company (The). d. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. e. ThyCurb; Div. of Thybar Corporation. 2. Load Requirements:As required to support equipment weight. 3. Material: Metallic-coated steel sheet, 0.079 inch thick. 4. Factory-install continuous wood nailers 3-1/2 wide at tops of equipment supports. 5. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard removable counterflashing, fabricated of same metal and finish as equipment support. 6. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. 7. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches above the new roof surface unless otherwise indicated. 8. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb units with water diverter or cricket and with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units. 2.6 ROOF HATCHES A. Roof Hatches: Fabricate roof hatches with insulated double-wall lids and insulated single wall curb frame with integral deck mounting flange and lid frame counterflashing. Fabricate with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints. Provide continuous weathertight perimeter gasketing and equip with corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Babcock-Davis; a Cierra Products Inc. Company. b. Bilco Company(The). C. Custom Curb, Inc. d. Nystrom, Inc. e. ThyCurb; Div. of Thybar Corporation. f. Wasco Products, Inc. 2. Loads: Fabricate roof hatches to withstand 40-Ibf/sq.ft.external and 20-Ibf/sq.ft. internal loads. 3. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, size as indicated on drawings. 4. Curb and Lid Material: Metallic-coated steel sheet, 0.079 inch thick. 5. Interior Lid Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid. Roof Accessories 077200-10 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 6. Exterior Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as metal curb. 7. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. 8. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 Inches above finished roofing, unless otherwise indicated. 9. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate hatch curbs with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units. 10. Hardware: Galvanized steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside. a. Provide 2-point latch on covers larger than 84-inches. b. Provide remote-control operation. 2.7 FALL THROUGH PROTECTION (FOR ROOF HATCHES) A. Roof Hatch Fall protection Safety Rail and Ladder Extension System: Manufacturer's standard Complete system, including rails,gate and Labels. B. Manufacturer: SafePro L.P., 1355 N. Walton Walker, Dallas, TX 75211; Phone: 1-877-723-3570; Fax: 214-330-5435; Website: www.safeprosafety.com 1. Provide system complete, sized for individual Roof Hatches (Field Verify). Verify required gate swing before ordering. 2. Install as per manufacturer's instructions. 2.8 ROOF MOUNTED PIPE/EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Pipe Support System and Hangers: Adjustable height, with bases, traffic pads, and manufacturer's recommended hardware for mounting on roof membrane, suitable for quantity of pipe runs and sizes, with EPDM end caps. 1. Hot-dip galvanize completed assemblies. Stainless steel when framing is stainless steel. 2. Fabricate to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69. 3. Pipe Size 2-1/2-inch and Smaller: Single roller supports for piping subject to expansion and contraction; with 3-sided channels and pipe clamps. 4. Pipe Size 3-inch and Larger: Rollers,clevis hangers or band hangers,to allow for expansion and contraction without movement of the bases 5. Available Manufacturers: a. Advanced Support Products, Inc. b. Mapa Products C. Miro Industries, Inc. d. Portable Pipe Hangers, Inc. 6. Steel Framing: 12 gage minimum cold-rolled, hot dipped galvanized steel perforated channel sections equal to Uni-strut, Portable Pipe Hangers, or previously approved alternate. 7. Bases: Black, injection molded, moisture resistant, chemical resistant, non-flammable high density polypropylene plastic, or manufacturer's standard approved. Roof Accessories 077200-11 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 8. Accessory Hardware: Hot dipped galvanized, clamps, bolts nuts and washers as required for a complete system. 9. Base Pedestal: 3000 PSI reinforced, pre-cast concrete pavers not less than four inches larger than pedestal base size. 10. Traffic Pad: Recycled elastomers vulcanized into pads, 3/8-inches thick; TufPad° manufactured by Rubber Products, Inc. or roof membrane traffic pads as specified in Division 07 Section " Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Asphalt Bituminous Roofing." a. Size: Not less than four (4") inches larger in both directions pedestal base. 11. Support Height: As indicated or required for existing items to be supported. B. Mechanical Units and Duct Supports:Same manufacturer as pipe supports,and suitable for item to be supported, including manufacturer's standard hardware for mounting to structure or structural roof deck. 2.9 ACCESS LADDERS A. Access Ladders: All welded construction with feet fabricated to accept lag bolting to roof surface. Refer to Plans for sizes and locations. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. P. W. Platforms, Inc., 2906 Holmes Road, Houston, TX 77051; (800) 231-9936; www.pwplatforms.com b. O'Keeffe's Inc. Architectural Building Products; www.okeeffes.com 2. Loads: 500 Ib. capacity 3. Size: 24" wide "Max-Trax" stair treads and platform. Platform size (Refer to Drawings). Refer to Plans for sizes and locations. Field measurements and Shop drawings required for Architect Approval. 4. Frame Material: aluminum a. Finish: Mill finish 5. Standards: Meet or exceed all applicable OSHA,ANSI and IBC Standards. 2.10 Mounting Clamps A. Mounting Clips: To be used for the attachment of rooftop equipment and ladders. Refer to Drawings for locations. 1. Available Manufacturers: B. S-51 Attachment Solutions Metal Roof Innovations, LTD.8655 Table Butte Road, Colorado Springs, CO 80908; (888) 825-3432; (719)495-0045 (fax); www.s-5.com Roof Accessories 077200-12 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored and is ready to receive roof accessories. 2. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces, including roofing system from damage during installation of Roofing Accessories. B. Clean surfaces of roof to receive pipe support bases. Remove loose gravel, dirt, dust, oils, and other foreign materials from all roofs. Prime existing substrate or membrane with primer that is compatible with and acceptable roofing membrane manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners,separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B. Coordinate installation with adjacent Work such as roofing, sheet metal and other work to ensure creation of a complete weatherproof assembly. Anchor work securely to supporting structure but allow for differential and thermal movement. C. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating acceptable to roofing membrane manufacturer or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment:Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene underlayment. Roof Accessories 077200-13 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory manufacturers for waterproof performance. E. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks. F. Equipment Support Installation: 1. Locate curbs and support framing where indicated or instructed by Owner's Representative. 2. Set equipment support so top surface of equipment support is level. G. Roof Hatch Installation: 1. Locate new roof hatches where indicated on drawings. 2. Orient roof hatch and install access ladder to avoid opening toward a roof edge, change in roof elevation, or other obstacles that might impair safe access onto roof. 3. Check roof hatch for proper operation. Adjust operating mechanism as required. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. 4. Anchor to roof deck with fasteners suitable for substrate. 5. Attach safety railing system to roof hatch curb. 6. Attach ladder safety post according to manufacturer's written instructions. 7. After installation, remove shipping clips from components. Do not remove "risk-of-fall" labels from units. 8. Paint Roof hatch as per Paint Schedule. H. Roof Hatch Fall protection Safety Rail and Ladder Extension System Installation: 1. Manufacturer's standard Complete system, including rails, gate and Labels. 2. Verify required gate swing before Installing. I. Roof Mounted Pipe/Equipment Support Installation: 1. Locate bases and support framing as indicated on shop drawings or as required for existing conditions. Completely support all piping, conduit, ducts, and equipment whether indicated or not. a. Do not use wood or wire to support items. b. Maximum Deflection: 1/240th of span. C. Maximum Load on Membrane:Two and one-half(2.5) pounds per square inch. 2. Set bases with adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and as acceptable to membrane manufacturer.Accurately locate and align bases. 3. Install support devices at spacings to support weight of piping and conduit, but in no case exceeding 10-feet on center. 4. Set framing posts into bases and assemble framing structure as indicated. 5. Use galvanized fasteners for galvanized framing and stainless-steel fasteners for stainless steel framing. J. Seal joints with sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories. Roof Accessories 077200-14 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 0140 00 "Quality Requirements". B. Provide manufacturer's field services under provisions of Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements". C. Request site attendance of Roof Accessory manufacturers during installation of the work if required to confirm compliance with instructions or for special or unusual conditions. 3.5 TOUCH UP A. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting in accordance with Section 09 9113 "Painting." B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged installed products. 2. Clean metal and glazing using non-abrasive materials and methods. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned. 3. Remove adhesive from supports, pipes and bases, and leave work in clean condition. B. Remove all construction debris, packaging, unused fasteners, adhesives, and other installation materials from project site and dispose of legally. C. Reclean as necessary to prevent damage. Protect completed work from damage and deterioration and inspect immediately before final acceptance of project. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected roof surfaces. END OF SECTION 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 077200-15 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 3. Penetrations in smoke barriers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 84 43 "Joint Firestopping" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in smoke barriers. 1.2 UNIT PRICES A. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping system, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly developed in accordance with current International Firestop Council (IFC) guidelines. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction prior to submittal. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Listed System Designs: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. Penetration Firestopping 078413-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Approvals according to FM Approvals 4991, "Approval Standard for Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain,frost,condensation,or other causes. B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate,forced-air circulation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping systems. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS A. Obtain joint firestop systems for each type of joint opening indicated from single manufacturer. 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Penetration Firestopping Systems:Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems are to be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Penetration Firestopping 078413-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. Hilti, Inc. C. International Fireproof Technology Inc. d. Tremco Incorporated. B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479. 1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of the wall penetrated. 2. Membrane Penetrations: Install recessed fixtures such that the required fire resistance will not be reduced. C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479. 1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of the floor penetrated. 2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of the floor. The following floor penetrations do not require a T-rating: a. Those within the cavity of a wall. b. Floor,tub, or shower drains within a concealed space. C. 4-inch or smaller metal conduit penetrating directly into metal-enclosed electrical switchgear. 3. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping systems with a Class 1 W-rating in accordance with UL 1479. D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per UL 1479. 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq, ft. of penetration opening and no more than 50-cfm cumulative total for any 100 sq. ft. at both ambient and elevated temperatures. E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E84. F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for conditions indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials. 2. Substrate primers. 3. Collars. 4. Steel sleeves. Penetration Firestopping 078413-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer sleeve lined with an intumescent strip,a flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket. B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture. C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced intumescent elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet. E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents or inorganic fibers. F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric strips for use around combustible penetrants. G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. H. Pillows/Bags: Compressible, removable, and reusable intumescent pillows encased in fire- retardant polyester or glass-fiber cloth. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed. I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants. K. Fire-Rated Cable Sleeve Kits: Complete kits designed for new or existing cable penetrations through walls to accept standard accessories. L. Thermal Wrap: Flexible protective wrap tested and listed for up to 2-hour fire ratings in accordance with ASTM E814/UL 1479 for membrane penetrations or ASTM E1725/UL 1724 for thermal barrier and circuit integrity protection. M. Fire-Rated Cable Pathways: Single or gangable device modules composed of a steel raceway with integral intumescent material and requiring no additional action in the form of plugs, twisting closure, putty, pillows, sealant, or otherwise to achieve fire and air-leakage ratings. N. Retrofit Device for Cable Bundles: Factory-made, intumescent, collar-like device for firestopping existing over-filled cable sleeves and capable of being installed around projecting sleeves and cable bundles. Penetration Firestopping 078413-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• O. Wall-Opening Protective Materials: Intumescent, non-curing putty pads or self-adhesive inserts for protection of electrical switch and receptacle boxes. P. Fire-Rated HVAC Retaining Angles: Steel angle system with integral intumescent firestop gasket for use around rectangular steel HVAC ducts without fire dampers. Q. Firestop Plugs: Flexible, re-enterable, intumescent, foam-rubber plug for use in blank round openings and cable sleeves. R. Fire-Rated Cable Grommet: Molded two-piece grommet made of plenum-grade polymer and foam inner core for sealing small cable penetrations in gypsum walls up to 1/2 inch diameter. S. Closet Flange Gasket: Molded, single-component, flexible, intumescent gasket for use beneath a water closet (toilet)flange in floor applications. T. Endothermic Wrap: Flexible, insulating, fire-resistant, endothermic wrap for protecting membrane penetrations of utility boxes, critical electrical circuits, communications lines, and fuel lines. 2.4 MIXING A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials. Penetration Firestopping 078413-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean,sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of firestopping. C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings,forming materials, accessories and penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than 3 inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes. 1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 1S feet from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet. B. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items orfirestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: Penetration Firestopping 078413-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E2174. B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping 078413-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 07 84 43 JOINT FIRESTOPPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions. 2. Joints in smoke barriers. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Product Schedule: For each joint firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing agency. 1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's illustration for a particular joint firestopping system condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by joint firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire- resistance-rated assembly developed in accordance with current International Firestop Council (IFC) guidelines. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Listed System Designs: For each joint firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating thatjoint firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Joint Firestopping Systems:Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which joint firestopping Joint Firestopping 078443-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• systems are installed. Joint firestopping systems must accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases. 1. Provide products that, upon curing, do not re-emulsify, dissolve, leach, breakdown, or otherwise deteriorate over time from exposure to atmospheric moisture,sweating pipes, ponding water or other forms of moisture. 2. Provide firestop products that do not contain ethylene glycol. B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Providejoint firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E1966 or UL 2079. 1. nuiuiul ;uuuu urvra Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. Hilti, Inc. C. International Fireproof Technology Inc. d. Tremco Incorporated. e. Willseal;Tremco Construction Products Group. 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the wall, floor, or roof in or between which it is installed. C. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide joint firestopping systems with ratings determined per UL 2079 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0,30-inch wg. 1. Va ni, lfa fl:a reru :.w.Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. Hilti, Inc. C. International Fireproof Technology Inc. d. Tremco Incorporated. e. Willseal; Tremco Construction Products Group. 2. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft. of joint at both ambient and elevated temperatures. D. Exposed Joint Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E84. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Provide components of joint firestopping systems,including primers and forming materials,that are needed to install elastomeric fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by joint firestopping system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for conditions indicated. Joint Firestopping 078443-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine substrates and conditions,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. General: Install joint firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support elastomeric fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing elastomeric fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive joint system. D. Install elastomeric fill materials for joint firestopping systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Elastomeric fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply elastomeric fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For elastomeric fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing firestopping systems with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER-PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than 3 inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes. 1. Locate in accessible concealed floor,floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 ft. from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 ft. END OF SECTION 07 84 43 Joint Firestopping 078443-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 079100 PREFORMED EXPANSION JOINTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Provide factory fabricated elastomeric expansion waterproofing joint, to prevent the penetration of water at control, expansion or building joints as indicated on architects/engineer's drawings, in new or retrofit installations. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to joint manufacturer drawings indicating location of joint and configurations. B. Manufacturer's printed literature and installation instructions. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, NDL type warranty, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of expansion joint system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes leaks. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Unless exclusions/exceptions to this provision are noted during the bidding process,there will be no exclusions/exceptions to this requirement granted to the successful bidder. PART 2- PRODUCT 2.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide flat, vulcanized waterproofing joint integral with the waterproofing membrane to accommodate movements up to: ± 2" [ ± 50 mm] capable of 500% elongation at -40 'F across its length and at all vulcanized points. B. All portions of the expansion joint system, including all terminations, all transitions, all plane and angle changes that deviate from a straight line in a single plane are to be factory fabricated by means of vulcanization. C. Joint material is to be Flaml-INE 40 as supplied by SITURA INC., 1-888-474-8872. Preformed Expansion Joints 079100-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install all components of the system in accordance with the manufacturer's most recent printed instructions. B. The system is to be wholly encapsulated between the plies of the modified bitumen membrane in a roofing/waterproofing system of asphalt/bitumen. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for torch down applications.The joint can be protected by means of an overlap membrane mopped or torched to one side of the joint as per manufacturer's instructions. C. Slit the base ply with a knife along the joint gap. Bond the base modified bitumen ply and the Flaml-INE surfaces with hot asphalt/bitumen. Install each Flaml-INE edging polyester fleece so that it shall be firmly and uniformly set,without voids, into the hot asphalt.At all times observe the modified bitumen manufacturer's recommendations. The Flaml-INE fleece must be completely encapsulated in the hot asphalt/bitumen. D. Apply the modified bitumen stripping plies smooth,free from air pockets,wrinkles,fishmouths, or tears.At all times observe the modified bitumen manufacturer's recommendations.The joint shall not obstruct water flow across its surface and forms a continuous monolithic waterproof barrier. END OF SECTION 07 9100 Preformed Expansion Joints 079100-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Urethane joint sealants. 2. Mildew-resistant joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product data. B. Samples: Manufacturer's standard color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Joint-sealant schedule. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Warranty Documentation: 1. Manufacturers' special warranties. 2. Installer's special warranties. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period:Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: Joint Sealants 079200-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals,tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. B. Urethane, M, NS, 25, NT: Multicomponent, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 2.3 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth. B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920,Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Latex:Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex,ASTM C834,Type OP, Grade NF. Joint Sealants 079200-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers,and otherjoint fillers;and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, Type O (open-cell material) , and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials, or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant- substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant-backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints:Clean outjoints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints(except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease,waterproofing, water repellents,water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean,sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing outjoints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. C. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. Joint Sealants 079200-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• d. Other porous joint substrates. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. C. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. e. Other nonporous joint substrates. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint- sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately aftertooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch,twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Joint Sealants 079200-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile in accordance with Figure 8A in ASTM C1193 unless otherwise indicated. G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. H. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.3 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces:JS-1 1. Joint Locations (Joint sealants in paved roads, parking lots, walkways and curbing are specified in Division 32 of the specifications): a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Tile control and expansion joints. C. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, P, 50,T, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:JS-2 1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. b. Joints between metal panels. C. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows, and louvers. e. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. f. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 12, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. Joint Sealants 079200-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces:JS-3 1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, P, 25,T, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:JS-4 1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Tile control and expansion joints. C. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry walls and partitions. d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. e. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. E. Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:JS-5 1. Joint Locations: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls,floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. C. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. END OF SECTION 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 079200-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 07 92 19 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical joint sealants. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product data. B. Samples: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants, showing full range of available colors for each product exposed to view. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Test and Evaluation Reports: 1. Product test reports. B. Sample warranties. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Warranty Documentation: 1. Manufacturers' special warranties. 2. Installer's special warranties. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Installer's Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace acoustical joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period:Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish acoustical joint sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. Acoustical Joint Sealants 079219-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical joint-sealant products that effectively reduce airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction, as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies in accordance with ASTM E90. B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex acoustical sealant complying with ASTM C834. 1. Colors of Exposed Acoustical Joint Sealants:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by acoustical joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant-backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive acoustical joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints:Clean outjoints immediately before installing acoustical joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Acoustical Joint Sealants 079219-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by acoustical joint-sealant manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond;do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately aftertooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Comply with acoustical joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements apply. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical joint sealant. Install acoustical joint sealants at both faces of partitions, at perimeters, and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C919,ASTM C1193,and manufacturer's written instructions for closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions to underside of floor slabs above acoustical ceilings. C. Acoustical Ceiling Areas:Apply acoustical joint sealant at perimeter edge moldings of acoustical ceiling areas in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. END OF SECTION 07 92 19 Acoustical Joint Sealants 0792 19-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Interior standard steel doors and frames. 2. Exterior standard steel doors and frames. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical-and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. C. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirement for All Exterior Doors and Frames and Hardware: 1. Comply with 2015 International Building Code and with the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Requirements(120 mph wind velocity(ASD) (3 second gust) and an equivalent 155 mph wind velocity(LRFD), Exposure C, Risk Category III). 2. Utilize only door,frame and hardware assemblies that have been tested and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 081113-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. 1,aiuiufac uuuq^rs,". Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ceco Door;AADG, Inc.; ASSA ABLOY. 2. Curries,AADG, Inc.; ASSA ABLOY Group. 3. Republic Doors and Frames; a Allegion brand. 4. Steelcraft; Allegion plc. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction forfire-protection ratings indicated on Drawings, based on testing at positive pressure in accordance with NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing in accordance with UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 2. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Lite Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire- protection ratings indicated, based on testing in accordance with NFPA 257 or UL 9. C. Thermally Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door assemblies with R-value of not less than 2.1 deg.F x h x sq.ft./BTU (0.370K x sq. m/W) when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363. 2.3 INTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 2;ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level B.At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. 1. Doors: a. Type:As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. C. Face: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 081113-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard. f. Fire-Rated Core: Manufacturer's standard laminated mineral board core for fire- rated and temperature-rise-rated doors. 2. Frames: a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. b. Sidelite Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent door frame. C. Construction: Knocked down. 2.4 EXTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 3; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level A. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. 1. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. C. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness required to meet the requirements of Section 01 45 34 - Windstorm Construction Requirements, with minimum A60 coating. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. e. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets. Seal joints against water penetration. f. Bottom Edges: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. g. Core: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Frames: a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness required to meet the requirements of Section 01 45 34 - Windstorm Construction Requirements, with minimum A60 coating. b. Construction: Face welded. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Type:Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated. a. Comply with the requirements of Section 01 45 34 - Windstorm Construction Requirements. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 081113-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches of frame height above 7 feet. 3. Post-installed Expansion Anchor: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts,with manufacturer's standard pipe spacer. B. Floor Anchors for Concrete Slabs with Underlayment: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at top of underlayment. C. Material: ASTM A879/A879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M or ASTM A1011/A1011M; hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A1531M, Class B. 2.6 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS),Type B. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A1531M. E. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated. F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C665,Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool;with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Door Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency. B. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware,and electrical wiring;include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising,drilling,and tapping in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 081113-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal doors and frames for hardware. 2.8 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install windstorm-rated units in accordance with the 2015 International Building Code and the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm requirements.These requirements take precedence over the requirements of NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Comply with NAAMM-HMMA 840. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned,and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed Work. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes. b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. 2. Fire-Rated Openings: Install frames in accordance with NFPA 80. 3. Floor Anchors: Secure with post-installed expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of post-installed expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout or mortar. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 081113-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 5. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with post-installed expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured atjambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. C. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 . D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" and with hollow- metal manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 REPAIR A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. B. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections. END OF SECTION 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 081113-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core flush wood doors with plastic-laminate-faces. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including the following: 1. Door core materials and construction. 2. Door edge construction 3. Door face type and characteristics. 4. Door louvers. 5. Factory-machining criteria. 6. Factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each type of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Door schedule indicating door location,type, size,fire protection rating, and swing. 2. Door elevations,dimension and locations of hardware, lite and louver cutouts,and glazing thicknesses. 3. Details of frame for each frame type, including dimensions and profile. 4. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems, and security systems. 5. Dimensions and locations of blocking for hardware attachment. 6. Clearances and undercuts. 7. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. B. Record Documents: For fire-rated doors, list of door numbers and applicable room name and number to which door accesses. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Certification: Licensed participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. Flush Wood Doors 081416-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Wood Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire- protection ratings indicated on Drawings, based on testing at positive pressure in accordance with UL 10C or NFPA 252. 1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size. B. Smoke-and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing in accordance with UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 2.3 SOLID-CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS WITH PLASTIC-LAMINATE FACES A. Interior Doors, Solid Core: 1. Vlan ufa uuue as" Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ABS-American Building Supply- Doormerica. b. Haley Brothers, Inc. C. Masonite Architectural. d. Oshkosh Door Company. e. Poncraft Door Company. f. VT Industries, Inc. 2. Performance Grade: ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Heavy Duty. 3. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Premium. 4. Plastic-Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. 5. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes:As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range of products. 6. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Plastic laminate that matches faces,applied before faces Flush Wood Doors 081416-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• a. Fire-Rated Single Doors: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed vertical edges. b. Fire-Rated Pairs of Doors: 1) Provide formed-steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals. C. Mineral-Core Doors: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 1) Screw-Holding Capability: 475 Ibf in accordance with WDMA T.M. 10. 7. Core for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: a. ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2 particleboard. 1) Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as follows: a) 5-inch top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers. b) 5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have kick, mop, or armor plates. c) 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices. b. Glued wood stave. C. WDMA I.S. 10 structural composite lumber. 1) Screw Withdrawal, Face: 475 Ib. 2) Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 475 Ib. d. Either glued wood stave or WDMA I.S. 10 structural composite lumber. 8. Core for Fire-Rated Doors: As required to achieve fire-protection rating indicated on Drawings. a. Blocking for Mineral-Core Doors: Provide composite blocking with improved screw- holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated on Drawings as follows: 1) 5-inch top-rail blocking. 2) 5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates. 3) 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have armor plates. 4) 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices. 2.4 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS A. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; with baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated on Drawings. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 2. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors. B. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. Flush Wood Doors 081416-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." 3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware." B. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Install frames level, plumb,true, and straight. 1. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. 2. Anchor frames to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. a. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. b. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1) For factory-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed. 3. Install fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with NFPA 80. 4. Install smoke-and draft-control doors in accordance with NFPA 105. D. Job-Fitted Doors: 1. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below. a. Do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. 2. Machine doors for hardware. 3. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 4. Clearances: a. Provide 1/8 inch at heads,jambs, and between pairs of doors. b. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. C. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. d. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 5. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 6. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock edge;trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. E. Factory-Fitted Doors:Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. Flush Wood Doors 081416-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• F. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 081416-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Access doors and frames. 2. Fire-rated access doors and frames. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Product Schedule: For access doors and frames. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Documents: For fire-rated doors, list of applicable room name and number in which access door is located. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency,for fire-protection ratings indicated,according to NFPA 2S2 or UL 10B. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges: 1. ariufaa;tu eirs,Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ACUDOR Products, Inc. b. Babcock-Davis. C. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. e. Milcor; Hart& Cooley, Inc. f. Nystrom, Inc. Access Doors and Frames 083113-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• g. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The). 2. Description: 24 x 24 inches, face of door flush with frame, with exposed flange and concealed hinge. 3. Locations: Wall and ceiling as indicated on drawings. 4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch, 16 gage, factory primed . 5. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 6. Latch and Lock: Cam latch, key operated. 2.3 FIRE-RATED ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A. Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges: 1. nroi : a uu 'u`".i.Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Babcock-Davis. b. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. C. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. d. Milcor; Hart& Cooley, Inc. e. Nystrom, Inc. f. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The). 2. Description: 24 x 24 inches, door face flush with frame, uninsulated;with exposed flange, self-closing door, and concealed hinge. 3. Locations: Wall and ceiling as indicated on drawings. 4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. 5. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.036 inch, 20 gage, factory primed . 6. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 7. Latch and Lock: Self-latching door hardware, operated by key. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars:ASTM A36/A36M. B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A879/A879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. C. Frame Anchors: Same material as door face. D. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. Access Doors and Frames 083113-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish mounting holes, attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated. C. Latch and Lock Hardware: 1. Quantity: Furnish number of latches and locks required to hold doors tightly closed. 2. Keys: Furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 2.6 FINISHES A. Painted Finishes: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Factory Primed: Apply manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation,for proper operation. END OF SECTION 08 3113 Access Doors and Frames 083113-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Insulated service doors. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports, door-opening framing, corner guards, and bollards. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. 1. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed on structure. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. B. Record Documents: For fire-rated doors, list of door numbers and applicable room name and number to which door accesses. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. Overhead Coiling Doors 083323-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period:Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding the following design wind loads: 1. Design Wind Load: Comply with 2015 International Building Code and with the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Requirements (120 mph wind velocity (ASD) (3 second gust) and an equivalent 155 mph wind velocity (LRFD), Exposure C, Risk Category III). 2. Utilize only door,frame and hardware assemblies that have been tested and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. 2.2 DOOR ASSEMBLY A. Insulated Service Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats. 1. I'llU 4''$L I N S.Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cookson; a Cornell Cookson company. b. Cornell; a Cornell Cookson company. C. Entrematic; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Overhead Door Corporation, Model 625. e. Wayne Dalton; a division of Overhead Door Corporation. B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 20,000. C. Insulated Door Curtain R-Value: 7.7 . D. Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel. E. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 2-5/8-inch center-to-center height. 1. Provide High Wind load option with Slat Gauge as required to meet TDI Windstorm requirements. 2. Insulated-Slat Interior Facing: Metal. Overhead Coiling Doors 083323-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• F. Bottom Bar: Two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch thick; fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel and finished to match door. G. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats. H. Hood: Galvanized steel. 1. Mounting: As indicated on Drawings. I. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly. 1. Locking Device Assembly: operable from inside. J. Electric Door Operator: 1. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 25 cycles per hour and up to 90 cycles per day. 2. Safety: Listed according to UL 325 by a qualified testing agency for commercial or industrial use. 3. Motor Exposure: Interior. 4. Motor Electrical Characteristics: a. Horsepower:TBD. b. Voltage: 208 V ac,three phase, 60 Hz. 5. Emergency Manual Operation: Crank type. 6. Obstruction-Detection Device:Automatic photoelectric sensor; self-monitoring type . 7. Control Station(s): Interior mounted. 8. Other Equipment:Audible and visual signals. K. Curtain Accessories: Equip door with weatherseals astragal. L. Door Finish: 1. Powder-Coated Finish: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Powder-Coated Finish. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.4 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows: Overhead Coiling Doors 083323-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Insulation: Fill slats for insulated doors with manufacturer's standard thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E84 or UL 723. Enclose insulation completely within slat faces. 2. Metal Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match metal of exterior curtain-slat face, with minimum thickness required by applicable codes. B. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated,with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain,to allow curtain to operate smoothly,and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain. 2.5 HOODS A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that project beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging. 2.6 LOCKING DEVICES A. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks. 1. Lock Cylinders: As standard with manufacturer and keyed to building keying system. 2. Keys:Three for each cylinder. B. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked. 2.7 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES A. Weatherseals for Exterior Doors: Equip each exterior door with weather-stripping gaskets fitted to entire exterior perimeter of door for a weather-resistant installation unless otherwise indicated. B. Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push-up-operated or emergency-operated door with lifting handles on each side of door, finished to match door. 2.8 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a Overhead Coiling Doors 083323-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self- lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. B. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate. 2.9 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operation-cycles requirement specified,with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. 1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc. B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door. C. Motors: Reversible-type motor with controller(disconnect switch)for motor exposure indicated for each door assembly. 1. Electrical Characteristics: Minimum as indicated for each door assembly. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than R in./sec. and not more than 12 in./sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. 2. Operating Controls, Controllers, Disconnect Switches, Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. D. Obstruction-Detection Devices: External entrapment protection consisting of indicated automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. For non-fire-rated doors, activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. 1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in door opening without contact between door and obstruction. a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensing device. When self-monitoring feature is activated, door closes only with sustained or constant pressure on close button. E. Control Station: Three-button control station in fixed location with momentary-contact push- button controls labeled "Open" and "Stop" and sustained- or constant-pressure push-button control labeled "Close." 1. Interior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general- purpose NEMA ICS 6,Type 1 enclosure. Overhead Coiling Doors 083323-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• F. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 25 I . G. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. H. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation. I. Audible and Visual Signals: Audible alarm and visual indicator lights in compliance with the accessibility standard. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. B. Comply with 2015 International Building Code and with the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Requirements. C. Power-Operated Doors: Install automatic garage doors openers according to UL 325. 3.2 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors. END OF SECTION 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 083323-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 08 34 59 VAULT DOORS AND DAY GATES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. GSA Class 5 vault door assembly including day gate. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. For GSA Class 5-A vault door assembly including day gate. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show operational clearances and coordination of frame with designed wall thicknesses. 3. Show installation of anchorages for vault door frames. C. Setting Drawings: For anchorages, including sleeves, inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors that are to be embedded in supporting construction. D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard color sheets, showing full range of available colors and finishes for each type of vault door and day gate assembly including hardware and accessories. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Test and Evaluation Reports: 1. Product Test Reports: For each vault door assembly, for tests performed by qualified testing agency. B. Qualification Statements: For Installer. Vault Doors and Day Gates 083459-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For vault door assemblies to include in emergency,operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installers: Authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver vault door assemblies wrapped and crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Use vented plastic. B. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install vault door assemblies until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at levels intended for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ARMORY VAULT DOOR ASSEMBLIES A. GSA approved Class 5-A Armory Vault Door Assembly built to GSA Fed Spec AA-D-600D with mechanical lockset meeting Fed Spec FF-L-2937 combination lock. 1. Basis of Design: available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Brown Safe Company; www.BrownSafe.com b. Acme Safe Company; www.acmesafenewyork.com C. Wilson Safe Company; www.wilsonsafe.com B. Frame: Designed for non-grout installation; adjustable to accommodate wall thicknesses. C. Hardware and Accessories: 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Handle: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Combination Locks: Lock conforming to Federal Specification FF-L-2937. Vault Doors and Day Gates 083459-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 4. Sills: Manufacturer's standard. 5. Trim: Stainless steel, chromium-plated steel, or other trim standard with vault door manufacturer. D. Day Gate: Full width of door opening and designed to restrict entry when vault door is open; with piano-type or self-closing gravity hinges. 1. Construction: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Lock: Cylinder-type lock, controlled by key on nonsecure side and by lever or thumbturn on secure side. 3. Features: a. Pass-through Deal window. b. Dutch Door Day gate. E. Door Finish: Manufacturer's standard factory-applied, baked-on coating finish applied to door, frame, and wall flanges. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate size and location of vault door assemblies with supporting construction, and furnish anchoring devices with templates, diagrams, and instructions for their installation. B. Provide temporary shoring or bracing of floors while transporting vault door assemblies to final location as required to prevent surface damage to floors or deflection in excess of design loads. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install vault door assemblies, complete with doors,frames, and accessories, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with requirements of assemblies' UL listing. Vault Doors and Day Gates 083459-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Set vault door frames accurately in position; plumb, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust vault door and day gate hardware and operating mechanisms to function smoothly and lubricate as recommended in writing by manufacturer. B. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage, including dented and bent units. C. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean abraded areas of shop paint; paint exposed areas with same material used for shop painting. 1. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain modular vault doors. END OF SECTION 08 34 59 Vault Doors and Day Gates 083459-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 08 41 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum-framed interior storefront systems. 2. Aluminum-framed exterior storefront systems. 3. Aluminum-framed entrance door systems. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product.Submit manufacturer's product specifications,technical product data,standard details, and installation recommendations for each type of entrance and storefront product required. Include the following information: 1. Fabrication methods. 2. Finishing. 3. Hardware. 4. Accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers. 2. Glazing details. C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. Submit pairs of samples of each type and color of aluminum finish, on 12-inch-long sections of extrusions or formed shapes and on 6 inch square sheets.Where color or texture variations are anticipated, include 2 or more units in each set of samples indicating extreme limits of variations. D. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. E. Delegated Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts,including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 084113-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Structural-Test& Impact-Test Performance: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests according to ASTM E 330 and ASTM E 1886, performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type assembly indicating the following: a. Structural-Test Performance Results: ASTM E 330 performance data, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation, including test and design wind pressures for approved test assembly as described above (test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted). b. Impact-Test Performance Results: ASTM E 1996 performance data, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation, including test and design wind pressures for approved test assembly as described above (test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted). F. Windstorm Debris Impact Resistance Performance: Provide exterior aluminum-framed systems that pass missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996. 1. Large-Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located within 30 feet of grade. 2. Small-Missile Impact: For aluminum-framed systems located more than 30 feet above grade. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Energy Performance Certificates: NFRC-certified energy performance values from manufacturer. B. Product test reports. C. Source quality-control reports. D. Sample warranties. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide entrance and storefront produced by a single manufacturer capable of showing prior production of units similar to those required. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide entrances and storefront produced by a single manufacturer with not less than 5 years successful experience in the fabrication of assemblies of the type and quality required. C. Installers Qualifications: Entrances and storefront shall be installed by a firm that has not less than 5 years successful experience in the installation of systems similar to those required. Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 084113-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Delegated Design Engineer: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in state where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the type indicated. E. Design Criteria: Drawings indicate sizes, spacings of members, profiles and dimensional requirements of entrance and storefront work. Minor deviations will be accepted in order to utilize manufacturer's standard products when, in the Architect's sole judgement, such deviations do not materially detract from the design concept or intended performance. 1. Design Criteria: Drawings are based on one manufacturer's entrance and storefront system. Another manufacturer's system of a similar and equivalent nature will be acceptable when, in the Architect's sole judgement, differences do not materially detract from the design concept or intended performance. F. Requirement for all Exterior Storefront Frames, Doors, and Hardware: 1. Comply with 2015 International Building Code and with the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Requirements(120 mph wind velocity(ASD)(3 second gust) and an equivalent 155 mph wind velocity(LRFD), Exposure C, Risk Category III). Comply with the requirements of Section 0145 34-WINDSTORM CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS of the specifications. 2. Utilize only assemblies that have been tested and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. 3. Comply with Specification Section 014534—Windstorm Construction Requirements. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the Contractor, Installer and Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units (including reglazing) of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include but are not necessarily limited to structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage or air infiltration, faulty operation, and deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check openings by field measurement before fabrication to ensure proper fitting of work; show measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay in the work. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurement, and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit. Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 084113-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure, including, but not limited to, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. C. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units. C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads:As indicated on Drawings. D. Deflection of Framing Members Supporting Glass: At design wind load, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch,whichever is smaller. a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1/16-inch clearance between framing members and operable units. E. Structural:Test in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors, do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, including entrance doors and anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations:As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds. Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 084113-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure:Test in accordance with ASTM E331 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas, including entrance doors, when tested in accordance with a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 12 Ibf/sq.ft . G. Energy Performance: Certified and labeled by manufacturer for energy performance as follows: 1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: U-factor for the system of not more than 0.29 as determined in accordance with NFRC 100. 2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: SHGC for the system of not more than 0.25 as determined in accordance with NFRC 200. 3. Air Leakage: a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: Air leakage for the system of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq, ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 Ibf/sq, ft. when tested in accordance with ASTM E283. H. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Passes ASTM E1886 missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests in accordance with ASTM E1996 for Wind Zone 1 . 1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet of grade. 2. Small-Missile Test: For glazing located between 30 feet and above grade. I. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 INTERIOR STOREFRONT SYSTEMS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer Company, Inc.; Arconic Corporation; Trifab 400 Framing system or comparable product approved by Architect. B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Interior Framing Construction: Nonthermal. a. System Dimensions: 1-3/4"x 4" b. Glass: Center Pane 2. Glazing Systems a. Glazing:As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing". b. Glazing Gaskets; Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, extruded EPDM rubber. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 084113-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• d. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion. e. Glazing Sealants: as recommended by Manufacturer. 3. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Where exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel. 2.3 EXTERIOR STOREFRONT SYSTEMS A. 'p 1,,uI dull 11 p( ,ii 111 II'111,011uuc.,l, Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer Company, Inc.; Arconic Corporation; Type IR-501T or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Oldcastle Building Envelope (OBE); CRH Americas, Inc. 2. YKK AP America Inc. 3. Kawneer Company, Inc.;Arconic Corporation. B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Exterior Framing Construction:Thermally broken. 2. Interior Vestibule Framing Construction: Nonthermal. 3. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 4. Finish: Clear anodic finish. 5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system. 6. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 7. Steel Reinforcement: As required by manufacturer. C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction. D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. 2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. ri au - X11-L�u .,ui„ur II'ucceiu ctl Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer Company, Inc.; Arconic Corporation; Type IR-500 Stile and Rail Type Aluminum Doors or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Oldcastle Building Envelope (OBE); CRH Americas, Inc. 2. Vistawall Architectural Products. 3. YKK AP America Inc. 4. Kawneer Company, Inc.;Arconic Corporation. B. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing or automatic operation. Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 084113-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0,125-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior. 2. Door Design: as indicated on Drawings. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door. 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article for each entrance door, to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size,finish, or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. 3. Opening-Force Requirements: a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 Ibf to release the latch and not more than 30 Ibf to set the door in motion. b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 IV to fully open door. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, quantity, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using entrance door hardware designations as follows: 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. 2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and requirements for description, quality, and function. C. Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner. 1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide setscrew in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed. 2. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel,with stainless steel pin. 3. Quantities: a. For doors up to 37 inches high, provide three hinges per leaf. b. For doors more than 67 and up to 120 inches high, provide four hinges per leaf. D. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 084113-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• E. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3,Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing in accordance with UL 305. F. Cylinders: 1. As specified in Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware." G. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum framing. H. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6. I. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation, sized as required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to comply with field conditions and requirements for opening force. J. Concealed Overhead Holders and Stops: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1. K. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location indicated, with integral rubber bumper. L. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components. 1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D2000 molded neoprene or ASTM D2287 molded PVC. 2. Sliding Type: AAMA 701/702, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing. M. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners on mounting strip. N. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21 raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with maximum height of 1/2 inch. 2.6 GLAZING A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. C. Glazing Sealants:As recommended by manufacturer. 2.7 MATERIALS A. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209. B. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221. Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 084113-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Structural Profiles:ASTM 6308/13308M. D. Steel Reinforcement: 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1008/A1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1011/A1011M. E. Steel Reinforcement Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods in accordance with recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces in accordance with applicable SSPC standard. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for spandrel glazing or metal panels. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project in accordance with Shop Drawings. Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 084113-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611,AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Do not install damaged components. C. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. D. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. E. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. F. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. G. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers. 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. H. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed, as specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants," to produce weathertight installation. I. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer. J. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING A. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCE DOORS A. Install entrance doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 084113-10 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware in accordance with entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 3.4 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE SETS A. Butt Hinges. B. Push & Pull Handles. C. Exit Device. D. Closer. E. Weatherstripping. F. Threshold. END OF SECTION 08 4113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 084113-11 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 08 44 13 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glazed aluminum curtain wall systems. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers. C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Energy Performance Certificates: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each glazed aluminum curtain wall. B. Product test reports. C. Source quality-control reports. D. Sample warranties. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 084413-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed,submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. C. Requirement for all exterior Storefront Frames, Doors, and Hardware: 1. Comply with 2015 International Building Code and with the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Requirements(120 mph wind velocity(ASD) (3 second gust) and an equivalent 155 mph wind velocity(LRFD), Exposure C, Risk Category III). Comply with the requirements of Section 0145 34-WINDSTORM CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS of the specifications. 2. Utilize only assemblies that have been tested and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of glazed aluminum curtain wall that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing assemblies. e. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design glazed aluminum curtain walls. Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 084413-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of glazed aluminum curtain walls representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture,fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting structure, including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. C. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units. C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads:As indicated on Drawings. D. Deflection of Framing Members Supporting Glass: At design wind load, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch,whichever is smaller. E. Structural:Test in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds. F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure:Test in accordance with ASTM E331 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested in accordance with a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind- load design pressure, but not less than 12 Ibf/sq.ft . G. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure:Test according to AAMA 501.1 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested at dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 12 Ibf/sq.ft Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 084413-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating assemblies or water appearing on assemblies' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters, or water that is drained to exterior. H. Energy Performance: Certified and labelled by manufacturer for energy performance as follows: 1. Air Leakage: a. Fixed Glazing and Framing Areas: Air leakage for the system of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 Ibf/sq, ft. when tested in accordance with ASTM E283. I. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Pass ASTM E1886 missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests in accordance with ASTM E1996 for Wind Zone 1 . 1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet of grade. 2. Small-Missile Test: For glazing located between 30 feet and above grade. J. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes: 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2.2 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL SYSTEMS A. Basis of D ui.nn II"urvoduct Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer 1600 Wall System 1 (2-1/2 inch by 7-1/16") Hurricane impact resistant framing or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Kawneer Company, Inc.;Arconic Corporation. 2. Oldcastle Building Envelope (OBE); CRH Americas, Inc. 3. YKK AP America Inc. B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction:Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Front. 4. Finish: Clear anodic finish. 5. System: stick system. 6. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 7. Steel Reinforcement: As required by manufacturer. C. Pressure Caps: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components that mechanically retain glazing. Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 084413-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Include snap-on aluminum trim that conceals fasteners. D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. 2.3 GLAZING A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets:ASTM C509 or ASTM C864. Manufacturer's standard. 1. Color: Black. C. Glazing Sealants:As recommended by manufacturer. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209. B. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221. C. Structural Profiles:ASTM 13308/13308M. D. Steel Reinforcement: 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1008/A1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1011/A1011M. E. Steel Reinforcement Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods in accordance with recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces in accordance with applicable SSPC standard. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 084413-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. C. Fabricate components to resist water penetration as follows: 1. Internal guttering system or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior. D. Curtain-Wall Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using manufacturer's standard assembly method. E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project in accordance with Shop Drawings. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611,AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Do not install damaged components. C. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. D. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. E. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. F. Where welding is required, weld components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding. G. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. H. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 084413-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• I. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior. J. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING A. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." END OF SECTION 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 084413-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 087100 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work under this section comprises of furnishing and installing hardware specified herein and noted on drawings for a complete and operational system, including any electrified hardware components,systems,controls and hardware for aluminum entrance doors.Any door shown on the drawing and not specifically referenced in the hardware sets shall be provided with identical hardware as specified on other similar openings and shall be included in the General Contractor's base bid. All fire rated door shall be provided with fire rated hardware as required by local code Authority as part of the General Contractor's base bid.The hardware supplier shall verify all cylinder types specified for locking devices supplied as part of the door system with the door manufacturer and/or door supplies. B. The General Contractor shall notify the Architect in writing of any discrepancies (five (5) days prior to bid date) that could and/or would result in hardware being supplied that is none functional, hardware specified and/or hardware that has not been specified that will result in any code violations and any door that is not covered in this specification. Failure of the General Contractor to address any such issue shall be considered acceptance of the hardware specified and all discrepancies shall be corrected at the General Contractor's expense and considered a part of their base bid. Change orders shall not be issued if deemed by the Architect and/or Owner to fall under and/or be covered as a part of the General Contractor base bid, due to failure to comply with this instruction notification. C. Items include but are not limited to the following: 1. Hinges 2. Flush Bolts 3. Exit Devices 4. Locksets and Cylinders 5. Push Plates- Pulls 6. Closers 7. Kick, Mop and Protection Plates 8. Stops, Wall Bumpers, Overhead Controls 9. Thresholds, Seals and Door Bottoms 10. Silencers 11. Miscellaneous Trim and Accessories Door Hardware 087100-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS, drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section. 1.3 RELATED WORK specified elsewhere that should be examined for its effect upon this section: A. Section 06 20 00- Finish Carpentry B. Section 08 1113—Steel Doors and Frames C. Section 08 14 16—Flush Wood Doors D. Sections within 08 3113—Access Doors E. Section within 08 4113—Aluminum Entrances, Storefront and Window Framing F. Sections within 08 80 00—Glass and Glazing G. Sections within 09 9100- Painting H. Division 26—Electrical I. Division 28—Access Control 1.4 REFERENCES SPECIFIED in this section subject to compliance as directed: A. NFPA-80-Standard for Fire Doors and Windows B. NFPA-101- Life Safety Code C. ADA-The Americans with Disabilities Act-Title III - Public Accommodations D. ANSI-A 117.1 - American National Standards Institute - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities E. ANSI-A 156.5 -American National Standards institute-Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products F. UFAS- Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards G. UL—Under-writer's Laboratories H. WHI -Warnock Hersey International,Testing Services I. State and Local Codes including Authority Having Jurisdiction J. Positive PressureUL10C K. IBC-2018—International Building Code Door Hardware 087100-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• L. NFPA-70—International Electrical Code 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. HARDWARE SCHEDULES 1. Submit copies of schedule in accordance with Division 1,General Requirements.Schedule to be in vertical format, listing each door opening, including: handing of opening, all hardware scheduled for opening or otherwise required to allow for proper function of door opening as intended, and finish of hardware. At doors with door closers or door controls include degree of door opening. Supply the schedules all Finish Hardware within two (2)weeks from date purchase order is received by the hardware supplier. B. Submit manufacturer's cut/catalog sheets on all hardware items and any required special mounting instructions with the hardware schedule. C. Certification of Compliance: 1. Submit any information necessary to indicate compliance to all of these specifications as required. 2. Submit a statement from the manufacturer that electronic hardware and systems being supplied comply with the operational descriptions exactly as specified. D. Submit any samples necessary as required by the Architect. E. Templates for finish hardware items to be sent to related door and frame suppliers within three (3) working days of receipt of approved hardware schedule. F. Doors and Frames used in positive pressure opening assemblies shall meet UL10C in areas where this specification includes Seals for smoke door. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hardware supplier to be a qualified, Factory Authorized, direct distributor of the products to be furnished. In addition, the supplier to have in their regular employment an AHC or AHC /CDC and/or a person of equivalent experience (minimum fifteen (15)years in the industry) who will be made available at reasonable times to consult with the Architect/Contractor and/or Owner regarding any matters affecting the finish hardware on this project. B. All hardware used in labeled fire or smoke rated openings to be listed for those types of openings and bear the identifying label or mark indicating UL. (Underwriter's Laboratories) approved for fire. Exit devices in non-labeled openings to be listed for panic. 1.7 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND PACKAGING A. Furnish all hardware with each unit clearly marked and numbered in accordance with the hardware schedule. Include door and item number for each. Door Hardware 087100-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Pack each item of hardware completes with all necessary parts and fasteners. C. Properly wrap and cushion each item to prevent scratches and dents during delivery and storage. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Any part of the finish hardware required by the frame or door manufacturers or other suppliers that is needed in order to produce doors or frames is to be sent to those suppliers in a timely manner, so as not to interrupt job progress. 1.9 WARRANTY A. All finish hardware shall be supplied (By the Hardware Supplier) with a Two- (2) year written warranty against defects in materials and workmanship, commencing with substantial completion of the project except as follows: 1. All Closers are to have a thirty- (30)year written warranty. 2. All Exit Devices are to have a three- (3)year written warranty. 3. All Locksets are to have a ten- (10)year written warranty. 4. All Continuous are to have a ten- (10)year written warranty. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FASTENERS A. Furnish with finish hardware all necessary screws, bolts and other fasteners of suitable size and type to anchor the hardware in position for a long life under hard use. B. Furnish fastenings where necessary with expansion shields, toggle bolts and other anchors designated by the Architect according to the material to which the hardware is to be applied and the recommendations of the hardware manufacturer.All closers and exit devices on labeled wood doors shall be through-bolted if required be the door manufacturer. All thresholds shall be fastened with wood screws and plastic anchors. Where specified in the hardware sets, security type fasteners of the type called for are to be supplied. C. Design of all fastenings shall harmonize with the hardware as to material and finish. D. All hardware shall be installed with the Manufacturers standard screws as provided. The use of any other type of fasteners shall not be permitted. The general contractor shall provide wood blocking in all stud walls specified and/or scheduled to receive wall stops, No Exception. Door Hardware 087100-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERN FOR PACKAGING A. Hardware shipped to the project jobsite shall be packaged in biodegradable packs such as paper or cardboard boxes and wrapping. 2.3 HINGES A. All hinges to be of one manufacturer as hereafter listed for continuity and consideration of warranty. Provide one of the following manufacturers Ives, Bommer or Stanley. B. Unless otherwise specified provide five-knuckle, heavy-duty, button tip, full mortise template type hinges with non-rising loose pins. Provide non-removable pins for out swinging doors at secured areas or as called for in this specification (Refer to 3.02 Hardware Sets). C. Exterior Five Knuckle Door Hinges shall be manufactured from solid stainless steel,aluminum or bronze base metal and provide all out-swinging doors with non-removable pins or security studs as called for in 3.02 Hardware Sets. D. Interior Five Knuckle Door Hinges shall be manufactured from a steel base metal. Furnish three (3) hinges up to 90 inches high and one (1) additional hinge for every 30 inches or fraction thereof. E. Provide all exterior&interior hinges in a size 4%"x 4%"for all 1%"thick doors up to and including 36 inches wide. Doors over 1%"through 2%"thick, use 5"x 5" hinges. Doors over 36 inches use 5" x 4%" unless otherwise noted in 3.02 Hardware Sets. F. Were exterior or interior door hinges are required to clear the trim and/or to permit the doors to swing 180 degrees furnish hinges of sufficient throw. G. Provide heavy weight hinges on all exterior or interior doors over 36 inches in width. H. At exterior or interior labeled door's ball-bearing type hinges shall be provided. For all doors equipped with closers provide ball-bearing-type hinges. I. Finishes at all Interior and Exterior door hinges shall be provide as specified in 3.02 Hardware Sets. 2.4 LOCK AND LOCK TRIM A. All of the locksets, latch sets, and trim to be of one manufacturer as hereafter listed for continuity of design and consideration of warranty. Locksets specified are Sargent 10 line with "L" lever as specified. B. Provide metal wrought box strike boxes and curved lip strikes with proper lip length to protect trim of the frame, but not to project more than 1/8 inch beyond frame trim or the inactive leaf of a pair of doors. C. Mechanical Locks shall meet ANSI Operational Grade 1, Series 4000 as specified. Door Hardware 087100-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Hand of lock is to be field reversible or non-handed. 2. All lever trim is to be through-bolted through the door. 2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Provide all Interior locks and Exit devices requiring cylinders with Sargent Cores keyed to a New Master Key System and complies with performance requirements of ANSI A156.5. All keys shall be of nickel silver material only.The hardware supplier shall meet with the General Contractor, the Architect and Owner at the project site to determine all permanent keying requirements. The hardware supplier shall provide One (1) Knox Box if required by the local Fire Marshall.The contractor shall, as required by the local Fire Marshall and Owner mount the Knox Box. B. Furnish all exterior and interior locks, cylinders and Exit devices with temporary keyed construction cores feature for the duration of construction. Provide ten (10) construction keys and two (2) construction Control keys total. C. Cores shall be factory keyed and factory maintained as directed by owner & the Architect. Provide four- (4) keys per cylinder and ten- (10) master keys per master used. Provide a bitting list for changes used and include additional bittings for future expansion as instructed by owner during the project keying meeting. Signature for all deliveries to owner shall be required. D. Factory stamp all keys "Do not duplicate" and with key symbol as directed by owner. 2.6 EXIT DEVICES A. All exit devices and trim, including electrified items, to be of one manufacturer as hereafter listed and in the hardware sets for continuity of design and consideration of warranty;electrified devices and trim to be the same series and design as mechanical devices and trim. B. Exit Devices to be "UL" listed for life safety. All exit devices for labeled doors shall have "UL" label for "Fire Exit Hardware". All devices mounted on labeled wood doors are to be through- bolted or per the manufacturer's listing requirements.All devices shall conform to NFPA 80 and NFPA 101 requirements. C. All exit devices to be of a heavy duty,chassis mounted design,with one-piece removable covers, eliminating necessity of removing the device from the door for standard maintenance and keying requirements. D. All trims to be through-bolted to the lock stile case. Lever design to be the same as specified with the lock sets. E. Exit Devices shall be the modern push rail design. All exit devices shall be mounted with sex bolts. F. All devices shall carry a three- (3) year warranty against manufacturing defects and workmanship. Exit devices shall be certified by an independent testing lab for a minimum of 1,000,000 cycles. Door Hardware 087100-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• G. Exit Devices for this project shall be the products of a single manufacturer for continuity of design and consideration of warranty. 2.7 SURFACE MOUNTED DOOR CLOSERS A. All closers for this project shall be the products of a single manufacturer for continuity of design and consideration of warranty. All door closers shall be mounted as to achieve the maximum degree of opening (trim permitting). B. All closers to be heavy duty, surface-mounted, fully hydraulic, rack and pinion action with high strength cast iron cylinder to provide control throughout the entire door opening cycle. C. Size all closers in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations at the factory. D. All closers to have adjustable spring power sizes 1 or 2 through 4 or 6 and separate tamper resistant, brass, non-critical regulating screw valves for closing speed, latching speed and back- check control as a standard feature unless specified otherwise. E. All closer covers to be rectangular,full covertype of non-ferrous,non-corrosive material painted to match closer. Provide closer covers only if provided as a standard part of the door closer package. F. Closers shall have heavy-duty arms.All closer arms shall be of sufficient length to accommodate the reveal depth and to insure proper installation.The hardware supplier shall provide any and all required brackets, spacers or filler plates as required by the manufacture for a proper and functional installation as part of their base bid. G. Supply appropriate arm assembly for each closer so that closer body and arm are mounted on non-public side of door opening and on the interior side of exterior openings, except where required otherwise in the hardware sets. 1. All parallel arm mounted closers to be factory indexed to insure proper installation. 2. Furnish heavy-duty cold forged parallel arms for all parallel arm mounted closers. H. Provide closers with special application and heavy-duty arms as specified in the hardware sets or as otherwise called for to insure a proper operating, long lasting opening. Drop plates and any additional brackets required for the proper installation of the door closer shall be included in the hardware supplier's base bid. I. Finish: Finish shall be compatible with other hardware. J. Provide and mount all door closers with sex bolts as provided by the manufacturer. 2.8 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Door stops are to be furnished for every door leaf. Every door is to have a floor, wall, or an overhead stop. Door Hardware 087100-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Place doorstops in such a position that they permit maximum door swing, but do not present a hazard of obstruction. Furnish floor strikes for floor holders of proper height to engage holders of doors. C. Where overhead stops and holders are specified, or otherwise required for proper door operation, they are to be heavy duty and of extruded brass, bronze or stainless steel with no plastic parts as specified. The General Contractor shall provide wood blocking in all stud walls specified and scheduled to receive wall stops. D. Finish: Same as other hardware where available. E. Acceptable Products 1. Floor and wall stops as listed in hardware sets. Equivalent products as manufactured by Ives, Rockwood, Glynn Johnson and Trimco are acceptable. 2.9 PUSH PLATES, DOOR PULLS, AND KICKPLATES A. All push plates, door pull, kick plates and other miscellaneous hardware as listed in hardware sets. Equivalent products as manufactured by Ives, Rockwood, Glynn Johnson and Trimco are acceptable. B. Kick plates to be 10 inches high and Mop plates to be 6 inches high, both by 2 inches or 1 inch less than door width (LDW)as specified.They are to be of 16 gauge thick stainless steel. For door with louvers or narrow bottom rails, kick plate height to be 1 inch less dimension shown from the bottom of the door to the bottom of the louver or glass. C. Where required armor plates, edge guards and other protective hardware shall be supplied in sizes as scheduled in the hardware sets. D. Finish: Same as other hardware where available. 2.10 FLUSH BOLTS AND COORDINATORS A. Provide Flush bolts with Dust Proof Strikes as indicated in the individual hardware sets by Ives, Rockwood,Glynn Johnson and Trimco are acceptable. Finish shall match the adjacent hardware. 2.11 THRESHOLDS AND SEALS A. Provide materials and finishes as listed in hardware sets. Equivalent product by National Guard Products, Zero, and Reese are acceptable. All thresholds must be in accordance with the requirements of the ADA and ANSI A117.1. B. Provide thresholds with wood screws and plastic anchors. Supply all necessary anchoring devices for weather strip and sound seal. Door Hardware 087100-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Seals shall comply with requirements of UL10C. All thresholds, door bottoms and weather strip inserts shall be a silicone-based product as specified in 3.02 Hardware Sets.Other materials used shall be rejected, unless originally specified. D. Seals shall comply with the requirements of the Wood Door Manufacturer's certification requirements. 2.12 FINISHES A. Finishes for all hardware are as required in this specification and the hardware sets. B. Special care is to be taken to make uniform the finish of all various manufactured items. 2.13 DOOR SILENCERS A. Provide door silencers at all openings without gasket. Provide two-(2)each at each pair of doors and three- (3) or four- (4) each for each single door(coordinate with the frame manufacturer). 2.14 KEY CABINET A. Provide a key cabinet Lund 1200 series for installation by the contractor as instructed by the Architect and owner. Key Cabinet shall be of such size as to hold 150% of the total number of keys supplied for this project. Verify with owner if key cabinets are in fact required. 2.15 PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS A. References to specific products are used to establish quality standards of utility and performance. Unless otherwise approved provide only the specified product. B. All other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper finish hardware installation, are to be selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Architect and Owner. C. Architect and Owner reserve the right to approve all the substitutions proposed for this specification.All requests for substitution to be made prior to bid in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements, and are to be in writing, hand delivered to the Architect. Two (2) copies of the manufacturer's brochures and a physical sample of each item in the appropriate design and finish shall accompany requests for substitution.. Door Hardware 087100-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION AND SERVICE ITEMS OF FINISH HARDWARE A. All finish hardware shall be installed by an experienced finish hardware installer with at least ten (10) years of experience after a pre-installation meeting between the contractor, hardware Manufacturers representative, the hardware supplier, hollow metal supplier and wood door supplier. The finish hardware installer shall be responsible for the proper installation and function of all doors and hardware. B. The hardware supplier's office and/or warehouse shall be located within a one hundred (100) mile radius of the project site as to better service the general contractor and Owner during this project. C. Check hardware against the reviewed hardware schedule upon delivery. Store the hardware in a dry and secure location to protect against loss and damage. D. Install finish hardware in accordance with approved hardware schedule and manufacturers' printed instructions. Pre-fit hardware before finish is applied to door; remove and reinstall after finish is complete and dry. Install and adjust hardware so that parts operate smoothly, close tightly, and do not rattle. E. Mortise and cutting to be done neatly, and evidence of cutting to be concealed in the finished work. Protect all Finish hardware from scratching or other damage. F. The hardware supplier, general contractor, hardware installer, representatives of the lock, exit device and closer manufacturers shall after one(1)months of Owner acceptance of the facilities, perform an onsite survey of the finish hardware installation. Any item of finish hardware found to be defective or out of adjustment shall be replaced or adjusted for the proper function and operation of the door assembly at the contractor's, supplier's and/or installer's expense. The hardware supplier shall provide a written report of any and all affected items to the Architect and Owner (No Exceptions). The scheduled inspection date for the onsite inspection and adjustment of finish hardware shall be provided to the Architect as a part of the general contractor and hardware supplies close-out documentation for this project. 3.2 HARDWARE SETS A. Hardware Set 1 1. Door# 13100A, B100B & B104 2. Each to receive: a. 7 EA Hinge, TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D, MK b. 1 EA Hinge,TA2314 CC6-18 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" US32D, MI( (Mounts middle hinge of active leaf) C. 1 EA Concealed Vert Rod Exit, 1155 56 AD8413 ETL US32D, SA d. 1 EA Concealed Vert Rod Exit,AD8410 ETL US32D, SA e. 2 EA Closer, 351 UO EN, SA Door Hardware 087100-10 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• f. 2 EA Drop Plate as needed, 351D EN, SA g. 1 EA Power Supply, AQD1, SU Power supplies can be combined to serve more than one device by addition of distribution board PDB h. Threshold/Weatherstrip furnished with door/frame i. Card Reader by others B. Hardware Set 2 1. Door#A101A&A101B 2. Each to receive: a. 1 EA Mortise Cylinder, 1141 US32D, SA (Verify type of cylinder required) C. Hardware Set 3 1. Door#A119,A122, & B110 2. Each to receive: a. 3 EA Hinge, TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D,MK b. 1 EA Exit Lock, 118225 LNL US26D, SA C. 1 EA Closer, TB 351 CPS EN, SA d. 1 EA Kick Plate, K1050 10" x 34" US32D BEV CSK, RO e. 1 EA Threshold, 2005AV x 36", PE f. 1 EA Gasketing, 303AV x 36" x 84", PE g. 1 EA Rain Guard,346C x 40", PE h. 1 EA Door Bottom, 2221AV x 36", PE D. Hardware Set 4 1. Door# B101 2. Each to receive: a. 3 EA Hinge, TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D,MK b. 1 EA Rim Exit Device, HC 118813 ETL US32D, SA C. 1 EA Closer, TB 351 CPS EN, SA d. 1 EA Kick Plate, K1050 10" x 34" US32D BEV CSK, RO e. 1 EA Threshold, 2005AV x 36", PE f. 1 EA Gasketing, 303AV x 36" x 84", PE g. 1 EA Rain Guard,346C x 40", PE h. 1 EA Door Bottom, 2221AV x 36", PE E. Hardware Set 5 1. Door#A100,A101E,A106C, &A106D 2. Each to receive: a. 5 EA Hinge, TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D,MK b. IEA Hinge, TA2314 CC6-18 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D, MK (Mounts on middle hinge of active leaf) C. 1 EA Mullion, HC980 PC, SA d. 1 EA Rim Exit Device,HC 1155 56 8813 ETL US32D, SA e. 1 EA Rim Exit Device,HC 8810 EO US32D,SA Door Hardware 087100-11 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• f. 2 EA Closer, TB 351 CPS EN, SA g. 2 EA Kick Plate, K1050 10" x 35" US32D BEV CSK, RO h. 1 EA Threshold, 2005AV x 72", PE i. 1 EA Gasketing, 303AV x 72" x 84", PE j. 1 EA Rain Guard,346C x 40", PE k. 1 EA Rain Guard,346C x 76", PE I. 2 EA Door Bottom, 2221AV x 36", PE M. 1 EA Power Supply, AQD1, SU Power supplies can be combined to serve more than one device by addition of distribution board PDB n. Card Reader by others F. Hardware Set 6 1. Door#A117 & B103 2. Each to receive: a. 6 EA Hinge, TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US32D,MK b. 2 EA Surface Bolt, 988 Bright Zinc, SA C. 1 EA Exit Lock, 118225 LNL US26D, SA d. 1 EA Threshold, 271A x 72", PE e. 1 EA Gasketing, 303AV x 72" x 84", PE f. 1 EA Rain Guard,346C x 76", PE g. 2 EA Door Bottom, 2221AV x 36", PE h. 1 EA Astragal, 355CV 84", PE G. Hardware Set 7 1. Door# B133A& B133B 2. Each to receive: a. 3 EA Hinge, TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D, MK b. 1 EA Storeroom Lock, 1128 10G04 LL US26D, SA C. 1 EA Electric Strike, 8000C-LBM 630, HS d. 1 EA Closer, 1431 UO EN, SA e. 1 EA Kick Plate, K1050 10" x 34" US32D BEV CSK, RO f. 1 EA Wall Stop, 409 US32D, RO g. 3 EA Silencer, 608, RO h. Card Reader by others i. Power provided thru access control system H. Hardware Set 8 1. Door#A110A, A110B, B116, & B128 2. Each to receive: a. 3 EA Hinge, TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D, MK b. 1 EA Classroom Lock,1128 10G37 LL, US26D,SA C. 1 EA Closer, 1431 UO EN, SA d. 1 EA Kick Plate, K1050 10" x 34", US32D BEV CSK RO e. 1 EA Wall Stop, 409, US32D, RO Door Hardware 087100-12 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• f. 3 EA Silencer, 608, RO I. Hardware Set 9 1. Door # A105A, A105B, A105C, A121, B107, B117, 8118, 8119, B121, B122, B123, B124, B125, B126, & B127 2. Each to receive: a. 3 EA Hinge, T2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2", US26D, MI< b. 1 EA Office Lock, 1128 10G05 LL, US26D,SA C. 1 EA Wall Stop, 409 US32D, RO d. 3 EA Silencer, 608, RO J. Hardware Set 10 1. Door#A108,A120, 8113, B208, & B213 2. Each to receive: a. 3 EA Hinge, T2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2", US26D, MK b. 1 EA Storeroom Lock, 1128 10G04 LL, US26D,SA C. 1 EA Wall Stop, 409, US32D, RO d. 3 EA Silencer, 608, RO K. Hardware Set 11 1. Door# B105, 8109, B114, B115, B120, B129, B130, 8207 & B212 2. Each to receive: a. 3 EA Hinge, T2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2", US26D, MK b. 1 EA Classroom Lock,1128 10G37 LL, US26D,SA C. 1 EA Wall Stop, 409, US32D, RO d. 3 EA Silencer, 608, RO L. Hardware Set 12 1. Door# B201A, B201B, B205A, B205B, & B206 2. Each to receive: a. 3 EA Hinge, TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2", US26D, MK b. 1 EA Rim Exit Device,118813 ETL, US32D, SA C. 1 EA Closer, 1431 UO EN, SA d. 1 EA Kick Plate, K1050 10" x 34", US32D BEV CSK, RO e. 1 EA Wall Stop, 409, US32D, RO f. 3 EA Silencer, 608, RO M. Hardware Set 13 1. Door#A111,A113,A114,A116, B209, & B210 2. Each to receive: a. 3 EA Hinge, TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2", US26D, MK b. 1 EA Deadbolt, 11487, US26D, SA C. 1 EA Pull Plate, 107x70C, US32D, RO d. 1 EA Push Plate, 70C-RKW, US32D, RO Door Hardware 087100-13 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• e. 1 EA Closer, 1431, UO EN, SA f. 1 EA Kick Plate, K1050 10" x 34", US32D BEV CSK, RO g. 1 EA Wall Stop, 409, US32D, RO h. 3 EA Silencer, 608, RO N. Hardware Set 14 1. Door# B211A& B211B 2. Each to receive: a. 6 EA Hinge, TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2", US26D, MK b. 1 EA Surface Vert Rod Exit, NB8710 EO, US32D,SA C. 1 EA Surface Vert Rod Exit, 11 NB8713 ETL, US32D, SA d. 2 EA Closer, 1431, UO EN, SA e. 2 EA Kick Plate, K1050 10" x 35", US32D BEV CSK, RO f. 2 EA Wall Stop, 409, US32D, RO g. 2 EA Silencer, 608, RO O. Hardware Set 15 1. Door#A102,A104, &A109 2. Each to receive: a. 6 EA Hinge, TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2", US26D, MK b. 2 EA Flush Bolt, 555, US26D, RO C. 1 EA Classroom Lock,1128 10G37 LL, US26D,SA d. 2 EA Kick Plate, K1050 10" x 35", US32D BEV CSK, RO e. 2 EA Wall Stop, 409, US32D, RO f. 2 EA Silencer, 608, RO P. Hardware Set 16 1. Door# B203 2. Each to receive: a. 6 EA Hinge, T2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2", US26D, MI< b. 2 EA Flush Bolt, 555, US26D, RO C. 1 EA Storeroom Lock, 1128 10G04 LL, US26D, SA d. 2 EA Wall Stop, 409, US32D, RO e. 2 EA Silencer, 608, RO Q. Hardware Set 17 1. Door#A107,A118, B131, & B132 2. Each to receive: a. 3 EA Hinge, T2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2", US26D, MK b. 1 EA Privacy Lock, 28 10U65 LL, US26D, SA C. 1 EA Wall Stop, 409, US32D, RO d. 3 EA Silencer, 608, RO R. Hardware Set 18 Door Hardware 087100-14 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Door#A101C,A101D, A106A,A106B,A106E, B106, B108, 8111 & B112 2. Each to receive: a. 6 EA Hinge, TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2", US26D, MK b. 2 EA Flush Bolt, 555, US26D, RO C. 1 EA Deadbolt, 11487, US26D, SA d. 2 EA Pull Plate, 107x70C, US32D, RO e. 2 EA Push Plate, 70C-RKW, US32D, RO f. 2 EA Closer, 1431, UO EN, SA g. 2 EA Kick Plate, K1050 10" x 35", US32D BEV CSK, RO h. 2 EA Wall Stop, 409, US32D, RO i. 2 EA Silencer, 608, RO S. Hardware Set 19 1. Door# B204 2. Each to receive: a. 1 EA Bifold Track Set, HF4/100A/8, PE T. Hardware Set 21 1. Door#A106F 2. Each to receive: a. 3 EA Hinge, T2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2", US26D, MK b. 1 EA Deadbolt, 11485, US26D, SA C. 1 EA Wall Stop, 409, US32D, RO d. 1 EA Gasketing, S88BL 18', PE U. Hardware Set 22 1. Door# B106 2. Each to receive: a. All hardware furnished with door END OF SECTION 08 7100 Door Hardware 087100-15 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 08 80 00 GLAZING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass products. 2. Laminated glass. 3. Insulating glass. 4. Spandrel glass. 5. Miscellaneous glazing materials. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances to achieve proper safety margins for glazing retention under each design load case, load case combination, and service condition. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square. C. Delegated Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For glass. B. Product test reports. C. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. Glazing 088000-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Sample warranties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage orto maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design glazing. B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined in accordance with the IBC and ASTM E1300: 1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. Glazing 088000-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Thermal Loads: Design glazing to resist thermal stress breakage induced by differential temperature conditions and limited air circulation within individual glass lites and insulated glazing units. C. Wind borne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Exterior glazing shall pass ASTM E1886 missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests in accordance with ASTM E1996 for Wind Zone 1 . 1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet of grade. 2. Small-Missile Test: For glazing located between 30 feet and 60 feet above grade. D. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II. E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 100 and based on most current non-beta version of LBL's WINDOW computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. xhxdeg F. 2. SHGC and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 200 and based on most current non-beta version of LBL's WINDOW computer program. 3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, in accordance with NFRC 300. F. Acoustic Performance where indicated on drawings: 1. Interior Glazing: 35 STC. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. NGA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual." 2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing." 4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMATM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. C. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other Glazing 088000-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F, and the fire-resistance rating in minutes. D. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the IGCC. E. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than thickness indicated. F. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat- strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat- strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass. 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide the same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout the Project. B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass,or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements"Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. C. Wind borne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes basic protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 1 when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on the Project and shall be installed in the same manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project. 1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet of grade. 2. Small Missile Test: For glazing located more than 30 feet above grade. 3. Large-Missile Test: For all glazing, regardless of height above grade. D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. 2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulation-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. Glazing 088000-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq.ft. x h x deg F. 5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance:Center-of-glazing values,according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C1036,Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3. B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated,Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3. C. Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass:ASTM C1048,Type I, Condition B, Quality-Q3. 2.5 LAMINATED GLASS A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer or cast-in-place and cured- transparent-resin interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated. B. Wind born e-Debris-Impact-Resistant Laminated Glass: Comply with requirements specified above for laminated glass except laminate glass with one of the following to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions: 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer reinforced with polyethylene terephthalate film to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified in accordance with ASTM E2190. 1. Sealing System: Dual seal,with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealants. 2. Perimeter Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction . 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both. Glazing 088000-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.7 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing - General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 for door assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies. B. Monolithic Ceramic Glazing: Clear, ceramic flat glass; 3/16 inch nominal thickness. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distributed by Technical Glass Products); Standard Firelite. b. Safti First; SuperLite C/P. C. Laminated Ceramic Glazing: Laminated glass made from 2 plies of clear, ceramic flat glass; 5/16 inch total nominal thickness; complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distributed by Technical Glass Products); FireLite Plus. b. Safti First; SuperLite X90. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers:Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. B. Setting Blocks: 1. Elastomeric with Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. 2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer. C. Spacers: 1. Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. 2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer. D. Edge Blocks: 1. Elastomeric with Shore A durometer hardness per manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Type recommended in writing by sealant or glass manufacturer. Glazing 088000-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance. C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and in accordance with requirements in referenced glazing publications. 3.2 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure- glazing stops,applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce Glazing 088000-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass.Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings. C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period. 3.4 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE A. Clear Glass Type GL-1:Annealed Fully tempered float glass. 1. Minimum Thickness: 3/8 inch . 2. Safety glazing label required. B. Clear Fire-Rated Glass Type GL-2: 45-minute, 60-minute, 90 minute and 120 minute fire-rated glazing; monolithic laminated ceramic glazing. 1. Provide rating as per door schedule. 2. Safety glazing label required. 3.5 LAMINATED GLASS SCHEDULE A. Clear Laminated Glass Type GL-3:Two plies of fully tempered float glass. 1. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 6 mm . 2. Interlayer Thickness: 0.060 inch . 3. Safety glazing required. B. Low-E-Coated, Laminated Vision Glass Type GL-4: Two plies of float glass with outer ply tinted and inner ply clear. 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 9/16 inch. 2. Tint Color: Gray. 3. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 6.0 mm . Glazing 088000-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 4. Interlayer Thickness: 0.060 inch minimum. 5. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface. 6. Safety glazing label required. 3.6 INSULATING SPANDREL GLASS SCHEDULE A. Ceramic-Coated, Insulating Spandrel Glass Type GL-5: 1. Coating Color:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range . 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1-5/16 inch. 3. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm . 4. Outdoor Lite: Clear heat-strengthened float glass. 5. Interspace Content: Argon. 6. Indoor Lite: Clear heat-strengthened float glass. 7. Coating Location: Fourth surface. 3.7 INSULATING-LAMINATED-GLASS SCHEDULE A. Low-E-Coated,Tinted, Insulating Laminated Glass Type GL-6: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: PPG Solarban 70 . 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1-5/16 inch . 3. Minimum Thickness of Outdoor Lite: 6 mm . 4. Outdoor Lite:Tinted heat-strengthened float glass. 5. Tint Color: Gray . 6. Interspace Content: Argon . 7. Indoor Lite: Clear laminated glass with two plies of heat-strengthened float glass. a. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 6 mm . b. Interlayer Thickness: 0.060 inch . 8. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface. 9. Safety glazing label required. END OF SECTION 08 80 00 Glazing 088000-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions. 2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non- load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated on Drawings, according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with AISI 5220 and ASTM C645, Section 10 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with AISI S220 and ASTM C645, Section 10 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated 2. Protective Coating: Comply with AISI S220; ASTM A653/A653M, G40; or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance. Galvannealed products are unacceptable. a. Coating demonstrates equivalent corrosion resistance with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Non-Structural Metal Framing 092216-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Studs and Track:AISI 5220 and ASTM C645, Section 10. 1. i.w. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ClarkDietrich. b. Marino\WARE. C. Phillips Manufacturing Co. 2. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness:As required by performance requirements for horizontal deflection, 25 Gauge minimum typical. Provide 20 Gauge minimum at all locations with ceramic tile finish. 3. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following: 1. Double-Track System:ASTM C645 top outer tracks, inside track with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer track sized to friction-fit over inner track. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0,048-inch- diameter wire. B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter. C. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated. D. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-steel thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. E. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0,0538-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645. Use either conventional steel studs and tracks or embossed, high-strength steel studs and tracks. a. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.033 inches or as indicated on drawings. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C645, 2/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0329 inch. 4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration:Asymmetrical. Non-Structural Metal Framing 092216-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard:ASTM C754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened. C. Install supplementary framing,and blocking to support fixtures,equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars,toilet accessories,furnishings, or similar construction. D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. Non-Structural Metal Framing 0922 16-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance- rated assembly indicated. 5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. E. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.3 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. Non-Structural Metal Framing 092216-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing 092216-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 09 24 00 CEMENT PLASTERING (STUCCO) PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal lath. 2. Base-coat cement plaster. 3. Cement plaster finish coats. 4. Accessories. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product data. B. Samples: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat and for each color and texture specified. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 2.2 METAL LATH A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C847, cold-rolled carbon-steel sheet with ASTM A653/A653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized-zinc coating. 1. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring, 3.4 Ib/sq.yd. 2.3 BASE-COAT CEMENT PLASTER A. General: Comply with ASTM C926 for applications indicated. 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 Ib of fiber/cu. yd. of cementitious materials. B. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork as follows: 1. Portland and Masonry Cement Mixes: Cement Plastering(Stucco) 092400-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. 2.4 CEMENT PLASTER FINISH COATS A. Ready-Mixed Finish-Coat Plaster: Mill-mixed portland cement, aggregates, coloring agents, and proprietary ingredients. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C1063, and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Metal Accessories: 1. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged style; with expanded flanges. 2. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized)steel; one-piece-type,folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 2.6 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Lime: ASTM C206,Type S; or ASTM C207,Type S. B. Sand Aggregate:ASTM C897. 1. Color for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: White. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in cement plaster. C. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: ASTM C1063. D. Wire:ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch diameter unless otherwise indicated. Cement Plastering(Stucco) 092400-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Prepare smooth, solid substrates for plaster according to ASTM C926. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL LATH A. Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C1063. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES A. Install according to ASTM C1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. B. Control Joints: Locate as indicated on Drawings. 3.4 APPLICATION OF BASE-COAT CEMENT PLASTER A. General: Comply with ASTM C926. B. Ceilings; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: For scratch and brown coats, for three-coat plasterwork and having 1/2-inch total thickness, as follows: 1. Portland and masonry cement mixes. 3.5 APPLICATION OF CEMENT PLASTER FINISH COATS A. Plaster Finish Coats:Apply to provide float finish to match Architect's sample. 3.6 REPAIR A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. END OF SECTION 09 24 00 Cement Plastering(Stucco) 092400-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. 3. Texture finishes. 1.2 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Prior to start of each type of gypsum board system, and at the Contractor's direction, meet at the site and review the installation procedures and coordination of the Work. Meeting shall include the Contractor,Architect, and major material manufacturer, as well as the Installer and other subcontractors whose Work must be coordinated with the gypsum board Work. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Gypsum wallboard. 2. Gypsum board,Type X. 3. Mold-resistant gypsum board. 4. Glass-mat,water-resistant backing board. S. Cementitious backer units. 6. Interior trim. 7. Joint treatment materials. 8. Sound-attenuation blankets. 9. Acoustical sealant. 10. Textured finishes. B. Samples: 1. Submit samples for each texture finish indicated on the same backing indicated for Work. 2. Submit full size samples in 12 inch long lengths for each exposed trim accessory indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer. Gypsum Board 092900-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. C. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for the following: a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. 2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completions. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. C. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Installation of gypsum board joint treatments shall not start until the space to receive gypsum board joint treatments is heated to maintain a continuous and uniform temperature of not less than 55 deg. F, from one week prior to beginning of joint treatment until joint treatment is completed and thoroughly dry. Ventilation, either natural or supplied by fans, circulators or air conditioning systems shall be provided to remove excess moisture during joint treatment. Temperature requirements may be waived only on recommendation of gypsum board manufacturer. Gypsum Board 092900-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E119 by an independent testing agency. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency. 1. STC-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations form GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual." 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. General: For fire-rated assemblies, provide materials, including accessories and fasteners produced by one manufacturer, or, when products of more than one manufacturer are used in a rated system,they shall be acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Wallboard:ASTM C1396/C1396M. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Gypsum. b. Certainteed; SAINT-GOBAIN. C. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. d. National Gypsum Company. e. USG Corporation. 2. Thickness at Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch. 3. Thickness at Interior Ceiling Surfaces: 1/2 inch. 4. Long Edges:Tapered. B. Gypsum Board,Type X:ASTM C1396/C1396M. Gypsum Board 092900-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed; SAINT-GOBAIN. C. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. d. National Gypsum Company. e. USG Corporation. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Long Edges:Tapered. 4. Location:Vertical surfaces,where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly, and where indicated on Drawings. C. Moisture and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M. With moisture- and mold- resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. mru unua: uu 'u" .:.Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed; SAINT-GOBAIN. C. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. d. National Gypsum Company. e. USG Corporation. 2. Core: 5/8 inch,Type X. 3. Long Edges:Tapered. 4. Mold Resistance:ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274. 2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C1178/C1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.: Dens-Shield Tile Backer. b. National Gypsum Company: GOLD BOND Brand E22p. C. USG Corporation: Securock Glass Mat Sheathing. 2. Core: 5/8 inch,Type X. 3. Mold Resistance:ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274. B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C1288 or ASTM C1325, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. qui �u �md;. uuu�xu � Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers IIS.... . offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. C-Cure. Gypsum Board 092900-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• b. CertainTeed; SAINT-GOBAIN. C. Custom Building Products. d. James Hardie Building Products, Inc. e. National Gypsum Company. f. USG Corporation. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Mold Resistance:ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274. C. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C1047;formed metal sheet steel zinc coated by hot-dipped process. 1. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig.1 designations in ASTM C 1047: a. Cornerbead, Impact-resistant (PR1): Pittcon SO-HSN-90, Fry DMCT-1250 or equivalent: Use at outside corners. b. Channel Reveal: Pittcon SWR Series, Fry DCS, or equivalent. C. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound: Use where indicated. e. Expansion (control)joint: One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot, with removeable strip covering slot opening. Use where indicated. f. Curved-Edge Cornerbead:With notched or flexible flanges; use at curved openings. 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C475/C475M and with the recommendations of both the manufacturers of the products and joint treatment materials for each application indicated. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints,fasteners,and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. Gypsum Board 092900-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Use setting-type taping and setting-type, sandable topping compounds. 2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. E. Joint Compound for Specialty Boards:As recommended by manufacturer. 2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Steel Drill Screws:ASTM C1002 unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Sound-Attenuation Blankets:ASTM C665,Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. 2. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Roxul AFB; Roxul Inc. b. Rockwool Acoustic Slabs; Rockwool Ltd. C. SAFB Blankets;Thermafiber LLC. D. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and opening in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. One of the following: 1. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; U.S. Gypsum. 2. AC-20 FTR; Pecora. 3. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." E. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive recommended by the manufacturer for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. Gypsum Board 092900-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.8 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. B. Textured finish as directed by Architect. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut,installed door frames and structural framing with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, and the gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, where standards conflict, the more stringent shall apply. Install specialty gypsum board as specified below except where manufacturer's instructions conflict;follow manufacturer's instructions for specialty performance board to maintain warranty coverage. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. 2. On partitions/walls,apply gypsum panels vertically(parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints or avoid them entirely. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. b. At high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. D. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply base layers in the same sequence.Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face layer joints one framing member, 16 inches Gypsum Board 092900-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• minimum, from parallel base joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire- resistance-rated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite side of partitions. E. Single-Layer Fastening Methods:Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. F. Multi-Layer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. G. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs,furring members,or base layer of gypsum board),comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. H. Tile Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Unit Application: ANSI A108.11 at showers, where substrates are indicated to receive Tile Units having a face dimension greater than 8 by 8 inches, and where otherwise indicated. 2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. I. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. J. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite side of partitions. K. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. L. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. M. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces(above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes and conduits. 2. Where partitions intersect open exterior and interior wall kickers, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by the wall kickers and other structural members; allow 1/4 to 3/8 inch wide joints to install sealant. 3. Where chase walls are shown, provide bracing between parallel rows of studs. Unless otherwise shown, provide gypsum board braces no less than 1/2 inch thick by 12 inches Gypsum Board 092900-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• wide and cut to width of chase. Locate at quarter points in wall height between each pair of parallel studs. Fasten with not less than 3 screws at each stud. N. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. O. STC-Rated Assemblies:Seal construction at perimeters,behind control and expansion joints,and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. P. Cut openings in gypsum board for electrical outlets, piping and other penetrations. Maintain close tolerances so that edges will be covered by plates and escutcheons.Cut both face and back paper. Do not install electrical outlets back-to-back on opposing sides of partitions. Q. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications. 2. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c. 3. Install fasteners not less than 3/8 inch from ends or edges of gypsum board sheets, spacing fasteners opposite each other on adjacent ends or edges. 4. Begin fastening from center of gypsum board and proceed toward edges and corners. 5. Apply pressure on surface of gypsum board adjacent to fasteners being driven to insure that gypsum board will be secured tightly to supporting members. a. Drive fastener with shank perpendicular to face of board. b. Drive screws with a power screwdriver as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. Set heads of screws slightly below surface of paper without cutting paper. 3.3 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: Fasten trim accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners. B. Install corner beads at external corners. C. Install interior trim accessories where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed. Provide interior trim accessories with face flange formed to receive joint compound. D. Install aluminum trim accessories where indicated. Gypsum Board 092900-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• E. Install control joints in locations indicated and where directed by the Architect for visual effect, or if not indicated or directed by the Architect, provide control joints in accordance with ASTM C 840 which is as follows: 1. Where a partition, wall, or ceiling traverses a construction joint (expansion, seismic or building control element) in the base building structure. 2. Where a wall or a partition runs in an uninterrupted straight plane exceeding 30 linear feet. 3. Control joints in interior ceilings with a perimeter relief shall be installed so that linear dimensions between control joints do not exceed 50 feet and total area between control joints does not exceed 2500 square feet. 4. Control joints in interior ceilings without perimeter relief shall be installed so that linear dimensions between controlsjoints do not exceed 30 feet and total area between control joints does not exceed 900 square feet. S. A control joint or intermediate blocking shall be installed where ceiling framing members change direction. 3.4 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints, flanges of interior trim and aluminum trim accessories, interior angles, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration and levels of gypsum board finish indicated. Produce surfaces free of tool marks and ridges ready for decoration of type indicated. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Do not use paper tape and joint compound. Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C840: 1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies. 2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges where panels are substrate for tile and where indicated. 3. Level 3:Typically, not used. 4. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. Gypsum Board 092900-10 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 5. Level 5: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire surface where gypsum board is indicated to receive wall coverings, semi-gloss and high gloss paints, and Italian plaster. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean floors of all gypsum board debris and leave broom clean. Excess material,scaffolding,tools and equipment are to be removed upon completion of the Work. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. END OF SECTION 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 092900-11 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 09 30 13 CERAMIC TILING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Porcelain tile. 2. Threshold transition strips. 3. Tile backing panels. 4. Waterproof membranes. 5. Crack isolation membranes. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: 1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation. 2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard-grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. Ceramic Tiling 093013-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.2 TILE PRODUCTS A. Porcelain Tile Types CT1, CT2, CT3, CT4, CTS, CT6, CT7, CTB, CTB1 and CTW1: Glazed. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Basis of Design: Milestone; a brand of Florim USA; "+ONE". 2. Face Size, Color, Glaze and Pattern: . a. CT1 Milestone; +ONE, 24 x 48 inches Rectified/ Matte, "Chalk" (FLOOR) b. CT2 Milestone; +ONE, 24 x 48 inches Rectified/ Matte, "Ash" (FLOOR) C. CT3 Milestone; +ONE, 24 x 48 inches Rectified/ Matte, "Greige" (FLOOR) d. CT4 Milestone; +ONE, 8 x 48 inches Rectified/ Matte, "Chalk" (FLOOR) e. CT5 Milestone; +ONE, 8 x 48 inches Rectified/ Matte, "Ash" (FLOOR) f. CT6 Milestone; +ONE, 8 x 48 inches Rectified/ Matte, "Greige" (FLOOR) g. CT7 Milestone; +ONE, 12 x 24 inches Rectified/ Matte, "Greige" (FLOOR) h. CT8 Milestone; +ONE, Mosaic/ Matte, "Greige" (FLOOR) i. CTB1 Milestone; +ONE, 6 x 12 inches, Ceramic Tile Cove Base / Matte, "Greige" (WALL BASE) j. CTW1 Milestone; +ONE, 12 x 24 inches Rectified/Matte, "Greige" with 3 x 24-inch Matte Bullnose @ 5'-3" AFF (WALL TILE) 3. Thickness: 10 mm. 4. Face: Plain with square edges. 5. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 6. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Accessories: Provide vitreous china accessories of type and size indicated, suitable for installing by same method as used for adjoining wall tile. 1. One soap holder for each shower and tub indicated. 2. Color and Finish: Match adjoining glazed wall tile. 2.3 THRESHOLD TRANSITION STRIPS A. General: Furnish and install transition strips as required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. B. Transition Strips: Satin anodized aluminum. 1. Basis of Design: Schluter Systems Transition Strips for Floors. 2. Finish: as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of colors and textures. 3. Profiles: Same-height transition or sloped transition strips as required by adjacent floor surfaces. a. Profile type as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full selection of profile types. C. Comply with the Texas Accessibility Standards. Ceramic Tiling 093013-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C1325,Type A. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2.5 WATERPROOF MEMBRANES A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Waterproof Membrane, Fluid-Applied: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer. 2.6 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANES A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Crack Isolation Membrane, Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and fabric reinforcement. 2.7 SETTING MATERIALS A. Water-Cleanable,Tile-Setting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3. 1. VI uI'll U ua; u I N S. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ARDEX Americas. b. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc. C. Bostik;Arkema. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. I. Parex USA, Inc. j. Sakrete; CRH Americas, Oldcastle APG. k. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. I. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 2.8 GROUT MATERIALS A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3,with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less. Ceramic Tiling 093013-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. flnuiuGu ;�a;lu�u a° Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ARDEX Americas. b. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc. C. Bostik;Arkema. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Parex USA, Inc. j. Sakrete; CRH Americas, Oldcastle APG. k. Sika Corporation. I. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. M. Summitville Tiles, Inc. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproof membrane by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from Ceramic Tiling 093013-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. C. Tile floors consisting of rib-backed tiles. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces.Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim,finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting bed thickness so that tiles are flush. F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern as directed by Architect unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Porcelain Tile: minimum recommended by Manufacturer. H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. Ceramic Tiling 093013-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• I. Threshold transition strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated. 1. Sloped transition strips shall comply with the Texas Accessibility Standards. J. Floor Sealer: Apply floor sealer to grout joints in tile floors according to floor-sealer manufacturer's written instructions.As soon as floor sealer has penetrated groutjoints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. K. Install tile backing panels and treatjoints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use modified dry-set mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions. L. Install waterproof membrane to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate. M. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate. 3.4 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. TCNA F131: Water-cleanable,tile-setting epoxy; epoxy grout. a. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. B. Interior Wall Installations, Masonry or Concrete: 1. TCNA W202:Thinset mortar. a. Thinset Mortar: Standard dry-set Modified dry-set Improved modified dry-set mortar. b. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. C. Interior Wall Installations, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring: 1. TCNA W242: Organic adhesive on gypsum board. a. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. 2. TCNA W244C or TCNA W244F: Thinset mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber- cement backer board over vapor-retarder membrane. a. Thinset Mortar: Standard dry-set Modified dry-set Improved modified dry-set mortar. b. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. 3. TCNA W245 or TCNA W248:Thinset mortar on glass-mat,water-resistant gypsum backer board. a. Thinset Mortar: Standard dry-set Modified dry-set Improved modified dry-set mortar. b. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. Ceramic Tiling 093013-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Shower Receptor and Wall Installations: 1. TCNA B415: Water-cleanable, tile-setting epoxy on waterproof membrane over cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board. a. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. 2. TCNA 8420: Thinset mortar on waterproof membrane over coated glass-mat, water- resistant gypsum backer board. a. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set Improved modified dry-set mortar. b. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout. END OF SECTION 09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling 093013-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. B. Research reports. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 3. ASTM E1264 Classification:Type IV, Form2, Pattern E; Fire Class A. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS-SAT-1 A. ui�iuln�a,iuuu4 a°ry.w. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong Ceiling&Wall Solutions; Canyon, Item No. 1490. 2. CertainTeed; SAINT-GOBAIN. Acoustical Panel Ceilings 095113-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3. USG Corporation. B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Manufacturer's standard wet-formed mineral fiber panels according to ASTM E 1264. C. Classification: Smooth Texture, acoustically transparent membrane with factory-applied latex paint. D. Color: White. E. Light Reflectance (LR): 0.80. F. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 35. G. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): 0.60. H. Edge/Joint Detail: Square. I. Thickness: 15/16 inch. J. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. I )ruLulZ)Ct �ueu Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong Ceiling&Wall Solutions. 2. CertainTeed; SAINT-GOBAIN. 3. USG Corporation. 4. Rockfon North America B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M. C. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web,Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized, G30 coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch-wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: butt-edge type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white. Acoustical Panel Ceilings 095113-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless otherwise indicated. B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. 3. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. END OF SECTION 09 5113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 095113-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Thermoplastic-rubber base. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 2.2 VINYL BASE VWB1,VWB2, VWB3 A. pn � " cfl II�e s4nin. II°u r 6u t. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Johnsonite; a Tarkett company; Type TV - Vinyl, Thermoplastic or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Roppe Corporation; Roppe Holding Company. 2. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company. B. Product Standard:ASTM F 1861,Type TV(vinyl,thermoplastic). 1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous). 2. Style and Location: a. Style A, Straight: Provide in areas with carpet. b. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient floor coverings. C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. D. Height: 1. Vinyl Wall Base VWB1: 4" 2. Vinyl Wall Base VWB2: 4" 3. Vinyl Wall Base VWB3: 6" Resilient Base and Accessories 096513-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Preformed. G. Inside Corners:Job formed or preformed. H. Colors and Patterns: 1. Vinyl Wall Base VWB1: 40 Black 2. Vinyl Wall Base VWB2: 23 Vapor Grey 3. Vinyl Wall Base VWB3: 28 Medium Grey 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed. D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. Resilient Base and Accessories 096513-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. G. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints. 3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories 0965 13-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 09 65 19 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid vinyl floor tile. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and pattern specified. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient floor tile, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 2.2 SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE LVT1, LVT2, LVT3 R'p " :ct"' Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Tarkett Event Collection Resilient Luxury Vinyl Tile Flooring or comparable product approved by the Architect. B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1700. 1. Class: Class III, Printed Film Vinyl Tile. Resilient Tile Flooring 096519-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Type: B, Embossed Surface. C. Thickness: 0.120 inch . D. Sizes, Colors and Patterns: 1. LVT1-Striate, Roma, ESA 2107 RK, 18 by 36 inches, Herringbone Installation. 2. LVT2- Urban Stone, 2101 Cement, 18 by 18 inches, Random Installation. 3. LVT3-Striate, Salerno, ESA 2108 RK, 18 by 18 inches, Monolithic Installation. E. Test Data: 1. Wear layer: 0.030 inches (0.76 mm) 2. Size, Squareness, ASTM F2055: Passes 3. Flexibility,ASTM F137: Passes 4. Chemical Resistance,ASTM E925: Passes 5. Static Load Limit, ASTM F970: 250 psi, <=0.005 inches 6. Residual Indentation, ASTM F1914: Passes 7. Static Coefficient of Friction (SCOF), ASTM D2047: >=0.5 SCOF 8. Dimensional Stability, ASTM F2199: Passes 9. Flammability,ASTM E648 Critical Radiant Flux: Class 1 >=0.45 W/cm2 10. Smoke Density,ASTM E662: <=450 11. Limited Commercial Warranty: 20 years 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents. Resilient Tile Flooring 096519-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3. Test concrete substrate for moisture as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Perform a pH test for alkalinity on concrete floor prior to installation with results conforming to manufacturer's requirements. If the test results are not within the acceptable range, then installation must not proceed until the problem is corrected. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install floor tiles until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile. 3.2 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles in pattern as directed by Architect . C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated by Architect. D. Scribe,cut,and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles.Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. Resilient Tile Flooring 0965 19-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• H. Adhere floor tiles to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. I. Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces. J. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. K. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. END OF SECTION 09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring 096519-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 09 65 66 RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rubber sheet flooring. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 65 13 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for wall base and accessories installed with resilient athletic flooring. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details and locations of the following: 1. Border tiles. 2. Floor patterns. 3. Layout, colors, widths, and dimensions of accent stripes. 4. Seam locations for sheet flooring. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each type, color, and pattern specified, 6-inch- square in size and of the same thickness indicated for the Work. 1. Seam Samples: For each vinyl sheet flooring color and pattern required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch Sample applied to a rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of resilient athletic flooring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For sheet vinyl flooring Installer. Resilient Athletic Flooring 096566-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For resilient athletic flooring to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storing. B. Store materials as directed by manufacturer to prevent deterioration. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Adhesively Applied Products: 1. Maintain temperatures during installation within range recommended in writing by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F or more than 75 deg F, in spaces to receive flooring 72 hours before installation, during installation, and 72 hours after installation unless longer period is recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2. After post-installation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended in writing by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. 3. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation. 4. Close spaces to traffic for 72 hours after flooring installation unless manufacturer recommends longer period in writing. B. Install flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 RUBBER SHEET FLOORING RGF1, RGF2, RGF3, RGF4 A. Ba,;Js ��i:: des in II)iro �u t. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide U.S. Rubber Survivor Sportfloor or comparable product approved by the Architect. B. Description: Rubber athletic flooring provided as rolled goods for adhered installation. C. Material: Recycled-rubber compound. D. Roll Size: Not less than 48 inches wide by longest length that is practical to minimize splicing during installation. E. Thickness: 3/4 inch (18 mm) F. Density:ASTM E96; 68 lbs/cubic feet G. Tensile Strength:ASTM D412; 265 psi Resilient Athletic Flooring 096566-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• H. Tear Resistance: ASTM D413; Average Elongation at break 1.52 I. Hardness: D2240; Shore A 65 +/-5 J. Slip Resistance: D C1028; Friction Coefficient .084-.090 K. Abrasion: D4060; 2,000 cycles taber abraser 1kg, 0.329g-0.35g loss L. Flammability: ASTM E648; Critical Radiant Flux<0.10W/cm2 M. Chemicals: N/A; Resistant to most acids and chlorine N. Volatile Organic Compounds: CDPH v1.2; <.05mg/m3 O. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. P. Border: Interlocking, beveled-edge tiles, of same material as sheet flooring; with bevels that transition from thickness of sheet flooring to surface below it; with straight outside edges; for use where flooring corners and edges do not abut vertical surfaces. 1. Border Color and Accent Stripes: as indicated on Drawings. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation approved by flooring manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended in writing by manufacturer for substrate and conditions indicated. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Resilient Athletic Flooring 096566-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of flooring. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft. and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 Ib of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. E. Move flooring and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 72 hours in advance of installation unless manufacturer recommends a longer period in writing. 1. Do not install flooring until it is the same temperature as space where it is to be installed. F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by flooring immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 FLOORING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Scribe, cut, and fit flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, equipment anchors, floor outlets, and other interruptions of floor surface. C. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings unless otherwise indicated. D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating subfloor markings on flooring. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. 3.4 SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION A. Unroll sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting. Resilient Athletic Flooring 096566-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Lay out sheet flooring as follows: 1. Maintain uniformity of flooring direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates. 3. Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams. 4. Locate seams and accent stripes according to approved Shop Drawings. C. Adhere products to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to comply with adhesive and flooring manufacturers' written instructions, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. 1. Provide completed installation without open cracks,voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing flooring installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from flooring surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum flooring thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop flooring to remove marks and soil after time period recommended in writing by manufacturer. B. Protect flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over flooring. Protect flooring with plywood or hardboard panels to prevent damage from storing or moving objects over flooring. END OF SECTION 09 65 66 Resilient Athletic Flooring 096566-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 09 67 23 RESINOUS FLOORING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes one resinous flooring system, one with epoxy body. Nominal 1/8th inch Resinous Floor which includes a two-component epoxy primer,followed by a three-component solvent free epoxy undercoat that includes a 25mil broadcast quartz to increase bond strength, followed by brightly colored flake broadcast and a 2 component UV resistant sealer. 1. Application Method: Squeegee, screed, and broadcast. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's technical data, application instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component required. B. Samples for Verification: For each resinous flooring system required, 6 inches(150 mm) square, applied to a rigid backing by Installer for this Project. C. Product Schedule: Use resinous flooring designations indicated in Part 2 and room designations indicated on Drawings in product schedule. D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements. E. Maintenance Data: For resinous flooring to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. No request for substitution shall be considered that would change the generic type of floor system specified (i.e. epoxy based flake broadcast with mortar coat). Equivalent materials of other manufactures may be substituted only on approval of Architect or Engineer. Request for substitution will only be considered only if submitted 10 days prior to bid date and in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures." Request will be subject to specification requirements described in this section. Epoxy Resinous Flooring 096723-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer (applicator) who is experienced in applying resinous flooring systems similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance, and who is acceptable to resinous flooring manufacturer. 1. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer as qualified to apply resinous flooring systems indicated. 2. Contractor shall have completed at least 10 projects of similar size and complexity. C. Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins, hardening agents,grouting coats,and topcoats,through one source from a single manufacturer, with not less than ten years of successful experience in manufacturing and installing principal materials described in this section. Provide secondary materials, including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials, of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. D. Manufacturer Field Technical Service Representatives: Resinous flooring manufacture shall retain the services of Field Technical Service Representatives who are trained specifically on installing the system to be used on the project. 1. Field Technical Services Representatives shall be employed by the system manufacture to assist in the quality assurance and quality control process of the installation and shall be available to perform field problem solving issues with the installer. E. Mockups: Apply mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Apply full-thickness mockups on 48-inch- (1200-mm-) square floor area selected by Architect. a. Include 48-inch (1200-mm) length of integral cove base. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. F. Pre-installation Conference: 1. General contractor shall arrange a meeting not less than thirty days prior to starting work. 2. Attendance: a. General Contractor b. Architect/Owner's Representative. C. Manufacturer/Installer's Representative. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other components. Epoxy Resinous Flooring 096723-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Store materials to prevent deterioration from moisture, heat, cold, direct sunlight, or other detrimental effects. C. All materials used shall be factory pre-weighed and pre-packaged in single, easy to manage batches to eliminate on site mixing errors. No on site weighing or volumetric measurements allowed. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting resinous flooring application. 1. Maintain material and substrate temperature between 65 and 85 deg F(18 and 30 deg C) during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours after application. B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring application. C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours after application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period. D. Concrete substrate shall be properly cured for a minimum of 30 days. A vapor barrier must be present for concrete subfloors on or below grade. Otherwise, an osmotic pressure resistant grout must be installed prior to the resinous flooring 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall furnish a single, written warranty covering both material and workmanship for a period of (1) full years from date of installation or provide a joint and several warranty signed on a single document by material manufacturer and applicator jointly and severally warranting the materials and workmanship for a period of(1)full year from date of installation. A sample warranty letter must be included with bid package or bid may be disqualified. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 RESINOUS FLOORING A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements. 1. Confirm inclusion of 25mil body coat, and broadcast quartz into primer increasing bond strength. Non-Double broadcast systems will not be accepted. B. Basis of Design Product:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product listed below or comparable product approved by Architect: Epoxy Resinous Flooring 096723-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Stonhard, Inc.; Stontec ERF°. Sean Cronin 281 253 5125 cronin@stonhard.com C. System Characteristics: Nominal 1/8th inch Resinous Floor which includes a two-component epoxy primer, followed by a three-component solvent free epoxy undercoat that includes a 25mil broadcast quartz to increase bond strength, followed by brightly colored flake broadcast and a 2 component UV resistant sealer. 1. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full line of colors and patterns 2. Wearing Surface: Standard or medium texture 3. Integral Cove Base: Refer to drawings. 4. Overall System Thickness: 1/8th inch D. System Components: Manufacturer's standard components that are compatible with each other and as follows: 1. Primer: a. Material Basis: Stonhard Standard Primer b. Resin: Epoxy C. Formulation Description: (2)two component 100 percent solids. d. Application Method: Squeegee and roller. e. Number of Coats: (1) one. f. Aggregates: Broadcast quartz into wet primer coat. 2. Body Coat(s): a. Material Basis: Stonshield Undercoat. b. Resin: Epoxy. C. Formulation Description: (3)three component solvent free epoxy. d. Application Method: Notched squeegee. 1) Thickness of Coats: 25-30 mils with standard primer coat 2) Number of Coats: (1) One. 3. Broadcast: a. Material Basis: Stontec Flakes b. Formulation Description: Decorative flake (1/16" or%) C. Type:Tweed (chips to be mixed in Mfg. facility) d. Finish: Broadcast to rejection. e. Number of Coats: one. 4. Topcoat: a. Material Basis: Stonshield Sealer b. Resin: Epoxy. C. Formulation Description: (2) component, UV stable, solvent free epoxy. d. Type: Clear. e. Finish: Gloss. (see finish schedule for texture options) f. Number of Coats: one. E. Components listed above are the basis of design intent;all bids will be compared to this standard including resin chemistry, color, wearing surface, thickness, and installation procedures, including number of coats. Contractor shall be required to comply with all the requirements of Epoxy Resinous Flooring 096723-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• the Specifications and all of the components required by the Specifications,whether or not such products are specifically listed above. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Patching and Fill Material: Resinous product of or approved by resinous flooring manufacturer and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. No Single component or cementitious materials. B. Joint Sealant: Type recommended or produced by resinous flooring manufacturer for type of service and joint condition indicated. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. General: Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. Provide clean, dry, and neutral Ph substrate for resinous flooring application. B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with resinous flooring. 1. Mechanically prepare substrates as follows: a. Mechanically prepare with the use of Diamond grinding equipment to provide surface sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with resinous flooring. Or, b. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup. C. Comply with ASTM C 811 requirements unless manufacturer's written instructions are more stringent. 2. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written recommendations. 3. Verify that concrete substrates are dry. a. Perform in situ probe test, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with application only after substrates do not exceed a maximum potential equilibrium relative humidity of 80 percent. b. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with application only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 Ib. of water/1000 sq. ft. of slab in 24 hours. C. Perform additional moisture tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing. Epoxy Resinous Flooring 096723-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 4. Verify that concrete substrates have neutral Ph and that resinous flooring will adhere to them. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing. C. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions. D. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Allowances should be included for Stonflex MP7 joint fill material. 3.2 APPLICATION A. General: Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated. 1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous flooring system to substrate, and optimum intercoat adhesion. 2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. 3. At substrate expansion and isolation joints, provide joint in resinous flooring to comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written recommendations. a. Apply joint sealant to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Mix and apply primer over properly prepared substrate with strict adherence to manufacturer's installation procedures and coverage rates C. Broadcast: Immediately broadcast quartz silica aggregate into the primer using manufacturer's specially designed spray caster. Strict adherence to manufacturer's installation procedures and coverage rates is imperative. D. Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces before applying flooring. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions and details including those for taping, mixing, priming,troweling, sanding, and top coating of cove base. Round internal and external corners. Refer to detail drawings. E. Body coat: Mix base material according to manufacturer's recommended procedures. Uniformly spread mixed material over previously primed substrate using manufacturer's installation tool. Roll material with strict adherence to manufacturer's installation procedures and coverage rates. F. Broadcast: Immediately broadcast decorative flakes into the body coat. Strict adherence to manufacturer's installation procedures and coverage rates is imperative. Epoxy Resinous Flooring 096723-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• G. First Sealer: Remove excess un-bonded flakes by lightly brushing and vacuuming the floor surface. Mix and apply sealer with strict adherence to manufacturer's installation procedures. H. Second sealer: Lightly sand first sealer coat. Mix and apply second sealer coat with strict adherence to manufacturer's installation procedures. 3.3 TERMINATIONS A. Chase edges to"lock"the coating system into the concrete substrate along lines of termination. B. Penetration Treatment: Lap and seal coating onto the perimeter of the penetrating item by bridging over compatible elastomer at the interface to compensate for possible movement. C. Trenches: Continue coating system into trenches to maintain monolithic protection. Treat cold joints to assure bridging of potential cracks. D. Treat floor drains by chasing the coating to lock in place at point of termination. 3.4 JOINTS AND CRACKS A. Treat control joints to bridge potential cracks and to maintain monolithic protection. B. Treat cold joints and construction joints to bridge potential cracks and to maintain monolithic protection on horizontal and vertical surfaces as well as horizontal and vertical interfaces. C. Discontinue floor coating system at vertical and horizontal contraction and expansion joints by installing backer rod and compatible sealant after coating installation is completed. Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer for traffic conditions and chemical exposures to be encountered. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Material Sampling: Owner may at any time and any numbers of times during resinous flooring application require material samples for testing for compliance with requirements. 1. Owner will engage an independent testing agency to take samples of materials being used. Material samples will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will test samples for compliance with requirements, using applicable referenced testing procedures or, if not referenced, using testing procedures listed in manufacturer's product data. 3. If test results show applied materials do not comply with specified requirements, pay for testing, remove noncomplying materials, prepare surfaces coated with unacceptable materials, and reapply flooring materials to comply with requirements. Epoxy Resinous Flooring 096723-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.6 CLEANING, PROTECTING,AND CURING A. Cure resinous flooring materials in compliance with manufacturer's directions, taking care to prevent contamination during stages of application and prior to completion of curing process. Close area of application for a minimum of 18 hours. B. Protect resinous flooring materials from damage and wear during construction operation. Where temporary covering is required for this purpose, comply with manufacturer's recommendations for protective materials and method of application. General Contractor is responsible for protection and cleaning of surfaces after final coats. C. Cleaning: Remove temporary covering and clean resinous flooring just prior to final inspection. Use cleaning materials and procedures recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer END OF SECTION 09 67 23 Epoxy Resinous Flooring 096723-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Modular carpet tile. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture required. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. B. Sample warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILES: CPT1 &CPT2 A. Vaiu:ul ua;Auurei „ Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Mohawk Group, Inc. B. Color and Pattern Tile Carpeting 096813-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. CPT1: Mohawk Group, Optic Reset Collection, GT448 Shifted Focus Tile, 979 Silhouette, 12 x 36 inches 2. CPT2: Mohawk Group, Optic Reset Collection, GT448 Shifted Focus Tile, 959 Moonlit, 12 x 36 inches C. Fiber Content: 100% Nylon. D. Fiber Type: Duracolor Tricor Premium Nylon. E. Pile Characteristic: textured patterned multi-colored loop. F. Density: 6,056. G. Pile Thickness: 0.254 inches for finished carpet tile. H. Stitches: 12.4 per inch. I. Gage: 1/12 (47 rows per 10 cm). J. Tufted Weight: 18 oz/yd2 for finished carpet tile. K. Primary Backing/Backcoating: Manufacturer's standard composite materials. L. Size: 12 by 36 inches. M. Applied Treatments: 1. Soil-Resistance Treatment: EcoSentry Soil Treatment. N. Performance Characteristics: 1. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV according to AATCC 134. 2. Flammability: ASTM E 648 Class I (Glue Down) 3. Smoke Density: ASTM E 662 Less than 450 4. Foot Traffic Recommendation TARR: Heavy 5. GSA Stain Release Rating: Pass O. Warranties: Lifetime Limited Carpet Tile Warranty, Lifetime Limited Duracolor Stain Warranty, Lifetime Static Warranty 2.2 CARPET TILES: CPT3 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Mohawk Group, Inc. B. Color and Pattern 1. CPT3: Mohawk Group, GT160 ColorBeat Tile, 575 Indigo Batik, 24 by 24 inches Tile Carpeting 096813-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Fiber Content: 100% Nylon. D. Fiber Type: Duracolor Tricor Premium Nylon. E. Pile Characteristic: textured patterned multi-colored solid loop. F. Density: 9,103. G. Pile Thickness: 0.087 inches for finished carpet tile. H. Stitches: 13.2 per inch. I. Gage: 1/10 (39.37 rows per 10 cm). J. Tufted Weight: 22 oz/yd2 for finished carpet tile. K. Primary Backing/Backcoating: Manufacturer's standard composite materials. L. Size: 24 by 24 inches. M. Applied Treatments: 1. Soil-Resistance Treatment: EcoSentry Soil Treatment. N. Performance Characteristics: 1. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV according to AATCC 134. 2. Flammability: ASTM E 648 Class I (Glue Down) 3. Smoke Density: ASTM E 662 Less than 450 4. Foot Traffic Recommendation TARR: Severe 5. GSA Stain Release Rating: Pass O. Warranties: Lifetime Limited Carpet Tile Warranty, Lifetime Limited Duracolor Stain Warranty, Lifetime Static Warranty 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile, and are recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. Tile Carpeting 096813-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Concrete Slabs: 1. Test concrete substrate for moisture in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104 and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers. D. Metal Substrates: Clean grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if recommended in writing by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces,to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive. E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104, Section 10, "Carpet Tile," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method:As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. C. Maintain dye-lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Maintain pile-direction patterns indicated on Drawings or as directed by Architect. E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. Tile Carpeting 096813-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. H. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting 096813-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 09 69 00 ACCESS FLOORING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interchangeable access-flooring panels 2. Understructure 3. Labor, material, equipment and installation as per specifications and/or shown on the Architect's drawings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 03 30 00—Concrete work and concrete floor sealer 2. Concrete sealer and pedestal adhesive must be chemically compatible with each other. 3. Section 09 68 00—Carpet and carpet tile work 4. Section 26 05 00—Electrical connections and grounding 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide access flooring system consisting of moveable assemblies composed of modular floor panels supported on pedestals forming accessible under floor cavities to accommodate electrical services which comply with performance requirements specified. Raised floor panels must be interchangeable with each other except where cut for special conditions. B. Where applicable load testing shall be performed according to"Recommended Test Procedures for Access Flooring" as established by the Ceiling and Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA). These procedures shall be used as a guideline when presenting load performance product information. C. 1500 Lb. Raised Access Floor System: 1. Concentrated Load: 1500 Ib. on one square inch (25mm) load at any location with a top surface deflection not to exceed 0.10" (2.5mm) and a permanent set not to exceed .010" (0.25mm). 2. Uniform Load: With a top surface deflection not exceeding 0.040" (1mm), TecCrete can hold 700 pounds per square foot evenly distributed over the surface of the panel with a permanent set not exceeding 0.010" (0.25mm). Access Flooring 096900-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3. Ultimate Load: Panel shall be designed to withstand load of 2500 lbs. applied over one inch at the weakest point on a panel. 4. Rolling Load: Panels shall withstand a rolling load of 1500 lbs. applied through a 3" diameter (76mm) x 1-13/16" (46mm) wide caster for 10 cycles over the same path with less than 0.040" top surface permanent set. Panels shall withstand a rolling load of 1250 Ib. applied through a hard rubber-surfaced wheel 6" (254mm) diameter x 4" (102mm) wide for 10,000 cycles over the same path. Permanent set at the conclusion of the test shall not exceed .040" (1mm). 5. Impact Load: A 150 Ib. load dropped from 36"(914mm) onto a one-inch square indenter shall not render the system unserviceable. 6. Flammability: Bare panel system shall meet Class A requirements for Flame spread and smoke development when tested in accordance with ASTM-E84 and a maximum Flame spread of 25, Smoke development of 50 based on the average of three runs when tested in accordance with CAN/ULC 5102. 7. Combustibility:All components of the access floor system shall qualify as noncombustible by demonstrating compliance with requirements of ASTM E 136, Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 degrees C. 8. Pedestal Axial Load Test: Provide pedestal assemblies without panels or other supports in place, capable of withstanding a 6000 Ib. (22 240 N)Axial load per pedestal, according to CISCA A/F, Section 5 "Pedestal Axial Load Test." 9. Verify requirements for pedestal overturning moment in seismic zones with authorities having jurisdiction. Coordinate with pedestals selected in Part 2 and method of attachment specified. 10. Pedestal Overturning Moment Test: Provide pedestal assemblies,without panels or other supports in place, capable of withstanding an average overturning moment of 1000 in*lbs. (113 N*m)when bonded to clean concrete slab according to CISCA A/F,Section 6, "Pedestal Overturning Moment Test." D. Product testing shall be witnessed and certified by an accredited independent engineering and testing laboratory based in the U.S.A.with a minimum of five(5)years'experience testing access floor components in accordance with CISCA test methods. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a sample of the floor panel and each understructure component. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit drawings showing raised floor panel layout including starting point of installation. 2. Include details of component panels and pedestals. If required show edge details of ramps, steps, handrails and anchoring of pedestal bases to subfloor. C. Product Certificates: 1. Submit independent testing organization certificates indicating compliance with specified design criteria when tested and reported according to CISCA "Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors." Access Flooring 096900-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Submit seismic calculations if required in accordance with local and state building codes as specified. Calculations shall be performed using a current seismic program and submitted to a local structural engineer licensed in the state where the project is located. The structural engineer shall sign and seal these calculations confirming that these calculations meet all local and state codes for seismic pedestal assemblies. A signed copy of these calculations must be given to the architect and local building department as required. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Access floor manufacture shall be ISO9001:2015 certified demonstrating it has a robust and well documented quality management system with continual improvement goals and strategies. 2. Access floor manufacturer's facilities shall be ISO14001:2015 certified demonstrating that they maintain an environmental management system. B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer with minimum of 5 years' experience in the installation of access floor systems of comparable size and complexity. C. Access Floor Tolerances: 1. Manufacturing Tolerance: 2. Nominal panel size: ±0.015" (.4mm) or less. 3. Panel flatness: ±0.015" (.4mm) or less. 4. Panel squareness: ±0.015" (.4mm) or less. 5. Panel interchangeability: All panels, except those modified to meet special conditions, shall be interchangeable. 6. Installation Tolerance: 7. Finished installation shall be level within ± 0.060" (2mm) in 10 feet (3m) and ± 0.100" (3mm)for the entire floor. 1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver flooring components clearly labeled with manufacturer's name and item description. B. Handle and store packages containing flooring in a manner which avoids overloading building structure. C. Provide a dry accessible area to receive and unload material with a free path to elevators, hoists and/or the area receiving the floor. D. The subfloor shall be free of moisture, dust, dirt and other debris. Once installed, the tile floor must be maintained in the same manner. Access Flooring 096900-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Provide a clean, level, dry subfloor,temperature controlled, and protected from the weather. B. Access flooring storage and installation areas shall be maintained at a temperature between 40°F to 120°F and be less than 70% relative humidity for 24 hours a day before, during and after installation. C. Overhead construction work must be completed before installing access floor to avoid damage to panels and finishes. Any damage to panels or finishes resulting from construction work done after floor is installed shall be the responsibility of the contractor. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Global IFS TecCrete Access Flooring, located in Grand Rapids, MI 49512. 1. Substitutions will be considered, providing the alternative products meet or exceed the feature requirements as indicated herein and the performance requirements including the rolling load as outlined in section 1.3 and receive prior written approval by the Architect.The manufacturer shall certify that all panels meet or exceed the stated design criteria. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Floor Panels: Panels shall be integrated steel pan construction with exposed top surface of lightweight concrete fill. Floor Panels are gravity held. 1. Panels shall be nominal 24" (610mm) square x 1-1/8" (29mm) deep, manufactured with galvannealed steel pan having shear tabs that integrally bond to the lightweight, high- strength concrete fill. Panel corners shall be manufactured to receive the pedestal head positioning dome. 2. Panel Finish: 3. Finish the surface of floor panels with floor covering material as indicated on the contract drawings.Where floor coverings are by the access floor manufacturer,the type,color and pattern shall be selected from manufacturer's standard.All areas to be furnished with laminated floor panels must be maintained at ambient temperature between 50°F to 90°F and at humidity level between 20%to 80% relative and shall remain within these ranges through installation and occupancy. B. Understructure: 1. Pedestal assemblies shall be of hot-dip galvanized steel. Access Flooring 096900-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. The base shall be a minimum of 16 square inches and shall be stamped and/or embossed on its underside and shall be adhered to the sub floor with an adhesive recommended by the access flooring manufacturer. 3. Where mechanical anchors are required for seismic zones, provide same as required by project specific seismic calculations. 4. The threaded stud shall be 3/4" (19mm) diameter steel. 5. The head assembly shall be designed so that the panels will be held in place with or without corner-lock fasteners. 6. Pedestal assembly shall provide an adjustment range of+/-1" (25mm)when finished floor height is 6" (152mm) or more, adjustable at 1/64" (.4mm) increments. 7. The assembly shall provide a mechanical means to lock the floor in a level plane and adjustments shall be capable of being made without special tools. 8. For corner-lock system, the head of the all-steel assembly shall be designed to accept a metal fastener to mechanically lock the panels in place. 9. Pedestal assembly shall support not less than 6,000 Ib. axial load and shall resist an average 1,000 inch-pound overturning moment when bonded to a clean concrete slab. C. Stringers: 1. Stringer shall capture panels and be capable of supporting a 450-Ib. concentrated load at mid span with less than 0.010" permanent set after the load is removed. 2. Stringers shall be individually and rigidly fastened to the pedestal with one machine screw for each foot of stringer length. Bolts shall provide positive electrical contact between the stringers and pedestals. Connections depending on gravity or spring action are unacceptable. 3. Stringer shall be either 2'x 2' or 4'x 4' pattern and shall be secured by a fastener. D. Accessories: 1. Furnish ramps, steps, lateral bracing, fascia, handrails, cutouts and miscellaneous items where indicated. E. Modular Wiring: 1. Power Distribution Zone Box: Used as transition point to convert from bulk power distribution into easily reconfigurable modular power distribution components. Supports "plug and play" power distribution within each power zone. a. The Power Distribution Zone Box(PDB)shall be constructed of cold rolled steel with painted powder coat finish and bolt on steel lid. This is intended to be connected to the building Circuit Breaker box. UL/CSA approved PDB with 9 or 12 modular 5- pin connector power out ports to provide general purpose and/or dedicated 120- volt power. Each PDB shall have a label indicating the circuit number and electrical panel at each power out connector. Home run feeds from electrical panel to PDB shall be by Division 26. (As per drawings) 2. Plug and Play Cable Sets: Used to interconnect modular power components within each power zone. a. UL/CSA approved modular cable sets shall be provided to connect flush mount PVD Servicenters to Power Distribution Zone Boxes. Metallic flex cable set to be Access Flooring 096900-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• manufactured with modular 5 pin connectors on each end and be CSA approved for plenum applications. Length to be 8 meters (25 ft) unless otherwise shown on drawings. 3. Floor Boxes: Used to provide power and/or data outlets at floor level. a. Round Floor Box: 9" round box, fits in a nominal 6"FFH raised access floor. The service outlet box shall be a round drop-in design with heavy duty poly carbonate lid to match and be interchangeable with round swirl diffusers. High capacity 9-inch diameter (224mm) service centers shall be capable of accommodating up to three duplex receptacles, knockouts for standard voice/data faceplates and integral modular plug and play. Unit fits in 9 5/16" round opening in raised access floor. Female power connection on outside of box with integral latching system to connect to cable set. b. 2.5" Ultra Low-Profile Floor Box:8"x 8"square box,fits in a nominal 2.5" FFH raised access floor. Constructed of a black zinc plated steel finish with female power connector coming from the back side of box with integral latching system to connect to cable set. Lid accepts carpet insert. Unit fits in 8" square opening in raised access floor. Unit accepts 2 duplex receptacles and has knockouts for standard voice/data faceplates and integral modular plug and play. C. 3" Low Profile Floor Box: 8" x 8" square box, fits in a nominal 3" FFH raised access floor. Constructed of a black zinc plated steel finish with female power connector coming from the back side of box with integral latching system to connect to cable set. Lid accepts carpet insert. Unit fits in 8" square opening in raised access floor. Unit accepts 2 duplex receptacles and has knockouts for standard voice/data faceplates and integral modular plug and play. d. Standard Square Floor Box: 8" x 8" square box, fits in a nominal 4.25" FFH raised access floor. Constructed of black zinc plated steel finish with female power connector coming from the back side of box with integral latching system to connect to cable set. Lid accepts carpet insert. Unit fits in 8" square opening in raised access floor. Unit accepts 2 duplex receptacles and has knockouts for standard voice/data. e. High-Capacity Square Floor Box: 10" x 10" square box, fits in a nominal 4.25" FFH raised access floor. Constructed of black zinc plated steel finish with female power connector coming from the back side of box with integral latching system to connect to cable set. Lid accepts carpet insert. Unit fits in 10" square opening in raised access floor. Unit accepts 4 duplex receptacles and has knockouts for standard voice/data faceplates and integral modular plug and play. 4. Furniture Feed: Used to connect systems furniture modular wiring directly to zone power distribution. a. Round Furniture Feed Boxes are constructed with male connector head for quick connect attachment to Cable sets.The round box is airtight, perfect for underfloor air applications. Base feeds are UL/CSA listed for direct connection to the Cable Sets. Round box can be configured with all power or% power and %data. b. Subfloor Adapter: constructed of steel, connections to furniture may be made via the low-profile distribution box with a female connector on the box and an electrician hard wiring to the wires. Access Flooring 096900-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the subfloor which is to receive access flooring for dryness, cleanliness, unevenness, or any irregularities that will affect the quality of the access flooring. 1. Verify that material storage and installation areas are at recommended temperature and relative humidity before, during, and after installation. 2. Verify that access floor is level to within 1/8" (3mm) in 10 feet (3m). B. Do not commence installation of access flooring until subfloor is clean and dry, temperature controlled, and protected from the weather. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Pedestal locations shall be established from approved shop drawings so that electrical work can be installed without interfering with pedestal locations. B. Installer is to coordinate with other trades to maintain the integrity of the installed access flooring. All traffic on access floor shall be controlled by the installer only. No traffic other than the access floor installation crew shall be permitted on any floor area for 48 hours to allow the pedestal adhesive to set. Access floor panels shall not be removed by other trades for 72 hours after their installation. C. Floor system and accessories shall be installed by an authorized factory trained installation company with a minimum of five (5)years' experience. D. No dust or debris producing operations by other trades shall be allowed in areas where access floor is being installed to ensure proper bonding of pedestals to subfloor. E. Installer shall keep the subfloor broom clean as installation progresses. F. Finished installation shall be level within+/-0.060" (2mm) in 10 feet(3m) and+/-0.100" (3mm) for the entire floor area. G. Replace damaged materials prior to the application of field applied surfaces. H. Contractor shall assure compatibility between the concrete sealer and the pedestal adhesive provided by the access floor manufacturer. 3.3 ACCEPTANCE A. Contractor shall accept completed access floor in whole or in part, prior to allowing other trades to perform work which affects the installed access floor. Access Flooring 096900-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Contractor shall suitably protect the accepted access floor and accessories from damage, contamination or overloading. C. Contractor shall be responsible for the final underfloor cleaning. END OF SECTION 09 69 00 Access Flooring 096900-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 09 84 36.16 SOUND-ABSORBING CEILING WOOD-FIBER UNITS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes shop-fabricated, acoustical panel units tested for acoustical performance, including the following: 1. Sound-absorbing ceiling panels. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. B. SAA: Sound Absorption Average. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include panel edge, core material, and mounting indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For unit assembly and installation. 1. Include reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, and mounting devices and details. 2. Include details at joints and corners, and details at ceiling intersections and intersections with walls. Indicate panel edge profile and core materials. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of color and finish. 1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving color or finish selection. D. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1. Corner: 12-inch-square Sample(s)at corner indicating each edge profile,color,and finish. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Electrical outlets. Sound-Absorbing Ceiling Wood—Fiber Units 09 84 36.16-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Suspended ceiling components above ceiling units. 3. Structural members to which suspension devices will be attached. 4. Items penetrating or covered by units including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. C. Speakers. d. Alarms. e. Sprinklers. f. Access panels. 5. Show operation of hinged and sliding components covered by or adjacent to units. B. Product Certificates: For each type of unit. C. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of unit to include in maintenance manuals. Include manufacturer's written cleaning instructions. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials, fabrication, and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as indicated on Drawings. Include intersection of wall and ceiling, corners, and perimeters. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Comply with panel manufacturers' written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and handling. B. Deliver materials and units in unopened bundles and store in a temperature-controlled dry place with adequate air circulation. C. Handle acoustical panel units with care to avoid chipping edges or other damage. Sound-Absorbing Ceiling Wood—Fiber Units 09 84 36.16-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install units until spaces are enclosed and weathertight,wet- work in spaces is complete and dry, work at and above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Verify unit locations and actual dimensions of openings and penetrations by field measurements before fabrication and indicate them on Shop Drawings. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace units and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Acoustical performance. b. Material defects including panel breakage. 2. Warranty Period: Lifetime from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Units shall comply with "Surface-Burning Characteristics" or "Fire Growth Contribution" Subparagraph below, or both, as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2.2 SOUND-ABSORBING CEILING UNITS A. Sound-Absorbing Ceiling Panel, Type AP1 (Bid Alternate): Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of wood fibers bonded with inorganic hydraulic cement. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World Industries;Tectum Ceiling Panels or comparable product by one of the following: a. Baux. b. Martin Fireproofing Corporation. C. Tectum; an Armstrong World Industries brand. d. Cardinal Acoustics, Inc. Sound-Absorbing Ceiling Wood—Fiber Units 09 84 36.16-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Panel Shape: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Mounting: a. Type AP1: Lay-in with Armstrong Prelude XL Suspension System. 4. Core: Cementitious-wood-fiber panel. 5. Edge Profile: Long edge beveled, short edge square. 6. Corner Detail in Elevation: Square with continuous edge profile indicated. 7. Acoustical Performance: Sound absorption NRC of 0.85 in accordance with ASTM C423. 8. Nominal Overall Panel Thickness: 1 inch. 9. Panel Width: As indicated on Drawings. 10. Panel Height: As indicated on Drawings. 11. Color Finish: a. Type AP1: gray. 12. Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard broad spectrum, antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273, ASTM D3274, or ASTM G21 and evaluated in accordance with ASTM D3274 or ASTM G21. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Panel Materials: Manufacturer's standard. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Standard Construction: Use manufacturer's standard construction unless otherwise indicated. B. Measure each area and establish layout of panels and joints of sizes indicated on Drawings within a given area. C. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Plus or minus 1/8 inch for the following: 1. Thickness. 2. Edge straightness. 3. Overall length and width. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine acoustical units, substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting unit performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Sound-Absorbing Ceiling Wood—Fiber Units 09 84 36.16-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.2 PREPARATION A. Allow acoustical panel materials to acclimate to jobsite conditions for a minimum 24 hours prior to installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install units in locations indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, install units with edges in alignment with walls and other units,faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installation of units using type of mounting devices indicated. Mount units securely to supporting substrate. 3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Alignment with Surfaces: Plus or minus 1/16 inch in 48 inches, noncumulative. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Remove and replace each damaged or uncleanable panel. END OF SECTION 09 84 36.16 Sound-Absorbing Ceiling Wood—Fiber Units 09 84 36.16-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 09 91 13 PAINTING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation, painting,and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified under other sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules," except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts(including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items not to be painted include the following factory-finished components: a. Architectural woodwork and casework. b. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Light fixtures. d. Switchgear. e. Distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the following generally inaccessible areas: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. C. Utility tunnels. d. Pipe spaces. 3. Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. Painting 099113-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Chromium plate. d. Copper. e. Bronze. f. Brass. 4. Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating equipment such as the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. C. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriter's Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code- required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Related Sections:The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications"for shop priming ferrous metal. 3. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames. 4. Division 9 Section "Special Coatings" for special coatings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. "Paint" includes coating systems materials, primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information, label analysis, and application instructions for each material proposed for use. 1. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating and finish system and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. VOC content. B. Samples for verification purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. Define each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 1. Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample as to location and application. 2. Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Concrete: Provide two 4-inch-square samples for each color and finish. Painting 099113-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• b. Concrete Masonry: Provide two 4-by-8-inch samples of masonry,with mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color. C. Painted Wood: Provide two 12- by 12-inch samples of each color and material on hardboard. d. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch-square samples of flat metal and two 8-inch- long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the materials specified. C. Field Samples: On wall surfaces and other exterior and interior components, duplicate finishes of prepared samples. Provide full- coat finish samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of surface until required sheen, color and texture are obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work. 1. Final acceptance of colors will be from job-applied samples. 2. The Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted. Apply coatings in this room or surface in accordance with the schedule or as specified. After finishes are accepted, this room or surface will be used for evaluation of coating systems of a similar nature. D. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products named are required or to exclude equal products of other manufacturers. 2. Federal Specifications establish a minimum quality level for paint materials,except where other product identification is used. Provide written certification from the manufacturer that materials provided meet or exceed these criteria. 3. Products that comply with qualitative requirements of applicable Federal Specifications, yet differ in quantitative requirements, may be considered for use when acceptable to the Architect. Furnish material data and manufacturer's certificate of performance to Architect for proposed substitutions. E. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base,when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Painting 099113-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers:420 g/L. 8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Federal Specification number, if applicable. 4. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 5. Contents by volume,for pigment and vehicle constituents. 6. Thinning instructions. 7. Application instructions. 8. Color name and number. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg Q. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition,free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C). B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain,fog, or mist,when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods. Painting 099113-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following: 1. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore). 2. PPG Paints (PPG). 3. Pratt and Lambert (P & Q. 4. The Sherwin-Williams Company(S-W). 2.2 MASONRY BLOCK FILLER A. High-Performance Latex Block Filler: Heavy-duty latex block fillers used for filling open textured interior and exterior concrete masonry block before application of top coats: 1. PPG: Speedhide Interior/Exterior Masonry Hi fill Latex Block Filler 6-15X1 2. S-W: Prep Rite Block Filler B25W25. 2.3 PRIMERS A. Exterior Primer Coating: Exterior latex wood primer used for priming mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panels under a flat acrylic emulsion finish: 1. PPG: Seal Grip Interior/Exterior Acrylic Universal Primer/Sealer 17-921X1 2. S-W: Exterior Latex Primer B. Interior Masonry Latex-Based Paint: Alkali-resistant paint used as a primer over concrete and masonry under flat and semigloss enamel: 1. PPG: Seal Grip Interior/Exterior Acrylic Universal Primer/Sealer 17-921X1 2. S-W: Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer, A24W8300. C. Interior Flat Latex-Based Paint: Flat latex paint used as a primer on plaster under flat,semigloss, and full-gloss alkyd finishes: 1. PPG: Seal Grip Interior/Exterior Acrylic Universal Primer/Sealer 17-921X1 2. S-W: Premium Wall and Wood Primer, B28W8111. D. Latex-Based Interior White Primer: Latex-based primer coating used on interior gypsum drywall under a flat latex paint or an alkyd semigloss enamel. 1. PPG: Speedhide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer 6-2 2. S-W: Pro Green 200 Latex Wall Primer. Painting 099113-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• E. Synthetic, Rust-Inhibiting Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibiting primer for priming ferrous metal on the exterior under full-gloss and flat alkyd enamel and on the interior under flat latex paint or odorless alkyd semigloss or alkyd gloss enamels: 1. PPG: Pitt-Tech Plus Waterborne Acrylic Primer/Finish 4020 Series 2. S-W: Pro Cryl Universal Metal Primer B66W310. F. Galvanized Metal Primer: Primer used to prime interior and exterior zinc-coated (galvanized) metal surfaces: 1. PPG: Pitt-Tech Plus Waterborne Acrylic Primer/Finish 4020 Series 2. S-W: Pro Cryl Universal Metal Primer B66W310. 2.4 UNDERCOAT MATERIALS A. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready-mixed enamel for use on the interior as an undercoat over a primer on filled concrete masonry under an odorless semigloss enamel finish: 1. PPG: Speedhide Interior Quick-Dry Latex Sealer 6-2 2. S-W: Premium Wall &Wood Primer, B28W8111. B. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready-mixed enamel for use as an undercoat over wood and hardboard under an odorless alkyd semigloss enamel or full gloss alkyd enamel: 1. PPG: Speedhide Interior Quick-Dry Latex Sealer 6-2 2. S-W: Premium Wall &Wood Primer, B28W8111. C. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready-mixed enamel for use as an undercoat over a primer on ferrous or zinc-coated metal under an interior alkyd semigloss enamel or a full-gloss alkyd enamel: 1. PPG: Pitt-Tech Plus Waterborne Acrylic Primer/Finish 4020 Series 2. S-W: Premium Wall &Wood Primer, B28W8111. 2.5 EXTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. Exterior Acrylic Emulsion: Quick-drying, flat, acrylic paint for use on the exterior over concrete, stucco,masonry(including concrete masonry block),and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement-panel surfaces: 1. PPG: Speedhide Exterior 100%Acrylic Latex Flat 6-610X1 Series 2. S-W: A-100 Acrylic Latex Flat Exterior Finish A-6 Series. B. Exterior Semi-transparent Oil Stain: Semi-transparent oil based exterior wood stains: 1. PPG: Olympic Maximum Sealant+Stain in One 79550 2. S-W: WoodScapes Semi-Transparent Polyurethane Exterior Stain (A15T5). Painting 099113-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Exterior Full-Gloss Enamel: Full-Gloss Alkyd enamel for use over prime-coated ferrous metal: 1. PPG: HPC Industrial Alkyd Enamel Gloss 4308 Series 2. S-W: Industrial Alkyd Urethane B54W150. 2.6 INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. Latex-Based Interior Semi-Gloss Paint: Ready-mixed, latex-based paint for use as a semi gloss finish over concrete and masonry surfaces, including filled concrete masonry block, mineral- fiber-reinforced cement panels, and plaster and over prime-coated gypsum drywall, ferrous metal, and zinc-coated (galvanized) metal surfaces: 1. PPG: Speedhide Zero Interior Latex Semi-Gloss 6-5510 Series 2. S-W: Pro Mar 200 Zero VOC Semigloss Wall Paint. B. Interior Semigloss Odorless Acrylic Paint: Ready-mixed, low-odor interior semigloss acrylic enamel for use over concrete, masonry, and plaster wood, hardwood, gypsum drywall, and metal surfaces: 1. PPG: Pitt-Tech Plus Semi-Gloss HP Waterborne Acrylic 4216 Series 2. S-W: Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic Eg-Shell. C. Latex-based, Interior Flat Paint: Ready-mixed, latex based paint for use over acoustical plaster surfaces and as a "size" on cotton or canvas covering over insulation: 1. PPG: Speedhide Zero Interior Latex Flat 6-5110 2. S-W: Pro Mar 200 Zero VOC Flat Wall Paint, B30W2600 Series. D. Exposed Steel Roof Structure and Acoustical Tectum Panels: 2 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 4 mils. 1. Two Coats: PPG Speedhide Super Tech WB Interior Latex Dry Fog Flat. 2. Two Coats: S-W Low VOC Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall, B42W00081. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with requirements for application of paint. Do not begin paint application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. Painting 099113-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.2 PREPARATION A. General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place that are not to be painted or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items if necessary for complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. 1. Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning.Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect in writing of problems anticipated with using the specified finish-coat material with substrates primed by others. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt,grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If C. surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. d. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, and rinse; allow to dry and vacuum before painting. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before application of primer. After priming,fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends,faces,undersides,and backsides of wood,including cabinets,counters,cases, and paneling. C. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. d. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean nongalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use Painting 099113-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by the paint system manufacturer and in accordance with requirements of SSPC specification SSPC-SP 10. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. C. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged.Wire- brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non- petroleum-based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. C. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and only within recommended limits. D. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are applied.Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in "schedules." 2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce an even smooth surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. 4. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. Painting 099113-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 5. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas as required to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment. 7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, nonspecular black paint. 8. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field- finished casework to match exterior. 10. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces. 11. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 12. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch up painted. C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. D. Minimum Coating Thickness:Apply materials at not less than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide a total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include but are not limited to: 1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 2. Heat exchangers. 3. Tanks. 4. Ductwork. 5. Insulation. 6. Supports. 7. Motors and mechanical equipment. 8. Accessory items. G. Electrical items to be painted include but are not limited to: 1. Conduit and fittings. 2. Switchgear. Painting 099113-10 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• H. Block Fillers:Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. I. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat of material as recommended by the 1. manufacturer to material that is required to be painted or finished and has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears,to assure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 2. The testing laboratory will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner: a. Quantitative materials analysis. b. Abrasion resistance. C. Apparent reflectivity. d. Flexibility. e. Washability. f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacity. i. Accelerated yellowness. j. Recoating. k. Skinning. I. Color retention. M. Alkali and mildew resistance. 3. If test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements,the Contractor may be directed to stop painting, remove noncomplying paint, pay for testing, repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint, and remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are noncompatible. Painting 099113-11 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. B. Upon completion of painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades,whether to be painted or not,against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. B. Provide "wet paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates indicated. B. Ferrous Metal: Primer is not required on shop-primed items. 1. Lusterless Alkyd Enamel: 2 finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Synthetic Rust-Inhibiting Primer(FS TT-P-664). b. First Coat: Lusterless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-527). C. Second Coat: Lusterless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-527). C. Zinc-Coated Metal: 1. Lusterless Alkyd Enamel: 2 finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer(FS TT-P-641). b. First Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel (FS TT-E-489). C. Second Coat:Alkyd Gloss Enamel (FS TT-E-489). 3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. B. Concrete and Masonry(Other than concrete masonry units): 1. Semi-gloss Enamel Finish: 3 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils. a. Primer: Latex-Based Interior Flat Paint (FS TT-P-29). b. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat (FS TT-E-543). Painting 099113-12 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Finish Coat: Interior semi-gloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509). C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Semi-gloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: 2 coats over filled surface with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils, excluding filler coat. a. Block Filler: High Performance Latex Block Filler. b. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat (FS TT-E-543). C. Finish Coat: Interior semi-gloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509). D. Gypsum Drywall Systems: 1. Odorless semi-gloss Alkyd Enamel Finish:3 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Interior Latex-Based White Primer(FS TT-P-650). b. First Coat: Interior Egg-Shell Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509). C. Second Coat: Interior semi-gloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509). E. Woodwork and Hardboard: 1. Semigloss Enamel Finish: 3 coats. a. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat (FS TT-E-543). b. First Coat: Interior semi-gloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509). C. Second Coat: Interior semi-gloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509). F. Ferrous Metal: 1. Lusterless (Flat) Finish: 2 finish coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Synthetic Rust-Inhibiting Primer(FS TT-P-664). b. First Coat: Latex-Based Interior Flat Paint (FS TT-P-29). C. Second Coat: Latex-Based Interior Flat Paint (FS TT-P-29). 2. Semigloss Enamel Finish: 2 coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Synthetic Rust-Inhibiting Primer(FS TT-P-664). b. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat (FS TT-E-543). C. Finish Coat: Interior semigloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509). G. Zinc-Coated Metal: 1. Lusterless (Flat) Finish: 2 finish coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer(FS TT-P-641). b. First Coat: Latex-Based Interior Flat Paint (FS TT-P-29). C. Second Coat: Latex-Based Interior Flat Paint (FS TT-P-29). 2. Semigloss Finish: 2 coats over primer, with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer(FS TT-P-641). b. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat (FS TT-E-543). C. Finish Coat: Interior semi-gloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509). Painting 099113-13 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• END OF SECTION 09 9113 Painting 099113-14 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of high-performance coating systems on the following substrates: 1. Interior Substrates: a. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1. Indicate VOC content. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, B inches square. 2. Label each coat of each Sample. 3. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. VOC content. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups:Apply mockups of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. High- Performance Coatings 099600-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each coating system specified in Part 3. a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Handling: Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed containers, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Packaging shall bear the manufacture's label with the following information: 1. Product name and type (description). 2. Batch date. 3. Color number. 4. VOC content. 5. Environmental handling requirements. 6. Surface preparation requirements. 7. Application instructions. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain,fog, or mist. High- Performance Coatings 099600-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide PPG Architectural Coatings; products indicated or comparable product from one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Sherwin Williams Company 3. Tnemec Inc. B. Comparable Products: Comparable products of approved manufacturers will be considered in accordance with Section 0160 00 "Product Requirements," and the following: 1. Products are approved by manufacturer in writing for application specified. 2. Products meet performance and physical characteristics of basis of design product including published ratio of solids by volume, plus or minus two percent. C. Source Limitations: Obtain paint materials from single source from single listed manufacturer. 1. Manufacturer's designations listed on a separate color schedule are for color reference only and do not indicate prior approval. 2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a coating system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in coating system and on substrate indicated. 3. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system. B. VOC Content: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, paints and coatings shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC content limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. High- Performance Coatings 099600-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. Where acceptability of substrate conditions is in question, apply samples and perform in-situ testing to verify compatibility, adhesion, and film integrity of new paint application. 1. Report in writing conditions that may affect application, appearance, or performance of paint. B. Substrate Conditions: 1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: a. Concrete Masonry: 12 percent. 2. Gypsum Board Substrates:Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected; application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated. D. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content, or alkalinity of surfaces or if alkalinity of mortarjoints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. High- Performance Coatings 099600-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with coating manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. High- Performance Coatings 099600-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.6 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE A. CMU Substrates: 1. Epoxy-Modified Latex System: a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior: 1) PPG Interior/Exterior Masonry Hi Fill Latex Block Filler 6-15X1 b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy-modified latex, interior, semi-gloss, matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Epoxy-modified latex, interior, semi-gloss: 1) PPG Pitt-Glaze Interior Semi-Gloss Pre-Catalyzed Acrylic Waterborne Epoxy, 16-510, 1.5 mils DFT. B. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Epoxy-Modified Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior: 1) PPG Speedhide ProEV Zero Interior Primer White, 12-900X1, 1.1 mils DFT b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy-modified latex, interior, matching topcoat. C. Topcoat: Epoxy-modified latex, interior, semi-gloss: 1) PPG Pitt-Glaze Interior Semi-Gloss Pre-Catalyzed Acrylic Waterborne Epoxy, 16-510, 1.5 mils DFT. END OF SECTION 09 96 00 High- Performance Coatings 099600-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 101100 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Modular markerboard/tackboard assemblies. 2. Tackable wallcovering. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For visual display units. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other work. 2. Show locations of panel joints 3. Include sections of typical trim members. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of visual display unit indicated,for units with factory- applied color finishes, and as follows: 1. Actual sections of porcelain-enamel face sheet tackboard assembly. 2. Include accessory samples to verify color selected. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of visual display surface indicated. 1. Trim: 6 inch long sections of each trim profile. 2. Accessories: Full-size sample of each type of accessory. E. Product Schedule: For visual display units. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified installer. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency,for surface-burning characteristics of fabrics. C. Sample of special warranties. Visual Display Units 101100-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance data: For visual display surfaces and operating units to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities. b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking or flaking. 2. Warranty Period: Marker Boards-50 years from date of Substantial Completion or for the Life of the Building. 3. Warranty Period:Tack Boards-5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to those indicated as Basis of Design. 1. Basis of Design: Claridge Series 8 B. Source Limitations: Obtain visual display surfaces from single source and from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2.3 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Hardboard:ANSI A135.4,tempered. Visual Display Units 101100-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-1, that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Fiberboard:ASTM C 208. D. Extruded Aluminum:ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063. E. Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.4 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARD ASSEMBLY A. Visual Display Board Assembly: Field or factory fabricated. 1. Assembly: markerboard and tackboard. 2. Corners: Square . 3. Width:As indicated on Drawings . 4. Height:As indicated on Drawings . B. Markerboard Panel: Porcelain-enamel-faced markerboard panel on core indicated. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors . C. Tackboard Panel: Plastic-impregnated-cork tackboard panel on core indicated. 1. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. D. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0,062-inch- thick, extruded aluminum; manufacturer's standard . 1. Field-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard, snap-on trim with no visible screws or exposed joints . 2. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodic finish. E. Combination Assemblies: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed trim between abutting sections of visual display panels. F. Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard blade-type aluminum tray; continuous. 2.5 MARKERBOARD PANELS A. Porcelain-Enamel Markerboard Panels: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated markerboard assembly of three-ply construction, consisting of moisture-barrier backing, core material,and porcelain-enamel face sheet with low-gloss finish. Laminate panels under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard, flexible waterproof adhesive. Visual Display Units 101100-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Face Sheet Thickness: 0.013 inch uncoated base metal thickness. 2. Manufacturer's Standard Core: Minimum 1/4 inch thick, with manufacturer's standard moisture-barrier backing. 3. Fiberboard Core: 7/16 inch thick; with 0,001-inch- thick, aluminum foil or 0,015-inch- thick, aluminum sheet backing. 4. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard moisture-resistant thermoplastic type. 2.6 TACKBOARD PANELS A. Tackboard Panels: 1. Facing: plastic-impregnated cork. 2. Core: Manufacturer's standard. 2.7 MATERIALS A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: PEI-1002,with face sheet manufacturer's standard two-or three- coat process. B. Plastic-Impregnated-Cork Sheet: Seamless, homogeneous, self-sealing sheet consisting of granulated cork, linseed oil, resin binders,and dry pigments that are mixed and calendared onto fabric backing; with washable vinyl finish and integral color throughout ; with surface-burning characteristics indicated. C. Hardboard:ANSI A135.4,tempered. D. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-1. E. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. F. Fiberboard:ASTM C 208 cellulosic fiber insulating board. G. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221,Alloy 6063. H. Adhesives for Field Application: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive for use with specific type of panels, sheets, or assemblies; and for substrate application; as recommended in writing by visual display unit manufacturer. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611,AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. Visual Display Units 101100-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation. END OF SECTION 10 1100 Visual Display Units 101100-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 101416 PLAQUES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal plaques. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For plaques. 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show plaque mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other installers, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each plaque at least half size. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample warranty. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of plaques that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL PLAQUES A. Cast Plaque: Cast-metal plaque with background texture, border,and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows: Plaques 101416-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Plaque Material: Cast brushed aluminum. 2. Plaque Thickness: 0.50 inch. 3. Finishes: a. Brushed Aluminum Text and Borders - Integral Metal Finish: As selected by Architect from full range of industry finishes. b. Painted Background: Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, in color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Overcoat: Manufacturer's standard baked-on clear coating. 4. Background Texture:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 5. Integrally Cast Border Style: As indicated on Drawings. 6. Mounting: Concealed studs. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of plaques, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following: 1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless-steel devices unless otherwise indicated. B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard plaques according to requirements indicated. 1. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. 2. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 3. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 4. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match plaque finish. 5. Castings: Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks before finishing. B. Surface-Engraved Graphics: Machine-engrave characters and other graphic devices into indicated plaque surface to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth. 1. Engraved Metal: Fill engraved graphics with manufacturer's standard baked enamel. Plaques 101416-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF METAL PLAQUES A. General: Install plaques using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install plaques level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with plaque surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Install plaques so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that plaque surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. 4. Corrosion Protection:Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout, concrete, masonry,wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. B. Mounting Methods: 1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of plaque. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface. a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place plaque in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support plaque in position until adhesive fully sets. b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place plaque in position and flush to surface, install washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface,and tighten. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as plaques are installed. END OF SECTION 10 14 16 Plaques 101416-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 10 14 19 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Dimensional characters. a. Illuminated, fabricated channel dimensional characters. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For signs. 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights,locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other installers, and accessories. 3. Show message list,typestyles,graphic elements, and layout for each sign at least half size 4. Show locations of electrical service connections. 5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Dimensional Letter Signage 101419-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance:Signs and supporting elements shall withstand the effects of gravity and other loads within limits and under conditions indicated. B. Thermal Movements: For exterior fabricated channel dimensional characters, allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 EXCLUSIONS: 1. Channelume type construction is not allowed. 2. Trimcap type retainers for the plastic faces are not allowed. 2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS A. Fabricated Channel Characters : 3/16 inch thick translucent face with .063 minimum aluminum side returns and .090 inch minimum aluminum backs, mounted to an aluminum raceway manufactured by sign manufacturer,formed free from warp and distortion;with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; internally braced for stability, to meet structural performance loading without oil-canning or other surface deformation, and for securing fasteners; and as follows. 1. Refer to Building Signage Elevation and Detail on Drawings. 2. Illuminated Characters: Backlighted character construction with LED lighting, including transformers,insulators,and other accessories for operability,with provision for servicing and concealing connections to building electrical system. Use tight or sealed joint construction to prevent unintentional light leakage. Space lamps apart from each other and away from character surfaces as needed to illuminate evenly. a. Power: As indicated on electrical Drawings . 3. Character Material: Sheet or plate aluminum . 4. Translucent Face Sheet: 3/16 inch acrylic sheet with integral color . 5. Character Height: As indicated on Drawings . 6. Character Depth:As indicated on Drawings . 7. Character Font:As indicated on Drawings. 8. Finishes: a. Integral Aluminum Finish: Clear anodized . 9. Mounting:Aluminum raceway by sign manufacturer, painted to match metal wall panels. a. Attach Face-Channel Letters and Logo to Aluminum Raceway as indicated on Drawings. Dimensional Letter Signage 101419-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signs, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following: 1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated. 1. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. 2. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 3. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 4. Internally brace dimensional characters for stability, to meet structural performance loading without oil-canning or other surface deformation, and for securing fasteners. 5. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. 3. Corrosion Protection:Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout, concrete, masonry,wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. B. Mounting Methods: 1. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign raceway as template. Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to surface. Install through fasteners and tighten. 2. Aluminum Raceway: Remove loose debris from substrate surface and install aluminum raceway in position, so that signage is correctly located and aligned. Dimensional Letter Signage 101419-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed. END OF SECTION 10 14 19 Dimensional Letter Signage 101419-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 10 14 23.16 ROOM-IDENTIFICATION PANEL SIGNAGE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes room-identification signs that are directly attached to the building. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 10 14 16 "Plaques" for one-piece, solid metal signs. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For room-identification signs. 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights,locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other installers, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille, and layout for each sign at least half size. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Room-Identification Panel Signage 10 14 23.16-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the USDOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design",Texas Accessibility Standards and ICC A117.1. 2.2 ROOM-IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Room-Identification Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows: 1. Laminated-Sheet Sign: Polymer face sheet with raised graphics laminated to acrylic backing sheet to produce composite sheet. a. Composite-Sheet Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of sign. b. Surface-Applied Graphics:Applied "tactile"signage,with letters raised minimum of 1/32 inch and Grade II braille. C. Color(s):As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth. a. Edge Condition: As indicated on Drawings. b. Corner Condition in Elevation:As indicated on Drawings. 3. Backing Plate: Furnish and install a plain acrylic backing plate at all signage mounted to glazing. Color to match sign. 4. Mounting: Surface mounted to wall or glazing with two-face tape. 2.3 SIGN MATERIALS A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF (UV filtering). 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch thick, with adhesive on both sides. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated. 1. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. 2. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. Room-Identification Panel Signage 10 14 23.16-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Subsurface-Applied Graphics:Apply graphics to back face of clear face-sheet material to produce precisely formed image. Image shall be free of rough edges. C. Subsurface-Etched Graphics: Reverse etch back face of clear face-sheet material. Fill resulting copy with manufacturer's standard enamel.Apply opaque manufacturer's standard background color coating over enamel-filled copy. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. B. Mounting Methods: 1. Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris.Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage tape adhesive. END OF SECTION 10 14 23.16 Room-Identification Panel Signage 10 14 23.16-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 10 21 13.19 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-plastic toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for blocking. 2. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for blocking. 3. Section 10 28 00 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for accessories mounted on toilet compartments. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Solid-plastic toilet compartments: B. Shop Drawings: For solid-plastic toilet compartments. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details. C. Samples: For each type of toilet compartment material indicated. 1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving material and color selection. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: 1. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment by manufacturer. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. Plastic Toilet Compartments 10 2113.19-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Performance:Tested in accordance with, and pass the acceptance criteria of, NFPA 286. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Department of Justice "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design" and ICC A117.1 and Texas Accessibility Code requirements for toilet compartments designated as accessible. 2.2 SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS A. ui7 ul �uu�u a~fir Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. ASI Global Partitions. 2. Scranton Products. B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced. C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung Overhead braced. D. Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, no-sightline system, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material. 1. Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges. 2. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, stainless-steel strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-plastic components to hinder malicious combustion. 3. Color and Pattern: Two colors and patterns in each room as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. E. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; polymer. F. Urinal-Screen Post: Manufacturer's standard post design of material matching the thickness and construction of pilasters; with shoe and sleeve (cap) matching that on the pilaster. G. Brackets (Fittings): 1. Full-Height(Continuous)Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel. 2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories, Heavy Duty: Manufacturer's heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard integral hinge for solid polymer doors. Plastic Toilet Compartments 10 2113.19-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty,surface-mounted,cast-stainless steel latch unit, designed to resist damage due to slamming, with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper, and with provision for emergency access. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through bolts. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's heavy-duty combination cast-stainless steel hook and rubber- tipped bumper, sized to prevent inswinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. Mount with through bolts. 4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty, rubber-tipped, cast-stainless steel bumper at outswinging doors. Mount with through bolts. 5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's heavy-duty, cast-stainless steel pull at outswinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through bolts. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B26/B26M. B. Aluminum Extrusions:ASTM 6221. C. Brass Castings:ASTM 8584. D. Brass Extrusions: ASTM 8455. E. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. F. Stainless Steel Castings: ASTM A743/A743M. G. Zamac: ASTM B86, commercial zinc-alloy die castings. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories where required for attachment of toilet accessories. B. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. C. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage. Plastic Toilet Compartments 10 2113.19-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Urinal-Screen Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at bottoms of posts. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at posts to conceal anchorage. E. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide, inswinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide, outswinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight,level,and plumb.Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch. 2. Full-Height(Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full-height brackets. a. Locate bracket fasteners, so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. B. Overhead-Braced Units:Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb,and tighten.Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels and adjust, so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. C. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units:Secure pilasters to supporting construction and level, plumb, and tighten. Hang doors and adjust, so doors are level and aligned with panels,when doors are in closed position. D. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on inswinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on outswinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. END OF SECTION 10 2113.19 Plastic Toilet Compartments 10 2113.19-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 10 22 13 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Heavy-duty wire mesh partitions. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Intermediate Crimp: Wires pass over one and under the next adjacent wire in both directions, with wires crimped before weaving and with extra crimps between the intersections. B. Lock Crimp: Deep crimps at points of the intersection that lock wires securely in place. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Wire mesh partitions. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Indicate clearances required for operation of gates. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard color sheets, showing full range of available colors for units with factory-applied color finishes. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver wire mesh items crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Use vented plastic. B. Inventory wire mesh partition door hardware on receipt and provide secure lockup for wire mesh partition door hardware delivered to Project site. 1. Tag each item or package separately with identification and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. Wire Mesh Partitions 102213-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with wire mesh units by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. hAanulnuc uuucrs" Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acorn Wire & Iron Works. 2. American Wire Corporation. 3. California Wire Products Corporation. 4. Central Wire & Iron Works, LLC. 5. G-S Company(The). 6. Indiana Wire Products, Inc. 7. Kenco Wire& Iron Products Inc. 8. King Wire Partitions, Inc. 9. Miller Wire Works, Inc. 10. Newark Wire Works Inc. 11. R.J. Donaldson, Inc. 12. SpaceGuard Products. 13. Standard Wire &Steel Works. 14. WIPCO; a division ofJesco Industries, Inc. 15. WireCrafters, LLC. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the Texas Accessibility Standards for doors and gates designated as accessible. 2.3 HEAVY-DUTY WIRE MESH PARTITIONS A. Mesh: 1. 0.192-inch- diameter steel wire, resistance welded into 1-1/2-by-2-1/2-inch rectangular mesh. B. Vertical and Horizontal Panel Framing: 1-1/2-by-3/4-by-1/8-inch cold-rolled steel channels;with holes for 3/8-inch-diameter bolts not more than 12 inches o.c. C. Horizontal Panel Stiffeners: Two cold-rolled steel channels, 1 by 1/2 by 1/8 inch, bolted or riveted toe to toe through mesh. Wire Mesh Partitions 102213-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Top Capping Bars: 3-by-1-inch steel channels. E. Posts for 90-Degree Corners: 1-1/2-by-1-1/2-by-1/8-inch steel angles or tubes, with holes for 3/8-inch- diameter bolts aligning with bolt holes in vertical framing; with 1/4-inch steel base plates. F. Adjustable Corner Posts:Two 1-1/2-by-3/4-by-1/8-inch cold-rolled, steel channels or 2-by-2-by- 0.075-inch steel tubes connected by steel hinges at 36 inches o.c. attached to posts; with 1/4- inch- diameter bolt holes aligning with bolt holes in vertical framing; with 1/4-inch steel base plates. G. Line Posts: 3-inch-by-4.1-Ib or 3-1/2-by-1-1/4-by-1/8-inch steel channels; with 1/4-inch steel base plates. H. Three- and Four-Way Intersection Posts: 2-by-2-by-0.075-inch steel tubes, with holes for 3/8- inch-diameter bolts aligned for bolting to adjacent panels; with 1/4-inch steel base plates. I. Floor Shoes: Metal, not less than 2 inches high; sized to suit vertical framing, drilled for attachment to floor, and with setscrews for leveling adjustment. J. Swinging Doors: Fabricated from same mesh as partitions, with framing fabricated from 1-1/2- by-3/4-by-1/8-inch steel channels, banded with 1-1/2-by-1/8-inch flat steel bar cover plates on four sides, and with 1/8-inch-thick angle strike bar and cover on strike jamb. 1. Hinges: Full-surface type, 3-1/2-by-3-1/2-inch steel, three per door; bolted, riveted, or welded to door and jamb framing. 2. Cylinder Lock: Mortise type with cylinder specified in Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware"; operated by key outside and recessed turn knob inside; mounted in lower section of door. 3. Inactive Leaf Hardware: Cane bolt at bottom and chain bolt at top. K. Accessories: 1. Wall Clips: Manufacturer's standard, cold-rolled steel sheet; allowing up to 1 inch of adjustment. L. Finish: Powder-coated finish unless otherwise indicated. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Steel Wire:ASTM A510/A510M. B. Steel Plates, Channels,Angles, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. C. Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS),Type B. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. Wire Mesh Partitions 1022 13-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• E. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, cold-formed structural-steel tubing or ASTM A513/A513M, Type 5, mandrel-drawn mechanical tubing. F. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS),Type B; with G60 zinc (galvanized) or A60 zinc-iron-alloy(galvannealed) coating designation. G. Panel-to-Panel Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard steel bolts, nuts, and washers. H. Post-Installed Anchors: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E488/E488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components are zinc plated to comply with ASTM 8633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless steel bolts, ASTM FS93, and nuts, ASTM F594. I. Zinc-Rich Primer: Compatible with topcoat, complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29. J. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate wire mesh items from components of sizes not less than those indicated. Use larger-sized components as recommended by wire mesh item manufacturer. Furnish bolts, hardware, and accessories required for complete installation with manufacturer's standard finishes. 1. Fabricate wire mesh items to be readily disassembled. 2. Welding: Weld corner joints of framing and grind smooth, leaving no evidence of joint. B. Heavy-Duty Wire Mesh Partitions: Fabricate wire mesh partitions with cutouts for pipes, ducts, beams, and other items indicated. Finish edges of cutouts to provide a neat, protective edge. 1. Mesh: Securely clinch mesh to framing. 2. Framing: Fabricate framing with mortise-and-tenon corner construction. a. Provide horizontal stiffeners as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by panel height and as recommended by wire mesh partition manufacturer.Weld horizontal stiffeners to vertical framing. b. Fabricate three- and four-way intersections using manufacturer's standard connecting clips and fasteners. C. Fabricate partition and door framing with slotted holes for connecting adjacent panels. 3. Fabricate wire mesh partitions with 3 to 4 inches of clear space between finished floor and bottom horizontal framing. 4. Fabricate wire mesh partitions with bottom horizontal framing flush with finished floor. Wire Mesh Partitions 102213-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 5. Doors: Align bottom of door with bottom of adjacent panels. a. For doors that do not extend full height of partition, provide transom over door, fabricated from same mesh and framing as partition panels. 6. Hardware Preparation: Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap doors and framing as required to install hardware. 2.6 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A153/A153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A123/A123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post-galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean items of grease, dirt, oil,flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." D. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating,apply manufacturer's standard baked-on powder-coat finish, suitable for use indicated, with a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine floors for suitable conditions where wire mesh items will be installed. C. Examine walls to which wire mesh items will be attached for properly located blocking,grounds, and other solid backing for attachment of support fasteners. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WIRE MESH PARTITIONS A. Anchor wire mesh partitions to floor with 3/8-inch- diameter, postinstalled expansion anchors at 12 inches o.c. through anchor clips located at each post and corner. Shim anchor clips as required to achieve level and plumb installation. Wire Mesh Partitions 102213-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Anchor wire mesh partitions to floor with 3/8-inch- diameter, postinstalled expansion anchors at 12 inches o.c.through floor shoes located at each post and corner.Adjust wire mesh partition posts in floor shoes to achieve level and plumb installation. 1. Anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if indicated on Shop Drawings. C. Anchor wire mesh partitions to walls at 12 inches o.c.through back corner panel framing and as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use expansion anchors. D. Secure top capping bars to top framing channels with 1/4-inch- diameter, "U" bolts spaced not more than 28 inches o.c. E. Provide line posts at locations indicated or, if not indicated, as follows: 1. On each side of sliding-door openings. 2. For partitions that are 7 to 9 ft. high, spaced at 15 to 20 ft. o.c. F. Provide seismic supports and bracing as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer and as required for stability, extending and fastening members to supporting structure. G. Where standard-width wire mesh partition panels do not fill entire length of run, provide adjustable filler panels to fill openings. H. Install doors complete with door hardware. I. Weld or bolt sheet metal bases to wire mesh partitions and doors where indicated. J. Bolt accessories to wire mesh partition framing. 3.3 REPAIR A. Repair Painting: 1. Wire brush and clean rust spots,welds, and abraded areas immediately after installation, and apply repair paint with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC- PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces. a. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. B. Repair of Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M. Wire Mesh Partitions 102213-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust gates to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. Adjust hardware to function smoothly. Verify that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Remove and replace defective work, including doors and framing that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. END OF SECTION 10 22 13 Wire Mesh Partitions 102213-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 10 22 37 VERTICALLY FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of vertical folding panel partitions: 1. Automatic vertical folding acoustical panel partition system. B. Provide automatic vertical folding panel partitions as shown on the Drawings including all necessary hardware, seals, lifting machinery, and electrical controls. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 5416 "Hydraulic Cement Underlayment" for leveling floor as required. 2. Division 05 Sections "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous support steel for the lifting machinery for the vertical folding panel partitions. 3. Section 08 3113 "Access Doors and Frames" for access doors required to service vertical folding panel partition components. 4. Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board" for ceiling storage pockets, bulkheads and sound insulation. 5. Division 26 Sections for power and control wiring and switches. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data including material descriptions, construction details, finishes,installation details,and operating instructions for each type of operable panel partition, component, and accessory specified. Include data on acoustical performance, surface-burning characteristics, and durability. B. Shop Drawings:Submit shop drawings showing location and extent of vertical folding partitions. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other construction and accessories. Indicate dimensions;weights; conditions at openings and for stacking; and required installation, stacking, and operating clearances. Show blocking to be provided by others. Include plans, elevations, at not less than 1/4" to V-0" (1:50) scale and details of sections and connections at not less than 3" to V-0" (1:5) scale. Include the following: 1. Calculations: Calculate requirements for supporting vertical folding partitions and verify capacity of carriers and track components to support loads; indicate deflection limits for Vertically Folding Panel Partitions 102237-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• partition and adjacent construction. Submit templates and fabrication drawings for cutouts required for support beam. 2. Indicate specified wallcovering and direction of pattern. 3. Indicate stacking and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel. 4. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed material,finish, covering, or facing. 1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed material,finish, covering,or facing, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Fabric Facing Material: Full width by not less than 36-inch- (914-mm-) long section of fabric from dye lot to be used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat. 2. Panel Edge Material: Not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long. 3. Hardware: One of each exposed door-operating device. E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vertical folding partitions. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans,drawn to scale,on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Partition supports and bracing, switches, and storage layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which suspension systems are attached. 4. Size and location of access panels. 5. Plenum acoustical barriers. B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. C. Product Test Reports: For each operable panel partition, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. D. Field quality-control reports. E. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For vertical folding partitions to include in maintenance manuals. Vertically Folding Panel Partitions 102237-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Panel finish facings and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. 2. Seals, hardware, and other operating components. 3. Electric operator and controls. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same production run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Panel Finish-Facing Material: Furnish full width in quantity to cover both sides of two panels when installed. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications:The installer shall have had a minimum of 10 years successful experience in the installation of vertical folding panel partition system work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and shall be certified in writing by the vertical folding panel partition system manufacturer as qualified to install the manufacturer's partition systems. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.8 SITE CONDITIONS A. The floor underneath the operable wall along its axis,shall be flat to within+/- 1/4" (6 mm)over the entire length of an operable wall.The peak to valley undulation of+/- 1/4" (6 mm) shall not be closer together than 24" (610 mm) and a peak to valley undulation of+/- 1/8" (3 mm) shall not be closer than 12" (305 mm). B. Support steel above the operable wall along its axis shall be parallel to the floor within +/-1/2" (12.7 mm)for the entire length of the operable wall.This includes loaded deflection.The beam must also be parallel to the centerline of the wall within + 1/8" (3 mm), left to right. C. The fixed walls at either end of the operable wall shall be within +1/4" (6 mm)-0", from plumb vertical. D. The fixed walls at either end of the operable wall shall be flat to within +0", -1/4" (6 mm). 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of vertical folding partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Vertically Folding Panel Partitions 102237-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: 2. Faulty operation of vertical folding panel partitions. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. 4. Warranty Period: a. Materials and Workmanship: Two years or 5,000 operation cycles, whichever occurs first, from the date of Substantial Completion. b. Acoustical Performance: Ten years from the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Acoustical Performance: Provide vertical folding partitions tested by a qualified testing agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated: 1. Sound-Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested for laboratory sound-transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated. a. STC 55. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide panels with finishes complying with one of the following as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723;testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. D. Lifting equipment shall be sized to open and close the wall effectively over the 10,000 cycle design life of the wall, at the minimum design speed of approximately 5 to 10 vertical feet per minute. 2.2 VERTICAL FOLDING ACOUSTICAL PANEL PARTITION A. Basis of Design Product: Zenith 55 Automatic Vertically Retractable Acoustic Walls with and STC (System) Rating of 55 by Skyfold Inc., Baie d'Urfe (Montreal), Quebec, Canada. 2.3 OPERATION A. The vertical folding partition shall be designed such that when in the down position (closed)they are rigid, flat, plumb walls, made of a grid of rectangular panels, and when lifted (opened), fold upward (vertically) without the use of any manual labor, in a manner similar to an accordion at the top of the wall, into a pocket in the ceiling forming a finished surface. Vertically Folding Panel Partitions 102237-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. The vertical folding panel partition shall be opened and closed using two push button switches wired in series with power controlled by a single, three position key switch. Turning the key from the "off" position shall cause the operable wall to move in the designated direction "up" or "down" once both push buttons are depressed. When hand pressure is removed,the operable wall shall immediately stop. The vertical folding panel partition shall stop in a quick and positive fashion without coasting. As a normal part of the operation, it shall be possible to partially open (or close)the vertical folding partition, stop it and then reverse the operation.There shall be two (2)switches per vertical folding partition, located on opposite sides of the vertical folding partition at opposite ends of the wall,wired in series.One switch shall be equipped with an LED that flashes fault codes in case of a failure with the electrical system. B. The motor assembly shall be mounted directly above the center line of the vertical folding partition. C. Electrical: 1. The vertical folding partition shall be equipped for a 208 volt, 3 phase power supply to the electrical control box. 2. Standard electrical control box will be NEMA 1. NEMA 4 is also available upon request. 3. Low voltage wiring (by others). 18-gauge wiring from the switches to the control box. 4. Switches:Two (2) push button switches wired in series with power controlled by a single, three position key switch. One switch shall be equipped with an LED that flashes fault codes in case of a failure with the electrical system. (Installation and wiring by others). D. Safety Equipment: 1. The vertical folding partition shall employ an electromagnetic type of brake which shall activate firmly,without hesitation,when power is lost to the system.The brake shall have a minimum retarding torque rating equal to 200%of the power drive full load torque.The drive system shall be equipped with a manual override and brake release lever. The vertical folding partition shall employ a dynamic brake, distinct and separate from the brake above, in order to lower the vertical folding partition at a controlled speed of no more than approximately 150% of the normal down speed, in the case of a catastrophic failure in the power train. Alternately, the vertical folding partition shall employ a brake, distinct and separate from the brakes above, in order to completely halt the downward motion of the operable wall in the case of a catastrophic failure in the power train. 2. The vertical folding partition shall employ electrical or other limit switches in order to stop the wall at the up and down travel limits. 3. The operable wall shall employ an over torque detector in order to sense a jam in the system and to act as an over travel limit in the up direction should the primary limit switch fail to act. This over torque sensor shall be mechanical, using the motor's torque arm in it's over torque detection. 4. The lifting equipment shall use the latest in industry standards in thermal protection, overload protection, quick acting fuses, etc., in order to ensure the safety and reliability of the system. 5. The vertical folding partition shall be equipped with an optical sensor that will cut power to the lifting equipment if an object or person passes between the emitter and receiver. Vertically Folding Panel Partitions 102237-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• The vertical folding partition will then automatically reverse direction for approximately 3 seconds to clear the object. Regular operation of the vertical folding partition shall resume once the key switch has been released and the obstruction removed. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Panel Materials: 1. Steel Frame: Steel sheet, manufacturer's standard nominal minimum thickness for uncoated steel. 2. Steel Face/Liner Sheets: Tension-leveled steel sheet, manufacturer's standard minimum nominal thickness for uncoated steel. 3. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use, corrosion resistance, and finish indicated; ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) for extrusions; manufacturer's standard strengths and thicknesses for type of use. 4. Frame Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard steel or aluminum. B. Lifting Cable: ASTM A1023, galvanized 6x31 Warrington Seale IWRC; diameter as required to carry entire wall with a safety factor of 5. C. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and accessories; with decorative, protective finish. 1. Hinges: Concealed (invisible). D. Folding Mechanism: 1. The hanging, folding and extension mechanism shall be, as much as possible, made from structural grade aluminum extrusions and structural shapes, in order to minimize the weight of the system. 2. All wear surfaces, such as bushings, spacers, pins, discs, bearings, and sleeves shall be designed to function quietly and with minimum wear, over the 10,000-cycle design life of the operable wall. 3. The hangers, which fasten the lifting mechanism to the support steel, shall be fabricated from steel and shall be welded or bolted to the support steel supplied by others. E. Motor Drive: 1. The motor drive shall be sized properly so that it can open and close the wall effectively over the 10,000-cycle design life of the wall, at the minimum design speed of approximately 5 to 10 vertical feet per minute. The folding mechanism shall be designed to function as smoothly, quietly and safely as possible. Wherever possible, ball bearings shall be used instead of bushings and wear surfaces. In no circumstance shall chain or belt drive systems be acceptable. 2. There shall be a wire rope cable for every set of folding mechanism.This cable shall be of 6 x 31 construction aircraft cable and shall be made of galvanized steel. The diameter of the cables shall be sized so that they shall be able to hold the entire weight of the wall, with the appropriate safety factor. Vertically Folding Panel Partitions 102237-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• a. The cable wraps on yoyo drums with 2 safety wraps and multiple layers of cable. b. The line shaft, sized to deliver the required torque with minimum deflection, shall support and rotate the cable drums. 3. Flange bearings shall be used for the drive system, located immediately on both sides of the drum assembly. a. The motor drive shall be sized to deliver sufficient amount of torque to safely and effectively raise and lower the operable wall over its design life. 4. The motor drive shall use the latest in industry standards in thermal protection, overload protection, quick acting fuses, etc., in order to ensure the safety and reliability of the system. 2.5 SOUND SEALS A. The operable wall shall automatically and acoustically seal against the floor without the need for any manual intervention.The floor seals shall leave a joint between the floor and the bottom acoustical panels of not more than approximately 2 (51 mm). B. The operable wall shall seal to the wall track with brush seals and leave a joint between the lifting mechanism and the track of no more than approximately 3/4 (19 mm). C. The operable wall shall automatically and acoustically seal against the ceiling without any manual intervention.The top seals shall leave a joint between the top acoustical panels and the ceiling of the pocket of not more than approximately 2 (51 mm). 2.6 PANEL FINISH FACINGS A. General: Provide finish facings for panels that comply with indicated fire-test-response characteristics and that are factory applied to vertical folding partitions with appropriate backing, using mildew-resistant nonstaining adhesive as recommended by facing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply one-piece,seamless facings free of air bubbles,wrinkles, blisters,and other defects, with edges tightly butted,and with no gaps or overlaps.Vertical seams are not permitted. Tightly secure and conceal raw and selvage edges of facing for finished appearance. a. Where facings with directional, repeating, or matching grain are indicated, mark facing top and attach facing in same direction. B. Wall Covering (WC##): As indicated on the Finish Schedule on the Drawings. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Factory assemble all components, assemblies and systems into the largest possible assemblies in order to minimize the amount of assembly on site. Vertically Folding Panel Partitions 102237-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of vertical folding partitions. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install vertical folding partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed in area of partition installation. B. Install panels from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings. C. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable. D. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not acceptable. E. Light-Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical joints and top and bottom seals for voids. Adjust partitions for alignment and full closure of vertical joints and full closure along top and bottom seals. Perform test and make adjustments before NIC testing. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. NIC Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 1. Testing Extent: Testing agency shall randomly select one operable panel partition installation(s)for testing. 2. Testing Methodology: Perform testing of installed operable panel partition for noise isolation according to ASTM E 336,determined by ASTM E 413,and rated for not less than NIC indicated.Adjust and fit partitions to comply with NIC test method requirements. B. An operable panel partition installation will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust vertical folding partitions, hardware, and other moving parts to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. Vertically Folding Panel Partitions 102237-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Verify that safety devices are properly functioning. 3.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by manufacturer's authorized service representative. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operable-partition operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain vertically folding partitions. END OF SECTION 10 22 37 Vertically Folding Panel Partitions 102237-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 10 26 00 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Corner guards. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of wall protection showing locations and extent. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CORNER GUARDS A. Surface-Mounted, Stainless Steel Corner Guards : Manufacturer's standard corner guard; including mounting screws. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Western Fabricating LLC; CornerGuard.net: Code 10109616. 2. Stainless Steel, minimum 16 guage wall thickness. a. Size: 1 inch x 1 inch x full-height of wall. b. Profile:Square corner with counter sunk holes with stainless steel flat head screws with wings. C. Color and Texture: #4 Brushed Satin Stainless Steel Finish . PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation Quality: Install wall and door protection according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks,voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. Wall and Door Protection 102600-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Mounting Heights: Install wall protection in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings or as directed by Architect. C. Accessories: Provide screws required for a complete installation. END OF SECTION 10 26 00 Wall and Door Protection 102600-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Public-use shower room accessories. 3. Hand dryers. 4. Childcare accessories. 5. Custodial accessories. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified,full size. 1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample warranties. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Hand Dryers: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace hand dryers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Toilet, Bath,and Laundry Accessories 102800-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Structural Performance: Design accessories and fasteners to comply with the following requirements: 1. Grab Bars: Installed units are able to resist 250 IV concentrated load applied in any direction and at any point. 2. Shower Seats: Installed units are able to resist 360 Ibf applied in any direction and at any point. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. A&J Washroom Accessories. 2. ASI American Specialties, Inc.;ASI Group. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. Gamco Commercial Restroom Accessories; Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 2.3 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Grab Bar TA-1,TA-2 and TA-10: 1. Basis of Design: Bobrick B-6806 Series. a. TA-1: Bobrick B-6806 x 36" b. TA-2: Bobrick B-6806 x 42" C. TA-10: Bobrick B-6861- Horizontal Two-Wall Bar for Shower Stall. 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick. a. Finish: Smooth,ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). 4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. 5. Configuration and Length:As indicated on Drawings. B. Toilet Tissue Dispenser TA-3: 1. OFCI: Owner-Furnished, Contractor Installed. C. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit TA-4: 1. Basis of Design: Bobrick B-270. Toilet, Bath,and Laundry Accessories 102800-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel,ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). D. Paper Towel Dispenser TA-5: 1. OFCI: Owner-Furnished, Contractor Installed. E. Soap Dispenser TA-6: 1. OFCI: Owner-Furnished, Contractor Installed. F. Mirror Unit TA-7: 1. Frame:Type 430 Stainless steel channel, 1/2" x 1/2" x 3/8" with bright polished finish. a. Corners: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Size: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Hangers: Manufacturer's standard rigid, tamper and theft resistant. 2.4 PUBLIC-USE SHOWER ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Shower Curtain Rod TA-12: 1. Basis of Design: Bobrick B-6047. 2. Description: 1-1/4-inch-outside diameter, straight rod. 3. Configuration:As indicated on Drawings 4. Mounting Flanges: Exposed fasteners; in material and finish matching rod. 5. Rod Material and Finish: Stainless steel,ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). B. Shower Curtain Liner TA-12: 1. Basis of Design: Bobrick 204. 2. Size: Minimum 12 inches wider than opening by 72 inches high. 3. Material: Vinyl, minimum 0.008 inch thick, opaque, matte. 4. Color: White. 5. Grommets: Corrosion resistant at minimum 6 inches o.c. through top hem. 6. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless steel, spring wire curtain hooks with snap fasteners,sized to accommodate specified curtain rod. Provide one hook per curtain grommet. C. Nurse's Cubicle Curtain Track and Accessories TA-19: 1. Basis of Design: Inpro Architectural Products; Nanotrac Cubicle Track System. a. Overhead metal curtain track&guides. b. Track accessories and attachments. 2. Track Material a. Nanotrac,extruded aluminum cubicle track with white baked acrylic enamel finish. Aluminum shall be 6063-T5. Dimensions: height 1/2" (13mm), width 5/8" (16mm). Toilet, Bath,and Laundry Accessories 102800-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3. Track Components a. Track Splice: Provide molded thermoplastic splice to join track sections. b. End Caps: Provide molded thermoplastic end caps for end of track section. C. Wands: Provide wand of appropriate length for ceiling height to move curtain along track. d. Curtain Carriers: Provide non-binding carriers to accurately fit track. Carriers to be fitted to curtain to prevent accidental curtain removal. Number and spacing shall be as recommended by track manufacturer. e. Tie Backs: Provide manufacturer's standard curtain tie to hold curtain back. f. Adjustable Drop Chain: Provide drop chain and adjust on site to accommodate curtain at desired height for air/stream circulation. D. Folding Shower Seat TA-11: 1. Basis of Design: Bobrick B-5181. 2. Configuration: L-shaped seat, designed for wheelchair access. 3. Seat: Phenolic or polymeric composite of slat-type or one-piece construction in color as selected by Architect. 4. Mounting Mechanism: Stainless steel,ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). E. Robe Hook(Towel Pin)TA-13: 1. Basis of Design: Bobricl< B-677. 2. Description: 3-3/8 inch long, single-prong unit. 3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel,ASTM A480/A480M No. 7 finish (polished). 2.5 HAND DRYERS A. High-Speed Air Dryer TA-8: 1. I3&'J, cd II) ,Ju�oin V u .xj uc i.Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Dyson Inc.; Dyson Airblade V hand dryer. 2. Description: High-speed, unheated-air hand dryer for rapid hand drying. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. a. Protrusion Limit: Installed unit protrudes maximum 4 inches from wall surface. 4. Operation: Infrared-sensor activated with timed power cut-off switch. a. Average Dry Time: 12 seconds. b. Automatic Shut Off: At 30 seconds. 5. Maximum Sound Level: 79 dB. 6. Cover Material and Finish: Polycarbonate with antibacterial sprayed nickel. 7. Electrical Requirements: Refer to Electrical Drawings. 2.6 CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES A. Diaper-Changing Station TA-15: 1. Basis of Design: Koala Kare Products KB110-SSWM. Toilet, Bath,and Laundry Accessories 102800-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with child-protection strap. a. Engineered to support minimum of 250-Ib static load when opened. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted, with unit projecting not more than 4 inches from wall when closed. 4. Operation: By pneumatic shock-absorbing mechanism. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin), exterior shell with rounded plastic corners; HDPE interior in manufacturer's standard color. Interior shall be antimicrobial. 6. Liner Dispenser: Provide built-in dispenser for disposable sanitary liners. 2.7 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A. Custodial Mop and Broom Holder TA-14: 1. Basis of Design: Bobrick B-239. 2. Description: Utility Shelf with Mop/Broom Holders and Rag Hooks. 3. Length: 34 inches. 4. Hooks: Four. 5. Mop/Broom Holders:Three, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel,ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 finish (satin). a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0,05-inch-thick stainless steel. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 1. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. B. Grab Bars: Install to comply with specified structural-performance requirements. C. Shower Seats: Install to comply with specified structural-performance requirements. D. Baby Changing Station: Install to comply with specified structural-performance requirements. END OF SECTION 10 28 00 Toilet, Bath,and Laundry Accessories 102800-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 10 44 13 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire-protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. 2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Van ufactu reiirs Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Babcock-Davis. Fire Protection Cabinets 104413-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• b. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Activar Construction Products Group, Inc.; Cosmopolitan. C. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. d. Potter Roemer LLC; a Division of Morris Group International. B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. 1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.043-inch- thick cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- thick fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. C. Cabinet Material: Stainless steel sheet. D. Semi-recessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface, with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). 1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth. E. Cabinet Trim Material: Stainless steel sheet. F. Door Material: Stainless steel sheet. G. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame. H. Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet. 1. Clear transparent acrylic sheet. I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. J. Accessories: 1. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect. a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." 1) Location:Applied to cabinet glazing. 2) Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Lettering Color: Red. 4) Orientation: Vertical. K. Materials: 1. Stainless Steel:ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666,Type 304. a. Finish: ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 directional satin finish, . Fire Protection Cabinets 104413-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box(tub)with trim,frame,door,and hardware to suit cabinet type,trim style, and door style indicated. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Prepare recesses for semi-recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. B. Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or,if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. D. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated. E. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. END OF SECTION 10 44 13 Fire Protection Cabinets 104413-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Refer to Section 10 44 13- Fire Protection Cabinets 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Fire Extinguishers 104416-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. 1. ndiroiuf;u ;;auuud urv° Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Babcock-Davis. b. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. C. Kidde; Carrier Global Corporation. d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. e. Potter Roemer LLC; a Division of Morris Group International. 2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 10 lbs. nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container. 2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS-Where indicated on Drawings. A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish. B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. a. Orientation: Vertical. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Install fire extinguishers in fire protection cabinets and mounting brackets at locations indicated on the drawings and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. Fire Extinguishers 104416-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Mounting Height: Top of fire extinguisher to be located above finished floor at height required by the Texas Accessibility Standards. END OF SECTION 10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers 104416-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 10 51 26 PLASTIC LOCKERS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid high-density polyethylene (HDPE) plastic lockers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for concealed wood support furring and blocking behind lockers. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of locker. B. Shop Drawings: For plastic lockers. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in lockers. 3. Show locker fillers,trim, base, sloping tops, and accessories. 4. Show locker identification system and numbering sequence. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of locker. 1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving material and color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Plastic panels, not less than 3 by 3 inches,for each type,color, pattern,and surface finish. 2. Exposed locker hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. Plastic Lockers 105126-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample warranties. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching mechanisms. 1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for periodic cleaning and maintenance of each component. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store lockers in manufacturer's original unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Do not deliver lockers until painting and similar operations that could damage lockers have been completed in installation areas. If lockers must be stored in other-than-installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions are the same as those in final installation location and comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install lockers until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F during remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements:Where lockers are indicated to fit to other construction,verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. C. Established Dimensions: Where lockers are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where lockers are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that lockers can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware" to fabricator of lockers; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. Plastic Lockers 105126-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.9 SEQUENCING A. Supply lockers to affected trades in time to avoid interruption of the construction process. B. Provide location templates and other information required for locker installation to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of the construction process. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace plastic locker components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 Source Limitations A. Obtain plastic lockers from single source from single manufacturer. 1. Obtain locks from single lock manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Accessibility Standard: For lockers indicated to be accessible, comply with applicable provisions in the Texas Accessibility Standards. B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with requirements of the ADA and of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.3 PLASTIC LOCKERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ASI Storage Solutions;an ASI Group company;Plastic Traditional Collection Lockers or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 2. Hollman, Inc. 3. Bradley Lenox"Z" Locker. B. Construction Style: Manufacturer's standard means of factory assembly with rabbeted joinery and tamper-resistant mechanical fasteners. C. Configuration: Z-Style tier. Plastic Lockers 105126-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Body: Fabricated from solid HDPE plastic panels. 1. Side Panels: 3/8 inch thick. 2. Back Panel: 3/8 inch thick. 3. Top Panel: 3/8 inch thick. 4. Bottom Panel: 3/8 inch thick. 5. Shelves: 3/8 inch thick. E. Doors and Door Frames: 1/2-inch- thick, solid HDPE plastic panel, with machined ventilation slots on door face. F. End Panels: 1/2-inch-thick, solid HDPE plastic panel matching doors. G. Base: 1-inch-thick by 4-inch- high, solid HDPE plastic; black color. H. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Plastic Panels: Solid HDPE complying with ASTM D4976. 2.5 HARDWARE A. Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Manufacturer's standard; black HDPE plastic cup with integral door pull, recessed locking device that does not protrude beyond door face; pry and vandal resistant, solidly mounted to the internal latch bar. 1. Latch bar to be made of 1/2-inch-thick HDPE plastic, securely attached to interior of the door, continuous in design and capable of accepting various locking mechanisms. B. Locks: Combination padlocks. C. Continuous Hinges: Manufacturer's standard full height; steel with black, powder-coated finish. D. Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard;etched,embossed,or stamped aluminum plates, with black numbers at least 1/2 inch high. E. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard; ball-pointed, zinc-plated steel hooks. F. Coat Rods: Manufacturer's standard. 2.6 LOCKER BENCHES A. Pedestal-Leg Locker Benches: Bench top supported by pedestal legs, minimum of two pedestals for each bench, with overall height as indicated on Drawings measured from top of bench to floor, as follows: Plastic Lockers 105126-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ASI Storage Solutions; an ASI Group company; Locker Benches or comparable product. 2. Steel Tube Pedestals: 1-1/2-inch- diameter powder-coated steel tubing with 8-inch- diameter flanges with three mounting holes at each end. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Bench Tops: 1-1/4 inch lacquered hardwood. a. Width: 9-1/2 inch deep except where accessible benches are indicated, provide minimum 20-inch width. b. Length: as indicated on Drawings. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type, exposed bolt heads; with self-locking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts. B. Anchors: Material, type, and size required for secure anchorage to each substrate. 1. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls, and elsewhere as indicated,for corrosion resistance. 2. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. C. Wood Support Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content, treated with manufacturer's standard preservative-treatment process, as specified in Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry." 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate and supply factory preassembled lockers, complete with hardware and accessories. B. Fabricate each locker with shelves; a single door and frame; and a single top, bottom, and back; and with common intermediate uprights separating compartments. 1. Fabricate lockers to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. C. Fabricate lockers square, rigid, without warp, and with finished faces flat and free of scratches and chips. Factory machine components to suit attachments. Make joints tight and true. 1. Fabricate lockers using manufacturer's standard mortise and tenon construction. 2. Provide slope tops and end panels as required to complete installation as indicated on Drawings. D. Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows: 1. Locate bottom shelf minimum 15 inches above finished floor. 2. Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate maximum 48 inches above finished floor. Plastic Lockers 105126-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop unable to be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices removable after trial fitting. Verify that parts fit as intended, and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. 2. Use only locker manufacturer's brackets, nuts, bolts,screws, and other anchoring devices for assembly. F. Shop-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and floors or support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that furring is attached to concrete and masonry walls receiving lockers. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Condition lockers to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. B. Before installing lockers,examine factory-fabricated work for completeness and complete work as required, including removal of packing. C. Thoroughly clean surfaces prior to installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install lockers in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install lockers level, plumb, and true; use concealed shims. Plastic Lockers 105126-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Connect groups of lockers together with manufacturer's standard stainless steel, theft-proof fasteners, through predrilled holes in locker interior. Fit lockers accurately together to form flush,tight, hairline joints. D. Install lockers without distortion for doors and drawers to fit and align with openings. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Installation Tolerance: Maximum 1/8- in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. Shim as required with concealed shims. E. Locker Anchorage: Fasten lockers through back, near top and bottom, at ends with anchoring devices furnished, and spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. F. Scribe and cut corner and filler panels to fit adjoining work using fasteners concealed where practical. Repair damaged finish at cuts. G. Attach sloping-top units to lockers, with end panels covering exposed ends. H. Locker Benches: Provide no fewer than two pedestals for each bench, uniformly spaced not more than 30 inches apart. Securely fasten tops of pedestals to undersides of bench tops, and anchor bases to floor. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors to operate easily without binding. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit use during construction. B. Clean exposed surfaces of lockers and hardware. C. Touch up marred finishes to factory-finished appearance or replace unrestorable lockers. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer. END OF SECTION 10 5126 Plastic Lockers 105126-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 10 71 13 EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED: A. Provision, fabrication and installation of Extruded Aluminum Sun Control Devices, as shown on drawings and specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. 1.2 RELATED WORK: A. Section 07 62 00-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim B. Section 07 92 00-Joint Sealants C. Section 03 30 00-Concrete D. Section 05 12 00-Structural Steel E. Section 0145 34-Windstorm Construction Requirements 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS: A. The Aluminum Association—Aluminum Design Manual 2010 B. American Welding Society-AWS D1.2/D1.2M: 2008 C. ASTM B 209 Aluminum &Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate D. ASTM B 221 Aluminum &Aluminum Ally Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes 1.4 SAMPLES: A. Submit samples in accordance with Section 0133 00-Submittal Procedures B. Product data: Submit Manufacturer's brochures, manuals and literature. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Includes the complete layout, sections, details, components, finishes, sizing, spacing, and fasteners specific to the project. The site-specific shop drawings shall show reactions at surface attachment points and bear the seal of a Registered Structural Engineer, licensed in Texas. 2. Submit shop drawings for approval by the Architect prior to fabrication of any materials. Exterior Sun Control Devices 107113-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3. Verify all dimensions and elevations prior to submittal to Architect. 4. Manufacturer shall field verify dimensions prior to fabrication. D. Finishes: samples of canopy finishes. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Canopy shall be designed to comply with state and local building codes. B. Comply with the requirements of Specification Section 01 45 34 - Windstorm Construction Requirements. C. Canopy manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years' experience in designing and installing the specified system. D. The installation of the canopy shall be performed by the manufacturer to assure single source responsibility. 1.6 MATERIALS: A. Delivery,Storage,and Handling: protect components from one another during shipping,storage and handling. Exercise care when unloading, storing, and erecting to prevent damage. 1.7 WARRANTY: A. Provide manufacturer's 1-year warranty against defects in material and workmanship. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS: A. Acceptable manufacturer for Extruded Aluminum Walkway Covers&Canopies: Subject to strict compliance with the specified requirements and the plans, the following manufacturer is acceptable: AVAdek Walkway Cover Systems&Canopies 12130 Galveston Road, Building 1 Webster,Texas 77598-1539 (713) 944-0988 or(800) 777-4031 2.2 MATERIALS: A. Components: all components shall be 6063, 6061, or 6005 alloy extruded aluminum. Exterior Sun Control Devices 107113-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Design Criteria: all components shall be sized to comply with live load and wind load requirements of the project and shall not be less than the dimensions shown on the plan. 2.3 COMPONENTS: A. Configuration: as shown on the drawings B. Sizes: minimum sizing as shown on the drawings C. Columns: all columns shall have radius corners D. Shading components: thickness shall be at least .080"thick E. Flashing:flashing thickness shall be at least .040"thick 2.4 FASTENERS, CONNECTIONS,AND FITTINGS: A. Bolted Connections: All bolts, nuts, washers, and screws used in joining the members shall be stainless steel up to 3/8" diameter. Over 3/8" diameter may be Hot Dipped Galvanized. B. Provide all structural attachment points flush with the outside surface of the building. C. Rafters shall be heliarc welded to wall mounting plates which are bolted to walls. D. Beams are fastened to Rafters with Concealed Clips. E. Blades are mechanically fastened to structure with Stainless Steel Screws,concealed where able. 2.5 FINISH: A. AAMA 607.5 Kynar 500 Fluoropolymer Based Painted 2 Coat: Color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's Full Color Line. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. The components and accessories are to be supplied and installed by the manufacturer. B. Install canopy in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Erect canopy after concrete and masonry work in the vicinity is completed and washed down. Exterior Sun Control Devices 107113-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.2 WORKMANSHIP: A. Take extreme care to prevent damage or scratching. Replace damaged components prior to installation. All workmanship must be top quality with meat miters and fitted joints. 3.3 CLEANING: A. Just prior to completion of project, strip protective coatings of covering from aluminum and clean all parts. Repair to new condition to replace any materials damaged during installation. END OF SECTION 10 7113 Exterior Sun Control Devices 107113-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 10 73 10 ALUMINUM PROTECTIVE COVERS (PRE-ENGINEERED ALUMINUM DECK) PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Design and installation of extruded aluminum walkway covers and canopies. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 0145 34-Windstorm Construction Requirements B. Section 03 30 00-Concrete C. Section 07 92 00-Joint Sealants 1.3 REFERENCES A. The Aluminum Association-Aluminum Design Manual 2010 B. American Welding Society-AWS D1.2/D1.2M: 2008 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturers brochures, manuals and literature. B. Shop drawings of the complete canopy layout includes sections and details specific to project along with calculations and bearing the seal of a registered structural engineer, licensed in Texas. C. Samples of canopy finishes. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Canopy shall be designed to comply with state and local building codes. B. Comply with the requirements of Specification Section 01 45 34 - Windstorm Construction Requirements. C. Canopy manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years' experience in designing and installing the specified system. D. The installation of the canopy shall be performed by the manufacturer to assure single source responsibility. Aluminum Protective Covers 107310- 1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable manufacturer for aluminum protective covers (pre-engineered aluminum deck): Subject to strict compliance with the specified requirements and the plans, the following manufacturer is acceptable: AVAdek Walkway Covers&Canopies 12130 Galveston Road, Building 1, Webster,Texas 77598-1539 (713) 944-0988 or(800) 777-4031 2.2 MATERIALS A. All components shall be 6063; 6061 or 6005 alloy extruded aluminum. B. Components shall be sized to comply with live load and wind load requirements of the project and shall not be less than the dimensions shown on the plan. C. The thickness of the aluminum deck panels shall be at least .080" thick. D. All columns shall have radius corners. E. Beams are open at top to drain canopy system internally into columns. F. Flashing shall be .040"thick. G. All bolts and fasteners shall be stainless steel or finished to match adjacent components and sized by canopy engineer. 2.3 FINISHES A. The finish and color selection of each component shall be as selected by Architect from the manufacturer's full line of colors and shall include: 1. AAMA 607.5 Kynar 500 Fluoropolymer Based Paint, 2 Coat. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. All welding shall be in compliance with AWS 1.2. The certification of each welder shall be available to verify compliance. Aluminum Protective Covers 107310-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 B. Canopy shall be designed to drain through beams to columns with watertight connections. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install the canopy in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Erect canopy after concrete and masonry within vicinity is completed and washed down. C. Install columns and beams straight and true. D. Install raincaps over draining sections of the deck. E. The contractor shall finish the concrete around the columns to assure a uniform quality of workmanship and appearance with the adjacent surrounding concrete work. F. Fill downspout columns with grout to the discharge level to prevent standing water. G. Install flashing as required. H. Care shall be taken to prevent damage or scratching during installation. I. Thoroughly clean canopy after installation. END OF SECTION 10 73 10 Aluminum Protective Covers 107310-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 10 75 16 GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes ground-set flagpoles made from aluminum . 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operating characteristics,fittings, accessories, and finishes for flagpoles. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flagpoles to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations:Obtain flagpoles as complete units,including fittings,accessories, bases,and anchorage devices,from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Flagpole assemblies, including anchorages and supports, to withstand design loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Wind Loads: Determine according to NAAMM FP 1001. Comply with 2015 International Building Code and with the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Requirements (120 mph wind velocity (ASD) (3 second gust) and an equivalent 155 mph wind velocity (LRFD), Exposure C, Risk Category III) . 2.3 ALUMINUM FLAGPOLES A. Aluminum Flagpoles: Cone -tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruded tubing complying with ASTM 13241/13241M,Alloy 6063,with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch. Ground-Set Flagpoles 107516-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. flnuiuGu ;�a;iu�u a°i Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Flagpole. b. Concord American Flagpole. C. US Flag& Flagpole Supply, LLC. B. Exposed Height: 30 feet. C. Metal Foundation Tube: Manufacturer's standard corrugated-steel foundation tube, 0,060-inch wall thickness with 3/16-inch steel bottom plate and support plate; 3/4-inch- diameter, steel ground spike; and steel centering wedges welded together. Galvanize foundation tube after assembly. Furnish loose hardwood wedges at top of foundation tube for plumbing pole. D. Sleeve for Aluminum Flagpole:foundation sleeve, made to fit flagpole,for casting into concrete foundation. 2.4 FITTINGS A. Finial Ball: Flush-seam ball, sized as indicated or, if not indicated, to match flagpole-butt diameter. 1. 0.063-inch spun aluminum,finished to match flagpole . B. External Halyard: Ball-bearing, nonfouling, revolving truck assembly of cast metal with continuous 5/16-inch- diameter, braided polypropylene halyard and 9-inch cast-metal cleats with fasteners. Finish exposed metal surfaces to match flagpole. 1. Halyards and Cleats: Two at each flagpole. 2. Halyard Flag Snaps: Stainless steel swivel snap hooks. Furnish two per halyard. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Drainage Material: Crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; coarse aggregate. B. Sand: ASTM C33/C33M, fine aggregate. C. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Joint sealant as recommended by flagpole manufacturer, complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611,AA-M12C22A41 . Ground-Set Flagpoles 107516-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare uncoated metal flagpoles that are set in foundation tubes by painting below-grade portions with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. B. Foundation Excavation: Excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose soil and foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete. Place and compact drainage material at excavation bottom. C. Foundation Tube: Place foundation tube, center, and brace to prevent displacement during concreting. Place concrete. Plumb and level foundation tube and allow concrete to cure. D. Sleeves: Locate and secure sleeves in forms by bracing to reinforcement and forms. E. Place concrete, as specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Compact concrete in place by using vibrators. Moist-cure exposed concrete for no fewer than seven days or use nonstaining curing compound. F. Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish,free of trowel marks, and uniform in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to perimeter of concrete base. 3.2 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install flagpoles where indicated and according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Foundation Tube: Place flagpole in tube, seated on bottom plate between steel centering wedges, and install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place and compact sand in foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal top of foundation tube with a 2-inch layer of elastomeric joint sealant and cover with flashing collar. END OF SECTION 10 75 16 Ground-Set Flagpoles 107516-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Manual Operated Roller Shades B. Related Work includes the following 1. Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories. 2. Section 08 5113 "Aluminum Windows" 3. Section 07 92 00"Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for light-blocking shades with a sealant. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of shadeband material. 1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. C. Product Schedule: For roller shades. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. Roller Window Shades 122413-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Hunter Douglas Architectural Window Coverings — 13915 Danielson Street, Suite 100, Poway, CA 92064; Phone 800.727.8953 x1; Fax 800.205.9819; Website www.hunterdouglasarchitectural.com/windowcoverings. B. Request for substitutions must be approved by architect in accordance with provisions of Section 0125 00—Submittal Procedures. 2.2 MANUAL RB 500 ROLLER SHADE A. FABRICS: 1. Solar Shades: Light Filtering Fabric. a. Hunter Douglas "E Screen 7503" b. Fabric Weight: 11.6 oz/yd2 C. Composition: 36% Fiberglass, 64%Vinyl. 2. Blackout Shades: 0% Open. a. Hunter Douglas "SheerWeave 7100" b. Fabric Weight: 21.6 oz/yd2 C. Composition: PVC Coated Fiberglass Laminated with 2-ply 100%PVC Blackout Film, White Backing. 3. Horizontal stabilizing battens are not required, nor will they be accepted. B. CONTROL SYSTEMS: 1. CLUTCH OPERATED: Chain-driven operator capable of lifting up to 20 pounds of weight with a maximum allowable pull force of 10 pounds. Utilization of adjustment-free continuous qualified T304 stainless ball chain with 110 lbs. breaking strength for precise control, smooth operation, and ensures a uniform look. Components must be maintenance-free from adjustments or lubrication for trouble-free lifetime operation. a. 90 pound breaking strength chains will not be accepted. b. Chain anchor device to be compliant with WCMA safety standard A100.1.1-2010 and must prevent the clutch system from moving the roller shade through lowering and raising if not properly installed as specified in ANSI Standard Section 6.5.2. 2. DUAL ROLLER SHADES: Universal mount steel brackets with 2 separate solar and room darkening blackout roller shades operating independently of each other. Roller Window Shades 122413-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3. ROLLER TUBE: Circular-shaped aluminum tube extruded from alloy and temper 6063 T-6. Extruded tube to have a .063" wall thickness (2.5" outside diameter to have a 0.79" wall thickness). Heavily reinforced with minimum of six internal ribs and flutes providing additional tensile strength and allows for secure placement of clutch and end plug. 4. SPRING-LOADED IDLE END: Reinforced idler assembly containing spring loaded end plug with positive locking wheel allowing for up to 7/8" adjustment and provides for a secure installation and removal of shade. Locking tube bearing plug contains minimum 6 ribs and flutes and inserted a minimum of 2 3/8" into roller tube on heavy duty systems. 5. BOTTOM BAR: Hunter Douglas RB500 Bottom Bar. 6. MOUNTING HARDWARE: Manufacturer's heavy duty bracket constructed of hardened 1/8" thick steel to support full weight of shade with bracket and screw hole covers to provide uniform look. Locking mechanism on bracket adapter provides for a secure installation and removal of the shade. a. Cradle-seated hardware without a locking mechanism will not be accepted. 7. INTEGRATED LEVELING DEVICE: Built into the idle-end bracket (or intermediate bracket of a coupled shade) allowing for the vertical height adjustment of +/- one-half inch direction up or down, allowing the easy leveling of a fabric panel on its mounting surface. This assists to keep the fabric rolling square to the tube, minimizing the chance of the fabric rolling into its hardware causing creases and damage to the ends of the fabric. a. Adjusting fabric skewing through means of tape, paper, or cardboard tucked up inside the fabric at the tube is not acceptable. 8. FASCIA:7 inch profile, removable aluminum extrusion valance for dual shade bracket that attaches to brackets and conceals roller shade. Fascia at the bottom enclosure must allow a maximum of 1"gap to allow fabric to come through. Exposure underneath greater than 1" is not to be accepted. 9. BLOCKOUT SYSTEM: Extruded aluminum side channel with concealed mounting brackets. Bottom bar with Nylon wool pile to prevent light leakage. C. FABRICATION 1. Shade measurements shall be accurate to within +/- 1/8" or as recommended in writing by manufacturer. D. FABRICS: Colors and %Openness as identified on drawings. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 Inspection A. Subcontractor shall be responsible for inspection on site, approval of mounting surface, installation conditions, and field measurement for this work. B. Other interacting trades shall receive drawings of shade systems, dimensions, assembly, and installation methods from subcontractor upon request. Roller Window Shades 122413-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.2 Installation A. Installation shall comply with manufacturer's specifications, standard and procedures as detailed on contract drawings B. Adequate clearance shall be provided to permit unencumbered operation of shade and hardware. C. Clean finish installation of dirt and finger marks. Leave work area clean and free of debris. 3.3 Demonstration A. Demonstrate operation method and instruct owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the roller shades. 3.4 Schedule A. Exterior Window locations as indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION 12 24 13 Roller Window Shades 122413-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 12 36 61.16 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid surface material countertops. 2. Solid surface material back and end splashes. 3. Solid surface material apron fronts. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature indicating physical properties and performance criteria for solid surface materials and related components. B. Shop Drawings: Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, anchorages and cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Provide templates and rough-in measurements. C. Samples: For each type of material exposed to view, submit two, 2 x 2 inch samples representative of colors, patterns, textures, finishes and edge treatments. Approved samples will be retained as a standard for the work. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's recommended cleaning and maintenance procedures. Include in project closeout documents. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design Load: Deflection limited to 1/360. B. Design items with sufficient strength for handling stresses. C. Accessible Design: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) and with the Texas Accessibility Standards. Solid Surfacing Countertops 12 36 61.16-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA 2. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation; Everform Solid Surface countertops. b. Wilsonart LLC; Solid Surface countertops. 2. Type: Provide Standard type unless Special Purpose type is indicated. 3. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide solid surface fabrications with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL 723 or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 4. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 1. Grade: Custom. B. Countertops: 1. 1/2-inch-thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material. C. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch-thick, solid surface material. D. Joints: 1. Fabricate countertops with hairline joints that are tight, held rigidly in place. E. Cutouts and Holes: 1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer. B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." Solid Surfacing Countertops 12 36 61.16-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions and approved Submittals. B. Set items plumb, level, rigid and solidly adhered to substrate. C. Prefit items:Adjust supports to make fit. Align joints over support framing. D. Fasten countertops as recommended by manufacturer. E. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. F. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. G. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. H. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed,and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping. I. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." 3.2 Cleaning: A. Clean and polish fabrications in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Promptly remove excessive mastic and seam adhesive. END OF SECTION 12 36 61.16 Solid Surfacing Countertops 12 36 61.16-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 12 48 13 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roll-up rail mats. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for floor mats and frames. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For floor mats and frames to include in maintenance manuals. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES, GENERAL A. Structural Performance: Provide roll-up rail mats and frames capable of withstanding the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Load: Pedestrian. 2. Rolling Load: 1000 passes @ 400lbs. B. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the Texas Accessibility Standards . 2.2 ROLL-UP RAIL MATS A. a dill____ )�� hypo"i... II"u a4llu,ua 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Balco FM2S-C - Carpet Tread or comparable product by one of the following: Entrance Floor Mats and Frames 124813-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Amarco Products. 2. Babcock-Davis. 3. Balco; a CSW Industrials Company. 4. Construction Specialties, Inc. 5. Durable Corporation. 6. Forbo Flooring Systems. 7. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. 8. K.N. Crowder Mfg. Inc. B. Roll-up, Aluminum-Rail Hinged Mats: Extruded-aluminum tread rails 3/8 inch thick, sitting on continuous vinyl cushions. 1. Tread Inserts: 1/4-inch- high, 28-oz,/sq. yd. weight, level-cut, nylon-pile, fusion-bonded carpet. 2. Colors, Textures, and Patterns of Inserts: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 3. Rail Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities. 4. Hinges: Aluminum. 5. Mat Size: As indicated. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning.Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, sizes, and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats and frames. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. END OF SECTION 12 48 13 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames 124813-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' W-0101TAIN M, 14 24 00 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Machine room-less hydraulic passenger elevators as shown and specified. Elevator work includes: 1. Standard pre-engineered hydraulic passenger elevators. 2. Elevator car enclosures, hoistway entrances and signal equipment. 3. Operation and control systems. 4. Jack(s). 5. Accessibility provisions for physically disabled persons. 6. Equipment, machines, controls, systems and devices as required for safely operating the specified elevators at their rated speed and capacity. 7. Materials and accessories as required to complete the elevator installation. 8. Elevator pit ladder. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 General Requirements: Meet or exceed all referenced sustainability requirements. 2. Division 3 Concrete: Installing inserts, sleeves and anchors in concrete. 3. Division 4 Masonry: Installing inserts, sleeves and anchors in masonry. 4. Division 5 Metals: a. Providing hoist beams, pit ladders,steel framing,auxiliary support steel and divider beams for supporting guide-rail brackets. b. Providing steel angle sill supports and grouting hoistway entrance sills and frames. 5. Division 9 Finishes: Providing elevator car finish flooring and field painting unfinished and shop primed ferrous materials. 6. Division 16 Sections: a. Providing electrical service to elevators, including fused disconnect switches where permitted. (Note: fused disconnect switch to be provided as part of elevator manufacture product, see section 2.11 Miscellaneous elevator components for further details.) b. Emergency power supply,transfer switch and auxiliary contacts. C. Heat and smoke sensing devices. d. Convenience outlets and illumination in control room (if applicable), hoistway and pit. 7. Division 22 Plumbing a. Sump pit and oil interceptor. 8. Division 23 Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning a. Heating and ventilating hoistways and/or control room. Hydraulic Elevators 142400-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' T.- C-010-TAIN M, C. Work Not Included: General contractor shall provide the following in accordance with the requirements of the Model Building Code and ANSI A17.1 Code. For specific rules, refer to ANSI A17.1, Part 3 for hydraulic elevators.State or local requirements must be used if more stringent. 1. Elevator hoist beam to be provided at top of elevator shaft. Beam must be able to accommodate proper loads and clearances for elevator installation and operation. 2. Supply in ample time for installation by other trades, inserts, anchors, bearing plates, brackets, supports and bracing including all setting templates and diagrams for placement. 3. Hatch walls require a minimum two hours of fire rating. Hoistway should be clear and plumb with variations not to exceed 1/2" at any point. 4. Elevator hoistways shall have barricades, as required. 5. Install bevel guards at 75° on all recesses, projections or setbacks over 2" (4" for A17.1 2000 areas) except for loading or unloading. 6. Provide rail bracket supports at pit, each floor and roof. For guide rail bracket supports, provide divider beams between hoistway at each floor and roof. 7. Pit floor shall be level and free of debris. Reinforce dry pit to sustain normal vertical forces from rails and buffers. 8. All wire and conduit should run remote from the hoistways. 9. When heat, smoke or combustion sensing devices are required, connect to elevator control cabinet terminals. Contacts on the sensors should be sided for 12-volt D.C. 10. Finished flooring in elevator cab shall be furnished and installed by Flooring Subcontractor. 11. Finished floors and entrance walls are not to be constructed until after sills and door frames are in place. Consult elevator contractor for rough opening size. The general contractor shall supply the drywall framing so that the wall fire resistance rating is maintained when drywall construction is used. 12. Where sheet rock or drywall construction is used for front walls, it shall be of sufficient strength to maintain the doors in true lateral alignment. Drywall contractor to coordinate with elevator contractor. 13. Before erection of rough walls and doors; erect hoistway sills, headers, and frames.After rough walls are finished, erect facias and toe guards. Set sill level and slightly above finished floor at landings. 14. To maintain legal fire rating (masonry construction), door frames are to be anchored to walls and properly grouted in place. 15. The elevator wall shall interface with the hoistway entrance assembly and be in strict compliance with the elevator contractor's requirements. 16. General Contractor shall fill and grout around entrances, as required. 17. All walls and sill supports must be plumb where openings occur. 18. Locate a light fixture (200 Ix / 19 fc) and convenience outlet in pit with switch located adjacent to the access door. 19. Provide telephone line, light fixture (200 Ix / 19 fc), and convenience outlet in the hoistway at the landing where the elevator controller is located. Typically, this will be at the landing above the 1st floor. Final location must be coordinated with elevator contractor. 20. As indicated by elevator contractor, provide a light outlet for each elevator, in center of hoistway. 21. For signal systems and power operated door: provide ground and branch wiring circuits. Hydraulic Elevators 142400-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 MO. 0• 22. For car light and fan: provide a feeder and branch wiring circuits to elevator control cabinet. 23. Controller landing wall thickness must be a minimum of 8 1/2 inches thick. This is due to the controller being mounted on the second-floor landing in the door frame on the return side of the door. For center opening doors, the controller is located on the right-hand frame (from inside the elevator cab looking out). These requirements must be coordinated between the general contractor and the elevator contractor. 24. Cutting, patching and recesses to accommodate hall button boxes, signal fixtures, etc. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product data:When requested,the elevator contractor shall provide standard cab,entrance and signal fixture data to describe product for approval. B. Shop drawings: 1. Show equipment arrangement in the corridor, pit, and hoistway and/or optional control room. Provide plans, elevations, sections and details of assembly, erection, anchorage, and equipment location. 2. Indicate elevator system capacities, sizes, performances, safety features, finishes and other pertinent information. 3. Show floors served, travel distances, maximum loads imposed on the building structure at points of support and all similar considerations of the elevator work. 4. Indicate electrical power requirements and branch circuit protection device recommendations. C. Plastic laminate selection:Submit manufacturer's standard selection charts for exposed finishes and materials. D. Metal Finishes: Upon request, standard metal samples provided. E. Operation and maintenance data. Include the following: 1. Owner's manuals and wiring diagrams. 2. Parts list, with recommended parts inventory. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: An approved manufacturer with minimum 15 years of experience in manufacturing, installing, and servicing elevators of the type required for the project. 1. The manufacturer of machines, controllers, signal fixtures, door operators, cabs, entrances, and all other major parts of elevator operating equipment. a. The major parts of the elevator equipment shall be manufactured by the installing company, and not be an assembled system. 2. The manufacturer shall have a documented, on-going quality assurance program. 3. ISO-9001:2000 Manufacturer Certified Hydraulic Elevators 142400-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' T.- C-0101TAIN M, 4. ISO-14001:2004 Environmental Management System Certified 5. LEED Gold certified elevator manufacturing facility. B. Installer Qualifications: The manufacturer or an authorized agent of the manufacturer with not less than 15 years of satisfactory experience installing elevators equal in character and performance to the project elevators. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. ASME A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, latest edition or as required by the local building code. 2. Building Code: National. 3. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows. 5. Americans with Disabilities Act-Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) 6. Section 407 in ICC A117.1,when required by local authorities D. Fire-rated entrance assemblies: Opening protective assemblies including frames, hardware, and operation shall comply with ASTM E2074, UL10(b), and NFPA Standard 80. Provide entrance assembly units bearing Class B or 1% hour label by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory. E. Inspection and testing: 1. Elevator Installer shall obtain and pay for all required inspections,tests, permits and fees for elevator installation. 2. Arrange for inspections and make required tests. 3. Deliver to the Owner upon completion and acceptance of elevator work. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Manufacturing shall deliver elevator materials, components and equipment and the contractor is responsible to provide secure and safe storage on job site. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use: Elevators shall not be used for temporary service or for any other purpose during the construction period before Substantial Completion and acceptance by the purchaser unless agreed upon by Elevator Contractor and General Contractor with signed temporary agreement. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Warranty:Submit elevator manufacturer's standard written warranty agreeing to repair, restore or replace defects in elevator work materials and workmanship not due to ordinary wear and tear or improper use or care for 12 months after final acceptance. Hydraulic Elevators 142400-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' T.- C-0101TAIN M, 1.7 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish maintenance and call back service for a period of 12 months for each elevator after completion of installation or acceptance thereof by beneficial use, whichever is earlier, during normal working hours excluding callbacks. 1. Service shall consist of periodic examination of the equipment, adjustment, lubrication, cleaning,supplies and parts to keep the elevators in proper operation. Maintenance work, including emergency call back repair service, shall be performed by trained employees of the elevator contractor during regular working hours. 2. Submit parts catalog and show evidence of local parts inventory with complete list of recommended spare parts. Parts shall be produced by manufacturer of original equipment. 3. Manufacturer shall have a service office and full-time service personnel within a 150 mile radius of the project site. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Design based around TK Elevator's Endura Machine Room-Less hydraulic elevator. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Colors, patterns, and finishes: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors, patterns, and finishes. B. Steel: 1. Shapes and bars: Carbon. 2. Sheet: Cold-rolled steel sheet, commercial quality, Class 1, matte finish. 3. Finish: Factory-applied powder coat for structural and architectural parts. Color selection must be based on elevator manufacture's standard selections. C. Plastic laminate: Decorative high-pressure type,complying with NEMA LD3,Type GP-50 General Purpose Grade, nominal 0.050" thickness. Laminate selection must be based on elevator manufacturer's full range of standard colors, patterns, and finishes. D. Flooring by flooring subcontractor. 2.3 HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT A. Platform: Fabricated frame of formed or structural steel shapes, gusseted and rigidly welded with a wood sub-floor. Underside of the platform shall be fireproofed.The car platform shall be designed and fabricated to support one-piece loads weighing up to 25%of the rated capacity. Hydraulic Elevators 142400-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' T.- C-0101TAIII MI B. Sling: Steel stiles bolted or welded to a steel crosshead and bolstered with bracing members to remove strain from the car enclosure. C. Guide Rails: Steel, omega shaped, fastened to the building structure with steel brackets. D. Guides: Slide guides shall be mounted on top and bottom of the car. E. Buffers: Provide substantial buffers in the elevator pit. Mount buffers on continuous channels fastened to the elevator guide rail or securely anchored to the pit floor. Provide extensions if required by project conditions. F. Jack: A jack unit shall be of sufficient size to lift the gross load the height specified. Factory test jack to ensure adequate strength and freedom from leakage. Brittle material, such as gray cast iron, is prohibited in the jack construction. Provide the following jack type: Twin post holeless. Two jacks piped together, mounted one on each side of the car with a polished steel hydraulic plunger housed in a sealed steel casing having sufficient clearance space to allow for alignment during installation. Each plunger shall have a high-pressure sealing system which will not allow for seal movement or displacement during the course of operation. Each Jack Assembly shall have a check valve built into the assembly to allow for automatically re-syncing the two plunger sections by moving the jack to its fully contracted position. The jack shall be designed to be mounted on the pit floor or in a recess in the pit floor. Each jack section shall have a bleeder valve to discharge any air trapped in the section. G. Automatic Self-Leveling: Provide each elevator car with a self-leveling feature to automatically bring the car to the floor landings and correct for over travel or under travel. Self-leveling shall, within its zone, be automatic and independent of the operating device. The car shall be maintained approximately level with the landing irrespective of its load. H. Wiring, Piping, and Oil: Provide all necessary hoistway wiring in accordance with the National Electrical Code. All necessary code compliant pipe and fittings shall be provided to connect the power unit to the jack unit. Provide proper grade inherently biodegradable oil as specified by the manufacturer of the power unit(see Power Unit section 2.04.G for further details) I. Pit moisture/water sensor located approximately 1 foot above the pit floor to be provided.Once activated, elevator will perform "flooded pit operation", which will run the car up to the designated floor, cycle the doors and shut down and trip the circuit breaker shunt to remove 3 phase power from all equipment, including pit equipment. J. Motorized oil line shut-off valve shall be provided that can be remotely operated from the controller landing service panel. Also, a means for manual operation at the valve in the pit is required. K. Elevator Pit Ladder: Elevator contractor shall furnish and install vertical pit ladder as required by applicable codes and by the elevator manufacturer. Hydraulic Elevators 142400-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' T.- C-0101TAIN M, 2.4 POWER UNIT A. Power Unit (Oil Pumping and Control Mechanism): A self-contained unit located in the elevator pit consisting of the following items: 1. NEMA 4/Sealed Oil reservoir with tank cover including vapor removing tank breather 2. An oil hydraulic pump. 3. An electric motor. 4. Electronic oil control valve with the following components built into single housing; high pressure relief valve, check valve, automatic unloading up start valve, lowering and leveling valve, and electro-magnetic controlling solenoids. B. Pump: Positive displacement type pump specifically manufactured for oil-hydraulic elevator service. Pump shall be designed for steady discharge with minimum pulsation to give smooth and quiet operation. Output of pump shall not vary more than 10 percent between no load and full load on the elevator car. C. Motor: Standard manufacture motor specifically designed for oil-hydraulic elevator service. Duty rating— motors shall be capable of 80 starts per hour with a 30% motor run time during each start. D. Oil Control Unit: The following components shall be built into a single housing. Welded manifolds with separate valves to accomplish each function are not acceptable. Adjustments shall be accessible and be made without removing the assembly from the oil line. 1. Relief valve shall be adjustable and be capable of bypassing the total oil flow without increasing back pressure more than 10 percent above that required to barely open the valve. 2. Up start and stop valve shall be adjustable and designed to bypass oil flow during start and stop of motor pump assembly. Valve shall close slowly, gradually diverting oil to or from the jack unit, ensuring smooth up starts and up stops. 3. Check valve shall be designed to close quietly without permitting any perceptible reverse flow. 4. Lowering valve and leveling valve shall be adjustable for down start speed, lowering speed, leveling speed and stopping speed to ensure smooth "down" starts and stops.The leveling valve shall be designed to level the car to the floor in the direction the car is traveling after slowdown is initiated. 5. Provided with constant speed regulation in both up and down direction. Feature to compensate for load changes, oil temperature, and viscosity changes. 6. Solid State Starting: Provide an electronic starter featuring adjustable starting currents. 7. A secondary hydraulic power source(powered by 110VAC single phase)must be provided. This is required to be able to raise (reposition) the elevator in the event of a system component failure (i.e. pump motor, starter, etc.) 8. Oil Type: Provide a zinc free, inherently biodegradable lubricant formulated with premium base stocks to provide outstanding protection for demanding hydraulic systems, especially those operating in environmentally sensitive areas. Hydraulic Elevators 142400-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' W-0101TAIN M, 2.5 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. Doors and Frames: Provide complete hollow metal type hoistway entrances at each hoistway opening bolted\knock down construction. 1. Manufacturer's standard entrance design consisting of hangers, doors, hanger supports, hanger covers,fascia plates (where required), sight guards, and necessary hardware. 2. Main landing door & frame finish: Stainless steel panels, no. 4 brushed finish with no. 4 brushed finish entrance frame. 3. Typical door&frame finish:Stainless steel panels, no.4 brushed finish with no.4 brushed finish entrance frame. B. Integrated Control System: the elevator controller to be mounted to hoistway entrance above 1st landing. The entrance at this level, shall be designed to accommodate the control system and provide a means of access to critical electrical components and troubleshooting features. See section 2.09 Control System for additional requirements. C. At the controller landing, the hoistway entrance frame shall have space to accommodate and provide a lockable means of access (group 2 security) to a 3-phase circuit breaker. See section 2.11 Miscellaneous Elevator Components for further details D. Interlocks: Equip each hoistway entrance with an approved type interlock tested as required by code. Provide door restriction devices as required by code. E. Door Hanger and Tracks: Provide sheave type two-point suspension hangers and tracks for each hoistway horizontal sliding door. 1. Sheaves: Polyurethane tires with ball bearings properly sealed to retain grease. 2. Hangers: Provide an adjustable device beneath the track to limit the up-thrust of the doors during operation. 3. Tracks: Drawn steel shapes, smooth surface and shaped to conform to the hanger sheaves. F. Hoistway Sills: Extruded metal, with groove(s) in top surface. Provide mill finish on aluminum. 2.6 PASSENGER ELEVATOR CAR ENCLOSURE A. Car Enclosure: 1. Walls: Cab type TKAP, reinforced cold-rolled steel with two coats factory applied baked enamel finish, with applied vertical wood core panels covered on both sides with high pressure plastic laminate. 2. Reveals and frieze: Stainless steel, no. 4 brushed finish 3. Canopy: Cold-rolled steel with hinged exit. 4. Ceiling: Downlight type, metal pans with suspended LED downlights and dimmer switch. Number of downlights shall be dependent on platform size with a minimum of six. The metal pans shall be finished with a stainless steel, no.4 brushed finish. Hydraulic Elevators 142400-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' T.- C-0101TAIN M, 5. Cab Fronts, Return, Transom, Soffit and Strike: Provide panels faced with brushed stainless steel 6. Doors: Horizontal sliding car doors reinforced with steel for panel rigidity. Hang doors on sheave type hangers with polyurethane tires that roll on a polished steel track and are guided at the bottom by non-metallic sliding guides. a. Door Finish: Stainless steel panels: No.4 brushed finish. b. Cab Sills: Extruded aluminum, mill finish. 7. Handrail: Provide 2-inch flat metal bar on side and rear walls on front opening cars. Handrails shall have a stainless steel, no.4 brushed finish. 8. Bumper rail: Provide 4-inch flat metal bar on side and rear walls. Bumper rails shall have a stainless steel, no. 4 brushed finish. 9. Ventilation: Manufacturer's standard exhaust fan, mounted on the car top. 10. Protection pads and buttons: Provide one set of vinyl protection pads with metal grommets for the project. Provide pad buttons on cab front(s) and walls. B. Car Top Inspection: Provide a car top inspection station with an "Auto-Inspection" switch, an "emergency stop" switch, and constant pressure "up and down" direction and safety buttons to make the normal operating devices inoperative. The station shall give the inspector complete control of the elevator. The car top inspection station shall be mounted in the door operator assembly. 2.7 DOOR OPERATION A. Door Operation: Provide a direct or alternating current motor driven heavy duty operator designed to operate the car and hoistway doors simultaneously. The door control system shall be digital closed loop and the closed loop circuit shall give constant feedback on the position and velocity of the elevator door.The motor torque shall be constantly adjusted to maintain the correct door speed based on its position and load. All adjustments and setup shall be through the computer-based service tool. Door movements shall follow a field programmable speed pattern with smooth acceleration and deceleration at the ends of travel. The mechanical door operating mechanism shall be arranged for manual operation in event of power failure. Doors shall automatically open when the car arrives at the landing and automatically close after an adjustable time interval or when the car is dispatched to another landing. AC controlled units with oil checks, or other deviations are not acceptable. 1. No Un-Necessary Door Operation:The car door shall open only if the car is stopping for a car or hall call,answering a car or hall call at the present position or selected as a dispatch car. 2. Door Open Time Saver: If a car is stopping in response to a car call assignment only (no coincident hall call), the current door hold open time is changed to a shorter field programmable time when the electronic door protection device is activated. 3. Double Door Operation: When a car stops at a landing with concurrent up and down hall calls, no car calls, and no other hall call assignments, the car door opens to answer the hall call in the direction of the car's current travel. If an onward car call is not registered before the door closes to within 6 inches of fully closed, the travel shall reverse and the door shall reopen to answer the other call. Hydraulic Elevators 142400-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' T.- C-0101TAIN M, 4. Nudging Operation:The doors shall remain open as long as the electronic detector senses the presence of a passenger or object in the door opening. If door closing is prevented for a field programmable time, a buzzer shall sound. When the obstruction is removed, the door shall begin to close at reduced speed. If the infra-red door protection system detects a person or object while closing on nudging,the doors shall stop and resume closing only after the obstruction has been removed. 5. Door Reversal: If the doors are closing and the infra-red beam(s) is interrupted,the doors shall reverse and reopen.After the obstruction is cleared,the doors shall begin to close. 6. Door Open Watchdog: If the doors are opening, but do not fully open after a field adjustable time, the doors shall recycle closed then attempt to open six times to try and correct the fault. 7. Door Close Watchdog: If the doors are closing, but do not fully close after a field adjustable time, the doors shall recycle open then attempt to close six times to try and correct the fault. 8. Door Close Assist: When the doors have failed to fully close and are in the recycle mode, the door drive motor shall have increased torque applied to possibly overcome mechanical resistance or differential air pressure and allow the door to close. B. Door Protection Device: Provide a door protection system using microprocessor controlled infra- red light beams. The beams shall project across the car opening detecting the presence of a passenger or object. If door movement is obstructed,the doors shall immediately reopen. 2.8 CAR OPERATING STATION A. Car Operating Station, General: The main car control in each car shall contain the devices required for specific operation mounted in an integral swing return panel requiring no applied faceplate.Wrap return shall have a brushed stainless-steel finish. The main car operating panel shall be mounted in the return and comply with handicap requirements. Pushbuttons that illuminate using long lasting LEDs shall be included for each floor served,and emergency buttons and switches shall be provided per code.Switches for car light and accessories shall be provided. B. Emergency Communications System: Integral phone system provided. C. Auxiliary Operating Panel: Not Required D. Column Mounted Car Riding Lantern: A car riding lantern shall be installed in the elevator cab and located in the entrance.The lantern, when illuminated, will indicate the intended direction of travel.The lantern will illuminate and a signal will sound when the car arrives at a floor where it will stop.The lantern shall remain illuminated until the door(s) begin to close. E. Special Equipment: Not Applicable 2.9 CONTROL SYSTEMS A. Controller: Shall be integrated in a hoistway entrance jamb. Should be microprocessor based, software oriented and protected from environmental extremes and excessive vibrations in a NEMA 1 enclosure. Control of the elevator shall be automatic in operation by means of push Hydraulic Elevators 142400-10 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' T.- C-0101TAIN M, buttons in the car numbered to correspond to floors served, for registering car stops, and by "up-down" push buttons at each intermediate landing and "call" push buttons at terminal landings. B. Service Panel — to be located outside the hoistway in the controller entrance jamb and shall provide the following functionality/features: 1. Access to main control board and CPU 2. Main controller diagnostics 3. Main controller fuses 4. Universal Interface Tool (UIT) 5. Remote valve adjustment 6. Electronic motor starter adjustment and diagnostics 7. Operation of pit motorized shut-off valve with LED feedback to the state of the valve in the pit 8. Operation of auxiliary pump/motor(secondary hydraulic power source) 9. Operation of electrical assisted manual lowering 10. Provide male plug to supply 110VAC into the controller 11. Run/Stop button C. Automatic Light and Fan shut down: The control system shall evaluate the system activity and automatically turn off the cab lighting and ventilation fan during periods of inactivity. The settings shall be field programmable. D. Emergency Power Operation: (Battery Lowering 10-DOC) When the loss of normal power is detected, a battery lowering feature is to be activated. The elevator will lower to a predetermined level and open the doors. After passengers have exited the car, the doors will close, and the car will shut down. When normal power becomes available, the elevator will automatically resume operation. The battery lowering feature is included in the elevator contract and does not utilize a building-supplied standby power source. E. Special Operation: Not Applicable 2.10 HALL STATIONS A. Hall Stations, General: Buttons shall illuminate to indicate call has been registered at that floor for the indicated direction. 1. Provide one pushbutton riser with faceplates having a brushed stainless-steel finish. a. Phase 1 firefighter's service key switch,with instructions,shall be incorporated into the hall station at the designated level. B. Floor Identification Pads: Provide door jamb pads at each floor. Jamb pads shall comply with Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) requirements. C. Hall Position Indicator: Not Applicable D. Hall lanterns: Not Applicable Hydraulic Elevators 142400-11 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' T.- C-010-TAIN M, E. Special Equipment: Not Applicable 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS ELEVATOR COMPONENTS A. Oil Hydraulic Silencer: Install multiple oil hydraulic silencers (muffler device) at the power unit location. The silencers shall contain pulsation absorbing material inserted in a blowout proof housing. B. Lockable three phase circuit breaker with auxiliary contact with shunt trip capability to be provided. Circuit breaker to be located behind locked panel (Group 2 security access) at controller landing entrance jamb and should be sized according to the National Electrical Code. C. Lockable single phase 110V circuit breaker for cab light and fan to be provided. Circuit breaker to be located behind locked panel (Group 2 security access) at controller landing entrance jamb should be sized according to the National Electrical Code PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Before starting elevator installation, inspect hoistway, hoistway openings, pits and/or control room, as constructed, verify all critical dimensions, and examine supporting structures and all other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Do not proceed with elevator installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. B. Installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for satisfactory performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install elevator systems components and coordinate installation of hoistway wall construction. 1. Work shall be performed by competent elevator installation personnel in accordance with ASME A17.1, manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop drawings. 2. Comply with the National Electrical Code for electrical work required during installation. B. Perform work with competent, skilled workmen under the direct control and supervision of the elevator manufacturer's experienced foreman. C. Supply in ample time for installation by other trades, inserts, anchors, bearing plates, brackets, supports, and bracing including all setting templates and diagrams for placement. D. Welded construction: Provide welded connections for installation of elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, Hydraulic Elevators 142400-12 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' T.- C-0101TAIN M, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualification of welding operators. E. Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with the work of other trades, for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays. Use benchmarks, lines, and levels designated by the Contractor,to ensure dimensional coordination of the work. F. Install machinery, guides, controls, car and all equipment and accessories to provide a quiet, smoothly operating installation, free from side sway, oscillation or vibration. G. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills and doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum safe, workable dimensions at each landing. H. Erect hoistway sills, headers, and frames before erection of rough walls and doors; erect fascia and toe guards after rough walls finished. Set sill units accurately aligned and slightly above finish floor at landings. I. Lubricate operating parts of system, where recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance testing: Upon completion of the elevator installation and before permitting use of elevator, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by Code and governing regulations or agencies. Perform other tests, if any, as required by governing regulations or agencies. B. Advise Owner, Contractor, Architect, and governing authorities in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed on the elevator. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Make necessary adjustments of operating devices and equipment to ensure elevator operates smoothly and accurately. 3.5 CLEANING A. Before final acceptance, remove protection from finished surfaces and clean and polish surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for type of material and finish provided. Stainless steel shall be cleaned with soap and water and dried with a non-abrasive surface; it shall not be cleaned with bleach-based cleansers. B. At completion of elevator work,remove tools,equipment,and surplus materials from site.Clean equipment rooms and hoistway. Remove trash and debris. Hydraulic Elevators 142400-13 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' T.- C-0101TAIN M, 1. Use environmentally preferable and low VOC emitting cleaners for each application type. Cleaners that contain solvents, pine and/or citrus oils are not permitted. 3.6 PROTECTION A. At time of Substantial Completion of elevator work, or portion thereof, provide suitable protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other such methods or procedures to protect elevator work from damage or deterioration. Maintain protective measures throughout remainder of construction period. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of elevators. Review emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of failure in operation and other building emergencies.Train Owner's personnel in normal procedures to be followed in checking for sources of operational failures or malfunctions. B. Make a final check of each elevator operation, with Owner's personnel present, immediately before date of substantial completion. Determine that control systems and operating devices are functioning properly. 3.8 ELEVATOR SCHEDULE A. Elevator-Quantity 1 1. Elevator Basis of Design Model: Endura MRL Twinpost above-ground 1-stage 2. Elevator Type: Hydraulic Machine Room-Less, Passenger 3. Rated Capacity: 3500 lbs. 4. Rated Speed: 150 ft./min. 5. Operation System:TAC32H 6. Travel: 14'-0" 7. Landings: 2 total 8. Openings: a. Front: 2 b. Rear: 0 9. Clear Car Inside: 6-8"wide x 5'-5" deep 10. Inside clear height: 7'-4" standard 11. Door clear height: 7'-0" standard 12. Hoistway Entrance Size: 3'-6" wide x 7'-0" high 13. Door Type: One-speed Center opening 14. Power Characteristics: 480 volts, 3 Phase. 15. Cab Lighting Power: 120 volts, 1 Phase. 16. Seismic Requirements: No 17. Hoistway Dimensions: 8'-4"wide x 6'-11" deep 18. Pit Depth: 4'-0" 19. Button & Fixture Style: Traditional Signal Fixtures Hydraulic Elevators 142400-14 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' W-010-TA1,111 M, 20. Special Operations: None END OF SECTION 14 24 00 Hydraulic Elevators 142400-15 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 210201 COORDINATION DRAWINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions 013100 and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work herein. 1.2 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall take the lead in coordinating the Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, and Fire Protection systems within the building. B. The General Contractor shall coordinate a three-dimensional (3D)model of the building which includes the Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, and Fire Protection systems. The Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, and Fire Protection Contractors shall prepare their work and generate 3D models which will be given to the General Contractor for coordination. The Contractor will be provided with the REVIT model that was used to generate the contract documents, this file may be used as the background file. The Contractor shall replace the systems drawn with the actual shop drawing models. The Contractor is not limited to using REVIT, but may use any 3-D software in generating and combining the coordination model. C. Submitting the contract drawings as coordination drawings will not be acceptable. D. The model shall include detailed and accurate representations of all equipment to be installed based upon the reviewed equipment submittals. E. The Contractor shall hold a 3-D coordination meeting with all sub-contractors present to reviewthe model and discuss coordination of the installation of the building systems. F. Upon completion of the coordination meeting, the Contractor shall submit the 3-D model and %" scale drawings for review. G. The model shall detail major elements, components, and systems in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following: 1. Indicate the proposed locations of pipe, duct, equipment, and other materials. Include the following: a. Wall and type locations. b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. C. Locations of light fixtures and sprinkler heads. d. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube Coordination Drawings 2102 01-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. e. Equipment connections and support details. f. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. g. Routing of storm and sanitary sewer piping. h. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. i. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. ]. Valve stem movement. k. Structural floor, wall and roof opening sizes and details. 2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air distribution devices, light fixtures, communication systems components, and other ceiling-mounted items. H. Sequence of Coordination Below is hierarchy of model elements and the sequencing by which the models will be coordinated. 1. Structural and Architectural model 2. Miscellaneous steel 3. Perform preliminary space allocation 4. Identify hard constraints (locations of access panels, lights,A/V space requirements, etc.) 5. Main and medium pressure ducts from the shaft out 6. Main graded plumbing lines and vents 7. Sprinkler mains and branches 8. Cold and hot water mains and branches 9. Lighting fixtures and plumbing fixtures 10. Smaller sized ducts and flex ducts 11. Smaller size cold water and hot water piping,flex ducts, etc. Coordination Drawings 2102 01-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• I. The Contractor and Sub-Contractors shall not install any item until the coordination has been completed and reviewed by the Construction Manager, Owner, and A/E team. J. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the installation of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage, ampacity, capacity, electrical and piping connections, space requirements,sequence of construction, building requirements and special conditions. K. By submitting shop drawings on the project, this Contractor is indicating that all necessary coordination has been completed and that the systems, products and equipment submitted can be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination with all other Contractors and Subcontractors. END OF SECTION 2102 01 Coordination Drawings 2102 01-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 21 13 00 FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wet-pipe sprinkler system. 2. System design, installation, and certification. 3. Backflow prevention. 4. Fire department connections. 5. Small hose stations. 6. Underground piping within 5 feet-0 inches of building. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section Mechanical, Refrigeration, Food Service Equipment and Electrical Coordination. 2. Division 01 Section Quality Control. 3. Division 01 Section Closeout Procedures. 4. Division 07 Section Firestopping 5. Division 26 Electrical. 6. Division 28 Section Fire Detection And Alarm 7. Division 31 Section Earthwork. C. System Description: 1. System to provide complete coverage for the entire building, including exterior canopies. 2. Provide system to Unified Facilities Criteria - UFC 3-600-01 and National Fire Protection Association - NFPA 13, Latest Edition, and occupancy and hazard classifications shown on the preliminary working plans (bid documents) completed by the Engineer Of Record. 3. Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply from water flow test data. Conduct new water flow tests per NFPA 291. Do not rely on data shown on preliminary working plans. Provide new water flow test data to the Engineer of Record for evaluation and hydraulically design system based on the evaluated data from the Engineer of Record. 4. Interface system with building fire detection and alarm system. 5. Provide fire department connections where indicated. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13, Latest Edition, and UFC 3-600-01. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The following publications form a part of this Specification to the extent they are applicable: Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems 211300-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Division 01 Section Quality Control. 2. NFPA 13 - Latest Edition - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 3. NFPA 70- Latest Edition - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 72 - Latest Edition - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code. 5. NFPA 170—Latest Edition—Standard for Fire Safety and Emergency Symbols. 6. UFC 3-600-01 Fire Protection Engineering for facilities. 7. Underwriters Laboratories- UL 199 -Automatic Sprinklers. 8. American Society of Sanitary Engineering-ASSE 1015-Double check backflow prevention assemblies and double check fire protection backflow assemblies. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Division 01 Section Quality Control: Procedures for submittals. 2. Manufacturer's Descriptive Data: Annotate descriptive data to show clearly the specific model,type, and size of each item.At a minimum, submit two sets of data to the COR for the following: a. Pipe and fittings. b. Valves, including gate, check, and globe. C. Electric alarm valve. d. Sprinkler heads. e. Pressure or flow switch. f. Pipe hangers and support. g. Excess pressure pump. h. Fire department connections. i. Low air pressure supervisory panel. j. Air Maintenance device. k. Mechanical couplings/fittings. I. Backflow preventer. M. Tamper switch. n. Hose connection. 3. Shop Drawings (Working Plans): a. Drawing symbols shall be per NFPA 170. b. Submit preliminary layout of finished ceiling areas indicating only sprinkler locations coordinated with ceiling installation. C. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, sprinklers, components and accessories. Indicate system controls. d. Prepare in accordance with NFPA 13, Latest Edition. All 46 items of NFPA 13, chapter 22, section 22.1 for working plans shall be complied with. e. Working plans shall include sufficient information indicating conformance to the preliminary working plans (bid documents) completed by the Engineer of Record. 4. Submit computer program generated hydraulic calculation to substantiate compliance with hydraulic design requirement per NFPA 13, latest edition. Specify name and edition of software program used. Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems 211300-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 5. Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall perform a two hydrant flow test in accordance with NFPA 291 at time of actual Working Plan design. 6. Submit complete sprinkler system Working Plans and hydraulic calculations sealed with the preparing subcontractor's PE stamp of the FPE who prepared or supervised the preparation of the Working Plans. 7. Operation and Maintenance Data. B. Submittals at Project Closeout: 1. Division 01 Section Closeout Procedures: Procedures for submittals. 2. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations. 3. Manufacturer's Certificate: The Engineer of Record shall inspect the system and certify that the system has been tested and meets or exceeds specified requirements and code requirements. 4. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements, record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability,and location and numbers of service depot. Provide three copies, printed and bound in hard cover or three-ring loose leaf notebooks. 5. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Government's name and registered with manufacturer. a. The components of the fire protection system(s) furnished under this division of the Specifications shall be guaranteed for a period of not less than one (1) year from the date of acceptance thereof, either for beneficial use or final acceptance, whichever is earlier, against defective materials, design, and workmanship. Upon receipt of notice from the Government of failure of any part of the equipment during the guarantee period, the affected part or parts shall be replaced promptly which includes removing the defective part or parts, replacing and installing the new part or parts and at the expense of the Contractor. 6. A Certificate or Letter of Approval from Government's Insurance Underwriters shall be obtained by Fire Protection Contractor and turned over to the Government. 7. Provide one (1) copy of NFPA 25 -Standard for the Inspection,Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems 8. The contractor shall submit all certifications and testing data as a supplement to previously submitted O & M manuals at Contract Closeout. Testing data shall include all applicable "Acceptance Requirements" per NFPA 13. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND PROTECTION A. Division 01 Section Quality Control:Transport, handle, store, and protect products. B. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems 211300-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience. C. Design system under direct supervision of a state licensed Professional Fire Protection Engineer. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to Underwriters Laboratories- UL. B. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13, Latest Edition and the Unified Facilities Criteria UFC 3-600-01.The requirements of the UFC 3-600-01 shall take precedence over the requirements of NFPA 13. C. Equipment and Components: Bear UL label or marking. D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Division 01 Section Closeout Procedures- Maintenance Data. B. Provide extra sprinklers under provisions of NFPA 13, Latest Edition. C. Provide suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type. D. Provide metal storage cabinet in location designated near sprinkler riser. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SPRINKLERS A. Install sprinklers from reviewed Working Plans. B. All sprinklers shall be of similar design and from a single manufacturer. C. The operating temperature of sprinkler heads shall be as required by the specific location of installation. D. Extended coverage sprinklers shall not be used unless specified in the preliminary working plans. E. Sprinklers shall conform to the following schedule, the requirements of NFPA 13 and as indicated in the preliminary working plans: 1. Suspended Ceiling- Finished Rooms: a. Type: Recessed pendant type with matching escutcheon plate. Maximum projection below ceiling 1 inch. b. Finish: Chrome plated. C. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated. d. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type or Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems 211300-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. Exposed Area - No Finished Ceiling Type: a. Type: Standard upright type. b. Finish: Brass. C. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type or Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. 3. Suspended Ceilings-Janitors closets, Storage, Mechanical Rooms: a. Type: Standard type with matching flat escutcheon plate. Projection below ceiling shall not exceed 2 inches. b. Finish: Chrome. C. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated. d. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type or glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. e. Sprinkler with deflectors less than 7 feet-6 inches above finished floor shall have listed sprinkler guards. 2.2 FLEXIBLE SPRINKLER HOSE FITTINGS A. Provide flexible hose assemblies and end fittings with 100 percent Type 304 Stainless steel,with a 175 psi maximum rated pressure. Flexible hose assemblies shall be stainless steel, braided, and leak tested. B. Flexible hose assemblies shall have G90 galvanized steel ceiling bracket,direct attachment type, having ends that positively attach to the ceiling using tamper resistant screws. Provide flexible hose attachment with removable hub type with set screw. C. All flexible sprinkler hose fittings shall be UL listed and FM approved. D. Install flexible sprinkler hose fittings for use in commercial suspended and sheetrock ceilings. 2.3 PIPE AND FITTINGS-EXTERIOR A. Piping underground shall be Class 52 cement lined ductile iron pipe or as required by the local utility company a minimum of 5 feet-0 inches from the building. Straight runs of pipe with no offsets may be rubber joint with bell and spigot. All fittings shall consist of mechanical joint type. B. All buried pipe and fittings shall be installed in a sand bedded trench, 6 inches under pipe and filled with sand to 12 inches minimum above pipe. C. Block or rod underground piping and fittings for static and surge pressures. Furnish and install concrete thrust blocks and joint ties at each change in direction of all underground piping in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 24 requirements. Set screw ("Mega-Lug type") restraint shall be used in addition to concrete thrust blocks. Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems 211300-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Prior to connection to existing water line, the Water Authority having jurisdiction shall be contacted so that they can inspect the procedures used. E. All underground pipe,fittings, and valves shall conform to NFPA 13 and NFPA 24 requirements. 2.4 PIPE AND FITTINGS-INTERIOR A. Interior piping for automatic sprinkler system shall conform to NFPA 13, UFC 3-600-01 and as follows. 1. Sprinkler piping above ground with threaded fittings shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with a corrosion resistance rating equal to or greater than 1.0. Threaded thinwall pipe shall not be used. 2. Fittings for threaded and coupled pipe shall consist of cast iron or malleable threaded fittings joined with Teflon tape thread sealing compound or pipe joint compound. Pressure rating of fittings shall be as required for application. 3. Sprinkler piping above ground with grooved fittings for sizes 2-1/2-inch and larger shall be roll grooved Schedule 40 black steel pipe. Pressure rating of fittings shall be as required for application. 4. If a history of corrosion is not present, schedule 10 may be used. 5. Fittings for grooved end pipe shall in accordance with NFPA 13. 6. All exterior copper pipe shall be type K soft or hard copper with brazed copper fittings. 7. All interior copper pipe shall be type L hard copper pipe with brazed wrought or cast copper fittings. 8. Fittings for plain end pipe shall not be used. 9. CPVC piping and fitting shall not be used. 10. Alternate piping systems approved by NFPA 13 may be allowed with prior approval of the Engineer of Record. 11. All piping shall be identified with pre-manufactured piping identification labels. 12. All drain and Fire Department Connection piping and fittings down-stream of valves shall be galvanized. 2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Space pipe hangers in accordance with the requirements of NFPA. Construct hangers, hanger rods, inserts and clamps as approved by NFPA 13. 2.6 EARTHQUAKE BRACING A. Furnish and install all earthquake bracing as required by NFPA 13. Construct bracing as approved by NFPA 13. Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems 211300-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.7 VALVES A. Gate valves shall be approved indicating type as required by NFPA and UFC. Check valves shall be as required by NFPA. Test and drain valves shall be approved brass globe, angle, or ball valves. Locate sprinkler system isolation valves as shown on the drawings complete with a tamper alarm. 2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICES A. Install new backflow prevention devices of the type and configuration as required by the Water Authority having jurisdiction. B. Double Check Valve Assemblies shall be: ANSI/ASSE 1015, AWWA C510; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves two os&y valves, 175 psig working pressure, drain pipe to floor drain with air gap fitting. C. Reduced Pressure Backflow Assemblies shall be: ANSI/ASSE 1013, AWWA C511; stainless steel body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs;two link operating check valves with replaceable check disc rubber,two os&y valves, 175 psig working pressure, pressure relief with air gap fitting. D. Devices shall be UL or FM approved. E. All reduced pressure backflow prevention devices shall be provided with an air gap drain with splash guard and piped to the exterior or adequate floor drain with galvanized pipe and fittings. Drain pipe shall be sized as required by the manufacturer for full flow of the relief valve. 2.9 SPECIALTIES A. Fire Seals: 1. Where piping passes through walls, floors or other building construction which by code requires a fire rating, approved fire rated assemblies shall be used. Proposed protection shall be submitted for approval. Plans shall clearly indicate details and locations of required protection. B. Escutcheon Plates: 1. Where exposed piping passes through finish work, chrome plated or other finish acceptable to the Government's Designated Inspector wall plates shall be installed. Split wall plates or escutcheons shall be installed to fit snugly around piping. All wall plates shall be metal. 2. Solid galvanized wall plates shall be used at both sides of all exterior walls. C. Valve Identification: Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems 211300-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. All valves within the building shall have permanently marked identification signs provided in accordance with NFPA 13 standards.Signs shall be manufactured and not hand written. Signs shall be hung with galvanized or chrome chain. D. Spare Head Supply: 1. Furnish and install a supply of extra sprinklers of each type and degree link installed in the project,complete with mountable box. Mount box on wall next to sprinkler entry; provide wrenches for each type of sprinkler installed in box. Quantity of sprinklers to be per NFPA 13. E. Piping Identification: 1. All piping shall be identified at 40 foot maximum spacing and a minimum of one identification label per room. Labels shall be Seton wrap around style or equal. 2.10 ELECTRICAL DEVICES A. All electrical devices shall be coordinated with Division 26 Electrical and Division 28 Fire Detection and Alarm requirements for compatibility of voltages and manufacturer. B. Water Flow Switch: 1. Vane type switch for mounting horizontal or vertical with retard adjustment. Switch shall have two sets of SPDT contacts; rated 10 amps at 125 volt AC and 2.5 amps at 24 volt. Enclosure shall be NEMA 4/11354 rated. Flow sensitivity shall be 4-10 gpm Construction of base and cover shall be die-cast and provided with two(2)knockouts for 1/2-inch conduit. Switch shall be UL listed for fire protection service. C. Pressure Alarm Switch: 1. Pressure actuated switch suitable to provide an adjustable pressure supervisory signal. Switch shall have two sets of SPDT contacts; rated 10 amps at 125 volt AC and 2.5 amps at 24 volt DC. Enclosure shall be NEMA 4/IP55 rated. Construction of base and cover shall be die-cast and provided with two (2) knockouts for 1/2-inch conduit. Switch shall be UL listed for fire protection service. D. Low Air Alarm: 1. Pressure actuated switch suitable to provide an adjustable pressure supervisory signal. Switch shall have two sets of SPDT contacts; rated 10 amps at 125 volt AC and 2.5 amps at 24 volt DC. Enclosure shall be NEMA 4/11355 rated. Construction of base and cover shall be die-cast and provided with two (2) knockouts for 1/2-inch conduit. Switch shall be UL listed for fire protection service. E. Tamper Switch: Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems 211300-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Tamper switch shall be suitable to monitor the open position of valves. Switch shall have two sets of SPDT contacts; rated 10 amps at 125 volt AC and 2.5 amps at 24 volt DC. Enclosure shall be NEMA 4 and NEMA 6(IP67) rated. Construction of base and cover having corrosion resistant finishes and tamper resistant screws. Switch shall be UL listed for fire protection service. 2. On each control valve, arranged to actuate alarm when valve is closed. F. Audio/Visual Alarm Indicating Appliances: 1. Devices to be per Specification Section 28.31.76 Fire Alarm/ Mass Notification Systems 2.11 FIRE HOSE CONNECTIONS A. Furnish and install where shown on plans. B. Set all hose connections 3 feet above floor or as required by the Fire Marshal. C. Hose connections shall be rough brass globe valves with replaceable seats and discs complete with 1-1/2 inches adapter, Cap and Chain. Valves shall be 300 PSI UL rated. Coordinate with local fire department. 2.12 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION 1. Fire department connection shall be flush mounted wall type with chrome plated finish. 2. Outlets: Two-way with thread size to suit fire department hardware; threaded dust cap and chain of matching material and finish. 3. Drain: 3/4 inch automatic drip, connected to drain. 4. Label: "Sprinkler- Fire Department Connection." 5. Signal: Electric strobe on outside wall above FDC tied in to each riser served by the particular FDC and activated by the alarm system when any water flow occurs. 6. Siamese connections shall be set 2 feet-6 inches above grade. 7. Coordinate height,thread type, connection type,and location with local fire department. 2.13 INSPECTOR'S TEST AND DRAIN 1. Inspector's test and drain shall be Per NFPA 13, Latest Edition, Hard piped to adequate drain or to exterior of building. 2. Minimum of one per sprinkler system zone. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Design Basis Information: Provide design, materials, equipment, installation, inspection, and testing of the automatic sprinkler system in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13. Recommendations in appendices shall be treated as requirements. Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems 211300-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Perform hydraulic calculations in accordance with NFPA 13 utilizing the Area/Density method only. 2. The room design method is not allowed. 3. Sprinkler Protection: To determine spacing and sizing, apply the following coverage classifications: a. See occupancy design table and notes on preliminary working plans. b. Request clarification from the Engineer of Record for any hazard classification not identified. 4. Hydraulic Calculations: Calculated demand including hose stream requirements shall fall no less than 10 percent or 10 psi, whichever is more, below the available water supply curve. 5. Quick response sprinkler reductions are not allowed. 6. Flexible head assemblies shall be in hydraulic calculations using the higher of the FM or UL listing equivalent length of Schedule 40, nominal 1 inch diameter pipe. 7. Water Supply: See preliminary working plans. B. The fire protection system supplier shall design the piping to supply the system. Piping shall be laid out so as not to interfere with the installation of other piping, ductwork or light fixtures. C. The entire sprinkler system is not shown on preliminary working plans.The intent is to provide complete sprinkler systems as required. This Contractor shall be responsible for surveying the site, existing construction, and new construction, and prepare working plans for the total system. D. All piping shall be run concealed wherever possible. Where piping is run exposed, special notation on Contractor's working plans to that effect shall be evident and conspicuous on the drawings. Any piping determined to be a problem shall be relocated at no cost to the Government. E. System piping to be hydraulically calculated including system riser and fire pumper connection in accordance with NFPA 13. F. Meet the Seismic Restraint requirements in NFPA 13, Latest Edition, Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints. Seismic coefficient to be provided or derived from Table 9.3.5.9.3, NFPA 13 2016, using site specific seismic data from Table E2, UFC 3-301-01, 27 January 2010. G. The preparation of all working plans and hydraulic calculations shall be prepared by an FPE or Registered Professional Engineer meeting the requirements of the UFC3-600-01. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Furnish sprinkler system with the following components: 1. Systems shall be equipped with a supervised isolation valve and an approved flow alarm connected to the building fire alarm system. Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems 211300-10 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. A Fire Department Connection shall be installed on the system side of the water supply check valve complete with its own check valve and ball drip. 3. A main drain shall be installed on each riser or sectional zone control valve and shall drain to the exterior or to an adequate drain connection. 4. Auxiliary drains shall be provided when a change in piping direction prevents drainage of sections of branch lines or mains through the main drain valve. 5. A test pipe of not less than 1 inch diameter terminating in an orifice equivalent to one sprinkler shall be provided for each system or sectional zone. 6. Exterior alarm shall be installed as near as practical to Fire Department connection with identification sign. Exterior horn/strobe shall be wired to alarm system. B. Installation shall be accomplished by the licensed Contractor. Provide a qualified technician, experienced in the installation and operation of the type of system being installed,to supervise the installation and testing of the system. C. Installation of Piping: 1. Pipe threads to be deburred, cleaned, and made free of rust prior to installation. 2. Internally and externally cold galvanize all threaded and roll grooved ends cut in the field. Properly clean the pipe per manufacture's instruction before applying the finish. 3. Accurately cut pipe to measurements established by the installer and work into place without springing or forcing. In any situations where bending of the pipe is required, use a standard pipe-bending template. 4. Install concealed piping in spaces that have finished ceilings. Pipe installed near equipment shall not block or encroach on equipment access or impede maintenance. Where ceiling mounted equipment exists, install sprinklers so as not to obstruct the movement or operation of the equipment or block access. Sidewall heads may need to be utilized. 5. Locate piping in stairways as near to the ceiling as possible to prevent tampering by unauthorized personnel, and to provide a minimum headroom clearance of seven feet- six inches. To prevent an obstruction to egress, provide piping clearances in accordance with NFPA 101. D. Welding: Conform to the requirements and recommendations of NFPA 13. E. Drains: Install adequate drains piped to floor drains or out of doors. Pipe drains to discharge at safe points outside of the building or to sight cones attached to drains of adequate size to readily carry the full flow from each drain under maximum pressure. Do not provide a direct drain connection to sewer system or discharge into sinks. Install drips and drains where necessary and required by NFPA 13. F. Waterflow Alarm Switches: Install waterflow switch and adjacent valves in easily accessible locations. G. Inspector's Test Connection: Install and supply in conformance with NFPA 13, locate in a secured area, and discharge to the exterior of the Building. Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems 211300-11 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• H. Affix cutout disks, which are created by cutting holes in the walls of pipe for flow switches and non-threaded pipe connections to the respective waterflow switch or pipe connection near to the pipe from where they were cut. I. Sleeves: Provide for pipes passing through masonry or concrete schedule 40 pipe. Provide space between the pipe and the sleeve in accordance with NFPA 13. Seal this space with a UL Listed through penetration fire stop material per UL assembly listings. J. Provide pressure gage at each water flow alarm switch location, at the top of each standpipe, and at each main drain connection. K. Securely attach identification signs to control valves, drain valves, and test valves. Locate hydraulic placard information signs at each sectional control valve where there is a zone water flow switch. L. Repairs: Repair damage to the building or equipment resulting from the installation of the sprinkler system by the installer at no additional expense to the Government. M. Where details of installation are not given,the installation shall be made using manufacturer's recommended practices or at the direction of the Architect/Engineer. N. Contractor shall complete the fire protection systems ready for operation, in all respects, as soon as possible. When system is complete and ready for continuous operation, activate the system for its intended use.After system has been activated for continuous use,water charges will be paid by the Government. O. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. P. Conceal piping above suspended ceilings. Q. Install buried shut-off valves in valve box. Provide post indicator. R. Run piping as high as possible in areas without ceilings. S. Provide approved double check valve backflow preventer assembly or reduced pressure backflow assembly at sprinkler system water source connection. Provide means of forward flow testing at system demand per NFPA 13. T. No sprinkler mains are permitted in Electrical Rooms. U. No sprinkler branch lines are permitted directly above electrical panels or gear. V. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or adjacent siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle. For each fire department connection, provide the symbolic sign given in NFPA 170 and locate 8 to 10 feet above each connection location. Size sign 18 by 18 inches with the symbol being at least 14 by 14 inches. W. Locate outside electric alarm bell on building wall as indicated. Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems 211300-12 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• X. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. Y. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. Z. Center sprinklers in one direction in ceiling tile and provide piping offsets as required. AA. Coordinate sprinkler locations with light fixtures, structure, HVAC ducts, grilles, diffusers, etc. Provide additional heads under ducts, equipment, etc, as per NFPA 13, Latest Edition. BB. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler escutcheons do not receive field paint finish. Remove after painting. CC. Install guards on sprinklers where indicated or required. DD. Provide all electrical devices and wiring required but not provided under Division 26. EE. Flush entire piping system, new and existing, of foreign matter FF. Provide labels on all controls, valves, etc. as required by NFPA 13, Latest Edition. GG. This Contractor shall remove from the building, all rubbish and unused materials due to or connected with this installation. HH. The surface of all piping shall be cleaned and left ready for painting. 3.3 TESTING A. The entire sprinkler system shall be hydrostatically tested at not less than 200 psig or 50 psig above normal working pressure, not to exceed 225 psig for a period of not less than two (2) hours with no pressure drop in the system and per NFPA 13. B. The underground fire service main shall be hydrostatically tested at not less than 200 psig or 50 psig above normal working pressure, not to exceed 225 psig for a period of not less than two (2) hours with no pressure drop in the system and per NFPA 13. C. All testing shall be witnessed by a representative of the Engineer or Government. D. Conduct Preliminary Test in the presence of the Fire Department and the FPE. The test shall include hydrostatic test per NFPA 13, and operational tests of alarms and all other devices. Make any corrections required. Submit a signed and dated Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping, specified in NFPA 13, to the Contracting Officer. The FPE shall prepare a report documenting the test and results. E. Submit a request for formal test and inspection at least 15 days prior to the desired inspection date and after the Preliminary test is complete and corrections are completed and approved. An experienced technician regularly employed by the system installer shall be present, as well as the Fire Department, and the FPE. The test shall include all applicable testing and documentation required by NFPA 13 Chapter 25, including, but not limited to: hydrostatic test, Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems 211300-13 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• and operational tests of alarms and other devices. The Contracting Officer or Government's Designated Inspector shall witness formal tests and approve systems before they are accepted. F. Where jurisdictional authority's standards are more stringent than the above test, they shall prevail. 3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Ensure required devices are installed and connected as required to fire alarm system. END OF SECTION 2113 00 Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems 211300-14 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 22 02 01 COORDINATION DRAWINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions 013100 and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work herein. 1.2 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall take the lead in coordinating the Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, Fire Protection systems within the building. B. The General Contractor shall coordinate a three-dimensional (3D) model of the building which includes the Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, and Fire Protection systems. The Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, and Fire Protection Contractors shall prepare their work and generate 3D models which will be given to the General Contractor for coordination. The Contractor will be provided with the REVIT model that was used to generate the contract documents, this file may be used as the background file. The Contractor shall replace the systems drawn with the actual shop drawing models. The Contractor is not limited to using REVIT, but may use any 3-D software in generating and combining the coordination model. C. Submitting the contract drawings as coordination drawings will not be acceptable. D. The model shall include detailed and accurate representations of all equipment to be installed based upon the reviewed equipment submittals. E. The Mechanical Contractor shall hold a 3-D coordination meeting with all sub- contractors present to review the model and discuss coordination of the installation of the building systems. F. Upon completion of the coordination meeting, the Contractor shall submit the 3-D model and %" scale drawings for review. G. The model shall detail major elements, components, and systems in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following: 1. Indicate the proposed locations of pipe, duct, equipment, and other materials. Include the following: a. Wall and type locations. b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. C. Locations of light fixtures and sprinkler heads. Coordination Drawings 22 02 01-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• d. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. e. Equipment connections and support details. f. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. g. Routing of storm and sanitary sewer piping. h. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. i. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. ]. Valve stem movement. k. Structural floor, wall and roof opening sizes and details. 2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air distribution devices, light fixtures, communication systems components, and other ceiling-mounted items. H. Sequence of Coordination Below is hierarchy of model elements and the sequencing by which the models will be coordinated. 1. Structural and Architectural model 2. Miscellaneous steel 3. Perform preliminary space allocation 4. Identify hard constraints (locations of access panels, lights,A/V space requirements, etc.) 5. Main and medium pressure ducts from the shaft out 6. Main graded plumbing lines and vents 7. Sprinkler mains and branches 8. Cold and hot water mains and branches 9. Lighting fixtures and plumbing fixtures 10. Smaller sized ducts and flex ducts Coordination Drawings 22 02 01-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 11. Smaller size cold water and hot water piping,flex ducts, etc. I. The Contractor and Sub-Contractors shall not install any item until the coordination has been completed and reviewed by the Construction Manager, Owner, and A/E team. J. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the installation of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage, ampacity, capacity, electrical and piping connections, space requirements, sequence of construction, building requirements and special conditions. K. By submitting shop drawings on the project, this Contractor is indicating that all necessary coordination has been completed and that the systems, products and equipment submitted can be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination with all other Contractors and Subcontractors. END OF SECTION 22 02 01 Coordination Drawings 22 02 01-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 22 03 00 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART 1—GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications, apply to this section. B. Related SECTIONS: 1. SECTION 01 91 00-GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 2. SECTION 23 09 63 - ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The commissioning of the plumbing system and associated controls shall be performed by an impartial technical firm hired by the owner.The commissioning provider shall be certified under one or more of the following certifications: 1. CxA—Certified Commissioning Authority—ACG 2. CBCP—Certified Building Commissioning Professional—AEE 3. CCP—Certified Commissioning Professional—BCA 4. CPMP—Certified Process Management Professional—ASHRAE 5. BSC—Building System Commissioning Certification—NEBB B. The commissioning provider(Commissioning authority) shall be responsible for leading the entire construction team through the commissioning process including, but not limited to, conducting the commissioning kick-off meeting, preparing the commissioning plan, preparing pre-functional checklists, preparing functional test scripts, participation in functional testing and preparation of required documentation and reports. 1.3 RESPONIBILITIES A. Contractor: Responsibilities of the Contractor as related to the Commissioning Process include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Facilitate coordination of Commissioning work by Commissioning authority. 2. Attend Commissioning meetings or other meetings called by Commissioning authority to facilitate the Commissioning Process. 3. Review Functional Performance Test procedures for feasibility, safety, and impact on warranty, and provide Commissioning authority with written comment on same. Commissioning of Plumbing Systems 220300-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 4. Provide all documentation relating to manufacturer's recommended performance testing of equipment and systems. 5. Provide Operations & Maintenance data to Commissioning authority for preparation of checklists and training manuals. 6. Provide As-built drawings and documentation to facilitate Testing. 7. Assure and facilitate participation and cooperation of Sub Contractors and equipment suppliers as required for the Commissioning Process. 8. Certify to Commissioning authority that installation work listed in Pre-Functional Checklists has been completed. 9. Install systems and equipment in strict conformance with project specifications, manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, and Pre-Functional Checklists. 10. Provide data concerning performance, installation, and start-up of systems. 11. Provide copy of manufacturers filled-out start-up forms for equipment and systems. 12. Ensure systems have been started and fully checked for proper operation prior to arranging for Testing with Commissioning authority. Prepare and submit to Commissioning authority written certification that each piece of equipment and/or system has been started according to manufacturer's recommended procedure, and that system has been tested for compliance with operational requirements. a. Contractor shall carry out manufacturer's recommended start-up and testing procedures, regardless of whether or not they are specifically listed in Pre-Functional Checklists. b. Contractor is not relieved of obligation for systems/equipment demonstration where performance testing is required by specifications, but a Functional Performance Test is not specifically designated by Commissioning authority. 13. Coordinate with Commissioning authority to determine mutually acceptable date of Functional Performance Tests. 14. Provide qualified personnel to assist and participate in Commissioning. 15. Provide test instruments and communications devices, as prescribed by Commissioning authority, required for carrying out Testing of systems. 16. Proprietary test equipment required by the manufacturer, whether specified or not,shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test equipment,demonstrate its use,and assist in the commissioning process. Proprietary test equipment shall become the property of the Owner upon completion of commissioning. 17. Ensure deficiencies found in the Commissioning Issues Log are corrected within the time schedule shown in the Commissioning Plan. 18. Provide Commissioning authority with all submittals, start-up instructions Commissioning of Plumbing Systems 220300-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• manuals, operating parameters, and other pertinent information related to Commissioning Process.This information shall be routed through Architect. 19. Prepare and submit to Commissioning authority proposed Training Program outline for each system. 20. Coordinate and provide training of Owner's personnel. 21. Prepare Operation & Maintenance Manuals and As-Built drawings in accordance with specifications; submit copy to Commissioning authority in addition to other contractually required submissions. Revise and resubmit manuals in accordance with Design Professionals and Commissioning authority comments. 22. Commissioning requires participation of this Division Subcontractors to ensure that systems are operating in manner consistent with Contract Documents. All costs associated with the participation of Contractor, Sub-Contractors, Design Professionals, and Equipment Vendors in the Commissioning Process shall be included as part of the Construction Contract. B. Subcontractors and vendors shall prepare and submit to Commissioning authority proposed Startup procedures to demonstrate proper installation of systems, according to these specifications and checklists prepared by Commissioning authority 1.4 COMMISSIONING PLAN A. Commissioning Process tasks and activities: 1. Commissioning kick-off meeting: Conducted by commissioning authority and attended by construction team and design team. 2. Pre-functional checklists: Prepared by the commissioning authority and filled out by subcontractors performing the work that is applicable. 3. Site visits to review installation of applicable systems and progress of checklist documentation performed and reported by commissioning authority. 4. Functional testing:Commissioning authority shall conduct functional testing with assistance of applicable subcontractors and document successful results as well as deficiencies (issues). Functional performance testing shall demonstrate the installation and operation of components, systems, and system-to-system interfacing in accordance with plans and specifications. Testing shall include all modes and sequence of operation, including under full-load, part-load and emergency conditions (including all alarms). Controls system shall be tested to document that control devices, components, equipment and systems are calibrated and adjusted and operate in accordance with the plans and specifications. Sequences shall be functionally tested to document they operate in accordance with plans and specifications. 5. Preliminary commissioning report: Commissioning authority shall issue a preliminary commissioning report to the owner that has results of the first round Commissioning of Plumbing Systems 220300-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• of functional testing including deficiencies discovered. 6. Systems manual: Commissioning authority shall compile the systems manual using submittal data provided by the general contractor and applicable subcontractors. 7. Final commissioning report: Commissioning authority shall issue final commissioning report documenting the entire process and final results of functional testing. Report shall include final testing and balancing report. B. Equipment to be tested 1. Energy Management and Control System interface with applicable plumbing system equipment. 2. Service water heating systems(100%). 3. Service water circulation equipment(100%). 4. Domestic water booster pumps (100%). C. Testing functions and conditions 1. Verify shutdown of systems when scheduled. 2. Calibration of sensors 3. Confirm functionality of all specified sequences of operations. 4. Verify the functionality of all alarms. D. Performance criteria 1. Water temperatures shall be within tolerances specified in the contract documents. 2. Water heating system "recovery' rates shall be within specified time frame. 3. Booster pump shall maintain system pressure within specified tolerance. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 NO PRODUCTS SUPPLIED PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. This Division has startup responsibilities and are required to complete sub-systems so COMPLETE SYSTEMS are fully functional. Insuring they meet design requirements of Contract Documents. Commissioning procedures and testing do not relieve or lessen this responsibility or shift this responsibility, in whole or in part, to Commissioning Agent or Owner. B. Coordinate with other Sub-Contractors and equipment vendors to set aside adequate Commissioning of Plumbing Systems 220300-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• time to address Pre-Functional Checklists, Functional Performance Tests, Operations& Maintenance Manual creation, Owner Training,and associated coordination meetings. C. Commissioning authority will also conduct site inspections at critical times and issue Cx Field Reports with observations on installation deficiencies so that they may be issued by Architect as deemed appropriate. 3.2 WORK PRIOR TO COMMSSIONING A. Complete all phases of the work so the systems can be started, adjusted, balanced, tested, and otherwise tested. B. See pertinent specification sections in this Division, which outline responsibilities for start- up of equipment with obligations to complete systems, including all sub-systems so that they are fully functional. C. Assist commissioning authority with all information pertaining to actual equipment and installation as required complete the full commissioning scope. D. Contractor shall prepare startup procedures to demonstrate compliance with pre- functional checklists, and coordinate scheduling for completion of these checklists. E. A minimum of 7 days prior to date of system startup, submit to Commissioning authority for review, detailed description of equipment start-up procedures which contractor proposes to perform to demonstrate conformance of systems to specifications and Checklists. 3.3 PARTICIPATION IN COMMISSIONING A. Attend meetings related to the Commissioning Process; arrange for attendance by personnel and vendors directly involved in the project, prior to testing of theirsystems. B. Provide skilled technicians to startup and test all systems, and place systems in complete and fully functioning service in accordance with Contract Documents. C. Provide skilled technicians, experienced and familiar with systems being commissioned,to assist Commissioning authority in commissioning process. 3.4 WORK TO RESOLVE DEFICIENCIES A. Complete corrective work in a timely manner to allow expeditious completion of Commissioning Process. If deadlines pass without resolution of identified problems, Owner reserves the right to obtain supplementary services and/or equipment to resolve the problem. Costs thus incurred will be Contractor's responsibility. Commissioning of Plumbing Systems 220300-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.5 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS (PFC) A. Contractor shall complete Pre-Functional Checklists to validate compliance with Contract Documents installation and start-up requirements,for this Division's systems. B. Refer to commissioning plan for detailed list of equipment to be commissioned. 3.6 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING (FPT) A. Contractor, in cooperation with Commissioning Agent, shall conduct Functional Performance Testing to validate compliance with Contract Documents. B. Refer to commissioning plan for detailed list of equipment to be commissioned. C. Assist Commissioning authority in Functional Testing by removing equipment covers, opening access panels, etc. Furnish ladders, flashlights, meters, gauges, or other inspection equipment as necessary. 3.7 TRAINING A. The following requirements are in addition to Operations&Maintenance requirements specified elsewhere in this specifications manual. B. Contractor shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling,and ultimately to ensure that training is completed. C. The training agenda (plan) shall include, at a minimum,the following elements: 1. Purpose of equipment. 2. Principle of how the equipment works. 3. Important parts and assemblies. 4. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions. 5. Most likely failure modes, causes and corrections. 6. On site demonstration. D. Commissioning authority shall be responsible for overseeing and approving content and adequacy of training of Owner personnel for all installed systems. Provide Commissioning authority with training plan two weeks before planned training. 3.8 OPERATIONS& MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The following requirements are in addition to Operations&Maintenance requirements specified elsewhere in this specifications manual. Commissioning of Plumbing Systems 220300-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Sub-Contractor shall compile and prepare documentation for equipment and systems specified in this Division, and shall deliver documentation to Contractor for inclusion in Operation & Maintenance Manuals, in accordance with requirements of Division 01, prior to training Owner personnel. C. Provide Commissioning authority with a single, electronic copy of Operation & Maintenance Manuals for review.Commissioning authority copy of O&M manuals shall be submitted through Architect. D. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include,service agency contact information, maintenance requirements, controls system settings and a narrative of how each system is intended to operate, including set points. 3.9 DOCUMENTATION A. Commissioning authority shall provide documentation of process as follows: 1. Preliminary commissioning report including test procedures, results of testing, itemization of deficiencies, deferred tests and climatic conditions required for performance of deferred tests. Preliminary commissioning report shall be issued to owner to demonstrate the first pass of testing has occurred and to demonstrate compliance with applicable codes. 2. Final commissioning report shall include the final test and balance report, final results of functional testing,disposition of deficiencies discovered during testing, including the details of corrective measures used and functional testing procedures used for repeatability of testing in the future. END OF SECTION 22 08 00 Commissioning of Plumbing Systems 220300-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 22 05 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work herein. B. The Contract Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departure from the Contract Drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and the reasons therefore, shall be submitted to the Architect for approval as soon as practicable. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the Architect. C. Notwithstanding any reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalog number, such reference shall not be construed as limiting competition; and the Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use any article,device, product, material,fixture,form or type of construction which in the judgment of the Architect,expressed in writing, is equal to that specified. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Work included under this Contract consists of the furnishing and installation of all equipment and material necessary and required to form the complete and functioning systems in all of its various phases, all as shown on the accompanying Drawings and/or described in these Specifications. The contractor shall review all pertinent drawings, including those of other contracts prior to commencement of Work. B. This Division requires the furnishing and installing of all items Specified herein, indicated on the Drawings or reasonably inferred as necessary for safe and proper operation; including every article, device or accessory(whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the equipment specified. Elements of the work include, but are not limited to, materials, labor, supervision, transportation, storage, equipment, utilities, all required permits, licenses and inspections. All work performed under this Section shall be in accordance with the Project Manual, Drawings and Specifications and is subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. C. The approximate locations of Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing items are indicated on the Drawings. These Drawings are not intended to give complete and accurate details in regard to location of outlets, apparatus, etc. Exact locations are to be determined by actual measurements at the building, and will in all cases be subject to the Review of the Owner or Engineer, who reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in the locations indicated without additional cost to the Owner. Basic Materials and Methods 220500-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Items specifically mentioned in the Specifications but not shown on the Drawings and/or items shown on Drawings but not specifically mentioned in the Specifications shall be installed by the Contractor under the appropriate section of work as if they were both specified and shown. E. All discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be reported to the Owner or Engineer so that they will be resolved prior to the bidding, where this cannot be done at least 7 working days prior to bid;the greater or more costly of the discrepancy shall be bid. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be included as part of this Contract. F. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to furnish the Owner with a turn-key and fully operating system in cooperation with other trades. G. It is the intent of the above "Scope"to give the Contractor a general outline of the extent of the Work involved; however, it is not intended to include each and every item required for the Work. Anything omitted from the "Scope" but shown on the Drawings, or specified later, or necessary for a complete and functioning heating, ventilating and air conditioning system shall be considered a part of the overall "Scope". H. The Contractor shall rough-in fixtures and equipment furnished by others from rough-in and placement drawings furnished by others. The Contractor shall make final connection to fixtures and equipment furnished by others. 1.03 SCHEMATIC NATURE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The contract documents are schematic in nature in that they are only to establish scope and a minimum level of quality. They are not to be used as actual working construction drawings. The actual working construction drawings shall be the approved shop drawings. B. All duct or pipe or equipment locations as indicated on the documents do not indicate every transition, offset, or exact location. All transitions, offsets clearances and exact locations shall be established by actual field measurements, coordination with the structural, architectural and reflected ceiling plans, and other trades. Submit shop drawings for approval. C. All transitions, offsets and relocations as required by actual field conditions shall be performed by the contractor at no additional cost to the owner. D. Additional coordination with electrical contractor may be required to allow adequate clearances of electrical equipment,fixtures and associated appurtenances. Contractor to notify Architect and Engineer of unresolved clearances, conflicts or equipment locations. 1.04 SITE VISIT AND FAMILIARIZATION Basic Materials and Methods 220500-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• A. Before submitting a bid, it will be necessary for each Contractor whose work is involved to visit the site and ascertain for himself the conditions to be met therein in installing his work and make due provision for same in his bid. It will be assumed that this Contractor in submitting his bid has visited the premises and that his bid covers all work necessary to properly install the equipment shown. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with this requirement shall not be considered justification for the omission or faulty installation of any work covered by these Specifications and Drawings. B. Understand the existing utilities from which services will be supplied; verify locations of utility services, and determine requirements for connections. C. Determine in advance that equipment and materials proposed for installation fit into the confines indicated. 1.05 WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Finish painting is specified. Prime and protective painting are included in the work of this Division. B. Owner and General Contractor furnished equipment shall be properly connected to Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing systems. C. Furnishing and installing all required Mechanical (HVAC)and Plumbing equipment control relays and electrical interlock devices, conduit,wire and J-boxes are included in the Work of this Division. 1.06 PERMITS,TESTS, INSPECTIONS A. Arrange and pay for all permits, fees, tests, and all inspections as required by governmental authorities. 1.07 DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. The date of final acceptance shall be the date of owner occupancy, or the date all punch list items have been completed or final payment has been received. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements. B. The date of final acceptance shall be documented in writing and signed by the architect, owner and contractor. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. B. Deliver products to the project at such time as the project is ready to receive the equipment, pipe or duct properly protected from incidental damage and weather damage. Basic Materials and Methods 220500-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Damaged equipment, duct or pipe shall be promptly removed from the site and new, undamaged equipment, pipe and duct shall be installed in its place promptly with no additional charge to the Owner. 1.09 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. The heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems, and the component parts there of, shall be guaranteed to operate without objectionable noise and vibration. B. Provide foundations, supports and isolators as specified or indicated, properly adjusted to prevent transmission of vibration to the Building structure, piping and other items. C. Carefully fabricate ductwork and fittings with smooth interior finish to prevent turbulence and generation or regeneration of noise. D. All equipment shall be selected to operate with minimum of noise and vibration. If, in the opinion of the Architect,objectionable noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts or other parts of the Work, the Contractor shall rectify such conditions without extra cost to the Owner. 1.10 APPLICABLE CODES A. Obtain all required permits and inspections for all work required by the Contract Documents and pay all required fees in connection thereof. B. Arrange with the serving utility companies for the connection of all required utilities and pay all charges, meter charges, connection fees and inspection fees, if required. C. Comply with all applicable codes, specifications, local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the following nationally accepted codes and standards: 1. Air Moving& Conditioning Association, AMCA. 2. American Standards Association,ASA. 3. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc., ASH RAE. 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers,ASME. 5. American Society of Plumbing Engineers,ASPE. 6. American Society of Testing Materials,ASTM. 7. American Water Works Association, AWWA. 8. National Bureau of Standards, NBS. 9. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA. 10. Sheet Metal &Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, SMACNA. 11. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., UL. 12. International Energy Conservation Code, IECC. Basic Materials and Methods 220500-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Where differences existing between the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes,state and local ordinances, industry standards,utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, the more stringent or costly application shall govern. Promptly notify the Engineer in writing of all differences. E. When directed in writing by the Engineer, remove all work installed that does not comply with the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes, state and local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, correct the deficiencies, and complete the work at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.11 DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of construction and Specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other Contract Documents, including Drawings which must be recognized as diagrammatic and schematic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in Contract Documents are defined generally in this article, unless defined otherwise in Division 1. B. Definitions and explanations of this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for work to the extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of the Contract Documents. C. Indicated:The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes or schedules on the Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and to similar means of recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where such terms as "Shown", "Noted", "Scheduled", "Specified" and "Detailed" are used in lieu of "Indicated", it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate cross-reference material, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically shown. D. Directed: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "Directed", "Requested", "Accepted", and "Permitted" mean by the Architect or Engineer. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's or Engineer's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. E. Reviewed: Where used in conjunction with the Engineer's response to submittals, requests for information,applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor the meaning of the term "Reviewed" will be held to limitations of Architect's and Engineer's responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and Supplemental Conditions. In no case will "Reviewed" by Engineer be interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill the terms and requirements of the Contract Documents. F. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail,the term "Furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance. Basic Materials and Methods 220500-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• G. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail,the term "Install" is used to describe operations at the project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly,erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. H. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail,the term "Provide"is used to mean "Furnish and Install",complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance. I. Installer: Entity (person or firm) engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or Sub-contractor for performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in the operations they are engaged to perform. J. Imperative Language: Used generally in Specifications. Except as otherwise indicated, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. For clarity of reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or when so noted by other identified installers or entities. K. Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance, the quality level or quantity shown or specified is intended as minimum quality level or quantity of work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly with that minimum (within specified tolerances), or may exceed that minimum within reasonable tolerance limits. In complying with requirements, indicated or scheduled numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Owner or Engineer via a request for information (RFI)for decision before proceeding. L. Abbreviations and Symbols: The language of Specifications and other Contract Documents including Drawings is of an abbreviated type in certain instances, and implies words and meanings which will be appropriately interpreted. Actual word abbreviations of a self explanatory nature have been included in text of Specifications and Drawings. Specific abbreviations and symbols have been established, principally for lengthy technical terminology and primarily in conjunction with coordination of Specification requirements with notations on Drawings and in Schedules. These are frequently defined in Section at first instance of use or on a Legend and Symbol Drawing. Trade and industry association names and titles of generally recognized industry standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where applicable and where full context of Contract Documents so indicate. Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols and abbreviations used on Drawings and in Specifications are those recognized in construction industry for indicated purposes. Where not otherwise noted symbols and abbreviations are defined by 2004 ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, chapter 37 "Abbreviations and Symbols", ASME and ASPE published standards. 1.12 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS Basic Materials and Methods 220500-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• A. These Specifications are intended to supplement the Drawings and it will not be the province of the Specifications to mention any part of the work which the Drawings are competent to fully explain in every particular and such omission is not to relieve the Contractor from carrying out portions indicated on the Drawings only. B. Should items be required by these Specifications and not indicated on the Drawings,they are to be supplied even if of such nature that they could have been indicated thereon. In case of disagreement between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Drawings or Specifications, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be estimated and the matter referred to the Architect or Engineer for review with a request for information and clarification at least 7 working days prior to bid opening date for issuance of an addendum. C. The listing of product manufacturers, materials and methods in the various sections of the Specifications, and indicated on the Drawings, is intended to establish a standard of quality only. It is not the intention of the Owner or Engineer to discriminate against any product, material or method that is equal to the standards as indicated and/or specified, nor is it intended to preclude open, competitive bidding. The fact that a specific manufacturer is listed as an acceptable manufacturer should not be interpreted to mean that the manufacturers' standard product will meet the requirements of the project design, Drawings, Specifications and space constraints. D. The Architect or Engineer and Owner shall be the sole judge of quality and equivalence of equipment, materials and methods. E. Products by other reliable manufacturers, other materials, and other methods, will be accepted as outlined, provided they have equal capacity, construction, and performance. However, under no circumstances shall any substitution by made without the written permission of the Architect or Engineer and Owner. Request for prior approval must be made in writing 10 days prior to the bid date without fail. F. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is not a statement that another product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product, material or method is the only one that shall be used without prior approval. G. Wherever a definite material or manufacturer's product is specified and the Specification states that products of similar design and equal construction from the specified list of manufacturers may be substituted, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that products of manufacturers that are specified are the only products that will be acceptable and that products of other manufacturers will not be considered for substitution without approval. H. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is a statement that"OR EQUAL" product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product, material or method or an "OR EQUAL" Basic Materials and Methods 220500-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• product, material or method may be used if it complies with the specifications and is submitted for review to the Engineer as outline herein. I. Where permission to use substituted or alternative equipment on the project is granted by the Owner or Engineer in writing, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor or Subcontractor involved to verify that the equipment will fit in the space available which includes allowances for all required Code and maintenance clearances,and to coordinate all equipment structural support, plumbing and electrical requirements and provisions with the Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing Design Documents and all other trades, including Division 26. J. Changes in architectural, structural, electrical, mechanical, and plumbing requirements for the substitution shall be the responsibility of the bidder wishing to make the substitution. This shall include the cost of redesign by the affected designer(s). Any additional cost incurred by affected subcontractors shall be the responsibility of this bidder and not the owner. K. If any request for a substitution of product, material or method is rejected,the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. L. The Owner or Engineer will investigate all requests for substitutions when submitted in accordance with above and if accepted, will issue a letter allowing the substitutions. M. Where equipment other than that used in the design as specified or shown on the Drawings is substituted (either from an approved manufacturers list or by submittal review), it shall be the responsibility of the substituting Contractor to coordinate space requirements, building provisions and connection requirements with his trades and all other trades and pay all additional costs to other trades, the Owner, the Architect or Engineer, if any,due to the substitutions. N. The electrical design and electrical drawings are based on the equipment and/or electric motors of the type, size and electrical characteristics shown and specified on the mechanical drawings. Any change in equipment and/or motor size or type brought on directly or indirectly by a substitution or mechanical equipment having characteristics requiring a change, shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor and the entire cost of such change, including conduit, wiring, motor starting equipment, etc., shall be paid for by the Mechanical Contractor at no additional charge, unless the substitution was initiated by the Owner. Submittals must clearly show and deviations. Mechanical Contractor is responsible for coordinating any required changes with the Electrical Contractor, prior to Electrical Contractors ordering of panels and associated equipment. 1.13 SUBMITTALS A. Coordinate with Division 1 for submittal timetable requirements, unless noted otherwise within thirty (30) days after the Contract is awarded the Contractor shall submit a minimum of eight (8) complete bound sets of shop drawings and complete data covering Basic Materials and Methods 220500-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• each item of equipment or material. The first submittal of each item requiring a submittal must be received by the Architect or Engineer within the above thirty day period. The Architect or Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays or costs incurred due to excessive shop drawing review time for submittals received after the thirty(30) day time limit. The Architect and Engineer will retain one (1) copy each of all shop drawings for their files. Where full size drawings are involved, submit one (1) print and one (1) reproducible sepia or mylar in lieu of eight (8) sets. All literature pertaining to an item subject to Shop Drawing submittal shall be submitted at one time. A submittal shall not contain information from more than one Specification section, but may have a section subdivided into items or equipment as listed in each section. The Contractor may elect to submit each item or type of equipment separately. Each submittal shall include the following items enclosed in a suitable binder: 1. A cover sheet with the names and addresses of the Project, Architect, MEP Engineer, General Contractor and the Subcontractor making the submittal. The cover sheet shall also contain the section number covering the item or items submitted and the item nomenclature or description. 2. An index page with a listing of all data included in the Submittal. 3. A list of variations page with a listing all variations, including unfurnished or additional required accessories, items or other features, between the submitted equipment and the specified equipment. If there are no variations,then this page shall state "NO VARIATIONS". Where variations affect the work of other Contractors, then the Contractor shall certify on this page that these variations have been fully coordinated with the affected Contractors and that all expenses associated with the variations will be paid by the submitting Contractor. This page will be signed by the submitting Contractor. 4. Equipment information including manufacturer's name and designation, size, performance and capacity data as applicable. All applicable Listings, Labels, Approvals and Standards shall be clearly indicated. 5. Dimensional data and scaled drawings as applicable to show that the submitted equipment will fit the space available with all required Code and maintenance clearances clearly indicated and labeled at a minimum scale of 1/4" = V-0", as required to demonstrate that the alternate or substituted product will fit in the space available. 6. Identification of each item of material or equipment matching that indicated on the Drawings. 7. Sufficient pictorial, descriptive and diagrammatic data on each item to show its conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Any options or special requirements or accessories shall be so indicated. All applicable information shall be clearly indicated with arrows or another approved method. 8. Additional information as required in other Sections of this Division. 9. Certification by the General Contractor and Subcontractor that the material submitted is in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, signed and dated in long hand. Submittals that do not comply with the above requirements shall be returned to the Contractor and shall be marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT". B. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on shop drawings and submittals. Basic Materials and Methods 220500-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Equipment and materials submittals and shop drawings will be reviewed for compliance with design concept only. It will be assumed that the submitting Contractor has verified that all items submitted can be installed in the space allotted. Review of shop drawings and submittals shall not be considered as a verification or guarantee of measurements or building conditions. D. Where shop drawings and submittals are marked "REVIEWED", the review of the submittal does not indicate that submittals have been checked in detail nor does it in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to furnish material and perform work as required by the Contract Documents. E. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and returned to the Contractor with one of the following categories indicated: 1. REVIEWED: Contractor need take no further submittal action, shall include this submittal in the O&M manual and may order the equipment submitted on. 2. REVIEWED AS NOTED: Contractor shall submit a letter verifying that required exceptions to the submittal have been received and complied with including additional accessories or coordination action as noted, and shall include this submittal and compliance letter in the 0&M manual. The contractor may order the equipment submitted on at the time of the returned submittal providing the Contractor complies with the exceptions noted. 3. NOT APPROVED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is not approved, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment that is not approved. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked revise and resubmit, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or provide as noted on previous shop drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment marked revise and resubmit. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 5. CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION REQUIRED: Contractor shall resubmit submittal on material, equipment or method of installation. The Contractor's stamp is required stating the submittal meets all conditions of the contract documents. The stamp shall be signed by the General Contractor. The submittal will not be reviewed if the stamp is not placed and signed on all shop drawings. 6. MANUFACTURER NOT AS SPECIFIED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked manufacturer not as specified, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the specifications. Contractor shall not order equipment where submittal is marked manufacturer not as specified. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. F. Materials and equipment which are purchased or installed without shop drawing review shall be at the risk of the Contractor and the cost for removal and replacement of such Basic Materials and Methods 220500-10 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• materials and equipment and related work which is judged unsatisfactory by the Owner or Engineer for any reason shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The responsible Contractor shall remove the material and equipment noted above and replace with specified equipment or material at his own expense when directed in writing by the Architect or Engineer. G. Shop Drawing Submittals shall be complete and checked prior to submission to the Engineer for review. H. Submittals are required for, but not limited to,the following items: 1. Pipe Material and Specialties. 2. Pipe Fabrication Drawings. 3. Basic Materials. 4. Variable Air Volume Boxes. 5. Air Handling Units. 6. Cooling Towers. 7. Chillers. 8. Air Cooled Condensing Units. 9. Water Treatment. 10. Expansion Compensation. 11. Variable Frequency Drives. 12. Noise and Vibration Controls. 13. Plumbing Fixtures and Specialties. 14. Plumbing Equipment. 15. Sanitary DWV Fittings, Pipe and Accessories. 16. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Pipe, Fittings and Accessories. 17. HVAC Pipe and Duct Insulation. 18. Hydronic and Plumbing Valves. 19. Hydronic Piping and Accessories. 20. Hydronic Pumps. 21. Roof-Top A/C Units. 22. Heating Water Boiler. 23. Portable Pipe Hanger and Equipment Supports. 24. Duct Specialties. 25. Duct Fabrication Drawings. 26. Air Distribution Devices. 27. Fan Coil Units. 28. Filters. 29. Fans. 30. Fire Dampers and Fire Smoke Dampers. 31. Temperature Controls and Control Sequences. 32. Test,Adjust and Balance Reports. 33. Testing,Adjusting and Balancing Contractor Qualifications. 34. Coordination Drawings. Basic Materials and Methods 220500-11 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• I. Refer to other Division 22 sections for additional shop drawing requirements. Provide samples of actual materials and/or equipment to be used on the Project upon request of the Owner or Engineer. J. Contractor to submit Mechanical/Electrical equipment coordination sheet with equipment submittal for all AHU's, ACCU's, and Fans. Reference chart at end of section. Provide copy to electrical subcontractor. 1.14 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to)the following: 1. Indicate the proposed locations of pipe, duct, equipment, and other materials. Include the following: a. Wall and type locations. b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. C. Locations of light fixtures and sprinkler heads. d. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. e. Equipment connections and support details. f. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. g. Routing of storm and sanitary sewer piping. h. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. i. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. j. Valve stem movement. k. Structural floor, wall and roof opening sizes and details. 2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air distribution devices, light fixtures, communication systems components, and other ceiling-mounted items. B. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the installation of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage, ampacity, capacity, electrical and piping connections, space requirements, sequence of construction, building requirements and special conditions. C. By submitting shop drawings on the project,this Contractor is indicating that all necessary coordination has been completed and that the systems, products and equipment Basic Materials and Methods 220500-12 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• submitted can be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination with all other Contractors and Subcontractors. 1.15 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Special Project Requirements, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 22, indicate the following installed conditions: 1. Duct mains and branches, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of dampers,fire dampers,duct access panels,and other control devices; filters, fuel fired heaters, fan coils, condensing units, and roof-top A/C units requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 2. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping. 3. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines. 4. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. 5. Contract Modifications, actual equipment and materials installed. B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state in which the project is located as specified herein to record the locations and invert elevations of underground installations. C. The Contractor shall maintain a set of clearly marked black line record "AS-BUILT" prints on the job site on which he shall mark all work details, alterations to meet site conditions and changes made by"Change Order" notices. These shall be kept available for inspection by the Owner,Architect or Engineer at all times. D. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements concerning record drawings. If the Contractor does not keep an accurate set of as-built drawings, the pay request may be altered or delayed at the request of the Architect. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Delivery of as-built prints and reproducible is a condition of final acceptance. E. The record prints shall be updated on a daily basis and shall indicate accurate dimensions for all buried or concealed work, precise locations of all concealed pipe or duct, locations of all concealed valves, controls and devices and any deviations from the work shown on the Construction Documents which are required for coordination. All dimensions shall include at least two dimensions to permanent structure points. F. Submit three prints of the tracings for approval. Make corrections to tracings as directed and delivered "Auto Positive Tracings" to the architect. "As-Built" drawings shall be furnished in addition to shop drawings. Basic Materials and Methods 220500-13 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• G. When the option described in paragraph F., above is not exercised then upon completion of the work,the Contractor shall transfer all marks from the submit a set of clear concise set of reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings and shall submit the reproducible drawings with corrections made by a competent draftsman and three(3)sets of black line prints to the Architect or Engineer for review prior to scheduling the final inspection at the completion of the work. The reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings shall have the Engineers Name and Seal removed or blanked out and shall be clearly marked and signed on each sheet as follows: CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS DATE: (NAME OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) (NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) 1.16 OPERATING MANUALS A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 and in addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves,engineering data and tests,and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. 2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 1.17 CERTIFICATIONS AND TEST REPORTS A. Submit a detailed schedule for completion and testing of each system indicating scheduled dates for completion of system installation and outlining tests to be performed and schedule date for each test. This detailed completion and test schedule shall be submittal at least 90 days before the projected Project completion date. Basic Materials and Methods 220500-14 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Test result reporting forms shall be submitted for review no later than the date of the detailed schedule submitted. C. Submit 4 copies of all certifications and test reports to the Architect or Engineer for review adequately in advance of completion of the Work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. D. Certifications and test reports to be submitted shall include, but not be limited to those items outlined in Section of Division 22. 1.18 MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Coordinate with Division 1 for maintenance manual requirements, unless noted otherwise bind together in "D ring type" binders by National model no. 79-883 or equal, binders shall be large enough to allow%" of spare capacity. Three(3) sets of all approved shop drawing submittals, fabrication drawings, bulletins, maintenance instructions, operating instructions and parts exploded views and lists for each and every piece of equipment furnished under this Specification. All sections shall be typed and indexed into sections and labeled for easy reference and shall utilize the individual specification section numbers shown in the Mechanical Specifications as an organization guideline. Bulletins containing information about equipment that is not installed on the project shall be properly marked up or stripped and reassembled. All pertinent information required by the Owner for proper operation and maintenance of equipment supplied by Division 22 shall be clearly and legibly set forth in memoranda that shall, likewise, be bound with bulletins. B. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Special Project Conditions, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 22, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Identifying names, name tags designations and locations for all equipment. 2. Valve tag lists with valve number,type, color coding, location and function. 3. Reviewed shop drawing submittals with exceptions noted compliance letter. 4. Fabrication drawings. 5. Equipment and device bulletins and data sheets clearly highlighted to show equipment installed on the project and including performance curves and data as applicable, i.e., description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model numbers of replacement parts. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 7. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions, servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 8. Equipment and motor name plate data. Basic Materials and Methods 220500-15 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 9. Wiring diagrams. 10. Exploded parts views and parts lists for all equipment and devices. 11. Color coding charts for all painted equipment and conduit. 12. Location and listing of all spare parts and special keys and tools furnished to the Owner. 13. Furnish recommended lubrication schedule for all required lubrication points with listing of type and approximate amount of lubricant required. C. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on Operating and Maintenance Manuals. D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be turned over to the Owner or Engineer a minimum of 14 working days prior to the beginning of the operator training period. 1.19 OPERATOR TRAINING A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of factory trained specialists to instruct the Owner's operating personnel. The Owner's operator training shall include 12 hours of on site training in three 4 hour shifts. B. Before proceeding with the instruction of Owner Personnel, prepare a typed outline in triplicate, listing the subjects that will be covered in this instruction, and submit the outline for review by the Owner. At the conclusion of the instruction period obtain the signature of each person being instructed on each copy of the reviewed outline to signify that he has a proper understanding of the operation and maintenance of the systems and resubmit the signed outlines. C. Refer to other Division 22 Sections for additional Operator Training requirements. 1.20 FINAL COMPLETION A. At the completion of the work, all equipment and systems shall be tested and faulty equipment and material shall be repaired or replaced. Refer to Sections of Division 22 for additional requirements. B. Clean and adjust all air distribution devices and replace all air filters immediately prior to final acceptance. C. Touch up and/or refinish all scratched equipment and devices immediately prior to final acceptance. 1.21 CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. Use of the HVAC and Plumbing systems to provide temporary service during construction period will not be allowed without permission from the Owner in writing and if granted shall not be cause warranty period to start, except as defined below. B. Contractor shall guarantee to keep the entire installation in repair and perfect working order for a period of one year after its completion and final acceptance, and shall furnish Basic Materials and Methods 220500-16 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• free of additional cost to the Owner all materials and labor necessary to comply with the above guarantee throughout the year beginning from the date of issue of Substantial Completion, Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner or the Certificate of Final Payment as agreed upon by all parties. C. This guarantee shall not include cleaning or changing filters except as required by testing, adjusting and balancing. D. All air conditioning compressors shall have parts and labor guarantees for a period of not less than 5 years beyond the date of final acceptance. E. Refer to Sections in Division 22 for additional guarantee or warranty requirements. 1.22 TRANSFER OF ELECTRONIC FILES A. Project documents are not intended or represented to be suitable for reuse by Architect/Owner or others on extensions of this project or on any other project. Any such reuse or modification without written verification or adaptation by Engineer, as appropriate for the specific purpose intended, will be at Architect/Owner's risk and without liability or legal exposure to Engineer or its consultants from all claims, damages, losses and expense, including attorney's fees arising out of or resulting thereof. B. Because data stored in electric media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently, or otherwise without authorization of the data's creator, the party receiving the electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within sixty (60) days of receipt, after which time the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred to be acceptable. Any errors detected within the sixty (60) day acceptance period will be corrected by the party delivering the electronic files. Engineer is not responsible for maintaining documents stored in electronic media format after acceptance by the Architect/Owner. C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, Engineer makes no representations as to the long term compatibility, usability or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by Engineer at the beginning of the Project. D. Any reuse or modifications will be Contractor's sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to Architect, Engineer or any consultant. E. The Texas Board of Architectural Examiners (TBAE) has stated that it is in violation of Texas law for persons other than the Architect of record to revise the Architectural drawings without the Architect's written consent. It is agreed that "MEP" hard copy or computer-generated documents will not be issued to any other party except directly to the Architect/Owner. The contract documents are contractually copyrighted and cannot be used for any other project or purpose except as specifically indicated in AIA B-141 Standard Form of Agreement between Architect and Owner. Basic Materials and Methods 220500-17 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• If the client, Architect/Owner, or developer of the project requires electronic media for "record purposes", then an AutoCAD based compact disc ("CD") will be prepared. The "CD" will be submitted with all title block references intact and will be formatted in a "plot" format to permit the end user to only view and plot the drawings. Revisions will not be permitted in this configuration. F. At the Architect/Owner's request, Engineer will prepare one "Cl)" of electronic media to assist the contractor in the preparation of submittals. The Engineer will prepare and submit the "CD" to the Architect/Owner for distribution to the contractor. All copies of the "CD" will be reproduced for a cost of reproduction fee of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per"CD". The"CD"will be prepared and all title blocks, names and dates will be removed. The"CD" will be prepared in a 'Awg"format to permit the end user to revise the drawings. G. This Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per "CD" cost of reproduction will be paid directly from the Contractor to the Engineer. The "CD" will be prepared only after receipt of the Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00). The Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per "CD" cost of reproduction is to only recover the cost of the manhours necessary to reproduce the documents. It is not a contractual agreement between the Contractor and Engineer to provide any engineering services, nor any other service. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials and equipment manufactured by a domestic United States manufacturer. B. Access Doors: Provide access doors as required for access to equipment,valves,controls, cleanouts and other apparatus where concealed. Access doors shall have concealed hinges and screw driver cam locks. C. All access panels located in wet areas such as restrooms, locker rooms, shower rooms, kitchen and any other wet areas shall be constructed of stainless steel. D. Access Doors: shall be as follows: 1. Plastic Surfaces: Milcor Style K. 2. Ceramic Tile Surface: Milcor Style M. 3. Drywall Surfaces: Milcor Style DW. 4. Install panels only in locations approved by the Architect. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 ROUGH-IN Basic Materials and Methods 220500-18 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected via reviewed submittals. B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 28 for additional rough-in requirements. 3.02 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Coordinate mechanical systems,equipment,and materials installation with other building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction,to allow for mechanical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. 6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 7. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with architectural action markings on submittal, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, resolve conflicts and route proposed solution to the Architect for review. 9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces. 10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location and label. 11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified. 12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. 13. Provide roof curbs for all roof mounted equipment. Coordinate with roof construction for pitched roof. Provide roof curb to match roof slope. Refer to architectural drawings and details. Basic Materials and Methods 220500-19 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 14. The equipment to be furnished under this Specification shall be essentially the standard product of the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, these units shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the system need not be the product of the same manufacturer. 15. The architectural and structural features of the building and the space limitations shall be considered in selection of all equipment. No equipment shall be furnished which will not suit the arrangement and space limitations indicated. 16. Lubrication: Prior to start-up, check and properly lubricate all bearings as recommended by the manufacturer. 17. Where the word "Concealed" is used in these Specifications in connection with insulating, painting, piping, ducts, etc., it shall be understood to mean hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or suspended ceilings. "Exposed" shall be understood to mean the opposite of concealed. 18. Identification of Mechanical Equipment: a. Mechanical equipment shall be identified by means of nameplates permanently attached to the equipment. Nameplates shall be engraved laminated plastic or etched metal. Shop drawings shall include dimensions and lettering format for approval. Attachments shall be with escutcheon pins, self-tapping screws, or machine screws. b. Tags shall be attached to all valves, including control valves, with nonferrous chain. Tags shall be brass and at least 1-1/2 inches in diameter. Nameplate and tag symbols shall correspond to the identification symbols on the temperature control submittal and the "as- built" drawings. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations. B. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: 1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 2. Remove and replace defective Work. 3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 6. Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for Engineer/Owner's observation of concealed Work,without additional cost to the Owner. 7. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and experienced Installers; refer to the materials and methods Basic Materials and Methods 220500-20 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• required for the surface and building components being patched; Refer to Section "DEFINITIONS" for definition of"Installer." C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, mechanical ducts and HVAC units, plumbing fixtures and trim,and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work. D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. E. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 3.04 WORK SEQUENCE,TIMING,COORDINATION WITH OWNER A. The Owner will cooperate with the Contractor, however, the following provisions must be observed: 1. A meeting will be held at the project site, prior to any construction, between the Owner's Representative, the General Contractor, the Sub-Contractors and the Engineer to discuss Contractor's employee parking space, access, storage of equipment or materials,and use of the Owner's facilities or utilities. The Owner's decisions regarding such matters shall be final. 2. During the construction of this project, normal facility activities will continue in existing buildings until renovated areas are completed. Plumbing,fire protection, lighting, electrical, communications, heating, air conditioning, and ventilation systems will have to be maintained in service within the occupied spaces of the existing building. END OF SECTION 22 05 00 Basic Materials and Methods 220500-21 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 1• Plumbing/Elec. Equipment Coordination Sheet Mark# Unit Manufacturer's Recomm. Fuse Mark# Unit Manufacturer's Recomm. Fuse Type Size (MOCP) Type Size(MOCP) Basic Materials and Methods 220500-22 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 22 07 00 INSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section describes general requirements, products,and methods of execution relating to excavation, backfill and compaction of inside trenches for mechanical work. Inside trenches are those which occur within an arbitrary, imaginary boundary five feet beyond the outside perimeter of the structure. B. Scope: Provide all trench work for mechanical work of every description and of whatever substance encountered to the depth indicated,or to provide pipe slopes and elevations shown on the drawing. Excavate and backfill utility trenches. Place and compact bedding material on compact backfill material. C. SPECIAL NOTE:All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of these specifications.The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for instructions and include all items pertaining to this work.The Contractor shall consult all other divisions of these specifications,determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the drawings. 1.02 APPLICABE CODES A. Local Codes and Ordinances B. Texas Safety Standards C. OSHA—Section 1926.650 1.03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS A. It shall be the duty and responsibility of the Contractor and all of its subcontractors to be familiar and comply with all requirements of Public Law 91-696, 29 U.S.C.Secs. 6S1 et.seq., the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, (OSHA)and all amendments thereto, and to enforce and comply with all of these provisions of this Act. IN ADDITION,ON PROJECTS IN WHICH TRENCH EXCAVATION WILL EXCEED A DEPTH OF FIVE FEET,THE CONTRACTOR AND ALL OF ITS SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL REQUIREMENTS OF 29 C.F.R. SECS. 1926.652 AND 1926.653,OSHA SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS. PART 2—BEDDING MATERIAL 2.01 BEDDING MATERIAL Inside Utility Trench Excavation, Backfill,and Compaction 22 07 00-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 A. Select bedding material from trench excavation using care to separate it from unsuitable material. If suitable bedding material is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by the Architect. B. Use clean sand. Maintain moisture content within a range that will allow specified compaction. 2.02 TRENCH BACKFILL A. Obtain trench backfill material from trench excavation. If sufficient suitable trench backfill material compatible with structural backfill is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by Architect. B. Use granular material,free from large stones, boulders and debris. Maintain moisture content within a range that will allow specified compaction. Maximum aggregate size four inches(4"). PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. Place all excavated material suitable for backfill in an orderly manner,and in conformance with safety codes. B. Dispose of all material not suitable for backfilling. C. Form bell holes so pipelines rest on continuous undisturbed soil. If larger rocks or boulders are encountered, remove them. If trenches are below specified grade, backfill to required depth with select granular materials free from debris and rock, and compact to proper grade before installing piping. 3.02 LOCATION A. Locate trenches to accommodate utilities shown on drawings B. Construct trench with adequate width to allow compaction equipment to be used at the sides of pipes. C. Make trench side slopes conform to prevailing safety code requirements. 3.03 DEWATERING A. Perform whatever work is necessary to prevent the flow and accumulation of surface or ground water in the excavation. 3.04 TIMING A. Do not backfill until underground mechanical system has been properly tested, inspected and approved. Inside Utility Trench Excavation, Backfill,and Compaction 220700-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 B. Coordinate with the work of others,and complete all trench work in a timely manner. 3.05 BEDDING A. Place bedding material under,around, and over the pipe in lifts not exceeding 8" in depth. B. Work material around pipe by hand methods,taking care to keep any oversize or sharp stones out of contact with the pipe,and to provide uniform support for the pipe. C. Cover pipe with bedding material to building subgrade or to a minimum 12" depth before adding other backfill. 3.06 BACKFILLING A. Continue placing backfill material until trench is completely filled to building subgrade, or as shown on drawings. B. Place backfill material in lifts not to exceed 12" in depth. 3.07 COMPACTION A. Compact all bedding material to at least 95%of maximum density,taking care not to damage the pipe. B. Compact all backfill under footings,slabs, and other structures to 95%of maximum density or more, if required by the Architect. C. Compact other areas to preclude future settlements, or at least 85%of maximum density. 3.08 FINISHING A. After completion of backfilling, dispose of excess material and smooth the surface of grade. B. Do not allow heavy equipment to be used over backfilled work that does not have sufficient cover to prevent pipe damage. 3.09 SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS A. Avoid unauthorized and unnecessary excavations. B. Minimize number and size of excavations under footings or bearing walls. C. Support footings,foundations, and walls with timbers and jacks if there appears to be any possible chance of damage,and keep such precautions in place to eliminate possible damage. Inside Utility Trench Excavation, Backfill,and Compaction 220700-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 D. Backfill under footings and bearing walls, using maximum compaction or concrete or proportions as specified for footings. E. Avoid damage to all existing underground services,foundations,cables, conduit lines or foundations. Repair any existing underground work accidentally damaged at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.10 UNDER EXISTING SLAB INSTALLATION A. When breaking out an existing floor slab, make a saw cut and remove concrete.When repouring concrete,compact the fill to the same specifications as the building fill. Re: Architectural/Structural. Make necessary saw cuts and patching as required. END OF SECTION 22 07 00 Inside Utility Trench Excavation, Backfill,and Compaction 220700-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 22 08 00 OUTSIDE UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Section 220500—Basic Materials and Methods 2. Division 2—Site Work B. Description:This section described general requirements, products, and methods of execution relating excavation, backfill,and compaction of utility trenches outside of buildings.The arbitrary line of demarcation between inside and outside of buildings occurs 5 feet outside the building perimeters. C. It shall be the duty and responsibility of the Contractor and all of its subcontractors to be familiar and comply with all requirements of Public Law 91-696, 29 U.S.C.Secs. 651 et.seq., the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, (OSHA)and all amendments thereto, and to WHICH TRENCH EXCAVATION WILL EXCEED A DEPTH OF FIVE FEET,THE CONTRACTOR AND ALL OF ITS SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL REQUIREMENTS OF 29 C.F.R. SECS. 1926.652 AND 1926.653,OSHA SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS. D. SPECIAL NOTE:All provisions and divisions of these specifications are a part of this section of these specifications.The Contractor shall consult these divisions and provisions in detail for instructions and include all items pertaining to this work.The Contractor shall consult all other divisions of these specifications,determine the extent of impact on the work required to complete the work required by this section of the specifications or portion thereof and related work shown on the drawings. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 BEDDING MATERIAL A. Select bedding material from trench excavation using care to separate it from unsuitable material. If suitable bedding material is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by the Architect. B. Use granular material,free from large stones, boulders and debris. Maximum aggregate size passing a 2"sieve opening. Maintain moisture content within a range that will allow specified compaction. Outside Utility Trench Excavation, Backfill,and Compaction 22 08 00-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 2.02 TRENCH BACKFILL A. Obtain trench backfill material from trench excavation. If sufficient suitable trench backfill material is not available from trench excavation, import it from sources approved by the Architect. B. Use granular material,free from large stones, boulders, and debris. Maintain moisture content within range that will allow specified compaction. Maximum aggregate size shall be 4 inches. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. Excavate trenches to depth and grades as shown on drawings. B. Place all excavated material suitable for backfill in an orderly manner and in conformance with safety codes. C. Dispose of all material not suitable for backfill. D. Form bell holes so pipelines rest on continuous undisturbed soil. If larger rocks or boulders are encountered, remove them. If ground surface is below specified pipe grade,fill to required depth with granular materials free from debris and rock,and compact to proper grade before installing piping. 3.02 LOCATION A. Locate trenches to accommodate utilities shown on the drawings. B. Construct trench with adequate width to allow compaction equipment to be used at the side of pipes. C. Make trench side slopes conform to prevailing safety code requirements. 3.03 DE-WATERING A. Perform whatever work is necessary to prevent flow and accumulation of surface or ground water in the excavation. 3.04 TIMING A. Do not complete backfill until utility system has been properly tested, inspected,and approved. B. Coordinate with the work of others and complete all trench work in a timely manner. 3.05 BEDDING Outside Utility Trench Excavation, Backfill,and Compaction 220800-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 A. Place bedding material under,around, and over pipe in lifts not exceeding 8" in depth. B. Work material around pipe by hand methods,taking care to keep any oversize or sharp stones out of contact with the pipe,and provide uniform support for the pipe. C. Cover pipe with bedding material to a minimum 6"depth before adding other backfill. D. Cover water line with 18" bedding material before backfilling. 3.06 BACKFILLING A. Continue placing backfill material until trench is completely filled to finished grade,or as shown on the drawing. B. Place backfill material in lifts not to exceed 12" in depth. 3.07 COMPACTION A. Compact all bedding material to al least 95%of maximum density,taking care not to damage the pipe. B. Compact backfill material to preclude future settlement or at least to 90%of maximum density. 3.08 FINISHING A. After completion of backfilling, dispose of excess material and smooth the surface to grade. B. Restore all surface areas to original conditions,or improve as shown on the drawings. C. Replace all paving, base course,gravel surfacing,sub-base,topsoil or other existing finished surface shown or not shown on the drawings. D. Clean up and finish all construction areas to original condition or better. END OF SECTION 22 08 00 Outside Utility Trench Excavation, Backfill,and Compaction 220800-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 22 14 00 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe, and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors. B. Sleeves and seals. C. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 232400-Vibration Isolation. B. Section 222600- Piping Insulation. C. Section 232800- Equipment Insulation. D. Section 211300- Fire Protection System. E. Section 224100- Plumbing System. F. Section 235100- Hydronic Piping. G. Section 235300— Refrigerant Piping 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME 1331.1- Power Piping. B. NFPA 13 -Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. C. NFPA 14-Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supports for Sprinkler Piping: In conformance with NFPA 13. B. Supports for Standpipes: In conformance with NFPA 14. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods. Support and Anchors 221400-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger. D. All hangers, supports and rods in areas exposed to the outdoors, such as but not limited to crawl spaces, service bays,wash bays, open shops and warehouses shall be hot dipped galvanized. E. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; cast iron roll and stand for pipe sizes 6 inches and over. F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. G. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and over: adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. H. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. I. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. J. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. K. Roof Pipe Supports and Hangers: Galvanized Steel Channel System as manufactured by Portable Pipe Hangers, Inc. or approved equal. For pipes 2-1/2" and smaller— Type PP10 with roller For pipes 3"through 8"—Type PS For multiple pipes—Type PSE -Custom L. Copper Pipe Support and Hangers: Electro-galvanized with thermoplastic elastomer cushions, Unistrut"Cush-A-Clamp" or equal. Hangers: Plastic coated; Unistrut or equal. M. For installation of protective shields refer to specification section 231400-3.03. N. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead. O. Pipe Rough-In Supports in Walls/Chases: Provide preformed plastic pipe supports, Sioux Chief"Pipe Titan" or equal. Support and Anchors 221400-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.02 HANGER RODS A. Galvanized Hanger Rods:Threaded both ends,threaded one end,or continuous threaded. 2.03 INSERTS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.04 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 20 gage galvanized steel. B. Lead Flashing: 4 Ib./sq. ft. sheet lead for waterproofing; 1 Ib./sq. ft. sheet lead for soundproofing. C. Caps: Steel, 20 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. D. Coordinate with roofing contractor/architect for type of flashing on metal roofs. 2.05 EQUIPMENT CURBS A. Fabricate curbs of hot dipped galvanized steel unless noted otherwise. 2.06 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel,tack welded to form a uniform sleeve. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Form with steel pipe, schedule 40. C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls,and Fireproofing: Prefabricated fire rated steel sleeves including seals, UL listed. D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. F. Fire Stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible, U.L. listed. G. Caulk: Paintable 25-year acrylic sealant. H. Pipe Alignment Guides: Factory fabricated, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted,two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider that bolts tightly to pipe. Length of guides shall be as recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. Support and Anchors 221400-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.07 FABRICATION A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe. C. Design roof supports without roof penetrations, flashing or damage to the roofing material. 2.08 FINISH A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSERTS A. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. Coordinate with structural engineer for placement of inserts. B. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. C. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface. D. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. Verify with structural engineer prior to start of work. 3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as follows: PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING HANGER DIAMETER (Steel Pipe) 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 7'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2 to 3 inch 10'-0" 3/8" 4 to 6 inch 10'-0" 1/2" 8 to 10 inch 10'-0" 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 10'-0" 3/4" Support and Anchors 221400-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• (Copper Pipe) 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 5'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inch 8'-0" 3/8" 3 to 4 inch 10'-0" 3/8" 6 to 8 inch 10'-0" 1/2" (Cast Iron) 2 to 3 inch 5'-0" 3/8" 4 to 6 inch 10'-0" 1/2" 8 to 10 inch 10'-0" 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 10'-0" 3/4" (PVC Pipe) 1-1/2 to 4 inch 4'-0" 3/8" 6 to 8 inch 4'-0" 1/2" 10 and over 4'-0" 5/8" B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow and at the vertical horizontal transition. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. I. Install hangers with nut at base and above hanger;tighten upper nut to hanger after final installation adjustments. J. Portable pipe hanger systems shall be installed per manufactures instructions. Support and Anchors 221400-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.03 Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements. A. Clamps: Attach galvanized clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9. B. Saddles: Install galvanized protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation. C. Shields: Install protective shields MSS Type 40 on cold and chilled water piping that has vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees and shall have dimensions in inches not less than the following: NPS LENGTH THICKNESS 1/4 THROUGH 3-1/2 12 0.048 4 12 0.060 5 & 6 18 0.060 8 THROUGH 14 24 0.075 16 THROUGH 24 24 0.105 D. Piping 2" and larger provide galvanized sheet metal shields with calcium silicate at hangers/supports. E. Insert material shall be at least as long as the protective shield. F. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install where indicated, with insulation of same thickness as piping. 3.04 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide equipment bases of concrete. B. Provide templates,anchor bolts,and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. 3.05 FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter flashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls,floors, and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 8 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked one inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, Support and Anchors 221400-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• metal counter flash and seal. C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal floor shower mop sink and all other drains watertight to adjacent materials. E. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 8 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Contact architect for all flashing details and roof construction. Seal penetrations watertight. 3.06 SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Extend sleeves through floors minimum one inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves full depth with fire rated thermfiber and 3M caulking and provide floor plate. C. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with U.L. listed fire stopping insulation and caulk seal air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. D. Fire protection sleeves may be flush with floor of stairways. END OF SECTION 22 14 00 Support and Anchors 221400-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 22 19 00 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND PIPE MARKING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 220500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. 1.03 Refer to Architectural Sections for additional requirements. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE AND PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Valves: 1. All valves shall be identified with a 1-1/2" diameter brass disc wired onto the handle. The disc shall be stamped with 1/2" high depressed black filled identifying numbers. These numbers shall be numerically sequenced for all valves on the job. 2. The number and description indicating make, size, model number and service of each valve shall be listed in proper operational sequence, properly typewritten. Three copies to be turned over to Owner at completion. 3. Tags shall be fastened with approved meter seal and 4 ply 0.018 smooth copper wire. Tags and fastenings shall be manufactured by the Seton Name Plate Company or approved equal. 4. All valves shall be numbered serially with all valves of any one system and/or trade grouped together. B. Pipe Marking: 1. All interior visible piping located in accessible spaces such as above accessible ceilings,equipment rooms,attic space, under floor spaces,etc.,shall be identified with all temperature pipe markers as manufactured by W.H. Brady Company,431 West Rock Ave., New Haven, Connecticut, or approved equal. System Identification and Pipe Marking 221900-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. All exterior visible piping shall be identified with UV and acid resistant outdoor grade acrylic plastic markers as manufactured by Set Mark distributed by Seton nameplate company. Factory location 20 Thompson Road, Branford, Connecticut, or approved equal. 3. Generally, markers shall be located on each side of each partition, on each side of each tee, on each side of each valve and/or valve group, on each side of each piece of equipment, and, for straight runs, at equally spaced intervals not to exceed 75 feet. In congested area, marks shall be placed on each pipe at the points where it enters and leaves the area and at the point of connection of each piece of equipment and automatic control valve. All markers shall have directional arrows. 4. Markers shall be installed after final painting of all piping and equipment and in such a manner that they are visible from the normal maintenance position. Manufacturer's installation instructions shall be closely followed. 5. Markers shall be colored as indicated below per ANSI/OSHA Standards: SYSTEM COLOR LEGEND Sanitary Sewer Green Vent Sanitary Sewer Domestic Water Green Domestic Water Domestic Hot Water Yellow Domestic Hot Supply Water Supply Domestic Hot Water Yellow Domestic Hot Re-circulating Water Return Fire Protection Red Fire Protection Automatic Red Fire Sprinkler Sprinkler C. Pipe Painting: 1. All piping exposed to view shall be painted as indicated or as directed by the Architect in the field. Confirm all color selections with Architect prior to installation. 2. The entire fire protection piping system shall be painted red. 3. All piping located in mechanical rooms and exterior piping shall be painted as indicated below: System Identification and Pipe Marking 221900-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• System Color Storm Sewer White Sanitary Sewer Waste and Vent Light Gray Domestic Cold Water Dark Blue Domestic Hot Water Supply and Return Orange Compressed Air Green Chilled Water Supply and Return Light Blue PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All labeling equipment shall be installed as per manufacturers printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Contractor's price shall include all items required as per manufacturers' requirements. 3.03 All piping shall be cleaned of rust, dirt, oil and all other contaminants prior to painting. Install primer and a quality latex paint over all surfaces of pipe. END OF SECTION 22 19 00 System Identification and Pipe Marking 221900-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 22 26 00 PIPING INSULATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 220500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. B. Work specified elsewhere. 1. Painting. 2. Pipe hangers and supports. C. All pipes subject to freezing conditions shall be insulated. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials or workmanship. B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to,the following: 1. Mildewing. 2. Peeling, cracking, and blistering. 3. Condensation on exterior surfaces. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance,fabrication procedures, project variations, and accessories. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. DELIVERY: Deliver undamaged materials in the manufacturer's unopened containers. Piping Insulation 222600-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• Containers shall be clearly labeled with the insulation's flame and smoke ratings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 It is the intent of these specifications to secure superior quality workmanship resulting in an absolutely satisfactory installation of insulation from the standpoint of both function and appearance. Particular attention shall be given to valves, fittings, pumps, etc., requiring low temperature insulation to insure full thickness of insulation and proper application of the vapor seal. All flaps of vapor barrier jackets and/or canvas covering must be neatly and securely smoothed and sealed down. 2.02 The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for each service, and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All insulation types, together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and approved prior to installation. 2.03 A sample quantity of each type of insulation and each type application shall be installed and approval secured prior to proceeding with the main body of the work. Condensation caused by improper installation of insulation shall be corrected by Installing Contractor. Any damage caused by condensation shall be made good at no cost to the Owner or Architect/Engineer. 2.04 All insulation shall have composite (insulation,jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing orjacket to insulation)fire and smoke hazard as tested by Procedure ASTM E084, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not exceeding: Flame Spread 25 Smoke Developed 50 2.05 Accessories, such as adhesives, mastics and cements shall have the same component ratings as listed above. 2.06 All products or their shipping cartons shall have a label affixed, indicating flame and smoke ratings do not exceed the above requirements. 2.07 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Calcium silicate materials shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville. B. Glass fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville or Owens-Corning and shall have the same thermal properties, density, fire rating, vapor barrier, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. C. Adhesives shall be as manufactured by Childers, Foster, HB Fuller or Armstrong, and shall have the same adhesive properties, fire rating, vapor seal, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. D. Armaflex elastomeric cellular thermal insulation by Armstrong. Piping Insulation 222600-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• E. Phenolic foam insulation shall be as manufactured by PolyPhen 2500 Insulation. F. Polyisocyanurate insulation shall be as manufactured by Dow"Trymer 2000 XP". G. Metal jacketing and fitting covers shall be as manufactured by Childers or RPR Products. 2.08 MATERIALS A. For insulation purpose piping is defined as the complete piping system including supplies and returns, pipes, valves, automatic control valve bodies, fittings, flanges, strainers, thermometer well, unions, reducing stations, and orifice assemblies. B. INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPE: provide fiberglass pipe insulation with all service jackets with self sealing lap joint. C. EXTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPE: Provide elastomeric cellular thermal, or preformed phenolic foam pipe insulation with secured metal jacketing. D. DRAIN BODIES AND DOWN SPOUTS: Insulate horizontal roof drain down spouts, underside of roof drain bodies, chilled water waste lines from drinking fountain to junction with main waste stacks, and branch lines including traps and exposed underside of floor drains receiving cooling coil condensate, same as water piping where exposed to building occupant view. When concealed, insulation may be same as specified for external duct wrap. E. CONDENSATE DRAINAGE PIPING: Fire resistant fiberglass insulation; insulation not required when piping is exposed on roof. F. METAL JACKETING: Utilize Childers "Strap-On" jacketing. Provide preformed fitting covers for all elbows and tees. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations and printed installation instructions, including high density inserts at all hangers and pipe supports to prevent compression of insulation. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements. 3.03 Pipes located outdoors or in crawl spaces shall be insulated same as concealed piping; and in addition shall have a jacket of 0.016 inch thick, smooth aluminum with longitudinal modified Pittsburg Z-Lock seam and 2 inch overlap. Jacketing shall be easily removed and replaced without damage. All butt joints shall be sealed with gray silicone. Galvanized banding is not acceptable. 3.04 All insulated piping located over driveways shall have an aluminum shield permanently banded over insulation to protect it from damage from car antennas. Piping Insulation 222600-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.05 WATER PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. The insulation shall be applied to clean, dry pipes with all joints firmly butted together. Where piping is interrupted by fittings, flanges, valves or hangers and at intervals not to exceed 25 feet on straight runs, an isolating seal shall be formed between the vapor barrier jacket and the bare pipe. The seal shall be by the applications of adhesive to the exposed insulation joint faces, carried continuously down to and along 4 inches of pipe and up to and along 2 inches of jacket. B. Pipe fittings and valves shall be insulated with pre-molded or shop fabricated glass fiber covers finished with two brush coats of vapor barrier mastic reinforced with glass fabric. C. All under lap surfaces shall be clean and free of dust, etc. before the SSL is sealed. These laps shall be firmly rubbed to insure a positive seal. A brush coat of vapor retarder shall be applied to all edges of the vapor barrier jacket. 3.06 FIRE RATED INSULATION A. All pipe penetrations through walls and concrete floors shall be fire rated by applying USG Thermafiber in the space between the concrete and the pipe. B. The fire rating shall be additionally sealed by using 3M brand model CP 25 or 303 fire barrier caulk and putty. C. All fire rating material shall be insulated in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. PART 4-SCHEDULES 4.01 LOW TEMPERATURE SURFACES MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS BASED ON FIBERGLASS A. Exposed exterior domestic water pipe: 1% inch B. Interior domestic cold water pipe exposed to freezing temperatures: 1 inch C. Condensate drain lines: % inch D. Drains receiving condensate: 1 inch E. Concealed horizontal leader from roof drain: 1% inch blanket wrap Exposed horizontal leader from roof drain: 1 inch thick rigid (phenolic) with all service jackets 4.02 HIGH TEMPERATURE SURFACES MINIMUM INSULATION Piping Insulation 222600-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• THICKNESS A. Domestic Hot Water and Hot Water Circulating Piping 1 inch END OF SECTION 22 26 00 Piping Insulation 222600-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 22 4100 PLUMBING, PIPING,AND VALVES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and pipe fittings. B. Valves. C. Sanitary sewer piping system. D. Domestic water piping system. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 022220- Excavating. B. Section 022230- Backfilling. C. Section 022250-Trenching. D. Section 221400-Supports and Anchors. E. Section 221900—System Identification and Pipe Marking. F. Section 232420-Vibration Isolation. G. Section 222600- Piping Insulation. H. Section 224400- Plumbing Fixtures. I. Section 224500- Plumbing Equipment. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI B31.1- Power Piping. B. ANSI B31.9- Building Service Piping. C. ASME- Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. D. ASME Sec. 9-Welding and Brazing Qualifications. E. ASME B16.1 -Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250 and 800. F. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. Plumbing, Piping,and Valves 224100-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• G. ASME B16.4-Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Class 125 and 250. H. ASME B16.22 -Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings I. ASTM A47- Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. J. ASTM A53- Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. K. ASTM A74-Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. L. ASTM B32 -Solder Metal. M. ASTM B42 -Seamless Copper Pipe. N. ASTM B306-Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). O. ASTM D1785- Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40, 80, and 120. P. ASTM D2241- Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR). Q. ASTM D2466- Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. R. ASTM D2564-Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. S. ASTM D2729 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. T. ASTM D2846 - Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Pipe, Fittings, Solvent Cements and Adhesives for Potable Hot Water Systems. U. ASTM F493-Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. V. AWWA C111- Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. W. AWWA C651- Disinfecting Water Mains. X. CISPI 301-Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems. Y. CISPI 310-Joints for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, Pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. Plumbing, Piping,and Valves 224100-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Record actual locations of valves. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating cast or marked on valve body. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable state labor regulations. C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME Sec 9. D. Foreign pipe, fittings or valves are unacceptable. E. Piping shall be labeled along entire length indicating size, class, material specification, manufacturers name and country of origin. 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum 5 years documented experience and must be a domestic manufacturer. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with plumbing and building codes having jurisdiction. B. Conform to applicable codes for the provision and installation of all required backflow prevention devices. C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices. Plumbing, Piping,and Valves 224100-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. No PVC pipe or fittings will be allowed for any areas where pipe is to penetrate a fire rated assembly or to be installed in a return air plenum unless the entire length of all such piping is encased within a minimum 2 hour fire rated enclosure. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1. B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. Tape will not be allowed as an acceptable end cover. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide two repacking kits for each size valve. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 SANITARY SOIL WASTE AND VENT PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OUTSIDE OF BUILDING A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785/D 2729 schedule 40; installed per ASTM D 2321. 1. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D 3311/D 2665 drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends. Furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal. 2. Joints: solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement, installed per the requirements of ASTM D 2855. ***OR*** B. PVC pipe: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35; installed per ASTM D 2321. 1. Fittings:ASTM F 1336 PVC,drainage pattern,with bell and spigot ends. Furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal. 2. Joints: ASTM F 477 or F 913, elastomeric gaskets or solvent weld. 2.02 SANITARY SOIL,WASTE AND VENT PIPING,BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING, BELOW GRADE A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785/D 2665 schedule 40 Plumbing, Piping,and Valves 224100-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D 3311/D 2665 drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends to be furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal. 2. Joints: solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement, clear, medium bodied, for sizes 3" and smaller and gray, heavy bodied, for sizes 4" and larger, mating surfaces shall be prepared with ASTM F 656 purple primer immediately prior to cement application. 2.03 SANITARY SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPING, WITHIN BUILDING,ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A 74 drainage pattern. 2. Joints: Hub and spigot, ASTM C 564 neoprene, compression type gaskets or lead and oakum. ***OR*** B. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 888, hubless, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron,ASTM A 888 drainage pattern. 2. Joints: No hub, ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets and standard stainless steel clamp and solid shield assemblies constructed of type 300 series stainless steel. Clamp assemblies shall conform to FM 1680 where required by the administrative authority. C. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, DWV, sizes 2" and smaller. 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.23 cast bronze, or ASME B16.29, wrought copper. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, solder, Grade 50B. D. Brass Pipe: ASTM B 43, chrome plated. 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.23 cast bronze, chrome plated. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, solder, Grade 50B. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, galvanized, sizes 2-1/2" and smaller, for waste and vent piping only, steel soil pipes not permitted. 1. Fittings: Malleable iron,galvanized. 2. Joints:ASME 816.3 screwed. 2.04 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OUTSIDE OF BUILDING A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785 schedule 80. 1. Fittings: ASTM D 2467 PVC. 2. Joints:ASTM D 2855, solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. Plumbing, Piping,and Valves 224100-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 1• 2.05 DOMESTIC WATER PIPE, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING, BELOW GRADE A. Copper Tubing: ASTM 888,Type K, soft annealed. Provide for pipe sizes up to and including 2-1/2". 1. Fittings: ASTM B16.22 wrought copper pressure fittings. 2. Joints shall be as follows: a. No joints shall be permitted for pipe sizes 2" and smaller. All such piping must be run continuous below slab on grade and brought up to no less than 12"above the finished floor before any joint is provided. b. For sizes larger than 2",joints between copper pipe and fittings shall be brazed and shall be made in accordance with all the applicable portions of ASTM B828, manufacturer's recommendations, and AWS requirements. Brazing filler metal shall be in accordance with AWS A5.8 and any required flux shall meet AWS A5.31,Type FB3-A or FB3-C. 3. Beginning at no closer than the 5'-0" mark from the building, all piping buried or in contact with concrete shall be provided with one of the following, which shall also extend to a minimum of 6" above the finished floor: a. AWWA C209 cold-applied, integrated primer type, elastomeric adhesive, laminate polymeric tape coating, minimum 35 mil nominal thickness, in accordance with manufacturer's installation guidelines. Chase Construction Products Tapecoat H35 or approved equivalent. b. Continuous polyethylene lining, minimum 60 mil nominal thickness. B. Ductile Iron Pipe: Minimum pressure class 150,ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51. Provide for pipe sizes 3" and larger. 1. Fittings: Standard ductile iron,ANSI/AWWAC110/A21.10. 2. Joints: Rubber-gasketed and bolted mechanical joints, ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Installation shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600 and approved pipe lubricant shall be used for optimum gasket sealing and long- term performance. 3. Note: A single fitting may be installed below slab on grade to facilitate underground pipe entry up to above floor from an immediately adiacent exterior building wall. 4. Provide continuous polyethylene encasement for all piping buried or in contact with concrete in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5, beginning at no closer than the 5'-0" mark from the building and to a minimum of 6"above the finished floor. C. Stainless Steel Pre-Fabricated In-Building Riser(acceptable for sizes 2"through 10") 1. Corrosion resistant Type 304 stainless steel construction single, extended 90 degree fitting. 2. UL listed, FM approved and NFPA 24 compliant. Plumbing, Piping,and Valves 224100-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3. Lead free and NSF/ANSI 61 (372)certified. 4. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Ames Fire &Waterworks Series IBR (4"through 10") and IBR2 (2", 2- 1/2", and 3") b. Zurn Wilkins Model WBR (4"through 10") 5. Note: For this application, the inlet joint for larger diameter (4" through 10") piping (which shall not be located below a building slab or foundation) can be rubber gasketed push-on type,ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Installation shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWAC600. 6. Provide continuous polyethylene encasement for all piping buried or in contact with concrete in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5, beginning at no closer than the 5'-0" mark from the building and to a minimum of 6" above the finished floor. 2.06 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING,WITHIN BUILDING,ABOVE GRADE: A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88,Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast bronze, or ASTM B 16.22 wrought copper alloy. 2. Joints between copper pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with ASTM B828 using ASTM B32 Alloy HB lead-free solder. 3. Fittings and joints for pipe sizes 1/2" through 4" may be mechanical press- connect system joints with ASME B16.51 lead-free copper bodied fittings with integral ethylene-propylene diene monomer rubber (EPDM) sealing gaskets. All fittings, couplings, and adapters shall be the product of a single system manufacturer and only that manufacturer's approved press tools, kits, and jaws shall be used. a. EPDM o-rings shall be pre-installed and lubricated with ANSI/NSF 61 listed lubricant. b. All installers of copper press-connect fittings shall be trained by the fitting manufacturer's appointed representative and carry such credentials for the duration of the project. C. The fitting manufacturer's representative shall conduct periodic inspections of the installation and shall provide written reports of such inspections to the Contractor and Engineer, including any observed deviations from the manufacturer's recommended installation practices. d. Acceptable system manufacturers:Viega, Merit Brass,or pre-approved equal. 2.07 FLANGES AND UNIONS A. Drainage Applications: 1. Provide approved listed adapter and transition fittings appropriate to the specific pipe transition and in accordance with code requirements. Plumbing, Piping,and Valves 224100-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2. For dissimilar piping above ground, provide stainless steel shielded, molded elastomeric couplings and adapters meeting ASTM C564 and ASTM C1460. Applies to installations including cast iron to PVC transitions immediately adjacent to building slabs on grade. 3. For dissimilar underground piping not below building slab, provide shear resistant .012" thick 300 series stainless steel shielded, PVC gasketed flexible couplings and adapters meeting ASTM D5926 and ASTM C1173. For direct-bury applications, provide AWWA C209 cold-applied, integrated primer type, elastomeric adhesive, laminate polymeric tape coating, minimum 35 mil nominal thickness, in accordance with manufacturer's installation guidelines,to completely wrap the shield, banding, and screws. Chase Construction Products TapecoatH35 or approved equivalent. 4. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Anaco-Husky/Cremco b. Mission Rubber Company LLC C. Fernco, Inc. d. Fernco, Inc.Strong Back RC 1000 Series(underground piping, notbelow building slab; or readily accessible underground piping transitions in backwater valve pits, etc.) 5. Adapters, couplings, bushings for copper DWV pipe shall be cast bronze or wrought copper,ASME 1316.23/1316.29. B. Domestic Water Applications: 1. Provide joints between various materials with approved adapter and transition fittings appropriate to the specific pipe transition and in accordance with code requirements and the manufacturer's instructions. 2. For copper tube and pipe: adapters, bushings, plugs, caps, and couplings shall be wrought copper or cast bronze; flanges (minimum class 150) and unions shall be cast bronze. Provide with solder or threaded connections as necessary and as produced to applicable ASME standards B16.15,B16.18, B16.22, B16.24, B16.50, 81.20.1. All such appurtenances shall be for use in above ground potable water systems. 3. Above slab transitions for water service entries: a. 100% fusion bonded epoxy coated ASTM A536 cast ductile iron construction coupling with acrylonitrile butadiene rubber (NBR) gaskets and EPDM insulating boot for water service. 5/8 inch high strength stainless steel bolts and nuts. Coupling shall meet AWWA C219. Romac Industries, Inc. IC501 or pre-approved equivalent. b. 100%fusion bonded 14 mil epoxy coated coupling with ASTM A536 cast ductile iron rings. Complete with acrylonitrile butadiene rubber (NBR) gaskets and type 304 stainless steel bridge, spacers, nuts, and bolts. Coupling shall meet AWWA C219, NSF 61, and NSF 372. Krausz USA Hymax Grip Coupling Restraint or pre-approved equivalent. 4. Dielectric connections: Plumbing, Piping,and Valves 224100-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• a. For pipe sizes 2 inch and smaller, provide lead-free dielectric unions, rated to 180 F at 250 psi and compliant to ASSE 1079. b. For pipe sizes larger than 2 inches, provide lead-free dielectric flanged pipe fittings, rated to 180 F at 175 psi and meeting ASME B16.1. C. For grooved copper joining systems, provide grooved end dielectric transition fitting from system manufacturer, with virgin polypropylene internal lining, meeting NSF 61. C. General: 1. Unions for ferrous pipe shall be ASTM 816.39 galvanized malleable iron, threaded, minimum pressure class 150. 2. Plugs and bushings for ferrous pipe shall be ASME 816.14 galvanized malleable iron,threaded. 3. Nipples for ferrous pipe shall be schedule 40,galvanized,ASTM A53welded steel pipe nipples,threaded, meeting ASTM A733. 4. Couplings for ferrous pipe shall be galvanized steel,threaded, manufactured in accordance with ASTM A865. 5. Flanges for ferrous pipe shall be galvanized forged steel construction, either socket weld or slip-on weld type, minimum pressure class 150, manufactured to ASME B16.5. 6. Bolts, nuts,and gaskets for flanged connections shall be appropriate to the pipe material, fluid type, temperature, and pressure. 1/16" thick pre-formed neoprene,typical. 7. Provide flexible stainless steel connectors at pumps and other such equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Connectors shall have corrugated hose and braided 300 series stainless steel jacketing. Carbon steel flanged or grooved ends as appropriate. NSF 372 lead-free for all potable water applications. Metraflex Company or pre-approved equivalent. 2.08 GATE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco No.T-111 up to 2-1/2"; F-617-0 3" and over. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Crane No.428 up to 2-1/2"; 465-1/2 3" and over. b. Stockham No. B-100 up to 2-1/2"; G-623 3" and over. C. Grinnell No. 3010 up to 2-1/2"; 6020A 3" and over. B. Up to and including 2-1/2" Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge threaded ends. C. Over 3" Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, solid wedge, flanged ends. D. Provide bronze tee or cast iron square nut operator for all valves installed below ground. Plumbing, Piping,and Valves 224100-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Valves 2-1/2" and smaller shall be equipped with ASTM B62 solid red bronze tee securely affixed to the valve stem. 2. Valves 3" and larger shall be equipped with a standard 2" square combination nut/socket securely affixed to the valve stem. 3. Provide owner with two extended tee handle operating wrenches for each type of valve head installed. 2.09 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco No.T-585-66-LF (full port)for all sizes up through 2" 2. Nibco No.T-580-66-LF (conventional port)for sizes 2-1/2" and 3" 3. Valves 4" and larger shall be split body stainless steel construction, 275psi cold working pressure, blow-out proof stem, PTFE seated, type 316 stainless steel trimmed, class 150 full port desing with manual gear operator. Nibco F-515-S6-F- 66-FS 4. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Apollo 77 CLF-A series (full port)for all sizes up through 2". b. Milwaukee UPBA-400S (full port) for all sizes up through 2". C. Apollo 77 CLF-A series (full port)for size 2-1/2" and Apollo 70LF-140 series (standard port) for 3". d. Milwaukee UPBA-100S (standard port)for sizes 2-1/2" and 3". B. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze two 600 PSI piece body full port, lead-free, stainless steel ball and stem, Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle and balancing stops, threaded ends with union. C. Ball valves used for balancing shall have memory stops. 2.10 SWING CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco No.T-413-Y-LF up to 2"; F-918-13-1-F 2-1/2" and over. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Crane No. 37 up to 2-1/2"; 372 3" and over. b. Stockham No. B-319; up to 2-1/2"; G931 3" and over. C. Grinnell No. 3300 up to 2-1/2"; 6300A 3" and over. B. Up to and including 2-1/2 Inches: Bronze swing disc, screwed ends. C. Over 2-1/2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends. Include outside lever and adjustable weight where required for quiet operation. Plumbing, Piping,and Valves 224100-10 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.11 SPRING LOADED (SILENT) CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco No. W-910 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Grinnell No. 402 B. Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer, or flanged ends. 2.12 SOLDER A. 95.5%tin,4%copper, 0.5%silver. B. Lead free, antimony free, zinc-free. C. Silvabrite 100, by Engelhard Corporation or approved equal. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Coordinate and verify excavations under provisions of Division 2. B. Verify that all excavations are to the required grade, dry, and not over-excavated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale, oil and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. Install, clean bank sand backfill in trench to a minimum of 6 inches below pipe, and to cover all piping a minimum of 12 inches above pipe. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. B. All exposed sewer and water pipe in toilet rooms or other finished areas of the building shall be chromium plated. C. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. Plumbing, Piping,and Valves 224100-11 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel and perpendicular to building column grid lines, unless indicated otherwise on drawings, and maintain gradients. E. Install piping to conserve building space and not conflict with other trades or interfere with intended use of space. F. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. H. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Valves installed beyond reasonable reach shall be provided with chain operator. I. Provide access doors where valves and operable fittings are not exposed. Access doors shall be of approved types set in locations pre-approved by submittal to the Architect. J. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 2 feet of cover, or maximum depth of frost penetration,which ever is the greater. K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. L. Provide encasement for and support of utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. M. Gate valves installed below grade shall be covered with an adjustable cast iron roadway box extended to grade. Cover shall be cast iron with 'water' cast on top and set flush to finished paving or 2" above finished earthen grade. Box shall be supported from undisturbed soil or concrete base and shall not introduce any stress to piping under all traffic conditions. N. Prepare pipe,fittings,supports,and accessories not pre-finished, ready for finish painting. O. Excavate in accordance with Division 2. P. Backfill in accordance with Division 2. Q. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. R. Maintain uniformity in the installation of piping materials and joining methods. Do not mix materials types. S. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. T. Solder joints shall be wiped clean at each joint, remove excess metal while molten and flux residue when cooled. Plumbing, Piping,and Valves 224100-12 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• U. No PVC pipe or fittings will be allowed for any areas where pipe is installed in return air plenum unless the entire length of all such piping is encased within a minimum 2 hour fire rated enclosure. V. Installations of thermoplastic piping systems shall be in strict conformity to the manufacturers published instructions. Under ground drainage pipe installations shall be in conformity to ASTM D 2321. W. Installation of solvent cement joints for PVC piping shall be in strict conformity to the requirements outlined in ASTM D 2855. X. Waste nipple from wall to tapped tee shall be schedule 40 threaded galvanized steel pipe or brass or copper with threaded adapter. Y. Provide approved PVC slip by cast iron no hub adaptor at each transition from underground PVC piping to above ground cast iron pipe using standard or wide bodied no hub couplings for as specified elsewhere in this section. Transition shall be made as close as possible to floor for sanitary DWV piping systems and at test tee for storm drainage piping. Support vertical cast iron pipe from floor anchors with using riser clamp and galvanized all thread rod as specified in section 231400. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Install union downstream of all valves at equipment or apparatus connections. B. Install male adapters each side of threaded valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to tube prior to make-up of threaded connections. C. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate all equipment items,distinct parts of systems, or vertical risers. D. Each plumbing fixture shall have a shut-off valve on each hot water and cold water supply line. E. Each plumbing water rough-in stub out shall be fitted with a shut off valve. F. Install globe, ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or balancing (manual flow control) services. G. Ball valves installed in insulated piping shall be fitted with extended lever operators of sufficient length to raise handle above the insulation jacket material. Where valve is used for throttling service valve handle shall be equipped with adjustable memory stop device. H. Provide spring loaded, non-slam, check valves on discharge of water pumps. 3.05 ERECTION TOLERANCES Plumbing, Piping,and Valves 224100-13 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• A. All drainage lines in the building shall have 1/4 inch to the foot fall where possible and not less than 1/8 inch to the foot fall toward the main sewer. Pipe must be so laid that the slope will be uniform and continuous. Permission shall be secured from the Architect and Engineer before proceeding with any Work where existing conditions prevent the installation at minimum grade specified. B. Slope all water piping and arrange to drain at low points. Provide loose key operated, polished chrome, sill cock flush to wall where fixture stop will not suffice for this requirement. 3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, all domestic water systems shall be complete, thoroughly flushed clean and free of all foreign matter or erection residue. B. Ensure PH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). C. On building side of the main shut off valve, provide a 3/4" connection through which chlorine can be introduced into the water piping D. Inject disinfectant,free chlorine in liquid,powder,tablet or gas form,in sufficient quantity to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual free chlorine solution throughout the entire domestic water piping systems. E. Bleed water from outlets as required to ensure complete distribution and test for disinfectant residual at a minimum 15 percent of total outlets. F. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. G. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. H. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. I. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 5 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. 3.07 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide new sanitary and storm sewer services connecting to existing building services or utility lines as shown on the drawings. B. Before commencing work, field verify invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover as required. Plumbing, Piping,and Valves 224100-14 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Provide new domestic water service connecting to existing building services or utility lines as shown on plans. Assure connections are in compliance with requirements of the jurisdiction having authority. D. Extension of services to the building shall be fabricated from the same materials as the utility service lines or those materials specified herein. E. Should points of connection vary from those indicated on the drawings contractor shall properly allow for this in the actual connections field fabricated. 3.08 RODDING SEWERS A. All sanitary soil and waste lines, both in the building and out, shall be rodded out after completion of the installation. B. This Work shall be done, as part of the contract, to make certain that all lines are clear, and any obstruction that may be discovered shall be removed immediately. Rodding shall be accomplished by utilizing a rotary cutter,which shall be full size of pipe being cleaned. 3.09 TESTING OF PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS A. During the progress of the work and upon completion, tests shall be made as specified herein and as required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction, including Inspectors, Owner or Architect. The Architect or duly authorized Construction Inspector shall be notified in writing at least 2 working days prior to each test or other Specification requirement which requires action on the part of the Construction Inspector. B. Tests shall be conducted as part of this work and shall include all necessary instruments, equipment, apparatus, and service as required to perform the tests with qualified personnel. Submit proposed test procedures, recording forms, and test equipment for approval prior to the execution of testing. C. Tests shall be performed before piping of various systems have been covered or furred- in. For insulated piping systems testing shall be accomplished prior to the application of insulation. D. All piping systems shall be tested with water and proved absolutely tight for a period of not less than 24 hours. Tests shall be witnessed by the Architect or an authorized representative and pronounced satisfactory before pressure is removed or any water drawn off. E. Leaks, damage or defects discovered or resulting from test shall be repaired or replaced to a like new condition. Leaking pipe joints, or defective pipe, shall be removed and replaced with acceptable materials. Test shall be repeated after repairs are completed and shall continue until such time as the entire test period expires without the discovery of any leaks. Plumbing, Piping,and Valves 224100-15 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• F. Wherever conditions permit, each piping system shall thereafter be subjected to its normal operating pressure and temperature for a period of no less than five 5 days. During that period, it shall be kept under the most careful observation. The piping systems must demonstrate the propriety of their installation by remaining absolutely tight during this period. G. Domestic Water: 1. Provide hydrostatic pressure test at one and one half times the normal working pressure or 125 psig, which ever is the greater, for 24 hours. H. Sanitary Soil, Waste and Vents and Storm Sewer: 1. After the rough-in soil, waste and vent and other parts of the sanitary sewer including branch laterals have been set from the lowest level, at point of connection to existing utility lines, to above the floor line, all outlets shall be temporarily plugged or capped, except as are required for testing as described herein. Ground work shall not permit the backfill of trenches to cover any joints until the completion of testing. Back fill shall be limited to mid sections of full joints of piping only. For pipe in ground the piping shall be readied as described herein and filled with water to a verifiable and visible level to 10'above the lowest portions of the system being tested. 2. On multi-level buildings only one floor level shall be tested at a time. Each floor shall be tested from a level below the structure of the floor, or the outlet of the building in the case of the lowest level, to a level of 12 inches above the floor immediately above the floor being tested, or the top of the highest vent in the case of the highest building level. The pipes for the level being tested shall be filled with water to a verifiable and visible level as described above and be allowed to remain so for 24 hours. If after 24 hours the level of the water has been lowered by leakage, the leaks must be found and stopped, and the water level shall again be raised to the level described, and the test repeated until,after a 24 hour retention period, there shall be no perceptible lowering of the water level in the system being tested. 3. Should the completion of these tests leave any reasonable question or doubt of the integrity of the installation, additional tests including peppermint smoke, or other measures shall be performed to demonstrate the reliability of these systems to the complete satisfaction of the Owner's duly authorized representative. Such tests shall be conducted and completed before any joints in plumbing are concealed or made inaccessible. 3.10 COMPLETE FUNCTIONING OF WORK A. All work fairly implied as essential to the complete functioning of the systems shown on the Drawings and Specification shall be completed as part of the work of this Division unless specifically stated otherwise. It is the intention of the Drawings and Specification to establish the type and function of systems but not to set forth each item essential to the functioning of any system. In case of doubt as to the work intended or in the event of amplification or clarification thereof, the Contractor shall call upon the Architect for Supplementary Instructions and Drawings, etc. Plumbing, Piping,and Valves 224100-16 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• END OF SECTION 22 4100 Plumbing, Piping,and Valves 224100-17 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 22 43 00 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Cleanouts. B. Backflow preventers. C. Water hammer arrestors. D. Thermostatic mixing valves. E. Hose bibbs hydrants. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 221400-Supports and Anchors. B. Section 224100- Plumbing Piping. C. Section 224400- Plumbing Fixtures. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventers with Immediate Atmospheric Vent. B. ANSI/ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. C. ANSI/ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle. D. ANSI/ASSE 1019 -Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-Backflow Types. E. ANSI A112.21.1- Floor Drains. F. ANSI A112.26.1-Water Hammer Arresters. G. PDI WH-201 Water Hammer Arresters H. AWWA C506 - Backflow Prevention Devices - Reduced Pressure Principle and Double Check Valve Types. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer throughout. Plumbing Specialties 224300-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1. C. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, and backflow preventers. 1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors. C. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1. B. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide two loose keys for hose bibbs and spare hose end vacuum breakers. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-CLEANOUTS A. Zurn B. Watts C. Jay R. Smith Plumbing Specialties 224300-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. E. Cleanouts 1. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Square cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover; 2. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover; 3. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Galvanized cast iron, two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and adjustable nickel-bronze strainer, round with scored cover in service areas and round with depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas; 4. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and 6" round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw; 5. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Calked or threaded type., Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-HOSE BIBBS/HYDRANTS A. Woodford B. Zurn C. Jay R. Smith D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. E. HOSE BIBBS/HYDRANTS 1. Bronze or brass, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread spout, chrome plated where exposed to interior with lockshield and removable key, integral vacuum breaker in conformance with ANSI/ASSE 1011; 2. Wall Hydrant: ANSI/ASSE 1019; non-freeze,self-draining type with rough chrome plated lockable recessed box hose thread spout, lockshield and removable key, and vacuum breaker; 3. Floor Hydrant: ANSI/ASSE 1019; chrome plated lockable recessed box, hose thread spout, lockshield and removable key, and vacuum breaker; 2.03 RECESSED VALVE BOX A. Manufacturers: 1. Oatey. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 3. Sioux Chief 4. Guy Gray. 5. Washing Machine: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass quarter turn ball valves and water hammer arrestors on both hot and cold connections, socket for waste, slip in finishing cover; Plumbing Specialties 224300-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 6. Refrigerator: Plastic preformed rough-in box with quarter turn brass ball valve, slip in finishing cover; 2.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Watts B. Wilkins C. Febco D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. E. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 1. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: ANSI/ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze and plastic internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating,spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve which opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks; 2. Double Check Valve Assemblies: ANSI/ASSE 1012; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent; 2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Sioux Chief B. Wilkins C. Zurn D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. E. WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS 1. ANSI A112.26.1; sized in accordance with PDI WH-201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range-100 to 300 degrees F(-73 to 149 degrees C) and maximum 250 psig (1700 kPa)working pressure; 2.06 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES A. Powers B. Bradley C. Leonard Plumbing Specialties 224300-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. E. Thermostatic Mixing Valves 1. Provide thermostatic mixing valve, with check valve, volume control shut-off valve on outlet, stem type thermometer on outlet, strainer stop check on inlet, mounted in lockable cabinet of 16 gage (1.5 mm) prime coated steel. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate cutting,forming of roof and/or floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations. 3.02 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended performance. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. D. Pipe relief from back flow preventer to nearest drain. END OF SECTION 22 43 00 Plumbing Specialties 224300-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 22 44 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 220500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. A. WORK INCLUDED: Include the following Work in addition to items normally part of this Section: 1. Plumbing fixtures. 2. Drains and cleanouts. B. WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 1. Piping systems. 2. Pipe valves, and fittings. 3. Plumbing systems testing. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials or workmanship. B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to,the following: 1. Noisy operation. 2. Noticeable deterioration of finish. 3. Leakage of water. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories. Plumbing Fixtures 224400-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS: Provide pre-printed operating and maintenance instructions for each item specified. Instruct and demonstrate the proper operation and maintenance to the Owner's designated representative. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. DELIVERY: Deliver clearly labeled, undamaged materials in the manufacturers' unopened containers. B. TIMING AND COORDINATION: Deliver materials to allow for minimum storage time at the project site. Coordinate delivery with the scheduled time of installation. C. STORAGE: Store materials in a clean, dry location, protected from weather and abuse. 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Confirm and field coordinate that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. PLUMBING FIXTURES: 1. GENERAL: Provide plumbing fixtures as specified on drawings. The approved equal products manufacturers are as follows: a. Water closet, urinals, lavatories, bath tubs and showers: American Standard, Kohler, Eljer. b. Stainless steel sinks: Elkay,Just and Moen. C. Mop sinks: Stern-Williams, Fiat d. Faucets: American Standard, Kohler, Eljer, e. Faucets: Chicago,T&S Brass, Zurn, Sloan f. Faucets: Moen Commercial, Speakman g. Shower valves: Leonard, Powers, Symmons, Chicago h. Shower Systems: Bradley,Acorn,Willoughby i. Flush Valves: Sloan "Royal",Zurn "AguaVantage" j. Drinking fountains: Halsey Taylor, Elkay, Haws,Acorn Aqua. k. Floor drains and roof drains: Zurn,J.R. Smith,Josam and Watts. I. Emergency Fixtures: Bradley, Chicago, Haws, Speakman and Encon 2. CHAIR CARRIERS: ANSI/ASME A112.6.1.; Adjustable cast iron frame, integral drain hub and vent, adjustable spud, lugs for floor and wall attachment,threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers. As manufactured by Zurn,J. R.Smith,Josam or Watts. 3. DRINKING FOUNTAIN&URINAL WALL SUPPORTS: ANSI/ASME A112.6.1;cast iron Plumbing Fixtures 224400-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger, bearing studs. As manufactured by Zurn, J. R. Smith,Josam or Watts. 4. TRAPS,STOPS AND RISERS: Heavy pattern as manufactured by McGuire, Chicago or Zurn. B. CLEANOUTS: 1. GENERAL: Provide cleanouts as shown on Drawings and as required by the city building code. 2. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Zurn J. R. Smith,Josam and Watts. 3. TYPES: a. FINISHED FLOOR CLEANOUTS: Provide cast iron, adjustable floor level assembly with round nickel bronze top and gasket cover. b. RESILIENT OR TILE FINISHED FLOOR CLEANOUTS: Provide cast iron, adjustable assembly with round nickel-bronze top with gasketed water tight cover and depressed top to receive flooring finish material. C. DRY WALL CLEANOUTS: Provide cast iron tee and counter sink bronze plug with square nickel bronze frame and stainless steel cover. d. Provide membrane clamp rings for slab on grade cleanouts. e. All cleanouts shall have tapered bronze plugs. f. All cleanouts outside of building on grade shall be set in a 18" x 18" x 4" thick concrete pad. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. EXAMINATION OF CONDITIONS: Examine conditions affecting this Work. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the proper authority and do not proceed until those conditions have been corrected. Commencing Work implies acceptance of existing conditions as satisfactory to the outcome of this Work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures in locations and heights as shown on Drawings or as directed by the Architect. B. Install materials plumb, level, securely, and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. All rough-in pipe openings, for final connections with all supply waste soil and vent systems shall be closed with caps or plugs during early stages of construction and installation. Tape shall not be considered sufficient protection. D. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures. Plumbing Fixtures 224400-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• E. Provide gate valves in piping serving batteries of fixtures. Label stops "Hot" and "Cold." Valves to be located above accessible ceiling. If ceiling are not accessible, provide access panels of adequate size to make valves fully accessible. F. Plumbing fixtures shall be supported by a concealed chair carrier where required to properly support the fixture specified. All carriers to be securely mounted, bolted and checked prior to concealment. G. Caulk around fixtures with best grade white silicone caulking. Do not use grout. H. All handles on supply and drainage fittings or other brass items shall be properly lined up and adjusted. Fittings shall not be left in any haphazard manner. I. All fixtures shall have individual chrome plated loose key cutoff stops on supply lines. Where same are not specified as a part of the fixture trim,they shall be installed as close to fixtures as possible in the hot and cold water supply. J. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. K. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons. L. Hot and cold water riser air chambers: Provide air chambers for hot and/or cold water riser located at the rough-in tee at all fixtures. The air chamber shall be of the same materials and the next larger diameter than the required rough-in supply pipe and a minimum of 24" tall. The contractor may install water hammer arrestors in lieu of air chambers. Water hammer arrestors shall be PDI Certified and sized and placed as recommended by manufacture. Provide an accessible isolation valve and proper access to arrestor for replacement. 3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Division 1. B. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of Division 1. Plumbing Fixtures 224400-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. At completion clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Division 1. B. Do not permit use of fixtures. 3.07 ADA ACCESSIBLE FIXTURES A. Install fixtures to heights, indicated on architectural drawings. B. Handicapped fixtures shall be installed to required heights, shall be of types suitable for, and supplied with controls properly installed,to comply with requirements as directed by ADA Accessibility of Federal Registry, Part III, Department of Justice 28 CFR 36 and comply with all state and local ADA Code requirements. C. Exposed accessible sink or lavatory p-trap and angle valve assemblies shall be insulated with the fully molded,Truebro, Handi Lav-guard insulation kit. Provide the proper model for fixtures specified. All kits shall be White or as selected by Architect. D. Wall mounted drinking fountains and coolers which protrude into passages or corridor space, whether single or paired with adjacent accessible fixture, shall be supplied with skirt or apron to lower the underside clearance of non-accessible fixture equal to that required for accessible fixture. END OF SECTION 22 44 00 Plumbing Fixtures 224400-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 22 45 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water Heaters. B. In-line circulator pumps. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 221400-Supports and Anchors. B. Section 232400—Sound &Vibration Control. C. Section 224100- Plumbing Piping&Valves. D. Section 224300- Plumbing Specialties. E. Section 261800 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASHRAE 90A- Energy Conservation in New Building Design. B. ASME Section VIIID- Pressure Vessels; Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes. C. ANSI/NFPA 54- National Fuel Gas Code. D. ANSI/NFPA 70- National Electrical Code. E. ANSI/UL 1453- Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include heat exchanger dimensions. size of tappings, and performance data. 2. Include dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points, tappings, and drains. C. Product Data: Plumbing Equipment 224500-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. Include dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. 2. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements, and affected adjacent construction. 3. Submit certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. 4. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number,and rating/capacity identified. C. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with recommendations and requirements of the following organizations: 1. American Gas Association (AGA). 2. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 4. National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBPVI). 5. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA). 6. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). D. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to AGA NSF ANSI/NFPA 54 ANSI/NFPA 70 ANSI/UL 1453 requirements for water heaters. B. Conform to ASME Section VIIID for manufacture of pressure vessels for heat exchangers. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section Division 1. Plumbing Equipment 224500-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Division 1. B. Warranty: Include coverage of domestic water heaters, water storage tanks, and packaged water heating systems. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide two sets of electric heater elements. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A. Manufacturers: 1. A.O. Smith. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. State Industries. b. Bradford White. B. Type: Factory-assembled and wired, electric,vertical storage. C. Tank: Glass lined welded steel; 4 inch diameter inspection port,thermally insulated with minimum 2 inches glass fiber encased in corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish. D. Controls: Automatic immersion water thermostat; externally adjustable temperature range from 60 to 180 degrees F (16 to 82 degrees C), flanged or screw-in nickle-chrome elements, high temperature limit thermostat. E. Accessories: Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, high-density magnesium anode, and ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve. 2.02 DIAPHRAGM-TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS A. Manufacturer: 1. Amtrol. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Bell & Gossett. b. Armstrong. C. Taco. Plumbing Equipment 224500-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ASME Code;supplied with National Board Form U-1,rated for working pressure of 125 psig,with flexible EPDM diaphragm sealed into tank, and steel legs or saddles. C. Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting,tank drain; pre-charge to 12 psig. 2.03 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Bell & Gossett. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. TACO. b. Grundfos C. Armstrong B. Casing: Bronze, rated for 125 psig working pressure. C. Impeller: Bronze. D. Shaft:Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings. E. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat. F. Drive: Flexible coupling. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to AGA NSF ANSI/NFPA 54 UL requirements. B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related work to achieve operating system. C. Provide secondary drain pan and route secondary drain pipe to outside the building or as indicated on the construction documents. D. Route TPR drain line to the exterior of the building and terminate 6 inches above grade. E. Provide 18 inch high galvanized stand manufactured for supporting water heaters. 3.02 DOMESTIC HOT WATER STORAGE TANK INSTALLATION A. Install tanks in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide steel pipe support for tanks,independent of building structural framing members. Plumbing Equipment 224500-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Clean and flush tank after installation. Seal until pipe connections are made. 3.03 PUMP INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Ensure shaft length allows sump pumps to be located minimum 24 inches below lowest invert into sump pit and minimum 6 inches clearance from bottom of sump pit. C. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings. D. Provide line sized isolating valve and strainer on suction and line sized soft seated check valve and balancing valve on discharge. E. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and over. F. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. G. Align and verify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up. END OF SECTION 22 45 00 Plumbing Equipment 224500-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 23 02 01 COORDINATION DRAWINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions 013100 and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work herein. 1.2 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall take the lead in coordinating the Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, Communications, Electronic Safety/Security and Fire Protection systems within the building. B. The General Contractor shall coordinate a three-dimensional (31)) model of the building which includes the Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, and Fire Protection systems. The Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, and Fire Protection Contractors shall prepare their work and generate 3D models which will be given to the General Contractor for coordination. The Contractor will be provided with the REVIT model that was used to generate the contract documents, this file may be used as the background file. The Contractor shall replace the systems drawn with the actual shop drawing models. The Contractor is not limited to using REVIT, but may use any 3-D software in generating and combining the coordination model. C. Submitting the contract drawings as coordination drawings will not be acceptable. D. The model shall include detailed and accurate representations of all equipment to be installed based upon the reviewed equipment submittals. E. The Mechanical Contractor shall hold a 3-D coordination meeting with all sub- contractors present to review the model and discuss coordination of the installation of the building systems. F. Upon completion of the coordination meeting, the Contractor shall submit the 3-D model and %" scale drawings for review. G. The model shall detail major elements, components, and systems in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following: 1. Indicate the proposed locations of pipe, duct, equipment, and other materials. Include the following: a. Wall and type locations. b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. Coordination Drawings 23 02 01-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Locations of light fixtures and sprinkler heads. d. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. e. Equipment connections and support details. f. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. g. Routing of storm and sanitary sewer piping. h. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. i. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. j. Valve stem movement. k. Structural floor, wall and roof opening sizes and details. 2 Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air distribution devices, light fixtures, communication systems components, and other ceiling-mounted items. H. Sequence of Coordination Below is hierarchy of model elements and the sequencing by which the models will be coordinated. I- Structural and Architectural model 2. Miscellaneous steel 3. Perform preliminary space allocation 4. Identify hard constraints (locations of access panels, lights,A/V space requirements, etc.) 5. Main and medium pressure ducts from the shaft out 6. Main graded plumbing lines and vents 7. Sprinkler mains and branches 8. Cold and hot water mains and branches 9. Lighting fixtures and plumbing fixtures 10. Smaller sized ducts and flex ducts Coordination Drawings 23 02 01-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 11. Smaller size cold water and hot water piping,flex ducts, etc. I. The Contractor and Sub-Contractors shall not install any item until the coordination has been completed and reviewed by the Construction Manager, Owner, and A/E team. J. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the installation of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage, ampacity, capacity, electrical and piping connections, space requirements, sequence of construction, building requirements and special conditions. K. By submitting shop drawings on the project, this Contractor is indicating that all necessary coordination has been completed and that the systems, products and equipment submitted can be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination with all other Contractors and Subcontractors END OF SECTION 23 02 01 Coordination Drawings 23 02 01-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 23 03 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS PART 1—GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications, apply to this section. B. Related SECTIONS: 1. SECTION 01 91 00-GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 2. SECTION 23 95 00- ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROLSYSTEMS. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The commissioning of the HVAC system and associated controls shall be performed by an impartial technical firm hired by the owner.The commissioning provider shall be certified under one or more of the following certifications: 1. CxA—Certified Commissioning Authority—ACG 2. CBCP—Certified Building Commissioning Professional—AEE 3. CCP—Certified Commissioning Professional—BCA 4. CPMP—Certified Process Management Professional —ASHRAE 5. BSC—Building System Commissioning Certification—NEBB B. The commissioning provider(Commissioning authority) shall be responsible for leading the entire construction team through the commissioning process including, but not limited to, conducting the commissioning kick-off meeting, preparing the commissioning plan, preparing pre-functional checklists, preparing functional test scripts, participation in functional testing and preparation of required documentation and reports. 1.3 RESPONIBILITIES A. Contractor: Responsibilities of the Contractor as related to the Commissioning Process include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Facilitate coordination of Commissioning work by Commissioning authority. 2. Attend Commissioning meetings or other meetings called by Commissioning authority to facilitate the Commissioning Process. 3. Review Functional Performance Test procedures for feasibility, safety, and impact on warranty, and provide Commissioning authority with written comment on same. 4. Provide all documentation relating to manufacturer's recommended performance testing of equipment and systems. Commissioning of HVAC Systems 230300-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 5. Provide Operations & Maintenance data to Commissioning authority for preparation of checklists and training manuals. 6. Provide Testing and Balancing Report before Functional Testing begins. 7. Provide As-built drawings and documentation to facilitate Testing. 8. Assure and facilitate participation and cooperation of Sub Contractors and equipment suppliers as required for the Commissioning Process. 9. Certify to Commissioning authority that installation work listed in Pre- Functional Checklists has been completed. 10. Install systems and equipment in strict conformance with project specifications, manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, and Pre-Functional Checklists. 11. Provide data concerning performance, installation, and start-up of systems. 12. Provide copy of manufacturers filled-out start-up forms for equipment and systems. 13. Ensure systems have been started and fully checked for proper operation prior to arranging for Testing with Commissioning authority. Prepare and submit to Commissioning authority written certification that each piece of equipment and/or system has been started according to manufacturer's recommended procedure, and that system has been tested for compliance with operational requirements. a. Contractor shall carry out manufacturer's recommended start-up and testing procedures, regardless of whether or not they are specifically listed in Pre-Functional Checklists. b. Contractor is not relieved of obligation for systems/equipment demonstration where performance testing is required by specifications, but a Functional Performance Test is not specifically designated by Commissioning authority. 14. Coordinate with Commissioning authority to determine mutually acceptable date of Functional Performance Tests. 15. Provide qualified personnel to assist and participate in Commissioning. 16. Provide test instruments and communications devices, as prescribed by Commissioning authority, required for carrying out Testing of systems. 17. Proprietary test equipment required by the manufacturer, whether specified or not, shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test equipment, demonstrate its use, and assist the Test Engineer in the commissioning process. Proprietary test equipment shall become the property of the Owner upon completion of commissioning. 18. Ensure deficiencies found in the Commissioning Issues Log are corrected within the time schedule shown in the Commissioning Plan. 19. Provide Commissioning authority with all submittals, start-up instructions manuals, operating parameters, and other pertinent information related to Commissioning Process. This information shall be routed through Architect. 20. Prepare and submit to Commissioning authority proposed Training Program outline for each system. 21. Coordinate and provide training of Owner's personnel. 22. Prepare Operation & Maintenance Manuals and As-Built drawings in Commissioning of HVAC Systems 230300-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• accordance with specifications; submit copy to Commissioning authority in addition to other contractually required submissions. Revise and resubmit manuals in accordance with Design Professionals and Commissioning authority comments. 23. Commissioning requires participation of this Division Subcontractors to ensure that systems are operating in manner consistent with Contract Documents. All costs associated with the participation of Contractor, Sub- Contractors, Design Professionals, and Equipment Vendors in the Commissioning Process shall be included as part of the Construction Contract. B. Subcontractors and vendors shall prepare and submit to Commissioning authority proposed Startup procedures to demonstrate proper installation of systems, according to these specifications and checklists prepared by Commissioning authority 1.4 COMMISSIONING PLAN A. Commissioning Process tasks and activities: 1. Commissioning kick-off meeting: Conducted by commissioning authority and attended by construction team and design team. 2. Pre-functional checklists: Prepared by the commissioning authority and filled out by subcontractors performing the work that is applicable. 3. Site visits to review installation of applicable systems and progress of checklist documentation performed and reported by commissioning authority. 4. Functional testing: Commissioning authority shall conduct functional testing with assistance of applicable subcontractors and document successful results as well as deficiencies (issues). Functional performance testing shall demonstrate the installation and operation of components, systems, and system-to-system interfacing in accordance with plans and specifications. Testing shall include all modes and sequence of operation, including under full-load, part-load and emergency conditions (including all alarms). Controls system shall be tested to document that control devices, components, equipment and systems are calibrated and adjusted and operate in accordance with the plans and specifications. Sequences shall be functionally tested to document they operate in accordance with plans and specifications. 5. Preliminary commissioning report: Commissioning authority shall issue a preliminary commissioning report to the owner that has results of the first round of functional testing including deficiencies discovered. 6. Air and hydronic system balancing: Air and water flow rates shall be measured and adjusted to deliver final flow rates within the tolerances provided in the contract documents. System balancing shall be performed by T.A.B. contractor as specified in the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing specification section 23 99 00. 7. Systems manual: Commissioning authority shall compile the systems manual using submittal data provided by the general contractor and applicable subcontractors. Commissioning of HVAC Systems 230300-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 8. Final commissioning report: Commissioning authority shall issue final commissioning report documenting the entire process and final results of functional testing. Report shall include final testing and balancing report. B. Equipment to be tested 1. Energy Management and Control System: 1. Graphical User Interface 2. Automation Software 3. Field Level Controllers 4. Field Level Devices 5. Control Sequences 2. Chilled Water Systems (All chillers and pumps) 3. Condenser Water Systems (All towers and pumps) 4. Heating Water Systems (All boilers and pumps) 5. Air Handling Systems (All AHU and 10%of terminal units) 6. Energy Recovery Systems (100%) 7. Water Treatment Systems (Verify vendors completion of scope) 8. Service water heating systems(100%) C. Testing functions and conditions 1. Energy conservation programs (economizer, optimal start, etc) 2. Verify shutdown of systems when scheduled. 3. Calibration of sensors 4. Testing shall affirm winter and summer design conditions. 5. Test under full outside air conditions. 6. Confirm functionality of all specified sequences of operations. 7. Verify the functionality of all alarms. D. Performance criteria 1. Air and water temperatures shall be within tolerances specified in the contract documents. 2. Space temperatures shall be maintained within 1 degree of specified set points. 3. Space humidity shall be maintained within 5%of specified levels. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 NO PRODUCTS SUPPLIED PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL Commissioning of HVAC Systems 230300-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• A. This Division has startup responsibilities and are required to complete sub-systems so COMPLETE SYSTEMS are fully functional. Insuring they meet design requirements of Contract Documents. Commissioning procedures and testing do not relieve or lessen this responsibility or shift this responsibility, in whole or in part, to Commissioning Agent or Owner. B. Coordinate with other Sub-Contractors and equipment vendors to set aside adequate time to address Pre-Functional Checklists, Functional Performance Tests, Operations & Maintenance Manual creation, Owner Training, and associated coordination meetings. C. Commissioning authority will also conduct site inspections at critical times and issue Cx Field Reports with observations on installation deficiencies so that they may be issued by Architect as deemed appropriate. 3.2 WORK PRIOR TO COMMSSIONING A. Complete all phases of the work so the systems can be started, adjusted, balanced, tested, and otherwise tested. B. See pertinent specification sections in this Division, which outline responsibilities for start- up of equipment with obligations to complete systems, including all sub- systems so that they are fully functional. C. Assist commissioning authority with all information pertaining to actual equipment and installation as required complete the full commissioning scope. D. Contractor shall prepare startup procedures to demonstrate compliance with pre- functional checklists, and coordinate scheduling for completion of these checklists. E. A minimum of 7 days prior to date of system startup, submit to Commissioning authority for review, detailed description of equipment start-up procedures which contractor proposes to perform to demonstrate conformance of systems to specifications and Checklists. 3.3 PARTICIPATION IN COMMISSIONING A. Attend meetings related to the Commissioning Process; arrange for attendance by personnel and vendors directly involved in the project, prior to testing of their systems. B. Provide skilled technicians to startup and test all systems, and place systems in complete and fully functioning service in accordance with Contract Documents. C. Provide skilled technicians, experienced and familiar with systems being commissioned,to assist Commissioning authority in commissioning process. Commissioning of HVAC Systems 230300-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.4 WORK TO RESOLVE DEFICIENCIES A. Complete corrective work in a timely manner to allow expeditious completion of Commissioning Process. If deadlines pass without resolution of identified problems, Owner reserves the right to obtain supplementary services and/or equipment to resolve the problem. Costs thus incurred will be Contractor's responsibility. 3.5 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS(PFC) A. Contractor shall complete Pre-Functional Checklists to validate compliance with Contract Documents installation and start-up requirements, for this Division's systems. B. Refer to commissioning plan for detailed list of equipment to be commissioned. 3.6 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING (FPT) A. Contractor, in cooperation with Commissioning Agent, shall conduct Functional Performance Testing to validate compliance with Contract Documents. B. Refer to commissioning plan for detailed list of equipment to be commissioned. C. Assist Commissioning authority in Functional Testing by removing equipment covers, opening access panels, etc. Furnish ladders, flashlights, meters, gauges, or other inspection equipment as necessary. 3.7 TRAINING A. The following requirements are in addition to Operations & Maintenance requirements specified elsewhere in this specifications manual. B. Contractor shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling, and ultimatelyto ensure that training is completed. C. The training agenda (plan) shall include, at a minimum,the following elements: 1. Purpose of equipment. 2. Principle of how the equipment works. 3. Important parts and assemblies. 4. How the equipment achieves its purpose and necessary operating conditions. 5. Most likely failure modes, causes and corrections. 6. On site demonstration. D. Commissioning authority shall be responsible for overseeing and approving content and adequacy of training of Owner personnel for all installed systems. Provide Commissioning authority with training plan two weeks before planned training. Commissioning of HVAC Systems 230300-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.8 OPERATIONS& MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The following requirements are in addition to Operations & Maintenance requirements specified elsewhere in this specifications manual. B. Sub-Contractor shall compile and prepare documentation for equipment and systems specified in this Division, and shall deliver documentation to Contractor for inclusion in Operation & Maintenance Manuals, in accordance with requirements of Division 01, prior to training Owner personnel. C. Provide Commissioning authority with a single, electronic copy of Operation & Maintenance Manuals for review. Commissioning authority copy of O&M manuals shall be submitted through Architect. D. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include, service agency contact information, maintenance requirements, controls system settings and a narrative of how each system is intended to operate, including set points. 3.9 DOCUMENTATION A. Commissioning authority shall provide documentation of process as follows: 1. Preliminary commissioning report including test procedures, results of testing, itemization of deficiencies, deferred tests and climatic conditions required for performance of deferred tests. Preliminary commissioning report shall be issued to owner to demonstrate the first pass of testing has occurred and to demonstrate compliance with applicable codes. 2. Final commissioning report shall include the final test and balance report, final results of functional testing, disposition of deficiencies discovered during testing, including the details of corrective measures used and functional testing procedures used for repeatability of testing in the future. END OF SECTION 23 03 00 Commissioning of HVAC Systems 230300-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 23 05 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work herein. B. The Contract Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departure from the Contract Drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and the reasons therefore, shall be submitted to the Architect for approval as soon as practicable. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the Architect. C. Notwithstanding any reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalog number, such reference shall not be construed as limiting competition; and the Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use any article,device, product, material,fixture,form or type of construction which in the judgment of the Architect,expressed in writing, is equal to that specified. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Work included under this Contract consists of the furnishing and installation of all equipment and material necessary and required to form the complete and functioning systems in all of its various phases, all as shown on the accompanying Drawings and/or described in these Specifications. The contractor shall review all pertinent drawings, including those of other contracts prior to commencement of Work. B. This Division requires the furnishing and installing of all items Specified herein, indicated on the Drawings or reasonably inferred as necessary for safe and proper operation; including every article, device or accessory(whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the equipment specified. Elements of the work include, but are not limited to, materials, labor, supervision, transportation, storage, equipment, utilities, all required permits, licenses and inspections. All work performed under this Section shall be in accordance with the Project Manual, Drawings and Specifications and is subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. C. The approximate locations of Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing items are indicated on the Drawings. These Drawings are not intended to give complete and accurate details in regard to location of outlets, apparatus, etc. Exact locations are to be determined by actual measurements at the building, and will in all cases be subject to the Review of the Owner or Engineer, who reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in the locations indicated without additional cost to the Owner. Basic Materials and Methods 230500-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Items specifically mentioned in the Specifications but not shown on the Drawings and/or items shown on Drawings but not specifically mentioned in the Specifications shall be installed by the Contractor under the appropriate section of work as if they were both specified and shown. E. All discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be reported to the Owner or Engineer so that they will be resolved prior to the bidding, where this cannot be done at least 7 working days prior to bid;the greater or more costly of the discrepancy shall be bid. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be included as part of this Contract. F. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to furnish the Owner with a turn-key and fully operating system in cooperation with other trades. G. It is the intent of the above "Scope"to give the Contractor a general outline of the extent of the Work involved; however, it is not intended to include each and every item required for the Work. Anything omitted from the "Scope" but shown on the Drawings, or specified later, or necessary for a complete and functioning heating, ventilating and air conditioning system shall be considered a part of the overall "Scope". H. The Contractor shall rough-in fixtures and equipment furnished by others from rough-in and placement drawings furnished by others. The Contractor shall make final connection to fixtures and equipment furnished by others. 1.03 SCHEMATIC NATURE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The contract documents are schematic in nature in that they are only to establish scope and a minimum level of quality. They are not to be used as actual working construction drawings. The actual working construction drawings shall be the approved shop drawings. B. All duct or pipe or equipment locations as indicated on the documents do not indicate every transition, offset, or exact location. All transitions, offsets clearances and exact locations shall be established by actual field measurements, coordination with the structural, architectural and reflected ceiling plans, and other trades. Submit shop drawings for approval. C. All transitions, offsets and relocations as required by actual field conditions shall be performed by the contractor at no additional cost to the owner. D. Additional coordination with electrical contractor may be required to allow adequate clearances of electrical equipment,fixtures and associated appurtenances. Contractor to notify Architect and Engineer of unresolved clearances, conflicts or equipment locations. 1.04 SITE VISIT AND FAMILIARIZATION Basic Materials and Methods 230500-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• A. Before submitting a bid, it will be necessary for each Contractor whose work is involved to visit the site and ascertain for himself the conditions to be met therein in installing his work and make due provision for same in his bid. It will be assumed that this Contractor in submitting his bid has visited the premises and that his bid covers all work necessary to properly install the equipment shown. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with this requirement shall not be considered justification for the omission or faulty installation of any work covered by these Specifications and Drawings. B. Understand the existing utilities from which services will be supplied; verify locations of utility services, and determine requirements for connections. C. Determine in advance that equipment and materials proposed for installation fit into the confines indicated. 1.05 WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Finish painting is specified. Prime and protective painting are included in the work of this Division. B. Owner and General Contractor furnished equipment shall be properly connected to Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing systems. C. Furnishing and installing all required Mechanical (HVAC)and Plumbing equipment control relays and electrical interlock devices, conduit,wire and J-boxes are included in the Work of this Division. 1.06 PERMITS,TESTS, INSPECTIONS A. Arrange and pay for all permits, fees, tests, and all inspections as required by governmental authorities. 1.07 DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. The date of final acceptance shall be the date of owner occupancy, or the date all punch list items have been completed or final payment has been received. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements. B. The date of final acceptance shall be documented in writing and signed by the architect, owner and contractor. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. B. Deliver products to the project at such time as the project is ready to receive the equipment, pipe or duct properly protected from incidental damage and weather damage. Basic Materials and Methods 230500-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Damaged equipment, duct or pipe shall be promptly removed from the site and new, undamaged equipment, pipe and duct shall be installed in its place promptly with no additional charge to the Owner. 1.09 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. The heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems, and the component parts there of, shall be guaranteed to operate without objectionable noise and vibration. B. Provide foundations, supports and isolators as specified or indicated, properly adjusted to prevent transmission of vibration to the Building structure, piping and other items. C. Carefully fabricate ductwork and fittings with smooth interior finish to prevent turbulence and generation or regeneration of noise. D. All equipment shall be selected to operate with minimum of noise and vibration. If, in the opinion of the Architect,objectionable noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts or other parts of the Work, the Contractor shall rectify such conditions without extra cost to the Owner. 1.10 APPLICABLE CODES A. Obtain all required permits and inspections for all work required by the Contract Documents and pay all required fees in connection thereof. B. Arrange with the serving utility companies for the connection of all required utilities and pay all charges, meter charges, connection fees and inspection fees, if required. C. Comply with all applicable codes, specifications, local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the following nationally accepted codes and standards: 1. Air Moving& Conditioning Association, AMCA. 2. American Standards Association,ASA. 3. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc., ASH RAE. 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers,ASME. 5. American Society of Plumbing Engineers,ASPE. 6. American Society of Testing Materials,ASTM. 7. American Water Works Association, AWWA. 8. National Bureau of Standards, NBS. 9. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA. 10. Sheet Metal &Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, SMACNA. 11. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., UL. 12. International Energy Conservation Code, IECC. Basic Materials and Methods 230500-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Where differences existing between the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes,state and local ordinances, industry standards,utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, the more stringent or costly application shall govern. Promptly notify the Engineer in writing of all differences. E. When directed in writing by the Engineer, remove all work installed that does not comply with the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes, state and local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, correct the deficiencies, and complete the work at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.11 DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of construction and Specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other Contract Documents, including Drawings which must be recognized as diagrammatic and schematic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in Contract Documents are defined generally in this article, unless defined otherwise in Division 1. B. Definitions and explanations of this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for work to the extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of the Contract Documents. C. Indicated:The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes or schedules on the Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and to similar means of recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where such terms as "Shown", "Noted", "Scheduled", "Specified" and "Detailed" are used in lieu of "Indicated", it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate cross-reference material, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically shown. D. Directed: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "Directed", "Requested", "Accepted", and "Permitted" mean by the Architect or Engineer. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's or Engineer's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. E. Reviewed: Where used in conjunction with the Engineer's response to submittals, requests for information,applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor the meaning of the term "Reviewed" will be held to limitations of Architect's and Engineer's responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and Supplemental Conditions. In no case will "Reviewed" by Engineer be interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill the terms and requirements of the Contract Documents. F. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail,the term "Furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance. Basic Materials and Methods 230500-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• G. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail,the term "Install" is used to describe operations at the project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly,erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. H. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail,the term "Provide"is used to mean "Furnish and Install",complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance. I. Installer: Entity (person or firm) engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or Sub-contractor for performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in the operations they are engaged to perform. J. Imperative Language: Used generally in Specifications. Except as otherwise indicated, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. For clarity of reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or when so noted by other identified installers or entities. K. Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance, the quality level or quantity shown or specified is intended as minimum quality level or quantity of work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly with that minimum (within specified tolerances), or may exceed that minimum within reasonable tolerance limits. In complying with requirements, indicated or scheduled numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Owner or Engineer via a request for information (RFI)for decision before proceeding. L. Abbreviations and Symbols: The language of Specifications and other Contract Documents including Drawings is of an abbreviated type in certain instances, and implies words and meanings which will be appropriately interpreted. Actual word abbreviations of a self explanatory nature have been included in text of Specifications and Drawings. Specific abbreviations and symbols have been established, principally for lengthy technical terminology and primarily in conjunction with coordination of Specification requirements with notations on Drawings and in Schedules. These are frequently defined in Section at first instance of use or on a Legend and Symbol Drawing. Trade and industry association names and titles of generally recognized industry standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where applicable and where full context of Contract Documents so indicate. Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols and abbreviations used on Drawings and in Specifications are those recognized in construction industry for indicated purposes. Where not otherwise noted symbols and abbreviations are defined by 1993 ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, chapter 34 "Abbreviations and Symbols", ASME and ASPE published standards. 1.12 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS Basic Materials and Methods 230500-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• A. These Specifications are intended to supplement the Drawings and it will not be the province of the Specifications to mention any part of the work which the Drawings are competent to fully explain in every particular and such omission is not to relieve the Contractor from carrying out portions indicated on the Drawings only. B. Should items be required by these Specifications and not indicated on the Drawings,they are to be supplied even if of such nature that they could have been indicated thereon. In case of disagreement between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Drawings or Specifications, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be estimated and the matter referred to the Architect or Engineer for review with a request for information and clarification at least 7 working days prior to bid opening date for issuance of an addendum. C. The listing of product manufacturers, materials and methods in the various sections of the Specifications, and indicated on the Drawings, is intended to establish a standard of quality only. It is not the intention of the Owner or Engineer to discriminate against any product, material or method that is equal to the standards as indicated and/or specified, nor is it intended to preclude open, competitive bidding. The fact that a specific manufacturer is listed as an acceptable manufacturer should not be interpreted to mean that the manufacturers' standard product will meet the requirements of the project design, Drawings, Specifications and space constraints. D. The Architect or Engineer and Owner shall be the sole judge of quality and equivalence of equipment, materials and methods. E. Products by other reliable manufacturers, other materials, and other methods, will be accepted as outlined, provided they have equal capacity, construction, and performance. However, under no circumstances shall any substitution by made without the written permission of the Architect or Engineer and Owner. Request for prior approval must be made in writing 10 days prior to the bid date without fail. F. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is not a statement that another product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product, material or method is the only one that shall be used without prior approval. G. Wherever a definite material or manufacturer's product is specified and the Specification states that products of similar design and equal construction from the specified list of manufacturers may be substituted, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that products of manufacturers that are specified are the only products that will be acceptable and that products of other manufacturers will not be considered for substitution without approval. H. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is a statement that"OR EQUAL" product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product, material or method or an "OR EQUAL" Basic Materials and Methods 230500-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• product, material or method may be used if it complies with the specifications and is submitted for review to the Engineer as outline herein. I. Where permission to use substituted or alternative equipment on the project is granted by the Owner or Engineer in writing, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor or Subcontractor involved to verify that the equipment will fit in the space available which includes allowances for all required Code and maintenance clearances,and to coordinate all equipment structural support, plumbing and electrical requirements and provisions with the Mechanical (HVAC) and Plumbing Design Documents and all other trades, including Division 16. J. Changes in architectural, structural, electrical, mechanical, and plumbing requirements for the substitution shall be the responsibility of the bidder wishing to make the substitution. This shall include the cost of redesign by the affected designer(s). Any additional cost incurred by affected subcontractors shall be the responsibility of this bidder and not the owner. K. If any request for a substitution of product, material or method is rejected,the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. L. The Owner or Engineer will investigate all requests for substitutions when submitted in accordance with above and if accepted, will issue a letter allowing the substitutions. M. Where equipment other than that used in the design as specified or shown on the Drawings is substituted (either from an approved manufacturers list or by submittal review), it shall be the responsibility of the substituting Contractor to coordinate space requirements, building provisions and connection requirements with his trades and all other trades and pay all additional costs to other trades, the Owner, the Architect or Engineer, if any, due to the substitutions. N. The electrical design and electrical drawings are based on the equipment and/or electric motors of the type, size and electrical characteristics shown and specified on the mechanical drawings. Any change in equipment and/or motor size or type brought on directly or indirectly by a substitution or mechanical equipment having characteristics requiring a change,shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor and the entire cost of such change, including conduit, wiring, motor starting equipment, etc., shall be paid for by the Mechanical Contractor at no additional charge, unless the substitution was initiated by the Owner. Submittals must clearly show and deviations. Mechanical Contractor is responsible for coordinating any required changes with the Electrical Contractor, prior to Electrical Contractors ordering of panels and associated equipment. 1.13 SUBMITTALS A. Coordinate with Division 1 for submittal timetable requirements, unless noted otherwise within thirty (30) days after the Contract is awarded the Contractor shall submit a minimum of eight (8) complete bound sets of shop drawings and complete data covering each item of equipment or material. The first submittal of each item requiring a submittal Basic Materials and Methods 230500-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• must be received by the Architect or Engineer within the above thirty day period. The Architect or Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays or costs incurred due to excessive shop drawing review time for submittals received after the thirty(30) day time limit. The Architect and Engineer will retain one (1) copy each of all shop drawings for their files. Where full size drawings are involved, submit one (1) print and one (1) reproducible sepia or mylar in lieu of eight (8) sets. All literature pertaining to an item subject to Shop Drawing submittal shall be submitted at one time. A submittal shall not contain information from more than one Specification section, but may have a section subdivided into items or equipment as listed in each section. The Contractor may elect to submit each item or type of equipment separately. Each submittal shall include the following items enclosed in a suitable binder: 1. A cover sheet with the names and addresses of the Project, Architect, MEP Engineer, General Contractor and the Subcontractor making the submittal. The cover sheet shall also contain the section number covering the item or items submitted and the item nomenclature or description. 2. An index page with a listing of all data included in the Submittal. 3. A list of variations page with a listing all variations, including unfurnished or additional required accessories, items or other features, between the submitted equipment and the specified equipment. If there are no variations,then this page shall state "NO VARIATIONS". Where variations affect the work of other Contractors, then the Contractor shall certify on this page that these variations have been fully coordinated with the affected Contractors and that all expenses associated with the variations will be paid by the submitting Contractor. This page will be signed by the submitting Contractor. 4. Equipment information including manufacturer's name and designation, size, performance and capacity data as applicable. All applicable Listings, Labels, Approvals and Standards shall be clearly indicated. 5. Dimensional data and scaled drawings as applicable to show that the submitted equipment will fit the space available with all required Code and maintenance clearances clearly indicated and labeled at a minimum scale of 1/4" = 1'-0", as required to demonstrate that the alternate or substituted product will fit in the space available. 6. Identification of each item of material or equipment matching that indicated on the Drawings. 7. Sufficient pictorial, descriptive and diagrammatic data on each item to show its conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Any options or special requirements or accessories shall be so indicated. All applicable information shall be clearly indicated with arrows or another approved method. 8. Additional information as required in other Sections of this Division. 9. Certification by the General Contractor and Subcontractor that the material submitted is in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, signed and dated in long hand. Submittals that do not comply with the above requirements shall be returned to the Contractor and shall be marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT". B. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on shop drawings and submittals. Basic Materials and Methods 230500-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Equipment and materials submittals and shop drawings will be reviewed for compliance with design concept only. It will be assumed that the submitting Contractor has verified that all items submitted can be installed in the space allotted. Review of shop drawings and submittals shall not be considered as a verification or guarantee of measurements or building conditions. D. Where shop drawings and submittals are marked "REVIEWED", the review of the submittal does not indicate that submittals have been checked in detail nor does it in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to furnish material and perform work as required by the Contract Documents. E. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and returned to the Contractor with one of the following categories indicated: 1. REVIEWED: Contractor need take no further submittal action, shall include this submittal in the O&M manual and may order the equipment submitted on. 2. REVIEWED AS NOTED: Contractor shall submit a letter verifying that required exceptions to the submittal have been received and complied with including additional accessories or coordination action as noted, and shall include this submittal and compliance letter in the 0&M manual. The contractor may order the equipment submitted on at the time of the returned submittal providing the Contractor complies with the exceptions noted. 3. NOT APPROVED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is not approved, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment that is not approved. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked revise and resubmit, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or provide as noted on previous shop drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment marked revise and resubmit. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 5. CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION REQUIRED: Contractor shall resubmit submittal on material, equipment or method of installation. The Contractor's stamp is required stating the submittal meets all conditions of the contract documents. The stamp shall be signed by the General Contractor. The submittal will not be reviewed if the stamp is not placed and signed on all shop drawings. 6. MANUFACTURER NOT AS SPECIFIED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked manufacturer not as specified, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the specifications. Contractor shall not order equipment where submittal is marked manufacturer not as specified. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. F. Materials and equipment which are purchased or installed without shop drawing review shall be at the risk of the Contractor and the cost for removal and replacement of such Basic Materials and Methods 230500-10 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• materials and equipment and related work which is judged unsatisfactory by the Owner or Engineer for any reason shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The responsible Contractor shall remove the material and equipment noted above and replace with specified equipment or material at his own expense when directed in writing by the Architect or Engineer. G. Shop Drawing Submittals shall be complete and checked prior to submission to the Engineer for review. H. Submittals are required for, but not limited to,the following items: 1. Pipe Material and Specialties. 2. Pipe Fabrication Drawings. 3. Basic Materials. 4. Variable Air Volume Boxes. 5. Air Handling Units. 6. Cooling Towers. 7. Chillers. 8. Air Cooled Condensing Units. 9. Water Treatment. 10. Expansion Compensation. 11. Variable Frequency Drives. 12. Noise and Vibration Controls. 13. Plumbing Fixtures and Specialties. 14. Plumbing Equipment. 15. Sanitary DWV Fittings, Pipe and Accessories. 16. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Pipe, Fittings and Accessories. 17. HVAC Pipe and Duct Insulation. 18. Hydronic and Plumbing Valves. 19. Hydronic Piping and Accessories. 20. Hydronic Pumps. 21. Roof-Top A/C Units. 22. Heating Water Boiler. 23. Portable Pipe Hanger and Equipment Supports. 24. Duct Specialties. 25. Duct Fabrication Drawings. 26. Air Distribution Devices. 27. Fan Coil Units. 28. Filters. 29. Fans. 30. Fire Dampers and Fire Smoke Dampers. 31. Temperature Controls and Control Sequences. 32. Test,Adjust and Balance Reports. 33. Testing,Adjusting and Balancing Contractor Qualifications. 34. Coordination Drawings. Basic Materials and Methods 230500-11 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• I. Refer to other Division 23 sections for additional shop drawing requirements. Provide samples of actual materials and/or equipment to be used on the Project upon request of the Owner or Engineer. J. Contractor to submit Mechanical/Electrical equipment coordination sheet with equipment submittal for all AHU's,ACCU's,and Fans. Reference chart at end of section. Provide copy to electrical subcontractor. 1.14 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to)the following: 1. Indicate the proposed locations of pipe, duct, equipment, and other materials. Include the following: a. Wall and type locations. b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. C. Locations of light fixtures and sprinkler heads. d. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. e. Equipment connections and support details. f. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. g. Routing of storm and sanitary sewer piping. h. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. i. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. j. Valve stem movement. k. Structural floor, wall and roof opening sizes and details. 2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air distribution devices, light fixtures, communication systems components, and other ceiling-mounted items. B. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the installation of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage, ampacity, capacity, electrical and piping connections, space requirements, sequence of construction, building requirements and special conditions. C. By submitting shop drawings on the project,this Contractor is indicating that all necessary coordination has been completed and that the systems, products and equipment Basic Materials and Methods 230500-12 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• submitted can be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination with all other Contractors and Subcontractors. 1.15 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Special Project Requirements, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 23, indicate the following installed conditions: 1. Duct mains and branches, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of dampers,fire dampers,duct access panels,and other control devices; filters, fuel fired heaters, fan coils, condensing units, and roof-top A/C units requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 2. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping. 3. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines. 4. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. 5. Contract Modifications, actual equipment and materials installed. B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state in which the project is located as specified herein to record the locations and invert elevations of underground installations. C. The Contractor shall maintain a set of clearly marked black line record "AS-BUILT" prints on the job site on which he shall mark all work details, alterations to meet site conditions and changes made by"Change Order" notices. These shall be kept available for inspection by the Owner,Architect or Engineer at all times. D. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements concerning record drawings. If the Contractor does not keep an accurate set of as-built drawings, the pay request may be altered or delayed at the request of the Architect. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Delivery of as-built prints and reproducibles is a condition of final acceptance. E. The record prints shall be updated on a daily basis and shall indicate accurate dimensions for all buried or concealed work, precise locations of all concealed pipe or duct, locations of all concealed valves, controls and devices and any deviations from the work shown on the Construction Documents which are required for coordination. All dimensions shall include at least two dimensions to permanent structure points. F. Submit three prints of the tracings for approval. Make corrections to tracings as directed and delivered "Auto Positive Tracings" to the architect. "As-Built" drawings shall be furnished in addition to shop drawings. Basic Materials and Methods 230500-13 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• G. When the option described in paragraph F., above is not exercised then upon completion of the work,the Contractor shall transfer all marks from the submit a set of clear concise set of reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings and shall submit the reproducible drawings with corrections made by a competent draftsman and three(3)sets of black line prints to the Architect or Engineer for review prior to scheduling the final inspection at the completion of the work. The reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings shall have the Engineers Name and Seal removed or blanked out and shall be clearly marked and signed on each sheet as follows: CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS DATE: (NAME OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) (NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) 1.16 OPERATING MANUALS A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 and in addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves,engineering data and tests,and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. 2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 1.17 CERTIFICATIONS AND TEST REPORTS A. Submit a detailed schedule for completion and testing of each system indicating scheduled dates for completion of system installation and outlining tests to be performed and schedule date for each test. This detailed completion and test schedule shall be submittal at least 90 days before the projected Project completion date. Basic Materials and Methods 230500-14 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Test result reporting forms shall be submitted for review no later than the date of the detailed schedule submitted. C. Submit 4 copies of all certifications and test reports to the Architect or Engineer for review adequately in advance of completion of the Work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. D. Certifications and test reports to be submitted shall include, but not be limited to those items outlined in Section of Division 23. 1.18 MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Coordinate with Division 1 for maintenance manual requirements, unless noted otherwise bind together in "D ring type" binders by National model no. 79-883 or equal, binders shall be large enough to allow%" of spare capacity. Three(3) sets of all approved shop drawing submittals, fabrication drawings, bulletins, maintenance instructions, operating instructions and parts exploded views and lists for each and every piece of equipment furnished under this Specification. All sections shall be typed and indexed into sections and labeled for easy reference and shall utilize the individual specification section numbers shown in the Mechanical Specifications as an organization guideline. Bulletins containing information about equipment that is not installed on the project shall be properly marked up or stripped and reassembled. All pertinent information required by the Owner for proper operation and maintenance of equipment supplied by Division 23 shall be clearly and legibly set forth in memoranda that shall, likewise, be bound with bulletins. B. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Special Project Conditions, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 23, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Identifying names, name tags designations and locations for all equipment. 2. Valve tag lists with valve number,type, color coding, location and function. 3. Reviewed shop drawing submittals with exceptions noted compliance letter. 4. Fabrication drawings. 5. Equipment and device bulletins and data sheets clearly highlighted to show equipment installed on the project and including performance curves and data as applicable, i.e., description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model numbers of replacement parts. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 7. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions, servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 8. Equipment and motor name plate data. Basic Materials and Methods 230500-15 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 9. Wiring diagrams. 10. Exploded parts views and parts lists for all equipment and devices. 11. Color coding charts for all painted equipment and conduit. 12. Location and listing of all spare parts and special keys and tools furnished to the Owner. 13. Furnish recommended lubrication schedule for all required lubrication points with listing of type and approximate amount of lubricant required. C. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on Operating and Maintenance Manuals. D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be turned over to the Owner or Engineer a minimum of 14 working days prior to the beginning of the operator training period. 1.19 OPERATOR TRAINING A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of factory trained specialists to instruct the Owner's operating personnel. The Owner's operator training shall include 12 hours of on site training in three 4 hour shifts. B. Before proceeding with the instruction of Owner Personnel, prepare a typed outline in triplicate, listing the subjects that will be covered in this instruction, and submit the outline for review by the Owner. At the conclusion of the instruction period obtain the signature of each person being instructed on each copy of the reviewed outline to signify that he has a proper understanding of the operation and maintenance of the systems and resubmit the signed outlines. C. Refer to other Division 23 Sections for additional Operator Training requirements. 1.20 FINAL COMPLETION A. At the completion of the work, all equipment and systems shall be tested and faulty equipment and material shall be repaired or replaced. Refer to Sections of Division 23 for additional requirements. B. Clean and adjust all air distribution devices and replace all air filters immediately prior to final acceptance. C. Touch up and/or refinish all scratched equipment and devices immediately prior to final acceptance. 1.21 CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. Use of the HVAC and Plumbing systems to provide temporary service during construction period will not be allowed without permission from the Owner in writing and if granted shall not be cause warranty period to start, except as defined below. B. Contractor shall guarantee to keep the entire installation in repair and perfect working order for a period of one year after its completion and final acceptance, and shall furnish Basic Materials and Methods 230500-16 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• free of additional cost to the Owner all materials and labor necessary to comply with the above guarantee throughout the year beginning from the date of issue of Substantial Completion, Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner or the Certificate of Final Payment as agreed upon by all parties. C. This guarantee shall not include cleaning or changing filters except as required by testing, adjusting and balancing. D. All air conditioning compressors shall have parts and labor guarantees for a period of not less than 5 years beyond the date of final acceptance. E. Refer to Sections in Division 23 for additional guarantee or warranty requirements. 1.22 TRANSFER OF ELECTRONIC FILES A. Project documents are not intended or represented to be suitable for reuse by Architect/Owner or others on extensions of this project or on any other project. Any such reuse or modification without written verification or adaptation by Engineer, as appropriate for the specific purpose intended, will be at Architect/Owner's risk and without liability or legal exposure to Engineer or its consultants from all claims, damages, losses and expense, including attorney's fees arising out of or resulting thereof. B. Because data stored in electric media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently, or otherwise without authorization of the data's creator, the party receiving the electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within sixty (60) days of receipt, after which time the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred to be acceptable. Any errors detected within the sixty (60) day acceptance period will be corrected by the party delivering the electronic files. Engineer is not responsible for maintaining documents stored in electronic media format after acceptance by the Architect/Owner. C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, Engineer makes no representations as to the long term compatibility, usability or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by Engineer at the beginning of the Project. D. Any reuse or modifications will be Contractor's sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to Architect, Engineer or any consultant. E. The Texas Board of Architectural Examiners (TBAE) has stated that it is in violation of Texas law for persons other than the Architect of record to revise the Architectural drawings without the Architect's written consent. It is agreed that "MEP" hard copy or computer-generated documents will not be issued to any other party except directly to the Architect/Owner. The contract documents are contractually copyrighted and cannot be used for any other project or purpose except as specifically indicated in AIA B-141 Standard Form of Agreement between Architect and Owner. Basic Materials and Methods 230500-17 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• If the client, Architect/Owner, or developer of the project requires electronic media for "record purposes", then an AutoCAD based compact disc ("CD") will be prepared. The "CD" will be submitted with all title block references intact and will be formatted in a "plot" format to permit the end user to only view and plot the drawings. Revisions will not be permitted in this configuration. F. At the Architect/Owner's request, Engineer will prepare one "Cl)" of electronic media to assist the contractor in the preparation of submittals. The Engineer will prepare and submit the "CD" to the Architect/Owner for distribution to the contractor. All copies of the "CD" will be reproduced for a cost of reproduction fee of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per"CD". The"CD"will be prepared and all title blocks, names and dates will be removed. The"CD" will be prepared in a 'Awg"format to permit the end user to revise the drawings. G. This Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per "CD" cost of reproduction will be paid directly from the Contractor to the Engineer. The "CD" will be prepared only after receipt of the Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00). The Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per "CD" cost of reproduction is to only recover the cost of the manhours necessary to reproduce the documents. It is not a contractual agreement between the Contractor and Engineer to provide any engineering services, nor any other service. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials and equipment manufactured by a domestic United States manufacturer. B. Access Doors: Provide access doors as required for access to equipment,valves,controls, cleanouts and other apparatus where concealed. Access doors shall have concealed hinges and screw driver cam locks. C. All access panels located in wet areas such as restrooms, locker rooms, shower rooms, kitchen and any other wet areas shall be constructed of stainless steel. D. Access Doors: shall be as follows: 1. Plastic Surfaces: Milcor Style K. 2. Ceramic Tile Surface: Milcor Style M. 3. Drywall Surfaces: Milcor Style DW. 4. Install panels only in locations approved by the Architect. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 ROUGH-IN Basic Materials and Methods 230500-18 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected via reviewed submittals. B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for additional rough-in requirements. 3.02 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Coordinate mechanical systems,equipment,and materials installation with other building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction,to allow for mechanical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. 6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 7. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with architectural action markings on submittal, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, resolve conflicts and route proposed solution to the Architect for review. 9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces. 10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location and label. 11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified. 12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. 13. Provide roof curbs for all roof mounted equipment. Coordinate with roof construction for pitched roof. Provide roof curb to match roof slope. Refer to architectural drawings and details. Basic Materials and Methods 230500-19 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 14. The equipment to be furnished under this Specification shall be essentially the standard product of the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, these units shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the system need not be the product of the same manufacturer. 15. The architectural and structural features of the building and the space limitations shall be considered in selection of all equipment. No equipment shall be furnished which will not suit the arrangement and space limitations indicated. 16. Lubrication: Prior to start-up, check and properly lubricate all bearings as recommended by the manufacturer. 17. Where the word "Concealed" is used in these Specifications in connection with insulating, painting, piping, ducts, etc., it shall be understood to mean hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or suspended ceilings. "Exposed" shall be understood to mean the opposite of concealed. 18. Identification of Mechanical Equipment: a. Mechanical equipment shall be identified by means of nameplates permanently attached to the equipment. Nameplates shall be engraved laminated plastic or etched metal. Shop drawings shall include dimensions and lettering format for approval. Attachments shall be with escutcheon pins, self-tapping screws, or machine screws. b. Tags shall be attached to all valves, including control valves, with nonferrous chain. Tags shall be brass and at least 1-1/2 inches in diameter. Nameplate and tag symbols shall correspond to the identification symbols on the temperature control submittal and the "as- built" drawings. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations. B. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: 1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 2. Remove and replace defective Work. 3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 6. Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for Engineer/Owner's observation of concealed Work,without additional cost to the Owner. 7. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and experienced Installers; refer to the materials and methods Basic Materials and Methods 230500-20 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• required for the surface and building components being patched; Refer to Section "DEFINITIONS" for definition of"Installer." C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, mechanical ducts and HVAC units, plumbing fixtures and trim,and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work. D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. E. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 3.04 WORK SEQUENCE,TIMING,COORDINATION WITH OWNER A. The Owner will cooperate with the Contractor, however, the following provisions must be observed: 1. A meeting will be held at the project site, prior to any construction, between the Owner's Representative, the General Contractor, the Sub-Contractors and the Engineer to discuss Contractor's employee parking space, access, storage of equipment or materials,and use of the Owner's facilities or utilities. The Owner's decisions regarding such matters shall be final. 2. During the construction of this project, normal facility activities will continue in existing buildings until renovated areas are completed. Plumbing,fire protection, lighting, electrical, communications, heating, air conditioning, and ventilation systems will have to be maintained in service within the occupied spaces of the existing building. END OF SECTION 23 05 00 Basic Materials and Methods 230500-21 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 1• Mech/Elec. Equipment Coordination Sheet Mark# Unit Manufacturer's Recomm. Fuse Mark# Unit Manufacturer's Recomm. Fuse Type Size(MOCP) Type Size (MOCP) Basic Materials and Methods 230500-22 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 23 05 10 STARTING OF SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Starting systems. B. Demonstration and instructions. C. Testing,adjusting,and balancing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 014000-Quality Control: Manufacturers field reports. B. Section 017000- Contract Closeout: System operation and maintenance data and extra materials. C. Section 239900-Testing,Adjusting and Balancing. 1.03 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect, Engineer and Owner seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication,drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence,or for other conditions that may cause damage. D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Adjust electrical amp draw on motors to within 80%of rated amp draw. F. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. G. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. H. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect,check,and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. I. Adjust return air to 500 fpm at each air unit inlet. Replace drive packages as necessary to achieve design airflows. Starting of Systems 230510-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• J. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 014000 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.04 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection. B. Demonstrate Project equipment and provide instruction by a qualified manufacturers' representative who is knowledgeable about the Project. C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation,perform demonstration for other season within six months. D. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. E. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at equipment location. F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 1.05 TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING A. Mechanical Division will secure the services of an independent firm to perform testing,adjusting,and balancing. B. The independent firm will perform services specified in Section 239900. C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Architect/Engineer indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3-EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 23 05 10 Starting of Systems 230510-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 23 14 00 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe, and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors. B. Sleeves and seals. C. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 23 24 00—Sound and Vibration Control. B. Section 23 26 00- Piping Insulation. C. Section 23 28 00- Equipment Insulation. D. Section 22 4100- Plumbing System. E. Section 23 55 10- Hydronic Piping Above Grade. F. Section 23 55 11—Hydronic Piping Below Grade. G. Section 23 53 00—Refrigerant Piping 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME B31.1- Power Piping. B. NFPA 13 -Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. C. NFPA 14-Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supports for Sprinkler Piping: In conformance with NFPA 13. B. Supports for Standpipes: In conformance with NFPA 14. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods. Support and Anchors 231400-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and over:Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger. D. All hangers, supports and rods in areas exposed to the outdoors, such as but not limited to crawl spaces, service bays, wash bays, open shops and warehouses shall be hot dipped galvanized. E. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; cast iron roll and stand for pipe sizes 6 inches and over. F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. G. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and over: adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. H. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. I. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. J. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. K. Roof Pipe Supports and Hangers: Galvanized Steel Channel System as manufactured by Portable Pipe Hangers, Inc. or approved equal. For pipes 2-1/2" and smaller— Type PP10 with roller For pipes 3" through 8"—Type PS For multiple pipes—Type PSE -Custom L. Copper Pipe Support and Hangers: Electro-galvanized with thermoplastic elastomer cushions; Unistrut "Cush-A-Clamp" or equal. Hangers: Plastic coated; Unistrut or equal. M. For installation of protective shields refer to specification section 231400-3.03. N. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead. O. Pipe Rough-In Supports in Walls/Chases: Provide preformed plastic pipe supports, Sioux Chief"Pipe Titan" or equal. Support and Anchors 231400-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.02 HANGER RODS A. Galvanized Hanger Rods:Threaded both ends,threaded one end, or continuous threaded. 2.03 INSERTS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.04 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 20 gage galvanized steel. B. Lead Flashing: 4 Ib./sq. ft. sheet lead for waterproofing; 1 Ib./sq.ft. sheet lead for soundproofing. C. Caps: Steel, 20 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. D. Coordinate with roofing contractor/architect for type of flashing on metal roofs. 2.05 EQUIPMENT CURBS A. Fabricate curbs of hot dipped galvanized steel unless noted otherwise. 2.06 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel, tack welded to form a uniform sleeve. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Form with steel pipe, schedule 40. C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fireproofing: Prefabricated fire rated steel sleeves including seals, UL listed. D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. F. Fire Stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible, U.L. listed. G. Caulk: Paintable 25-year acrylic sealant. H. Pipe Alignment Guides: Factory fabricated, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted,two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section Support and Anchors 231400-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 1• guiding spider that bolts tightly to pipe. Length of guides shall be as recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe. C. Design roof supports without roof penetrations,flashing or damage to the roofing material. 2.08 FINISH A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSERTS A. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. Coordinate with structural engineer for placement of inserts. B. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. C. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface. D. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. Verify with structural engineer prior to start of work. 3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as follows: PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACINGHANGER DIAMETER (Steel Pipe) 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 6'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2 to 3 inch 10'-0" 3/8" Support and Anchors 231400-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 4 to 6 inch 10'-0" 1/2" 8 to 10 inch 10'-0" 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 10'-0" 3/4" (Copper Pipe) 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 5'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inch 8'-0" 3/8" 3 to 4 inch 10'-0" 3/8" 6 to 8 inch 10'-0" 1/2" (Cast Iron) 2 to 3 inch T-0" 3/8" 4 to 6 inch 10'-0" 1/2" 8 to 10 inch 10'-0" 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 10'-0" 3/4" (PVC Pipe) 1-1/2 to 4 inch 4'-0" 3/8" 6 to 8 inch 4'-0" 1/2" 10 and over 4'-0" 5/8" B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow and at the vertical horizontal transition. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. Support and Anchors 231400-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. I. Install hangers with nut at base and above hanger;tighten upper nut to hanger after final installation adjustments. J. Portable pipe hanger systems shall be installed per manufactures instructions. 3.03 Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements. A. Clamps: Attach galvanized clamps, including spacers (if any),to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9. B. Saddles: Install galvanized protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation. C. Shields: Install protective shields MSS Type 40 on cold and chilled water piping that has vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees and shall have dimensions in inches not less than the following: NPS LENGTH THICKNESS 1/4 THROUGH 3-1/2 12 0.048 4 12 0.060 5 & 6 18 0.060 8 THROUGH 14 24 0.075 16 THROUGH 24 24 0.105 D. Piping 2" and larger provide galvanized sheet metal shields with calcium silicate at hangers/supports. E. Insert material shall be at least as long as the protective shield. F. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install where indicated, with insulation of same thickness as piping. 3.04 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide equipment bases of concrete. B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. 3.05 FLASHING Support and Anchors 231400-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter flashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls,floors, and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 8 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked one inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls,turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counter flash and seal. C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal floor shower mop sink and all other drains watertight to adjacent materials. E. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 8 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Contact architect for all flashing details and roof construction. Seal penetrations watertight. 3.06 SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Extend sleeves through floors minimum one inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves full depth with fire rated thermfiber and 3M caulking and provide floor plate. C. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with U.L. listed fire stopping insulation and caulk seal air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. D. Fire protection sleeves may be flush with floor of stairways. END OF SECTION 23 14 00 Support and Anchors 231400-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 23 17 00 MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 230500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. B. WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 1. Painting 2. Automatic temperature controls. 3. Power control wiring to motors and equipment. 1.03 WARRANTY Warrant the Work specified herein for one year and motors for five years beginning on data of substantial completion against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials and workmanship. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance,fabrication procedures variations, and accessories. C. MOTOR NAMEPLATE INFORMATION: Manufacturer's name, address, utility and operating data. D. Refer to Division 1 for additional information. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. DELIVERY: Deliver clearly labeled, undamaged materials in the manufacturers' unopened containers. Motors and Motor Controllers 231700-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. TIME AND COORDINATION: Deliver materials to allow for minimum storage time at the project site. Coordinate delivery with the scheduled time of installation. C. STORAGE: Store materials in a clean, dry location, protected from weather and abuse. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRIC MOTORS A. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: Provide motors by a single manufacturer as much as possible. 1. Baldur 2. Marathon 3. Siemens-Allis 4. General Electric 5. U.S. Motor B. TEMPERATURE RATING: Provide insulation as follows: 1. CLASS B: 40 degrees C maximum. 2. CLASS F: a. Between 40 degrees C and 65 degrees C maximum. b. Totally enclosed motors. C. STARTING CAPABILITY: As required for service indicated five starts minimum per hour. D. PHASES AND CURRENT: Verify electrical service compatibility with motors to be used. 1. UP TO 1/2 HP: Provide permanent split, capacitor-start single phase with inherent overload protection. 2. 3/4 HP AND LARGER: Provide squirrel-cage induction polyphone. 3. Provide two separate windings on 2-speed polyphone motors. 4. Name plate voltage shall be the same as the circuit's normal voltage, serving the motor. E. SERVICE FACTOR: 1.15 for multiphase; 1.35 for single phase. F. FRAMES: U-frames 1.5 hp. and larger. G. BEARINGS: Provide sealed re-graspable ball bearings; with top mounted ale mite lubrication fittings and bottom side drains minimum average life 100,000 hours typically, and others as follows: 1. Design for thrust where applicable. 2. PERMANENTLY SEALED: Where not accessible for greasing. 3. SLEEVE-TYPE WITH OIL CUPS: Light duty fractional hp. motors or polyphone requiring minimum noise level. Motors and Motor Controllers 231700-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• H. ENCLOSURE TYPE: Provide enclosures as follows: 1. CONCEALED INDOOR: Open drip proof. 2. EXPOSED INDOOR: Guarded. 3. OUTDOOR TYPICAL: Type II. TEC. 4. OUTDOOR WEATHER PROTECTED: Type I. TEA. I. OVERLOAD PROTECTION: Built-in sensing device for stopping motor in all phase legs and signaling where indicated for fractional horse power motors. J. NOISE RATING: "Quiet" except where otherwise indicated. K. EFFICIENCY: Minimum full load efficiency listed in the following table,when tested in accordance with IEEE Test Procedure 112A, Method B, including stray load loss measure. NEMA Efficiency Motor Horsepower INDEX Letter Minimum Efficiency 1800 RPM Synchronous Speed 7.5-10 F 89.5 15-20 E 91.0 25-30 E 92.4 40 D 93.0 50 C 93.0 60 C 93.6 75 C 94.1 100-125 B 94.5 150-200 B 95.0 1200 RPM Synchronous Speed 3-5 G 87.5 7.5 G 89.5 10 F 89.5 15 F 90.2 20 E 90.2 25-30 E 91.7 40-50 D 93.0 60 D 93.6 75 C 93.6 100-125 C 94.1 150-200 B 95.0 2.02 MOTOR CONTROLLERS(STARTERS) A. All motor controllers(for equipment furnished under Division 23)shall be furnished under Division 23 and installed under Division 26 unless otherwise noted on the plans. B. Motor starters shall be furnished as follows. Motors and Motor Controllers 231700-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1. GENERAL: Motor starters shall be Square D Company Class 8536 across-the-line magnetic type, full-voltage, non-reversing (FAVOR) starter. All starters shall be constructed and tested in accordance with the latest NEMA standards, sizes and horsepower. ICE sizes are not acceptable. Starters shall be mounted in a general purpose dead front, painted steel enclosure and surface-mounted. Provide size and number of poles as shown and required by equipment served. Provide two speed, two winding or two speed, single winding motor starter as required for two speed motors. 2. CONTACTS: Magnetic starter contacts shall be double break solid silver alloy. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or removing starter from panel. The starter shall have straight-through wiring. 3. OPERATING COILS: Operating coils shall be 120 volts and shall be of molded construction. When the coil fails, the starter shall open and shall not lock in the closed position. 4. OVERLOAD RELAYS: Provide manual reset, trip-free Class 20 overload relays in each phase conductor in of all starters. Overload relays shall be melting alloy type with visual trip indication. All 3 phase and single phase starters shall have one overload relay in each underground conductor. Relay shall not be field adjustable from manual to automatic reset. Provide 6 overload relays for two speed motor starters. 5. PILOT LIGHTS: Provide a red running pilot light for all motor starters. Pilot lights shall be mounted in the starter enclosure cover. Pilot lights shall be operated from an interlock on the motor starter and shall not be wired across the operating coil. 6. CONTROLS: Provide starters with HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC switches. Coordinate additional motor starter controls with the requirements of Division 23. Motor starter controls shall be mounted in the starter enclosure cover. 7. CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER: Provide a single-phase 480 volt control power transformer with each starter for 120 volt control power. Connect the primary side to the line side of the motor starter. The primary side shall be protected by a fuse for each conductor. The secondary side shall have one leg fused and one leg grounded. Arrange transformer terminals so that wiring to terminals will not be located above the transformer. 8. AUXILIARY CONTACTS: Each starter shall have one normally open and one normally closed convertible auxiliary contact in addition to the number of contacts required for the "holding interlock", remote monitoring, and control wiring. In addition, it shall be possible to field-install three more additional auxiliary contacts without removing existing wiring or removing the starter from its enclosure. 9. UNIT WIRING: Unit shall be completely pre-wired to terminals to eliminate any interior field wiring except for line and load power wiring and HVAC control wiring. 10. ENCLOSURES: All motor starter enclosures shall be NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures or NEMA-3R if mounted exposed to high moisture conditions. Provide NEMA 4X when located by cooling towers. 11. POWER MONITOR: Provide a square "D" 8430 MPS phase failure and under- voltage relay, base and wiring required for starters serving motors 5 horsepower Motors and Motor Controllers 231700-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• and larger. Set the under-voltage setting according to minimum voltage required for the motor to operate within its range. C. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: Controller numbers are based on first named manufacturer. Provide one of the following manufacturer's. 1. Siemens. 2. Square D. 3. General Electric. 4. Cerus. 2.03 COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS A. GENERAL: Combination motor starters shall consist of a magnetic starter and a fusible or non-fusible disconnect switch in a dead front, painted steel NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise noted and shall be surface-mounted. Size and number of poles shall as shown and required by equipment served. Combination motor starters shall be as specified for motor starters in Paragraph 2.01/13, except as modified herein. B. DISCONNECT SWITCH: Disconnect switches shall be as specified in Section 264900. C. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: Controller numbers are based on first named manufacturer. Provide one of the following manufacturer's. 1. Siemens. 2. Square D. 3. General Electric. 4. Cerus. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations and printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Contractors' price shall include all items required as per manufacturers' requirements. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL: Install in a professional manner. Any part or parts not meeting this requirement shall be replaced or rebuilt without extra expense to Owner. B. Install rotating equipment in static and dynamic balance. C. Provide foundations, supports, and isolators properly adjusted to allow minimum vibration transmission within the building. Motors and Motor Controllers 231700-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Correct objectionable noise or vibration transmission in order to operate equipment satisfactorily as determined by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 23 17 00 Motors and Motor Controllers 231700-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 23 17 20 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) B. Furnish and install a complete adjustable frequency motor speed control for the following item: 1. Variable volume air handling units 2. Hydronic pumps 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 23 05 00—Basic Materials and Methods B. Section 23 17 00—Motors and Motor Controllers C. Section 23 24 00—Sound and Vibration Control D. Section 23 55 40—HVAC Pumps E. Section 23 58 55—Air Handling Unit F. Section 23 95 00—Controls G. Section 23 99 00—Testing, Adjusting and Balancing H. Section 26 07 50—Electrical Identification 1.03 REFERENCES A. NEMA250 B. EN 50178 (LVD) C. EN 61800-3, EN 61000-4-2(-3,-4,-5-6)/A2, EN 61000-2-1, EN 60146-1-1/A1 D. IEEE 519 E. UL 508C (Power Conversion) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawing shall include: Wiring diagrams, electrical schematics,front and side views of enclosures, overall dimensions, conduit entrance locations and requirements, nameplate legends, physical layout and enclosure details. Variable Frequency Drives 231720-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Product Data: Provide data sheets showing; voltage, ratings of customer use of switching and over-current protective devices, short circuit rating, and weights. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions and Technical Manuals: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Adjustable Frequency Drive. Document the sequence of operation, cautions and warnings,trouble shooting procedures, spare parts lists and guidance. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components. 2. Provide manufacture's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and Motor Circuit Protection trip settings of combination controllers. 3. Provide manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. 4. Provide manufacture's written instructions for testing,adjusting,and reprogramming reduced-voltage solid-state controllers. 1.06 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type. 3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s)for each size and type of magnetic controller installed. 5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor installed. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer must have minimum of 20 years of documented experience, specializing in variable frequency drives. B. UL and ULc approval on all VFDs specified 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING Variable Frequency Drives 231720-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• A. Accept VFD on site in original packing. Inspect for damage. B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping, or provide additional heavy canvas, or heavy plastic cover, to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. C. Handle carefully, in accordance of manufacturer's written instruction,to avoid damage to components, enclosure, and finish. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide VFD warranty, for 5 years from date of start up—Drives for variable torque applications. Warranty shall include parts, and labor at factory for repair. Servicing technician on VFD does not need factory certification to preserve warranty. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Franklin Controls/Cerus Industrial or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. Square D: a brand of Schneider Electric 3. ABB 4. Emerson. 5. Or approved equivalent by the engineer. Products manufactured by Danfoss, including those private labeled under other trade names, are not acceptable. 2.02 RATINGS: A. Input 380/415/440/460 VAC+/- 10%, 3 phase,48-63 Hz or input 200/208/220/230 VAC +/- 10%, 3 phase,48-63 Hz. B. Output Frequency 0 to 120 Hz C. Environmental operating conditions: 0 to 40°C, 0 to 3300 feet above sea level, less than 95% humidity, non-condensing. D. Enclosure shall be UL listed. See section 2.40.13 for ratings based on the location. E. Short Circuit Interrupting Rating shall be no less than 100,000A. F. Starting Torque: 175%starting torque shall be available from .5 Hz to 60 Hz. G. Must meet RFI requirements as specified by IEC STD EN 61000-2(-4)(2001)for variable frequency drives. Variable Frequency Drives 23 1720-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.03 DESIGN A. All VFD must be solid state, utilizing Space Vector PWM control for lower motor operating temperature and lower THD on the output. The VFD package as specified herein shall be enclosed in a UL Type 1 enclosure, completely assembled and tested by the manufacturer. B. All VFD shall include a digital display, and keypad, regardless of horsepower rating.The keypad is to be used for local control, for setting all parameters, and for stepping through the displays and menus. The keypad shall be removable, capable of remote mounting, and shall have its own non-volatile memory. The keypad shall allow for uploading and downloading of parameter settings as an aid for start-up of multiple VFD. C. All VFD must have adjustable carrier frequency and up to 4 programmable V/Hz points. D. All VFD must have BAS (Building Automation System) protocols such as Johnson Metasys N2, Modbus, and RS485 as standard and LonWorks, Profibus or BACnet as an option. E. All VFD shall be selectable as in both Volts/Hertz or Sensorless Vector Control mode regardless of horsepower rating. F. All VFD must have a motor preheat function to prevent moisture accumulation in an idle motor. G. All VFD shall include two independent analog inputs as standard, 0—10VDC and 4-20mA. Both analog inputs shall be utilized as speed references, or as PID inputs.The analog inputs shall be programmed as an individual reference at a time, or as a combined reference together. A second PID loop control shall be provided for control of external equipment. H. All VFD shall include a minimum of 8 multi-function input terminals, capable of being programmed to a function on a change of state.These terminals shall provide up to 30 functions, including, but not limited to: 1. External Trip 2. Forward 3. Reverse 4. Three Wire Control 5. Multi-step Speed Selection 6. Interlock 7. Jog 8. Pre-excite/Motor Preheat I. The VFD shall provide frequency setting resolution of 0.01 Hz when its Digital Reference is utilized below 100 Hz and 0.1 Hz over 100 Hz.The VFD shall provide frequency setting resolution of 0.03 Hz/60 Hz when Analog Reference is utilized. Variable Frequency Drives 231720-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• J. The VFD shall have the ability to automatically restart after an over-current, over- voltage, under-voltage, or loss of input signal protective trip. The number of restart attempts,trial time, and time between reset attempts shall be programmable. K. The VFD shall be capable of both Automatic and Manual Torque Boost function to overcome sudden fluctuation of the load. L. The VFD shall be equipped with Auto-tuning feature for motor data analysis resulting in optimized motor performance. M. The VFD shall be capable of starting into a rotating load (forward or reverse) and accelerate or decelerate to set-point without safety tripping or component damage (flying start). The VFD shall also be capable of DC injection braking at start to stop a reverse spinning motor prior to ramp. N. The VFD shall be equipped with an automatic extended power loss ride-through circuit, which will utilize the inertia of the load to keep the drive powered. Minimum power loss ride-through shall be one-cycle, based on full load and no inertia. Typical control power loss ride-through for a fan load shall be 2 seconds minimum. O. All VFD shall have 1 analog output(0-10VDC)which can be programmed to function as one of the following: Output Frequency, Output Current, Output Voltage, DC Link Voltage. Default is set to Output Frequency. P. If the input reference (4-20mA or 0-10V) is lost,the VFD shall give the user the option of either(1) stopping and displaying a fault, (2) running at a programmable preset speed, or(3) hold the VFD speed based on the last good reference received. The drive shall be programmable to signal this condition via a keypad warning, relay output and/or over the serial communication bus. Q. The customer terminal strip shall be isolated from the line and ground. R. The drive shall employ current limit circuits to provide "trip-less" operation S. The Maximum current limit shall be fixed at 150% (minimum, instantaneous) of the VFD normal duty current rating. T. The overload rating of the drive shall be 120%of Rated Current for 1 Min., 150%of Rated Current for 0.5 sec. U. The VFD shall have 8 Step Speeds that are preprogrammed via Digital Input Terminals. V. The VFD shall have standard Emergency Input and Jog Input Terminals. W. The VFD shall provide from 0 to 6000 seconds of Acceleration and Deceleration time setting parameters. Up to 8 Acceleration and 8 Deceleration times shall be programmable. Variable Frequency Drives 231720-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• X. The VFD shall be optimized for various levels of carrier frequency programmable from 1 to 15 kHz (1—3 kHz above 40HP)to reduce motor noise and to provide high system efficiency. Y. The VFD must have an option to operate multiple motors with single VFD and be able to turn on/off each motors independently as well as simultaneously. Z. The VFD must have an Energy Saving function in auto and manual mode. AA. The VFD must have Bi-directional "Speed search" capability. BB. The VFD shall include provisions for multi-motor control as an option or as standard, enabling control of up to 4 motors. CC. All VFD include the following programming adjustment capabilities: 1. Directional Lock selection to prevent the unexpected motor direction. 2. DC Injection start and stop frequency selection from Minimum output frequency to 60 Hz. 3. Three programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from operating the load continuously at an unstable speed. 4. Pre-magnetization selection for the motor to build up an adequate level of flux for enhanced starting torque or programmable Volts/Hertz points selection for flexible Variable and Constant load demand curve and fluctuation. 5. VFD Voltage-output to motor adjustment feature enabling the VFD to generate from 40% up to 110%of nominal input voltage to the VFD. 6. Five (5) Fault Histories with detailed description of frequency, current, and other operational status at the time of each fault. 7. Two independently adjustable acceleration and deceleration ramps. These ramp times shall be adjustable from 1 to 6000 seconds. 8. The VFD shall Ramp or Coast to a stop, DC Injection, as selected by the user. 9. The VFD shall have selectable 'No-Motor' parameter to facilitate startup and troubleshooting. 10. Manual speed control adjustable by the VFD Keypad shall be available. DD. The VFD shall have the following protection circuits. In the case of a protective trip,the drive shall stop and announce the fault condition. • IGBT overcurrent protection • Overcurrent trip on load output • DC overvoltage • Internal overtemperature • Ground Fault • Low Voltage • Open output phase • Electronic Thermal Protection. The Electronic Thermal Overload protection shall protect the motor based on speed, load curve, and motor parameters. Variable Frequency Drives 231720-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• EE. PC software and for parameter upload/download/graphing shall be provided at no additional charge. 2.04 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Three switch Manual Bypass shall only be provided for cooling tower VFDs. VFD and bypass components shall be mounted inside a common NEMA 1 enclosure, fully pre-wired, and ready for installation as a single UL listed device. Bypass shall include the following: 1. Output,and bypass contactors,to switch power from the VFD to bypass. 2. UL 508E Manual Motor Starter with pad-lockable handle to isolate the drive and protect the motor while operating in the bypass mode. 3. Control and safety circuit terminal strip. 4. Drive/Off/Bypass selector switch and Hand/Off/Auto selector switch. 5. Switch selectable smoke purge,auto transfer to bypass and remote transfer functions. 6. Pilot lights(22 mm LEDs)for, "Drive Run"and "Bypass". 7. Hand/Off/Auto selector switch shall provide the following operation: • Hand Position -The drive is given a start command, and the drive will run at preset speed- user adjustable. • Off Position -The start command is removed, all speed inputs are ignored, and power is still applied to the drive. If in bypass mode,the motor is stopped. • Auto Position -The drive is enabled to receive a start command and speed input from a building automation system. If in bypass mode,the motor start/stop is controlled by the building automation system 8. Annunciation contacts for drive run, drive fault, bypass run and motor OL/safety fault. 9. VFD operator/keypad selection, LCD multi-line display. B. Enclosure: 1. NEMA 1 extended enclosure,to house additional equipment within the VFD enclosure for VFDs not requiring Bypass. 2. NEMA 12 FVFF (Forced Ventilation inlet Filter and outlet Filter) enclosures with filters and blower. (For dusty or industrial environments.) 3. NEMA 311 enclosures for outdoor installations. a. For installation in ambient temperature environment above 104°F, de-rate VFD 20%to increase ambient temperature rating to 122°F. b. For installation in sustained ambient temperature environment below 14°F, include panel space heater. C. Integral Disconnect: Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) The MCP shall be a UL listed 508 current limiting manual motor starter with magnetic trip elements only.The breaker shall carry a UL 508F rating (up to 100A frame size) with a minimum interrupting rating of 30,000 AIC. D. Minimum 3% Line reactors shall be provided on the input side of the drive for harmonic suppression and input rectifier protection. DC Link Reactors or Bus Chokes are not acceptable substitute. Variable Frequency Drives 231720-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• E. Surge suppression shall be provided to protect the drive from input power disturbances. F. Output Filtering: 1. For long VFD to motor lead lengths provide self contained, installation appropriate enclosed output reactor or filter: a. Provide output line reactor when lead is greater than 50 ft. at 460V input line power application. b. Provide output line reactor when lead is greater than 200 ft. at 208/230V input line power application. c. Provide output dual element filter when lead is greater than 100 ft. at 460V input line power application. d. Provide output dual element filter when lead is greater than 400 ft. at 208/230V input line power application. G. Engraved cabinet nameplates shall be provided. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be the responsibility of the mechanical contractor. The contractor shall install the drive in accordance with the recommendations of the VFD manufacturer as outlined in the installation manual. B. Power wiring shall be completed by the electrical contractor. The contractor shall complete all wiring in accordance with the recommendations of the VFD manufacturer as outlined in the installation manual. 3.02 START-UP A. Remote VFD Start-up assistance and training shall be available by factory and/or VFD provider at no additional charge. Start-up technician is not required to be factory certified to preserve factory warranty. A factory supplied start-up form shall be filled out for each drive with a copy provided to the owner, and a copy sent to be kept on file at the manufacturer. 3.03 PRODUCT SUPPORT A. Factory trained application engineering and service personnel that are thoroughly trained with the supplied VFD and optional packages shall be available via factory remote technical assistance at both the specifying and installation locations. Additional local support to be available through VFD supplier or referred technician for hire or pre- negotiated service terms. Servicing technician does not need to be factory certified to preserve warranty. Variable Frequency Drives 231720-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• END OF SECTION 23 17 20 Variable Frequency Drives 231720-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 23 19 00 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND PIPE MARKING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 220500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. 1.03 Refer to Architectural Sections for additional requirements. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE AND PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Valves: 1. All valves shall be identified with a 1-1/2" diameter brass disc wired onto the handle. The disc shall be stamped with 1/2" high depressed black filled identifying numbers. These numbers shall be numerically sequenced for all valves on the job. 2. The number and description indicating make, size, model number and service of each valve shall be listed in proper operational sequence, properly typewritten. Three copies to be turned over to Owner at completion. 3. Tags shall be fastened with approved meter seal and 4 ply 0.018 smooth copper wire. Tags and fastenings shall be manufactured by the Seton Name Plate Company or approved equal. 4. All valves shall be numbered serially with all valves of any one system and/or trade grouped together. B. Pipe Marking: 1. All interior visible piping located in accessible spaces such as above accessible ceilings, equipment rooms, attic space, under floor spaces, etc., shall be System Identification and Pipe Marking 231900-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• identified with all temperature pipe markers as manufactured by W.H. Brady Company, 431 West Rock Ave., New Haven, Connecticut, or approved equal. 2. All exterior visible piping shall be identified with UV and acid resistant outdoor grade acrylic plastic markers as manufactured by Set Mark distributed by Seton Nameplate Company. Factory location 20 Thompson Road, Branford, Connecticut, or approved equal. 3. Generally, markers shall be located on each side of each partition, on each side of each tee, on each side of each valve and/or valve group, on each side of each piece of equipment, and,for straight runs, at equally spaced intervals not to exceed 75 feet. In congested area, marks shall be placed on each pipe at the points where it enters and leaves the area and at the point of connection of each piece of equipment and automatic control valve. All markers shall have directional arrows. 4. Markers shall be installed after final painting of all piping and equipment and in such a manner that they are visible from the normal maintenance position. Manufacturer's installation instructions shall be closely followed. 5. Markers shall be colored as indicated below per ANSI/OSHA Standards: SYSTEM COLOR LEGEND Chilled Water Green Chilled Water Supply Chilled Water Return Sanitary Sewer Green Vent Sanitary Sewer Storm Drain Green Storm Drain Domestic Water Green Domestic Water Domestic Hot Water Yellow Domestic Hot Supply Water Supply Domestic Hot Water Yellow Domestic Hot Re-circulating Water Return Fire Protection Red Fire Protection Automatic Red Fire Sprinkler Sprinkler Compressed Air Blue Compressed Air System Identification and Pipe Marking 231900-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Pipe Painting: 1. All piping exposed to view shall be painted as indicated or as directed by the Architect in the field. Confirm all color selections with Architect prior to installation. 2. The entire fire protection piping system shall be painted red. 3. All piping located in mechanical rooms and exterior piping shall be painted as indicated below: System Color Storm Sewer White Sanitary Sewer Waste and Vent Light Gray Domestic Cold Water Dark Blue Domestic Hot Water Supply and Return Orange Compressed Air Green Chilled Water Supply and Return Light Blue PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All labeling equipment shall be installed as per manufacturers printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Contractor's price shall include all items required as per manufacturers' requirements. 3.03 All piping shall be cleaned of rust, dirt, oil and all other contaminants prior to painting. Install primer and a quality latex paint over all surfaces of pipe. END OF SECTION 23 19 00 System Identification and Pipe Marking 231900-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 23 24 00 SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Vibration and sound control products. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division One specification sections, apply to work of this section B. This section is Division 23 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 23 section making reference to vibration control products specified herein. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of vibration control products, of type, size, and capacity required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Vibration and sound control products shall conform to ASHRAE criteria for average noise criteria curves for all equipment at full load conditions. C. Except as otherwise indicated, sound and vibration control products shall be provided by a single manufacturer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance,fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. B. Mason Industries, Inc. C. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 2.02 GENERAL Sound and Vibration Control 232400-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• A. Provide vibration isolation supports for equipment, piping and ductwork, to prevent transmission of vibration and noise to the building structures that may cause discomfort to the occupants. B. Model numbers of Amber/Booth products are included for identification. Products of the additional manufacturers will be acceptable provided they comply with all of the requirements of this specification. 2.03 FLOOR MOUNTED AIR HANDLING UNITS A. Provide Amber/Booth CAL-2, style C aluminum housed isolators sized for 2" static deflection. Cast iron or steel housings may be used provided they are hot-dip galvanized after fabrication B. If floor mounted air handling units are furnished with internal vibration isolation option, provide 2"thick Amber/Booth type NRC ribbed neoprene pads to address high frequency breakout and afford additional unit elevation for condensate drains. Ribbed neoprene pads shall be located in accordance with the air handling unit manufacturer's recommendations. 2.04 SUSPENDED AIR HANDLING UNITS A. Provide Amber/Booth type BSWR-2 combination spring and rubber-in-shear isolation hanger sized for 2" static deflection. B. If suspended air handling units are furnished with internal vibration isolation option, furnish Amber/Booth type BRD rubber-in-shear or NR AMPAD 3/8" thick neoprene pad isolation hangers sized for approximately%" deflection to address high frequency break- out. 2.05 SUSPENDED FANS AND FAN COIL UNITS A. Provide Amber/Booth type HS spring hangers sized for 1" static deflection. 2.06 BASE MOUNTED PUMPS AND CHILLERS A. Amber/Booth type SP-NR style E flexplate pad isolators consisting of two layers of 3/8" thick alternate ribbed neoprene pad bonded to a 16 gage galvanized steel separator plate. B. Pads shall be sized for approximately 40 PSI loading and 1/8" deflection. C. Provide Amber/Booth CPF, 8" concrete inertia base. The base shall be welded steel construction with concrete in-fill supplied by the contractor on site and shall incorporate standard rebar reinforcement, spaced a maximum of 12" on center. Provide Amber/Booth AWH,floor mounted spring isolators sized for 1" static deflection. D. Provide inertia bases for all base mounted pump applications in which the pumps are to be installed on any floor level other than the ground floor or grade level. Inertia bases shall also be provided for base mounted pump applications in which the associated Sound and Vibration Control 232400-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• mechanical room where they are housed is in a noise sensitive location,regardless of floor level. 2.07 PIPING A. Provide spring and rubber-in-shear hangers, Amber/Booth type HRS in mechanical equipment rooms, for a minimum distance of 50 feet from isolated equipment for all chilled water and hot water piping 1-1/2" diameter and larger. Springs shall be sized for 1" deflection. B. Floor supported piping is required to be isolated with Amber/Booth type AW-1 open springs sized for 1" deflection. C. Furnish line size flexible connectors at supply and return of pumps, Amber/Booth style 2800 single sphere EPDM construction, connector shall include 150 Ib. cadmium plated carbon steel floating flanges. 2.08 CORROSION PROTECTION A. All vibration isolators shall be designed and treated for resistance to corrosion. B. Steel components: PVC coated or phosphated and painted with industrial grade enamel. Nuts, bolts, and washers: zinc-electroplated. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements. 3.03 If internal isolation option is used on air handling units, the mechanical contractor shall verify proper adjustment and operation of isolators prior to start-up. All shipping brackets and temporary restraint devices shall be removed. 3.04 The vibration isolation supplier shall certify in writing that he has inspected the installation and that all external isolation materials and devices are installed correctly and functioning properly. END OF SECTION 23 24 00 Sound and Vibration Control 232400-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 23 26 00 PIPING INSULATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 230500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. B. Work specified elsewhere. 1. Painting. 2. Pipe hangers and supports. C. All pipes subject to freezing conditions shall be insulated. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials or workmanship. B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to,the following: 1. Mildewing. 2. Peeling, cracking, and blistering. 3. Condensation on exterior surfaces. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance,fabrication procedures, project variations, and accessories. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. DELIVERY: Deliver undamaged materials in the manufacturer's unopened containers. Piping Insulation 232600-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• Containers shall be clearly labeled with the insulation's flame and smoke ratings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 It is the intent of these specifications to secure superior quality workmanship resulting in an absolutely satisfactory installation of insulation from the standpoint of both function and appearance. Particular attention shall be given to valves, fittings, pumps, etc., requiring low temperature insulation to insure full thickness of insulation and proper application of the vapor seal. All flaps of vapor barrier jackets and/or canvas covering must be neatly and securely smoothed and sealed down. 2.02 The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for each service, and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All insulation types, together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and approved prior to installation. 2.03 A sample quantity of each type of insulation and each type application shall be installed and approval secured prior to proceeding with the main body of the work. Condensation caused by improper installation of insulation shall be corrected by Installing Contractor. Any damage caused by condensation shall be made good at no cost to the Owner or Architect/Engineer. 2.04 All insulation shall have composite (insulation,jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing orjacket to insulation)fire and smoke hazard as tested by Procedure ASTM E084, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not exceeding: Flame Spread 25 Smoke Developed 50 2.05 Accessories, such as adhesives, mastics and cements shall have the same component ratings as listed above. 2.06 All products or their shipping cartons shall have a label affixed, indicating flame and smoke ratings do not exceed the above requirements. 2.07 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Calcium silicate materials shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville. B. Glass fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville or Owens-Corning and shall have the same thermal properties, density, fire rating, vapor barrier, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. C. Adhesives shall be as manufactured by Childers, Foster, HB Fuller or Armstrong, and shall have the same adhesive properties, fire rating, vapor seal, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. D. Armaflex elastomeric cellular thermal insulation by Armstrong. Piping Insulation 232600-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• E. Phenolic foam insulation shall be as manufactured by Kooltherm Insulation (Koolphen). F. Polyisocyanurate insulation shall be as manufactured by Dow"Trymer 2000 XP". G. Metal jacketing and fitting covers shall be as manufactured by Childers or RPR Products. 2.08 MATERIALS A. For insulation purpose piping is defined as the complete piping system including supplies and returns, pipes, valves, automatic control valve bodies, fittings, flanges, strainers, thermometer well, unions, reducing stations, and orifice assemblies. B. INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPE: provide fiberglass pipe insulation with all service jackets with self sealing lap joint. C. EXTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPE: Provide elastomeric cellular thermal, or preformed phenolic foam pipe insulation with secured metal jacketing. D. DRAIN BODIES AND DOWN SPOUTS: Insulate horizontal roof drain down spouts, underside of roof drain bodies, chilled water waste lines from drinking fountain to junction with main waste stacks, and branch lines including traps and exposed underside of floor drains receiving cooling coil condensate, same as water piping where exposed to building occupant view. When concealed, insulation may be same as specified for external duct wrap. E. CONDENSATE DRAINAGE PIPING: Fire resistant fiberglass insulation; insulation not required when piping is exposed on roof. F. REFRIGERANT PIPING: Refrigerant pipe insulation shall be model "AP-2000",fire rated for use in environmental air plenums. Apply manufacturers recommended finish and sealant for exterior applications. G. METAL JACKETING: Utilize Childers "Strap-On" jacketing. Provide preformed fitting covers for all elbows and tees. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations and printed installation instructions, including high density inserts at all hangers and pipe supports to prevent compression of insulation. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements. 3.03 Pipes located outdoors or in crawl spaces shall be insulated same as concealed piping; and in addition shall have a jacket of 0.016 inch thick, smooth aluminum with longitudinal modified Pittsburg Z-Lock seam and 2 inch overlap. Jacketing shall be easily removed and replaced without damage. All butt joints shall be sealed with gray silicone. Galvanized banding is not acceptable. Piping Insulation 232600-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.04 All insulated piping located over driveways shall have an aluminum shield permanently banded over insulation to protect it from damage from car antennas. 3.05 WATER PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. The insulation shall be applied to clean, dry pipes with all joints firmly butted together. Where piping is interrupted by fittings, flanges, valves or hangers and at intervals not to exceed 25 feet on straight runs, an isolating seal shall be formed between the vapor barrier jacket and the bare pipe. The seal shall be by the applications of adhesive to the exposed insulation joint faces, carried continuously down to and along 4 inches of pipe and up to and along 2 inches of jacket. B. Pipe fittings and valves shall be insulated with pre-molded or shop fabricated glass fiber covers finished with two brush coats of vapor barrier mastic reinforced with glass fabric. C. All under lap surfaces shall be clean and free of dust, etc. before the SSL is sealed. These laps shall be firmly rubbed to insure a positive seal. A brush coat of vapor retarder shall be applied to all edges of the vapor barrier jacket. 3.06 FIRE RATED INSULATION A. All pipe penetrations through walls and concrete floors shall be fire rated by applying USG Thermafiber in the space between the concrete and the pipe. B. The fire rating shall be additionally sealed by using 3M brand model CP 25 or 303 fire barrier caulk and putty. C. All fire rating material shall be insulated in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. PART 4-SCHEDULES 4.01 LOW TEMPERATURE SURFACES MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS BASED ON FIBERGLASS A. Condensate drain lines: % inch B. Drains receiving condensate: 1 inch C. Chilled Water Piping: (1) Located outdoors: 2 inch (2) Located indoors: (a) 4 inch and smaller: 1% inch (b) Larger than 4 inch: 2 inch D. Refrigerant Piping Piping Insulation 232600-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• (1) 1%"and smaller 1 inch (2) Larger than 1% inch 1 inch 4.02 HIGH TEMPERATURE SURFACES MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS A. Hot Water Piping: (1) Operating temperature 105°F or less: 1 inch (2) Operating temperature higher than 105°F 1 inch and pipe size 1'/2 inch or smaller (3) Operating temperature higher than 105°F 2 inch and pipe size larger than 1'/z inch END OF SECTION 23 26 00 Piping Insulation 232600-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 1• 23 28 00 EQUIPMENT INSULATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 230500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. B. Work specified elsewhere. 1. Basic materials and methods. 2. Piping systems. 3. Air distribution equipment. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials or workmanship. B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to,the following: 1. Mildewing. 2. Peeling, cracking, and blistering. 3. Condensation on exterior surfaces. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance,fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. DELIVERY: Deliver undamaged materials in the manufacturer's unopened containers clearly labeled with flame and smoke ratings. PART 2—PRODUCTS Equipment Insulation 232800-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 1• 2.01 It is the intent of these specifications to secure superior quality workmanship resulting in an absolutely satisfactory installation of insulation from the standpoint of both function and appearance. Particular attention shall be given to valves,fittings, pumps, etc., requiring low temperature insulation to insure full thickness of insulation and proper application of the vapor seal. All flaps of vapor barrier jackets and/or canvas covering must be neatly and securely smoothed and sealed down. 2.02 The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for each service,and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.All insulation types,together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and approved before any insulation is installed. 2.03 A sample quantity of each type of insulation and each type of application shall be installed and approval secured prior to proceeding with the main body of the work. Condensation caused by improper installation of insulation shall be corrected by Installing Contractor. Any damage caused by condensation shall be made good at no cost to the Owner or Architect/Engineer. 2.04 Glass fiber materials as manufactured by Owens/Corning, PPG,CSG, or Johns Manville will be acceptable, if they comply with the specifications. 2.05 All insulation shall have composite(insulation,jacket or facing,and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to insulation)fire and smoke hazard as tested by Procedure ASTM E084, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not exceeding: Flame Spread 25 Smoke Developed 50 2.06 Accessories,such as adhesives, mastics and cements shall have the same component ratings as listed above. 2.07 All products or their shipping cartons shall have a label affixed, indicating flame and smoke ratings do not exceed the above requirements. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements. 3.03 CHILLED WATER PUMPS A. Shall be insulated with Certain-Teed IB-600 rigid insulation board, 2" thick, cut and formed into a box and secured in place with 3/4" wide x.020 galvanized bands Equipment Insulation 232800-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 1• spaced on 9" centers. Bands shall be pulled snug over sheets of insulation board. All joints shall be well and neatly fitted and so arranged that the assembly may be dismantled with ease permitting access to the pump. All voids on the interior of box shall be filled with glass fiber blanket insulation. Exterior shall be finished with a trowel coat of Foster's 30-35 vapor barrier mastic, a layer of 1" mesh galvanized wire, and a coat of J.M. #352 cement. Final finish shall be an eight ounce canvas jacket, pasted and sealed in place with Foster's 30-36 Seafas. B. Pipe insulation shall be extended over all cold parts of chilled water pumps not directly over drainage basin of pump base. END OF SECTION 23 28 00 Equipment Insulation 232800-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 1• 23 29 00 DUCT INSULATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Ductwork system insulation. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 230500- Basic Materials and Methods B. Section 231700- Motors and Motor Controllers 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project. B. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method. 1. Exception: Outdoor mechanical insulation may have flame spread index of 75 and smoke developed index of 150. C. Duct and plenum insulation shall comply with minimum R-value requirements of 2015 International Energy Conservation Code. D. Adhesive and other material shall comply with NFPA and NBFU Standards No. 90A and 90B. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories. Provide 8x11 sample of product along with submittal. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in unopened containers with manufacturer's stamp, clearly labeled with flame and smoke rating, affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products. B. Protect insulation against dirt,water and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install Duct Insulation 232900-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for each service, and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All insulation types, together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and approved before any insulation is installed. B. A sample quantity of each type of insulation and each type of application shall be installed and approval secured prior to proceeding with the main body of the work. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Glass fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Knauf, Certain-Teed,Johns-Manville or Owens-Corning and shall have the same thermal properties, density, fire rating, vapor barrier, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. B. Adhesives shall be as manufactured by Minnesota Mining, Arabol, Benjamin-Foster, Armstrong or Insulmastic, Inc., and shall have the same adhesive properties, fire rating, vapor seal, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. C. Ceramic fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Primer Refractories, A.P. Green Refractories or approved equal. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions. B. All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. 3.02 EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION A. Fasten all longitudinal and circumferential laps with outward clinching staples 3" on center.On rectangular ducts over 24"wide apply as above and hold insulation in place on bottom side with mechanical pins and clips on 12" centers. B. Seal all seams and joints, fastener penetrations and other breaks in vapor barrier with 3 inch wide strips of white glass fabric embedded between two coats of vapor barrier mastic, Childers CP-30 or approved equal. Contractor may choose to seal all joints, fastener penetrations and other breaks in vapor barrier with 3 inch wide strips of Duct Insulation 232900-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• aluminum foil tape. Duct tape shall be UL listed 181 A-P/B-FX and UL 723. Shurtape No. AF-982 or approved equivalent. C. All external duct insulation shall be a minimum of Johns Manville Type 75 fiberglass duct wrap insulation with reinforced aluminum facing or approved equal. D. External duct wrap is required on all outside air ducts, return ducts, and supply air ducts that are not internally insulated. Duct wrap shall be provided as follows: 1. A minimum installed R-value of 6 when ducts are located in unconditioned spaces, such as ceiling plenum space. 2. A minimum installed R-value of 8 when ducts are located outside of the building. 3.03 EXPOSED DUCTWORK LOCATED INDOORS A. Round duct routed exposed shall be double wall with solid inner liner and 1-1/2" thick layer of fiberglass insulation as manufactured by United McGill Company model no. Acousti-27 or approved equal. 3.04 AIR DEVICE AND MISCELLANEOUS DUCT INSULATION A. The backside of all supply air devices shall be insulated with taped and sealed with external duct wrap equivalent to the insulation specified. B. The contractor shall install an additional layer of 2 inch thick external fiberglass duct wrap on any portion of the supply air, return air, outside air, or exhaust air system that has condensation forming during any period of operation. The insulation shall be taped and sealed and located until all evidence of the condensation had been eliminated at no additional cost to the owner. END OF SECTION 23 29 00 Duct Insulation 232900-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 23 5121 EXPANSION COMPENSATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Flexible pipe connections. B. Expansion joints and compensators C. Pipe loops, offsets, and swing joints. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 231400-Supports and Anchors. B. Section 235300- Refrigerant Piping. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide structural work and equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping. Verify that anchors, guides, and expansion joints provided, adequately protect system. B. Expansion Calculations: 1. Installation Temperature: 50 degrees F (10 degrees C). 2. Hot Water Heating: 210 degrees F (99 degrees C). 3. Domestic Hot Water: 140 degrees F (60 degrees C). 4. Safety Factor: 30 percent. C. Pipe sizes indicated are to establish a minimum quality of compensator. Refer to manufacturers' literature for model series for different pipe sizes. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Division 1. B. Product Data: 1. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, face-to-face length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per foot (meter) and per assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid structure, and total number of wires in braid. 2. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, and maximum expansion compensation. C. Design Data: Indicate selection calculations. Expansion Compensation 23 51 21-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and external controls. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Record actual locations of flexible pipe connectors, expansion joints, anchor, and guides. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Maintenance Data: Include adjustment instructions. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Design expansion compensation system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the state where the project is located. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, project and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1. B. Accept expansion joints on site in factory packing with shipping bars and positioning devices intact. Inspect for damage. C. Protect equipment from exposure by leaving factory coverings, pipe end protection, and packaging in place until installation. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Division 1. B. Warranty: Include coverage for leak free performance of packed expansion joints. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Division 1. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS Expansion Compensation 23 51 21-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• A. Steel Piping (Based on 2" Pipe): 1. Manufacturers: a. Amber/Booth Metal-Flex, Model Type SS-PM or FW b. Triplex, Model Flexonics Series 400M C. Mercer Rubber Company, Model BSS-EM (Mason Industries) 2. Inner Hose: Type 321, stainless steel, corrugated metal. 3. Exterior Sleeve: Type 321, single braided stainless steel. 4. Pressure Rating: 350 psig WOG and 70 degrees F. For 4 inch pipe-200 psig WOG and 70 degrees F. 5. Joint: Schedule 40 steel, threaded with male nipple and hex boss each end and Union. Flanged joints for pipe sizes 2% inch and larger. 6. Size: Use pipe sized units. 7. Maximum offset: 1/2 inch on each side of installed center line. 8. Application: Air handling units cooling and heating coils. B. Copper Piping (Based on 2" Pipe): 1. Manufacturers: a. Amber/Booth Metal-Flex, Model Type BR-SM b. Triplex, Model Flexonics Series 300 C. Mercer Rubber Company,Type BFF (Mason Industries) 2. Inner Hose: Corrugated Bronze 3. Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze. 4. Pressure Rating: 250 psig WOG and 70 degrees F. 5. Joint: Threaded with male nipple and hex boss each end with Union. Flanged joints for pipe sizes 2% inch and larger. 6. Size: Use pipe sized units. 7. Maximum offset: 1/2 inch on each side of installed center line. 8. Application: Air handling units cooling and heating coils. 2.02 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Bellows Type (Based on 4" Pipe): 1. Manufacturers: a. Amber/Booth, Style EB b. Triplex, Model Resistoflex R6905 C. Mercer Rubber Company, Style 803 or 805 (Mason Industries) 2. Body: Monel wire reinforced molded TFE teflon bellows, multiple arch. 3. Pressure Rating: 70 prig WSP and 250 degrees F (66 degrees C). 4. Maximum Compression: 1 inch. 5. Maximum Extension: 1 inch. 6. Maximum Offset: 1/2 inch. 7. Joint: ASA standard ductile iron flanges, integral molded gasket. 8. Size: Use pipe sized units. 9. Accessories: Control rod limit bolts. 10. Application: Steel piping 8 inch and under. 2.03 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS: Expansion Compensation 23 51 21-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• A. Bellows Type (Based on 4" Pipe): 1. Manufacturers: a. Amber/Booth, Style EA b. Triplex, Model Resistoflex R6904 C. Mercer Rubber Company, Style 802 (Mason Industries) 2. Body: Monel wire reinforced, molded TFE Teflon, bellows, multiple arch. 3. Working Pressure: 110 psi. 4. Maximum Temperature: 250 degrees F. 5. Maximum Compression and Elongation: 1/2 inch. 6. Maximum Offset: 1/4 inch. 7. Joint: ASA standard ductile iron flanges, integral molded gasket. 8. Size: Use pipe sized units, not pump connection size. 9. Accessories: Control rod limit bolts. 10. Application: All water pumps. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Pipe Alignment Guides to Direct Axial Movement: 1. Manufacturers: a. Triplex, Model Flexonics b. Metraflex, Style II 2. Two piece welded steel with shop paint, bolted, with spider to fit standard pipe, frame with four mounting holes, clearance for minimum 1 inch thick insulation, minimum 3 inch travel. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Construct spool pieces to exact size of flexible connection for future insertion. C. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration isolation. Provided line size flexible connectors. D. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end immediately adjacent to isolated equipment and anchor other end. Install in horizontal plane unless indicated otherwise. E. Provide miscellaneous metals to rigidly anchor pipe to building structure. Provide pipe guides so that movement takes place along axis of pipe only. Erect piping such that strain and weight is not on cast connections or apparatus. F. Provide support and equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping. Provide loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, or expansion joints where required. Expansion Compensation 23 51 21-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 3.02 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide inspection services by flexible pipe manufacturer's representative for final installing and certify installation is in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and connectors are performing satisfactorily. END OF SECTION 23 5121 Expansion Compensation 23 51 21-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11' C 1 �• 23 53 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 230500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL Provide for the systems as shown. Submit shop drawings of piping systems showing all traps, pipe sizes, and accessories; drawing to be marked "Approved", and signed by a representative of the Application Engineering Department of the condensing unit manufacturer. Pipe sizes shall be as recommended by unit manufacturer. Refer to piping schematic on drawings. 2.02 MATERIAL A. PIPE: Copper ACR tubing. B. FITTINGS: Wrought copper streamlined sweat fitting. C. SOLDER: Sil-Fos, except on valves use solder recommended by valve manufacturer. 2.03 ACCESSORIES All accessories shall be UL listed and rated in accordance with ARI Standard 710. A. On systems 7-1/2 tons and larger, each separate refrigerant circuit shall have a separate filter dryer. Each filter dryer shall have a replaceable core and a three valve bypass. The filter drier shall be full line size and installed in the refrigerant liquid line. The filter shall have a minimum 4-3/4 inches diameter shell with removable flange and gasket. Flange shall be tapped for 1/4 inch FPT access valve. Size filter-drier for maximum 2.0 psi pressure drop at evaporator operating temperature. Similar to Mueller Brass Company model Drymaster micro-guard refillable filter series SD-485 through SD19217 or Sporlan catch-all. B. On systems less than 7-1/2 tons, the filter dryer shall be the sealed type sizes as above. One drier per refrigerant circuit. Refrigerant Piping 235300-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. Liquid-Moisture Indicator shall be installed in liquid refrigerant line full line size similar to Mueller Brass Company model "Vuemaster" with soldered ends. D. Thermostatic expansion valve shall have adjustable super heat and be as manufactured by Sporlan. 2.04 EVACUATION Evacuate moisture completely by applying a commercial vacuum pump for a minimum of 24 hours. Moisture indicator shall indicate a completely moisture-free condition at time of final inspection. The vacuum pump shall run until the system indicates a maximum of 35 degrees FDB. The system shall be flushed with the operating refrigerant and the vacuum pump connected and rerun to repeat the evacuation. Evaluation shall be performed under supervision of the Engineer. 2.05 FREON AND OIL A. Contractor shall leave the refrigeration system with a full charge of freon and oil and shall be responsible for the maintenance of a full charge of freon and oil in the systems for a period of one year from date of acceptance. B. Should any leaks in the refrigeration system occur during the guarantee period, the Contractor shall eliminate such leaks and recharge system to a full charge of freon and oil at no cost to the Owner. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All equipment and piping shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions. A. All pipe joints and pipe fittings shall be properly cleaned prior to brazing. B. An inert gas purge (e.g. nitrogen) shall be used during brazing to prevent oxides, which can contaminate system. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements. END OF SECTION 23 53 00 Refrigerant Piping 235300-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 23 55 10 HYDRONIC PIPING ABOVE GRADE PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe and pipe fittings. B. Valves. C. Chilled water piping system. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 235121- Expansion Compensation. B. Section 231400-Supports and Anchors. C. Section 231900—System Identification & Pipe Marking D. Section 232400—Sound &Vibration Control. E. Section 232600- Piping Insulation. F. Section 235515 - Hydronic Specialties. G. Section 235511- Hydronic Piping Below Grade. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME Sec 9 -Welding and Brazing Qualifications. B. ANSI/ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 and 300. C. ANSI/ASME B31.9- Building Services Piping. D. ANSI/AWS A5.8- Brazing Filler Metal. E. ANSI/AWWA C110 - Ductile - Iron and Gray- Iron Fittings 3 in. through 48 in., for Water and Other Liquids. F. ASTM A53- Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. G. ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized), Welded and Seamless,for Ordinary Uses. Hydronic Piping Above Grade 2355 10-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• H. ASTM B32 -Solder Metal. I. ASTM B88-Seamless Copper Water Tube. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI/ASME 1331.9. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ANSI/ASME SEC 9. and applicable state labor regulations. C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ANSI/ASME SEC 9. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings,valves, and accessories. C. Include welders certification of compliance with ANSI/ASME SEC 9. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 1. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1. C. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 CHILLED WATER PIPING A. Steel Pipe:ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40, black. 1. Fittings: ANSI/ASTM 1316.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type fittings. 2. Joints: Screwed, or ANSI/AWS D1.1, welded. *** OR *** B. Copper Tubing: ASTM 688,Type K, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME 1316.23 cast brass of ANSI/ASME 1316.29 solder wrought Hydronic Piping Above Grade 2355 10-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• copper. 2. Joints:ANSI/AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze. 2.02 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS A. Steel Pipe:ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40 galvanized. 1. Fittings: Galvanized cast iron, or ANSI/ASTM B16.3 malleable iron. 2. Joints: Screwed, or grooved mechanical couplings. *** OR *** B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88,Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.23 cast brass, or ANSI/ASME B16.29 solder wrought copper. 2. Joints:ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA. 2.03 FLANGES, UNIONS,AND COUPLINGS A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 150 psig malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints. B. Pipe Size Over 2 Inches: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper piping; 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene bonded gasket. C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; C-shape elastomer composition sealing gasket for operating temperature range from -30 degrees F(-34 degrees C)to 230 degrees F(110 degrees C);steel bolts, nuts,and washers; galvanized couplings for galvanized pipe. Can be utilized only in mechanical rooms or cooling tower areas. 2.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-GATE VALVES A. Crane. B. Dezurik. C. Nibco. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.05 GATE VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, single wedge or disc,threaded ends. Hydronic Piping Above Grade 2355 10-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, single wedge, flanged ends. 2.06 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-GLOBE VALVES A. Nibco. B. Stockham. C. Dezurik. 2.07 GLOBE VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable stainless steel disc, screwed ends, with back seating capacity. B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged ends, renewable seat and disc. 2.08 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-BALL VALVES A. Nibco. B. Jamesbury. C. Dezurik. 2.09 BALL VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze two piece body, 600 PSI full port, stainless steel ball and stem, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, and balancing stops,threaded ends. B. Over 2 Inches:Cast steel body,chrome plated steel ball,teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle, or gear drive hand wheel for sizes 10 inches (250 mm) and over,flanged. C. Ball valves installed in insulated lines shall have stem extensions compatible with up to 2" of insulation. Extensions shall be non-metallic equal to Nibco "nib-seal". 2.10 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-PLUG COCKS A. Nibco. B. Jenkins. C. Dezurik. 2.11 PLUG COCKS Hydronic Piping Above Grade 235510-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non-lubricated, teflon packing, threaded ends, with one wrench operator for every ten plug cocks. B. Over 2 Inches: Cast iron body and plug, pressure lubricated,teflon packing,flanged ends, with wrench operator with set screw. 2.12 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Nibco. B. W ECO. C. Dezurik. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.13 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Iron body, aluminum bronze disc with a resilient replaceable seat for service up to 180 degrees F% lug ends, extended neck, and an infinite position lever handle with memory stop. Valve shall be rated at full working pressure with downstream flange removed in either direction. 2.14 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-SWING CHECK VALVES A. Nibco. B. Stockham. C. Dezurik. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.15 SWING CHECK VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze 45 degree swing disc, screwed ends. B. Over 2 Inches 50 mm: Iron body, bronze trim, 45 degree swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends. 2.16 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES A. Nibco. B. Mueller. C. Dezurik. Hydronic Piping Above Grade 2355 10-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.17 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES A. Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, aluminum bronze disc, screwed, wafer or flanged ends. 2.18 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-RELIEF VALVES A. Nibco. B. Jenkins. C. Dezurik. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.19 RELIEF VALVES A. Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and labeled. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. After completion,fill, clean, and treat systems. E. Provide extended necks for all vents,thermometer wells, pressure gauge wells, pet cocks and pete's plugs. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient. B. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space and other work. C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or Hydronic Piping Above Grade 2355 10-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• connected equipment. Refer to Section 235121. E. Provide clearance for installation of insulation, and access to valves and fittings. F. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 08305. G. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. H. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. I. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. J. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. B. Install unions downstream of valves, and at equipment or apparatus connections. C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe. D. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems,or vertical risers. E. Install plug or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. F. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of condenser and chilled water pumps. G. Use plug cocks for throttling service. Use non-lubricated plug cocks only when shut-off or isolating valves are also provided. H. Use only butterfly valves in condenser water systems for throttling and isolation service. I. Use lug end butterfly valves to isolate equipment. J. Provide 3/4 inch ball (drain) valves equal to Nibco T-585-70-HC at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment and pipe to nearest drain. K. Provide automatic air vents at all high points and air pockets in the system. 3.04 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING A. Drain piping from each unit shall be extended to the nearest floor drain or condensate drainage system. Drains shall be of the size indicated but not less than the full size of the Hydronic Piping Above Grade 2355 10-7 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• drain pan connections. B. Use plugged tees in lieu of elbows. C. Pipe shall be Schedule 40 galvanized with malleable iron screwed or type "L" copper fittings. D. Slope all drain lines 1/8" per foot, minimum. E. Provide auxiliary drain pan on all AHU's above ceiling with auxiliary drain line routed to discharge in visually prominent area. 3.05 PIPE FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION A. All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. B. Piping layout and installation shall be made in the most advantageous manner possible with respect to headroom, valve access, opening and equipment clearance, and clearance,from other work. Particular attention shall be given to piping in the vicinity of equipment; layout shall be made in such manner as to preserve maximum access to the various equipment parts for maintenance. C. All changes in directions shall be made with fittings; field bending and mitering of pipe is prohibited. D. Foreign made pipe, valves and fittings will not be acceptable. E. Air vents and air chambers shall be installed as hereinafter specified. 3.06 OFFSETS AND FITTINGS A. Due to the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offset fittings, etc. which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions affecting the work, and shall take such steps as may be required to meet such conditions. B. All piping shall be installed close to walls, ceilings and columns, (consistent with the proper space for covering, removal of pipe and special clearances), so as to occupy the minimum of space, and all offsets, fittings, etc., required shall be provided. 3.07 SECURING AND SUPPORTING A. All piping shall be adequately supported to line and grade, with due provisions for expansion and contraction. B. Piping shall be supported on approved clevis type, split ring, or trapeze type hangers properly connected to the structural members of the building. Hydronic Piping Above Grade 2355 10-8 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• C. All insulated piping shall be fitted with suitable steel protection saddles. D. Perforated bar hangers, straps, wire or chains will not be permitted. 3.08 ISOLATION VALVES A. All piping systems shall be provided with line size shut-off valves located at risers, at branch connections to mains and at other locations as indicated and required. 3.09 TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. During the progress of the work and upon completion, tests shall be made as specified herein and as required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction, including Inspectors, Owner or Architect. The Architect or duly authorized Construction Inspector shall be notified in writing at least 2 working days prior to each test or other Specification requirement which requires action on the part of the Construction Inspector. B. Tests shall be conducted as part of this work and shall include all necessary instruments, equipment, apparatus, and service as required to perform the tests with qualified personnel. Submit proposed test procedures, recording forms, and test equipment for approval prior to the execution of testing. C. Tests shall be performed before piping of various systems have been covered or furred- in. For insulated piping systems testing shall be accomplished prior to the application of insulation. D. All piping systems shall be tested and proved absolutely tight for a period of not less than 2 hours at a pressure of 150 psi(g)or 150%of design pressure,whichever is greater. Tests shall be witnessed by the Architect or an authorized representative and pronounced satisfactory before pressure is removed or any water drawn off. E. Leaks, damage or defects discovered or resulting from test shall be repaired or replaced to a like new condition. Leaking pipe joints, or defective pipe, shall be removed and replaced with acceptable materials. Test shall be repeated after repairs are completed and shall continue until such time as the entire test period expires without the discovery of any leaks. F. Wherever conditions permit, each piping system shall thereafter be subjected to its normal operating pressure and temperature for a period of no less than five 5 days. During that period, it shall be kept under the most careful observation. The piping systems must demonstrate the propriety of their installation by remaining absolutely tight during this period. 3.10 PIPE CLEANING AND STERILIZATION A. After piping systems have been pressure tested and approved for tightness,they shall be thoroughly cleaned and flushed using an approved pipe cleaning compound. Hydronic Piping Above Grade 2355 10-9 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. All temporary connections required for cleaning, purging and circulating are included in this Section. Provide suitable pipe bypasses at each coil and heat exchanger during this cleaning operation. All air vents, gauges, strainers, etc., valve connections in piping systems shall be blown clean after cleaning operation is completed. C. After cleaning, drain the system, fill with fresh water and flush thoroughly until clear water is obtained. Purge all air from the system with the installed manual and automatic air vents. END OF SECTION 23 55 10 Hydronic Piping Above Grade 235510-10 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 23 55 11 HYDRONIC PIPING BELOW GRADE PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe and pipe fittings. B. Valves. C. Chilled water piping system. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 235121- Expansion Compensation. B. Section 231400-Supports and Anchors. C. Section 231900—System Identification & Pipe Making D. Section 232400—Sound &Vibration Controls. E. Section 232600- Piping Insulation. F. Section 235515 - Hydronic Specialties. G. Section 235510- Hydronic Piping Above Grade. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME Sec 9 -Welding and Brazing Qualifications. B. ANSI/ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 and 300. C. ANSI/ASME B31.9- Building Services Piping. D. ANSI/AWS A5.8- Brazing Filler Metal. E. ASTM A53- Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. F. ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized), Welded and Seamless,for Ordinary Uses. G. ASTM B32 -Solder Metal. H. ASTM B88-Seamless Copper Water Tube. Hydronic Piping Below Grade 2355 11-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI/ASME 1331.9. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ANSI/ASME SEC 9. and applicable state labor regulations. C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ANSI/ASME SEC 9. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Division One. B. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings,valves, and accessories. C. Include welders certification of compliance with ANSI/ASME SEC 9. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division One. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Division One. C. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PRE-INSULATED PIPE A. Pipe shall be the pre-insulated type, as manufactured by Thermacor Process Inc. Perma Pipe, or"approved equal." All sections shall be factory fabricated to job dimensions with all fittings, anchors, and other accessories. B. Polyurethane foam insulation shall be injected into the annular space between carrier pipe and jacket with one shot to the thicknesses shown for the specific pipe size. Insulation shall be rigid, 90-95% closed cell polyurethane with a 2.5 to 3.5 pounds per cubic foot density and a coefficient of thermal conductivity (K Factor) of.14 at 50 degree F or.17 at 75 degree F and conform to HH-1-1751/4. C. Jackets for pre-insulated piping,including fittings,shall be HDPE in accordance with ASTM D1248, Type 3, Class C. For systems where the entire surface of the factory applied pipe insulation can be visually inspected prior to the application of the jacket, the minimum thickness of the jacket shall be 80 mils for pipe sizes 6" and below, 100 mils for sizes 8"- 12", 102 mils for 14"-20", and 150 mils 24" and larger. For systems manufactured by Hydronic Piping Below Grade 2355 11-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 1• injection of urethane foam into the annulus between the carrier pipe and jacket,thereby not allowing visual inspection of the entire insulation surface, jacket thickness shall be 50%greater than the above minimums. INSULATION THICKNESS Pipe Size (in.) Insulation Thickness (in.) Chilled Water Hot Water 1-8 1.0 1.0 10-12 1.0 1.5 14-36 1.5 2.0 D. Carrier pipe shall be standard weight, carbon steel, seamless or ERW,ASTM A-106,ASTM A-S3, Grade B. All joints shall be butt-welded for 2 %" and greater, and socket or butt- welded for 2"and below. Pipe fittings shall be forged, long radius bends, beveled for butt welding, having a wall thickness equal to the pipe. E. Anchors shall be pre-insulated and jacketed at the factory and provided at locations shown on the contract drawings. Factory anchors shall be encased in concrete,according to the manufacturers' recommendations, keyed into undisturbed soil. Manufacturer shall provide expansion pillows at expansion bends and include details of thickness,length,and location in data submitted for approval. Expansion pillows and anchors are not required for chilled water systems. F. Fittings shall be field insulated with liquid urethane foam insulation,jacketed with a PVC fitting cover and wrapped with polyethylene backed, pressure sensitive butyl rubbertape, pressure sensitive PVC tape. G. Underground systems shall be buried in a trench not less than two (2) feet deeper than the top of the pipe and not less than twelve inches wider than the combined O.D. of all piping systems. All backfill material shall be cleaned bank sand to a minimum thickness of 24 inches over the top of the jacket to meet H-20 highway loading. All piping will be pressure tested for 150 psi for 24 hours prior to cover-up. H. A representative of the manufacturer shall be present during critical periods of installation and testing, to verify that the installation is being made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 All pipes shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Contractor's price shall include all items required as per Hydronic Piping Below Grade 2355 11-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• manufacturer's requirements. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. After completion,fill, clean, and treat systems. E. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Architect. F. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. G. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. H. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. I. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe. J. Use plug cocks for throttling service. Use non-lubricated plug cocks only when shut-off or isolating valves are also provided. K. Provide 3/4 inch gate drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. Pipe to nearest drain. 3.04 PIPE FABRICATION A. All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Piping layout and installation shall be made in the most advantageous manner possible with respect to valve access and clearance from other work. B. All changes in directions shall be made with fittings; field bending and mitering of pipe is prohibited. C. Piping shall be carefully sloped so as to eliminate traps and pockets. D. Air vents shall be installed. E. Where pipes change size eccentric fittings shall be used to prevent the pocketing of air. F. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. Hydronic Piping Below Grade 23 55 11-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• G. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. 3.05 OFFSETS AND FITTINGS Due to the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offset fittings, etc. which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the site and conditions affecting the work, and shall take such steps as may be required to meet such conditions. 3.06 PIPE SLEEVES A. All pipes passing through masonry and concrete construction shall be fitted with sleeves. B. Each sleeve shall extend through the respective floor or wall and shall project 3 inches above finished floor line. Sleeves shall be two pipe sizes larger. Sleeves shall be made of galvanized steel pipe. The annular space between pipes and sleeves shall be permanently sealed with two hour rated fire caulking. 3.07 ISOLATION VALVES All piping systems shall be provided with line size shut-off valves located at branch connections to mains and at other locations as indicated and required. 3.08 AUTOMATIC VENT VALVES Automatic vent valves shall be installed at the high point and at any other air pockets of all closed circulating piping systems. 3.09 TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. During the progress of the work and upon completion, tests shall be made as specified herein and as required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction, including Inspectors, Owner or Architect. The Architect or duly authorized Construction Inspector shall be notified in writing at least 2 working days prior to each test or other Specification requirement which requires action on the part of the Construction Inspector. B. Tests shall be conducted as part of this work and shall include all necessary instruments, equipment, apparatus, and service as required to perform the tests with qualified personnel. Submit proposed test procedures, recording forms, and test equipment for approval prior to the execution of testing. C. Tests shall be performed before piping of various systems have been covered or furred- in. For insulated piping systems testing shall be accomplished prior to the application of insulation. D. All piping systems shall be tested and proved absolutely tight for a period of not less than 24 hours at a pressure of 150 psi(g) or 150% of design pressure, whichever is greater. Hydronic Piping Below Grade 2355 11-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• Tests shall be witnessed by the Architect or an authorized representative and pronounced satisfactory before pressure is removed or any water drawn off. E. Leaks, damage or defects discovered or resulting from test shall be repaired or replaced to a like new condition. Leaking pipe joints, or defective pipe, shall be removed and replaced with acceptable materials. Test shall be repeated after repairs are completed and shall continue until such time as the entire test period expires without the discovery of any leaks. F. Wherever conditions permit, each piping system shall thereafter be subjected to its normal operating pressure and temperature for a period of no less than five 5 days. During that period, it shall be kept under the most careful observation. The piping systems must demonstrate the propriety of their installation by remaining absolutely tight during this period. 3.10 PIPE CLEANING AND STERILIZATION A. After piping systems have been pressure tested and approved for tightness,they shall be thoroughly cleaned and flushed using an approved pipe cleaning compound. B. All temporary connections required for cleaning, purging and circulating are included in this Section. Provide suitable pipe bypasses at each coil and heat exchanger during this cleaning operation. All air vents, gauges, strainers, etc., and valve connections in piping systems shall be blown clean after cleaning operation is completed. C. After cleaning, drain the system, fill with fresh water and flush thoroughly until clear water is obtained. Purge all air from the system with the installed manual and automatic air vents. END OF SECTION 23 55 11 Hydronic Piping Below Grade 2355 11-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 23 55 15 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Expansion tanks. B. Air vents. C. Air separators. D. Strainers. E. Pump suction fittings. F. Combination fittings. G. Flow indicators, controls, meters. H. Relief valves. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 235121- Expansion Compensation. B. Section 235510- Hydronic Piping Above Grade C. Section 231400-Supports and Anchors. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI/ASME Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code Section 8D for manufacture of tanks. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer throughout. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1. B. Include installation instruction,assembly views, lubrication instructions,and replacement parts list. Hydronic Specialties 2355 15-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 1. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1. 1.07 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide one extra 45 gallon drum of propylene glycol under provisions of Division 1. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-DIAPHRAGM-TYPE EXPANSION TANKS A. Bell and Gossett. B. TACO. C. Wessels Co. D. John Wood 2.02 DIAPHRAGM-TYPE EXPANSION TANKS A. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ANSI/ASME Code; supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 125 psig, with flexible EPDM diaphragm sealed into tank, and steel legs or saddles. B. Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting,tank drain; pre-charge to 12 psig. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-AIR VENTS A. Armstrong. B. ITT. C. Bell and Gossett. 2.04 AIR VENTS A. Manual Type: Short vertical sections of 2 inch diameter pipe to form air chamber, with 1/8 inch brass needle valve at top of chamber. B. Float Type: Brass or semi-steel body, copper float, stainless steel valve and valve seat; suitable for system operating temperature and pressure; with isolating valve. C. Washer Type: Brass with hydroscopic fiber discs, vent ports, adjustable cap for manual shut-off, and integral spring loaded ball check valve. Hydronic Specialties 2355 15-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-AIR SEPARATORS A. Bell and Gossett. B. McDonald Miller. C. TACO. 2.06 AIR SEPARATORS A. Dip Tube Fitting: For 125 psig operating pressure; to prevent free air collected in boiler from rising into system. B. In-line Air Separators: Cast iron for sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller, or steel for sizes 2 inch and larger; tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ANSI/ASME Code; for 125 psig operating pressure. C. Air Elimination Valve: Bronze, float operated,for 125 psig operating pressure. D. Combination Air Separators/Strainers: Steel, tested and stamped in accordance with Section 8D of ANSI/ASME Code, for 125 psig operating pressure, with galvanized steel integral strainer with 3/16 inch perforations,tangential inlet and outlet connections, and internal stainless steel air collector tube. 2.07 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-STRAINERS A. Armstrong. B. Bell and Gossett. C. Mueller Steam Specialty. 2.08 STRAINERS A. Size 2 inch and Under:Screwed brass or iron bodyfor 175 prig working pressure,Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. B. Size 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure,Y pattern with 3/64 inch stainless steel perforated screen. C. Size 6 inch and Larger: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, basket pattern with 1/8 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 2.09 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-PUMP SUCTION FITTINGS A. Bell and Gossett. Hydronic Specialties 235515-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. TACO. 2.10 SUCTION FITTINGS A. Fitting: Angle pattern, cast-iron body, threaded for 2 inch and smaller, flanged for 2-1/2 inch and larger, rated for 175 psig working pressure, with inlet vanes, cylinder strainer with 3/16 inch diameter openings, disposable fine mesh strainer to fit over cylinder strainer, and permanent magnet located in flow stream and removable for cleaning. B. Accessories: Adjustable foot support, blowdown tapping in bottom, gage tapping in side. 2.11 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-COMBINATION PUMP DISCHARGE VALVES A. Bell and Gossett. B. TACO. 2.12 COMBINATION PUMP DISCHARGE VALVES A. Valves:Straight or angle pattern,flanged cast-iron valve body with bolt-on bonnet for 175 psig(1200 kPa) operating pressure, non-slam check valve with spring- loaded bronze disc and seat, stainless steel stem, and calibrated adjustment permitting flow regulation. 2.13 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-FLOW INDICATORS A. Bell and Gossett. B. Watson McDaniel. 2.14 FLOW INDICATORS A. Brass construction, threaded for insertion into piping system, packless, with paddle with removable segments, vapor proof electrical compartment with switches. 2.15 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-FLOW CONTROLS A. Bell and Gossett. B. ITT Hoffman. C. TACO. 2.16 FLOW CONTROLS A. Construction: Brass or bronze body with union on inlet, and outlet, temperature and pressure test plug on inlet and outlet blowdown/backflush drain. B. Calibration: Control flow within 5 percent of selected rating, over operating pressure Hydronic Specialties 235515-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• range of 10 times the minimum pressure required for control, maximum minimum pressure 3.5. C. Control Mechanism: Stainless steel or nickel plated brass piston or regulator cup, operating against stainless steel helical or wave formed spring. D. Accessories: In-line strainer on inlet and ball valve on outlet. 2.17 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-FLOW METERS A. Bell and Gossett. B. ITT Hoffman. C. TACO. 2.18 FLOW METERS A. Orifice principle by-pass circuit with direct reading gage, soldered or flanged piping connections for 125 psig working pressure, with shut off valves, and drains and vent connections. B. Cast iron, wafer type, orifice insert flow meter for 250 psig working pressure, with read-out valves equipped with integral check valves with gasketed caps. C. Calibrated, plug type balance valve with precision machined orifice, readout valves equipped with integral check valves and gasketed caps, calibrated nameplate and indicating pointer. D. Cast iron or bronze, globe style, balance valve with handwheel with vernier type ring setting and memory stop, drain connection, readout valves equipped with integral check valves and gasketed caps. E. Portable meter consisting of case containing two, 3 percent accuracy pressure gages with 0-135 inches and 0-60 feet pressure ranges for 500 psig (3 450 kPa) maximum working pressure, color coded hoses for low and high pressure connections, and connectors suitable for connection to read-out valves. 2.19 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-RELIEF VALVES A. Bell and Gossett. B. McDonnell-Miller. C. TACO. 2.20 RELIEF VALVES Hydronic Specialties 2355 15-5 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• A. Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities ASME certified and labelled. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended performance. B. Support tanks inside building from building structure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Where large air quantities can accumulate, provide enlarged air collection standpipes. D. Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated on details and drawings. E. For automatic air vents in ceiling spaces or other concealed locations, provide vent tubing to nearest drain. F. Provide air separator on suction side of system circulation pump and connect to expansion tank. G. Provide drain valve and hose connection on strainer blow down connection. H. Provide pump suction fitting on suction side of base mounted centrifugal pumps. Remove temporary strainers after cleaning systems. I. Provide combination pump discharge valve on discharge side of base mounted centrifugal pumps. J. Support pump fittings with floor mounted pipe and flange supports. K. Provide relief valves on pressure tanks, low pressure side of reducing valves, heat exchangers, and expansion tanks. L. Select system relief valve capacity so that it is greater than make-up pressure reducing valve capacity. Select equipment relief valve capacity to exceed rating of connected equipment. M. Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain. N. Where one line vents several relief valves, make cross sectional area equal to sum of individual vent areas. END OF SECTION 23 55 15 Hydronic Specialties 2355 15-6 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 1• 23 55 40 HVAC PUMPS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Close coupled pumps. B. Base mounted pumps. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 231700— Motors and Motor Controllers B. Section 232400—Sound &Vibration Control. C. Section 232600- Piping Insulation. D. Section 235510- Hydronic Piping Above Grade 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/UL 778- Motor Operated Water Pumps. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture, assembly, and field performance of pumps with minimum five years experience. B. Alignment: Base mounted pumps shall be aligned by qualified millwright and alignment certified. C. Impellers: All impellers shall be dynamically balanced. D. The mechanical contractor shall be responsible for accurately checking all pumping heads, based upon the actual piping and equipment installation. The contractor shall be responsible for furnishing pumps and motors of proper sizes suitable for the actual installation. Do not provide pumps with capacities less than the amount indicated on the drawings. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Submit certified pump curves showing performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. HVAC Pumps 235540-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 1• C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division 1. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1. B. Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 1. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1. 1.08 EXTRA PARTS A. Provide one set of replacement mechanical seals for each size of pump. After the pumps are in operation for ninety days, the Contractor shall check the seals and replace any that are defective. If the replacement seals are not used during the 90 day operational period,they shall be delivered to the Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Taco. B. Aurora. C. Bell and Gossett. D. Armstrong E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.02 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. Balance: Rotating parts, statically and dynamically. B. Construction:To permit servicing without breaking piping or motor connections. C. Pump Motors: Operate at 1750 rpm unless specified otherwise. Provide totally enclosed motors when mounted outdoors. Refer to Section 231700. D. Pump Connections: Flanged, for pipe size two inches and larger. Provide union for pipe sizes less than two inches. HVAC Pumps 235540-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 1• E. Critical speed of each pump shall be at least 115% of the running speed listed in the schedule. 2.03 CLOSE COUPLED PUMPS A. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, close coupled, radially split casing, for 125 psig maximum working pressure. B. Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage ports, renewable bronze casing wearing rings, seal flush connection, drain plug,flanged suction and discharge. C. Impeller: Bronze,fully enclosed, keyed to motor shaft extension. D. Shaft: Stainless steel. E. Seal: Packing gland with minimum four rings graphite impregnated packing and bronze lantern rings, 230 degrees F (110 degrees C) maximum continuous operating temperature. 2.04 BASE MOUNTED PUMPS A. Type: Horizontal shaft,single stage,direct connected, radially split casing,for 125 psig maximum working pressure. B. Motors: Indoor applications shall have open drip proof motors. Outdoor applications shall have TEFC motors. C. Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage ports, renewable bronze casing wearing rings, seal flush connection, drain plug,flanged suction and discharge. D. Impeller: Bronze,fully enclosed, keyed to shaft. E. Bearings: Grease or Permanently lubricated roller or ball bearings, 40,000 hour minimum life. F. Shaft: Alloy steel with stainless steel shaft sleeve. G. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat, 225 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature. H. Drive: Flexible coupling with coupling guard. I. Baseplate: Cast iron or fabricated steel with integral drain rim. Galvanized when located outdoors. J. For pumps driven by motors 25 horsepower and larger, the steel base shall be fabricated of structural shapes and formed steel sections. The main structural HVAC Pumps 235540-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 1• member and formed steel section shall have a depth of at least 1/12 the overall length of the base but not less than 4 inches. The base shall be filled with concrete or grout after installation. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install pumps in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide access space around pumps for service. Provide no less than minimum as recommended by manufacturer. C. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. D. Pumps shall be free of flashing and cavitation at all flow rates from 25% to 125% of design flow under the suction conditions of the pump installation. E. The impeller selected for compliance with design requirements shall not exceed 85% of cutwater diameter for the selected pump casing size. This shall be clearly certified on the Shop Drawing submittal. F. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. For close coupled or base mounted pumps, provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge lines. G. Provide line sized shut-off valve and strainer on pump suction, and line sized soft seat check valve and balancing valve on pump discharge. H. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings. I. Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to and discharging into floor drains. J. Lubricate pumps before start-up. K. Install close coupled and base mounted pumps on concrete base, with anchor bolts, set and level, and grout in place. L. Qualified millwright shall check, align, and certify base mounted pumps prior to start-up. END OF SECTION 23 55 40 HVAC Pumps 235540-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 23 55 46 CHILLED AND HOT WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods,Section 23 05 00,are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section,with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work Included: Perform water analysis and provide all water treatment products, holding reservoirs,equipment and labor for testing,cleaning,flushing and dispensing products to control water quality for each system specified hereinafter as follows: 1. Chilled water system. 2. Hot water system. B. Chemicals: Provide, at no additional cost to the Owner, all chemicals required for operating and testing all water treatment systems prior to and for three months after acceptance by the Owner. C. Instructions: Provide operating and maintenance instructions for each water treatment system; include one set in each Owner's Manual and deliver one set to Owner's operating personnel. D. Testing Equipment and Reagents: Furnish suitable water treatment testing equipment for each system, complete with apparatus and reagents necessary for operation prior to and for three months after acceptance by the Owner. E. Service Representative: Furnish the services of a qualified service representative to instruct Owner's operating personnel in proper operation and maintenance of water treatment equipment, systems and tests required. Service representative shall return to the site bi-weekly during first 2 months of operation and monthly during the remainder of the guarantee period. At such time,service representative shall check and adjust water treatment system operation,check efficiency of chemicals and chemical applications,and instruct and advise operating personnel. F. Replacement and Rework: Replace defective or nonconforming materials and equipment with new materials and equipment at no additional cost to the Owner for 1 year after successful start- up of the system.All warranty work shall be FOB as installed at the project site. 1. Guarantee: Provide system produced by manufacturer who is willing to execute the required guarantee. 2. Agreement to Maintain: Provide system produced by manufacturer who is willing to execute (with the Owner) the required agreement for continued maintenance of the system. Chilled and Hot Water Treatment Systems 23 55 46-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: The Contractor for work under this Section shall have: 1. Research and development facilities. 2. Regional laboratories capable of making water analysis. 3. A service department and qualified technical service representative located within a reasonable distance of the project site. 4. Service representatives who are Registered Engineers or factory-certified technicians with not less than 5 years of water treatment experience with the water treatment system manufacturer. B. Packaging and Labeling: Supply water treatment chemicals in metal drums, fiber drums with plastic liners, or plastic lined "liqui-paks" as best suited to the materials. Paper bags or unlined cardboard cartons will not be acceptable. Use only chemicals in domestic water systems, and all coincides regardless of where used,which are registered with the U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) or the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and which are labeled as required by law. C. Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products which have been tested, listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and which comply with National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA)standards. D. Chemical Standards: Provide chemical products acceptable under state and local pollution control or other governing regulations. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Test reports: Submit test reports certified by an officer of the firm, on water treatment company letterheads, of samples of each treated water system specified. Comply with ASTM D 596 for reporting. Indicate the ASTM best methods for each test. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each water treatment system.Show wiring, piping and tubing sizes,fittings,accessories,valves and connections. C. Guarantee: Submit written guarantee, signed by the Manufacturer and countersigned by the Installer and Contractor, agreeing to adjust or replace the chemicals in the systems as required to achieve the required performance, during a 1-year period following the final start-up or the continued operation of the chillers. D. Agreement to Maintain: Prior to the time of final acceptance, the Manufacturer of the chilled water treating system shall submit four copies of an "Agreement for Continued Service and the Owner's possible acceptance." Offer terms and conditions for furnishing chemicals and providing continued testing and equipment for a 1-year period with option for renewal of the Agreement by Owner. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Water Analysis: Determine which chemicals to use from the results of a water sample analysis Chilled and Hot Water Treatment Systems 23 55 46-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• taken from the building site by the system manufacturer. Provide ingredients necessary to achieve the desired water conditions. B. Pre-Treatment: Treat water piping systems with chemicals to remove and permit flushing of mill scale, oil, grease and other foreign matter. Chemicals shall be equal to Nalco 2578 prepping compound. C. FDA and USDA Approval: Use only FDA and USDA-approved products in system with direct connection to domestic water systems. D. Governing Laws: Ensure that neither products,waste,blow-down nor other effluents violate local, state, EPA,or other agency regulations in effect in the project area. 2.02 CHILLED AND HOT WATER SYSTEMS A. Chemicals: Provide water treatment products which contain inhibitors that perform the following: 1. Form a protective film to prevent corrosion and scale formation; 2. Scavenge oxygen and protect against scale; 3. Remain stable throughout operating temperature range,and; 4. Are compatible with pump seals and other elements in the system. 5. The inhibitor shall be a boron-nitrate corrosion inhibitor compound,equal to Nalco 2534. B. Equipment: For each system, provide a 5-gallon filter feeder constructed of materials which are impervious to the products dispensed. Feeder shall be designed for not less than 200-psig operating pressure. Filter feeder shall be as manufactured by efficiency Dynamics Model FF-50 or approved equal. C. Test Kit: Provide test kit and reagents for determining proper water conditions. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING SYSTEMS PREPARATION A. General: After piping systems are erected and proven free of leaks,administer chemicals required for preparation treatment and flushing. Apply chemicals for the time period and in the concentration recommended by the water treatment manufacturer for this portion of the work. B. Testing: Perform test procedures and submit a written report of test conditions and results to the Engineer. If test results are unsatisfactory, repeat preparation treatment as necessary to achieve test results approved by the Owner's insurance carrier and the Engineer. 3.02 FLUSHING A. Drain preparation and boil out products from the systems. Flush with clean water until system tests prove systems are free of preparation and boilout products and other contaminants prior to administering system water treatment as specified hereinbefore. 3.03 CHILLED AND HOT WATER SYSTEMS A. Treatment: Treat initial water charge to water system,after system has been flushed and prepped, to achieve a water quality as specified. Chilled and Hot Water Treatment Systems 23 55 46-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• B. Start-up Procedures: During water system start-up,operate water treating system (after charging with specified chemicals) to maintain the required steady-state characteristics of water. Demonstrate system operation to Owner's operating personnel. C. Reports: Prepare certified test report for each required water performance characteristic.Comply with the following ASTM standard,where applicable: 1. D859-Tests for Silica in Water and Water Waste. 2. D1067-Tests for Acidity or Alkalinity of Water. 3. D1068-Tests for Iron in Water and Waste Water. 4. D1126-Tests for Hardness in Water. 5. D1128-Identification of Types of Microorganisms and Microscopic Matter in Water and Waste Water. 6. D3370-Sampling Water. D. Water Chemistry: Where water chemistry substantiates that pH control is not necessary,chemical fee shall be based on water makeup qualities. Water analysis shall be based on the full parameters of operation, and all possible water supplies. Total hardness and "M" alkalinity of the makeup water will be the determining factor along with the technical limitations of the inhibitors. 3.04 PERSONNEL TRAINING A. Operator Training: Train Owner's personnel in use and operation of heating water, chilled water treating systems including preparation of chemical solution reservoir. A Program Administration Manual shall be furnished encompassing all systems in this section of the Specifications. END OF SECTION 23 SS 46 Chilled and Hot Water Treatment Systems 23 55 46-4 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 23 58 54 "DX" FAN COIL UNIT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section 230500, are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document. 1.02 SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FAN COIL UNITS Fan coil units shall be factory built, manufactured as scheduled on drawings. Carrier,York,Trane or McQuay shall be considered as equal, if they comply with the specification and schedule. Special Note: Contractor shall field verify exact clearances required for air handling units. Units shall be field located as required and shop drawings shall indicate final location for approval by Architect/Engineer. A. Furnish and install fan coil units of the type, capacities, ratings and drive motor horsepower shown on the drawings. B. Units shall be factory fabricated, draw-thru type, and shall have fan section, cooling coil section, condensate drain pan, adjustable blower drive with motor on resilient mounted base, vee-belts with guard, filter section, and mixing box (if scheduled) assembled as integrated air handling units. C. REQUIREMENTS: 1. Mill-galvanized steel, rigidly framed, braced, and reinforced; access panels each side of unit; minimum panel ga. - 18; minimum weight formed framing member 14 ga. 2. Fan section, cooling coil section, and outlet frame throats shall be internally insulated at the factory with 1"thick,3/4 PCF density, Neoprene coated fiberglass cemented in place with water-proof adhesive, having fire-retardant characteristics in accordance with NFPA 90A. 3. Drain pan shall be not lighter than 14 ga.; extend completely under the coil section and be all-galvanized,foam insulated pan with drain connections. 4. When the fan coil unit is installed above an accessible ceiling, the unit shall incorporate a secondary drain pan. The secondary pan shall be fabricated from galvanized sheet metal, 16 gauge minimum with cross breaking sloped towards a DX Fan Coil Unit 235854-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• drain. The sides shall be a minimum 2" tall and the corners shall be soldered watertight. The top edge shall have a 1/4" hem to provide additional rigidity and the secondary pan shall be supported at a minimum of six points. The pan shall extend on all sides a minimum of 3" beyond the sides of the unit casing. Route the secondary drain piping to a conspicuous location or install a float switch at the low point in the secondary pan. The secondary pan should be sloped a minimum of 1/8" per foot and supported so that the unit is not in contact with the bottom of the secondary pan. 5. The fan section, including wheels, shafts, bearings, drive, etc., shall be statically and dynamically balanced as an assembly, and the shaft shall not pass through the first critical speed,while accelerating from rest to operating speed. Submittal data shall state the first critical shaft speed. Shaft bearings shall be of vacuum de-gassed steel, and shall be selected for 200,000 hours average life. 6. Coil shall be as hereinafter specified. 2.02 COILS A. Cooling coils shall be cartridge type and, when mounted in air handling units, shall be removable from either end. Coils shall be constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins and shall be designed for even distribution of air across the face of the coils; air shall not pass around coil frames: Coils shall have same end connection for DX or chilled water piping. B. DX refrigerant coils shall be counter-flow refrigerant to air, shall have inlet and outlet connections permanently marked shall have thermostatic expansion valves with adjustable super heat. C. Maximum face velocity across cooling coils shall be 500 FPM, unless noted otherwise on schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 All HVAC equipment shall be installed as per manufacturers printed installation instructions. 3.02 All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements. END OF SECTION 23 58 54 DX Fan Coil Unit 235854-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• 23 58 55 APPLIED AIR HANDLING UNIT PART1- GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Applied Air Handling Units. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 230500—Basic Materials and Methods B. Section 235121—Expansion Compensation C. Section 231700—Motors and Motor Controllers D. Section 232400—Sound and Vibration Control E. Section 232900—Duct Insulation F. Section 224100—Plumbing Piping and Valves G. Section 238900—Metal Ductwork H. Section 238600—Power Ventilators I. Section 239100—Ductwork Accessories 1.03 REFERENCES A. AMCA Publication 99 -Standards Handbook. B. AMCA Publication 611 -Certified Ratings Program -Airflow Measurement Performance C. AMCA Standard 500-D- Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating. D. ANSI/ABMA Standard 9- Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. E. ANSI/AMCA Standard 204- Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans. F. ANSI/AMCA Standard 610- Laboratory Methods of Testing Airflow Measuring Stations for Rating. G. ANSI/AHRI Standard 410- Forced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils. H. ANSI/AHRI Standard 430-Central Station Air Handling Units. I. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 52.2- Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size. Applied Air Handling Unit 235855-1 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• J. ANSI/ASHARE Standard 62.1-Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. K. ANSI/ASHARE Standard 90.1- Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. L. ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. M. ANSI/UL 900-Standard for Safety Air Filter Units. N. AHRI Standard 260-Sound rating of Ducted Air Moving and Conditioning Equipment. O. ASHRAE Standard 111- Measurement,Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building HVAC Systems. P. ASTM B117-Standard Practice for Operation Salt Spray Apparatus. Q. ASTM C1071-Thermal and Acoustic Insulation (Mineral Fiber, Duct Lining Material). R. ASTM C1338-Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Material and Facings. S. ASTM E477-Standard Test Method for Measure Acoustical and Airflow Performance of Duct Liner T. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code U. NFPA 90A-Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems. V. UL 1995-Standard for Safety Heating and Cooling Equipment 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops and selection procedures in accordance with current AHRI Standard 410. B. Air handling units shall be rated in accordance with AHRI Standard 430 for airflow, static pressure, and fan speed performance. C. Airflow monitoring station: Certify airflow measurement station performance in accordance with AMCA 611. 1.05 SUBMITTALS Applied Air Handling Unit 235855-2 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022 11' C 1 �• A. No equipment shall be fabricated or delivered until the receipt of approved shop drawings from the Owner or Owner's approved representative. B. AHU manufacturer shall provide the following information with each shop drawing/product data submission: 1. Dimensioned arrangement drawings for each AHU including a plan and elevation view of the assembled unit with overall dimensions, lift points, unit shipping split locations and dimensions, installation and operating weights, and installation, operation and service clearances. 2. All electrical, piping, and ductwork requirements, including sizes, connection locations, and connection method recommendations. 3. Each component of the unit shall be identified and mechanical specifications shall be provided for unit and accessories describing construction, components, and options. 4. All performance data, including capacities and airside and waterside pressure drops,for components. 5. Fan curves shall be provided for fans with the design operating points indicated. Data shall be corrected to actual operating conditions, temperatures, and altitudes. 6. For units utilizing multiple fans in a fan section, a fan curve shall be provided showing the performance of the entire bank of fans at design conditions. In addition, a fan curve shall be provided showing the performance of each individual fan in the bank of fans at design conditions.Also a fan curve shall be provided showing the performance of the bank of fans, if one fan is down. The percent redundancy of the bank of fans with one fan down shall be noted on the fan curve or in the tabulated fan data. 7. A filter schedule must be provided for each air handling unit supplied by the air handling unit manufacturer. Schedule shall detail unit tag, unit size, corresponding filter section location within the AHU,filter Applied Air Handling Unit 235855-3 Police Training Academy-#21086 10/10/2022